2025 Windrose Technology Inc Maintenance Manual
—
This maintenance manual provides Windrose information on the specifications, diagnostics, circuits, repairs, and maintenance services.
2025Windrose Technology Inc. Copyright The deadline for the information is2025,5.
1Introduction
1.1 How to Use This Manual 1.1.1 General Description
1.1.1.1 Overview
The Service Manual for WH12 Series Vehicles is developed to ensure that the maintenance technicians can gain a comprehensive understanding of Windrose commercial vehicles, and maintenance technicians' vehicle identification and maintenance abilities can be enhanced. This manual introduces the maintenance and repair of Windrose commercial vehicles in a systematic manner, especially the common fault phenomena, fault detection methods, removal and installation steps, technical requirements of maintenance, etc. of the powertrain, chassis, frame and body interiors and exteriors. Please carefully read this manual when maintaining the Windrose commercial vehicles. You should be familiar with the performance and principles of the vehicles, and perform maintenance following the steps and standards described in this manual to ensure the safety and effectiveness of the maintenance. Windrose will provide updates and revisions to this manual as needed.Your suggestions and corrections would be appreciated. Keep in mind that the information in this manual may differ from the actual situation as Windrose commercial vehicles have been improved continuously.
| English abbreviation | Description |
|---|---|
| IP | Instrument panel |
| BTMS | Battery thermal management system |
| CMS | Camera monitor system |
| VTDR | Vehicle traveling data recorder |
| T-GW | TBOX and gateway |
| SSM | Sleeper switch module |
| GSM | Gear shift module |
| DCM | Door control module |
| AVAS | Acoustic vehicle alerting system |
| UDS | Unified diagnostic service |
| TPMS | Tire pressure monitoring system |
| TESD | Tire emergency safety device |
| TWI | Tire wear indicator |
| ACC | Adaptive cruise control |
| AEB | Automatic emergency braking |
| LKA | Lane keeping assist |
| LCC | Lane centering control |
| LDW | Lane departure warning |
| BSD | Blind spot detection |
| DOW | Door open warning |
| TSR | Traffic sign recognition |
| CSW | Curve speed warning |
| IHBC | Intelligent high beam control |
| EHPS | Electro-hydraulic power steering |
| ABS | Anti-lock braking system |
| EBD | Electronic brake force distribution |
| ESC | Electronic stability control |
| EBS | Electronic braking system |
| HSA | Hill-start assist |
| ASR | Acceleration slip regulation |
| EPB | Electronic parking brake |
| ECAS | Electronically controlled air suspension |
| CDC | Cockpit domain control unit |
| BDCU | Body domain control unit |
| NFC | NFC antenna (card swipe) |
| AR-HUD | Augmented reality head-up display |
1.1.2 Maintenance Information Instructions 1.1.2.1 Definition of Abbreviations Used in the Manual

| English abbreviation | Description |
|---|---|
| IVI | In-vehicle infotainment |
| CAR | Car control screen |
| IPC | Instrument panel cluster |
| PWC | Phone wireless charging |
| DMS | Driver monitoring system |
| ESCL | Electronic steering column lock |
| SJB_UP | Body Intelligent Power Distribution Box |
| SJB_UN | Chassis Intelligent Power Distribution Box |
| IBS | Intelligent battery sensor |
| NCM | Ternary lithium battery |
| LFP | Lithium iron phosphate battery |
| VDC | Power Domain Controller |
| MCU | Electric Drive Axle Control Unit |
| TCU | Transmission Control Unit |
1.1.2.2 Description of Arrow Symbols Used in This Manual
Legend 1. Indication arrow 4. Part number notation 2. Moving direction arrow 5. Partial enlargement frame 3. Rotation direction arrow 6. Fastener removal and installation sequence notation

| Position | Definition | Character | Explain |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1-3 | World Manufacturer Identifier | 1W9 | Windrose Technology Inc |
| 4-8 | Vehicle Description Section | 4RBCD | Vehicle Configuration |
| 9 | Check Digit | 8 | Check Digit |
| 10 | Model Year | R | The Year 2024 |
| 11 | Plant of Manufacture | R | Windrose Technology Inc |
| 12-14 | WMI | 698 | Assigned by SAE |
| 15-17 | Sequentially Assigned | 001 | Serial Number |
| Positions 4 -8 | 4RBCD | 4RBCF | 4RACC |
|---|---|---|---|
| Make | Windrose Technology | Windrose Technology | Windrose Technology |
| Line or model | Tractor | Tractor | Tractor |
1.2 Identification Information
1.2.1 Vehicle Identification Number 1.2.1.1 Vehicle Identification
Printing position of vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is engraved near the centerline of the front axle at the outer side of the frame right side member.
1.2.1.2 VIN Deciphering
Composition of Vehicle VIN Deciphering: The VIN deciphering is made up of World Manufacturer Identifier ( WMI ) 、 Vehicle Description Section ( VDS ) 、 Check Digit ( CD ) and the Vehicle Indicator Section ( VIS ) is composed of four parts (17 digits in total). Taking the Vehicle Identification Number 1W94RBCD8RR698001 as an example, the meaning represented by each digit is shown in the following table:
1st~3rd Digit- World Manufacturer Identifier ( WMI )
The first section (1st-3rd digit) of the vehicle identification number, where: 1W9 —— Windrose Technology Inc.
4st~8rd Digit- Vehicle Description Section
There are three types in total,Respectively4RBCD 、 4RBCF 、 4RACC,The explanations are as shown in the following table:
| Positions 4 -8 | 4RBCD | 4RBCF | 4RACC |
|---|---|---|---|
| series | 5325 | 5325 | 5325 |
| Engine Type | 780kW,peak power | 1040kW,peak power | 520kW,peak power |
| GVWR Class | 8 | 8 | 8 |
| 8=Greater than 14968 kg. (33,001 lbs. and over) | |||
| Chassis | 3 Axles | 3 Axles | 2 Axles |
| Cab Type | Sleeper Cab | Sleeper Cab | Sleeper Cab |
| Brake System | Air braking system | Air braking system | Air braking system |
| Year | Code | Year | Code | Year | Code | Year | Code |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2005 | 5 | 2014 | E | 2023 | P | 2032 | 2 |
| 2006 | 6 | 2015 | F | 2024 | R | 2033 | 3 |
| 2007 | 7 | 2016 | G | 2025 | S | 2034 | 4 |
| 2008 | 8 | 2017 | H | 2026 | T | 2035 | 5 |
| 2009 | 9 | 2018 | J | 2027 | V | 2036 | 6 |
| 2010 | A | 2019 | K | 2028 | W | 2037 | 7 |
| 2011 | B | 2020 | L | 2029 | X | 2038 | 8 |
| 2012 | C | 2021 | M | 2030 | Y | 2039 | 9 |
| 2013 | D | 2022 | N | 2031 | 1 |
| Code | Assembly Plant |
|---|---|
| R | Windrose Technology Inc |
9th Digit - Check Digit
This digit is calculated by the manufacturer based on the remaining 16-digit code via a certain formula; It may be a number from 0 to 9 or letter "X",to verify the authenticity of the VIN, so as to ensure the uniqueness and validity of the VIN.
10th Digit- Model Year
Indicate the year.
11th Digit- Plant of Manufacture
Indicate the assembly plant.
12st~14rd Digit- WMI
698,Assigned by SAE 。
15st~17rd Digit- Sequentially Assigned
A 3-digit number to indicate the production sequence number of the vehicle. 1.2.1.3 Motor Nameplate Identification
Nameplate Location and Content
1. Location of motor nameplate 2. Location of motor SN




1.2.1.4 Vehicle Environmental Sign, Nameplate and VIN
Vehicle Nameplate 1. The nameplate is located on the right sliding door frame (C- pillar) of the vehicle. 2. The nameplate bears the full name of the manufacturer, the date of manufacture, the vehicle identification number (VIN), the maximum allowable gross mass of the fully loaded vehicle, the vehicle type, the axle load, the tire model, the rim size, the tire pressure, and the statement. Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) Label 1. The vehicle emission control information (VECI) label is affixed to the right sliding door frame (C-pillar) of the vehicle. 2. The vehicle emission control information (VECI) label contains the title, full name of the manufacturer, trademark, date of manufacture, emission control system, maximum allowable gross mass of the fully loaded vehicle, vehicle family name, vehicle category and statement. Zero-emission Power label 1. The zero-emission power label is located on the right sliding door frame (C-pillar) of the vehicle. 2. The zero-emission power label includes the title, name of manufacturer, trademark, date of manufacture, powertrain family name, model code and statement.

| Parameter Name/Model | Parameter | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Mass of vehicle with NCM 3 motor (lbs) | 23,700 | ||
| Mass of vehicle with LFP 3 motor (lbs) | 26,092 | ||
| Gross mass of NCM 3 motor (lbs) | 55,116 | ||
| Gross mass of LFP 3 motor (lbs) | 55,116 | ||
| Axle load distribution | No load | NCM 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs) | 11,244/12,456 |
| LFP 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs) | 12,236/13,856 |
1.3 Vehicle Specifications
1.3.1 Specifications
1.3.1.1 Vehicle Appearance Dimension and Information
Vehicle Appearance Diagram
| Parameter Name/Model | Parameter | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Full load | NCM 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs) | 15,432/39,683 | |
| LFP 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs) | 15,432/39,683 | ||
| Seating capacity (person) | 2 | ||
| Outline dimension | Length (in) | 318.9 | |
| Width (in) | 88.39 | ||
| Height (in) | 154.9 | ||
| Wheelbase (in) | 183+51 | ||
| Tread | Wheel (in) | 80/74/74 | |
| Minimum ground clearance (full load) (in) | 9.25 | ||
| Minimum turning diameter (by center of front outer wheel trajectory) (ft) | 64 | ||
| Vehicle passing angle (full load) | Approach angle (°) | 18 | |
| Departure angle (°) | 26 | ||
| Maximum speed (full load, on level, well-maintained road) (mph) | 75 | ||
| Maximum gradeability (driving at constant speed on fully loaded, dry, hard road) (%) | 3 motor 25; 4 motor 30 | ||
| Parking slope (full load, forward & reverse directions) (%) | 12 | ||
| Maximum driving range (miles) | 416 | ||
| Exterior noise of accelerating vehicle (dB(A)) | 20 mph 73.9dBA, 25 mph 73.3dBA, 30 mph 75.5dBA |
1.4 Lift the Vehicle
1.4.1 Description and Operation
1.4.1.1 Vehicle Lifting and Jacking
Note the Condition of Vehicle When jacking
1. Principle: Be sure to jack the vehicle in no-load state; Never jack the vehicle in loaded state. 2. The center of gravity of the vehicle will shift after removal of drive motor, high voltage battery box and other heavier parts. Make sure the vehicle supported properly to prevent the vehicle from overturning.
Precautions for Using Jack and Jack Stands
1. Be sure to follow the instructions in this manual for safe operation. 2. Never attempt to lift the tire with a crowbar so as to avoid damaging the wheels and tires. 3. Park the vehicle on level road surface and pull the parking brake. 4. Be sure to block the wheel on the other end of the diagonal that connects this wheel with the jacking position. 5. Use a jack with a rubber pad to jack the vehicle.
caution
If required, after jacking the vehicle with a jack, support the vehicle using a jack stands with rubber pad.
1.5 Warning and Precautions
1.5.1 Warning and Precautions
1.5.1.1 Warnings and Precautions
Definitions of "Warning", "Caution" and "Tip"
"Warning", "Caution" and "Tip", both general and specific, are used for the diagnosis and repair procedures in this service manual. This manual, developed by Windrose, aims to provide repair information to help after-sales service technicians in diagnosis and repair of the systems so as to ensure normal operation of the vehicle. However, certain procedures may pose danger to technicians if they do not operate using the methods recommended herein. "Warning", "Caution", and "Tip" are given to prevent the above-mentioned dangers from happening, but not all dangers are foreseeable. This kind of information is prominently displayed in the service manual. This kind of information is prepared to avoid the following conditions: – Serious injury to personnel. – Vehicle damage. – Unnecessary vehicle repairs. – Unnecessary replacement of parts. – Improper repair or replacement of vehicle components.
Definition of "Warning"
"Warning" indicates that you must or you are prohibited to take measures as necessary. If the "Warning" is ignored, the following consequences may occur: – Serious injury to personnel. – Serious personal injury to the driver and/or passengers in the vehicle, in case the vehicle is not repaired properly.
Definition of "Caution"
"Caution" indicates that you must pay special attention to necessary or prohibited measures. If "Caution" is ignored, the following consequences may occur: – Vehicle damage. – Unnecessary vehicle repairs. – Unnecessary replacement of parts. – Abnormal operation or performance of the maintained systems or components. – Damage to related systems or parts. – Damage to fasteners, basic tools or special tools. – Leakage of coolant, lubricant or other major fluids.
Definition of "Tip"
"Tip" states or emphasizes the necessity of employing diagnosis or repair procedures, aiming to: – Define procedures. – Provide additional information for completing a procedure. – Describe the reason for operation as per the recommended procedures. – Provide information that facilitate the completion of the procedures in a more efficient manner. – Provide technicians with previous experiences to make the procedure easier.
Precautions for Charging
warning !
1. High voltage and large current may be induced in the high voltage system during charging. Please strictly follow the operation procedures, otherwise there may be risk of electric shock. Read throughout the charging section carefully before charging. 2. If you have been implanted with a pacemaker or cardiovascular defibrillator, note the following while charging: – Do not stay in the vehicle; – Do not enter the vehicle. 3. Before charging, check the skin and shell of the charging cable are damaged; If so, please contact the authorized dealer of the vehicle for repair or replacement. use damaged charging cables. 4. minors are prohibited to use the charging plug because it is a high voltage electrical device. minors are prohibited to operate during charging. 5. Make sure the charging port and charging plug are free of water, other debris, rust or corrosion. If there is water or rust on the charging port or charging plug, do not charge avoid short circuit or electric shock, or even death. 6. Keep the power supply equipment, the vehicle to be charged, the charging cable and the charging plug away from rain, snow and water. Do not place them close to the fire source. 7. If there is moisture near the charging port during charging, disconnect the power supply and then the plug at the power supply end while ensuring safety (do not touch the metal sheet of the charging plug with your hands or other body parts, so as not to cause safety accidents in case the charging system is faulty),unplug charging plug at the vehicle end. Wear insulating gloves if necessary, and contact the authorized dealer of the vehicle as soon as possible for testing and confirmation. 8. If the vehicle has been exposed to wet conditions before charging, please dry the body near the charging port before opening the charging port for charging. Make sure there is no residual moisture in the charging socket and its vicinity. 9. When the charging system is working, do not use the charging device in an environment where gasoline, coatings and flammable items are used or stored, as sparks may be generated in the charging system. 10. Please keep the charging port dry and clean during charging, and take corresponding measures if necessary. 11. In case the weather changes (strong wind, rain or snow) abruptly during charging, check the charging plug is secure and dry; do not touch the charging cable and the body when encountering lightning. 12. Corresponding protective measures should be taken during minors. Children and other non-related personnel should be prevented from approaching the charging vehicle and charging cable as much as possible. 13. When charging, do not squeeze the charging cable to avoid electric shock or fire. 14. When charging, do not place the charging cable in the vehicle. 15. When charging, the charging cable must be kept away from fire source. 16. Note the following when charging: – Do not touch the metal part of the charging port and charging plug; – Do not touch the electric vehicle and any devices if electric sparks appear in an electric vehicle or on-board charger. Failure to do so will result in an electric shock, or even cause death or injury. 17. The ambient temperature of the vehicle is recommended to be 32*F - 95*F during charging of the vehicle. Do not charge the vehicle under low or high temperatures(it is not recommended to charge the vehicle out these parameters). 18. Do not charge the vehicle under direct sunlight and other high temperature environment in summer. 19. During charging, make sure the charging cable extends in a natural manner and do not hang the charging cable in the air. 20. When any unusual smell or smoke is detected on the vehicle, immediately disconnect the power supply in a safe manner. 21. Do not plug and unplug the charging plug with wet hands or standing in places with water, liquid, and snow. This may result in serious injury or death. 22. When removing the charging plug, you should hold the insulating part of the plug, Do not drag or pull the charging cable. 23. Do not remove or modify the charging port without permission. 24. Please read the operation manual on the charging equipment carefully before fast charging, and make sure
the fast charging plug is connected and locked. Failure to do so will cause malfunction of the vehicle or charging equipment. 25. Minors are prohibited from charging the vehicle. 26. Do not plug and unplug the fast charging plug without permission during charging. 27. Charging or stop of charging should be performed in strict accordance with the operating procedures indicated on the DC charging instructions. 28. If smoke or unusual odors are detected at the charging port or abnormality is found inside of the vehicle, you should press the emergency stop button on the DC charging pile in time to stop charging, evacuate the personnel around the vehicle and follow the on-site procedures. 29. Before fast charging, check for any debris, dust, water, etc. inside the fast charging socket (including the jack). If any, do not charge. Remove debris and dust inside the fast charging socket (including the jack) and dry the socket. The charging cannot proceed until the charging socket is made clean and dry. 30. Before fast charging, check the fast charging socket jack is damaged, ablated or discolored. In case any of the above phenomena is found, do not charge and contact an authorized dealer. 31. To prevent the charging system from malfunctioning, please note the following: – Close the protective cover of the vehicle charging socket and then the charging port cover; – Avoid collisions with the charging plug; – Avoid crushing the charging cable; – Do not pull or entangle the charging cable; – Do not place the charging cable near a heat sources. 32. After charging is completed, close the charging socket protective cover and the charging port cover. 33. Before starting the vehicle, make sure the charging plug is removed from the charging port. 34. As the fast charging plug is heavy, you should plug and unplug vertically as carefully as possible to prevent damage to the vehicle or the charging equipment. 35. The charging may stop if you accidentally touch the fast charging plug button during fast charging. When this occurs, you need to pull out the charging plug and recharge.
Precautions for Maintenance Safety
warning !
1. The maintenance personnel should have received training on high voltage safety and passed relevant Courses by Windrose or an authorized partner. 2. The maintenance operator should not wear metal jewelry, such as watches and rings, and should not have metal objects in the pockets of work clothes, such as keys, metal shell pens, mobile phones, and coins. 3. The maintenance should be carried out in a dry environment by personnel who are kept dry as well. 4. The maintenance technician should ensure facilities and tools are in good condition, prior to starting work. 5. At least two people should be present when carrying out maintenance on the high voltage system of the vehicle. They can provide proper safety procedures and provide first aid and contact authorities if an incedent occurs. 6. Random access to high voltage components on the vehicle is not allowed in non-assembly or non-repair period. 7. Do not carry out maintenance in an environment with explosive, flammable, corrosive gases, steam, etc. Otherwise, it may cause fire, explosion and other accidents. 8. When maintaining the all-in-one controller, it must stop running, the low voltage power supply must be disconnected, and the high voltage must be cut off after 10 minutes (when the capacitor discharge of the MCU and between the positive and negative power supplies of other high voltage load end finishes). Otherwise it may cause personal injury. 9. The mounting bolts and lead connecting bolts must be tightened to appropriate torque. Otherwise, the MCU may face abnormality in use, causing personal injury and equipment damage. 10. If an abnormality is found in the vehicle when it is re- inspected after maintenance, stop operation in time and check the equipment. Otherwise, it may impose a risk of personnel injury or equipment damage. 11. When parking or storing the vehicle is to be maintained and under maintenance, keep away from environments.
Warning for Vehicle Lifting
warning !
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury, and even death, when disassembling main components from the vehicle and supporting the vehicle with a lift, a jack stand shall be used to support the vehicle at the position where the component is to be removed. Warning for Handling Anti-lock Braking System Components
warning !
Certain parts of the ABS cannot be repaired alone, and attempting to remove or disconnect certain system parts may result in personal injury and/or improper system operation. Therefore, only components that are approved for removal and installation can be repaired. Warning for Equipment Permitted for Repair After Collision
warning !
To avoid personal injury from exposure to toxic fumes generated in (zinc oxide) metal arc welding or plating when grinding/cutting any type of metal or sheet moulded parts, it is essential to work in a well-ventilated area and wear approved respirators, goggles, earplugs, welder gloves and protective clothing. Lock Out Tag Out
warning !
When a technician is inspecting the reported faulty condition, the vehicle shall be locked out and tagged out by the repairing technician and may not be operated. Warning for Disconnecting Battery
warning !
Before repairing any electrical components, confirm that the power supply of the start switch is in "OFF" mode, and all electrical loads are "OFF (turned off)" unless otherwise stated in the operating procedures. If tools or equipment can easily contact exposed live electrical terminals, disconnect the battery negative cable. Failure to follow of these safety instructions may result in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle and vehicle components.
Warning for Brake Dust
warning !
The following operations are not permitted when the wheel brake components are repaired:
– Cleaning of the wheel brake components with dry brush or compressed air.
warning !
Certain models or after-sales brake components added may contain fibers which may be mixed in the dust and once inhaled will seriously damage human body. The dust accumulated on the brake components must be removed using a damp cloth. Warning for Replacement of Brake Air Pipe
warning !
Install and fix the brake air pipe with care during replacement, and be sure to use the correct fasteners, otherwise the brake air pipe and the brake system may be damaged and thus cause personal injury. Warning for Inhalation of R-134a
warning !
Do not inhale A/C refrigerant R-134a and lubricating oil vapour or mist, because they can irritate your eyes, nose and pharynx when exposed to them. Work in a well-ventilated area. When discharging R-134a from the A/C system, use repair equipment (R-134a recovery equipment) certified to meet the requirements of SAEJ2210. In the event of accidental fluid discharge in the system, the work area must be ventilated before repair works are continued. For additional information on health and safety, please contact the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
Warning for Cracks on Windows
warning !
Follow the state and federal DOT guidelines for window damage and replacement.
Warning for Handling of Window and Metal Plate
warning !
When disposing any glass or metal plate with sharp edges or burrs, wear approved goggles and gloves so as to reduce the risk of personal injury.
Warning for Road Test
warning !
Test the vehicle on the road in accordance with traffic regulations while ensuring safety. Never try any operation that may endanger vehicle control. Violating the above safety instructions will cause serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle. Precautions Regarding Removal of Exterior Label
caution
When removing labels/nameplates, use plastic flat- edged tools to avoid damage to paints. Precautions Regarding Fasteners
caution
Please use appropriate fasteners at the correct position. The number of the component to replace the fastener must be correct. For fasteners that need to be replaced or the fasteners that require the use of thread- locking adhesives or sealant, it is particularly specified in the repair procedures that, paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors shall not be applied on fasteners or fastener attachment surfaces, unless otherwise noted. The coatings may affect the torque and clamping force of the fastener, thus damaging the fastener. When installing fasteners, you must follow the correct tightening sequence and tightening torque to avoid damage to parts and systems.
Precautions Regarding Disposing Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components
caution
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage many solid- state electrical components. Components that are susceptible to electrostatic discharge are not always marked with an electrostatic discharge symbol, hence you must take care when disposing electrical components. Please observe the following safety instructions to avoid damage from electrostatic discharge:
• Before repairing any electronic components, disconnect the power line, and touch a metal ground point to discharge static electricity in your body (especially after sliding on a vehicle seat).
• Do not touch the exposed terminals which may be connected to a circuit that can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge.
• When repairing the connector, do not touch the exposed terminals with tools.
• Do not remove components from the protective casing unless required.
• The following operations are not allowed unless specifically required by diagnostic procedures:
– axle or ground components or connectors. – Connect the test equipment probe to the component or the connector. When using the test probe, connect the ground lead at first.
Before opening the protective casing of the component, ground it first. Do not place solid components on a metal workbench or on top of a radio and other electrical equipment. Precautions Regarding Avoiding Twist or Bend When Installing Hoses
caution
The inlet and outlet hoses shall not be twisted during the installation process, and the hoses shall not be bent or deformed to facilitate installation, otherwise components may be damaged. Precautions Regarding Damage to Machined Surfaces
caution
Do not cut, scratch or damage the sealing surface. If the sealing surface is a machined surface, it may be damaged, resulting in leakage.
Precautions Regarding Power System Control Module and Electrostatic Discharge
caution
Do not touch the connector pins or welded components on the circuit board to prevent damage to the electronic control module on the vehicle as a result of electrostatic discharge.
Precautions Regarding Use of Scan Tool
caution
Before diagnosing the vehicle, you must pay attention to the following conditions, otherwise the control module may be damaged.
– The software version of the scan tool and terminals must be up to date.
– The vehicle battery must be fully charged with a voltage of 12-14V.
– The scan tool and terminal cables must be securely connected.
– When programming the control module, the battery charger must not be connected to the battery.
Precautions Regarding Steering Wheel in Steering Limit Position
caution
The steering wheel shall not be set to the steering limit position for more than 5s, otherwise the steering motor may be damaged.
Precautions Regarding Test Probe
caution
Do not insert test equipment probes (digital multimeter, etc.) into the harness connector or fuse box terminals. A majority of the terminals will be deformed as a result of the diameter of the test probes, leading to poor contact and system failure. Thus, special tools must be used to detect the terminals from the front. Never use a paper clip or other substitutes to detect the terminals.
caution
When using special tools to test the components, make sure that the selected terminal test adapter matches the size of the connector terminal. Do not choose the terminal test adapter visually, since the hole of certain connector terminals may be larger than the actual terminal in the hole. The use of large terminal test adapter can damage the terminals.
Precautions Regarding Damage to Edges of Windows
caution
To avoid damage to vehicle window due to impact of exposed edges, the window must be 1 mm (0.025 in.) lower than the sheet metal surface.
1.6 Health and Safety
1.6.1 Description and Operation
1.6.1.1 Note
A number of operations related to vehicle maintenance and repair are dangerous, and can affect personal safety or health. This section specifies partial of the relevant hazardous operations, materials and equipment, and corresponding safety regulations to avoid these hazards. However, this section does not include all matters related to health and safety, therefore all operations and procedures as well as the disposing of materials shall be executed on the basis of ensuring safety and health. Before using any product, you should read the instructions for use of products provided by the manufacturer or supplier.
1.6.1.2 Acid and Alkali
The acid and alkali include corrosive sodium carbonate and sulfuric acid. They are used for cleaning of batteries and other materials. They can irritate or erode eyes, skin, sense of smell and throat, or burn human body and damage ordinary protective clothing. In order to prevent acid or alkali from splashing onto your eyes, skin and clothing, you should wear suitable protective clothing, gloves and goggles. Also, you should not inhale relevant sprays. Washing equipment, such as eye wash bottles, shower heads, and soap, shall be provided in the vicinity, so that you can use them immediately whenever a spill occurs. Warning marks indicating eye damage shall be placed at a conspicuous location.
1.6.1.3 A/C Refrigerant
If A/C refrigerant gets in your skin, it may cause frostbite. The instructions provided by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid exposed skin from directly contacting the refrigerant. You must wear appropriate goggles and protective gloves when operating. If the refrigerant gets in your skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water. Use suitable rinsing solution to wash your eyes. Do not rub, and seek medical assistance as needed.
A/C Refrigerant — Operations to be Avoided
Do not store refrigerant in a place exposed to sunlight or heat sources. – When filling refrigerant, do not place the refrigerant bottles upright, and their valves shall be facing downward. – Do not expose refrigerant bottles to frost and snow. – Do not drop the refrigerant bottle. – Under no circumstances should the refrigerant be discharged directly into the atmosphere. – Do not mix refrigerants, such as R12 (dichlorodifluoromethane) and R-134a (tetrafluoroethane).
1.6.1.4 Adhesives and Sealants
Cautions Regarding the Use of Adhesive/Sealant
Before using the adhesive/sealant, you must clean the surface of the position to be applied with adhesive/sealant and wipe it with a special cleaning agent to ensure the bonding effect. Do not allow room temperature curing sealant to enter the blind threaded hole, otherwise a hydraulic locking effect will be generated from the fastener during tightening, causing damage to the fastener and other components and making it impossible to obtain the correct clamping force when the fastener is used for tightening. Under such circumstance, the sealing effect may be weakened, making it impossible for the fastener to play the role of tightening correctly. Then the components will be loosened or separated, which will cause serious damage to the parts.
Health & safety
The materials used in adhesives/sealants contain harmful substances. Long-term exposure to them can cause acute and chronic poisoning, occupational and skin diseases and other diseases. When applying adhesive/sealant, use a ventilation device to maintain ventilation in the workplace; Wear protective gloves, masks, protective clothing, etc. during operation. Wash your hands carefully after work, and keep the workplace clean, tidy, and sanitary. – Waste adhesive/sealant or solvent-contaminated waste shall be removed in a timely manner and shall not be accumulated for a long time. – Generally, the products shall be stored in a non-smoking area, and care shall be taken when using them. Use an applicator or container for construction as much as possible.
Repair by Adhesives/Sealants
Generally, in the event of a failure or accident, the vehicle body will be deformed, the steel plate will be cracked, and welding spots will be falling off. Sometimes, the chassis and other assembly components may be damaged locally, resulting in the falling off and destruction of certain adhesive/
sealant products. In the process of vehicle repair, adhesives with same performance shall be selected according to the material and functional requirements of the components. The adhesives/sealants that can be used in the process of vehicle repair are listed below.
Body Repair
If adhesives applied on the vehicle body fall off or are cracked as a result of deformation or cracking of body interior trims and steel plates, during the repair process, the positions applied with adhesives shall be made up with new adhesives. – First you should remove the adhesives on the surface of the body using a knife, and the remaining adhesives can be wiped with alcohol; – Use a special cleaning agent to wipe the area applied with adhesives so that no impurities such as residual adhesive is kept on the surface applied with adhesives. – Then apply repair adhesive on the original position that is applied with adhesives to ensure the effect of bonding and sealing.
Parts Repair
If certain interior trim parts and other positions are damaged, repair shall be carried out through bonding and sealing. Before applying the sealant, clean the bonding surface so that the bonding effect will not be affected by burrs and cracks.
1.6.1.5 Asbestos
Inhaling asbestos dust can cause lung damage and eventually lead to cancer. Wet the asbestos dust waste during disposal, place it in a sealed container and mark clearly on the surface of the container for convenient and safe disposal. If you want to try cutting or drilling on materials containing asbestos, you should wet the materials and then use only hand tools or low-speed power tools.
1.6.1.6 Battery Acid
The gas released during charging is explosive. Never use open fire near the charged battery or the battery that has recently been charged. Good ventilation must be maintained.
1.6.1.7 Chemical Materials
Solvents, sealants, adhesives, coatings, resin foams, battery acid fluids, coolant, lubricants, greases and other chemical materials should be used, stored and handled with great care. They may be toxic, harmful, corrosive, irritating or highly flammable, and may produce peculiar smell and dust with high level of danger. The effects of long-term overexposure to the chemical environment may be immediate or chronic, transient or permanent, cumulative, superficial, life-threatening, or the lifespan may be affected.
Chemical Materials — Operations to be Executed
– Carefully read and follow the warnings and cautions specified on the raw material container, as well as any accompanying leaflets, posters, or other instructions for use. The health and safety information form for the raw material can be obtained from the manufacturer. – In case of contact with the chemical material, refer to the MSDS sheet for proper safety instructions and procedures. – Strictly follow the working procedure instructions and wear protective clothing to avoid direct contact with skin and eyes. – During the process of handling chemical materials, you must wash yourself before taking a break, eating, smoking, or using toilet facilities. – Keep the work area clean and tidy and do not spill chemical materials.
Chemical Materials — Operations to be Avoided
– Unless specified by the manufacturer, the chemical materials shall not be mixed at will; Certain chemicals will form other toxic or harmful chemicals, or release other toxic and harmful gases when mixed and may lead to other accidents such as explosions. – Do not spray chemical materials in an enclosed environment. – Unless specified by the manufacturer, the chemicals materials should not be heated, as certain chemical materials are highly flammable, and others may release toxic and harmful gases. – Do not leave the container of chemical materials open, because emitted gases from the container may accumulate to such an extent that toxicity, harm or explosion may occur. Some gases are heavier than air and thus they can accumulate in an enclosed space. – Do not put chemical materials in unlabeled containers. – Do not use chemical materials to clean your hands and clothing. Chemicals, especially solvents and fuels, can make the skin dry, cause allergies, skin inflammation or directly absorb toxic and harmful substances through the skin, affecting health. – Do not use empty containers to store other chemical materials at will, unless the containers have been cleaned under supervision. – Do not sniff or smell chemical materials at will. Short- term exposure to high concentrations of gas may still cause poisoning or injury.
1.6.1.8 Dust
Powder, ash and dust may be irritating, harmful or toxic. Do not inhale powdered chemical materials and raising dust
resulted from dry friction operations. In the condition of poor ventilation, wear protective equipment such as breathing mask to prevent inhalation of dust. Fine dust of flammable substances may lead to hazards such as explosion. Avoid explosions and fire sources.
1.6.1.9 Electric Shock
Improper use of electrical equipment without conforming to the instructions for use or misuse of equipment in good condition can both cause electric shock. Electrical equipment must be maintained within the specified time and tested frequently. Faulty equipment should be marked and preferably moved outside the work area. Wires, cables, plugs, and sockets shall not be worn, twisted, cut, cracked, or damaged in other ways. The electrical equipment and wires shall not come into contact with water. Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by appropriate fuse. It is forbidden to misuse electrical equipment, and do not use equipment with any hazard that may lead to a fault, otherwise personal safety may be affected. Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment will not be pinched and damaged. Basic first aid training must be performed for specialized electrical operators. In the event of an electric shock: – Turn off the power supply before touching the victim. – If the power supply cannot be turned off, disconnect the power of the victim with dry insulator material. – If you have received specialized first aid training, perform on-site first aid immediately. – Seek medical assistance.
1.6.1.10 Fiber Isolation
It refers to isolation of noise and sound. The fibrous nature of the surface and sharp edges can cause skin allergy. During the operation, the operating procedure instructions shall be followed and you must wear gloves to avoid excessive skin contact with the fibers.
1.6.1.11 Fire
A large number of materials related to vehicle repair are extremely flammable. Some materials can produce toxic and harmful gases after ignition. Follow fire safety regulations when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, especially near electrical equipment or welding operations. Before using electrical and welding equipment, confirm that there are no hazards of fire. When welding or using heating equipment, a suitable fire extinguisher should be prepared around the work area.
1.6.1.12 First Aid
Legal requirements shall be complied with, and it's better to provide personnel who have received specialized training in first aid in the workplace. If something splashes into your eyes, wash with water for at least 10 minutes. If your skin is contaminated, wash the contaminated area with soap and water. If you have frostbite, immerse the affected area in ice or cold water. Persons who inhale toxic gases should be immediately transferred to a place with fresh air. If adverse reactions continue to occur, they should be immediately sent to the hospital for medical assistance. If you accidentally swallow certain liquids, inform the physician of the information on the container or label. Do not induce vomiting unless instructed to do so by the label.
1.6.1.13 Polyurethane Foam
Cured foam is used as cushion pad material for seats and trims. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Assemblies that have not gone through chemical actions are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Thus, you should wear gloves and goggles during operation. People with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial problems, etc., or those with hereditary allergies should not handle or approach uncured substances. The spare part, vapor or spray mist of uncured assemblies can cause direct irritation and allergic reactions and can be toxic and harmful. Do not breathe vapor or spray mist. These materials must be used in a well-ventilated area with breathing protections. Do not remove the mask immediately after spraying, which means you should wait for the vapor and spray mist to completely dissipate before you remove the mask.
The burning of uncured assemblies and cured foam will produce toxic and harmful gases. During foam operations, it is prohibited to smoke and use open flames and electrical equipment unless the vapor and the spray mist are completely removed. Thermal cutting of foam materials or other special foam materials should be performed in a well-ventilated environment.
1.6.1.14 General Tools and Equipment Used in Workshop
It is importance to always keep all tools and equipment in good working condition and operate them correctly in use. Only use tools for the intended use. The load on cranes, jacks, axle, chassis bracket, or slings and other equipment should not exceed the maximum limit load they can withstand. Damages caused by overloading may not emerge immediately and but they can cause serious accidents when they are used for the next time. Do not use tools or equipment that have been damaged or in poor working condition, especially some high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. Damaged grinding wheel can shatter without warning and cause serious injury. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) when grinding wheels, chisels or blasting equipment. Wear an appropriatepersonal protective equipment (PPE) when using sandblasting equipment, handling asbestos- containing materials, or using spraying equipment. A ventilation equipment that is capable to control the content of dust, spray and soot in the environment should be provided.
1.6.1.15 Noises
Extremely high level noises may be heard when performing certain operations, which may result in hearing damage. In this case, you should wear appropriate hearing protection device.
1.7 Noise, Vibration and Abnormal Noise
1.7.1 Description and Operation
1.7.1.1 Diagnostic Information and Procedures
Wind/Air Noise
Note
When the technician checks the faulty position, the assistant should drive the vehicle, otherwise, it may cause personal injury.
To accurately determine the location of wind noise, it is necessary to test drive in the vehicle. Generally speaking, wind noise comes from major and minor leakages, and if the leakage is not eliminated during repair process, the only way is to reduce rather than eliminate the wind noise. During test drive, the maintenance personnel should carry the following tools to help diagnose the exact location of wind noise: • Echometer • Masking tape • Caulking strip • Marker pen • Screwdriver Carry out road test in accordance with the following procedures: • Select a route in which straight streets run in east, south, west, and north directions. • Select a street with less traffic or reduced noise to avoid affecting the test. • Conduct road tests under a speed at which the customer thinks the noise is the most obvious or the noise is heard. It is strictly forbidden to exceed the legal speed limit. • Wind noise heard in the following situations is deemed as exterior wind noise. – Wind noise can be heard when driving immediately after lowering the window. – The wind noise disappears immediately when pasting the tape to individual trim sealing strips and gaps. • Interior wind noise is attributable to air escaping from the vehicle. Adopt the following methods to eliminate the noise: – Paste tape to the pressure relief valve on the body door lock post once the location of leakage is detected. Air pressure can immediately establish in the vehicle, intensifying the wind noise. – Confirm the location of leakage using a echometer. – Paste masking tape to temporarily repair the leakage. – Keep performing the road test to check if the wind noise is completely eliminated or check for other locations of leakage. – After confirming all locations of leakage through road test, return to the repair workshop to carry out permanent repair using professional, reasonable positioning methods and sealing materials.
Vibration
Most of the high speed vibrations are caused by the loss of wheel dynamic balance. If vibrations maintain after dynamic balance, possible causes include: – The tire is out of round – The rim is out of round – There is hardness deviation in tires All causes of vibrations cannot be detected by measuring the free runout of tires and wheels. The three causes as mentioned above are called load radial runout. The faulty vehicle must be repaired by replacing the original tire and wheel assemblies with known tire and wheel assemblies in good condition. Low speed vibrations that occur at a speed below 64 km/h are usually caused by runout. High speed vibrations that occur at a speed above 64 km/h are usually caused by unbalance or runout.
Correction of Uneven Tires
Generally two ways can be used to correct tires that has been properly balanced but still vibrate. One way is to use an automatic machine tool to mount the tires on the machine tool and remove a small amount of rubber from the high points on the tread on the left and right sides of the tire by means of grinding. Corrections of tires in this way are usually permanent. Standardized operations will not have a noticeable impact on the appearance of the tire and the service life of the tire tread. It is not advisable to repair tires using edged machine tools during corrections of tires, as this will shorten the service life of the tires and cannot tackle the root of the problem. Another way is to remove the tire and rotate the tire 180° on the rim. This method can be used only when the cause of vibration is determined, i.e., the tire and wheel assembly through diagnosis and confirmation. Vibrations can occur in intact wheel assembly when using this method.
Abnormal Sound
The door squeaks in use Check whether the door hinge lacks lubrication. – Operate the door back and forth and listen carefully whether the door squeaks – Lubricate the door hinge with rust remover and apply grease.
1.7.1.2 Repair Guidance
Wind/Air Noise
Exterior wind noise Seal the clearance (if any) on the vehicle with special sealing strip.
Vibration
On-board balancing of wheels and tires On-board balancing can correct vibrations caused by unbalanced brake disc. 1. When performing dynamic balancing on the vehicle, it is forbidden to remove the balance weight installed during wheel dynamic balancing under the vehicle. 2. If the balance weight to be added for dynamic balancing weighs above 25 g (1 lb), two balance weights can be installed on the inner rim and the outer rim respectively. Under-car balancing of wheels and tires Carry out wheel dynamic balancing using an electronic under- car balancing machine. The dynamic balancing machine is easy to use and can be use for both static balancing and dynamic balancing. Unlike on-board balancing, the under-car balancing machine cannot be used for correction of unbalanced brake discs. The under-car balancing can overcome this weakness by fixing the wheels to the balancing machine and passing a cone through the back of the center hole rather than through the wheel nut hole. Directional assembly of wheels and tires Wheels and tires are assembled in the factory by matching the radially thick position of the tire (also known as the high point) to the position on wheel with minimum radius (also known as the low point). The high point of the tire is initially marked with red paint or a label is attached to the outer wall of the tire when leaving the factory. The low point of the wheel is at the position the valve core. Before removing the tire from the wheel, mark the position of the valve core on the tire to restore the tire to its original position.
Abnormal Sound
Repair of Abnormal Sounds Abnormal sounds mainly arise from relative movement between vehicle parts which actually should not exist. Three ways can be adopted to repair abnormal sounds: – Securely fasten the parts to eliminate relative movement during driving. – Separate the parts so that the parts do not contact each other while working. – Isolate the parts so that they do not make abnormal sounds during movement. Uniform, low-friction surfaces can eliminate viscous sliding between parts.
1.8 Water Leakage
1.8.1 Description and Operation
1.8.1.1 Diagnostic Information and Procedures
Diagnosis of Water Leakage
caution
Repair cannot proceed until all positions with water leakage are detected. Random repair can only temporarily plug the leakage position, possibly increasing the difficulty in future repairs. Continue to carry out local tests within overall range to detect all positions with water leakage.
The repair of body water leakage should be performed through proper tests and diagnosis. Repair water leakage by adjusting incorrectly positioned parts and using appropriate repair materials. In the first place, determine the circumstances in which the water leakage may occur. For example, water leakage only occurs when the vehicle is parked on a slope. Second, if an approximate leakage position is found, use a water hose or breather hose to determine the exact leakage point. If the leakage position is not obvious, use a rain test bench to determine the exact leakage position. This may involve the removal of partial interior trim panels or partial parts.
Preparation for Water Leakage Test
– The vehicle is designed to operate under normal environmental conditions. – The design criteria for the sealing materials and parts have taken into account the sealing strength required for natural environmental factors. However, these specifications cannot take into account all human conditions. – The water leakage test procedures are related to natural environment and can determine the driving performance of the vehicle under normal conditions. – The first step of diagnosing leakage is to determine the conditions under which leakage occurs. If the approximate leakage position can be identified, isolate the exact water inlet using a water hose or breather hose. The repair of leakage may involve the removal of partial trim panels or parts. – Leakage in doors or windows may not be necessarily attributable to poor sealing of the sealing strip. Perhaps the water leakage in these positions can be repaired through adjustment at these positions.
Water Hose Test
Note
Do not use a water hose with a nozzle.
1. Arrange an assistant and let it enter the vehicle to determine the exact leakage position. 2. Carry out detection beginning from the bottom of the window. 3. Slowly move the hose upwards until it passes through the entire roof.
Breather Pipe Test
Note
Breather hose test is only applicable to fully cured adhesives. The adhesive layer may be damaged, increasing leakage points when applying this method.
1. Dilute the liquid cleaner in a certain percentage and fill it in a spray bottle to spray it onto the edge of the window. Spray at the bottom in the first place, and then gradually spray the entire roof in a bottom-up manner.
Note
The pressure of compressed air should not exceed 205 kPa (29.75 psi).
2. Let an assistant enter the vehicle while carrying an air hose. 3. Ask the assistant to aim the compressed air at the suspicious leakage position. If leakage is detected at a position, the liquid cleaner will turn to bubbles at the leakage position.
1.8.1.2 Repair Guidance
Repair of Water Leakage in Body
The repair of leakage may involve the removal of certain trim panels or parts depending on the leakage position. 1. Cut the adhesive applied to the seam in the leakage position from inside or outside the vehicle. 2. Clear and remove all old adhesive residues from the leakage position. 3. Apply sealant to the body and seams at the leakage position that have been cleaned. 4. Wait a few hours for the seam adhesive to fully cure. 5. Detect if the leakage persists. 6. Install the removed trim parts.
Repair of Water Leakage in Fixed Windows
The repair of leakage may involve the removal of certain trim panels or parts depending on the leakage position.
1. Determine the exact position of water leakage 2. If leakage is found on the edge of the front windshield, apply special seam adhesive to repair the leakage or replace the front windshield with new one that has been sealed. 3. If leakage is found on the side of a fixed window, apply special adhesive or replace the window with a new one that has been sealed.


1.9 Power Down of the High-Voltage System
1.9.1 Power Down of the High-Voltage System
1.9.1.1 High Voltage Removal from Inside the Vehicle
warning !
1. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment when touching any high voltage components;
2. Do not touch the high voltage battery components even though the high voltage system has been deactivated. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment if it is necessary to operate the high voltage battery components;
3. If any damage is found in the high voltage components, be sure to wrap the damaged parts with the insulation tapes.
1. Park the vehicle, apply the EPB. 2. Open the trim cover plate on the lower left of the instrument panel, find and disconnect the low voltage maintenance disconnection connector, and the vehicle will automatically cut off the high voltage system.
1.9.1.2 High Voltage Removal from Outside the Vehicle
warning !
1. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment when touching any high voltage components;
2.Do not touch the high voltage battery components even though the high voltage system has been deactivated. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment if it is necessary to operate the high voltage battery components;
3. If any damage is found in the high voltage components, be sure to wrap the damaged parts with the insulation tapes.
1. Park the vehicle, apply the EPB. 2. Open the door. 3. Open the front flip cover plate. 4. Find the low voltage MSD in the engine compartment and remove it, and the vehicle will deactivate the high voltage system automatically.
| Category | Information |
|---|---|
| Windrose Service Hotline | +1(586) 604 5918 |
| Windrose Service Contact Unit | Windrose Technology Inc. |
| Windrose Service Contact Address | 415 S Murphy Sunnyvale, CA, 94086 |
| Windrose Service Official Website URL | https://windrose.tech/ |
| Display name | FirstRespondingSafety@windrose.tech |
1.10 After-sales Service Information 1.10.1 After-sales Service Information 1.10.1.1 After-sales Service Information

1.11 Calibration Procedure 1.11.1 Calibration Procedure 1.11.1.1 Front View Intelligent Camera Calibration Procedure
Objective
• After the vehicle leaves the factory, if it is necessary to perform calibration on the front view intelligent camera again, such as when the windshield is replaced or the front view intelligent camera is replaced, it is recommended to use the ONL after-sales calibration procedure. • The ONL after-sales calibration of the front view intelligent camera is carried out through dynamic driving on the road. The front view intelligent camera recognizes the lane markings and takes them as a reference to achieve the calibration of the installation tolerance of the front view intelligent camera. • If the calibration is not performed after the front view intelligent camera is reinstalled, it will affect the accuracy of image recognition.
The Following Principles Should Be Followed While Driving
• The vehicle speed should be no less than 22 mph (the recommended vehicle speed is between 22 mph and 35 mph). • Don't turn the steering wheel by a large margin (||yaw rate|| < 0.008 rad/s). • Keep driving smoothly before and after changing lanes. • Don't change lanes frequently.
Requirements For Lanes And Driving Environments
1. The lane on which the vehicle is traveling should be straight and flat, without slopes or turns. 2. Avoid performing calibration in traffic-congested areas and make sure that the lane markings are not blocked by adjacent vehicles. 3. Avoid performing calibration under adverse weather conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, etc.).
Requirements For The ONL After-Sales Calibration Scenarios Of The front view intelligent camera
1. The calibration test scenario must include two adjacent lanes of equal width. The lane markings can be either solid lines or dashed lines, but they should be clearly visible, as shown in the following figure. 2. Try to avoid the types of lanes shown in the following figure as much as possible.
The ONL After-sales Calibration Process for the front view intelligent camera.
The ONL after-sales calibration can be achieved through the UDS diagnostic service (RoutineControl $31). The host computer sends diagnostic instructions to the ECU of the front view intelligent camera to trigger the calibration mode. After the calibration is completed, the parameters will be written into the ECU and will be used after the next power-on. After the calibration is completed, obtain the calibration results and parameters through diagnostic service instructions as follows: – The online calibration time of ONL is 1 to 5 minutes, depending on the road conditions. – It is impossible to exit the ONL mode before the ONL calibration is completed. If the power is turned off during the process, it will be regarded as a failed end of the ONL calibration, and no new calibration parameters will be written into the ECU. – There are the following diagnostic service instructions: 1. RoutineControl $31: Send the calibration command (ONL/EOL) under 3212. 2. RoutineControl $31: 3213 Report the current working status (INIT/NORMAL/ONLING/EOLING). 3. RoutineControl $31: 3214 Report the currently used parameters. 4. RoutineControl $31: 3215 Report the new parameters after calibration is completed. Step 1: Ensure the correct installation of the front view intelligent camera and its covering parts, and check the condition of the vehicle. Step 2: Establish communication between the diagnostic device (or calibration computer) and the vehicle. Open the calibration service through the diagnostic equipment. Click "ONL Calibration" in the diagnostic device and send the calibration instruction to start the calibration. Step 3: Drive the vehicle according to the above requirements and complete the automatic calibration function according to the prompts on the diagnostic device. Step 4: The diagnostic device prompts "Calibration completed". Step 5: Return to the ONL mode. Step 6: The system will automatically write the new calibration parameters into the ECU. Step 7: Are there any new calibration parameters? – Yes : Next step – No : The ONL calibration fails. Step 8: The ONL calibration is successful.



1.11.1.2 Side MMW Radar Calibration Procedure
Notice
The reinstalled left and right radars should be calibrated before they can be used normally.
Calibration Description
Recalibration should be performed in the event of radar replacement, vehicle collision, etc. in the aftermarket. The recalibration is generally performed through dynamic calibration so that the radar can detect real surrounding environment during driving, determine the horizontal deviation between radar normal and vehicle driving axis by means of self-learning, and keep the deviation within the permissible range via algorithm compensation, thereby ensuring the calibrated radar is in compliance with relevant functional requirements.
Calibration Platform
• Radar to be calibrated. • Scan tool. • Calibrated vehicle. • Specially designed, dedicated calibration runway.
Calibration Error
The dynamic calibration error of radar includes measurement error, radar installation error, and error due to left and right skirt installation: • Prior to calibration after the radar is installed on the bracket, the angle of the radar antenna axis relative to the calibrated vehicle axis should be within the allowable error range of the design installation angle (±3°); • Both the horizontal and vertical installation errors of the radar relative to the body should be less than ±1mm; • The horizontal inaccuracy of active calibration should be less than ±0.5°.
Vehicle Requirements
The vehicle should meet the following requirements when carrying out radar calibration: • Four-wheel alignment has been completed before radar calibration; • The tire pressure on the vehicle is correct; • The vehicle is unloaded when performing calibration; • The radar and covering parts or left and right side skirts are installed correctly, check the oil, tire pressure, seat, etc. and ensure the safety of driving; • After the calibration is completed, no significant changes in body weight are allowed, as this will cause the deflection of the vehicle's driving axis (for example, the modification of the vehicle, the installation of liquefier tank, etc. after calibration will result in angle changes in vertical direction of the driving axis).
Environmental Requirements
When performing radar calibration, the environmental requirements are as follows: • The surface of the radar is clean, and free of covering such as snow or mud; • Do not calibrate in extreme rain and snow weather; • The metal guardrail should be mounted on the left side in the driving direction, and it should be 150m long and straight, to avoid the interference of other moving targets; • The surface of the driving road should be smooth without unevenness, snow, ice, mud and other road conditions that affect driving stability.
Vehicle Driving Behavior Requirements
When the dynamic driving calibration begins, the vehicle must be driven under the conditions specified in the following table to ensure the completion of the dynamic driving calibration;
| Restrictions | Recommended Value | Allowable Tolerance | Remark |
|---|---|---|---|
| Radar lateral guardrail | 6 ft | +/-1.5 ft | / |
| Guardrail height | 27 in | +/- .39 in | It is recommended to be at the same height as the radar installation |
| Constant linear movement speed | 25 mph | / | 18-37 mph |
| Longitudinal acceleration | 0m/s² | ±0.5m/s² | / |
| Yaw rate | 0rad/s | ±0.01rad/s | / |
Calibration Procedure
Step 1: Make sure the radar and covering parts or the left and right side skirts are properly installed and check the condition of the vehicle. Step 2: Establish communication between the scan tool (or calibration computer) and the vehicle, start the calibration beginning with diagnosis of the diagnostic equipment, and click "Start Dynamic Driving Calibration" in the scan tool to issue a calibration instruction for start of calibration. The ADU should be used for relevant conversions after the scan tool issues check commands. Step 3: Maintain communication between the scan tool and the vehicle, and drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving behavior requirements, within a single power-on/ignition cycle of the radar, until the calibration progress bar displays 100% in the scan tool. Step 4: Generally, the calibration progress should show 100% within 3 minutes. Step 5: If the calibration fails, Check the calibration environment, installation location, and driving behavior are in compliance with relevant requirements. If compliance with relevant requirements are confirmed, repeat the above steps. Step 6: The calibration ends when the calibrations on radars on both sides are successful.
1.11.1.3 Forward MMW Radar Calibration Procedure
Notice
The reinstalled front radars should be calibrated before they can be used normally.
Calibration Description
The forward millimeter-wave MMW radar after-sales service is generally performed through dynamic calibration. The automatic calibration is to measure the deviation angle between the radar axis and the body driving axis in horizontal and vertical directions based on the static object in the area around the vehicle (correction area) during straight driving of the vehicle, for the purpose of software compensation, thereby allowing the radar detection deviation to stay within the allowable range.
Correction Configuration
• Vehicle equipped with millimeter-wave radar. • The radar can obtain yaw rate information. • The radar can obtain acceleration information. • The vehicle keeps driving in a straight line. • The vehicle driving speed must be above 25 mph. • The radar installation deviation should be ≦ ±3° (horizontal) or ≦ ±2.4° (vertical).
Calibration Procedure
Step 1: Make sure the radar and covering parts or bumpers are properly installed and check the condition of the vehicle. Step 2: Establish communication between the scan tool (or calibration computer) and the vehicle, start the calibration beginning with diagnosis of the diagnostic equipment, and click "Start Dynamic Driving Calibration" in the scan tool to issue a calibration instruction for start of calibration. Step 3: Maintain communication between the scan tool and the vehicle, and drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving behavior requirements, within a single power-on/ignition cycle of the radar, until the calibration progress bar displays 100% in the scan tool. Step 4: Generally, the calibration progress should show 100% within 3 minutes. Step 5: If the calibration fails, Check the calibration environment, installation location, and driving behavior are in compliance with relevant requirements. If compliance with relevant requirements are confirmed, repeat the above steps. Step 6: The calibration ends when the radar calibration is successful.
1.11.1.4 AVM Calibration Procedure
Preparation for Equipment and Site
• Calibration cloth (3 in front, left, and right). • Level ground. • There is no light source that can cause the camera to be exposed by reflection or direct light
Arrangement of Vehicles and Calibration Equipment
Park the vehicle on calibration site and adjust the calibration cloth as required. 6 7 1 8 5 4 9 3 • ① Distance between front calibration cloth and vehicle: 1.5 ft • ⑥ Lateral distance of front calibration cloth: 21.5 ft • ⑦ Longitudinal distance of front calibration cloth: 6 ft • ⑤ Distance between front calibration cloth and left/right calibration cloth: 5 ft • ⑧ Width of left/right calibration cloth: 6 ft • ⑨ Length of left/right calibration cloth: 8 ft • ④ Distance from left/right calibration cloth: 10 ft
Note
The black grid on the three pieces of cloth is a square of edge length 1 ft. Align the edges (or the white edges of equal width) of the outermost black grids when aligning the cloth; A white edge of width 0.5 ft should be reserved at the edge of the three calibration cloths.
Precautions
1. Make sure the calibration patterns are visible through the camera and the position requirements stipulated in the calibration scheme are met; 2. The site should be free of reflections. If the photo is not clear due to reflection, use shielding cloth or shade to ensure that the black and white grids are clear; 3. If the calibration fails, export the corresponding photos and logs and send them to the manufacturer for analysis;
Calibration Procedure
1. "IVI Screen Menu" > "Factory Settings" > "AVM Function Debugging" > "270° AVM Debugging Interface" to select Open; 2. Click AVM icon on the main interface of the CAR screen to activate AVM; 3. When clicking "Calibration" button, the automatic calibration will start. You can wait for the automatic calibration to end, or manually click "End Calibration" to stop the current calibration; 4. When the calibration process (including calibration succeeded, calibration failed, and manual stop of calibration) ends, you should operate "Turn Off AVM", "Turn On AVM", and "Initialize AVM" to display the screen again. Then you can operate "Calibration" again according to the process same as step 1; 5. It is determined that the calibration is successfully if the 2D/3D function can be used normally, the splicing accuracy meets the requirements, and the calibration cloth is not misplaced from the perspective of the screen; 6. Click "Hide Debug" button to collapse the control bar, and click this button again to expand it. Prevent the debug button from blocking the picture and affecting the observation; 7. Click "Close Debug Interface" to exit the calibration interface, or re-enter the factory settings interface to open it; 8. Click "Collect Fusion Image" to collect the AVM fusion image (including the car model); 9. Click "Collect Left Image" to collect the left image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/LeftImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 10. Click "Collect Front Image" to collect the front image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/FrontImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 11. Click "Collect Right Image" to collect the right image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/RightImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 12. Click "Collect Back Image" to collect the back image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/BackImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 13. Click "Collect Four-way Image" to collect the left, front, right, and back images simultaneously, save them in respective directory, and name them "special_" + "cameraId" + "_id_Image_frame_" + "Serial Number" beginning with "special_"; For example: • Rear view: special_0_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv • Right view: special_5_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv • Front view: special_7_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv • Left view: special_8_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv cameraId mapping rules:
• cameraId =0 refers to AVM back image • cameraId =5 refers to AVM right image • cameraId =7 refers to AVM front image • cameraId =8 refers to AVM left image
Exporting Image Collection Footage
You can export or clear the footage by unzipping the "Attachment Script" file and executing the corresponding script.
Note
Select a practical dual male USB cable, and insert one end into the USB flash drive socket of the device host, and the other end into the computer. Concurrently, switch the current mode to ADB. Otherwise, the script cannot be executed normally.
Exporting steps: Click "Export AVM Collection Footage" in "AVM Image Collection Export Script" to export the file.
Click "Clear AVM Collection Footage" in "AVM Image Collection Export Script" to clear the export file. 1.11.1.5 Headlamp Light Adjustment
Preparation for Equipment and Site
– Tools: 10# hexagon socket and 8# hexagon socket, with a total length not exceeding 150mm. – Tape measure or laser rangefinder (electronic ruler). – Site: Dark site where the ground is level and flat, vehicles can enter, and the reference center of the headlamp is be at least 10m away from the screen. – Test screen: Thick white paper or white wall (in order to facilitate the observation of light shape, the test screen shall be more than 2m wider than the vehicle).
Vehicle Preparation
– Inflate the tire in accordance with the full load pressure specified in the technical conditions of the vehicle. – Replenish sufficient water and lubricating oil on the vehicle, and prepare all accessories and tools (spare tires, tools, etc.) for vehicle test. – Place a 75kg load on driver seat to simulate driver seat occupation. – Before measuring, make sure the vehicle is at natural standstill state, drive the vehicle to travel backwards for at least one wheel circumference and then forward over the same distance. – Make sure the outer cover of the lamps is clean. – Start the vehicle.
Light Measurement
1. Park the vehicle as shown in the figure with the distance L between the reference center of the headlamp and the screen being 10m.
h 1 L h 2 2. Adjust the low beam to the maximum highest on CAR screen. 3. Remove the wheel housing plug. 4. Draw O-line, A-line, and B-line on the screen. 90° B O A L 1 L 1 – A and B lines: Parallel to O line, where L1 is 39.5 in (low beam) or 40.25 in (high beam). 5. Draw A1, A2, B1, B2, h1, and h2 lines on the screen to form a green box as shown in the figure after completing drawing of all lines.




| L1 | L2 | L3 | L4 | ||||||
| h 2 | |||||||||
a 1 A O B a 2 b 1 b 2 • A1 and A2 lines: Parallel to line A, where L2 is 6.69 in and L3 is 13.75 in; • B1 and B2 lines: Parallel to line B, where L4 is 6.69 in and L5 is 13.75 in; • H1 and H2 lines: Horizontal lines parallel to the ground, where H1 is 33.7 in (low beam) or 35.55 in (high beam), and H2 is 23.86 in (low beam) or 25.28 in (high beam).
Light Adjustment
caution
To make it easier to observe the effect of light adjustment, you can block the light from one side side when adjusting the light on the other side. The light adjustment method on the left and right sides is the same. After the debugging is completed, the height of the left and right lights should be consistent.
Note
The left headlamp is taken as an example hereby. The light adjustment method of the left headlamp is the same as that of the right headlamp.
1. Low beam adjustment 1. Turn on the low beam. 2. Insert the 10# hexagon socket into the low beam dimming port ① , rotate the handle ① clockwise to adjust the light to the upper left, and turn the handle ① counterclockwise to adjust the light to the lower right; Insert the 8# hexagon socket into the low beam dimming port ② , rotate the handle ② clockwise to adjust the light downward, and turn the handle ② counterclockwise to adjust the light upward; 1 2 3. If the turning point of the low beam cut-off line is in the frame, it indicates the completion of dimming.
2. High beam adjustment 1. Turn on the high beam; 2. Insert the 10# hexagon socket into the high beam dimming port ③ , rotate the handle ③ clockwise to adjust the light to the upper left, and turn the handle ③ counterclockwise to adjust the light to the lower right; Insert the 10# hexagon socket into the higih beam dimming port ④ , rotate the handle ④ clockwise to adjust the light downward, and turn the handle ④ counterclockwise to adjust the light upward; 3 4 3. If the brightest point of the high beam is in the frame, it indicates the completion of dimming.
caution
After the adjustment of the high and low beams is completed, the brightest point of the high beam should be higher than the turning point of the low beam cut-off line.



1.11.1.6 TCU Self-Learning Program
Operation Process
Step 1: Check if the vehicle meets the following conditions? – Vehicle status is READY – Brake opening is 0 – Throttle opening is 0 – Handbrake pulled up -Yes: Next step -No: Adjust vehicle status. Step 2: Connect the diagnostic instrument and click on the "TCU self-learning instruction". Step 3: axle self-learning in TCU1. Step 4: 1-file self-learning. Step 5: Is the target gear met? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 6: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 7: 2-file self-learning. Step 8: Is the target gear met? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 9: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 10: Gear position check. Step 11: Parameters are written to EEPROM. Step 12: Send the self-learning completion flag. Step 13: End of self-learning. Step 14: TCU2 rear axle self-learning.
Step 15: 1 file self-learning. Step 16: Is the target gear satisfied? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 17: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 18: 2-file self-learning. Step 19: Is the target gear met? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 20: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 21: Gear position check. Step 22: Parameters are written to the EEPROM. Step 23: Send the self-learning completion flag. Step 24: End of self-learning.

1.11.1.7 Tire Pressure Calibration Procedure
Introduction to Preparation of Calibration Tools and Related Functions
1 6 7 2 3 4 5 – ① : Indicator – ② : Select tires – ③ : Upload function button – ④ : Select tires – ⑤ : Activate the sensor – ⑥ : Power switch – ⑦ : 12 – 24V charging interface
Description of Buttons on Calibration Tool
On/off: Turn the switch on the left to turn on the tool. The calibration tool goes into screen off and sleeping state if there is no operation within 3 minutes after power-on. Press any button to wake up the calibration tool.

| Corresponding number | Vehicle location |
|---|---|
| 1 (driver seat) | Left side of input shaft |
| 2 | Right side of input shaft |
| 3 | Left outside of output shaft |
| 4 | Left inside of output shaft |
Setting Standard Pressure (Note: Confirm Standard Tire Pressure Before Individual Operations)
1. Press and hold the LINK button on the left, press upward the power button on the left to turn on the tool, go into the interface for adjusting the standard pressure value, and press the "+" or "-" button according to the actual pressure standard to adjust. After the adjustment is completed, press and hold the LINK button for 3 seconds to save and return to the main interface. 2. After setting of the calibration tool is completed, power on the vehicle, walk to the right rear tire position of the vehicle (near the installation position of the tire pressure CAN module host), press and hold the SET button in the middle of the device for two seconds and upload information to the tire pressure CAN module host.
Sensor Detection Operation
1. Walk to the tire and press the "CODE" button on the rightmost of the calibration tool to enter the detection mode, and the display will show "Id LF"; Place the display of the calibration tool close to the tire sensor (generally near the valve, with the calibration tool be kept no more than 7.87 in from the tire); After reading the code, a long "Be" sound will be heard and the tire data will be shown: The six-digit ID code, temperature and pressure display in turn. 2. When the code reading fails, a short "Be-Be" sound will be heard with "Id Err" displayed, and then the screen will automatically return to standby state. In this case, you can readjust the position and reactivate.
Instructions for Calibration
1. Walk to the tire and press "+" button on the calibration tool to select the corresponding tire position. Concurrently, press the "CODE" button on the rightmost of the calibration tool to enter the code matching mode with "Id LF" displayed on the screen; Place the display of the calibration tool close to the tire sensor (generally near the valve, with the calibration tool be kept no more than 7.87 in from the tire); After reading the code, a long "Be" sound will be heard and the tire data will be shown: ID code, pressure and temperature under normal conditions, with black dots appeared on the corresponding position of the tire. If code reading is successful, continue to press the "+" button to select the corresponding tire position for the purpose of activating the sensor.
caution
There are 10 tires in total. Thus you should make sure data showing black dots on 10 tires is shown on the calibration tool. Considering that crosstalk is easy to occur in side-by-side tires after the sensor is activated, you should manually insert the equipment into the inner tube as far as possible when activating the inside tire and keep as far away as possible from the outer valve (7.87 in - 15.74 in) when activating the outside tire.
| Corresponding number | Vehicle location |
|---|---|
| 5 | Right inside of output shaft |
| 6 | Right outside of third shaft |
| 7 | Left outside of third shaft |
| 8 | Left inside of third shaft |
| 9 | Right inside of third shaft |
| 10 | Right outside of third shaft |
2. When the code reading fails, a short "Be-Be" sound will be heard with "Id Err" displayed, and then the screen will automatically return to standby state.
Uploading Data Read by Calibration Tool to CAN-based Tire Pressure Host
Locate the tire pressure CAN receiver installed on the vehicle (the host is near the inside of the right rear tire), stand on the right rear tire and press the middle upload button "SET" (about 1 second), and the calibration tool will upload the entire set of tire data to CAN receiver. The LCD flashes during the upload process, and after the uploading is completed, the calibration tool will display FINISH, and you can Check the tire pressure data on the instrument panel is updated.
caution
Make sure the data showing black dots on 10 tires is shown on the calibration tool. 8.3BAR=120 psi means that the current standard pressure is set to 120 psi.
1.11.1.8 Yaw Rate Sensor Calibration Procedure
Yaw Rate Sensor Calibration Scene
• Replace the slew rate sensor. • Replace the EBS ECU.
Vehicle Calibration Requirements
• Keep the wheels straight.
Calibration Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Automatically identify or select Windrose - Select corresponding model - Click the special function - Calibrate yaw rate on the scan tool. Step 4: Operate following the prompts on the scan tool interface. Step 5: Calibration is completed.
1.11.1.9 Steering Angle Sensor Calibration Procedure
Steering Angle Sensor Calibration Scene
• Replace the steering angle sensor. • Replace the EBS ECU.
Vehicle Calibration Requirements
• Keep the wheels straight.
Calibration Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC.
Step 3: Automatically identify or select Windrose - Select corresponding model - Click the special function - Calibrate steering angle on the scan tool. Step 4: Operate following the prompts on the scan tool interface. Step 5: Calibration is completed.
1.11.1.10 EPB Angle Zeroing Procedure
EPB Angle Zeroing Scene
• Replace the parking solenoid valve.
Vehicle Calibration Requirements
• The vehicle should be parked on level road.
Calibration Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Automatically identify or select Windrose on the scan tool - Select corresponding model - Click the special function - Angle zeroing. Step 4: Operate following the prompts on the scan tool interface. Step 5: Calibration is completed.
1.11.1.11 ECAS Calibration Procedure
Calibration Device
– Computer: Laptop running with WIN7 or higher operating system; – CAN adapter: Special USB-CAN adapter Connect the USB port of the computer and the OBD port of the vehicle through the adapter and adapter cable to communicate with ECAS ECU. The adapter cable is designed with three DB9 adapters that are compatible with CAN cables. Select appropriate adapters with adapter 9-pin interfaces according to the CAN pin definition of the OBD on real vehicles.
Function of ECAS Calibration Software
– Upon completion of installation of the ECAS, calibrate its initial height, including the normal height, the height upper limit and the height lower limit; – Diagnose faults; Modify ECU parameter configuration; – The auxiliary detection of ECAS EOL covers detection of ECAS solenoid valve movement, detection of height sensor installation and detection of signal, etc.
Software Startup
Connect the computer to ECU via a diagnostic cable, turn on the main power and key power, and then run the calibration software.
Software Main Interface
After the software is successfully connected to the ECAS ECU, you can read the power supply voltage, software version, fault information, etc. on the interface.
Parameter Configuration
Options: Modify Individual Parameters or Modify All Parameters are available as needed. The parameter value determines the structure configuration and function settings of ECAS. The parameters can be exported from the prototype or pre-documented and imported into a new ECU during configuration. Parameter configuration should be completed by specially trained calibrators.
Modification of Individual Parameters
1. Click "System" menu to select "Parameters", or directly click the button icon in the shortcut bar to enter the parameter configuration interface. 2. Click "Read From ECU" button to read current parameters in ECU and check the current value of the specified parameter. To modify the value of the specified parameter, you can directly enter the value in the blank of "Parameter Value", and then click "Write Into ECU" button. You will be prompted to enter a verification code during writing (the last four characters of ROOT code when registering the license).
Modification of All Parameters
You can import or export all ECU parameters via "ECU Replacement" function. In addition to the general parameters displayed on "Parameter Interface", CAN bus configuration, axle load information, default height characteristic parameters, etc. are included. Data bulk load or exporting calibration data for backup can be achieved through "ECU Replacement". After importing, click "ECU Reset" on the shortcut button bar to allow parameters to come into effect. You will be prompted to enter a verification code during importing.
Fault Inspection
Upon completion of parameter configuration and ECU reset, wait for more than 8 seconds to observe the calibration software interface and check if there is a fault prompt. If a fault occurs, determine the type of fault according to the current fault information read through the calibration software, and eliminate the fault step by step. After troubleshooting, click "ECU Reset", wait for more than 8 seconds again, and confirm that there is no DTC before proceeding to the next step for detection of solenoid valve and height sensor as well as height calibration.
Solenoid Valve and Sensor Control Detection
caution
The chassis may suddenly go up and down during lifting test and calibration. Thus, in this process, make sure the installation personnel is in a safe position!!!
Run the ECAS calibration software, click the "System" menu after successful connection, and select "Inflate/Deflate Solenoid Valve" to enter the detection interface. Select the installed airbag for testing. Operation method: Select the front axle airbag, left rear airbag, right rear airbag and other airbags separately on the interface, and click Inflate or Deflate to observe the shape and pressure change of the corresponding airbag are correct, and Check the solenoid valve channels are normal and whether the left and right pipelines are falsely connected. Check the air pressure value is normal and whether the connectors of the air pressure sensor (if any) are connected correctly. During inflation or deflation of the solenoid valve, observe the value of height sensor changes towards the correct direction and Check the height sensor is reversed while the chassis is rising or lowering;
caution
Calibrate "Lifting test" function of software. It disables the solenoid valve automatically when failed to prevent damages to the circuit as a result of short circuit.
Height Sensor Misconnection Detection
caution
The chassis may suddenly go up and down during lifting test and calibration. Thus, in this process, make sure the installation personnel is in a safe position!!!
Unplug the height sensor and observe the fault information on the main interface of the calibration software is correct. For example, after unplugging the left rear height sensor, refresh the main interface to see if the corresponding DTC appears in "Current Fault" window. (For ECAS with height sensors mounted on the left and right sides of the rear axle)
caution
Lock the vehicle during diagnosis of ECAS!
Automatic control and regulation may occur in ECAS during the diagnosis, causing sudden movement of the vehicle.
Height Calibration
caution
The chassis may suddenly go up and down during lifting test and calibration. Thus, in this process, make sure the installation personnel is in a safe position!!!
Principle of height calibration: – Before calibration, park the vehicle with normal tire pressure on level ground. – The calibration is generally performed on unloaded vehicle, making it difficult to descend during calibration. For this reason, it is necessary to release the handbrake once, or calibrate with the vehicle loaded. – After the calibration is completed, difference in the air pressure of the left and right airbags may be detected or even the unilateral airbag may be collapsed on the unloaded vehicle following road test and movement. This is generally attributed to the distribution error of left and right weight on the suspension. It returns to normal if the air pressure in left and right airbags is close after vehicle loading. – In addition, the difference in left and right air pressure may be present after the running-in of the vehicle. If the difference remains significant after loading, re-correct the zero point of the swing rod, or re-calibrate as necessary. Height calibration process: 1. Select "Calibrate Height Sensor" option: In the shortcut menu bar on the main interface, click shortcut button of "Calibrate Height Sensor" to enter the calibration. Two calibration methods are available: three-point height calibration (normal height, upper limit height and lower limit height calibration) and single-point height calibration (limited to normal height calibration; upper limit height and lower limit height are automatically calculated and written by calibration software on the basis of a new normal height according to the default upper and lower limit offset in ECU). 2. : Select the airbag to be adjusted, inflate and deflate it to normal height: After adjusting the airbag to normal position, visually check that the swing rod is level, and confirm the height value (2nd generation sensor: 270-330TT; 1st generation sensor 190- 240TT). No specific requirements are imposed on the difference in left and right height values. Make sure the difference is not more than 20TTwhen the swing rod maintains level through visual inspection.
caution
When two height sensors are available, the height adjustment on left and right must be selected simultaneously.
After the swing rod is leveled, fix it, and click to save the normal height. (When single-point calibration is selected, the upper limit and lower limit calibration will be automatically completed; When three-point calibration is selected, after the normal height is saved, you should raise the suspension to maximum height and save the upper limit height, and then lower the suspension to the minimum height and save the upper limit and lower limit height)
3. Fill in the real height value of chassis or airbag: If the automobile factory makes a request for writing the real current normal height, upper limit height, and lower limit height simultaneously when saving the height, you should fill in the corresponding height value (mm) in the pop-up window for filling. This function is only available in V1.3.2.5 and above version calibration software. 4. Click "End Calibration" to exit the calibration process. Click "ECU Reset" button in the shortcut menu bar to allow the new
height to come into effect. 1.11.1.12 BDCU Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC.
Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "BDCU" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "BDCU" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.13 CDC Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CDC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CDC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.14 CMU1 Software Diagnosis Procedures
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN
Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU1" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU1" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.15 CMU2 Software Diagnosis Procedures
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU2" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU2" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.16 CMU3 Software Diagnosis Procedures
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU3" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool.
Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU3" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.17 CMU4 Software Diagnosis Procedures
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU4" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU4" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.18 HUD Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "HUD" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "HUD" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.19 IPC Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "IPC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "IPC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.20 SSM Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "SSM" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "SSM" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.21 TPMS Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool.
Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "TPMS" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "TPMS" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.22 AC Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "AC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "AC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
1.11.1.23 VDC Software Diagnosis Procedure
Diagnosis Procedure
Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN
Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "VDC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "VDC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.
2Maintenance and Service
2.1 Vehicle Inspection
2.1.1 Description and Operation
2.1.1.1 Inspections Items During Vehicle Operation
Operation of Horn
The horn shall be pressed occasionally to ensure that the horn is working properly, and all button positions shall be checked.
Operation of Braking System
When braking, pay attention to abnormal noises from the braking system, increased brake pedal stroke, or repetitive braking deviations. In addition, if the brake warning lamp is illuminated or flashing, it indicates that certain parts of the braking system may be failed.
Alignment of Tires and Vehicle
Pay attention to vibrations of steering wheel or seats when driving at normal road speeds. If the steering wheel or seats vibrate, it indicates that a wheel shall be balanced. In addition, if off-tracking is found of the vehicle running on a straight road, it indicates that the tire pressure shall be adjusted or the wheel alignment should be performed.
Operation of Steering System
Pay attention to changes in steering operations. If it is difficult to turn the steering wheel or there is a larger free travel, or abnormal sounds are heard when turning or parking, inspection shall be carried out. It is necessary to occasionally observe the light pattern of the headlamp in the event of focusing, and make adjustment if the beam focusing of the headlamp is incorrect.
2.1.1.2 Inspections Items During Refueling
If a system (except for the windshield washer) loses fuel, it indicates that the system fails, and it shall be inspected and repaired immediately.
Inspection of Coolant Level and Condition
Check the coolant level in the expansion tank, add coolant if necessary, check the coolant, and replace dirty coolant.
Inspection of Washer Fluid Level
Check the washer fluid level in the tank and add washer fluid if necessary.
2.1.1.3 Inspection Items At Least Once a Week
Tyre Inspection
Maintenance instructions: Check the tires for abnormal wear or damage and the wheels for damage, check the pressure of cold tires and the spare tires for vehicles equipped with spare tires, and maintain the recommended pressure indicated on the tire label. Maintenance interval: Check at least once a week, and increase the frequency of inspection according to the actual situation.
2.1.1.4 Inspection Items At Least Once a Month
Air Pressure Inspection of Tires and Wheels
Check the tires for abnormal wear or damage and the wheels for damage, check the pressure of cold tires and the spare tires for vehicles equipped with spare tires, and maintain the recommended pressure indicated on the tire label.
Operation of Lamps
Check the operations of license plate lamps,headlamps (including high and low beams), tail lamps,stop lamps, turn signal lamps, backup lamps, and hazard warning lamps.
Inspection of Oil Leakage
After the vehicle has been parked for a certain period of time, check whether there is water, oil or other liquids on the ground under the vehicle. It is normal for the A/C system to drip after use. If leakage of other liquids is found, investigate the cause and troubleshoot immediately.
2.1.1.5 Inspection Items At Least Twice a Year
Lubrication of Door and Window Sealing Strip
Apply a thin layer of silicone-based grease to the sealing strip with a clean rag.
2.1.1.6 Inspection Items At Least Once a Year
Condition and Operation of Seat Belt
Check the harness system, including braided straps, latches, lock plates, retractors, guide rings and fixtures.
Body Lubrication and Maintenance
Lubricate all door hinges and hydraulic locks.
Cooling System
Check the coolant. If the coolant is too dirty or rusty, you should drain and flush the cooling system and refill with new coolant. Maintain proper coolant concentration to ensure proper freezing, boiling and corrosion performances and operating temperatures. Check the hoses and replace hoses
that are cracked, swollen, or aged. Tighten the clamps, and clean the outside of the radiator and the A/C system condenser as well as the filler cap. Carry out pressure test the cooling system to ensure that the system is functioning properly.
2.2 Maintenance and Service
2.2.1 Contents of Maintenance and Service
2.2.1.1 Maintenance Provisions
caution
If you have any questions about how to maintain your vehicle, please contact a Windrose authorized service station directly for help.
It is necessary to carry out routine maintenance and regular maintenance on the vehicle, which can ensure the normal use, efficiency, reliability of the vehicle and a good ride experience, and reduce the possible maintenance costs incurred. For the routine maintenance items that can be completed by the user himself according to the manual, the user can complete the routine maintenances in accordance with the relevant instructions of this manual. The systems installed on the vehicle are sophisticated and there are strict after-sales service requirements for new energy vehicles in accordance with national laws and regulations. Therefore, Windrose recommends that you should complete the regular maintenance of the vehicle at Windrose authorized service station.
caution
Please keep regular maintenance records as the basis for the "warranty".
2.2.1.2 First Maintenance
The first maintenance should be completed at an authorized maintenance service station after 6 months or 5,000km based on the vehicle model, and the users are requested to supervise the operation of the service station. The specific maintenance contents and technical requirements are as follows:
Vehicle Inspection
1. Check according to the Windrose Service Manual. 2. Check the date of sales and driving mileage of the vehicle are within the specified range.
High Voltage Battery System
1. Check the high voltage battery box and clean the box body to ensure that there is no obvious dust and the connector is not blocked. 2. Check that the high voltage battery connecting wire connector is firmly connected, and the skin insulation layer is not damaged. 3. Check that the fixing bolts of the high voltage battery box are free of looseness and falling off, and the box body is not deformed. 4. The surface and inside of the charging socket/charging gun are dry and free of dust and other foreign matters, and the cover plate is sealed reliably. 5. Check the terminals of the charging socket are yellow, blackened or ablated. 6. Check the SOC of battery packs is abnormal and confirm the battery fault feedback. 7. Check the maximum voltage, minimum voltage, average voltage, maximum differential voltage, maximum temperature, minimum temperature, average temperature and maximum temperature difference of the high voltage battery pack. 8. Carry out charging test on the vehicle in locked and sleeping state. After the vehicle is powered off and fall into sleeping state, insert the charging gun into the charging port to wake up the vehicle and read the charging current and charging power on the charging pile.
Electric Drive Axle System
1. Check the lubricating oil in electric drive axle. 2. Check the high voltage cables of the electric drive axle MCU, the low voltage harness of MCU and TCU and the harness of sensors are firm, whether the harness is damaged, and whether the fixing is protected in place. 3. Check the cooling water pipe and interface of the electric drive axle are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 4. Check the insulation, ground wire, and low voltage connectors of the electric drive axle motor and MCU are normal. 5. Check the fastening bolts of the electric drive axle reducer, controller, motor and other axle parts for looseness, the filling and drain plugs for looseness and oil leakage, and the wheel side and reducer for oil leakage. 6. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the electric drive axle.
Motor Control System
1. Check the low voltage harness and connector terminals of the controller are loose and whether they are properly sealed.
2. Disconnect the high voltage and check whether the insulation resistance, harness, and ground of the MCU are normal. 3. Check the heat dissipation of the MCU is normal. 4. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the MCU.
PDU All-in-one System
1. Check the high voltage harnesses and aviation connectors are firmly connected, and whether the fixing protection is in place. 2. Check the low voltage harness and connector are firmly connected and fix the harness. 3. Check the insulation resistance value is normal. 4. Check the cooling water line and interface are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 5. Check the ground cable is secure.
Electro-hydraulic Steering System
1. Check the clearance of the steering tie rod ball joint and cotter pins and tighten the fixing bolts of each component. 2. Check the electric steering pump is working properly, and the connecting wire and connector should be firmly connected. 3. Check the steering wheel locking bolts and steering shaft locking bolts are tightened reliably. 4. Check the steering fluid level or change the steering fluid and clean the filter element. 5. Check and lubricate the steering tie rod ball joint. 6. Check the steering free clearance is normal. 7. Check the oil pipe clamp is loose, and whether there is oil leakage. 8. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric power steering motor controller.
Electric Air Compressor System
1. Check the air filter element of the electric air compressor and purge and clean the air filter element. 2. Check the high voltage harness is damaged or falsely connected, and tighten the screws of the fixing bracket of the electric air compressor. 3. Check the insulation resistance of the air compressor and the high voltage harness is normal. 4. Check the dryer, condenser, four-circuit protection valve, and serpentine pipe for air leakage. 5. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric air compressor.
Battery Cooling System
1. Check the liquid level of the expanding tank for abnormalities. 2. Turn on "Left Battery Compressor" and "Right Battery Compressor" on the maintenance switch interface, read the data of battery and battery thermal management system, and check whether the refrigeration function is normal. 3. Check that the battery cooling system is filled up to standard without leakage or missing. 4. Check the battery cooling system, pipelines and control systems, connecting wires and connectors are firmly connected, whether the skin insulation layer is not damaged, and check related pipelines for faults and interferences. 5. Check the battery cooling water pump is working properly and whether the coolant filter is clogged with impurities.
Brake system
1. Check the effectiveness of the parking brake system. 2. Check the free travel of brake pedal. 3. Check the brake pipeline, front and rear axle modules, and electronic parking modules for air leakage. 4. Check the wear of the brake linings. 5. Check the tightening of the brake system bolts. 6. Drain the air reservoir (replace the drying tank if a large amount of water is detected in the air reservoir twice).
Chassis System
1. Check the airbag installation and tightening and check for wear. 2. Check the suspension height and the airbag for air leakage. 3. Check the shock absorber for oil leakage. 4. Check and fasten the bolts of the shock absorber fixing bracket and the shock absorber. 5. Check and fasten the bolts of the fastening limit block bracket. 6. Check and fasten the bolts of the X-shaped control arm, longitudinal thrust rod assembly, and thrust rod bracket. 7. Check and fasten the nuts of U-bolts.
8. Check and fasten the fixing bolts of height valve. 9. Check the brake air circuit for air leakage. 10. Check the air reservoir for air leakage. 11. Check the air pipe connected to the trailer for air leakage. 12. Read and record the EBS\ECAS\EPB DTCs.
Cab System
1. Check the front cover opens properly and smoothly. 2. Check the wipers, washers, rearview mirrors, window regulators, awning sunshade, front windshield shades, etc. are working properly. 3. Check the steering wheel, IVI, seat, etc. are working properly. 4. Check the door can open and close normally. 5. Check the left and right side wall trim panels, boarding steps, fenders, etc. are loose.
Electrical System
1. Check the fastening of the battery power line and ground wire. 2. Check the low voltage battery capacity. 3. Check the working condition of DC/DC and whether it can charge the low voltage battery normally. 4. Check various lamps, indicators, instrument and IVI systems are working properly. 5. Read and record vehicle DTCs and operating data. 6. Check the harness for scratches, interferences, open circuit and short circuit, and the harness should be kept away from the heat source. 7. Check the connection of the harnesses and the connectors of the electrical appliances. 8. Check the fuses, relays, lamps, and other electrical components are working properly. 9. Check the self-test of the electronic control system is normal and whether the system is faulty. 10. Check the modules are loose, and whether the connectors and pole ares tightly fastened.
A/C System
1. Check the A/C system is working properly. 2. Blow the A/C filter element.
Fifth Wheel System
1. Check the fifth wheel for damage, bending, omission, or cracks, etc. 2. Check the fifth wheel is functioning properly. 3. Check the mounting bolts that fix the fifth wheel. 4. Check the wear of the fifth wheel wear ring, lock hook, fifth wheel panel and trailer traction pin, and replace it if the wear is out of tolerance in a timely manner. 5. Check the filling of the grease.
2.2.1.3 Regular Maintenance
The regular inspection should be completed at an authorized maintenance service station based on the vehicle model, and the users are requested to supervise the operation of the service station. The specific maintenance contents and technical requirements are as follows:
Vehicle Inspection
1. Check according to the Windrose Service Manual. 2. Check the date of sales and driving mileage of the vehicle are within the specified range.
High Voltage Battery System
1. Check the high voltage battery box and clean the box body to ensure that there is no obvious dust and the connector is not blocked. 2. Check that the high voltage battery connecting wire connector is firmly connected, and the skin insulation layer is not damaged. 3. Check that the fixing bolts of the high voltage battery box are free of looseness and falling off, and the box body is not deformed. 4. The surface and inside of the charging socket/charging gun are dry and free of dust and other foreign matters, and the cover plate is sealed reliably. 5. Check the terminals of the charging socket are yellow, blackened or ablated. 6. Check the SOC of battery packs is abnormal and confirm the battery fault feedback. 7. Check the maximum voltage, minimum voltage, average voltage, maximum differential voltage, maximum temperature, minimum temperature, average temperature and maximum temperature difference of the high voltage battery pack.
8. Carry out charging test on the vehicle in locked and sleeping state. After the vehicle is powered off and fall into sleeping state, insert the charging gun into the charging port to wake up the vehicle and read the charging current and charging power on the charging pile. 9. The SOC of high voltage battery should be calibrated once per month; In case the vehicle has been parked for more than 3 weeks, SOC calibration should be performed at least once. 10. High voltage battery calibration method: Use the high voltage battery until its SOC becomes 20% – 25%; Fully charge the high voltage battery; Use the high voltage battery until its SOC becomes 40% – 60%.
Electric Drive Axle System
1. Change the lubricating oil in electric drive axle. 2. Check the high voltage cables of the electric drive axle MCU, the low voltage harness of MCU and TCU and the harness of sensors are firm, whether the harness is damaged, and the fixing is protected in place. 3. Check the cooling water pipe and interface of the electric drive axle are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 4. Check the insulation, ground wire, and low voltage connectors of the electric drive axle motor and MCU are normal. 5. Check the fastening bolts of the electric drive axle reducer, controller, motor and other axle parts for looseness, the filling and drain plugs for looseness and oil leakage, and the wheel side and reducer for oil leakage. 6. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the electric drive axle.
Motor Control System
1. Check the low voltage harness and connector terminals of the controller are loose and whether they are properly sealed. 2. Disconnect the high voltage and check whether the insulation resistance, harness, and ground of the MCU are normal. 3. Check the heat dissipation of the MCU is normal. 4. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the MCU.
PDU All-in-one System
1. Check the high voltage harnesses and aviation connectors are firmly connected, and whether the fixing protection is in place. 2. Check the low voltage harness and connector are firmly connected and fix the harness. 3. Check the insulation resistance value is normal. 4. Check the cooling water line and interface are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 5. Check the ground cable is secure.
Electro-hydraulic Steering System
1. Check the clearance of the steering tie rod ball joint and cotter pins and tighten the fixing bolts of each component. 2. Check the electric steering pump is working properly, and the connecting wire and connector should be firmly connected. 3. Check the steering wheel locking bolts and steering shaft locking bolts are tightened reliably. 4. Change the steering fluid level or the steering fluid and clean the filter element. 5. Check and lubricate the steering tie rod ball joint. 6. Check the steering free clearance is normal. 7. Check the oil pipe clamp is loose, and whether there is oil leakage. 8. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric power steering motor controller.
Electric Air Compressor System
1. Replace the air filter element of the electric air compressor. 2. Check the high voltage harness is damaged or falsely connected, and tighten the screws of the fixing bracket of the electric air compressor. 3. Check the insulation resistance of the air compressor and the high voltage harness is normal. 4. Check the dryer, condenser, four-circuit protection valve, and serpentine pipe for air leakage. 5. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric air compressor.
Battery Cooling System
1. Check the liquid level of the expanding tank for abnormalities.
2. Turn on "Left Battery Compressor" and "Right Battery Compressor" on the maintenance switch interface, read the data of battery and battery thermal management system, and check whether the refrigeration function is normal. 3. Change the battery cooling system coolant. 4. Check the battery cooling system, pipelines and control systems, connecting wires and connectors are firmly connected, the skin insulation layer is not damaged, and check related pipelines for faults and interferences. 5. Check the battery cooling water pump is working properly and the coolant filter is clogged with impurities.
Brake system
1. Check the effectiveness of the parking brake system. 2. Check the free travel of brake pedal. 3. Check the brake pipeline, front and rear axle modules, and electronic parking modules for air leakage. 4. Replace the brake lining. 5. Check the tightening of the brake system bolts. 6. Drain the air reservoir (replace the drying tank if a large amount of water is detected in the air reservoir twice).
Chassis System
1. Check the airbag installation and tightening and check for wear. 2. Check the suspension height and the airbag for air leakage. 3. Check the shock absorber for oil leakage. 4. Check and fasten the bolts of the shock absorber fixing bracket and the shock absorber. 5. Check and fasten the bolts of the fastening limit block bracket. 6. Check and fasten the bolts of the X-shaped control arm, longitudinal thrust rod assembly, and thrust rod bracket. 7. Check and fasten the nuts of U-bolts. 8. Check and fasten the fixing bolts of height valve. 9. Check the brake air circuit for air leakage. 10. Check the air reservoir for air leakage. 11. Check the air pipe connected to the trailer for air leakage. 12. Read and record the EBS\ECAS\EPB DTCs.
Cab System
1. Check the front cover opens properly and smoothly. 2. Check the wipers, washers, rearview mirrors, window regulators, awning sunshade, front windshield shades, etc. are working properly. 3. Check the steering wheel, IVI, seat, etc. are working properly. 4. Check the door can open and close normally. 5. Check the left and right side wall trim panels, boarding steps, fenders, etc. are loose.
Electrical System
1. Check the fastening of the battery power line and ground wire. 2. Check the low voltage battery capacity. 3. Check the working condition of DC/DC and whether it can charge the low voltage battery normally. 4. Check various lamps, indicators, instrument and IVI systems are working properly. 5. Read and record vehicle DTCs and operating data. 6. Check the harness for scratches, interferences, open circuit and short circuit, and the harness should be kept away from the heat source. 7. Check the connection of the harnesses and the connectors of the electrical appliances. 8. Check the fuses, relays, lamps, and other electrical components are working properly. 9. Check the self-test of the electronic control system is normal and whether the system is faulty. 10. Check the modules are loose, and whether the connectors and pole ares tightly fastened.
A/C System
1. Check the A/C system is working properly. 2. Replace the A/C filter element.
Fifth Wheel System
1. Check the fifth wheel for damage, bending, omission, or cracks, etc. 2. Check the fifth wheel is functioning properly. 3. Check the mounting bolts that fix the fifth wheel. 4. Check the wear of the fifth wheel wear ring, lock hook, fifth wheel panel and trailer traction pin, and replace it if the wear is out of tolerance in a timely manner. 5. Change the grease.
| Application | Specification | Capacity |
|---|---|---|
| Final drive fluid (3 motor) | GL-5 (75W/90), Extended Life | 16.5L (intermediate axle) + 11.5L (rear axle) |
| Final drive fluid (4 motor) | GL-5 (75W/90), Extended Life | 16.5L (intermediate axle) + 16.5L (rear axle) |
| Motor electronically controlled antifreeze (3 motor) | Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C | 30L (reference value, add on request) |
| Motor electronically controlled antifreeze (four motors) | Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C | 35L (reference value, add on request) |
| Battery antifreeze (NCM lithium) | Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C | 37L (reference value, add on request) |
| Battery antifreeze (LFP) | Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C | 27L (reference value, add on request) |
| Steering gear hydraulic oil | ATF3 | 4L |
| A/C Refrigerant | HFC-134a | 850g±50g |
2.2.2 Specifications
2.2.2.1 Fluid Capacity
| Mainte- nance Item | Maintenance Interval | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Every 15,000k- m/12 Months | Every 50000km/ 6 Months | Every 60000km/ 6 Months | Every 60000km/ 24 Months | Every 80000km/ 12 Months | Every 300000k- m/12 Months | Every 40,000km | Every 500000k- m | |
| Dryer | ● | |||||||
| Air filter element | ● | |||||||
| Steering fluid reservoir filter element | ● | ● | ||||||
| Power steering fluid | ● | ● | ||||||
| Gear oil | ● | |||||||
| A/C filter element | ● | |||||||
| Coolant | ● | |||||||
| Electric drive axle final drive | ● | |||||||
| Air compressor air filter element | ● | |||||||
| Drying tank | ● |
2.2.3 Maintenance Cycle
2.2.3.1 Maintenance Schedule
Normal Use of Vehicle
The maintenance items given in the maintenance schedule are conducive to: – The delivery of goods under the restrictions indicated on the tire label attached to the edge of the driver door. – The driving on appropriate roads and under legal operating restrictions.
Regular Maintenance Schedule (Tractor)
caution
The maintenance interval or mileage given, whichever comes first in the regular maintenance schedule shall prevail.
warning !
The user should use special after-sales fluids and accessories designated by the OEM. Otherwise, paid services will be provided by OEM as to damages caused by violating the rules.
2.2.4 Quality Warranty Statement
2.2.4.1 Quality Warranty Statement
Windrose will warrant to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the new vehicle, including all parts of its emission control system, meets three conditions: 1.It is designed, built, and equipped so it conforms at the time of sale to the ultimate purchaser with the requirements of 40CFR Part 1037.120 as well as with all applicable regulations adopted by the California Air Resourcers Board pursuant to its authority in chapters 1 and 2, Part 5, division 26 of the Health and Safety Code. 2.It is free from defects in materials and workmanship that could cause the vehicle to fail to conform to the regulated requirements or could cause failure of a warranted part during the applicable warranty period. 3.The powertrain is identical in all material respects to the zero-emission powertrain as described in the related powertrain application for certification. Additional items: – For emissions-related warranty (5 years or 100,000 miles) under “ powertrain ” list main components that need to be covered – motor, inverter, HV battery charging system, batteries and thermal management. – The emission-related warranty covers all components whose failure would increase a vehicle's emissions of air conditioning refrigerants. – Windrose warrants that its vehicles are (1) designed, built and equipped with tires that conform, at the time of sale, with requirements of vehicle manufacturers whose vehicles are designed to meet applicable 2014 and later, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and National Highway Traffic and Safety Administration greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency standards, and (2) those tires are free from defects in material and workmanship which cause the vehicle to fail to conform with the vehicle manufacturer ’ s requirements for a period of 2 years or 24,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
3Diagnosis
3.1 Mechanical Fault Diagnosis
3.1.1 Mechanical Fault Diagnosis Overview
3.1.1.1 Overview
Mechanical diagnosis is to troubleshoot faults in vehicle, analyze and make judgments in accordance with relevant technical standards with the use of special tools, instrument, equipment and software for the purpose of investigating the cause of the fault and confirming the location of the fault. In general, the fault diagnosis of vehicles is performed through intuitive experience and instrument and equipment. With the development of vehicle technology, especially the application of electronic technology and computer technology in vehicles, the fault diagnosis methods of vehicles have been developed from observation, hearing, smelling, touching, isolation, testing, comparison and other traditional experiences to the use of information technology-based complete, modern fault diagnosis technology systems for vehicles with the digital, integrated and intelligent diagnostic equipment as the auxiliary means. This section aims to analyze and eliminate common faults found during driving so as to make it easier for maintenance personnel to quickly find and eliminate the source of the fault.
3.1.1.2 Precautions
Cautions Regarding Mechanical Fault Diagnosis
warning !
1. Park the vehicle on level ground or in a well-ventilated operation room. 2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the ignition switch to prevent the vehicle from slipping during maintenance. 3. Do not operate under the vehicle when it is lifted only with a jack or lift. Unless the vehicle is parked on a sturdy tripod or bracket suitable for lifting the vehicle. Place wedges at the wheels to prevent the wheels from rolling when the tires are not off the ground. 4. During maintenance, ensure safety and do not damage parts or operate in violation of regulations.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Abnormal noise in steering system | Refer to Diagnosis of Abnormal Sounds in Steering System - Abnormal Sounds in Steering System |
| 2 | Abnormal sound in brake | Refer to Diagnosis of Abnormal Sounds in Brake - Abnormal Sounds in Brake |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Axle steering occurs when the left and right wheelbases of the vehicle are not the same, which aggravates the tire wear and even leads to tire eating. | Check the dimensional error of the frame, air spring, front axle, rear axle and other parts on regular basis. When the dimensional errors reaches a certain level, the left and right wheelbase will not be equal. |
| 2 | Tire wear caused by changes in wheel alignment angle as a result of overloading | Increase the tightness of the front hub bearing |
| 3 | Significant fluctuations in toe-in of the wheels also result in wear | In the event of tire eating caused by wheel camber and kingpin inclination that are out of tolerance, the front axle assembly should be replaced |
| 4 | Abnormal tire friction caused by steerable wheel oscillation | Strictly control the toe-in of steering wheels |
| 5 | The unevenness of steel rim end face is out of tolerance | Replace the steel rim with qualified flatness or process the plane of the steel rim to make it qualified |
| 6 | Overloaded tires | Avoid severe overloading of the vehicle |
| 7 | The tire pressure is too high, resulting in crown wear | Deflate tires with high air pressure to keep the air pressure within the specified range |
| 8 | Tire rotation is not performed in time | Replace the tires in a timely manner |
| 9 | Overloaded tires lead to deformation or runout of steel rim end face, and the runout of steel rim end face also causes runout of tire end face | Reduce wheel radial runout, end face runout, imbalance of mass distribution, etc. |
| 10 | Severe overloading of front axle leads to great deformation of front axle | In the event of rigid deformation of front axle, the front axle should be replaced |
3.1.2 Integrated Vehicle Faults
3.1.2.1 Noises and Abnormal Sounds in Vehicle
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
3.1.2.2 Tire Wear
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 11 | Frequent and violent starts, braking, high-torque drive, and stops | Develop correct driving habits and avoid frequent and violent starts, braking, high-torque drive and stops |
| 12 | Insufficient tire inflation pressure or severe overload | Avoid severe overloading of the vehicle |
| 13 | Inferior quality of parts, such as steering knuckle bushing deformation, serious wear, excessive clearance between kingpin and steering knuckle bushing, loose front axle hub bearing, loose rear axle hub bearing, etc. | Replace inferior parts |
| 14 | The steel rim is out of round or eccentric, and the outer tire is repaired due to damage | Replace the reinforced rim |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The inflation pump connecting pipe is broken | Weld or replace the inflation pump connecting pipe |
| 2 | The inflation pump is faulty | Repair or replace the inflation pump |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The front wheel alignment angle is inaccurate and the toe-in is excessive | Check whether the front wheel alignment angle and toe-in meet the requirements; If not, adjust them |
| 2 | Deformed front spokes, unequal number of tire bolts, too low front tire pressure or tire repair, etc. result in unbalance | Jack the front axle to test the wheels and check the dynamic balance of the wheels and whether the tires are deformed to a large extent. If necessary, replace the wheel with a one with good quality for comparative test |
| 3 | The drive system parts are loosely installed | Tighten drive system components |
3.1.2.3 Insufficient Air Pressure Throughout the Vehicle
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
3.1.2.4 Steering Wheel Shaking at High Speeds
Fault Description:
The vehicle is unstable or swings, or even the steering wheel shakes at high speeds or at a certain high speed.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 4 | The steering drive shaft is bent, dynamic unbalance occurs and the front axle is deformed | Check whether the front axle and frame are deformed and whether the steering drive shaft is bent, and perform dynamic balance on the drive shaft when possible |
| 5 | Shock absorber fault | Replace the shock absorber |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Inconsistent left and right tire pressures | Inflate under-inflated tires |
| 2 | Inaccurate alignment of the front wheels. The front wheel camber, kingpin angles or kingpin inclination are not equal | Both small toe-in or negative toe-in can cause driving deviation. When this occurs, go to a professional maintenance station for testing |
3.1.2.5 Driving Deviation
Fault Description:
Check for driving deviation as follows: Generally during driving, center the steering wheel, and then take your hands off the steering wheel to see if the vehicle is driving in a straight line. If not, it can be determined that the vehicle is deviating from the road.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Suspension components are damaged | Check the suspension components for damage |
| 2 | The air spring is faulty | Check the dynamic suspension |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Front and rear suspension components | Check the front and rear suspensions |
| 2 | The air spring is faulty | Check the air spring |
3.1.3 Frame and Suspension Faults
3.1.3.1 Diagnosis of Faults in Frame and Suspension
Fault Description 1:
The front bottom contacts the ground or the riding height is low.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
Fault Description 2:
The vehicle leans to one side.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Unqualified or worn tires are used, or the tires on both sides are of different sizes; The air pressure in tires on both sides is not equal, or the tire one side is severely worn | Rotate tires to ensure consistent tire pressure |
| 2 | The front hub bearing is not properly adjusted, causing it to be too tight or too loose. The front wheel alignment angle on both sides is different or changes; The front axle is bent and deformed | Adjust the front hub bearing; Correct the front axle to restore to correct front wheel alignment angle; Adjust the toe-in to correct value |
| 3 | One side of the frame is broken; The frame is deformed | Repair the frame and correct the deformation |
| 4 | The rear axle housing is bent and deformed or broken | Correct or replace the rear axle housing |
| 5 | The rear axle is misaligned with the frame | Check and adjust the position of the rear axle relative to the frame |
| 6 | Extreme eccentricity | Note eccentric load and load deflection during driving |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Tire pressure is inconsistent; Tires are not of the same size; Severe wear | Check and adjust the tire pressure; Replace the tires with new ones |
| 2 | Wheel dynamic unbalance | Carry out dynamic balance test on the wheel assembly to control the unbalance within the allowable range |
3.1.4 Wheel and Tire Faults 3.1.4.1 Diagnosis of Driving Deviation
Fault Description:
When the vehicle is deviating to one side, the driver should hold the steering wheel with both hands or apply force on other side of the steering wheel to ensure normal driving. Otherwise it is easy for the vehicle to deviate from the driving direction.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
3.1.4.2 Diagnosis of Front Wheel Vibrations
Fault Description:
The front wheels vibrate to left and right or bump vertically during driving. This will have a great impact on the vehicle speed, making it uncomfortable to sit in the vehicle.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 3 | The front wheel hub bearing is damaged or loose | Check and adjust the tightness of the front wheel hub bearing of the vehicle, and replace the damaged hub bearing |
| 4 | Incorrect front wheel alignment | Adjust the front wheel alignment and toe-in |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | There is air in steering hydraulic system | Discharge air from the hydraulic system |
| 2 | Dirt is clogged in the hydraulic pipeline | Remove dirt from the hydraulic pipeline system |
| 3 | Mechanical system is faulty | Check and eliminate mechanical faults in power steering system |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | There is air in steering hydraulic system | Discharge air from the steering hydraulic system |
| 2 | The electric steering pump is damaged | Check and repair the electric steering pump |
| 3 | The steering control mechanism is damaged | Clean or repair the steering gear |
| 4 | Mechanical collision sounds in steering system | Adjust or repair the steering transmission mechanism |
3.1.5 Steering System Faults
3.1.5.1 Diagnosis of Steering Wheel Shaking
Fault Description:
The shaking steering wheel and vibrating front wheels can cause the car front end to shake while driving, and the driver has to slow down in serious condition.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
3.1.5.2 Diagnosis of Abnormal Sounds in Steering System
Fault Description:
The abnormal sounds heard in the steering system while driving or high speed driving mainly come from the steering gear, electric steering pump, etc.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Uneven braking force of wheel brakes | Adjust the wheel brakes uniformly as far as possible |
| 2 | Unequal exposure of left and right brake chamber push rods | Adjust the brake chamber push rod to ensure consistency between the left and right brake chamber push rods |
| 3 | Inconsistent left and right tire pressures | Inflate the tires to ensure consistent tire pressure |
| 4 | A wheel friction plate is contaminated by oil or the friction plates are of inconsistent model | Replace the inconsistent friction plates and remove the oil |
| 5 | The frame is deformed or the vehicle is heavily eccentric | Correct the frame to keep the vehicle load balanced |
| Step | Diagnostic Content | Measure |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | The brake pedal free travel is too large | Adjust the free stroke of the brake pedal to the specified value |
| 2 | The air pressure of the air reservoir is insufficient | Adjust the air pressure of the brake pipeline to the specified value |
| 3 | The brake system is leaking or the pipeline is clogged | Check whether the pipeline between the brake valve and the brake air pump is subject to air leakage, and replace the air pressure pipe if necessary |
| 4 | The brake valve is improperly adjusted or working poorly | Adjust or replace the brake valve |
| 5 | The wheel brake is improperly adjusted or poorly working | Adjust or replace the wheel brake |
3.1.6 Brake System Faults
3.1.6.1 Diagnosis of Braking Deviation
Fault Description:
Braking deviation is a phenomenon that the vehicle deviates to one side while driving as the left and right braking effects on the same axle are not uniform. Braking deviation occurs when applying brake or emergency brake; When the car brakes, it may drift. Minor deviation is allowed, but serious deviation may cause accidents.
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
3.1.6.2 Diagnosis of Brake Failure
Fault Description:
Obvious insufficient deceleration is found when depressing the brake pedal to slow down or stop. The vehicle cannot stop quickly when applying emergency brake, and the braking time and braking distance are extended. No tire drag traces are found or the tire drag traces are extremely short during inspection on a parked vehicle
Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting
Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.
3.1.7 Vehicle Body Faults
3.1.7.1 Note
In the process of body repair, professional and technical personnel may use sheet metal repair machines, welding machines and various grinding and cutting tools to ensure that the vehicle can be restored to the original level in terms of geometric dimensions and usability. However, sometimes, you may not be able to find the faults in the driving system and assembly mounts that can lead to serious consequences when repairing an accident vehicle. Therefore, in addition to the necessary inspections of geometrical dimensions, special attention must be paid to the following components.
3.1.7.2 Fault Inspection
1. Check that the steering mechanism and steering rod system can be operated correctly within the number of turns of the steering wheel, and visually check for bent or cracked parts. 2. Check the wheels and tires for damage, concentric rotation and imbalance. Check the tire pattern and sidewall for cuts/ check the tire pressure. 3. After body repair, carry out a road test to ensure the driving ability of the vehicle, and finally hand over the vehicle to users.
3.1.7.3 Body Fault Assessment
























































































Slight pits can be repaired without damaging the paint finish. It can be removed from inside the pit using a special lever tool (pressure tool). When performing this kind of repair, it requires that the technician has extensive experience in using special tools and sufficient knowledge about the materials, and is capable to identify faults and use correct repair methods. The pit should meet the following requirements: The pits should be limited to body positions that are easily accessible from both sides, as this repair method is rarely used for double-skinned parts or enclosed sections. Satisfactory repair results can be achieved for slight shallow pits with small deformation radius. This method is particularly applicable to damages caused by hail, or during parking or transportation. In case the diameter of the pit is less than 50mm, and the extent of damage can be assessed according to the size of the pit.
caution
The deformation of material in the center of the pit must not exceed the deformation limit.
4New Energy Vehicle Components
4.1 Integrated E-axle Device2400· 4g
4.1.1 Quality Warranty Statement
4.1.1.1 Emission Quality Warranty Statement
– For emissions-related warranty (5 years or 100,000 miles) under “ powertrain ” list main components that need to be covered – motor, inverter, HV battery charging system, batteries and thermal management. – The emission-related warranty covers all components whose failure would increase a vehicle's emissions of air conditioning refrigerants.
| Fastener name | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The grounding wire fixing bolt connecting the integrated axle and the frame assembly | M8 | (11 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| Item | General Parameters |
|---|---|
| Manufacturer | Jiangsu Maxwell Industries Co., Ltd. |
| Type | Permanent magnetic synchronous motor |
| Continuous power | 170kW |
| Peak power | 260kW |
| Continuous torque | 184 lb·ft |
| Peak torque | 405lb·ft |
| Speed range | 0-11,000 r/min |
| Insulation grade | H |
| Cooling method | Water cooling |
| Protection rating | IP67 |
| Weight | 60 kg |
| System efficiency | 97.4% |
4.1.2 specifications
4.1.2.1 Fastener Specifications
4.1.2.2 Technical Parameters
Drive Motor

4.1.3 Decomposition Diagram
4.1.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Axle Electric Drive Assy 2. Axle Electric Drive Assy
4.1.4 Inspect
4.1.4.1 Inspection of Electric Drive System
Before starting the vehicle, check whether the relevant data displayed on the instrument cluster is normal. If the data is abnormal, do not drive the vehicle. Instead, record the system fault type and related data, and report the information to the Windrose authorized service station.
caution
If the high voltage battery or motor system fails, please contact a Windrose authorized service station for repair in time.
4.1.5 System Schematic Diagram
4.1.5.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Result | To Step |
|---|---|
| 22 V - 27.4 V | Yes |
| Less than 22 V | No |
4.1.6 Diagnostic Information and Steps
4.1.6.1 Diagnosis Description
Before diagnosing faults in the integrated axle device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the integrated axle device, and then begin system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine whether the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of integrated axle devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten
the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 4.1.6.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket installation devices that may affect the operation of the integrated axle device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the integrated axle device system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 4.1.6.3 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 4.1.6.4 Inspection Of Intermittent Faults
caution
• Clear DTC.
• Conduct mock tests.
• Check and shake the wiring harness, connector box terminals.
When the fault cannot be confirmed by DTC inspection, the fault phenomenon only occasionally occurs in use. This should confirm all circuits and components that may cause the failure. In many cases, the fault location can be quickly and efficiently identified by performing the basic checks shown in the flowchart below. Especially for faults such as poor contact of wiring harness connectors. Fault Definition: This fault is not currently occurring, but historical DTC records indicate that this fault has occurred. Or the customer has reported the fault to be repaired, but because the fault is not related to the DTC, the fault symptoms cannot be reproduced at this time. Diagnostic Steps: Step 1 Check the battery voltage. A. Perform vehicle power-up operation. B. Measure the voltage of the battery. C. According to the measured values, the corresponding diagnostic step is entered.
Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of Main Battery Step 2 Visual physical inspection. Performing this step is an important means to preliminarily determine the location of the fault: • Check the wiring harness is damaged, whether there are wear, broken skin and other faults. • Check the wiring harness is improperly arranged. It is strictly forbidden to close the wiring harness to high voltage or high current devices. • Check the positive and negative cables of the battery are connected reliably and whether there are any phenomena such as looseness, oxidation and corrosion. Step 3 Check the wiring harness, connectors. A. Many intermittent failures are caused by wire harness and connector movement caused by vibration, twisting, uneven road or component operation. B. If the circuit resistance is too high, the component may not work properly. Use the diagnostic instrument to force the actuator to drive. If it can't work normally, Check the relevant circuit has line faults such as excessive resistance. Step 4 Reproduce the fault and record the data of the control unit with the instrument. A. Connect the vehicle fault diagnosis instrument, and use the data recording function of the fault diagnosis instrument to record the data when intermittent faults occur on the road test vehicle. After pressing the button of the vehicle data logger, the control module data can be recorded in the event of intermittent failure, which can be used to identify the failure location. B. Another diagnostic method is to connect the digital multimeter to the suspicious circuit while the vehicle is running. The abnormal reading value of the digital multimeter may indicate the fault location. Step 5 The fault LED illuminates intermittently, but the system has no fault code set. No Yes Next Step Next Step Next Step
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P220400 | 24V undervoltage fault | Refer to MCU1 Power Fault |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | |
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | Refer to MCU1 Communication Fault |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | |
| P220500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Refer to MCU1 Internal Fault |
| P220600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P220700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | |
| P220800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | |
| P220900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | |
| P220A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three |
The following conditions may cause the fault LED to illuminate intermittently, but the system will not set a DTC: • Electromagnetic interference caused by abnormally working relays, solenoid valves or switches controlled by the control module. • Accessories that are not original or after-market, such as car phones, alarms, lights or radios, are not installed correctly. • The fault indicator control circuit is intermittently shorted to ground. • The control module ground point is loose. Step 6 Other checks. Check the charging system for the following conditions: • Is the output voltage of the high and low voltage charging system correct? If the DCDC1 output voltage is not around 27.5 V and the DCDC2 output voltage is not around 30.5 V, repair the charging system. Step 7 Go to the fault symptom table.
4.1.6.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
MCU1 Next Step Next Step
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P221800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P221900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | |
| P221A00 | Rotatory fault | |
| P221B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | |
| P221C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | |
| P221D00 | Motor stall fault | |
| P221E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | |
| P221F00 | Total hardware failure | |
| P221400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Refer to MCU1 Overheating Fault |
| P221500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P221600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | |
| P221700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P220000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Refer to MCU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P220100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | |
| P220200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | |
| P220300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P220B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P220C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P220D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | |
| P220E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P220F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P221000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | |
| P221100 | U-phase fault | |
| P221200 | V-phase fault | |
| P221300 | W-phase fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P230400 | 24V undervoltage fault | Refer to MCU2 Power Fault |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage |
MCU2
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | Refer to MCU2 Communication Fault |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | |
| P230500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Refer to MCU2 Internal Fault |
| P230600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P230700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | |
| P230800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | |
| P230900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | |
| P230A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three | |
| P231800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P231900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | |
| P231A00 | Rotatory fault | |
| P231B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | |
| P231C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | |
| P231D00 | Motor stall fault | |
| P231E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | |
| P231F00 | Total hardware failure | |
| P231400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Refer to MCU2 Overheating Fault |
| P231500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P231600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | |
| P231700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P230000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Refer to MCU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P230100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | |
| P230200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | |
| P230300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P230B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P230C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P230D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | |
| P230E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P230F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P231000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | |
| P231100 | U-phase fault | |
| P231200 | V-phase fault | |
| P231300 | W-phase fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P240400 | 24V undervoltage fault | Refer to MCU3 Power Fault |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | |
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | Refer to MCU3 Communication Fault |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | |
| P240500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Refer to MCU3 Internal Fault |
| P240600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P240700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | |
| P240800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | |
| P240900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | |
| P240A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three | |
| P241800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P241900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | |
| P241A00 | Rotatory fault | |
| P241B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | |
| P241C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | |
| P241D00 | Motor stall fault | |
| P241E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | |
| P241F00 | Total hardware failure | |
| P241400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Refer to MCU3 Overheating Fault |
MCU3
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P241500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P241600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | |
| P241700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P240000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Refer to MCU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P240100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | |
| P240200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | |
| P240300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P240B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P240C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P240D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | |
| P240E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P240F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P241000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | |
| P241100 | U-phase fault | |
| P241200 | V-phase fault | |
| P241300 | W-phase fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P250400 | 24V undervoltage fault | Refer to MCU4 Power Fault |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | |
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | Refer to MCU4 Communication Fault |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | |
| P250500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Refer to MCU4 Internal Fault |
| P250600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P250700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | |
| P250800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | |
| P250900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault |
MCU4
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P250A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three | |
| P251800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P251900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | |
| P251A00 | Rotatory fault | |
| P251B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | |
| P251C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | |
| P251D00 | Motor stall fault | |
| P251E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | |
| P251F00 | Total hardware failure | |
| P251400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Refer to MCU4 Overheating Fault |
| P251500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P251600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | |
| P251700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | |
| P250000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Refer to MCU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P250100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | |
| P250200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | |
| P250300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | |
| P250B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P250C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | |
| P250D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | |
| P250E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P250F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | |
| P251000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | |
| P251100 | U-phase fault | |
| P251200 | V-phase fault | |
| P251300 | W-phase fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to TCU Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage |
TCU
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with VCU was lost | Refer to TCU Communication Fault |
| U012A87 | Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus) | |
| U012B87 | Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus) | |
| U012D87 | Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus) | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | |
| U012E87 | CDCUCommunication exception | |
| U012F87 | TDWCommunication exception | |
| P270300 | First and second gear position sensor open circuit failure | Refer to TCU Internal Fault |
| P270301 | First and second gear position sensor to power short circuit fault | |
| P270302 | First and second gear position sensor to ground short-circuit fault | |
| P270303 | The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the upper limit | |
| P270304 | The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the lower limit | |
| P270305 | The output shaft speed sensor is open faulty | |
| P270306 | The output shaft speed sensor short- circuits the power supply | |
| P270307 | The output shaft speed sensor is short circuit to the ground | |
| P270308 | The output shaft speed sensor signal exceeds the upper limit | |
| P27031E | Reverse second shift failed | |
| P27031F | Second shift in 1st gear failed | |
| P270320 | Second gear failed | |
| P270348 | Shift power supply harness positive and negative connection | |
| P270349 | Shift actuator stuck | |
| P270350 | The shift motor current sensor is faulty | |
| P270351 | The MCU1 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P270352 | The MCU4 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear | |
| P270353 | Velocity ratio anomaly | |
| P270354 | Abnormal shift | |
| P270355 | Shift motor open circuit fault | |
| P270356 | The shift motor is short circuit to the power supply | |
| P270357 | Shift motor to ground short circuit fault | |
| P270358 | The 5V power supply to the position sensor is abnormal | |
| P270359 | The 8V power supply to the tachometer is abnormal | |
| P270360 | The temperature of the control board is too high |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P220400 | 24V undervoltage fault | 24V power supply voltage <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s |
4.1.6.6 MCU1 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID:0x18017427)) | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | MCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx) | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | MCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx) | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | DTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFs |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU1? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.7 MCU1 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P220500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Hardware bus overvoltage signal is valid | 1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P220600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | The driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal | |
| P220700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | The maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A | |
| P220800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | The maximum current is greater than 680A | |
| P220900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | Current greater than 720A | |
| P220A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three | The hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs | |
| P221800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P221900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | The motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P221A00 | Rotatory fault | The resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection | |
| P221B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | Motor speed>11000rpm | |
| P221C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | Motor speed>11300rpm | |
| P221D00 | Motor stall fault | The controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm); | |
| P221E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | Abnormality in reading and writing drive parameters |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.8 MCU1 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P221F00 | Total hardware failure | Controller hardware failure detected |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P221400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>167℉ | 1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P221500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>185℉ | |
| P221600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>284℉ | |
| P221700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>302℉ |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.9 MCU1 Overheating Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.10 MCU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P220000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Bus voltage>920V | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P220100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | Bus voltage>950V | |
| P220200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P220300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P220B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | The U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P220C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | The V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P220D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P220E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | U-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P220F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | V-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P221000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P221100 | U-phase fault | The motor U phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P221200 | V-phase fault | The motor V phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P221300 | W-phase fault | The motor W phase line connection is abnormal |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.11 MCU2 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Ttrigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P230400 | 24V undervoltage fault | 24V power supply voltage <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID: 0x18017427)) | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| U015687 | Communication with the CDCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx) | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | MCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx) | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | DTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFs |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU2? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.12 MCU2 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Ttrigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P230500 | Hardware overvoltage fault | Hardware bus overvoltage signal is valid | 1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P230600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | The driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal | |
| P230700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | The maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A | |
| P230800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | The maximum current is greater than 680A | |
| P230900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | Current greater than 720A | |
| P230A00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | The hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs | |
| P231800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P231900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | The motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P231A00 | Rotatory fault | The resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection | |
| P231B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | Motor speed>11000rpm | |
| P231C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | Motor speed>11300rpm | |
| P231D00 | Motor stall fault | The controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm); | |
| P231E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | Abnormality in reading and writing drive parameters | |
| P231F00 | Total hardware failure | Controller hardware failure detected |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.13 MCU2 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P231400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>167℉ | 1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P231500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>185℉ | |
| P231600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>284℉ | |
| P231700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>302℉ |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.14 MCU2 Overheating Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.15 MCU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P230000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Bus voltage>920V | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P230100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | Bus voltage>950V | |
| P230200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state < 520V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P230300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P230B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | The U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P230C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | The V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P230D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P230E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | U-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P230F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | V-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P231000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P231100 | U-phase fault | The motor U phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P231200 | V-phase fault | The motor V phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P231300 | W-phase fault | The motor W phase line connection is abnormal |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.16 MCU3 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P240400 | 24V undervoltage fault | 24V power supply voltage <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive rear axle vehicle |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID: 0x18017427)) | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| U015687 | Communication with the CDCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx) | |
| U019887 | Communication with the T-BOX is lost | MCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx) | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | DTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFsC |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU3? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.17 MCU3 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P240500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Hardware bus overvoltage signal is valid | 1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P240600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | The driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal | |
| P240700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | The maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A | |
| P240800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | The maximum current is greater than 680A | |
| P240900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | Current greater than 720A | |
| P240A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three | The hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs | |
| P241800 | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P241900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | The motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P241A00 | Rotatory fault | The resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection | |
| P241B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | Motor speed>11000rpm | |
| P241C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | Motor speed>11300rpm | |
| P241D00 | Motor stall fault | The controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm); | |
| P241E00 | EEPROM read and write failure | Abnormality in reading and writing drive parameters |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.18 MCU3 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P241F00 | Total hardware failure | Controller hardware failure detected |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P241400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>167℉ | 1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P241500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>185℉ | |
| P241600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>284℉ | |
| P241700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>302℉ |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.19 MCU3 Overheating Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.20 MCU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P240000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Bus voltage>920V | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P240100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | Bus voltage>950V | |
| P240200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P240300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P240B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | The U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P240C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | The V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P240D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P240E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | U-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P240F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | V-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P241000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P241100 | U-phase fault | The motor U phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P241200 | V-phase fault | The motor V phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P241300 | W-phase fault | The motor W phase line connection is abnormal |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.21 MCU4 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P250400 | 24V undervoltage fault | 24V power supply voltage <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive rear axle vehicle |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s | |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | Detected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with the VCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID: 0x18017427)) | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| U015687 | Communication with the CDCU is lost | MCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx) | |
| U019887 | Communication with the T-BOX is lost | MCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx) | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | DTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFs |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU3? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.22 MCU4 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P250500 | The hardware overvoltage is faulty | Hardware bus overvoltage signal is valid | 1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P250600 | Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault | The driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal | |
| P250700 | Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation | The maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A | |
| P250800 | The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault | The maximum current is greater than 680A | |
| P250900 | The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault | Current greater than 720A | |
| P250A00 | The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three | The hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs | |
| P251800 | The IGBT temperature sensor is faulty | The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P251900 | Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault | The motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact | |
| P251A00 | Rotatory fault | The resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection | |
| P251B00 | Motor overspeed 2 alarm | Motor speed>11000rpm | |
| P251C00 | Motor overspeed 3 alarm | Motor speed>11300rpm | |
| P251D00 | Motor stall fault | The controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm); | |
| P251E00 | The EEPROM reads and writes are faulty | Abnormality in reading and writing drive parameters |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.23 MCU4 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P251F00 | Total hardware failure | Controller hardware failure detected |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P251400 | Motor controller overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>167℉ | 1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P251500 | Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>185℉ | |
| P251600 | Motor overtemperature level 2 fault | Controller temperature>284℉ | |
| P251700 | Motor overtemperature level 3 fault | Controller temperature>302℉ |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.24 MCU4 Overheating Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.25 MCU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P250000 | Bus Overvoltage Level 2 Fault | Bus voltage>920V | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P250100 | Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault | Bus voltage>950V | |
| P250200 | Bus level 2 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P250300 | Bus level 3 undervoltage fault | Bus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state | |
| P250B00 | The U-phase current sensor is faulty | The U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P250C00 | The V-phase current sensor is faulty | The V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P250D00 | W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved) | The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection | |
| P250E00 | U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | U-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P250F00 | V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault | V-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P251000 | W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved) | W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once | |
| P251100 | U-phase fault | The motor U phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P251200 | V-phase fault | The motor V phase line connection is abnormal | |
| P251300 | W-phase fault | The motor W phase line connection is abnormal |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.26 TCU Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | The TCU power supply overvoltage | TCU supply voltage higher than 32V for a period of time (about 200ms) | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle |
| B111716 | The TCU supply undervoltage | TCU supply voltage below 18V for a period of time (about 200ms) |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | Communication with VCU was lost | VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18010327) | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| U012A87 | Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus) | VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18012774) | |
| U012B87 | Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus) | VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18012775) | |
| U012D87 | Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus) | VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18012777)) | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | The DTC was recorded after eight busoffs | |
| U012E87 | The CDCU communication is abnormal | CDCU communication remains unchanged for 500ms (Detection message ID:0x18FEC1EE) | |
| U012F87 | TDW communication is abnormal | GSW does not change for 500ms(Check packet ID:0x18FEE6EE) |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides TCU? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.27 TCU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P270300 | First and second gear position sensor open circuit failure | 1, the sensor 5V power supply is normal; 2, position voltage <0.1V; 3, last 200ms | 1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface |
| P270301 | First and second gear position sensor to power short circuit fault | 1, the sensor 5V power supply is normal; 2, position voltage >4.9; 3, last 200ms | |
| P270302 | First and second gear position sensor to ground short-circuit fault | 1, the sensor 5V power supply is normal; 2, position voltage <0.1V; 3, last 200ms | |
| P270303 | The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the upper limit | 1, the sensor power supply is normal; 2, sensor voltage >4500mv; 3, last 1000ms; | |
| P270304 | The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the lower limit | 1, the sensor power supply is normal; 2, sensor voltage <500mv; 3, last 1000ms; | |
| P270305 | The output shaft speed sensor is open faulty | 1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, sensor AD signal voltage <2.5V; 3, output shaft speed value =0rpm; 4, last 200ms; | |
| P270306 | The output shaft speed sensor short-circuits the power supply | 1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, sensor AD signal voltage>3.3V; 3, output shaft speed value =0rpm; 4, last 200ms; | |
| P270307 | The output shaft speed sensor is short circuit to the ground | 1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, sensor AD signal voltage <0.25V; 3, output shaft speed value =0rpm; 4, last 200ms; | |
| P270308 | The output shaft speed sensor signal exceeds the upper limit | 1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, speed value greater than 120km*1.2; 3, last 200ms; |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.6.28 TCU Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P27031E | Reverse second shift failed | In a single shift cycle, the number of shift failures >=5 | |
| P27031F | Second shift in 1st gear failed | In a single shift cycle, the number of shift failures >=5 | |
| P270320 | Second gear failed | In a single shift cycle, the number of shift failures >=5 | |
| P270348 | Shift power supply harness positive and negative connection | 1. When shifting, the actual motion direction of the shifting motor is opposite to the theoretical position (request 1 gear but actually hang 2 gear direction); 2, last 200ms | |
| P270349 | Shift actuator stuck | 1. Take off the block card for 5s | |
| P270350 | The shift motor current sensor is faulty | 1, displacement sensor change rate >1V 2, shifting motor current <1.5A; 3, duty cycle ≥30; 4, last 1000ms | |
| P270351 | The MCU1 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear | 1, the actual motor speed >11000rpm for 200ms 2. Driving in gear | |
| P270352 | The MCU4 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear | 1, the actual motor speed >11000rpm for 200ms 2. Driving in gear | |
| P270353 | Velocity ratio anomaly | In gear, | actual output shaft speed - theoretical output shaft speed |>50rpm for 1000ms | |
| P270354 | Abnormal shift | During a power-on process, if the internal gear of TCU is inconsistent with the current requested gear of the VDC for more than 5 times during driving, it is judged to be abnormal gear removal | |
| P270355 | Shift motor open circuit fault | 1, the shift motor power supply is normal; 2, duty cycle > 10, current less than 200mA; 3, last 1000ms; | |
| P270356 | The shift motor is short circuit to the power supply | / | |
| P270357 | Shift motor to ground short circuit fault | 1, the shift motor power supply is normal; 2, duty cycle > 10, current less than 200mA; 3, last 1000ms; | |
| P270358 | The 5V power supply to the position sensor is abnormal | 1, 5V voltage sampling greater than 5.5V or less than 4.5V; 2, continuous 100ms; | |
| P270359 | The 8V power supply to the tachometer is abnormal | 1, 8V voltage sampling is greater than 9V or less than 7V 2, continuous 100ms; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P270360 | The temperature of the control board is too high | The sampled temperature is greater than 75 ° C |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.1.7 Dismantling and Installation
4.1.7.1 Replacement of Integrated axle - Intermediate Axle




Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Removal the fifth wheel assembly. 9 Remove the corrugated plate. 10 Remove the drive wheel (front left). 11 Removal the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 12 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front). 13 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 14 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 15 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 16 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 17 Remove the balance beam (left). 18 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 19 Remove the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 20 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 21 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 22 Remove the balance beam (right). 23 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (front).
24 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 25 Disconnect the 1 harness connectors of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.


26 Disconnect the 3 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 27 Remove the 2 straps.


28 Disconnect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 29 Remove the 2 straps.


30 Disconnect the 4 water pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
31 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle.


32 Remove 10 fixing bolts on the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.


33 Disconnect 1 wire harness connector of the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle. 34 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the fixed clamp for the high- voltage wire harness of the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.


35 Using a lifting platform or other tools to remove the integrated axle - intermediate axle. Installation Procedures 1 Use a lifting platform or other tools to move the integrated axle - intermediate axle to the installation position. 2 Install two fixing bolts of the fixed clamp for the high- voltage wire harness on the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.
Torque: (12 ft-lb +/- .36) ft-lb

3 Connect one wire harness connector of the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install ten fixing bolts of the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Install one fixing bolt of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle.
Torque:(9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb
6 Connect the 4 water pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.
7 Install the 2 straps. 8 Connect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.
9 Install the 2 straps. 10 Connect the 3 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.
11 Connect 1 harness connector of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
12 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
13 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 14 Install the balance beam (right). 15 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 16 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 17 Install the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 18 Install the drive wheel (right front). 19 Install the balance beam (left). 20 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 21 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 22 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 23 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 24 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front).


25 Install the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 26 Install the drive wheel (left front). 27 Install the corrugated plate. 28 Install the fifth wheel assembly. 29 Fill coolant in the power system. 30 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 31 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 32 Connect the battery negative cable. 33 Close the front flip cover plate. 34 Close the door.
4.1.7.2 Replacement of Integrated axle - Rear Axle
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Remove the rear wheel housing upper body. 9 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 10 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (left). 11 Remove the rear left wheel housing middle body assembly. 12 Remove the rear left wheel housing rear body assembly. 13 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 14 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 15 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 16 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 17 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 18 Remove the rear spring U-bolt 2. 19 Remove the balance beam (left). 20 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 21 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (right). 22 Remove the rear right wheel housing middle body assembly. 23 Remove the rear right wheel housing rear body assembly.
24 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 25 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 26 Remove the balance beam (right). 27 Remove the dual channel module assembly. 28 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 29 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - rear axle. 30 Remove the 4 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle.


31 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - rear axle. 32 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - rear axle. 33 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the integrated axle - rear axle.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.



34 Remove the 5 fixing bolts of the integrated electric axle - the rear axle. 35 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle - the rear axle. 39 Disconnect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle.



40 Remove the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 41 Disconnect the 3 pipelines of the integrated axle - rear axle. 42 Remove the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 43 Use a lifting platform or other tools to remove the integrated axle - rear axle.



Installation Procedures 1 Use a lifting platform or other tools to move the integrated axle - rear axle to the installation position. 2 Install the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 3 Connect the 3 air pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle.
4 Install the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 5 Connect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle. 9 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle - the rear axle.
Torque: (9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb
10 Install the 5 fixing bolts of the integrated electric axle - the rear axle.
Torque: (9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb
11 Connect the 2 water pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle. 12 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - rear axle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
13 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - rear axle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
14 Install the 4 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 15 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - rear axle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
16 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 17 Install the dual channel module assembly. 18 Install the balance beam (right). 19 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 20 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 21 Install the rear right wheel housing rear body assembly. 22 Install the rear right wheel housing middle body assembly. 23 Install the height adjustment device assembly (right). 24 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 25 Install the balance beam (left). 26 Install the rear spring U-bolt 2. 27 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 28 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 29 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 30 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 31 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 32 Install the rear left wheel housing rear body assembly. 33 Install the rear left wheel housing middle body assembly. 34 Install the height adjustment device assembly (left). 35 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 36 Install the rear wheel housing upper body. 37 Fill coolant in the power system. 38 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 39 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 40 Connect the battery negative cable. 41 Close the front flip cover plate. 42 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the parts, it is necessary to recalibrate the height.
| Fastener name | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the differential lock solenoid valve to the pipe beam | M8 | (9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb |
4.2 Differential Lock Solenoid Valve Device2407
4.2.1 Specifications
4.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

4.2.2 Decomposition Diagram
4.2.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Differential Lock Solenoid Device 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt


4.2.3 Dismantling and Installation
4.2.3.1 Replacement of the Differential Lock Solenoid Valve
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 6 Disconnect the 3 air pipes of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket.
7 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 8 Detach the differential lock solenoid valve. Installation Procedures 1 Move the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket to the installation position. 2 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket.
Torque: (11 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Connect the 3 air pipes of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
4.3 Power Battery Device2101 / 1224· 8g
4.3.1 Description and Operation
4.3.1.1 Description and Operation
Accident
1. Handle traffic accidents in accordance with relevant provisions of State Local and Federal law on Road Traffic Safety. 2. Notify the vehicle after-sales service specialist. It is prohibited to reuse the vehicle before the after-sales department issues the battery safety judgment results. 3. If repair or painting is required after collision of the vehicle, it must be performed at an authorized dealer of the vehicle, and it is prohibited to remove the vehicle without permission. Before painting, remove the high voltage battery, high voltage harness, MCU and other high voltage components. This is because the service life of the high voltage battery can be affected when it is exposed to the higher temperature painting workshop. In addition, the high voltage battery on the vehicle may bring potential safety hazards to maintenance personnel who have not received professional training in maintenance of electric vehicles.
Catching Fire
1. Immediately turn off the emergency high voltage switch and low voltage power supply, and notify the manufacturer's after-sales personnel. 2. Do not touch the leaking electrolyte with your hands; If your skin or eyes come into contact with the electrolyte, rinse immediately with plenty of water, and seek medical attention immediately to avoid injury.
Falling in Water or Immersion in Water
1. Do not power on the vehicle. 2. Contact the service personnel.
Recovery and Tracing of High Voltage Battery
1. Car owners and enterprises shall dispose of batteries in accordance with the Interim Measures for the Management of Recovery and Utilization of New Energy Vehicle High Voltage Battery and the Interim Regulations on the Management of Recovery, Utilization and Tracing of New Energy Vehicle High Voltage Battery. 2. If repair or replacement of the high voltage battery is required, the owner of a new energy vehicle should send the new energy vehicle to an after-sales service organization recognized by our company with corresponding capabilities for repair and replacement. 3. When the new energy vehicle is eligible for scrapping, it should be sent to a company engaged in recovery and disassembly of scrapped vehicles approved by our company for removal of the high voltage battery. 4. The owner of high voltage battery (battery leasing and other operating enterprises) should hand over the waste high voltage batteries to a recycling service outlet approved by our company. 5. Do not disassemble, remove or discard the high voltage batteries without permission. Do not hand over waste high voltage batteries to other units or individuals. You will be held responsible for any environmental pollution or safety accidents caused by removing, disassembling or discarding high voltage batteries without permission.
Environmental Pollution
1. The electrode material of the waste battery in the environment will go through hydrolysis, decomposition, oxidation and other chemical reactions with the substances in the environment, producing heavy metal ions, strong alkali and negative electrode carbon dust which will result in heavy metal, alkali and dust pollutions. 2. The electrolyte of waste batteries in the environment can go through hydrolysis, decomposition, combustion and other chemical reactions, producing HF, arsenic-containing compounds and phosphorus-containing compounds, which will lead to fluorine and arsenic pollutions. 3. The solvent of waste batteries undergoes hydrolysis, combustion, decomposition and other chemical reactions, producing small molecule organic compounds such as formaldehyde, methanol, acetaldehyde, ethanol, or formic acid, which are easily soluble in water and can cause water pollution. 4. Other substances in the battery can cause organic matter and fluorine pollutions when they are in the environment. 5. When using the battery, some harmful substances produced after side reactions, including the products of solvent decomposition such as propylene, glycol, ethylene, and ethanol, the by-products generated via reaction between electrolyte and positive electrode such as HF, LiF, (CH2OCO2Li)2CH3OCO2Li, CH4, CO, and CH3OH, the products of side reaction between the negative electrode and the electrolyte, and additives added in the pretreatment process of electrode can directly or indirectly cause environmental pollution.
Harm to Human Health
1. Ingestion of harmful components in batteries can cause severe chemical burns to the mouth, esophagus, gastrointestinal tract, which will lead to upper respiratory tract and lung allergies. If you have ingested harmful ingredients, do not induce vomiting and do not eat or drink. Instead, you should seek medical attention immediately. 2. Skin contact and absorption of harmful components such as ethylene carbonate, diethyl carbonate, and dimethyl carbonate in battery packs may cause local inflammation or skin allergies and/or chemical burns. 3. Eye contact with the harmful components of the battery pack may cause severe allergies and chemical burns.
| Fastener name | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| NCM-The fixing bolts connecting the battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to the battery mounting bracket | M14 | 147.5 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| NCM-The fixing bolts connecting the battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to the frame assembly | M8 | 18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb |
| Item | Parameter |
|---|---|
| Working environment temperature (*) | -30 - 55 |
| Working environment relative humidity (%) | 5~95 |
| Rated capacity (Ah) | 644 |
| Nominal voltage (V) | 754.8 |
| Working voltage range (V) | 571.2~887.4 |
| SOC working range (%) | 2~97 |
| SOC at delivery (%) | 50 |
| Thermal management mode | Liquid cooling, liquid heating |
| Battery pack module | 4P, 1P204S |
| Rated storage energy (kWh) | 486.09 |
| Battery model | EV-CALB-755161 |
| Main features | Ternary lithium battery |
| Charging mode | DC charging |
| Charging current (A) | 644 |
| Charging voltage (V) | 887.4 |
| Manufacturer | Huating (Hefei) Hybrid Technology Co., Ltd. |
| Item | Parameter |
|---|---|
| Working environment temperature (*) | -22 - 122 |
| Working environment relative humidity (%) | 5~95 |
| Rated capacity (Ah) | 920 |
| Nominal voltage (V) | 766.4 |
| Working voltage range (V) | 595~868.7 |
| SOC working range (%) | 2~100 |
| SOC at delivery (%) | 50 |
4.3.2 Specifications
4.3.2.1 Fastener Specifications
4.3.2.2 Technical Parameters
High Voltage Battery (NCM Lithium Battery)
High Voltage Battery (LFP Battery)
| Item | Parameter |
|---|---|
| Thermal management mode | Liquid cooling, liquid heating |
| Battery pack module | 4P, 1P238S |
| Rated storage energy (kWh) | 705.2 |
| Battery model | EV-CALB-766230 |
| Main features | Lithium iron phosphate battery |
| Charging mode | DC charging |
| Charging current (A) | 920 |
| Charging voltage (V) | 868.7 |
| Manufacturer | Huating (Hefei) Hybrid Technology Co., Ltd. |
4.3.3 System Schematic Diagram
4.3.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | Refer to CMU1 Power Fault |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | |
| P168400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | |
| P168500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | |
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | Refer to CMU1 Communication Fault |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | |
| P163900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Refer to CMU1 Internal Fault |
| P166600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P166700 | Failure of temperature acquisition |
4.3.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
4.3.4.1 Diagnosis Description
Before diagnosing faults in the power battery system, refer to Description And Operation Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the power battery device before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a malfunction, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the power battery device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process
can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 4.3.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the power battery system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the power battery system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 4.3.4.3 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the malfunction code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a malfunction code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output malfunction code.
– No:Perform intermittent malfunction checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 4.3.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
CMU1
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P16A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | |
| P160200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Refer to CMU1 Temperature Abnormality |
| P160500 | The temperature is too low | |
| P163500 | The temperature is too high | |
| P163A00 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P166900 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P168300 | The temperature is too low | |
| P161500 | The total voltage is too low | Refer to CMU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P161600 | The total voltage is too high | |
| P163600 | The discharge current is too large | |
| P166A00 | The feedback current is too large | |
| P163700 | High voltage interlock fault | Refer to CMU1 High Voltage Interlock Fault |
| P160300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Refer to CMU1 Individual Voltage Abnormality |
| P160400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | |
| P163300 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P163400 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P163800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P166800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | |
| P166B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P166C00 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P166D00 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P160100 | Battery pack fire alarm | Refer to CMU1 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | Refer to CMU2 Power Fault |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | |
| P178400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack |
CMU2
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P178500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | |
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | Refer to CMU2 Communication Fault |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | |
| P173900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Refer to CMU2 Internal Fault |
| P176600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P176700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P17A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | |
| P170200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Refer to CMU2 Temperature Abnormality |
| P170500 | The temperature is too low | |
| P173500 | The temperature is too high | |
| P173A00 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P176900 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P178300 | The temperature is too low | |
| P171500 | The total voltage is too low | Refer to CMU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P171600 | The total voltage is too high | |
| P173600 | The discharge current is too large | |
| P176A00 | The feedback current is too large | |
| P173700 | High voltage interlock fault | Refer to CMU2 High Voltage Interlock Fault |
| P170300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Refer to CMU2 Individual Voltage Abnormality |
| P170400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | |
| P173300 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P173400 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P173800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P176800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | |
| P176B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P176C00 | The cell voltage is too low |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P176D00 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P170100 | Battery pack fire alarm | Refer to CMU2 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | Refer to CMU3 Power Fault |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | |
| P188400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | |
| P188500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | |
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | Refer to CMU3 Communication Fault |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | |
| P183900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Refer to CMU3 Internal Fault |
| P186600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P186700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P18A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | |
| P180200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Refer to CMU3 Temperature Abnormality |
| P180500 | The temperature is too low | |
| P183500 | The temperature is too high | |
| P183A00 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P186900 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P188300 | The temperature is too low | |
| P181500 | The total voltage is too low | Refer to CMU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P181600 | Over voltage | |
| P183600 | The discharge current is too large | |
| P186A00 | The feedback current is too large | |
| P183700 | High voltage interlock fault | Refer to CMU3 High Voltage Interlock Fault |
CMU3
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P180300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Refer to CMU3 Individual Voltage Abnormality |
| P180400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | |
| P183300 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P183400 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P183800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P186800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | |
| P186B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P186C00 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P186D00 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P180100 | Battery pack fire alarm | Refer to CMU3 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | Refer to CMU4 Power Fault |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | |
| P168400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | |
| P168500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | |
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | Refer to CMU4 Communication Fault |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | |
| P193900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Refer to CMU4 Internal Fault |
| P196600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P196700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P19A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty |
CMU4
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P190200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Refer to CMU4 Temperature Abnormality |
| P190500 | The temperature is too low | |
| P193500 | The temperature is too high | |
| P193A00 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P196900 | The temperature difference is too large | |
| P198300 | The temperature is too low | |
| P191500 | The total voltage is too low | Refer to CMU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P191600 | The total voltage is too high | |
| P193600 | The discharge current is too large | |
| P196A00 | The feedback current is too large | |
| P193700 | High voltage interlock fault | Refer to CMU4 High Voltage Interlock Fault |
| P190300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Refer to Abnormal Voltage Of CMU4 Unit |
| P190400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | |
| P193300 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P193400 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P193800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P196800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | |
| P196B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | |
| P196C00 | The cell voltage is too low | |
| P196D00 | The cell voltage is too high | |
| P190100 | Battery pack fire alarm | Refer to CMU4 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | BATT24V <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | BATT24V >36 |
4.3.4.5 CMU1 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P168400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | BATT24V < 18V | |
| P168500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | BATT24V > 32V |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | VDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | CMU BusOff | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | CDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | TGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU1? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.6 CMU1 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P163900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Communication error with the CMU's internal capture chip | 1. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| P166600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P166700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P16A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P160200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Tmax ≥140℉ | 1. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| P160500 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -22℉ | |
| P163500 | The temperature is too high | Tmax ≥131℉ | |
| P163A00 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥77℉ | |
| P166900 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥68℉ | |
| P168300 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -13℉ |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.7 CMU1 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 4:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.8 CMU1 Temperature Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P161500 | The total voltage is too low | Tmin>15℃ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 0℃<Tmin≤15℃PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤0℃ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204) | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| P161600 | The total voltage is too high | PackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204) | |
| P163600 | The discharge current is too large | I >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A | |
| P166A00 | The feedback current is too large | I >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check whether the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.9 CMU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage harness of the upper left battery pack 1. Step 4:Check the insulation detection circuit inside the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.10 CMU1 High Voltage Interlock Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P163700 | High voltage interlock malfunction | The battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P160300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V | 1. Upper left battery pack 1 |
| P160400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | Vmax≥4.4V | |
| P163300 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V | |
| P163400 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.37V | |
| P163800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥650mV | |
| P166800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | The fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1 | |
| P166B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥500mv | |
| P166C00 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.11 CMU1 Individual Voltage Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P166D00 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.316v |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P160100 | Battery pack fire alarm | The thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal | 1.Wiring harness 2. Upper left battery pack 1 |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 4:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.12 CMU1 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | BATT24V <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | BATT24V >36 | |
| P178400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | BATT24V < 18V | |
| P178500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | BATT24V > 32V |
Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the thermal runaway signal harness of the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.13 CMU2 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | VDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | CMU BusOff | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | CDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | TGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU2? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the lower left battery pack 2. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.14 CMU2 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P173900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Communication error with the CMU's internal capture chip | 1. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| P176600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P176700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P17A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P170200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Tmax ≥140℉ | 1. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| P170500 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -22℉ | |
| P173500 | The temperature is too high | Tmax ≥131℉ | |
| P173A00 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥77℉ | |
| P176900 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥68℉ | |
| P178300 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -13℉ |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 5:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.15 CMU2 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 4:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.16 CMU2 Temperature Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P171500 | The total voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 32℉<Tmin≤59℉PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤32℉ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204) | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| P171600 | The total voltage is too high | PackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204) | |
| P173600 | The discharge current is too large | I >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A | |
| P176A00 | The feedback current is too large | I >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check if the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.17 CMU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high voltage harness of the lower left battery pack 2. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the lower left battery pack 2. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.18 CMU2 High Voltage Interlock Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P173700 | High voltage interlock malfunction | The battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P170300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V | 1. Lower left battery pack 2 |
| P170400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | Vmax≥4.4V | |
| P173300 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V | |
| P173400 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.37V | |
| P173800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥650mV | |
| P176800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | The fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1 | |
| P176B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥500mv | |
| P176C00 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.19 CMU2 Individual Voltage Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P176D00 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.316v |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P170100 | Battery pack fire alarm | The thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal | 1.Wiring harness 2. Lower left battery pack 2 |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 4:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.20 CMU2 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | BATT24V <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | BATT24V >36 | |
| P188400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | BATT24V < 18V | |
| P188500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | BATT24V > 32V |
Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the lower left battery pack 2 thermal runaway signal harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.21 CMU3 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | VDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | CMU BusOff | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | CDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | TGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU3? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.22 CMU3 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P183900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Communication error with the CMU's internal capture chip | 1. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| P186600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P186700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P18A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P180200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Tmax ≥140℉ | 1. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| P180500 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -22℉ | |
| P183500 | The temperature is too high | Tmax ≥131℉ | |
| P183A00 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥77℉ | |
| P186900 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥68℉ | |
| P188300 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -13℉ |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.23 CMU3 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 4:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.24 CMU3 Temperature Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P181500 | The total voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 32℉<Tmin≤15℃PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤32℉ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204) | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| P181600 | The total voltage is too high | PackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204) | |
| P183600 | The discharge current is too large | I >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A | |
| P186A00 | The feedback current is too large | I >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check whether the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.25 CMU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage harness of the upper right battery pack 3. Step 4:Check the insulation detection circuit inside the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.26 CMU3 High Voltage Interlock Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P183700 | High voltage interlock malfunction | The battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P180300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V | 1. Upper right battery pack 3 |
| P180400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | Vmax≥4.4V | |
| P183300 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V | |
| P183400 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.37V | |
| P183800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥650mV | |
| P186800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | The fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1 | |
| P186B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥500mv | |
| P186C00 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.27 CMU3 Individual Voltage Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P186D00 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.316v |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P180100 | Battery pack fire alarm | The thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal | 1.Wiring harness 2. Upper right battery pack 3 |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 4:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.28 CMU3 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery pack | BATT24V <9V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| B111717 | The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack | BATT24V >36 | |
| P168400 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack | BATT24V < 18V | |
| P168500 | The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack | BATT24V > 32V |
Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the thermal runaway signal harness of the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.29 CMU4 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012287 | VDC communication is lost - battery pack | VDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| U008C88 | PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack | CMU BusOff | |
| U015687 | CDCU communication lost - battery pack | CDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s | |
| U019887 | T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack | TGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU4? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.30 CMU4 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P193900 | The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faulty | Communication error with the CMU's internal capture chip | 1. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| P196600 | The CMU storage state is faulty | The CMU storage state is faulty | |
| P196700 | Failure of temperature acquisition | Failure of temperature acquisition | |
| P19A100 | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty | The CMU passive equalization function is faulty |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P190200 | The battery temperature limit is too high | Tmax ≥140℉ | 1. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| P190500 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -22℉ | |
| P193500 | The temperature is too high | Tmax ≥131℉ | |
| P193A00 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥77℉ | |
| P196900 | The temperature difference is too large | ΔT≥68℉ | |
| P198300 | The temperature is too low | Tmin < -13℉ |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.31 CMU4 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 4:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.32 CMU4 Temperature Abnormality
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P191500 | The total voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 32℉<Tmin≤59℉PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤32℉ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204) | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| P191600 | The total voltage is too high | PackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204) | |
| P193600 | The discharge current is too large | I >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A | |
| P196A00 | The feedback current is too large | I >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.33 CMU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage harness of the lower right battery pack 4. Step 4:Check the insulation detection circuit inside the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.34 CMU4 High Voltage Interlock Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P193700 | High voltage interlock malfunction | The battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P190300 | Limit undervoltage of the unit | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V | 1. Lower right battery pack 4 |
| P190400 | The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage | Vmax≥4.4V | |
| P193300 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V | |
| P193400 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.37V | |
| P193800 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥650mV | |
| P196800 | The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty | The fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1 | |
| P196B00 | The voltage dropout of the cell is too large | ΔV≥500mv | |
| P196C00 | The cell voltage is too low | Tmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.35 Abnormal Voltage Of CMU4 Unit
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P196D00 | The cell voltage is too high | Vmax≥4.316v |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P190100 | Battery pack fire alarm | The thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal | 1.Wiring harness 2. Lower right battery pack 4 |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 4:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.4.36 CMU4 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the thermal runaway signal harness of the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.3.5 Dismantling and Installation
4.3.5.1 Replacement of NCM-battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).




Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 14 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 15 Remove the bottom front left inclined beam. 16 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 17 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 18 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 19 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 20 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 21 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM). 22 Remove the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).
23 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 24 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
25 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.



26 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 27 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). Installation Procedures


1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).
Torque:(148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.
Torque: (18.5 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
7 Install the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 8 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 9 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 10 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 11 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 12 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 13 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 14 Install the bottom front left inclined beam. 15 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 16 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 17 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 18 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1.

19 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 20 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 21 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 22 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 23 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 24 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.
4.3.5.2 Replacement of NCM-battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 14 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 15 Remove the bottom front left inclined beam. 16 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 17 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 18 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 19 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 20 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 21 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM).
22 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 23 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
24 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).


25 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 26 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).



Installation Procedures 1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).
Torque: (148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
7 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 8 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 9 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 10 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 11 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 12 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 13 Install the bottom front left inclined beam. 14 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 15 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 16 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 17 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 18 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 19 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 20 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 21 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 22 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 23 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 24 Connect the battery negative cable. 25 Close the front flip cover plate. 26 Close the door.
4.3.5.3 Replacement of NCM-Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the lamp (upper). 9 Remove the lamp (lower). 10 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 11 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 13 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 14 Remove the bottom front right inclined beam.
15 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 16 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 17 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 18 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 19 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 20 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM). 21 Remove the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 23 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah). 24 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.


25 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 26 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah). 27 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).


Installation Procedures 1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).
Torque: (148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).
6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
8 Install the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 9 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 10 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 11 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 12 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 13 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 14 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 15 Install the bottom front right inclined beam. 16 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 17 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 18 Install the boarding step body assembly. 19 Install the lamp (lower). 20 Install the lamp (upper). 21 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 22 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 23 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 24 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.
4.3.5.4 Replacement of NCM-battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the lamp (upper). 9 Remove the lamp (lower). 10 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 11 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 13 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 14 Remove the bottom front right inclined beam. 15 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 16 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 17 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 18 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 19 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 20 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM). 21 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

22 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
23 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 24 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).


25 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). Installation Procedures


1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).
Torque:(148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
7 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 8 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 9 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 10 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 11 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 12 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 13 Install the bottom front right inclined beam. 14 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 15 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the boarding step body assembly. 17 Install the lamp (lower). 18 Install the lamp (upper). 19 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.
20 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 21 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 22 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.
| Fastener name | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the fixed bracket of the water pump and the electronic water pump | M8 | 18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the fixed bracket of the water pump and the electronic water pump | M8 | 18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb |
| Fixed bolts connecting the expansion tank (plastic) to the rear integrated frame (unit) (plastic) | M10 | 28 ft-lb - 38 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolts connecting the front-end module and the front connecting beam | M12 | 66 ft-lb +/- 3.5 ft-lb |
4.4 Power System Cooling Device1300 / 1318 / 1319· 74g
4.4.1 Specifications
4.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

4.4.2 Decomposition Diagram
4.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. FRont end Module
2. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Electronic Water Pump 9. Water Pump Fixing Bracket(Back) 5. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Water Pump Fixing Bracket(Front)

41. Water Refill Hose 47. Long Exhaust Pipe(l=5350) 42. One-hole Fixing Clamp 48. Water Refill Hose 2 43. Cable Ties 1 49. PDU & Water outlet Hose of the Air Pump 44. Pdu Water Outlet Hose 50. Water Inlet Hose of the Air Pump 45. Hose Hoop-type b and Type c 51. Water Outlet Hose of the Air Pump 46. Pdu Water Inlet Hose 52. Front end Module Outlet Nylon Pipe

29. Three-hole Fixing Clamp 55. Rear Water Pmp Otlet Hse 42. One-hole Fixing Clamp 56. Hose Btween Pmps 43. Cable Ties 1 57. Hose Hop-type b and Tpe c 46. Pdu Water Inlet Hose 58. Hydrating nylon tube 47. Long Exhaust Pipe(l=5350) 59. Water Pump Out Nylon Pipe 48. Water Refill Hose 2 60. Hexagon Flange Bolt 52. Front end Module Outlet Nylon Pipe 61. Hose Clamp 1 53. Front Pump - Water Inlet Hose 62. Hexagon Flange Bolt

42. One-hole Fixing Clamp 82. M2 Water Hose (With Protective Bra 45. Hose Hoop-type b and Type c 84. Water Outlet Rubber Hose of M2 & MCU2 (With Protective Braiding) 69. Mcu2 Outlet Hose(With Protective b 85. Mcu1 Water Inlet Hose (With Protec 70. M1 Water Inlet Hose 1 (With Protec 86. Transition Straight Through Hard p 71. Middle and Rear Axle Return Water 87. Mcu2 Connects to M3 House 1(With p 72. Combination Tee Hard Pipe 88. Mcu2 Connects to M3 House 2 (With 73. M3 Water Inlet Hose 1(With Protect 89. Mcu2 and M3 Connects Haerd Pipes 74. Middle and Rear Axle Return Waterr 90. M3 Water Inlet Hose Support 75. Middle and Rear Axle Combination h 91. Mcu2 Outlet Hose(With Protective b 77. M3 Water Inlet Hose 2 (With Protec 92. Hexagon Flange Bolt 78. Uble Hole Nylon Cable Tie ( Gtb-3 93. Hexagon Flange Bolt 80. Middle axle Mcu2 Hose Fixing Bra 94. Hard Mcu2 Outlet Pipe

48. Water Refill Hose 2 65. M1 Water Inlet Hose 49. Water Outlet Hose of PDU & Air Pump 66. Front-end Module Water Inlet Nylon 63. Hexagon Flange Bolt 67. Water Inlet Nylon Tube 1 of M & MCU 64. Three-hole Fixing Clamp 68. Fixed Thread Rolling Strip(t120rh

40. Expansion Tank (Plastic) 42A. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 41A. Hexagon Flange Bolt 43A. Hexagon Flange Bolt

4.4.3 Inspect
4.4.3.1 Inspection of Coolant
After the coolant temperature drops, check the coolant level in the reservoir is between the MIN to MAX marks; If the coolant is insufficient, the warning lamp on the instrument cluster will be illuminated to remind you to add coolant. If the coolant has suspended matter, sediment or discoloration, replace it with new coolant immediately. Regularly check the freezing point of the coolant to ensure that it meets the requirements of the local environment and replace it regularly.

4.4.4 The Working Principle of the System
4.4.4.1 System Working Principle
Three-motor Cooling Solution
1. Front end module total 7. Intermediate axle motor 2 2. Expansion tank 8. Intermediate axle MCU1 3. Electronic water pump 9. Intermediate axle MCU2 4. Inflation pump 11. Intermediate axle motor 1 5. PDU 13. Rear axle motor 2 6. Intermediate axle motor 1
Four-motor Cooling Solution
1. Front end module total 8. Intermediate axle MCU1 2. Expansion tank 9. Intermediate axle MCU2 3. Electronic water pump 10. Intermediate axle motor 1 4. Inflation pump 11. Rear axle MCU1 5. PDU 12. Rear axle MCU2 6. Intermediate axle motor 1 13. Rear axle motor 2 7. Intermediate axle motor 2



4.4.5 Dismantling and Installation
4.4.5.1 Change of Power System Coolant
Removal Procedures 1 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 2 Detach the filler cap. 3 Disengage 1 clamp and disconnect the pipeline. 4 Drain coolant from the power system. Installation Procedures
1 Connect the pipeline and attach 1 clamp. 2 Fill coolant in the power system.
caution
1. The coolant must meet the requirements of the national standards, and the coolant of same model cannot be mixed. It is recommended to use coolant with a freezing point 14* F lower than the minimum temperature in local area.
3 Install the filler cap. 4 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap.
4.4.5.2 Change of Battery Thermal Management System Coolant
Removal Procedures
1 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 2 Detach the filler cap. 3 Disengage the pipeline. 4 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. Installation Procedures


1 Connect the pipeline. 2 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.
caution
1. The coolant must meet the requirements of the national standards, and the coolant of same model cannot be mixed. It is recommended to use coolant with a freezing point 14* F lower than the minimum temperature in local area.
2. Add coolant to the auxiliary water tank until the level is between the MIN and MAX marks. When filling coolant, the air in the coolant cavity must be discharged. For this reason, you should open the air release valve (if any) on the radiator (water tank), slowly add the coolant to prevent air blockage, and wait for 2 to 3 minutes to completely discharge air. The coolant should be filled into the bottom of the water filling port or liquid level inspection port of the radiator.
3 Install the filler cap. 4 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap.
4.4.5.3 Replacement of Front End Module
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 5 Drain coolant from the power system. 6 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 7 Remove the through-type lamp. 8 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 9 Remove the forward MMW radar. 10 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 11 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 13 Remove the front bumper assembly. 14 Remove the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 15 Remove the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 16 Remove the sealing cross beam. 17 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 18 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 19 Remove the deflector assembly. 20 Remove the condenser. 21 Disconnect the 5 harness connectors of the front end module.

22 Disconnect the 3 water pipes of the front end module.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
23 Remove the 5 clamp fixing bolts of the front end module.



24 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the front end module and detach the front end module.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front end module, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the front end module to the installation position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front end module, it shall be moved to the installation position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the front end module.
Torque:(66 ft-lb +/-3.5 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Install the 5 clamp fixing bolts of the front end module.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Connect the 3 water pipes of the front end module.
5 Connect the 5 harness connectors of the front end module.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the condenser. 7 Install the deflector assembly. 8 Install the front lower protection assembly. 9 Install the MMW radar bracket. 10 Install the sealing cross beam. 11 Install the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 12 Install the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 13 Install the front bumper assembly. 14 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 15 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 16 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 17 Install the forward MMW radar. 18 Install the front MMW radar shield.
19 Install the through-type lamp. 20 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 21 Fill coolant in the power system. 22 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

4.4.5.4 Replacement of Electronic Water Pump
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Drain coolant from the power system. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electronic water pump.
6 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the electronic water pump.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
7 Remove the 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the electronic water pump. 8 Remove the electronic water pump. Installation Procedures


1 Move the electronic water pump to the installation position. 2 Install the 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the electronic water pump.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Connect the 2 water pipes of the electronic water pump. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the electronic water pump.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Fill coolant in the power system. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting the bottom of the thermal management unit to the integrated framework | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| Fixed nuts connecting the bottom of the thermal management unit to the integrated framework | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| Fixed bolts connecting the side of the thermal management unit to the integrated frame | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left battery pack connector bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 103 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the left battery pack connector bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 103 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| Fixed bolts for the connection between the expansion tank (plastic) and the integrated frame | M10 | 52 ft-lb |
| The fixing nut for the fixed connection between the expansion tank (plastic) and the integrated frame | M8 | 52 ft-lb |
4.5 Battery Thermal Management Device2127· 1g
4.5.1 Specifications
4.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

4.5.2 Decomposition Diagram
4.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Expansion Tank (Plastic) 19. Right Water Filter Inlet Hose 2. Water Filter 20. Right Water Filter Outlet Hose 3. Thermal Management Unit-lh 21. Right Unit Water Replenishment Hos 5. Thermal Management Unit-rh 22. Right Unit Inlet Hose 8. Tee Joint ( t25 ) 48. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Expansion Kettle Water Outlet Hose 49. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Wptc Water Outlet Hose 50. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Left Unit Exhaust Hose 51. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Right Unit Exhaust Hose 52. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Left Chiller Water Outlet Hose 53. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Left Water Filter Inlet Hose 54. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Left Water Filter Outlet Hose 57. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 17. Left Unit Inlet Hose 58. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 18. Right Chiller Water Outlet Hose 61 Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock
4. Three-way Joint for Battery Piping 38. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 23. Fixed Bracket for the Piping of the Left Battery Pack 39. Left 1 Battery Pack Water Outlet n 24. Right Battery Pack Line Fixing Bra 40. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Outlet 26. Right Unit Inlet Nylon Pipe 41. Water Inlet Nylon Tube of the Lower Battery Pack 27. Right Unit Water Outlet Nylon Pipe 42. Water Outlet Nylon Tube of the Lower Battery Pack 28. Left Unit Inlet Nylon Pipe 43. Left 2 Battery Pack Water Inlet Ny 29. Left Unit Water Outlet Nylon Pipe 44. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 30. Left Battery Pack Connector Fixing 45. Left 2 Battery Pack Water Outlet n 31. Right Battery Pack Connector Fixin 1 46. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Outlet 32. Right Battery Pack Connector Fixin 2 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 33. Battery Pack Pipeline Fixing Brack 1 55. Hexagon Flange Bolt 34. Battery Pack Pipeline Fixing Brack 2 56. Hexagon Flange Nut 35. Water Inlet Nylon Tube of the Upper Battery Pack 57. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 36. Water Outlet Nylon Tube of the Upper Battery Pack 60. Hexagon Flange Bolt 37. Left 1 Battery Pack Water Inlet Ny

4. Battery Pipeline 4-Way Connector 41. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Outlet 24. Right Battery Pack Connector Fixin 42. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Outlet 25. Right Battery Pack Line Fixing Bra 43. Right 3 Battery Pack Water Outlet 26. Right Unit Inlet Nylon Pipe 44. Right Battery Pack Water Outlet Ny 27. Right Unit Water Outlet Nylon Pipe 45. Right Battery Pack Water Inlet Nyl 38. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 39. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 55. Hexagon Flange Bolt 40. Right 3 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 56. Hexagon Flange Nut


4.5.3 The Working Principle of the System
4.5.3.1 System Working Principle

4.5.4 Dismantling and Installation
4.5.4.1 Replacement of the Thermal Management Unit (left)

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 9 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 11 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 12 Remove the left deflector lower body. 13 Remove the expansion tank (plastic) (left). 14 Remove the water filter. 15 Remove the rear working lamp. 16 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.
17 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.



18 Remove the 3 fixing nuts of the bracket. 19 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the thermal management unit (left).



20 Disconnect the 3 water pipes of the thermal management unit (left).
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
21 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the water pipe.



22 Remove the 12 fixing bolts and nuts of the thermal management unit (left) and detach the thermal management unit (left). Installation Procedures


1 Move the thermal management unit (left) to the installation position. 2 Install the 12 fixing bolts and nuts of the thermal management unit (left).
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the water pipe.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Connect the 3 water pipes of the thermal management unit (left). 5 Connect the 2 harness connectors of the thermal management unit (left).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the 3 fixing nuts of the bracket.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2ft-lb) ft-lb
7 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.
Torque: (88 ft-lb +/- 6 ft-lb) ft-lb
8 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb




9 Install the rear working lamp. 10 Install the water filter. 11 Install the expansion tank (plastic) (left). 12 Install the left deflector lower body. 13 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 14 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 15 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 16 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 17 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 18 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 19 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting the multi in one power distribution assembly to the integrated frame | M12 | (62 ft-lb +/- 6ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the multi in one power distribution assembly and the integrated frame | M12 | (62 ft-lb +/- 6ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt of the grounding wire harness on the multi in one power distribution assembly | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the high- voltage harness clamp to the high- voltage harness | M10 | (22 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| Item | Parameter | Remark |
|---|---|---|
| Rated input voltage | 750Vdc | / |
| Input voltage range | 500~950Vdc | / |
| Maximum input current | 14A | / |
| Auxiliary power input voltage | 16~32Vdc | 10~36V, communicable |
| Output rated voltage | 27.5±0.3Vde (adjustable within 30Vdc) | It can respond to 30Vdc |
| Output rated current | 218A | / |
| Peak output current | 240A | 6min |
| Rated output power | 6000W | / |
| Peak output power | 6600W | 6min |
| Output efficiency | 95.50% | / |
| Stabilized voltage precision | ±1% | / |
| Stabilized current precision | ±1% | / |
| Power regulation | ±1% | / |
| Load regulation | ±2% | / |
| Temperature coefficient | ±0.02%/℃ | / |
4.6 Multi-in-One Power Distribution Device2104· 2g
4.6.1 Specifications
4.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications
4.6.1.2 Technical Parameters
DC/DC
| Item | Parameter | Remark |
|---|---|---|
| Output ripple and noise | ≤300mVp-p | Bandwidth limited to 20MHz, 10uF electrolytic capacitor and 0.1uF film capacitor connected in parallel at the test end; 25℃ |
| Output rise time | <500ms | / |
| On/off overshoot amplitude | ≤±5% | / |
| On/off output delay | ≤1s | / |
| Dynamic response overshoot | ▲V: ≤+5% | / |
| Dynamic response recovery time | ≤5ms | 30%~80%~30% load change |
| Output current limiting characteristic | Constant current 240A | / |

4.6.2 Decomposition Diagram
4.6.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Auxiliary Drive All-in-One Assy
4.6.3 System Schematic Diagram
4.6.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P1D0C00 | The auxiliary power supply overvoltage | Refer to DCDC1 Power Fault |
| P1D0D00 | Secondary power supply undervoltage | |
| P1D0E00 | Low pressure KL30 | |
| P1D0F00 | Low pressure KL30 | |
| P1D0B00 | Communication exception | Refer to DCDC1 Communication Fault |
| P1D0500 | Hardware overvoltage | Refer to DCDC1 Internal Fault |
| P1D0600 | Hardware overflows | |
| P1D0700 | KB fault | |
| P1D0800 | Threshold fault | |
| P1D0900 | Short circuit protection | |
| P1D0A00 | The DCDC is overheated | Refer to DCDC1 Overheating Fault |
| P1D0200 | The DCDC output overvoltage | Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault |
| P1D0300 | The DCDC output undervoltage | |
| P1D0400 | The DCDC output overflows | |
| P1D0000 | The input voltage of the DCDC is too high | Refer to DCDC1 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P1D0100 | DCDC input undervoltage |
4.6.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
4.6.4.1 Diagnosis Description
Before diagnosing faults in multi in one power distribution equipment, Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of multi in one power distribution equipment before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a fault, and more importantly, it can help determine whether the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of multi in one power distribution equipment should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the
diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 4.6.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check the after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the multi in one power distribution system to ensure that these devices do not affect the operation of the multi in one power distribution system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 4.6.4.3 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 4.6.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
DCDC1 DCDC2
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P1E0C00 | The auxiliary power supply overvoltage | Refer to DCDC2 Power Fault |
| P1E0D00 | Secondary power supply undervoltage | |
| P1E0E00 | Low pressure KL30 | |
| P1E0F00 | Low pressure KL30 | |
| P1E0B00 | Communication exception | Refer to DCDC2 Communication Fault |
| P1E0500 | Hardware overvoltage | Refer to Internal Fault Of DCDC2 |
| P1E0600 | Hardware overflows | |
| P1E0700 | KB fault | |
| P1E0800 | Threshold fault | |
| P1E0900 | Short circuit protection | |
| P1E0A00 | The DCDC is overheated | Refer to DCDC2 Overheating Fault |
| P1E0200 | The DCDC output overvoltage | Refer to DCDC2 Low-voltage Power Supply Sstem Fault |
| P1E0300 | The DCDC output undervoltage | |
| P1E0400 | The DCDC output overflows | |
| P1E0000 | The input voltage of the DCDC is too high | Refer to DCDC2 High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P1E0100 | DCDC input undervoltage |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P260700 | KL30 voltage is too low when the main drive circuit is powered on | Refer to PDU Power Fault |
| P260811 | The main contactor of the main drive circuit is closed abnormally | |
| P260F00 | KL30 is too low when the auxiliary drive circuit is powered on | |
| P261011 | Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor closing abnormal fault | |
| P261D00 | Battery voltage is out of controller range fault | |
| P261F11 | KL30 undervoltage fault | |
| P262011 | KL30 overvoltage fault | |
| P262211 | Intranet BusOff Fault | Refer to PDU Communication Fault |
| P262311 | Intranet DCDC communication alarm | |
| P262411 | Intranet TM1 communication alarm | |
| P262511 | Intranet TM2 communication alarm | |
| P260000 | Main contactor adhesion fault in main drive circuit | Refer to Internal Fault Of PDU |
| P260100 | Reverse voltage difference fault when the main drive circuit is powered on |
PDU
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P260200 | Main drive circuit power-on pre-charge timeout fault | |
| P260300 | The rear end of the main drive circuit is completely short-circuited. | |
| P260400 | Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the main drive circuit | |
| P260500 | Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear secondary of the main drive circuit | |
| P260600 | Main drive circuit with speed power-on fault | |
| P260900 | Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor adhesion fault | |
| P260A00 | Auxiliary drive circuit power-on reverse voltage difference fault | |
| P260B00 | Auxiliary drive circuit power-on pre- charge timeout fault | |
| P260C00 | The rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit is completely short-circuited | |
| P260D00 | Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit | |
| P260E00 | Secondary incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit | |
| P261100 | PTC1 contactor adhesion fault | |
| P261200 | PTC2 contactor adhesion fault | |
| P261300 | TOP1 contactor adhesion failure | |
| P261400 | TOP2 contactor adhesion failure | |
| P261500 | FAST1 contactor adhesion fault | |
| P261600 | FAST2 contactor adhesion fault | |
| P261711 | PTC1 closing abnormal fault | |
| P261811 | PTC2 closing abnormal fault | |
| P261911 | TOP1 closing abnormal fault | |
| P261A11 | TOP2 closing abnormal fault | |
| P261B11 | FAST1 closing abnormality fault | |
| P261C11 | FAST2 closing abnormality fault | |
| P261E00 | Main negative contactor disconnect/ battery feed | |
| P262100 | Compilation failure |
APU
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U015687 | missing CDCU | Refer to APU Communication Fault |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication with VDC | |
| U008D88 | PCAN3 BusOff | |
| P1C0000 | EPS hardware overcurrent fault | Refer to APU Reports EHPS Related Fault |
| P1C0100 | EPS drive upper axle failure | |
| P1C0200 | EPS drive lower axle failure | |
| P1C0300 | EPS drive undervoltage fault | |
| P1C0400 | EPS hardware overvoltage fault | |
| P1C0500 | EPS bus overvoltage fault | |
| P1C0600 | EPS bus undervoltage fault | |
| P1C0700 | EPS resolver failure | |
| P1C0800 | EPS phase failure | |
| P1C0900 | EPS AC zero drift is too large | |
| P1C0A00 | EPS Hall disconnection | |
| P1C0B00 | EPS three-phase current verification error | |
| P1C0C00 | EPSKL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage | |
| P1C0D00 | EPSKL30 low voltage power supply overvoltage | |
| P1C0E00 | EPS module over temperature fault | |
| P1C0F00 | EPS motor over temperature fault | |
| P1C1000 | EPS motor overspeed failure | |
| P1C1100 | EPS speed deviation is too large | |
| P1C1200 | EPS active discharge timeout | |
| P1C1300 | EPS parameter tuning failed | |
| P1C1410 | EPS jam alarm | |
| P1C1510 | EPS bus voltage overvoltage drop power | |
| P1C1610 | EPS bus voltage undervoltage alarm | |
| P1C1710 | EPS motor temperature sensor is disconnected | |
| P1C1810 | EPS module over temperature alarm | |
| P1C1910 | EPS motor over temperature alarm | |
| P1C1A10 | EPS control overload alarm | |
| P1C1B10 | EPS motor overload alarm | |
| P1C1C10 | EPS motor overspeed alarm |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P1C1D11 | EPS motor temperature sensor 1 is offline | |
| P1C1E11 | EPS motor temperature sensor 2 is offline | |
| P1C1F11 | EPSU phase current zero drift fault | |
| P1C2011 | EPSV phase current zero drift fault | |
| P1C2111 | EPSW phase current zero drift fault | |
| P1C2211 | EPSU phase Hall wire disconnection | |
| P1C2311 | EPSV phase Hall wire disconnection | |
| P1C2411 | EPSW phase Hall disconnection | |
| P1C2500 | EPSCompilation failure | |
| P1C2600 | EPS EEPROM read and write failure | |
| P1C2700 | ACM hardware overcurrent fault | Refer to APU Reports Air Compressor Related Fault |
| P1C2800 | ACM driver upper axle failure | |
| P1C2900 | ACM drive lower axle fault | |
| P1C2A00 | ACM driver undervoltage fault | |
| P1C2B00 | ACM hardware overvoltage fault | |
| P1C2C00 | ACM bus overvoltage fault | |
| P1C2D00 | ACM bus undervoltage fault | |
| P1C2E00 | ACM resolver failure | |
| P1C2F00 | ACM phase failure | |
| P1C3000 | ACM AC zero drift is too large | |
| P1C3100 | ACM Hall disconnection | |
| P1C3200 | ACM three-phase current verification error | |
| P1C3300 | ACM KL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage | |
| P1C3400 | ACM KL30 Low Voltage Power Supply Overvoltage | |
| P1C3500 | ACM module over temperature fault | |
| P1C3600 | ACM motor over temperature fault | |
| P1C3700 | ACM Motor Overspeed Fault | |
| P1C3800 | ACM speed deviation too large | |
| P1C3900 | ACM Active Discharge Timeout | |
| P1C3A00 | ACM parameter tuning failed | |
| P1C3B10 | ACM stall alarm | |
| P1C3C10 | ACM bus voltage overvoltage drop power | |
| P1C3D10 | ACM bus voltage undervoltage alarm |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P1C3E10 | ACM motor temperature sensor disconnected | |
| P1C3F10 | ACM module over temperature alarm | |
| P1C4010 | ACM motor over temperature alarm | |
| P1C4110 | ACM control overload alarm | |
| P1C4210 | ACM motor overload alarm | |
| P1C4310 | ACM Motor Overspeed Alarm | |
| P1C4411 | ACM motor temperature sensor 1 is offline | |
| P1C4511 | ACM motor temperature sensor 2 is offline | |
| P1C4611 | U phase current zero drift fault | |
| P1C4711 | V phase current zero drift fault | |
| P1C4811 | W phase current zero drift fault | |
| P1C4911 | U phase Hall wire disconnection | |
| P1C4A11 | V phase Hall wire disconnection | |
| P1C4B11 | W phase Hall disconnection | |
| P1C4C00 | Compilation failure | |
| P1C4D00 | EEPROM read and write failure |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0C00 | The auxiliary power supply overvoltage | The auxiliary power supply voltage is greater than 13V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Power distribution unit |
| P1D0D00 | Secondary power supply undervoltage | The auxiliary power supply voltage is less than 9V | |
| P1D0E00 | Low pressure KL30 | The KL30 voltage is greater than 37V | |
| P1D0F00 | Low pressure KL30 | The KL30 voltage is less than 9V |
4.6.4.5 DCDC1 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0B00 | Communication exception | 30s The correct packet frame was not received | 1.Wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides DCDC1? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power distribution unit power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.6 DCDC1 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of PCAN3 bus network integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0500 | Hardware overvoltage | Comparator equivalent voltage greater than 37V | 1. Power distribution unit |
| P1D0600 | Hardware overflows | Comparator equivalent current greater than 350A | |
| P1D0700 | KB fault | The correct KB correction factor was not read | |
| P1D0800 | Threshold fault | The correct fault threshold was not read. Procedure | |
| P1D0900 | Short circuit protection | The output voltage is lower than 4V and the output current is greater than 180A |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0A00 | The DCDC is overheated | The primary temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉. Or the secondary side temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉; Or the ambient temperature is greater than 239℉ | 1. Power distribution unit |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.7 DCDC1 Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 4:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement of Multi in One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.8 DCDC1 Overheating Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.9 DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0200 | The DCDC output overvoltage | The output voltage is greater than 32V | 1. Main battery 2. Wiring harness 3. Power distribution unit |
| P1D0300 | The DCDC output undervoltage | The output voltage is lower than 18V | |
| P1D0400 | The DCDC output overflows | The output current is greater than 200A |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0000 | The input voltage of the DCDC is too high | The input voltage is greater than 960V | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit |
| P1D0100 | DCDC input undervoltage | The input voltage is lower than 480V |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0C00 | The auxiliary power supply overvoltage | The auxiliary power supply voltage is greater than 13V | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Power distribution unit |
| P1E0D00 | Secondary power supply undervoltage | The auxiliary power supply voltage is less than 9V | |
| P1E0E00 | The KL30 is overpressurized | The KL30 voltage is greater than 37V | |
| P1E0F00 | Low pressure KL30 | The KL30 voltage is less than 9V |
Step 4:Check the low-voltage charging circuit of the power distribution unit (integrated DCDC). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.10 DCDC1 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power distribution unit high-voltage harness. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the power distribution unit. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.11 DCDC2 Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0B00 | Communication exception | 30s The correct packet frame was not received | 1.Wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides DCDC2? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power distribution unit power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.12 DCDC2 Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0500 | Hardware overvoltage | Comparator equivalent voltage greater than 37V | 1. Power distribution unit |
| P1E0600 | Hardware overflows | Comparator equivalent current greater than 350A | |
| P1E0700 | KB fault | The correct KB correction factor was not read | |
| P1E0800 | Threshold fault | The correct fault threshold was not read. Procedure | |
| P1E0900 | Short circuit protection | The output voltage is lower than 4V and the output current is greater than 180A |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0A00 | The DCDC is overheated | The primary temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉. Or the secondary side temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉; Or the ambient temperature is greater than 239℉ | 1. Power distribution unit |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.13 Internal Fault Of DCDC2
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 4:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.14 DCDC2 Overheating Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.15 DCDC2 Low-voltage Power Supply Sstem Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0200 | The DCDC output overvoltage | The output voltage is greater than 32V | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit |
| P1E0300 | The DCDC output undervoltage | The output voltage is lower than 18V | |
| P1E0400 | The DCDC output overflows | The output current is greater than 200A |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0000 | The input voltage of the DCDC is too high | The input voltage is greater than 960V | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit |
| P1E0100 | DCDC input undervoltage | The input voltage is lower than 480V |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P260700 | KL30 voltage is too low when the main drive circuit is powered on | (1) The power-on state is ready to power on (state 1); (2) The power-on state is ready to close the main connection (state 3); (3) The KL30 voltage is less than the fault threshold (8.6V for 12V system and 15.7V for 24V system); Meet ((1) OR (2)) ADN (3) | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Power distribution unit |
| P260811 | The main contactor of the main drive circuit is closed abnormally | (1) There is a closing command and the power-on is completed; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) |
Step 3:Check the low-voltage power supply line of the thermal management unit of the power distribution unit (integrated DCDC). Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.16 DCDC2 High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power distribution unit high-voltage harness. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the power distribution unit. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.17 PDU Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P260F00 | KL30 is too low when the auxiliary drive circuit is powered on | (1) The power-on state is ready to power on (state 1); (2) The power-on state is ready to close the main connection (state 3); (3) The KL30 voltage is less than the fault threshold (8.6V for 12V system and 15.7V for 24V system); Meet ((1) OR (2)) ADN (3) | |
| P261011 | Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor closing abnormal fault | (1) Main contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3))OR(4)) | |
| P261D00 | Battery voltage is out of controller range fault | (1) The power-on status of the main circuit is ready for power-on; (2) The power-on status of the auxiliary circuit is ready for power-on; (3) The power-on status of the upper circuit is ready for power-on; (4) The power-on status of the BMS circuit is the main connection closed state; (5) After the high-voltage power-on is successful, the front-end voltage is less than the battery voltage lower limit - 10V and greater than the battery voltage upper limit + 10V.. (6) When the high-voltage power-on is unsuccessful, the front-end voltage is less than the battery voltage lower limit. Meet ((1)OR(2)OR(3)OR(4))AND((5)OR(6)) | |
| P261F11 | KL30 undervoltage fault | (1) 24V control power supply:Voltage below 18V; 2) 12V control power supply:hardware trigger voltage is lower than 8.6V | |
| P262011 | KL30 overvoltage fault | (1) 24V control power supply:voltage higher than 32V; (2) 12V control power supply:voltage higher than 18V; Meet (1) OR (2) |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P262211 | Intranet BusOff Fault | (1) CanA control register Boff bit is 1 (Can high and low are short-circuited) | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit |
| P262311 | Intranet DCDC communication alarm | (1) The intranet is interrupted from receiving DCDC messages, which lasts for 3 seconds. | |
| P262411 | Intranet TM1 communication alarm | (1) The intranet is interrupted from receiving TM1 messages, which lasts for 3 seconds. | |
| P262511 | Intranet TM2 communication alarm | (1) The intranet is interrupted from receiving TM2 messages, which lasts for 3 seconds. |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides PDU? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power distribution unit power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.18 PDU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P260000 | Main contactor adhesion fault in main drive circuit | Sticky detection command: (1) Sticky detection enable is turned on; (2) There is no internal network fault in the main circuit; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) The loop state machine is in the state of preparing for pre-charging power-on or preparing for controlling power-down. If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | 1. Power distribution unit |
| P260100 | Reverse voltage difference fault when the main drive circuit is powered on | (1) The power-on state is ready to power on; (2) The power-on state is ready to power on; Meet (1) AND (2) | |
| P260200 | Main drive circuit power-on pre-charge timeout fault | (1)The power-on state is slow charging state (state 2). And the heartbeat update of the main drive circuit intranet is normal during fault judgment; (2) The voltage difference between the front and rear ends of the main connection is not less than 15V for 100ms continuously; (3) The front-end voltage is not greater than the undervoltage point for 100ms continuously; Meet (1) AND ((2) OR (3)) | |
| P260300 | The rear end of the main drive circuit is completely short- circuited. | (1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (depending on the voltage, the time varies); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (50V); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4) |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.19 Internal Fault Of PDU
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P260400 | Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the main drive circuit | (1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (350ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (41% of the front-end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4) | |
| P260500 | Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear secondary of the main drive circuit | (1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (800ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (81% of the front end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4) | |
| P260600 | Main drive circuit with speed power-on fault | (1) There is a power-on command; (2) The power-on status is powering on; (3)Not one-button power-on andNon-panel control (4) TM speed greater than 500rpm Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND(4) | |
| P260900 | Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor adhesion fault | Sticky detection command: (1) Sticky detection enable is turned on; (2) There is no internal network fault in the main circuit; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) The loop state machine is in the state of preparing for pre-charging power-on or preparing for controlling power-down. If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | |
| P260A00 | Auxiliary drive circuit power-on reverse voltage difference fault | (1) The power-on state is ready to power on (state 1); (2) The power-on state is ready to power on; (3) The voltage at the front end of the contactor is greater than the undervoltage point; Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P260B00 | Auxiliary drive circuit power-on pre-charge timeout fault | (1) The power-on state is slow charging (state 2); (2) The voltage difference between the front and rear ends of the main connection is not less than 15V for 100ms continuously; (3) The front-end voltage is not greater than the undervoltage point for 100ms continuously; Meet (1) AND ((2) OR (3)) | |
| P260C00 | The rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit is completely short- circuited | (1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (depending on the voltage, the time varies); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (50V); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4) | |
| P260D00 | Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit | (1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (300ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (41% of the front-end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4) | |
| P260E00 | Secondary incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit | (1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (750ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (81% of the front end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4) |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P261100 | PTC1 contactor adhesion fault | Sticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | |
| P261200 | PTC2 contactor adhesion fault | Sticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | |
| P261300 | TOP1 contactor adhesion failure | Sticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | |
| P261400 | TOP2 contactor adhesion failure | Sticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P261500 | FAST1 contactor adhesion fault | Sticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | |
| P261600 | FAST2 contactor adhesion fault | Sticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed. | |
| P261711 | PTC1 closing abnormal fault | (1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) | |
| P261811 | PTC2 closing abnormal fault | (1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) | |
| P261911 | TOP1 closing abnormal fault | (1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P261A11 | TOP2 closing abnormal fault | (1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) | |
| P261B11 | FAST1 closing abnormality fault | (1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) | |
| P261C11 | FAST2 closing abnormality fault | (1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4)) | |
| P261E00 | Main negative contactor disconnect/ battery feed | (1) Any circuit of the main, auxiliary, upper and air conditioner is powered on; (2) The front-end voltage is 20V lower than the undervoltage point for 200ms. Meet (1)AND(2) | |
| P262100 | Compilation failure | The length of the function code structure is inconsistent with the defined length |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 4:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.20 APU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U015687 | Lost Communications with CDCU | 1) In communication control mode; 2) No CDCU message with ID 0x18FEC1EE is received; 3) Lasts for 5 seconds; | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | 1) In communication control mode; 2) No T-BOX message with ID 0x18FEE6EE is received; 3) Lasts for 5 seconds; | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication with VDC | 1) In communication control mode; 2) Failure to receive the VDC message with ID 0x18017827; 3) Lasts for 5 seconds; | |
| U008D88 | PCAN3 BusOff | (1) Can control register Boff bit is 1 (Can high and low are short-circuited) |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C0000 | EPS hardware overcurrent fault | Output current exceeds the hardware overcurrent trigger point:88A; | 1.Wiring harness 2.EHPS 3.Power distribution unit |
| P1C0100 | EPS drive upper axle failure | The hardware driver upper axle Fault signal trigger is effective; | |
| P1C0200 | EPS drive lower axle failure | The hardware-driven axle Fault signal trigger is effective; | |
| P1C0300 | EPS drive undervoltage fault | The hardware driver undervoltage Fault signal trigger is valid; | |
| P1C0400 | EPS hardware overvoltage fault | The bus voltage exceeds the hardware overvoltage trigger point:800V; | |
| P1C0500 | EPS bus overvoltage fault | 1) Bus voltage > bus overvoltage fault trigger point:750V (F10-00 setting) | |
| P1C0600 | EPS bus undervoltage fault | 1) Bus voltage < bus undervoltage fault trigger point:350V (set in F10-01) for 1s; 2) Or, bus voltage < (bus undervoltage fault trigger point - 100V) 3) And, the run command is valid; | |
| P1C0700 | EPS resolver failure | Within 100ms, when measuring angle, DOS and LOT are both low level and reach 60% |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.21 APU Reports EHPS Related Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C0800 | EPS phase failure | Phase loss during operation:If any of the conditions 1 or 2 is met, the operating condition 1 is reported: 1) Output phase loss detection during operation is enabled (F10-17) 2) Operating frequency>0.8Hz; 3) The controller is in operation; 4) The three-phase maximum current effective value/ minimum current effective value ≥11, and the three- phase maximum current effective value>12.2% base current; 5) Condition 4) is judged once every 5 switching cycles, and it is met for 5 consecutive times, and a phase loss fault is reported. Operating condition 2: 1) The output AC voltage is greater than the rated voltage & the output AC current effective value is less than 1/40 base current, 2) The operating frequency of the synchronous motor type is less than 1/4 of the rated frequency of the motor, and there is no frequency requirement for the asynchronous motor; 3) If 1) and 2 are met at the same time, the fault counter is +1, otherwise -1; if the fault counter is ≥10, a phase loss fault is reported. Power-on phase loss detection:Meet all the following conditions for 4ms 1) The controller is powered on at low voltage for the first time; 2) When the tube is turned on for the first time, UV, VW, and WU three-phase pulses are sent respectively for phase sequence phase loss detection. PS:Base current = Min (0.5 times the maximum current of the motor, 0.25 times the maximum current of the controller) | |
| P1C0900 | EPS AC zero drift is too large | 200ms after power-on: 1) The controller is in shutdown state, and the back electromotive force amplitude is less than 0.85 times the bus voltage; 2) The three-phase current is sampled 50 times (2ms/ time) continuously, and the average value is calculated, which is greater than 15.6% of the AD full-scale current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 3 consecutive tests, a zero |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| drift fault is reported; | |||
| P1C0A00 | EPS Hall disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C0B00 | EPS three-phase current verification error | 1) The sum of the three-phase sampled current exceeds the threshold (determined by hardware) | |
| P1C0C00 | EPSKL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage | 1) Battery voltage ≤undervoltage point (12V) and lasts for 100ms | |
| P1C0D00 | EPSKL30 low voltage power supply overvoltage | Battery voltage ≥overvoltage point (36V) | |
| P1C0E00 | EPS module over temperature fault | The maximum module temperature is ≥the module over-temperature fault trigger point:85°C (F10-02) and lasts for 20ms | |
| P1C0F00 | EPS motor over temperature fault | 1) Motor temperature ≥motor overtemperature fault trigger point:150℃(F10-07), and lasts for 500ms; 2) And, motor overtemperature detection is enabled (F10-06); | |
| P1C1000 | EPS motor overspeed failure | 1) In the running state; 2) The motor speed exceeds 3500rpm (F10-12); 3) Lasts for 100ms; 4) Overspeed fault detection is enabled (F10-10) | |
| P1C1100 | EPS speed deviation is too large | 1) Speed control mode and in operation; 2) The deviation between the current motor speed frequency and the target speed frequency is greater than the speed deviation detection threshold (F10-15); ; 3) The deviation lasts for more than 3 seconds; 4) The speed deviation detection is enabled (F10-14) | |
| P1C1200 | EPS active discharge timeout | 1) Active discharge duration is greater than 3s and voltage is greater than 36V 2) Or, motor speed exceeds 15rpm | |
| P1C1300 | EPS parameter tuning failed | (1) Tuning timeout:stator resistance tuning 20s, magnetic pole position tuning 4s, resolver zero position 80s, back EMF tuning 80s; (2) Or, the resolver pole pair number does not match the motor pole pair number; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C1410 | EPS jam alarm | 1) In the running state; 2) Frequency < 1Hz 3) Current exceeds 1.5 times the rated value; 4) The above three conditions are met at the same time and maintained for 10s; | |
| P1C1510 | EPS bus voltage overvoltage drop power | 1) When the bus voltage is ≥the bus overvoltage point -20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is greater than the bus overvoltage, the power will be reduced to 0; | |
| P1C1610 | EPS bus voltage undervoltage alarm | 1) When the bus voltage is less than or equal to the bus undervoltage point +20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is less than the bus undervoltage point, the power will be reduced to 0; | |
| P1C1710 | EPS motor temperature sensor is disconnected | All the set motor temperature sensors are offline | |
| P1C1810 | EPS module over temperature alarm | 1) Module temperature ≥module over-temperature reset point:80℃(F10-03), start to reduce power; 2) Module temperature > module over-temperature point 85℃(F10-02), power is reduced to 0; 3) And, controller over-temperature power reduction is enabled, F10-04; | |
| P1C1910 | EPS motor over temperature alarm | 1) When the motor temperature is ≥the motor overtemperature reset point:140°C (F10-08), the power starts to be reduced; 2) When the motor temperature is greater than the motor overtemperature point 150°C (F10-07), the power is reduced to 0; 3) And, the controller overtemperature power reduction is enabled, F10-09; | |
| P1C1A10 | EPS control overload alarm | 1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the inverter, it is judged as overload; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients; | |
| P1C1B10 | EPS motor overload alarm | 1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the motor, it is judged as overloaded; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C1C10 | EPS motor overspeed alarm | 1) In the running state; 2) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed power reduction threshold (F10-13), the power reduction starts; 3) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection threshold of 10000rpm (F10-12), the power is reduced to 0; 4) When the motor overspeed power reduction is enabled, F10-11 | |
| P1C1D11 | EPS motor temperature sensor 1 is offline | 1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15V 2) And, it lasts for 100ms; | |
| P1C1E11 | EPS motor temperature sensor 2 is offline | 1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15VV 2) And, it lasts for 100ms; | |
| P1C1F11 | EPSU phase current zero drift fault | 1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported; | |
| P1C2011 | EPSV phase current zero drift fault | 1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported; | |
| P1C2111 | EPSW phase current zero drift fault | 1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the W phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C2211 | EPSU phase Hall wire disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C2311 | EPSV phase Hall wire disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C2411 | EPSW phase Hall disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C2500 | EPSCompilation failure | The length of the function code structure is inconsistent with the defined length | |
| P1C2600 | EPS EEPROM read and write failure | EEPROM read and Disconnection and interruption events occur during parameter reading and writingfailure |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C2700 | ACM hardware overcurrent fault | Output current exceeds the hardware overcurrent trigger point:88A; | 1.Wiring harness 2. Air compressor 3. Power distribution unit |
| P1C2800 | ACM driver upper axle failure | The hardware driver upper axle Fault signal trigger is effective; | |
| P1C2900 | ACM drive lower axle fault | The hardware-driven axle Fault signal trigger is effective; |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Check the high-voltage harness of the battery pack. Step 6:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the battery pack. Step 7:Check the EHPS three-phase input harness. Step 8:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EHPS. Step 9:Replace the EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 10:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 11:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 12:Clear and confirm DTC.
4.6.4.22 APU Reports Air Compressor Related Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C2A00 | ACM driver undervoltage fault | The hardware driver undervoltage Fault signal trigger is valid; | |
| P1C2B00 | ACM hardware overvoltage fault | The bus voltage exceeds the hardware overvoltage trigger point:800V; | |
| P1C2C00 | ACM bus overvoltage fault | 1) Bus voltage > bus overvoltage fault trigger point:750V (F10-00 setting) | |
| P1C2D00 | ACM bus undervoltage fault | 1) Bus voltage < bus undervoltage fault trigger point:350V (set in F10-01) for 1s; 2) Or, bus voltage < (bus undervoltage fault trigger point - 100V) 3) And, the run command is valid; | |
| P1C2E00 | ACM resolver failure | Within 100ms, when measuring angle, DOS and LOT are both low level and reach 60% |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C2F00 | ACM phase failure | Phase loss during operation:If any of the conditions 1 or 2 is met, the operating condition 1 is reported: 1) Output phase loss detection during operation is enabled (F10-17) 2) Operating frequency>0.8Hz; 3) The controller is in operation; 4) The three-phase maximum current effective value/ minimum current effective value ≥11, and the three- phase maximum current effective value>12.2% base current; 5) Condition 4) is judged once every 5 switching cycles, and it is met for 5 consecutive times, and a phase loss fault is reported. Operating condition 2: 1) The output AC voltage is greater than the rated voltage & the output AC current effective value is less than 1/40 base current, 2) The operating frequency of the synchronous motor type is less than 1/4 of the rated frequency of the motor, and there is no frequency requirement for the asynchronous motor; 3) If 1) and 2 are met at the same time, the fault counter is +1, otherwise -1; if the fault counter is ≥10, a phase loss fault is reported. Meet all the following conditions for 4ms 1) The controller is powered on at low voltage for the first time; 2) When the tube is turned on for the first time, UV, VW, and WU three-phase pulses are sent respectively for phase sequence phase loss detection. PS: Base current = Min (0.5 times the maximum current of the motor, 0.25 times the maximum current of the controller) | |
| P1C3000 | ACM AC zero drift is too large | 200ms after power-on: 1) The controller is in shutdown state, and the back electromotive force amplitude is less than 0.85 times the bus voltage; 2) The three-phase current is sampled 50 times (2ms/ time) continuously, and the average value is calculated, which is greater than 15.6% of the AD full-scale current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 3 consecutive tests, a zero |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| drift fault is reported; | |||
| P1C3100 | ACM Hall disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C3200 | ACM three-phase current verification error | 1) The sum of the three-phase sampled current exceeds the threshold (determined by hardware) | |
| P1C3300 | ACM KL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage | 1) Battery voltage ≤undervoltage point (12V) and lasts for 100mss | |
| P1C3400 | ACM KL30 Low Voltage Power Supply Overvoltage | Battery voltage ≥overvoltage point (36V) | |
| P1C3500 | ACM module over temperature fault | The maximum module temperature is ≥the module over-temperature fault trigger point:85°C (F10-02) and lasts for 20ms | |
| P1C3600 | ACM motor over temperature fault | 1) Motor temperature ≥motor overtemperature fault trigger point:150℃(F10-07), and lasts for 500ms; 2) And, motor overtemperature detection is enabled (F10-06); | |
| P1C3700 | ACM Motor Overspeed Fault | 1) In the running state; 2) The motor speed exceeds 3500rpm (F10-12); 3) Lasts for 100ms; 4) Overspeed fault detection is enabled (F10-10) | |
| P1C3800 | ACM speed deviation too large | 1) Speed control mode and in operation; 2) The deviation between the current motor speed frequency and the target speed frequency is greater than the speed deviation detection threshold (F10-15); 3) The deviation lasts for more than 3 seconds; 4) The speed deviation detection is enabled (F10-14) | |
| P1C3900 | ACM Active Discharge Timeout | 1) Active discharge duration is greater than 3s and voltage is greater than 36V 2) Or, motor speed exceeds 15rpm | |
| P1C3A00 | ACM parameter tuning failed | (1) Tuning timeout:stator resistance tuning 20s, magnetic pole position tuning 4s, resolver zero position 80s, back EMF tuning 80s; (2) Or, the resolver pole pair number does not match the motor pole pair number; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C3B10 | ACM stall alarm | 1) In the running state; 2) Frequency < 1Hz 3) Current exceeds 1.5 times the rated value; 4) The above three conditions are met at the same time and maintained for 10s; | |
| P1C3C10 | ACM bus voltage overvoltage drop power | 1) When the bus voltage is ≥the bus overvoltage point -20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is greater than the bus overvoltage, the power will be reduced to 0; | |
| P1C3D10 | ACM bus voltage undervoltage alarm | 1) When the bus voltage is less than or equal to the bus undervoltage point +20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is less than the bus undervoltage point, the power will be reduced to 0; | |
| P1C3E10 | ACM motor temperature sensor disconnected | All the set motor temperature sensors are offline | |
| P1C3F10 | ACM module over temperature alarm | 1) Module temperature ≥module over-temperature reset point:80℃(F10-03), start to reduce power; 2) Module temperature > module over-temperature point 85℃(F10-02), power is reduced to 0; 3) And, controller over-temperature power reduction is enabled, F10-04; | |
| P1C4010 | ACM motor over temperature alarm | 1) When the motor temperature is ≥the motor overtemperature reset point:140°C (F10-08), the power starts to be reduced; 2) When the motor temperature is greater than the motor overtemperature point 150°C (F10-07), the power is reduced to 0; 3) And, the controller overtemperature power reduction is enabled, F10-09; | |
| P1C4110 | ACM control overload alarm | 1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the inverter, it is judged as overload; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients; | |
| P1C4210 | ACM motor overload alarm | 1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the motor, it is judged as overloaded; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C4310 | ACM Motor Overspeed Alarm | 1) In the running state; 2) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed power reduction threshold (F10-13), the power reduction starts; ; 3) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection threshold of 10000rpm (F10-12), the power is reduced to 0; 4) When the motor overspeed power reduction is enabled, F10-11 | |
| P1C4411 | ACM motor temperature sensor 1 is offline | 1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15V 2) And, it lasts for 100ms; | |
| P1C4511 | ACM motor temperature sensor 2 is offline | 1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15V 2) And, it lasts for 100ms; | |
| P1C4611 | U phase current zero drift fault | 1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported; | |
| P1C4711 | V phase current zero drift fault | 1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported; | |
| P1C4811 | W phase current zero drift fault | 1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the W phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1C4911 | U phase Hall wire disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C4A11 | V phase Hall wire disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C4B11 | W phase Hall disconnection | 1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s; | |
| P1C4C00 | Compilation failure | The length of the function code structure is inconsistent with the defined length | |
| P1C4D00 | EEPROM read and write failure | EEPROM read and Disconnection and interruption events occur during parameter reading and writingfailure |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Check the high-voltage harness of the battery pack. Step 6:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the battery pack. Step 7:Check the three-phase wiring harness of the air compressor. Step 8:Replace the air compressor. Refer to Replacement Of Air Compressor Assembly Step 9:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 10:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 11:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.5 Dismantling and Installation
4.6.5.1 Replacement of the All-in-one Power Distribution Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Drain coolant from the power system. 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the 10 fixing screws of the cover plate and detach the cover plate.
10 Remove the 8 fixing screws of the harness. 11 Remove the 8 fixing bolts of the harness. 12 Remove the 12 fixing screws of the cover plate and detach the 2 cover plates.



13 Remove the 12 fixing screws of the harness. 14 Remove the 12 fixing bolts of the harness. 15 Disconnect the 15 harness connectors of the all-in-one power distribution assembly.



16 Disconnect the 2 water pipes.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.



17 Remove 2 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 18 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the all-in-one power distribution assembly and detach the all-in-one power distribution assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the all-in-one power distribution assembly to the installation location. 2 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the all-in-one power distribution assembly.
Torque:62 ft-lb +/- 6 ft-lb

3 Install 2 fixing bolt of the ground harness.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Connect the 2 water pipes. 5 Connect the 15 harness connectors of the all-in-one power distribution assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the 12 fixing bolts of the harness.
Torque: (22 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
7 Install the 12 fixing screws of the harness.
8 Install the 12 fixing screws of the cover plate. 9 Install the 8 fixing bolts of the harness.
Torque: (22 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
10 Install the 8 fixing screws of the harness.
11 Install the 10 fixing screws of the cover plate. 12 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 13 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 14 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 15 Fill coolant in the power system. 16 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Close the door.

4.7 Vehicle-mounted Charging Device 4.7.1 Dismantling and Installation2107· 7g
4.7.1.1 Replacement of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Remove the left deflector lower body. 6 Remove the left charging cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 9 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 10 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the MCS charging socket assembly.
11 Remove 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the MCS charging socket assembly harness clip. 12 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the MCS charging socket assembly.



13 Remove the MCS charging socket assembly. Installation procedures 1 Move the MCS charging socket assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the MCS charging socket assembly.
3 Install 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the MCS charging socket assembly harness clip. 4 Connect 3 harness connectors of the MCS charging socket assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Install the left charging cover plate assembly. 9 Install the left deflector lower body. 10 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the air conditioning compressor assembly to the high-voltage cable | M5 | 4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump and the high-voltage cable | M6 | 6 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt for connecting the grounding terminal and the vehicle frame. | M8 | 17 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb |
4.8 High-Voltage Cable and Connector Device2105· 14g
4.8.1 Specifications
4.8.1.1 Fastener Specifications

4.8.2 Decomposition Diagram
4.8.2.1 Decomposition Diagram










20. Hexagon Flange Nut 95. Electric Drive axle Harness 1 86. Cable Ties 1 96. Electric Drive axle Harness 2 89. Motor Power Cable Assembly Ⅰ 97. Electric Drive axle Harness 4 90. Motor Power Cable Assembly Ⅱ 98. Mountable Head Ties 91. Motor Power Cable Assembly Ⅳ 99. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 94. Tapered Locking Washer 10- 0. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the front millimeter wave radar adapter bracket to the millimeter wave radar bracket | M6 | 7 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the millimeter wave radar bracket to the front lower protection assembly | M8 | 17 ft-lb +/- 1.5 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the forward millimeter wave radar and the forward millimeter wave radar adapter bracket | M5 | 4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
| Rubber cushion assembly connecting side millimeter wave radar and side skirt assembly | M8 | 9 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
5Intelligent Driving
5.1 Intelligent Driving Device3602· 24g
5.1.1 Specifications
5.1.1.1 Fastener Specifications

5.1.2 Decomposition Diagram
5.1.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Front View Intelligent Camera 2. Self-Tapping Screw
1. Front Millimeter-Wave Radar 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Bracket for Front Millimeter Wave Radar 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Cover-Front Millimeter Wave Radar 4. Adapter Brkt-Front Millimeter Wave Radar

1. Left Millimeter Wave Radar 3. Rubber Buffer 2. Cross Recessed Pan Head Screw Assy 4. Right Millimeter Wave Radar

1. Main Ultrasonic radar ( Snow white ) 3. Sub Ultrasonic Radar ( Snow white ) 2. Sub Ultrasonic Radar ( Matte black )

5.1.3 System Schematic Diagram
5.1.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected malfunctiony project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The radar keeps ringing when the vehicle is driving in an open area or does not sound when encountering obstacles while driving | 1. The radar probe is covered by foreign objects | Check if the surface of the radar probe is covered by foreign objects. |
| 2. The paint coating on the surface of the radar probe is too thick | Check if the paint coating on the surface of the radar probe is too thick. | |
| 3. Incorrect installation position of radar probe | Reinstall the radar probe. | |
| 4. Radar probe malfunction | Check the radar probe and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white).Replacement of Sub USS (matte black). Replacement of Left Side USS (snowy white) | |
| After turning on the panoramic image, the CAR screen does not display the image | 1. The panoramic camera is obstructed or damaged | Clean or replace the panoramic camera. |
| 2. Panoramic camera wiring harness malfunction | Check the wiring harness between the panoramic camera and CDC. | |
| 3. LVDS signal harness fault between CAR screen and CDC | Check the LVDS signal harness between the CAR screen and CDC. | |
| 4. CAR screen | Refer to Replacement Of CAR screen |
5.1.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
5.1.4.1 Diagnosis Description
Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of intelligent driving devices before diagnosing their faults, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of intelligent driving devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis.
Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 5.1.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the intelligent driving device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the intelligent driving device system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 5.1.4.3 Fault Symptom Table
5.1.4.4 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the malfunction code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a malfunction code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output malfunction code.
– No:Perform intermittent malfunction checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 5.1.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
CAMF
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to Front View Intelligent Camera Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With TGW | Refer to Front View Intelligent Camera Communication Fault |
| U014087 | Lost Communication With BDCU | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication With DCM | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | |
| U012187 | Lost Communication With EBS | |
| U013087 | Lost Communication With EPS | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication With ECAS | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication With EPB | |
| U007888 | CANFD6 BusOff | |
| U122000 | Invalid data received from CDCU | |
| U122100 | Invalid data received from EPS | |
| C180008 | VDC Performance Abnormal | |
| C180108 | EBS Performance Abnormal | |
| U122208 | EPS Performance Abnormal | |
| U122344 | ADCU Internal failure | Refer to Internal Fault Of Front View Intelligent Camera |
| U122C00 | Front View Intelligent Camera State Error | |
| U122D00 | Front Radar State Error | |
| C180202 | Brake Switch Signal Error | Refer to Brake Pedal Switch Fault |
| C180302 | Vehicle Speed Signal Error | Refer to Vehicle Speed Signal Fault |
| C180702 | Left-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error | |
| C180802 | Right-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error | |
| C180902 | Left-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error | |
| C180A02 | Right-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error | |
| C180402 | Yaw Rate Signal Error | Refer to Front View Intelligent Camera Reports Other System Fault |
| C180502 | Lateral Acceleration Signal Error | |
| C180602 | Longitudinal Acceleration Signal Error | |
| C180B02 | Master Cylinder Pressure Signal Error | |
| C180C02 | Road Grade Signal Error | |
| U122402 | Absoluted Steering Angle Signal Error | |
| U122502 | Steering Speed Signal Error | |
| C180D02 | Steering Torque Signal Error | |
| U122602 | Motor Torque Signal Error | |
| U122702 | Motor Speed Signal Error | |
| U122A02 | Gear State Signal Error | |
| C180F02 | Meter Vehicle Speed Signal Error |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Power supply voltage above threshold | Refer to Left Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault |
| B111716 | Power supply voltage below threshold | |
| U007888 | right radar calibrated fault | Refer to Left Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication with DCM | |
| U012187 | missing EBS | |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | |
| U220900 | CANFD6 Network Management limps home. | |
| U012287 | lost comunication with VDC | |
| U11E000 | CDCU_ADCUSET data invalid | Refer to Left Millimeter Wave Radar Reports CDC-Related Fault |
| C140000 | left radar calibrated fault | Perform side millimeter wave radar calibration, refer to Side MMW Radar Calibration Procedure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Power supply voltage above threshold | Refer to Right Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault |
| B111716 | Power supply voltage below threshold | |
| U007888 | right radar calibrated fault | Refer to Right Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication with DCM | |
| U012187 | missing EBS | |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | |
| U220900 | CANFD6 Network Management limps home | |
| U012287 | lost comunication with VDC | |
| U120000 | CDCU_ADCUSET data invalid | Refer to Right Millimeter Wave Radar Reports CDC-Related Fault |
| C160000 | CDCU_ADCUSET data invalid | IG-ON,The counter or check value is incorrect for five consecutive periods about 0x18FF1B41 Side MMW Radar Calibration Procedure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Battery Voltage Too High | Refer to Main Uss Power Fault |
| B111716 | Battery Voltage Tool low | |
| U007488 | Enter the CAN Bus-off for twice in a row | Refer to Main Uss Communication Fault |
MMWRL MMWRR USS
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U012287 | The VDC message related to vehicle speed (with the ID of 0x18FEF100) has been lost for a duration of 10 times the cycle, which is 10 * 100 | |
| U019887 | Losting the TGW gear message lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100 | |
| U015687 | Losting the soft switch CDCU message (0x18FF1B41)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 200 | |
| U012887 | Losting the EPB message (0x18FE1250)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100 | |
| U014087 | The BDCU temperature message (0x18E0FF21) is lost for 5S | |
| C121209 | Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or OC | Refer to Right Sub Uss Fault |
| C121306 | Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12140C | Front Right Sensor ringing time failure | |
| C120309 | Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Refer to Left Sub Uss Fault |
| C120406 | Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12050C | Front Left Sensor ringing time failure | |
| C120609 | Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Refer to Left Middle Sub Uss Fault |
| C120706 | Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12080C | Front Left Center Sensor ringing time failure | |
| C120909 | Front Righ Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oct | Refer to Right Middle Sub Uss Fault |
| C121006 | Front Right Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12110C | Front Right Center Sensor ringing time failure | |
| C120009 | Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Refer to Left Side Sub Uss Fault |
| C120106 | Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| C12020C | Front Left Side Sensor ringing time failure | |
| C121509 | Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Refer to Main Uss Signal Circuit Fault |
| C121606 | Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12170C | Front Right Side Sensor ringing time failure |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Voltage > 32 V, t > 5000ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Front view intelligent camera |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | Voltage < 18V, t > 30s |
5.1.4.6 Front View Intelligent Camera Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U019887 | Lost Communication With TGW | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 5000ms ID :0x18FEE6EE | 1.Wiring harness 2.Front view intelligent camera |
| U014087 | Lost Communication With BDCU | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0xCFDCC21.0x14FD1721.0x18FF6121 | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication With DCM | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state ( (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FDA54F | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FF0C41.0x18FF6341.0x18FF1B41.0x18FEA- E41.0x18FEC1EE.0x18FF6017 | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18F01127.0xCF00400.0x18F06A27.0x18FE- F100.0x18F00F27.0x18011727 |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the Front view intelligent camera? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the front view intelligent camera. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 6:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.7 Front View Intelligent Camera Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012187 | Lost Communication With EBS | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18F0010B.0x18FDC40B.0x18F0090B.0x8FE6E0- B.0x18FEAD0B | |
| U013087 | Lost Communication With EPS | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FF0513.0x18FF0613 | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication With ECAS | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FE582F | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication With EPB | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FE1250.0xCF01350 | |
| U007888 | CANFD6 BusOff | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)The Bus Off counter is equal to 8 | |
| U122000 | Invalid data received from CDCU | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Monitoring message 0x18FF6341 CDCUStatus reporting status error (4)The rolling counter or check sum in any of the following monitoring message is invalid, t > 2000ms ID:0x18FF0C41.0x18FF1B41.0x18FF6341 | |
| U122100 | Invalid data received from EPS | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)The rolling counter or check sum in any of the following monitoring message is invalid, t > 500ms ID:0x18FF0513.0x18FF0613 | |
| C180008 | VDC Performance Abnormal | Detected low control performance valid (1)ADAS system torque control command error percentage is too large and has accumulated for more than a certain period of time Returned Operational State Error valid (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2) ID 0x18F06A27 VDC Status reporting error status |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C180108 | EBS Performance Abnormal | Detected low control performance valid (1)In a driving cycle, the ADAS system detects that the deceleration command response time is too long and accumulates a certain number of times. Returned Operational State Error valid (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2) ID 0x18F0010B EBSRedWarningSignal or ABS_ EBSamberWarningState condition established (3)ID 0x18FF6121 TPMS_F_TireStatusTOCAMF or TPMS_F_TireBurstEmDeviceConnectStatusTOCAMF condition established | |
| U122208 | EPS Performance Abnormal | Detected low control performance valid (1)ADAS system detects that the steering angle control command error is too large for a period of time and the vehicle deviates from the lane centerline. Returned Operational State Error valid (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2) ID 0x18FF0513 EHPS_SysState reporting error status |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD6 bus network integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U122344 | ADCU Internal failure | (1)RAM fault, t > 500ms (2)ROM fault, t > 500ms (3)ADC fault, t > 500ms (4)EEPROM fault, t > 500ms (5)CPU load > 95% , t > 500ms | 1. Front view intelligent camera |
| U122C00 | front view intelligent camera State Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected status error information by camera, t > 1000ms (3)Detected internal fault information by camera, t > 1000ms (4)Detected not calibrated information by camera, t > 1000ms | |
| U122D00 | Front Radar State Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected status error information by radar, t > 1000ms (3)Detected internal fault information by radar, t > 1000ms (4)Detected not calibrated information by radar, t > 1000ms |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C180202 | Brake Switch Signal Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected brake switch signal error , t > 1000ms | 1. Brake pedal switch 2. Wiring harness 3. Front view intelligent camera |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 5:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.8 Internal Fault Of Front View Intelligent Camera
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 4:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.9 Brake Pedal Switch Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic

2.Circuit Diagram 3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C180302 | Vehicle Speed Signal Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected vehilcle speed signal out of range , t > 1000ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | 1. Front axle left wheel ABS sensor 2. Front axle right wheel ABS sensor 3. Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor 4. Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor 5. Vehicle axle modulator 1M 6. Axle modulator 2M 7. Wiring harness 8. EBS 9. Front view intelligent camera |
| C180702 | Left-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected left-front wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | |
| C180802 | Right-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected right-front wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | |
| C180902 | Left-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected left-rear wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | |
| C180A02 | Right-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error | (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected right-rear wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms |
Step 3:Check the relevant circuits of the brake pedal switch. Refer to Brake Pedal Switch Fault Step 4:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 7:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.10 Vehicle Speed Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection X1 C21-8
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C180402 | Yaw Rate Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected yaw rate signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | 1. Front view intelligent camera |
| C180502 | Lateral Acceleration Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected lateral acceleration signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | |
| C180602 | Longitudinal Acceleration Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected longitudinal acceleration signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms | |
| C180B02 | Master Cylinder Pressure Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. ((2)Detected that the pressure signal of eithcer front axle or rear axle out of range at the same time, t >500ms | |
| C180C02 | Road Grade Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected road grade signal out of range , t > 1000ms | |
| U122402 | Absoluted Steering Angle Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected absoluted steering angle signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle left wheel ABS sensor, front axle right wheel ABS sensor, and axle modulator 1M. Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle left wheel ABS sensor, rear axle right wheel ABS sensor, and axle modulator 2M. Step 5:Check the wiring harness between axle modulator 1M, axle modulator 2M, and EBS. Step 6:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Communication Harness Step 7:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:While ensuring safety, drive the vehicle and observe whether the speedometer changes with the speed of the vehicle? – Yes: Next. – No: Replace the faulty ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly . Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 9:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 10:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 11:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.11 Front View Intelligent Camera Reports Other System Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U122502 | Steering Speed Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected steering speed signal out of range , t > 500ms | |
| C180D02 | Steering Torque Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected steering torque signal out of range , t > 500ms | |
| U122602 | Motor Torque Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected motor torque signal out of range , t > 500ms | |
| U122702 | Motor Speed Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected motor speed signal out of range , t > 500ms | |
| U122A02 | Gear State Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected gear state signal error , t > 1000ms | |
| C180F02 | Meter Vehicle Speed Signal Error | (1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected meter vehicle speed signal out of range , t > 1000ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Power supply voltage above threshold | Power supply voltage greater than or equal to 33V,t>= 5000ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Left millimeter wave radar |
| B111716 | Power supply voltage below threshold | Power supply voltage less than or equal to 17V,t>=30s |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check if there are any other system fault codes on the vehicle? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting other system failures. – No: Next Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 5:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.12 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007888 | Main_CAN Bus-OFF | IG-ON,The voltage is 9V-16V, 8 consecutive detections of Bus-Off, only for transmission | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left millimeter wave radar |
| U019887 | lost comunication with T-BOX | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FEE6EE)more than 5s | |
| U019987 | lost comunication with DCM | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FDA54F)more than 5s | |
| U012187 | lost comunication with EBS | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x08FE6E0B or 0x18F0090B) more than 1s | |
| U015687 | lost comunication with CDCU | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FF1B41 or 0x18FEC1EE) more than 5s | |
| U220900 | CANFD6 Network Management limps home | IG-ON,after entering limphome and record tLimpHomeDTC more than 2s | |
| U012287 | lost comunication with VDC | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x0x18F00F27 or 00x18F06A27)) more than 5s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the left millimeter wave radar? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next Step 4:Check the left millimeter wave radar power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the left millimeter wave radar. Step 6:Replace the left millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRL Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.13 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U11E000 | CDCU_ADCUSET data invalid | IG-ON,The counter or check value is incorrect for five consecutive periods about 0x18FF1B41 | 1. Sensor 2. CDC 3. Left millimeter wave radar |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Power supply voltage above threshold | Power supply voltage greater than or equal to 33V,t>= 5000mss | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Right millimeter wave radar |
| B111716 | Power supply voltage below threshold | Power supply voltage less than or equal to 17V,t>=30s |
Step 4:Reload the software, and upgrade the left millimeter wave radar. Step 5:Replace the left millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRL Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.14 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Reports CDC-Related Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check all the related sensors on CDC. Step 4:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD5 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 BusOff Network Integrity Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the left millimeter wave radar. Step 7:Replace the left millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRL Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.15 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007888 | right radar calibrated fault | Radar uncalibrated or failed | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right millimeter wave radar |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | IG-ON,The voltage is 9V-16V, 8 consecutive detections of Bus-Off, only for transmission | |
| U019987 | lost comunication with T-BOX | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FEE6EE)more than 5s | |
| U012187 | lost comunication with DCM | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FDA54F)more than 5s | |
| U015687 | lost comunication with CDCU | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FF1B41 or 0x18FEC1EE) more than 5s | |
| U220900 | CANFD6 Network Management limps home | IG-ON,after entering limphome and record tLimpHomeDTC more than 2s | |
| U012287 | lost comunication with VDC | IG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x0x18F00F27 or 00x18F06A27)) more than 5s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the right millimeter wave radar? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 6:Replace the right millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRR Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.16 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U120000 | CDCU_ADCUSET data invalid | IG-ON,The counter or check value is incorrect for five consecutive periods about 0x18FF1B41 | 1. Sensor 2. CDC 3. Right millimeter wave radar |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Battery Voltage Too High | Supply Voltage above 16V more than 5000ms, KL15 ON | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Main Uss |
| B111716 | Battery Voltage Tool low | Supply Voltage under 9V more than 5000ms, KL15 ON |
Step 4:Reload the software, and upgrade the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 5:Replace the right millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRR Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.17 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Reports CDC-Related Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check all the related sensors on CDC. Step 4:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD5 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 BusOff Network Integrity Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 7:Replace the right millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRR Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.18 Main Uss Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007488 | Enter the CAN Bus-off for twice in a row | Enter the CAN Bus-off for twice in a row | 1.Wiring harness 2.Main uss |
| U012287 | The VDC message related to vehicle speed (with the ID of 0x18FEF100) has been lost for a duration of 10 times the cycle, which is 10 * 100 | The VDC message related to vehicle speed (with the ID of 0x18FEF100) has been lost for a duration of 10 times the cycle, which is 10 * 100 | |
| U019887 | Losting the TGW gear message lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100 | Losting the TGW gear message lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100 | |
| U015687 | Losting the soft switch CDCU message (0x18FF1B41)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 200 | Losting the soft switch CDCU message(0x18FF1B41) lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 200 | |
| U012887 | Losting the EPB message (0x18FE1250)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100 | Losting the EPB message(0x18FE1250)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100 | |
| U014087 | The BDCU temperature message | The BDCU temperature message |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the main uss? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the main uss. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 6:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.19 Main Uss Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ADCAN1 bus communication harness. Refer to Replacement Of ADCAN1 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C121509 | Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | 1.Wiring harness 2.Main uss |
| C121606 | Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12170C | Front Right Side Sensor ringing time failure | Front Right Side Sensor ringing time failure |
Step 4:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 5:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.20 Main Uss Signal Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the surface of the main uss.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C120309 | Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | 1.Wiring harness 2.Main uss 3.Left sub uss |
| C120406 | Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12050C | Front Left Sensor ringing time failure | Front Left Sensor ringing time failure |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the main uss and other ultrasonic slave radars. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 6:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.21 Left Sub Uss Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the left sub uss surface.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C120609 | Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | 1. Wiring harness 2. Main uss 3. Left middle sub uss |
| C120706 | Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12080C | Front Left Center Sensor ringing time failure | Front Left Center Sensor ringing time failure |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the left sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.22 Left Middle Sub Uss Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the left middle sub uss surface.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C120909 | Front Righ Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oct | Front Righ Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oct | 1. Wiring harness 2. Main uss 3. Right middle sub uss |
| C121006 | Front Right Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | Front Right Center Sensor signal line failure short- circuit to Ubat | |
| C12110C | Front Right Center Sensor ringing time failure | Front Right Center Sensor ringing time failure |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left middle sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the left middle sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left middle sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.23 Right Middle Sub Uss Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the surface of the right middle sub uss.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C120009 | Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left side sub uss 3. Main uss |
| C120106 | Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12020C | Front Left Side Sensor ringing time failure | Front Left Side Sensor ringing time failure |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right middle sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the right middle sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right middle sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.24 Left Side Sub Uss Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the left side sub uss surface.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C121209 | Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or OC | Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or OC | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right sub uss 3. Main uss |
| C121306 | Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat | |
| C12140C | Front Right Sensor ringing time failure | Front Right Sensor ringing time failure |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the main uss and the left side sub uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the left side sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left side sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Left Side USS (snowy white) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.25 Right Sub Uss Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the right sub uss surface.
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD6(H) and CANFD6(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD6 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD6 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the right sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next – No: Replace the right sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.1.4.26 Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the CANFD6 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD6 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD6 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD6 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD6 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| ADCAN1(H) and ADCAN1(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD6 bus. C. Measure the CANFD6 bus resistance between each module and the front view intelligent camera in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD6 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD6 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD6 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
5.1.4.27 ADCAN1 Bus Network Integrity Check
Step 1 Check the ADCAN1 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the ADCAN1 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| ADCAN1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| ADCAN1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| ADCAN1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| ADCAN1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the ADCAN1 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the ADCAN1 bus. C. Measure the ADCAN1 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the resistance of ADCAN1 bus to ground is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the ADCAN1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the ADCAN1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the ADCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the ADCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes


5.1.5 Dismantling and Installation
5.1.5.1 Replacement of Front View Intelligent Camera
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the front view intelligent camera. 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the front view intelligent camera. 7 Remove the front view intelligent camera. Installation Procedures
1 Move the front view intelligent camera to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the front view intelligent camera. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the front view intelligent camera.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the camera.
5.1.5.2 Replacement of Front Millimeter Wave Radar Shield
Removal Procedures
1 Pry off the Front Millimeter Wave Radar shield. Installation Procedures 1 Install theFront Millimeter Wave Radar shield.

5.1.5.3 Replacement of Front Millimeter Wave Radar
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the Front millimeter wave radar radar shield.
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the Front millimeter wave radar. 6 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the Front millimeter wave radar. 7 Remove the Front millimeter wave radar. Installation Procedures


1 Move the Front millimeter wave radar to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the Front millimeter wave radar.
Torque:(4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the Front millimeter wave radar.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the Front millimeter wave radar radar shield. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the radar.
5.1.5.4 Replacement of MMWRL
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the MMWRL. 7 Remove the MMWRL. Installation Procedures 1 Move the MMWRL to the mounting position. 2 Install the rubber buffer pad and then install the four fixing screws of the millimeter wave radar on the left side.


3 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 4 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the radar.
5.1.5.5 Replacement of MMWRR
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly.
6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the MMWRR. 7 Remove the MMWRR. Installation Procedures 1 Move the MMWRR to the mounting position. 2 Install the rubber buffer pad and then install the four fixing screws of the millimeter wave radar on the right side.

3 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 4 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the radar.

5.1.5.6 Replacement of Main USS (snowy white)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly.
12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the USS (snowy white). 13 Remove the USS (snowy white). Installation Procedures 1 Move the Main USS (snowy white)to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the USS (snowy white).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the front bumper assembly. 4 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 5 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 7 Install the forward MMW radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar shield. 9 Install the through-type lamp. 10 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.


5.1.5.7 Replacement of Sub USS (matte black)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the Sub USS (matte black). 15 Remove the Sub USS (matte black). Installation Procedures
1 Move the Sub USS (matte black) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the Sub USS (matte black).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the right intake grille assembly. 4 Install the left intake grille assembly. 5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.
5.1.5.8 Replacement of Left Side USS (snowy white)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield.
7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left side USS (snowy white). 13 Remove the left side USS(snowy white). Installation Procedures 1 Move the left side USS(snowy white) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the left side USS(snowy white).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the front bumper assembly. 4 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 5 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 7 Install the forward MMW radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar shield.



































9 Install the through-type lamp. 10 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting IVI screen bracket and tube beam assembly | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| The fixing bolts connecting the CAR screen bracket and the pipe beam assembly | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| The fixing bolts connecting the cockpit domain controller to the cockpit domain controller bracket | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| The fixing bolt connecting the cockpit domain controller bracket to the lower left instrument panel controller bracket | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| Speaker - fixing bolt for connecting bass and bass speaker bracket | M5 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| The fixing bolt connecting the bass speaker bracket to the floor sheet metal | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| AR-HUDFixed bolts connected to the pipe beam assembly | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| The fixing bolt connecting the glass antenna amplifier to the inner panel assembly of the front windshield crossbeam | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 |
| Fixed bolts connecting the reversing camera to the integrated frame | M8 | 18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb |
5.2 Intelligent Cockpit Device7912 / 1357 / 1359· 5g
5.2.1 Specifications
5.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications
5.2.2 System Schematic Diagram
5.2.2.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The speaker is silent | 1. IVI screen setting mute mode | Release the mute mode. |
| 2. Speaker wiring harness fault | Check the wiring harness between the tweeter, subwoofer, mid-range speaker, and CDC. | |
| 3. Speaker fault | Check the high-frequency speaker, low- frequency speaker, and mid-range speaker, and replace them if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of Speaker - Tweeter.Replacement Of Speaker - Woofer (Left) .Replacement of Speaker - Woofer (Right) .Replacement Of Speaker - squawker | |
| 4. CDC fault | Replace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller | |
| IVI screen cannot be turned on/off or displays no signal | 1. IVI screen power grounding harness fault | Check the IVI screen power grounding harness. Refer to IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| 2. IVI screen wake-up signal harness fault | Check the wake-up signal harness between the IVI screen and CDC. | |
| 3. IVI screen LVDS signal harness fault | Check the LVDS signal harness between the IVI screen and CDC. | |
| 4. IVI screen fault | Replace the IVI screen. Refer to Replacement Of IVI Screen | |
| 5. CDC fault | Replace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller | |
| CAR screen cannot be turned on/off or displays no signal | 1. CAR screen power grounding harness fault | Check the grounding harness of the CAR screen power supply. Refer to CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault |
5.2.3 Diagnostic Information and Steps
5.2.3.1 Diagnosis Description
Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the intelligent cockpit device before diagnosing its faults, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of intelligent cockpit devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment
of faulty parts. 5.2.3.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the intelligent cockpit device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the intelligent cockpit device system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 5.2.3.3 Fault Symptom Table
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| 2. CAR screen wake-up signal harness fault | Check the wake-up signal harness between the CAR screen and CDC. | |
| 3. CAR screen LVDS signal harness fault | Check the LVDS signal harness between the CAR screen and CDC. | |
| 4. CAR screen fault | Replace the CAR screen. Refer to Replacement Of CAR Screen | |
| 5. CDC fault | Replace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller | |
| IPC screen cannot turn on/off or display no signal | 1. IPC screen power grounding harness fault | Check the IPC screen power grounding harness. Refer to IPC Screen Power Fault |
| 2. IPC screen wake-up signal harness fault | Check the wake-up signal harness between the IPC screen and CDC. | |
| 3. IPC screenLVDS signal harness fault | Check the LVDS signal harness between the IPC screen and CDC. | |
| 4. IPC screen fault | Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen | |
| 5. CDC fault | Replace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller | |
| The voice assistant is not working | 1. Microphone voice input signal harness fault | Check the wiring harness between the microphone and CDC. |
| 2. Microphone fault | Replace the microphone. Refer to Replacement Of Microphone Array MIC | |
| 3. CDC fault | Replace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | Low Voltage | Refer to CDC Power Fault |
| B111717 | Over voltage | |
| U018787 | Lost communication with CMS | Refer to CDC Communication Fault |
| U018887 | Lost communication with CMS_R | |
| U01B287 | Lost communication with AR_HUD |
5.2.3.4 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 5.2.3.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
CDC
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication with DCM | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication with T-BOX | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication with VDC | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication with ECAS | |
| U019A87 | Lost Communication with VTDR | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication with EPB | |
| U012187 | Lost Communication with EBS | |
| U012787 | Lost Communication with TPMS_F | |
| U016487 | Lost communication with A/C | |
| U014187 | Lost communication with AVAS | |
| U015787 | Lost communication with ADCU | |
| U015788 | Lost communication with CAMF | |
| U026687 | Lost communication with MMWR_L1 | |
| U026487 | Lost communication with USS | |
| U013087 | Lost communication with EPS | |
| U007788 | CANFD5 BusOff | |
| U008588 | IntCANFD1 BusOff | |
| U220400 | CANFD5 network management is in a limp home state. | |
| U238084 | SQI insufficient | Refer to Internal Fault Of CDC |
| U238208 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | |
| U120487 | There is no communication on the IntLIN1 network. | Refer to CDC LIN Communication Fault |
| U238108 | Unexpected Ethernet connection loss | Refer to CDC Ethernet Fault |
| U230C12 | Ethernet signal line short circuit | |
| U230C13 | Ethernet signal line open circuit |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | IP display ICD overvoltage | Refer to IPC Screen Power Fault |
| B111716 | IP displays ICD low voltage | |
| U007688 | CANFD4 BusOff | Refer to IPC Screen Communication Fault |
| U014087 | missing BDCU | |
| U012287 | missing VDC | |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | |
| U012187 | missing EBS | |
| U013087 | missing EPS | |
| B260009 | IP Display Dimming module status | Refer to IPC Screen Internal Fault |
| B260103 | IPC Display not received backlight value |
IPC
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B260209 | IPC Display TFT failure | |
| B260404 | IPC Display OSD failure | |
| B260303 | IPC Display video signal connect failure | Refer to IPC Screen LVDS Signal Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High voltage of HUD | Refer to HUD Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low Voltage of HUD | |
| U015687 | Communication timeout with CDCU | Refer to HUD Communication Fault |
| U014087 | Communication timeout with BDCU | |
| U012287 | Communication timeout with VDC | |
| U015788 | Communication timeout with CAMF | |
| U019887 | Communication timeout with TGW | |
| U008588 | CANFD bus closed | |
| U026887 | Communication timeout with MMWR_R | |
| U026687 | Communication timeout with MMWR_L | |
| B2A0001 | High temperature malfunction | Refer to HUD Internal Fault |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | Low Voltage | Voltage<16V,t>500ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Cockpit domain controller |
| B111717 | Over voltage | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms |
HUD
5.2.3.6 CDC Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U018787 | Lost communication with CMS | 1. The message 0x18FF0351x sent by CMS-L cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 50ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | 1.Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller |
| U018887 | Lost communication with CMS_R | 1.The message 0x18FF035Cx sent by CMS-R cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 50ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U01B287 | Lost communication with AR_HUD | 1.The message 0x18FF0028x sent by AR_HUD cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD1 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU | 1.The message 0x18FF0C21x sent by BDCU cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 200ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication with DCM | 1.The message 0x18FDA54Fx sent by DCM cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication with T-BOX | No relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication with VDC | 1.The message 0x18F00F27x sent by VDC cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CDC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the cockpit domain controller. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 6:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.7 CDC Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U013287 | Lost Communication with ECAS | 1.The message 0x0CFE5A2FX sent by ECAS cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U019A87 | Lost communication with VTDR | No relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication with EPB | 1.The message 0x1CECFF50x sent by EPB cannot be detected for 5 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (Cycle = 1000ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U012187 | missing EBS | 1.The message 0x18FE4F0Bx sent by EBS cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle =100ms)) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U012787 | Lost communication with TPMS | 1.The message 0x18FEF433x sent by TPMS_f cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 500ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U016487 | Lost communication with A/C | 1.The message 0x18FF0B19x sent by AC cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U014187 | Lost communication with AVAS | 1.The message 0x18FF0E57xx sent by AVAS cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U015787 | Lost communication with ADCU | 1.The message 0x18FF3531x sent by ADCU cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U015788 | Lost communication with CAMF | 1.The message 0x18FF4B31x sent by CAMF cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U026687 | Lost communication with MMWR_L1 | No relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U026487 | Lost communication with USS | No relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U013087 | missing EPS | 1.Message 0x18FF0513x sent by EPS cannot be detected continuously for 500ms on CANFD5 network (Cycle = 10ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range | |
| U007788 | CANFD5 BusOff | Detecting CANFD5 bus communication faults (with more than 5 times of busoff recovery) | |
| U008588 | IntCANFD1 BusOff | Detecting communication faults on the IntCANFD1 bus (with more than 5 times of busoff recovery) | |
| U220400 | CANFD5 network management is in a limp home state. | Detecting that CANFD5 network management is in a limp home state |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IntCANFD bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of IntCANFD Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U238084 | SQI insufficient | SQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s | 1. Cockpit domain controller |
| U238208 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | Unable to read SWITCH chip register |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U120487 | There is no communication on the IntLIN1 network. | Detecting LIN bus communication faults | 1.Wiring harness 2. Ambient light 3. Clock spring 4. Cockpit domain controller |
Step 4:Check the CANFD5 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 BusOff Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 6:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.8 Internal Fault Of CDC
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 4:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.9 CDC LIN Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the LIN communication harness between the cabin domain controller and the ambient light and clock spring.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U238108 | Unexpected Ethernet connection loss | If the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported | 1.Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller |
| U230C12 | Ethernet signal line short circuit | - | |
| U230C13 | Ethernet signal line open circuit | - |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 5:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.10 CDC Ethernet Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the Ethernet harness of the cockpit domain controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | IP display ICD overvoltage | Voltage>32V, t > 500ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.IPC screen |
| B111716 | IP displays ICD low voltage | Voltage>9V, t > 500ms |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 5:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.11 IPC Screen Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007688 | CANFD4 BusOff | Bus shutdown fault | 1.Wiring harness 2. IPC screen |
| U014087 | missing BDCU | BDCU node 0x18FE4021x has been continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (Cycle<100ms, take 500ms) | |
| U012287 | missing VDC | VDC Node 0x18011727x has been continuously lost for more than 10 cysles(1000ms) | |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | CDCU Node 0x18FF5A41x has been continuously lost for more than 10 cysles(2000ms) | |
| U012187 | missing EBS | EBS Node 0x18F0010BX has been continuously lost for more than 10 cysles(1000ms) | |
| U013087 | missing EPS | EPS(EHPS1) Node 0x18FF0513X has been continuously lost for more than 50 cysles (Cycle<100ms, take 500ms) |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides IPC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the IPC screen power and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 6:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.12 IPC Screen Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD4 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD4 BusOff Network integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B260009 | IP Display Dimming module status | Test dimming module short circuit, open circuit or over current more than 150ms | 1. IPC screen |
| B260103 | IPC Display not received backlight value | After power on for 10s received a value of 0 | |
| B260209 | IPC Display TFT failure | TFT fail for more than 150ms | |
| B260404 | IPC Display OSD failure | ROHM IC fail Pin fault and MCU dectect System fail signal Enabling for 170ms |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B260303 | IPC Display video signal connect failure | LOCK signal connect fail more than 5000ms | 1.Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller 3. IPC screen |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 5:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.13 IPC Screen Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 4:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.14 IPC Screen LVDS Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the video signal harness between the cockpit domain controller and the IPC screen. Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 5:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.15 HUD Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High voltage of HUD | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.HUD |
| B111716 | Low Voltage of HUD | Voltage < 18V, t > 30s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U015687 | Communication timeout with CDCU | 0x18FF0741x, Node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1s);0x18FEC1EEx node continuously lost for more than 5000ms;0x18FF6441x, Node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (2s);Any node that meets the requirements is sufficient | 1.Wiring harness 2.HUD |
| U014087 | Communication timeout with BDCU | 0x18FE4021x Nodes are continuously lost for more than 500ms | |
| U012287 | Communication timeout with VDC | 0x18011727x,0x18FEF100x Nodes are continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1 second) | |
| U015788 | Communication timeout with CAMF | 0x18FF3531x 0x18FF4031x 0x18FF4731x 0x18FF4B31x 0x18FF4131x, node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1s); 0x0CF02FA0x,0x0CFF552Ax, node continuously lost for more than 500ms, any node that meets the requirements is sufficient | |
| U019887 | Communication timeout with TGW | 0x18FEE6EEx node continuously lost for more than 5000ms | |
| U008588 | CANFD bus closed | Record one BUS off for 8 consecutive time | |
| U026887 | Communication timeout with MMWR_R | 0x18FF4263x, node lost continuously for more than 10 cycles (1s) | |
| U026687 | Communication timeout with MMWR_L | 0x18FF4361x, Node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1s)) |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides HUD? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the HUD power and grounding harness. Step 5:HUD rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the HUD. Refer to Replacement Of AR-HUD Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.16 HUD Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IntCANFD bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of IntCANFD Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B2A0001 | High temperature malfunction | The temperature protection value exceeds 102 ° C and lasts for more than 10 sampling cycles | 1.HUD |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| IntCANFD1 (H) and IntCANFD1 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
Step 4:HUD rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the HUD. Refer to Replacement Of AR-HUD Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.17 HUD Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:HUD rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the HUD. Refer to Replacement Of AR-HUD Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
5.2.3.18 IntInspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of IntCANFD1 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the IntCANFD1 bus voltage. No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| IntCANFD1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| IntCANFD1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| IntCANFD1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| IntCANFD1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the IntCANFD1 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the IntCANFD1 bus. C. Measure the IntCANFD1 bus resistance between each module and the cabin domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the resistance of IntCANFD1 bus to ground is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the IntCANFD1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the IntCANFD1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the IntCANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the IntCANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes


5.2.4 Dismantling and Installation
5.2.4.1 Replacement of IVI Screen
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the DMS camera bracket. 5 Remove the DMS camera. 6 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the IVI screen. 7 Remove 3 fixing bolt of the IVI screen. 8 Remove the IVI screen. Installation Procedures
1 Move the IVI screen to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolt of the IVI screen.
Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Connect 3 harness connectors of the IVI screen.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the DMS camera. 5 Install the DMS camera bracket. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
5.2.4.2 Replacement of IPC Screen
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP brim assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the IPC screen. 6 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the IPC screen. 7 Remove the IPC screen. Installation Procedures


1 Move the IPC screen to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connectors of the IPC screen.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the IPC screen. 4 Install the IP brim assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the IPC, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing.
5.2.4.3 Replacement of CAR Screen
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the plug cover on the rear shell of the CAR screen. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the CAR screen.


6 Disengage 1 clip of the IP harness. 7 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the CAR screen. 8 Remove the CAR screen. Installation Procedures


1 Move the CAR screen to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the CAR screen.
Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Install 1 clip of the IP harness. 4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the CAR screen.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the plug cover on the rear shell of the CAR screen. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
5.2.4.4 Replacement of CDCU
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.


4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the VTDR. 11 Remove the VTDR bracket. 12 Remove the left lower fixing bracket.
13 Disconnect 12 harness connectors of the CDCU. 14 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU with bracket, and remove the CDCU with bracket. 15 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU. 16 Remove the CDCU.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the CDCU to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU.
Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Install the CDCU with bracket, and install 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU with bracket.
4 Connect 12 harness connectors of the CDCU.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the left lower fixing bracket. 6 Install the VTDR bracket. 7 Install the VTDR. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.
caution
After replacement of CDCU, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing, read and write the VIN, vehicle model settings, and read the PN and certificate status; If there is no certificate or if the certificate is abnormal, read the VIN SN, UIN, certificate request information CSR, and perform PKI certificate flashing; After writing of the certificate, read the certificate status and certificate serial number (according to the latest PKI specifications), and write the configuration word.
5.2.4.5 Replacement of Speaker - Low Pitch (left)
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (left). 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (left). 7 Remove the speaker - low pitch (left). Installation Procedures


1 Move the speaker - low pitch (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (left). 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (left).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
5.2.4.6 Replacement of Speaker - Low Pitch (right)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (right). 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (right). 7 Remove the speaker - low pitch (right). Installation Procedures


1 Move the speaker - low pitch (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (right). 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (right).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
5.2.4.7 Replacement of Speaker - Medium Pitch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP squawker cover assembly. 5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the speaker - medium pitch. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - medium pitch. 7 Remove the speaker - medium pitch. Installation Procedures


1 Move the speaker - medium pitch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - medium pitch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 4 fixing screws of the speaker - medium pitch. 4 Install the IP squawker cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
5.2.4.8 Replacement of Speaker - High Pitch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP high-pitch speaker cover assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the speaker - high pitch. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - high pitch. 7 Remove the speaker - high pitch. Installation Procedures


1 Move the speaker - high pitch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - high pitch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 2 fixing screws of the speaker - high pitch. 4 Install the IP high-pitch speaker cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
5.2.4.9 Replacement of Full Frequency Speaker (left)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left speaker cover. 5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (left). 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (left). 7 Remove the full frequency speaker (left). Installation Procedures


1 Move the full frequency speaker (left) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (left).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (left). 4 Install the left speaker cover. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
5.2.4.10 Replacement of Full Frequency Speaker (right)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right speaker cover. 5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (right). 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (right). 7 Remove the full frequency speaker (right). Installation Procedures

1 Move the full frequency speaker (right) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (right).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (right). 4 Install the right speaker cover. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
5.2.4.11 Replacement of Microphone Array MIC
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the microphone array MIC. Installation Procedures 1 Install the microphone array MIC. 2 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly.



3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 5 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

5.2.4.12 Replacement of DVR Camera
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the DVR camera. 6 Remove the DVR camera. Installation Procedures
1 Move the DVR camera to the mounting position.
caution
Before installing the DVR camera, the front windshield should be cleaned thoroughly first.
2 Connect 1 harness connector of the DVR camera.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
5.2.4.13 Replacement of Selfie Camera
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly.
9 Remove the selfie camera bracket. 10 Remove the selfie camera. Installation Procedures 1 Install the selfie camera. 2 Install the selfie camera bracket. 3 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 4 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 6 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

5.2.4.14 Replacement of DMS Camera
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the DMS camera bracket. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connector of the DMS camera. 6 Remove the DMS camera. Installation Procedures 1 Move the DMS camera to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connector of the DMS camera.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the DMS camera bracket. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

5.2.4.15 Replacement of AR-HUD
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the ip brim assy. 5 Remove the ivi screen. 6 Remove the car screen. 7 Remove the ipc screen. 8 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 9 Remove the camera monitor screen. 10 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 11 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 14 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 15 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 16 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 17 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 18 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 19 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 20 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard.
21 Disconnect one wire harness connector of the NFC antenna. 22 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the AR-HUD.



23 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the AR-HUD. 24 Remove the AR-HUD. Installation Procedures 1 Move the AR-HUD to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the AR-HUD.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 4 fixing bolts of the AR-HUD.
Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Connect one wire harness connector of the NFC antenna.
5 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 6 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 7 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 8 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 9 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 11 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 12 Install the base-rh display brkt. 13 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 14 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 15 Install the base-lh display brkt. 16 Install the camera monitor screen. 17 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 18 Install the ipc screen. 19 Install the car screen. 20 Install the ivi screen. 21 Install the ip brim assy. 22 Connect the battery negative cable. 23 Close the front flip cover plate. 24 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the AR-HUD, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing, and write the configuration word.
5.2.4.16 Replacement of Rear View Camera
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear view camera. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the rear view camera. 6 Remove the rear view camera. Installation Procedures


1 Move the rear view camera to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the rear view camera.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear view camera.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting suspension bracket two to the frame assembly | M14 | 147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting suspension bracket two to the frame assembly | M14 | 147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolts connecting the suspension bracket three to the frame assembly | M14 | 147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left side of the fourth suspension of the vehicle body to the integrated frame | M16 | 228.5ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb(Kesai New 1262) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right side of the fourth suspension of the vehicle body to the integrated frame | M16 | 228.5ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb(Kesai New 1262) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the fourth suspension support rod of the vehicle body to the frame assembly | M14 | 147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the fourth suspension support rod assembly of the vehicle body and the fourth suspension of the vehicle body | M14 | 147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the fourth suspension support rod assembly of the vehicle body and the fourth suspension of the vehicle body | M14 | 147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
6Vehicle Body
6.1 Vehicle Body Mounting Connection Device
6.1.1 Specifications
6.1.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.1.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.1.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Suspunsion Bracket Two Assy 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Body Fourth Suspension Lh 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Plate Rr Wall Mounting 5. Suspunsion Bracket Three Assy 14. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Body Fourth Suspension Support Rod Assy 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Body Fourth Suspension Rh 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 18. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the left bumper mounting frame and the upper body assembly of the left bumper | M6 | 4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
6.2 Bumper Device
6.2.1 Specifications
6.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.2.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.2.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1.1. The Main Body Skeleton Assy on the Bumper 3. Body Assy on the Right Bumper 1.2. Body Assy on the Middle Bumper 4. Brkt-Bumper Mounts-Lh 1.3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Body Assy on the Left Bumper 1.4. Right Bumper Tow Hook Cover 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 1.5. Left Bumper Tow Hook Cover 7. Self-Tapping Screw 1.6. Self-Tapping Screw 8. License Plate Mounting Plate Assy 2. Brkt-Bumper Mounts-rh 9. Body Assy Under Bumper
6.2.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.2.3.1 Replacement of Bumper Middle Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove the bumper lower body assembly. 23 Remove the left bumper upper body assembly.

24 Remove the right bumper upper body assembly. 25 Remove the bumper middle body assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the bumper middle body assembly. 2 Install the right bumper upper body assembly. 3 Install the left bumper upper body assembly. 4 Install the bumper lower body assembly. 5 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 6 Install the blinding camera (front view). 7 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 8 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 9 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 10 Install the USS (snowy white). 11 Install the GASM harness module.

12 Install the right intake grille assembly. 13 Install the left intake grille assembly. 14 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 15 Install the front bumper assembly. 16 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 17 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 18 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 19 Install the forward MMW radar. 20 Install the front MMW radar shield. 21 Install the through-type lamp. 22 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.
6.2.3.2 Replacement of Middle Bumper Upper Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white).
19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove the bumper lower body assembly. 23 Remove the left bumper upper body assembly. 24 Remove the right bumper upper body assembly. 25 Remove the bumper middle body assembly. 26 Remove the bumper upper body frame assembly. 27 Remove the middle bumper upper body assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the middle bumper upper body assembly. 2 Install the bumper upper body frame assembly. 3 Install the bumper middle body assembly. 4 Install the right bumper upper body assembly.

5 Install the left bumper upper body assembly. 6 Install the bumper lower body assembly. 7 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 8 Install the blinding camera (front view). 9 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 10 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 11 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 12 Install the USS (snowy white). 13 Install the GASM harness module. 14 Install the right intake grille assembly. 15 Install the left intake grille assembly. 16 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 17 Install the front bumper assembly. 18 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 19 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 20 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 21 Install the forward MMW radar. 22 Install the front MMW radar shield. 23 Install the through-type lamp. 24 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.
6.2.3.3 Replacement of Left Bumper Upper Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar.
10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove the bumper lower body assembly. 23 Remove 4 fixing screws of the left bumper upper body assembly. 24 Remove the left bumper upper body assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the left bumper upper body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the left bumper upper body assembly. 3 Install the bumper lower body assembly. 4 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 5 Install the blinding camera (front view). 6 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 7 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 8 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 9 Install the USS (snowy white). 10 Install the GASM harness module. 11 Install the right intake grille assembly. 12 Install the left intake grille assembly. 13 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 14 Install the front bumper assembly. 15 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 16 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 17 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 18 Install the forward MMW radar. 19 Install the front MMW radar shield. 20 Install the through-type lamp. 21 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 22 Connect the battery negative cable. 23 Close the front flip cover plate. 24 Close the door.
6.2.3.4 Replacement of Bumper Lower Body Aassembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove 11 fixing screws of the bumper lower body assembly, and remove the bumper lower body assembly.

Installation Procedures





1 Move the bumper lower body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 11 fixing screws of the bumper lower body assembly.






3 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 4 Install the blinding camera (front view). 5 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 6 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 7 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 8 Install the USS (snowy white). 9 Install the GASM harness module. 10 Install the right intake grille assembly. 11 Install the left intake grille assembly. 12 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Install the front bumper assembly. 14 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 15 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 16 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 17 Install the forward MMW radar. 18 Install the front MMW radar shield. 19 Install the through-type lamp. 20 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the front lower protection assembly and the left front connecting beam | M10 | 37 ft-lb +/- 3.5 ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the front lower protection assembly and the left front connecting beam | M8 | 18.5 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb |
6.3 Front Lower Protection Device
6.3.1 specifications
6.3.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.3.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.3.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Fl Protection Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Self-Locking Nut 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt
6.3.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.3.3.1 Replacement of Front Lower Protection Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the MMW radar bracket.
13 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the front lower protection assembly to the headlamp bracket. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the front lower protection assembly, and remove the front lower protection assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front lower protection assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.






Installation Procedures 1 Move the front lower protection assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front lower protection assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the front lower protection assembly.
Torque:(44 ft-lb - 59 ft-lb)ft-lb
3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the front lower protection assembly to the headlamp bracket.
Torque: (17 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install the MMW radar bracket. 5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the MMW radar bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the front connecting beam | M16 | 229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the suspension bracket three assemblies | M16 | 229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the suspension bracket two assemblies | M16 | 229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the air conditioning pipeline | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt of the grounding wire harness connecting the white body assembly and the frame assembly | M10 | 37 ft-lb +/- 3.5 ft-lb |
6.4 Body-in-White Device
6.4.1 Specifications
6.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.4.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Slide Door Assy 2. Slide Door Assy
| S/N | Color | Supplier |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Snowy white | Shanghai Kinlita Chemical Co., Ltd. |
6.4.3 Sheet Metal and Painting
6.4.3.1 Colored Paint Information
6.4.3.2 Sheet Metal
Removal 1. Remove all relevant panels and components related to replacement parts. 2. Remove the sealant and anti-corrosion materials if necessary. 3. Locate, mark, and drill all factory solder joints connecting the components to be replaced. 4. Remove damaged components to be replaced. 5. Remove residual materials. Installation 1. Pre-treat the mating surface as necessary. 2. Select the correct welding method based on the welding form of the original vehicle. Employ shielded welding in areas where resistance welding is inconvenient. If plug welding is chosen, drill holes for plug welding seams on the new part, and determine the diameter and spacing of the plug welding holes based on the original solder joints. 3. Temporarily place the new part on the vehicle. 4. Assemble and fix the new part with a correction support (correctly position the maintenance panel). 5. Regularly measure the position of the new part to ensure its assembly dimensions are correct. 6. Perform corresponding welding. 7. Clean all welding surfaces. 8. Apply primer. 9. Apply sealant and anti-corrosion materials if necessary. 10. Install all relevant panels and components.
6.4.3.3 Painting
Painting Procedure
The painting procedure for rigid surfaces after sheet metal repair is similar to the painting process for rigid surfaces, except that the following steps are added after grinding the primer and before applying the base coat: 1. Scrape coating of poly-putty base. 2. Grinding of poly-putty base. 3. Dust blowing, degreasing, cleaning. 4. Scrape coating of fill-in putty. 5. Surface sanding of old paint film. 6. Cleaning, degreasing, and covering of unpainted areas.
6.4.4 Dismantling and Installation
6.4.4.1 Replacement of BIW Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain coolant from the power system. 9 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 10 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 11 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the roof deflector body. 15 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 16 Remove the left deflector upper body. 17 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 18 Remove the left deflector lower body. 19 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 20 Remove the right deflector upper body. 21 Remove the right deflector lower body. 22 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 25 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 27 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 28 Remove the through-type lamp. 29 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 30 Remove the forward MMW radar. 31 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 32 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar.
33 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the front bumper assembly. 35 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 36 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 37 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 38 Remove the left fender trim strip. 39 Remove the left fender assembly. 40 Remove the left front combination lamp. 41 Remove the left headlamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 43 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Remove the right fender trim strip. 45 Remove the right fender assembly. 46 Remove the right front combination lamp. 47 Remove the right headlamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 49 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 50 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 51 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 53 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 54 Remove the lamp (upper). 55 Remove the lamp (lower). 56 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 57 Remove the boarding step bracket. 58 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 59 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 61 Remove the frame main truss.
62 Remove 5 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box cover plate, and open Left Junction Box. 63 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of Left Junction Box. 64 Remove 1 fixing nut of Left Junction Box ground harness, and disconnect Left Junction Box ground harness.



65 Remove 5 fixing bolts of Right Junction Box cover plate, and open Right Junction Box. 66 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of Right Junction Box. 67 Remove 1 fixing nut of Right Junction Box ground harness, and disconnect Right Junction Box ground harness.



68 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of the SJB_UN. 69 Disengage 5 harness clips. 70 Disconnect 1 harness connector.



71 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the harness. 72 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the BIW assembly ground harness (at Right Junction Box). 73 Disconnect 1 harness connector.



74 Disconnect 5 brake air pipes of the brake signal transmitter. 75 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - high pitch. 76 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - low pitch.



77 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the steering drive shaft, and disconnect the steering drive shaft from the integrated EHPS assembly. 78 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left), and disconnect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left). 79 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right), and disconnect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right).



80 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly. 81 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly. 82 Remove 2 fixing bolts, and disconnect the A/C pipeline at the bottom of the BIW assembly.



83 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector at the rear of the BIW assembly. 84 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the left front joint beam. 85 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly.



86 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly. 87 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the right front joint beam. 88 Disconnect the strap clip of the BIW assembly front wall harness, clean the harness, and separate it from the cab. 89 Pre-install the cab lifting tool. 90 Remove 2 bolt (left upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (left). 91 Remove 2 bolt (right upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (right).




92 Add a spacer block between the rear enclosure mounting plate and the lifting tool, and install the lifting bracket at the rear part of the white body assembly.
warning !
It is necessary to use the lifting tools provided or permitted by Windrose.
The lifting tool should maintain a distance of 5 to 10 centimeters from the rear enclosure of the vehicle body.
93 Install the lifting tool at the lifting points of the white body assembly (the lifting points are located at the left and right lower sides of the front part of the white body assembly).





94 Adjust the lifting tool to the appropriate position to keep the BIW assembly stable. 95 Lift the BIW assembly. 96 Place the BIW assembly on the storage bracket. 97 Separate the lifting bracket from the BIW assembly. 98 Remove the BIW assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the BIW assembly to the mounting position. 2 Pre-install the cab lifting tool. 3 Install the lifting tool at the lifting points of the white body assembly (the lifting points are located at the left and right lower sides of the front part of the white body assembly).
4 Add a spacer block between the rear enclosure mounting plate and the lifting tool, and install the lifting bracket at the rear part of the white body assembly.
warning !
It is necessary to use the lifting tools provided or permitted by Windrose.
The lifting tool should maintain a distance of 5 to 10 centimeters from the rear enclosure of the vehicle body.
5 Adjust the lifting tool to the appropriate position to keep the BIW assembly stable. 6 Lift the BIW assembly. 7 Place the BIW assembly on the mounting position. 8 Separate the lifting bracket from the BIW assembly. 9 Install 2 bolt (right upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (right). 10 Install 2 bolt (left upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (left). 11 Connect the strap clip of the BIW assembly front wall harness. 12 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the right front joint beam.
Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb



13 Install 1 fixing bolt connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly.
Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
14 Install 1 fixing bolt connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly.
Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
15 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the left front joint beam.
Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb



16 Install 2 fixing bolts, and connect one A/C pipeline at the bottom of the BIW assembly.
Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb



17 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
18 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
19 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
20 Install 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right), and connect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right).
Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
21 Install 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left), and connect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left).
Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb



22 Install 1 fixing bolt of the steering drive shaft, and connect the steering drive shaft to the integrated EHPS assembly.
Torque:(39 ft-lb +/- 5 ft-lb) ft-lb
23 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - high pitch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
24 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - low pitch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".



25 Connect 5 brake air pipes of the brake signal transmitter. 26 Connect 1 harness connector.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
27 Install 1 fixing bolt of the BIW assembly ground harness (at Right Junction Box).
Torque:(37 ft-lb +/- 4 ft-lb) ft-lb



28 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the harness.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
29 Connect 1 harness connector.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
30 Install 5 harness clips.



31 Connect 6 harness connector.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
32 Install 1 fixing nut of Right Junction Box ground harness, and connect Right Junction Box ground harness.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
33 Connect 6 harness connectors of Right Junction Box.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".



34 Install 5 fixing bolts of Right Junction Box cover plate, and close Right Junction Box.
Torque:(4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
35 Install 1 fixing nut of Left Junction Box ground harness, and connect Left Junction Box ground harness.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
36 Connect 6 harness connectors of Left Junction Box.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

37 Install 5 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box cover plate, and close Left Junction Box.
Torque: (4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
38 Install the frame main truss. 39 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 40 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 41 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 42 Install the boarding step bracket. 43 Install the boarding step body assembly. 44 Install the lamp (lower). 45 Install the lamp (upper). 46 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 47 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 48 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 49 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 50 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 51 Install the right headlamp bracket. 52 Install the right headlamp. 53 Install the right front combination lamp. 54 Install the right fender assembly. 55 Install the right fender trim strip. 56 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 57 Install the left headlamp bracket. 58 Install the left headlamp. 59 Install the left front combination lamp. 60 Install the left fender assembly. 61 Install the left fender trim strip.
62 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 63 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 64 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 65 Install the front bumper assembly. 66 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 67 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 68 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 69 Install the forward MMW radar. 70 Install the front MMW radar shield. 71 Install the through-type lamp. 72 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 73 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 74 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 75 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 76 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 77 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 78 Install the right deflector lower body. 79 Install the right deflector upper body. 80 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 81 Install the left deflector lower body. 82 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 83 Install the left deflector upper body. 84 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 85 Install the roof deflector body. 86 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 87 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 88 Install the right front wheel housing body. 89 Install the left front wheel housing body. 90 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 91 Fill coolant in the power system. 92 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 93 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 94 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 95 Connect the battery negative cable.
96 Close the front flip cover plate. 97 Close the door.

6.4.4.2 Replacement of Sliding Door Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the cable cover plate. 6 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 8 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 9 Remove the towing chain harness assembly. 10 Remove the ground lock assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the upper hinge assembly.

12 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly. 13 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly. 14 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly.



15 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly. 16 Remove the sliding door assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the sliding door assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the sliding door assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the sliding door assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb




3 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

6 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the upper hinge assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
7 Install the ground lock assembly. 8 Install the towing chain harness assembly. 9 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 10 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 11 Install the door protective plate assembly. 12 Install the cable cover plate. 13 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the toolbox assembly to the vehicle body | M6 | 6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb |
6.5 Toolbox Device
6.5.1 Specifications
6.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.5.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Hinge-Toolbox 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Striker-Toolbox 3. Lock-Toolbox 6. Toolbox Assy


6.5.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.5.3.1 Replacement of Toolbox Lock Front End (with cable)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Open the sleeper mat assembly and disconnect one harness connector of the toolbox lock front end (with cable). 5 Disengage 2 fixing clips of the cable.
6 Disengage the cable. 7 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox lock front end (with cable). 8 Remove the toolbox lock front end (with cable). Installation Procedures





1 Move the toolbox lock front end (with cable) to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox lock front end (with cable). 3 Connect the cable. 4 Install 2 fixing clips of the cable.

5 Connect one harness connector of the toolbox lock front end (with cable).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

6.5.3.2 Replacement of Toolbox Lock Back End
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing screws of the toolbox lock back end.

3 Disengage the cable. 4 Remove the toolbox lock back end. Installation Procedures 1 Move the toolbox lock back end to the mounting position. 2 Connect the cable.


3 Install 2 fixing screws of the toolbox lock back end. 4 Close the door.

6.5.3.3 Replacement of Toolbox Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the toolbox lock catch. 3 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the toolbox assembly. 4 Remove the toolbox assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the toolbox assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the toolbox assembly.
Torque: 6 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
3 Install the toolbox lock catch. 4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly and the frame assembly | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly and the skirt lower mounting bracket | M6 | (4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right side skirt assembly and the skirt lower mounting bracket | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right side skirt assembly and the skirt lower mounting bracket | M6 | (4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the right side skirt assembly and the right front assembly of the rear wheel cover | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right side skirt assembly to the bracket on the skirt | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the left skirt assembly and the left front assembly of the rear wheel cover | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly to the bracket on the skirt | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear step assembly and the side skirt assembly | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
6.6 Side Skirt Panel Device
6.6.1 specifications
6.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.6.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.6.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Skirt Assy-Lh 9. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Brkt-Lh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 10. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Brkt-Skrit Lower 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Riveted Nut 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Skrit Bracket 14. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 8. Brkt-Skrit Upper 16. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy
1. Skrit Plate-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Hexagon Flange Nut 11. Skrit Bracket 3. Rear Step Assy 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 14. Brkt-Skrit Upper 6. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 15. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 7. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 16. Brkt-Skrit Lower 8. Brkt-Rh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 18. Riveted Nut



6.6.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.6.3.1 Replacement of Left Skirt Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the left skirt plate assembly.
7 Remove 4 protection covers. 8 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly. 9 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.




10 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the left skirt plate assembly. 11 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left skirt plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 3 harness connectors of the left skirt plate assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".




3 Install 4 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install 2 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.
Torque: (4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Install 4 protection covers.


6 Install 1 fixing nut of the left skirt plate assembly.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
7 Install 5 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
8 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
6.6.3.2 Replacement of Right Skirt Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the right skirt plate assembly.


7 Remove 4 protection covers. 8 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly. 9 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly, and detach the right skirt plate assembly.




10 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the right skirt plate assembly. 11 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right skirt plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 3 harness connectors of the right skirt plate assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".




3 Connect the right skirt plate assembly, and install 4 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly.
Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
4 Install 2 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly.
Torque: (4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
5 Install 4 protection covers.


6 Install 1 fixing nut of the right skirt plate assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
7 Install 5 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
8 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

6.7 Carpet Device
6.7.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.7.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Carpet-frt 2. Carpet-Rr
6.7.2 Dismantling and Installation
6.7.2.1 Replacement of Front Carpet
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Remove the wiper arm assy. 8 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 9 Remove the dab decorative cove. 10 Remove the steering wheel assy. 11 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 12 Remove the ip brim assy. 13 Remove the IVI screen. 14 Remove the CAR screen. 15 Remove the IPC screen. 16 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen. 18 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 19 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 20 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 21 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 22 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 23 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 24 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 25 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 26 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 27 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 28 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 29 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 30 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 31 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 32 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 33 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 34 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt.
35 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 36 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 37 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 38 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 39 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 40 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 41 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 42 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 43 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 44 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 45 Remove the AR-HUD. 46 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 47 Remove the smart appliance box. 48 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 49 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 50 Remove the Tbox-gw. 51 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 52 Remove the EBS controller assy. 53 Remove the EBS bracket. 54 Remove the body domain control unit. 55 Remove the controller bracket assy. 56 Remove the cross car beam pole. 57 Remove the cross car beam assy. 58 Remove the right foot blowing duct assembly. 59 Remove the storage box bracket assembly. 60 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 61 Remove the left foot blowing duct assembly. 62 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 63 Remove the speaker - low pitch (left). 64 Remove the speaker - low pitch (right). 65 Remove the low-pitch speaker bracket - left. 66 Remove the low-pitch speaker bracket - right. 67 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 1. 68 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 2. 69 Remove the brake signal transmitter assembly. 70 Remove the brake pedal assembly. 71 Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. 72 Remove the kettle holder.
73 Remove the kettle holder bracket assembly. 74 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 75 Remove the rear A/C lower air duct. 76 Remove the fire extinguisher. 77 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 78 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 79 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 80 Remove the 120V receptacle. 81 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 82 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). 83 Remove the toolbox trim panel assembly. 84 Remove the toolbox sill molding assembly. 85 Remove the toolbox lamp. 86 Remove the toolbox lamp bracket. 87 Remove the sleeper toolbox. 88 Remove the electric sliding door switch. 89 Remove the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 90 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 91 Remove the driver seat assembly. 92 Remove the front carpet. Installation Procedures



1 Install the front carpet. 2 Install the driver seat assembly. 3 Install the right sill molding assembly. 4 Install the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 5 Install the electric sliding door switch. 6 Install the sleeper toolbox. 7 Install the toolbox lamp bracket. 8 Install the toolbox lamp. 9 Install the toolbox sill molding assembly. 10 Install the toolbox trim panel assembly. 11 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 12 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 13 Install the 120V receptacle. 14 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 15 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the fire extinguisher. 18 Install the rear A/C lower air duct. 19 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 20 Install the kettle holder bracket assembly. 21 Install the kettle holder. 22 Install the accelerator pedal assembly. 23 Install the brake pedal assembly. 24 Install the brake signal transmitter assembly. 25 Install the steering column fixing bracket 2. 26 Install the steering column fixing bracket 1.

27 Install the low-pitch speaker bracket - right. 28 Install the low-pitch speaker bracket - left. 29 Install the speaker - low pitch (right). 30 Install the speaker - low pitch (left). 31 Install the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 32 Install the left foot blowing duct assembly. 33 Install the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 34 Install the storage box bracket assembly. 35 Install the right foot blowing duct assembly. 36 Install the cross car beam assy. 37 Install the cross car beam pole. 38 Install the controller bracket assy. 39 Install the body domain control unit. 40 Install the EBS bracket. 41 Install the EBS controller assy. 42 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 43 Install the Tbox-gw. 44 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 45 Install the cockpit domain controller. 46 Install the smart appliance box. 47 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 48 Install the AR-HUD. 49 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 50 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 51 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 52 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 53 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 54 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 55 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 56 Install the storage box assy-rh. 57 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 58 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 59 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 60 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 61 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 62 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 63 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh.
64 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 65 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 66 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 67 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 68 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 69 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 70 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 71 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 72 Install the base-rh display brkt. 73 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 74 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 75 Install the base-lh display brkt. 76 Install the camera monitor screen. 77 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 78 Install the IPC screen. 79 Install the CAR screen. 80 Install the IVI screen. 81 Install the ip brim assy. 82 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 83 Install the steering wheel assy. 84 Install the dab decorative cove. 85 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 86 Install the wiper arm assy. 87 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 88 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 89 Connect the battery negative cable. 90 Close the front flip cover plate. 91 Close the door.
6.7.2.2 Replacement of Rear Carpet
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Remove the rear seat assembly. 4 Remove the seat rear storage box. 5 Remove the right drawer assembly.

6 Remove the middle drawer assembly. 7 Remove the rear carpet. Installation Procedures 1 Install the rear carpet. 2 Install the middle drawer assembly. 3 Install the right drawer assembly. 4 Install the seat rear storage box. 5 Install the rear seat assembly. 6 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 7 Close the door.

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the lifting glass assembly and the door trim body | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.8 Full Vehicle Glass Device
6.8.1 Specifications
6.8.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.8.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.8.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Windsheld Assy-Frt 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Front Quarter Glass Assy-Lh 8. Rear Quarter Glass Assy-Lh 3. Front Quarter Glass Assy-Rh 9. Rear Quarter Glass Assy-Rh 4. Front Glass Assy-Lh 10. Quarter Window Glass on the Left Rear Side Panel 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Right Rear Quarter Window Glass 6. Front Glass Assy-Rh 12. Fixed Glass Roof Assy
6.8.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.8.3.1 Replacement of Front Windshield Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left fender trim strip. 10 Remove the left fender assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 12 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 14 Remove the right fender trim strip. 15 Remove the right fender assembly. 16 Remove the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 17 Remove the roof sealing strip. 18 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 19 Remove the Identification lamp. 20 Remove the DVR camera. 21 Remove the front view intelligent camera. 22 Remove the RLS.

23 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.
caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.
24 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.
caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.

25 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.
caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.
26 Remove the front windshield assembly using the suction cup.
caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the front windshield assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.
caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.
3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.
caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.
caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.
5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.
caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.
6 Install the RLS. 7 Install the front view intelligent camera. 8 Install the DVR camera. 9 Install the Identification lamp. 10 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 11 Install the roof sealing strip. 12 Install the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 13 Install the right fender assembly. 14 Install the right fender trim strip. 15 Install the right front wheel housing body. 16 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 17 Install the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 18 Install the left fender assembly. 19 Install the left fender trim strip. 20 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 21 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 22 Install the left front wheel housing body. 23 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 24 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.
6.8.3.2 Replacement of Left Adjustable Window Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 16 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the left inner weatherstrip assembly. 18 Remove the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 19 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 20 Remove the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly.

21 Remove the left glass run assembly. 22 Remove the left adjustable window assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left adjustable window assembly. 2 Install the left glass run assembly. 3 Install the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 5 Install the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 6 Install the left inner weatherstrip assembly. 7 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 9 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly.

11 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left switch panel assembly. 15 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 16 Install the front USB interface. 17 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 19 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.

6.8.3.3 Replacement of Right Adjustable Window Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right inner weatherstrip assembly. 5 Remove the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 8 Remove the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 9 Remove the right glass run assembly. 10 Remove the right adjustable window assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Install the right adjustable window assembly. 2 Install the right glass run assembly. 3 Install the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 6 Install the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 7 Install the right inner weatherstrip assembly. 8 Install the door protective plate assembly. 9 Install the cable cover plate. 10 Close the door.
6.8.3.4 Replacement of Left Front Triangular Window Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).
8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left fender trim strip. 10 Remove the left fender assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 12 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.
caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.
13 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.
caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.
14 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.
caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.
15 Remove the left front triangular window assembly using the suction cup.
caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.
Installation Procedures


1 Move the left front triangular window assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.
caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.
3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.
caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.
4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.
caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.
5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.
caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.
6 Install the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 7 Install the left fender assembly. 8 Install the left fender trim strip. 9 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Install the left front wheel housing body. 11 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 12 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 13 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

6.8.3.5 Replacement of Right Front Triangular Window Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 6 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the right fender trim strip. 10 Remove the right fender assembly. 11 Remove the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 12 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.
caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.
13 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.
caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.
14 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.
caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.

15 Remove the right front triangular window assembly using the suction cup.
caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front triangular window assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.
caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.
3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.
caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.
4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.
caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.
5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.
caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.
6 Install the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 7 Install the right fender assembly. 8 Install the right fender trim strip. 9 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Install the right front wheel housing body. 11 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).
12 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 13 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.
6.8.3.6 Replacement of Left Rear Quadrangle Window Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 13 Remove the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 14 Remove the left glass run assembly. 15 Remove the window regulator left mounting rail assembly.

16 Remove the left quadrangle window sealing strip. 17 Remove the left rear quadrangle window assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left rear quadrangle window assembly. 2 Install the left quadrangle window sealing strip. 3 Install the window regulator left mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the left glass run assembly. 5 Install the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 6 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly.

11 Install the left switch panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

6.8.3.7 Replacement of Right Rear Quadrangle Window Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 5 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Remove the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 7 Remove the right glass run assembly. 8 Remove the window regulator right mounting rail assembly. 9 Remove the right quadrangle window sealing strip. 10 Remove the right rear quadrangle window assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Install the right rear quadrangle window assembly. 2 Install the right quadrangle window sealing strip. 3 Install the window regulator right mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the right glass run assembly. 5 Install the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 6 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 7 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 8 Install the door protective plate assembly. 9 Install the cable cover plate. 10 Close the door.
6.8.3.8 Replacement of Awning Glass Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp.
10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 12 Remove the awning sunshade assembly. 13 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.
caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.
14 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.
caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.
15 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.
caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.
16 Remove the awning glass assembly using the suction cup.
caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.
Installation Procedures


1 Move the awning glass assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.
caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.
3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.
caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.
4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.
caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.
5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.
caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.
6 Install the awning sunshade assembly. 7 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 8 Install the right ceiling lamp. 9 Install the left ceiling lamp. 10 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 11 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 12 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 13 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 14 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.
6.8.3.9 Replacement of Left Side Wall Quadrangle Window
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 16 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the left side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 18 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.
caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.
19 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.
caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.

20 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.
caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.
21 Remove the left side wall quadrangle window using the suction cup.
caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the left side wall quadrangle window to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.
caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.
3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.
caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.
4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.
caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.
5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.
caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.
6 Install the left side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 7 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 9 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left switch panel assembly. 15 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 16 Install the front USB interface. 17 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 19 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.
6.8.3.10 Replacement of Right Side Wall Quadrangle Window
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket.
7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the right side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 11 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.
caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.
12 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.
caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.
13 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.
caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.
14 Remove the right side wall quadrangle window using the suction cup.
caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.
Installation Procedures


1 Move the right side wall quadrangle window to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.
caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.
3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.
caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.
4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.
caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.
5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.
caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.


6 Install the right side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 7 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the SSM. 9 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 10 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 11 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 12 Install the right sill molding assembly. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

6.9 A-Pillar Exterior Trim Panel Device 6.9.1 Dismantling and Installation
6.9.1.1 Replacement of Left A-pillar Outer Trim Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative terminal of the storage battery.
4 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 5 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 6 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 8 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 9 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left fender trim strip. 11 Remove the left fender assembly. 12 Remove 1 fixing screw of the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 13 Remove the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the left A-pillar outer trim assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 3 Install the left fender assembly. 4 Install the left fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the left front wheel housing body. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 11 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
6.9.1.2 Replacement of Right A-pillar Outer Trim Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative terminal of the storage battery.
4 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 5 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 6 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the right front wheel housing body.
8 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 9 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the right fender trim strip. 11 Remove the right fender assembly. 12 Remove 1 fixing screw of the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 13 Remove the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right A-pillar outer trim assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 3 Install the right fender assembly. 4 Install the right fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 7 Install the right front wheel housing body.

8 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 11 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the top cabinet assembly and the top cover assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.10 Roof Cabinet Device
6.10.1 specifications
6.10.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.10.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.10.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Top Cabinet Assy 2. Assembly of Hexagon Head Bolts and Plain Washers
6.10.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.10.3.1 Replacement of Top Cabinet Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 19 Remove the left speaker cover. 20 Remove the left ceiling assembly. 21 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 22 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 23 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 24 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 25 Remove the SSM. 26 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 27 Remove the sleeper reading lamp. 28 Remove the right speaker cover.
29 Remove the right ceiling assembly. 30 Remove the top cabinet lamp. 31 Remove 12 fixing bolts of the top cabinet assembly, and remove the top cabinet assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the top cabinet assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.







Installation Procedures 1 Move the top cabinet assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the top cabinet assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install 12 fixing bolts of the top cabinet assembly.
Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb



3 Install the top cabinet lamp. 4 Install the right ceiling assembly. 5 Install the right speaker cover. 6 Install the sleeper reading lamp. 7 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the SSM. 9 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 10 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 11 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 12 Install the right sill molding assembly. 13 Install the left ceiling assembly. 14 Install the left speaker cover. 15 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 16 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 17 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 19 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 20 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 21 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 22 Install the curtain rail assembly. 23 Install the right ceiling lamp. 24 Install the left ceiling lamp. 25 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 26 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 27 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 28 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 29 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 30 Connect the battery negative cable. 31 Close the front flip cover plate. 32 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Imperial (ft-lb) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the pipe beam assembly and the white body assembly assembly | M8 | (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| Fixed bolts connecting the pipe beam assembly and HVAC assembly (including PTC) | M6 | (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left lower trim assembly of the dashboard to the left lower fixing bracket | M6 | (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb |
| The fixing bolt between the right storage box assembly and the storage box bracket assembly | M6 | (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb |
6.11 Dashboard Device
6.11.1 Specifications
6.11.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.11.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.11.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Cross Car Beam Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt
1. Cross Car Beam Pole 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

1. Front Defrost Air Outlet Assy-Lh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

1. Front Defrost Vent Assy-Rh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

1. Duct Assy-Defrost Rh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

1. Defrost Duct Assy-Lh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Lower Body of the Instrument Panel 4. Reed Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

2. Upper Body of the Instrument Panel 9. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Screw Cover on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 10. Plastic Nut 4. Screw Cover in the Middle of the Instrument Panel 11. Reed Nut 5. Screw Cover on the Right Side of the Instrument Panel 12. Reed Nut 6. Defrost Air Outlet Assembly on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 13. Plastic Buckle 7. Defrost air outlet assembly on the right side of the instrument panel 14. Self-Tapping Screw 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt

2. Tweeter Speaker Grille of the Instrument Panel 3. Reed Buckle

2. Midrange Speaker Grille of the Instrument Panel 3. Plastic Buckle

2. Visor Outer Panel Assembly of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle 3. Visor Inner Panel of the Instrument Panel 6. Metal Buckle 4. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Decorative Panel of the Left Air Outlet 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Left Air Outlet Assembly 5. Plastic Buckle

2. Decorative Panel of the Right Air Outlet 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Right Air Outlet Assembly 5. Plastic Buckle

1. Side Blowing Air Duct Assy-Lh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

1. Blowing Air Duct Assy-Rh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Welded Assembly of the Left Lower Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Self-Tapping Screw 7. Reed Nut

2. Left Access Panel Cover 3. Plastic Buckle

2. Outer Panel of the Storage Box 10. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Storage Box 3. Body of the Storage Box 11. Felt of the Storage Box 4. Side Panel of the Storage Box 12. Rubber Strip of the Storage Box 5. Shelf of the Storage Box 13. Self-Tapping Screw 6. Roller Blind of the Storage Box 14. Plastic Nut 7. Upper Guide Rail of the Storage Box 15. Reed Nut 8. Lower Guide Rail of the Storage Box 16. Plastic Buckle 9. Magnet of the Storage Box 17. Reed Nut

2. Covered Assembly of the Upper Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Cup Holder Trim Panel on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Cup Holder Mat

2. Upper Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Upper Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

2. Lower Shroud of the Steering Column 5. Plastic Nut 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Lower Shroud of the Steering Column 6. Reed Nut 4. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Dead Pedal 5. Plastic Nut 3. Felt of the Dead Pedal 6. Self-Tapping Screw 4. Sponge of the Dead Pedal 7. Reed Nut

2. Front Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Front Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 6. Reed Nut 4. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Front Upper Right Trim panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Front Upper Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 6. Reed Nut 4. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Front Lower Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Front Lower Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

2. Upper Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Upper Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

2. Lower Trim Panel of the Right Side Switch Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Lower Trim Panel of the Right Side Switch Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

2. Left Side Switch Panel 4. Plastic Buckle 3. Bright Trim Strip of the Left Side Switch Panel 5. Metal Buckle

2. Right Side Switch Panel 4. Plastic Buckle 3. Bright Trim Strip of The Right Side Switch Panel 5. Metal Buckle

2. Maintenance Cover Plate on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 5. Self-Tapping Screw 3. OBD Cover Plate 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Maintenance Cover Plate on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel

2. Maintenance Cover Plate on The Right Side of the Instrument Panel 5. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Fragrance Cover Plate 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Maintenance Cover Plate on the Right Side of the Instrument Panel 7. Metal Buckle

1. Bracket-Under the Combination Switch 2. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw

1. Cover-Combination Switch-Lor 3. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 2. Self-Tapping Screw

2. Upper Protective Cover of the Combination Switch 4. Assembly of the Pressing Strip Under the Protective Cover Flap 3. Pressing Strip Under the Protective Cover Flap 5. Plastic Buckle

1. Storage Box Bracket Assy 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.11.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.11.3.1 Replacement of Tubular Beam Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the wiper arm assy. 5 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 6 Remove the dab decorative cove. 7 Remove the steering wheel assy. 8 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 9 Remove the ip brim assy. 10 Remove the IVI screen. 11 Remove the CAR screen. 12 Remove the IPC screen. 13 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 14 Remove the camera monitor screen. 15 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 16 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 18 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 19 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 20 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 21 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy-lowerr lh. 22 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 23 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 24 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 25 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 26 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 27 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 28 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 29 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard.
30 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 31 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 32 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 34 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 35 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 36 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 37 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 38 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 39 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 40 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 41 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 42 Remove the AR-HUD. 43 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 44 Remove the smart appliance box. 45 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 46 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 47 Remove the Tbox-gw. 48 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 49 Remove the EBS controller assy. 50 Remove the EBS bracket. 51 Remove the body domain control unit. 52 Remove the controller bracket assy. 53 Remove the cross car beam pole. 54 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the combination antenna to the tubular beam assembly, and move the combination antenna to a safe and suitable location.

55 Disengage 24 fixing clips of the tubular beam assembly.



56 Remove 7 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly.



57 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly, and remove the tubular beam assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tubular beam assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.




Installation Procedures 1 Move the tubular beam assembly to the mounting position, and install the 2 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tubular beam assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.




2 Install 7 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs



3 Install 24 fixing clips of the tubular beam assembly.




4 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the combination antenna to the tubular beam assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
5 Install the cross car beam pole. 6 Install the controller bracket assy. 7 Install the body domain control unit. 8 Install the EBS bracket. 9 Install the EBS controller assy. 10 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 11 Install the Tbox-gw. 12 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 13 Install the cockpit domain controller. 14 Install the smart appliance box. 15 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 16 Install the AR-HUD. 17 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 18 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 19 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 20 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 21 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 22 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 23 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 24 Install the storage box assy-rh. 25 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 26 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 27 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 28 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 29 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard.
30 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 31 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 32 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 33 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 34 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 35 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 36 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 37 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 38 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 39 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 40 Install the base-rh display brkt. 41 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 42 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 43 Install the base-lh display brkt. 44 Install the camera monitor screen. 45 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 46 Install the IPC screen. 47 Install the CAR screen. 48 Install the IVI screen. 49 Install the ip brim assy. 50 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 51 Install the steering wheel assy. 52 Install the dab decorative cove. 53 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 54 Install the wiper arm assy. 55 Connect the battery negative cable. 56 Close the front flip cover plate. 57 Close the door.
6.11.3.2 Replacement of Tubular Beam Strut
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Remove the right foot blowing duct assembly.
4 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the tubular beam strut, and remove the tubular beam strut. Installation Procedures




1 Move the tubular beam strut to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the tubular beam strut.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install the right foot blowing duct assembly. 4 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Close the door.
6.11.3.3 Replacement of Left Defroster Duct Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the wiper arm assy. 5 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 6 Remove the dab decorative cove. 7 Remove the steering wheel assy. 8 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 9 Remove the ip brim assy. 10 Remove the IVI screen. 11 Remove the CAR screen. 12 Remove the IPC screen. 13 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 14 Remove the camera monitor screen. 15 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 16 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 18 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 19 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 20 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 21 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 22 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 23 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 24 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 25 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 26 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 27 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 28 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 29 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 30 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 31 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 32 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 34 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 35 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 36 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 37 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 38 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 39 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 40 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt.
41 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 42 Remove the AR-HUD. 43 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 44 Remove the smart appliance box. 45 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 46 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 47 Remove the Tbox-gw. 48 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 49 Remove the EBS controller assy. 50 Remove the EBS bracket. 51 Remove the body domain control unit. 52 Remove the controller bracket assy. 53 Remove the cross car beam pole. 54 Remove the cross car beam assy. 55 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct assembly. 56 Remove the left defroster duct assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the left defroster duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct assembly. 3 Install the cross car beam assy. 4 Install the cross car beam pole. 5 Install the controller bracket assy. 6 Install the body domain control unit. 7 Install the EBS bracket. 8 Install the EBS controller assy. 9 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 10 Install the Tbox-gw. 11 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 12 Install the cockpit domain controller. 13 Install the smart appliance box. 14 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 15 Install the AR-HUD. 16 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 17 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 18 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 19 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 20 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 21 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 22 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 23 Install the storage box assy-rh. 24 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 25 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 26 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 27 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh.
28 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 29 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 30 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 31 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 32 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 33 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 34 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 35 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 36 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 37 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 38 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 39 Install the base-rh display brkt. 40 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 41 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 42 Install the base-lh display brkt. 43 Install the camera monitor screen. 44 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 45 Install the IPC screen. 46 Install the CAR screen. 47 Install the IVI screen. 48 Install the ip brim assy. 49 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 50 Install the steering wheel assy. 51 Install the dab decorative cove. 52 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 53 Install the wiper arm assy. 54 Connect the battery negative cable. 55 Close the front flip cover plate. 56 Close the door.
6.11.3.4 Replacement of Right Defroster Duct Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the wiper arm assy. 5 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 6 Remove the dab decorative cove. 7 Remove the steering wheel assy. 8 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 9 Remove the ip brim assy. 10 Remove the IVI screen. 11 Remove the CAR screen. 12 Remove the IPC screen. 13 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 14 Remove the camera monitor screen. 15 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 16 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 18 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 19 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 20 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 21 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 22 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 23 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 24 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 25 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 26 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 27 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 28 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 29 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 30 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 31 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 32 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 34 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 35 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh.
36 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 37 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 38 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 39 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 40 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 41 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 42 Remove the AR-HUD. 43 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 44 Remove the smart appliance box. 45 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 46 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 47 Remove the Tbox-gw. 48 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 49 Remove the EBS controller assy. 50 Remove the EBS bracket. 51 Remove the body domain control unit. 52 Remove the controller bracket assy. 53 Remove the cross car beam pole. 54 Remove the cross car beam assy. 55 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct assembly. 56 Remove the right defroster duct assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right defroster duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct assembly. 3 Install the cross car beam assy. 4 Install the cross car beam pole. 5 Install the controller bracket assy. 6 Install the body domain control unit. 7 Install the EBS bracket. 8 Install the EBS controller assy. 9 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 10 Install the Tbox-gw. 11 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 12 Install the cockpit domain controller. 13 Install the smart appliance box. 14 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 15 Install the AR-HUD. 16 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 17 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 18 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 19 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 20 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 21 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 22 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 23 Install the storage box assy-rh. 24 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 25 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 26 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 27 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh.
28 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 29 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 30 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 31 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 32 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 33 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 34 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 35 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 36 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 37 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 38 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 39 Install the base-rh display brkt. 40 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 41 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 42 Install the base-lh display brkt. 43 Install the camera monitor screen. 44 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 45 Install the IPC screen. 46 Install the CAR screen. 47 Install the IVI screen. 48 Install the ip brim assy. 49 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 50 Install the steering wheel assy. 51 Install the dab decorative cove. 52 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 53 Install the wiper arm assy. 54 Connect the battery negative cable. 55 Close the front flip cover plate. 56 Close the door.
6.11.3.5 Replacement of IP Lower Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the dab decorative cove. 5 Remove the steering wheel assy. 6 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 7 Remove the ip brim assy. 8 Remove the ivi screen. 9 Remove the car screen. 10 Remove the ipc screen. 11 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen. 13 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 14 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 15 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 16 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 17 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 18 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 19 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 20 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 21 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 22 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 23 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 24 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 25 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 26 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 27 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 28 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 29 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 30 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 31 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 32 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 33 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 34 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 35 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt.
36 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 37 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 38 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 49 Remove 15 fixing bolts of the IP lower body assembly, and remove the IP lower body assembly.


Installation Procedures





1 Move the IP lower body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 15 fixing bolts of the IP lower body assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 4 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 5 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 6 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 7 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 8 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 9 Install the storage box assy-rh. 10 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 11 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 12 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 13 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 14 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 15 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 16 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 17 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 18 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 19 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 20 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 21 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 22 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 23 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 24 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 25 Install the base-rh display brkt.
26 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 27 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 28 Install the base-lh display brkt. 29 Install the camera monitor screen. 30 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 31 Install the ipc screen. 32 Install the car screen. 33 Install the ivi screen. 34 Install the ip brim assy. 35 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 36 Install the steering wheel assy. 37 Install the dab decorative cove. 38 Connect the battery negative cable. 39 Close the front flip cover plate. 40 Close the door.
6.11.3.6 Replacement of IP Upper Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the ip brim assy. 5 Remove the ivi screen. 6 Remove the car screen. 7 Remove the ipc screen. 8 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 9 Remove the camera monitor screen. 10 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 11 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 14 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 15 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 16 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 17 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh.
18 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 19 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 20 Disengage 2 fixing clips of the IP upper body assembly.


21 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly. 22 Remove 11 fixing screws of the IP upper body assembly.






23 Detach 3 protection covers of the IP upper body assembly.




24 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly. 25 Remove the IP upper body assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP upper body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs




3 Install 3 protection covers of the IP upper body assembly. 4 Install 11 fixing screws of the IP upper body assembly.






5 Install 4 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs


6 Install 2 fixing clips of the IP upper body assembly. 7 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 8 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 9 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 10 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 11 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 12 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 13 Install the base-rh display brkt. 14 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 15 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 16 Install the base-lh display brkt. 17 Install the camera monitor screen.
18 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 19 Install the ipc screen. 20 Install the car screen. 21 Install the ivi screen. 22 Install the ip brim assy. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

6.11.3.7 Replacement of IP Brim Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP brim assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Install the IP brim assembly. 2 Close the door.
6.11.3.8 Replacement of Left Vent Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the upr cover assy-combination switch. 5 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 6 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy-lowerr lh. 7 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 8 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 9 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 10 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy-upper lh.

11 Remove 5 fixing screws of the left vent trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left vent trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left vent trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the left vent trim panel assembly. 3 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy-upper lh. 4 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 5 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 6 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 7 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy-lowerr lh. 8 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 9 Install the upr cover assy-combination switch. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.


6.11.3.9 Replacement of Right Vent Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the upr cover assy-combination switch. 5 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 6 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 7 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 8 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 9 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 10 Remove 5 fixing screws of the right vent trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the right vent trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the right vent trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the right vent trim panel assembly. 3 Install the storage box assy-rh. 4 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 5 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 6 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 7 Install the Assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 8 Install the upr cover assy-combination switch. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
6.11.3.10 Replacement of Left Foot Blowing Duct Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly.
3 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left foot blowing duct assembly, and remove the left foot blowing duct assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the left foot blowing duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left foot blowing duct assembly. 3 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 4 Close the door.
6.11.3.11 Replacement of Right Foot Blowing Duct Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly.
3 Remove 3 fixing screws of the right foot blowing duct assembly, and remove the right foot blowing duct assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the right foot blowing duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the right foot blowing duct assembly. 3 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 4 Close the door.
6.11.3.12 Replacement of IP Left Lower Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 5 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 6 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 7 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 8 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 9 Use a small flat-head screwdriver to pry open the cover plate from the three notches at the top.Separate the upper clips.Insert a long - handled clip prying plate into the area where the cover has been pried open. Pry open the clips beneath the cover, and then remove the cover.
caution
The width of the flat - bladed screwdriver should be smaller than that of the notches on the cover. Otherwise, it may scratch the cover, and in severe cases, even damage it.
Before using the flat - bladed screwdriver, wrap the flat tip with cloth tape or a strip of cloth to prevent scratching the cover.
10 Remove 3 fixing screws of the IP left lower trim panel assembly.



11 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP left lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the IP left lower trim panel assembly.
Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb



3 Install 3 fixing screws of the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the cover plate. 5 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 6 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 7 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 8 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 9 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
6.11.3.13 Replacement of Right Storage Box Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Remove 4 fixing screws of the right storage box assembly. 9 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the right storage box assembly. 10 Remove the right storage box assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the right storage box assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the right storage box assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 4 fixing screws of the right storage box assembly. 4 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the right switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 7 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.
6.11.3.14 Replacement of IP Left Upper Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Detach the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the IP left upper trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the IP left upper trim panel assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
6.11.3.15 Replacement of IP Right Upper Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Detach the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the IP right upper trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connectors of the IP right upper trim panel assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
6.11.3.16 Replacement of Steering Column Lower Shield Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 8 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 13 Remove 7 fixing screws of the steering column lower shield assembly. 14 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the steering column lower shield assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 7 fixing screws of the steering column lower shield assembly. 3 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 4 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly.

5 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the right switch panel assembly. 7 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 8 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

6.11.3.17 Replacement of Footrest Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 8 Remove 3 fixing screws of the footrest assembly. 9 Remove the footrest assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the footrest assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the footrest assembly. 3 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 4 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
6.11.3.18 Replacement of IP Left Front Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly.
7 Remove 2 fixing screws of the IP left front trim panel assembly. 8 Detach the IP left front trim panel assembly. 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the IP left front trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the IP left front trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the interior temperature sensor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 2 fixing screws of the IP left front trim panel assembly. 4 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
6.11.3.19 Replacement of IP Right Front Upper Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Remove 5 fixing screws of the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP right front upper trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 3 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the right switch panel assembly.

5 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

6.11.3.20 Replacement of IP Right Front Lower Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Remove 1 fixing screw of the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 4 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP right front lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the IP right front lower trim panel assembly.
3 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 4 Close the door.
6.11.3.21 Replacement of Left Switch Panel Lower Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly.
6 Remove 5 fixing screws of the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 3 Install the left switch panel assembly. 4 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
6.11.3.22 Replacement of Right Switch Panel Lower Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 6 Remove 5 fixing screws of the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 3 Install the right switch panel assembly. 4 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
6.11.3.23 Replacement of Left Switch Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Detach the left switch panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the left switch panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the left switch panel assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the left switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
6.11.3.24 Replacement of Right Switch Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Detach the right switch panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the right switch panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the right switch panel assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the right switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
6.11.3.25 Replacement of IP Left Access Cover Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Remove the OBD cover plate. 3 Detach the OBD harness interface.



4 Remove 3 fixing screws of the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP left access cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the IP left access cover plate assembly.



3 Connect the OBD harness interface. 4 Install the OBD cover plate. 5 Close the door.
6.11.3.26 Replacement of IP Right Access Cover Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing screws of the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP right access cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Close the door.

6.11.3.27 Replacement of Combination Switch Lower Shield Mounting Bracket
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 3 Remove the steering wheel assy. 4 Remove the combination switch lower shield.
5 Disengage 4 clip of the IP harness. 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 7 Remove the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. Installation Procedures








1 Move the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 3 Install 4 clip of the IP harness. 4 Install the combination switch lower shield. 5 Install the steering wheel assy. 6 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 7 Close the door.
6.11.3.28 Replacement of Combination Switch Lower Shield
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly.
3 Remove 5 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield, and remove the combination switch lower shield.




Installation Procedures 1 Move the combination switch lower shield to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield.

3 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 4 Close the door.

6.11.3.29 Replacement of Combination Switch Upper Shield Assembly





























Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 2 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left side panel assembly, the side panel clothes drying rod assembly, and the side panel sheet metal is the fixing bolt connecting the left side panel lower decorative panel body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right rear side panel assembly and the side panel sheet metal | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the sunshade cover assembly and the sunshade cover installation bracket assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the thermos holder bracket assembly and the white body assembly assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the thermos holder and the thermos holder bracket assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.12 Side Wall Interior Decoration Device
6.12.1 Specifications
6.12.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.12.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.12.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. A-Pillar Guard Assy-Lh 19. BCover Assy-Front Camera Decorative 2. A-Pillar Guard Assy-Rh 20. Brkt Assy-Sun Blind Cover-Lh 3. Front Side Enclosure Assy-Lh 21. Brkt Assy-Sun Blind Cover-Rh 4. Front Side Enclosure Assy-Rh 22. Handle Cover-Frt 5. Plastic Nut Seat 23. Handle Cover-Rr Upr 6. Self-Tapping Screw 24. Handle Cover-Rr Lwr 7. B-Pillar Upper Guard Plate Assy-Lh 25. Air Duct-Rear Air Conditioner Upper 8. B-Pillar Upper Guard Plate Assy-Rh 26. Air Duct-Rear Air Conditioner Lower 9. Enclosure Assy-lh Rr 27. Wind Duct-Lh 10. Rear Enclosure Plate Assy-Rh 28. Wind Duct-Rh 11. Tree Clasp 29. Side Hanging Rod Assy 13. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 30. The Bracket of Center Cover 14. B-Pillar Lower Shield Assy-Rh 31. Rear Car Pull Strap Body 15. Center Side Enclosure Assy-Lh 32. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Safety Hammer 33. Center Side Enclosure Assy-mid Lh
17. Self-Tapping Screw 34. Center Side Enclosure Assy-lwr Lh 18. Sun Blind Cover AAssy

6.12.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.12.3.1 Replacement of Left A-pillar Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 2 Connect the battery negative cable.
3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

6.12.3.2 Replacement of Right A-pillar Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the right A-pillar protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect the battery negative cable. 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.
6.12.3.3 Replacement of Left Front Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly.
6 Remove 1 fixing screw of the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 4 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.12.3.4 Replacement of Right Front Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove 1 fixing screw of the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the right front side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 4 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable.

6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.12.3.5 Replacement of Left B-pillar Upper Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 2 Close the door.
6.12.3.6 Replacement of Right B-pillar Upper Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the electric sliding door switch. 5 Remove the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 2 Install the electric sliding door switch. 3 Connect the battery negative cable.

4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.
6.12.3.7 Replacement of Left Rear Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly.
17 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left rear side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly.

12 Install the front USB interface. 13 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 14 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 15 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.


6.12.3.8 Replacement of Side Wall Clothes Rail Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cover plate. 3 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the side wall clothes rail assembly. 4 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the side wall clothes rail assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the side wall clothes rail assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install the cover plate. 4 Close the door.
6.12.3.9 Replacement of Right Rear Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly.
6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove 4 clips of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove 1 fixing screw of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly.


11 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Remove 2 fixing screw of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right rear side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
4 Install 1 fixing screws of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install 4 clips of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the SSM. 7 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 9 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 10 Install the right sill molding assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
6.12.3.10 Replacement of Right B-pillar Lower Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the electric sliding door switch. 5 Remove the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 7 Remove the front boarding armrest assembly. 8 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the right storage box assembly. 10 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Remove the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly. 3 Install the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Install the right storage box assembly. 7 Install the front boarding armrest assembly. 8 Install the right sill molding assembly. 9 Install the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 10 Install the electric sliding door switch. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
6.12.3.11 Replacement of Left Middle Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly.
9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 15 Remove 7 fixing screws of the left middle side wall protective plate assembly, and remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the left middle side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 7 fixing screws of the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left switch panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front USB interface. 11 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable.
15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

6.12.3.12 Replacement of Left Middle Side Wall Middle Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove 8 fixing screws of the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly, and remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing screws of the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly.

3 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the left switch panel assembly. 7 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 8 Install the front USB interface. 9 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
6.12.3.13 Replacement of Left Middle Side Wall Lower Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly.
10 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 3 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Install the front USB interface. 8 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

6.12.3.14 Replacement of Sunshade Cover Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the front reading lamp. 10 Remove the DMS camera bracket. 11 Remove the DMS camera. 12 Remove the sunshade assembly. 13 Remove 2 fixing screws of the sunshade cover plate assembly.

14 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the sunshade cover plate assembly.



15 Disconnect 4 harness connectors of the sunshade cover plate assembly, and remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the sunshade cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 4 harness connectors of the sunshade cover plate assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the sunshade cover plate assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
4 Install 2 fixing screws of the sunshade assembly.
5 Install the sunshade assembly. 6 Install the DMS camera. 7 Install the DMS camera bracket. 8 Install the front reading lamp. 9 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 11 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 12 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.
6.12.3.15 Replacement of Left Defroster Duct
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct. 8 Remove the left defroster duct. Installation Procedures
1 Move the left defroster duct to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct. 3 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
6.12.3.16 Replacement of Right Defroster Duct
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right front side wall protective plate assembly.
7 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct. 8 Remove the right defroster duct. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right defroster duct to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct. 3 Install the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

6.13 Threshold Molding Device
6.13.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.13.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1.1. Main Body of the Toolbox Threshold Pressing Strip 5.1. Main Body of the Right Threshold Pressing Strip 1.2. Plastic Buckle 5.2. Plastic Buckle 2. Toolbox Threshold Plug Cover 6. Cover-Sill Guard Rh 3. Self-Tapping Screw 7. Self-Tapping Screw Assy 4. Plastic Nut Seat 8. Plastic Nut Seat

6.14 Front Wheel Fender Device
6.14.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.14.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Front Wheel Arch Body-Rh Frt 5.2. Baffle- Anti-Splash Rh 2. Brkt-Upper Wheel Cover 5.3. Mounting Brkt-Wheel Arch 3. Front Wheel Arch Body-Lh Frt 5.4. Reinforcement Plate-Anti-Splash 4. Cover-Wheel Arche 6. Right Front Front Wheel Housing Bracket 5.1. Wheel Cover Rear Body-Rh Frt 7.2. Rear Wheel Arch Body-Lh Frt

6.15 Exhaust Port Device
6.15.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.15.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Pressure Relief Valve
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left side bracket and the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the bracket assembly on the side panel to the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the bracket assembly on the side panel to the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the left side panel lower decorative panel installation frame assembly and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the circular hanging bracket to the lower decorative panel body assembly | M8 | (12 - 13) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left side panel assembly and the lower decorative panel assembly of the left side panel | M6 | (3 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.16 Side Wall Outer Panel Device
6.16.1 Specifications
6.16.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.16.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.16.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Lower Trim Assy-Rh 15. Nut Plate 2 2. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 17. Side Perimeter Left Bezel 4. Round Positioning Brkt 18. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19.1. Side Enclosure Decorative Strip 3 6. Front Munting Bracket of Left Side Enclosure 19.2. Plastic Buckle 7. Rubber Cover 1 20.1. Cover Plate of Right Side Enclosure Slide Rail 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20.2. Plastic Buckle 9. Round Mounting Brkt 20.3. Type A Buckle 10. Rubber Cover 2 21.1. End Cover Plate of Right Side Enclosure Slide Rail 11. Hexagon Flange Nut 21.2. Plastic Buckle 12. Hexagon Flange Nut 22. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 13. Upr Brkt Assy3 – Side Pn1 23. Brkt-Square Mounting 14. Nut Plate 1 24. Brkt-Skrit Lower
1. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 13. Brkt Assy 1-Side Perimeter Mounted 2. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 14. Nut Plate 1 3.1. Lower Plaque Body Assy-Lh Surround 15. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.2. Left Front Wheel Eyebrow 16. Nut Plate 2 3.3. Self-Tapping Screw 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.4. Type B Leaf Spring Nut 18. Side Mgt Brkt-Lh 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. Lower Trim Mounting Frame Assy_Lh 5. Brkt-Skrit Lower 20. Brkt Assy 2-Side Perimeter Mounted 6. Hexagon Flange Nut 21. Rubber Cover 2 7. Brkt-Square Mounting 22. Round Mounting Brkt 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 23.1. Main Body of Side Enclosure Decorative Strip 1 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 23.2. Plastic Buckle 10. Rubber Cover 1 24.1. Main Body of Side Enclosure Decorative Strip 2 11. Side Perimeter Right Bezel 24.2. Plastic Buckle 12. Hexagon Flange Nut


6.17 Vehicle Body Sealing Plug Device
6.17.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.17.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

















1. Body Waterproof Foil-Lh(1) 8. Plug Cover 2. Body Waterproof Foil-Rh(1) 9. Plug Cover 3. Body Waterproof Foil-Rh(2) 10. Plug Cover 4. Plug Cover 11. Plug Cover 5. Plug Cover 12. Plug Cover 6. Plug Cover 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Plug Cover
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left intake grille assembly and the bumper lower body assembly | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right intake grille assembly and the bumper lower body assembly | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the air guide plate assembly and the front module | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.18 Active Grille Shutter Device
6.18.1 Specifications
6.18.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.18.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.18.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Wind Deflector Assy 3.2. Active Grille Ecm Harness 2. Air Intake Grille Assy Rh 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.1. Main Body of the Left Air Inlet Grille

6.18.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.18.3.1 Replacement of Left Intake Grille Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the left intake grille assembly.
13 Disengage 4 harness fixing clips. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the left intake grille assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the left intake grille assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille assembly.
Torque: (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 4 harness fixing clips.
4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the left intake grille assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

6.18.3.2 Replacement of Left Intake Grille Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left intake grille body assembly.
13 Disengage 5 harness fixing clips. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille body assembly. 15 Remove the left intake grille body assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the left intake grille body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille body assembly.
Torque: (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 5 harness fixing clips.
4 Connect 1 harness connector of the left intake grille body assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

6.18.3.3 Replacement of GASM Harness Module
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the GASM harness module.
13 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the GASM harness module. 14 Remove the GASM harness module. Installation Procedures

1 Move the GASM harness module to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing clip of the GASM harness module. 3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the GASM harness module.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.
6.18.3.4 Replacement of Right Intake Grille Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly.
12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right intake grille assembly. 13 Disengage 2 harness fixing clips of the right intake grille assembly. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the right intake grille assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the right intake grille assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the right intake grille assembly.
Torque:(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 2 harness fixing clips of the right intake grille assembly.
4 Connect 1 harness connector of the right intake grille assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.
6.18.3.5 Replacement of Air Deflector Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket.
9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 13 Remove the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 14 Remove the sealing cross beam. 15 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 16 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 17 Remove 2 harness clips of the air deflector assembly. 18 Remove 10 fixing bolts of the air deflector assembly. 19 Remove the air deflector assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the air deflector assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts of the air deflector assembly.
Torque:(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 2 harness clips of the air deflector assembly. 4 Install the front lower protection assembly. 5 Install the MMW radar bracket. 6 Install the sealing cross beam. 7 Install the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 8 Install the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 9 Install the front bumper assembly. 10 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 13 Install the forward MMW radar. 14 Install the front MMW radar shield. 15 Install the through-type lamp. 16 Install the engine compartment trim panel body.
17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the side cover plate assembly of the back integrated bracket and the upper cover plate of the back integrated bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.19 Integrated Bracket Decoration Device
6.19.1 Specifications
6.19.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.19.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.19.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Upper Cover Plate of the Rear Integrated Bracket 4. Center Cover Assy-Back Integrated Bracket 2. Filler Cap-Back Integrated Frame 5. bracket of Center Cover 3. Side Cover Assy-Back Integrated Bracket 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.20 Door Outer Panel Device
6.20.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.20.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Window Cover Assy-Lh 2. Right Window Cover Assy
6.20.2 Dismantling and Installation
6.20.2.1 Replacement of Left Window Cover Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the front USB interface. 9 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 11 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly.
19 Remove the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 20 Remove the left window cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left window cover plate assembly. 2 Install the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 3 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel assembly.

12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 16 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Lift all windows. 20 Close the door.

6.20.2.2 Replacement of Right Window Cover Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Remove the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 4 Remove the right window cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures







1 Move the right window cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 3 Lift all windows. 4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the front windshield cover plate to the white body assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.21 Engine Compartment Covering Device
6.21.1 Specifications
6.21.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.21.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.21.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Bolt 11. Engine Hood Striker Assy 3. Large Washer 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 13. Bumper Engine Hood 5. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Lh 14. Cable Hood Opening Assy 6. Handle Assy-Frt Cover Opening 15. The Air Pole Is Installed With the Ball End 7. Hex Socket Set Screw 16. Front cover assy 8. Large Washer 17. Air strut engine hood 9. Engine Hood Lock Assy 18. Plug cover

6.21.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.21.3.1 Replacement of Engine Compartment Trim Panel Body
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove 6 fixing screws of the engine compartment trim panel body. 4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine compartment trim panel body to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws of the engine compartment trim panel body. 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.
6.21.3.2 Replacement of Front Windshield Cover Plate
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Remove the two-way joint. 5 Disengage the water fluid reservoir water pipe.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
6 Disengage 9 clips of the front windshield cover plate.


7 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the front windshield cover plate, and remove the front windshield cover plate.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the front windshield cover plate to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the front windshield cover plate.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 9 clips of the front windshield cover plate. 4 Install the water fluid reservoir water pipe.


5 Install the two-way joint. 6 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the rear boarding armrest to the integrated frame | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.22 Rear Boarding Handrail Device
6.22.1 Specifications
6.22.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.22.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.22.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Rear Pedal Armrest 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt


6.22.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.22.3.1 Replacement of Rear Boarding Handrail
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail. 3 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail. 4 Remove the rear boarding handrail. Installation Procedures
1 Move the rear boarding handrail to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat belt and the right drawer assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the base of the rear storage box to the rear panel sheet metal | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.23 Rear Interior Trim Device
6.23.1 Specifications
6.23.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.23.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.23.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Rear Enclosure Assy 4. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 1.1. Main Body of the Rear Enclosure Panel 5. Rear Compartment Holder 1.2. Cover Plate of the Rear Enclosure Storage Box 6. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Tree Clasp 7. Rear Compartment Cover 3. Coat Hook
6.23.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.23.3.1 Replacement of Rear Wall Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the front USB interface. 14 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 15 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 16 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 18 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 20 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 21 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 22 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 23 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Remove the rear wall storage box protective plate. 25 Remove the rear wall storage box base. 26 Remove the coat hook. 27 Remove the seat rear storage box.
28 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly. 29 Remove 19 clips of the rear wall protective plate assembly, and remove the rear wall protective plate assembly.








Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 19 clips of the rear wall protective plate assembly.




3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.
Torque: (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
4 Install the seat rear storage box. 5 Install the coat hook. 6 Install the rear wall storage box base. 7 Install the rear wall storage box protective plate. 8 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 9 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 10 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 11 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel assembly. 17 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 18 Install the front USB interface. 19 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 20 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 21 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 22 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 23 Install the SSM. 24 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 25 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 26 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 27 Install the right sill molding assembly. 28 Connect the battery negative cable.
29 Close the front flip cover plate. 30 Close the door.

6.23.3.2 Replacement of Rear Wall Storage Box Base
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the rear wall storage box protective plate. 3 Remove 6 fixing screws of the rear wall storage box base. 4 Remove the rear wall storage box base. Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear wall storage box base to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws of the rear wall storage box base. 3 Install the rear wall storage box protective plate. 4 Close the door.
6.23.3.3 Replacement of Rear Wall Storage Box Outer Panel
Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Remove the rear wall storage box outer panel. Installation Procedures 1 Install the rear wall storage box outer panel. 2 Close the door.

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the front windshield cover plate and the white body assembly of the installation bracket for the air guide cover | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower body of the left side guide vane and the integrated frame | M6 | (14.75 - 19) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the front windshield cover plate and the white body assembly of the installation bracket for the air guide cover | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the top guide cover body and the left guide cover upper body | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the top flow guide cover body and the upper body of the right flow guide | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the upper body of the left flow guide cover to the installation bracket of the flow guide cover | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower body of the right deflector and the integrated frame | M6 | (14.75 - 19) ft lbs |
6.24 Deflector Shield Device
6.24.1 Specifications
6.24.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.24.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.24.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Mid Brkt-Cover-Diversion-Upr 7. Lor Cover-Diversion-Rh 2. Cover-Diversion-Upr 8. Charging Port Cover Assy-Rh/Cover Assy - Rh 3. Mounting Brkt-Guide Hood 9. Charging Port Cover Assy 4. Mounting Brkt-Upr Guide Hood 10. Lor Cover-Diversion-Lh 5. Lower Metal Brkt 1-Shroud 11. Upr Cover-Diversion-Lh 6. Lower Metal Brkt 2-Shroud


6.24.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.24.3.1 Replacement of Roof Deflector Body
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 5 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the roof deflector body, and remove the roof deflector body. Installation Procedures


1 Move the roof deflector body to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the roof deflector body.
Torque:(14.75 +/- 19) ft lbs
3 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 4 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
6.24.3.2 Replacement Of Left Deflector Upper Body
Removal Procedures
1 Remove 8 fixing bolts of the left deflector upper body, and remove the left deflector upper body. Installation Procedures




1 Move the left deflector upper body to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing bolts of the left deflector upper body.
Torque:(14.75 - 19) ft lbs
6.24.3.3 Replacement of Right Deflector Upper Body
Removal Procedures
1 Remove 8 fixing bolts of the right deflector upper body, and remove the right deflector upper body. Installation Procedures




1 Move the right deflector upper body to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing bolts of the right deflector upper body.
Torque: (14.75 - 19) ft lbs
6.24.3.4 Replacement of Left Deflector Lower Body
Removal Procedures
1 Remove 10 fixing bolts of the left deflector lower body, and remove the left deflector lower body.






Installation Procedures 1 Move the left deflector lower body to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts of the left deflector lower body.
Torque:(14.75 - 19) ft lbs

6.24.3.5 Replacement of Right Deflector Lower Body
Removal Procedures 1 Remove 10 fixing bolts of the right deflector lower body, and remove the right deflector lower body.
Installation Procedures





1 Move the right deflector lower body to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts of the right deflector lower body.
Torque: (14.75 - 19) ft lbs
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the top cover assembly and the white body assembly assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the laser radar cover bracket and the top cover assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.25 Roof Panel Device
6.25.1 Specifications
6.25.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.25.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.25.2.1 Decomposition Diagram








1. Top Cover Assy 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.26 Roof Interior Decoration Device
6.26.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.26.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Ceiling Assy-Mid 3.1. Main Body of the Right Roof Liner 1.1. Main Body of the Central Roof Liner 3.2. Plastic Buckle 1.2. Rubber Strip for Clamping the Edge of the Central Roof Liner 4. Self-Tapping Screw 2. Ceiling Assy-Lh 5. Plastic Nut Seat 2.1. Main Body of the Left Roof Liner 6. Tree Clasp 2.2. Plastic Buckle 7. Speaker Mask-Lh 3. Ceiling Assy-Rh 8. Speaker Mask-Rh

6.26.2 Dismantling and Installation
6.26.2.1 Replacement of Middle Ceiling Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly, and remove the middle ceiling assembly.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the middle ceiling assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly.

3 Install the curtain rail assembly. 4 Install the right ceiling lamp. 5 Install the left ceiling lamp. 6 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 7 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 9 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
6.26.2.2 Replacement of Left Ceiling Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly.
9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the front USB interface. 16 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 17 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 18 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 20 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 21 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 22 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 23 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 25 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 26 Remove the left speaker cover. 27 Remove 13 fixing screws of the left ceiling assembly. 28 Remove the left ceiling assembly.

Installation Procedures


1 Move the left ceiling assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 13 fixing screws of the left ceiling assembly.
3 Install the left speaker cover. 4 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 6 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left switch panel assembly. 13 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 14 Install the front USB interface. 15 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 16 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 17 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 18 Install the curtain rail assembly. 19 Install the right ceiling lamp. 20 Install the left ceiling lamp. 21 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 22 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 23 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 24 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 25 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 26 Connect the battery negative cable. 27 Close the front flip cover plate. 28 Close the door.
6.26.2.3 Replacement of Right Ceiling Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly.
7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 14 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 15 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 16 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 17 Remove the SSM. 18 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 19 Remove the sleeper reading lamp. 20 Remove the right speaker cover. 21 Remove 13 fixing screws of the right ceiling assembly, and remove the right ceiling assembly.

Installation Procedures


1 Move the right ceiling assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 13 fixing screws of the right ceiling assembly.
3 Install the right speaker cover. 4 Install the sleeper reading lamp. 5 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the SSM. 7 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 9 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 10 Install the right sill molding assembly. 11 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 12 Install the curtain rail assembly. 13 Install the right ceiling lamp. 14 Install the left ceiling lamp. 15 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 16 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 17 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 18 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 19 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.
6.27 Seat Belt Device
6.27.1 Description and Operation
6.27.1.1 Description and Operation
Wearing seat belts is the main way to protect occupants. The seat belts are used to restrain the occupants' bodies on the seats, preventing the occupants' bodies from rushing out of the seats and causing secondary collisions with internal components such as the steering wheel and IP in the event of a collision, thereby minimizing occupant casualties. Seat belts not only reduce the risk of secondary collisions for occupants, but also prevent them from being thrown away from their seats in dangerous situations such as vehicle rollover. Including but not limited to the following situations: 1. Frontal impact collision. 2. Rear impact collision. 3. Side impact collision. 4. Rollover type collision.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat belt assembly and the white body assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat belt buckle assembly and the rear seat assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
6.27.2 Specifications
6.27.2.1 Fastener Specifications

6.27.3 Decomposition DiagramDecomposition Diagram
6.27.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Rear Seat Belt Assy 2. Rear Seat Belt Locking Assy
6.27.4 Dismantling and Installation
6.27.4.1 Replacement of Rear Seat Belt Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the front USB interface. 14 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 15 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 16 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 18 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 20 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 21 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 22 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 23 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Remove the rear wall storage box protective plate. 25 Remove the rear wall storage box base. 26 Remove the coat hook. 27 Remove the seat rear storage box. 28 Remove the seat assy-rear.
29 Remove the rear wall protective plate assembly. 30 Remove 2 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly. 31 Remove the rear seat belt assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the rear seat belt assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.
Torque: (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
3 Install the rear wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the seat assy-rear. 5 Install the seat rear storage box. 6 Install the coat hook. 7 Install the rear wall storage box base. 8 Install the rear wall storage box protective plate. 9 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 11 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly.
15 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the left switch panel assembly. 18 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 19 Install the front USB interface. 20 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 21 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 22 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 23 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Install the SSM. 25 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 26 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 27 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 28 Install the right sill molding assembly. 29 Connect the battery negative cable. 30 Close the front flip cover plate. 31 Close the door.

6.27.4.2 Replacement of Rear Seat Belt Buckle Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt buckle assembly. 3 Remove the rear seat belt buckle assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the rear seat belt buckle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt buckle assembly.
Torque:(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
3 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the door handle assembly and sliding door assembly inside the car door | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the door trim assembly and the sliding door assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.28 Door Trim Panel Device
6.28.1 Specifications
6.28.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.28.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.28.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1.1. Main Body of the Door Panel 2. Plug Cover 1.2. Sound-Absorbing Cotton 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 1.3. Plastic Buckle 4.1. Peg 1.4. Self-Tapping Screw 4.2. Inner Handle 1.5. Water Cut Bracket 4.3. Inner Handle Base


6.28.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.28.3.1 Replacement of Door Inside Handle Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the door inside handle assembly. 5 Disengage 2 cables of the door inside handle assembly. 6 Remove the door inside handle assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the door inside handle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 cables of the door inside handle assembly. 3 Install 3 fixing bolts of the door inside handle assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
4 Install the door protective plate assembly. 5 Install the cable cover plate. 6 Close the door.
6.28.3.2 Replacement of Door Protective Plate Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate.

3 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the door protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the door protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the door protective plate assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the cable cover plate. 4 Close the door.

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the upper guide rail assembly and the right side inner panel assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt nut connecting the upper guide rail assembly and the right side inner panel assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.29 Sliding Door Guide Rail Device
6.29.1 Specifications
6.29.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.29.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.29.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Guide Assy-Upr 5. Hex Socket Set Screw 2. Hexagon Flange Nut 6. Pulley Limit Shrapnel Lwr 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Guide Assy-Mid 8. Bumper Guide-Upr
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the right window regulator assembly and the door trim assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the left window regulator assembly and the door trim assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.30 Window Regulator Device
6.30.1 Specifications
6.30.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.30.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.30.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Window Regulator-Rh 8. Hexagon Flange Nut 1.1. Assembly of the Left Window Regulator Guide Rail 9. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail Assy-Lh Lower 1.2. Assembly of the Left Window Regulator Motor 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 1.3. Self-Tapping Screw 11. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail Assy-Rh Lower 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 14. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 5. Window Regulator-Rh 15. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail-Rh 5.1. Assembly of the Right Window Regulator Guide Rail 16. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 5.2. Assembly of the Right Window Regulator Motor 17. Hex Socket Set Screw 5.3. Self-Tapping Screw 18. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail-Rh 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20. Hex Socket Set Screw

6.30.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.30.3.1 Replacement of Left Window Regulator Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 15 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left window regulator assembly.
16 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the left window regulator assembly. 17 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the left window regulator assembly. 18 Remove the left window regulator assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the left window regulator assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the left window regulator assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 3 fixing nuts of the left window regulator assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
4 Connect 1 harness connector of the left window regulator assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 6 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the front USB interface. 13 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 14 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 15 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.
6.30.3.2 Replacement of Right Window Regulator Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II).
8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right window regulator assembly. 9 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the right window regulator assembly. 10 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right window regulator assembly. 11 Remove the right window regulator assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the right window regulator assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the right window regulator assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 3 fixing nuts of the right window regulator assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the right window regulator assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

























5 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Install the door protective plate assembly. 8 Install the cable cover plate. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the ground lock assembly and the lower hinge assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the ground lock buckle assembly and the side panel outer assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.31 Sliding Door Accessory Device
6.31.1 Specifications
6.31.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.31.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.31.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Lock Assy-Rr 11. Mounting Bracket for DCM Module 2. Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw 12. Anti-Pinch Sensor Assr 3. Striker -Rr 13. Ground Lock Assy 4. Hex Socket Set Screw 14. Hexagon Flange Nut 5. Lock Assy-Fr 15. Striker Ground Lock Assy 6. Striker -Fr 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Drag Chain Assy 17. Door End Guide Pin 8. Hex Socket Set Screw 18. Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw ( m6*16 ) 9. Slide Door Drive Unit Assy 19. Guide Pin at Side Circumference End 10. Hex Socket Set Screw 20. Door Bumper-Rh
6.31.3 System Schematic Diagram
6.31.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| NFC key cannot lock/open the car door Fault definition:NFC key cannot lock/ open the car door, the vehicle's central control switch unlocks the door normally. | 1. There is electromagnetic interference in the usage environment | Move to an undisturbed environment for use. |
| 2. NFC key bending, damage, demagnetization | Inspect the NFC key and replace it if necessary. | |
| 3. NFC key anti-theft loss | Reprogram the NFC key. | |
| 4. Bluetooth&NFC module fault | Repair Bluetooth&NFC module, replace Bluetooth if necessary&NFC module. Refer to Replacement Of Concealed External Handle Assembly | |
| The door lock bounces while driving Fault definition:During the driving process of the vehicle, the door lock unlocks/locks. | 1. Mechanical mechanism failure of door lock | Adjust the mechanical mechanism of the door lock and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of Front Lock Assembly.Replacement Of Rear Lock Assembly |
| 2. Poor contact of wiring harness plug | Inspect the wiring harness and plugs. | |
| 3. Poor contact of relevant grounding points | Repair the grounding point fault. | |
| 4. Wiring harness fault | Inspect the wiring harness of the car door lock. | |
| 5. Fault in the contact switch of the central locking motor | Replace the door lock motor assembly. | |
| 6. Gate control module fault | Repair the door control module and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of DCM |
6.31.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
6.31.4.1 Diagnosis Description
Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the white body device before diagnosing faults in the white body device, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the white body device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of
faulty parts. 6.31.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the body in white system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the body in white system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 6.31.4.3 Fault Symptom Table
6.31.4.4 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle.
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to Gate Control Module Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | |
| U007E88 | BCANFD3 BusOff | Refer to Communication Fault Of Door Control Module |
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-BOX | |
| B1B0188 | door lock motor open circuit | Refer to Door Lock Motor Fault |
| B1B0189 | door lock motor short to ground or drive fault | |
| B1B0190 | door lock motor short to battery or drive fault | |
| B1B0A01 | lock block state signal error or open lock actuator stuck | |
| B1B0288 | cinch motor short open circuit | Refer to Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault |
| B1B0289 | cinch motor short to ground or drive fault | |
| B1B0290 | cinch motor short to battery or drive fault | |
| B1B0649 | cinch reset timeout | |
| B1B0749 | cinch motor unlock reset timeout | |
| B1B0489 | handle light short to ground or drive failure | Refer to Door Handle LED Light Fault |
| B1B0490 | handle light short to battery or drive failure | |
| B1B0549 | cinch timeout | Refer to Cinch Timeout Fault |
| B1B0B88 | Anti pinch strip open circuit | Refer to Anti Pinch Strip Fault |
| B1B0088 | Sliding door motor open circuit | Refer to Sliding Door Motor Fault |
| B1B0089 | Sliding door motor positive and negative poles short circuit to ground or drive fault | |
| B1B0090 | Sliding door motor short to battery or drive fault | |
| B1B0849 | open door timeout | |
| B1B0949 | close door timeout |
3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 6.31.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)
DCM
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | System voltage >32V for 5s | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Gate control module |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | System voltage <8V for 30s |
6.31.4.6 Gate Control Module Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007E88 | BCANFD3 BusOff | The bus controller enters BUSOFF mode | 1.Wiring harness 2. Gate control module |
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU | message 0x18860021 Lost Communication fo more than 10 cycle(1s) | |
| U015687 | missing CDCU | message 0x18FEC1EE Lost Communication fo more than 5 cycle(5s) | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication with VDC | message 0x18FEF100 Lost Communication fo more than 10 cycle(1s) | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | message 0x18FEE6E Lost Communication fo more than 10 cycle(1s) |
Step 3:Check if there are any power fault codes for other modules besides the door control module? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the door control module. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.7 Communication Fault Of Door Control Module
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND3 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1B0188 | door lock motor open circuit | Sliding door motor detected open circuit for 10 consecutive times | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (door lock motor) 3. Gate control module |
| B1B0189 | door lock motor short to ground or drive fault | Sliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times | |
| B1B0190 | door lock motor short to battery or drive fault | Sliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times | |
| B1B0A01 | lock block state signal error or open lock actuator stuck | the lock status does not match the action after completing the unlocking process |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 5:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.8 Door Lock Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (door lock motor) and the door control module.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1B0288 | cinch motor short open circuit | Sliding door motor detected open circuit for 10 consecutive times | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (electrically operated electric suction motor) 3. Gate control module |
| B1B0289 | cinch motor short to ground or drive fault | Sliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times | |
| B1B0290 | cinch motor short to battery or drive fault | Sliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times | |
| B1B0649 | cinch reset timeout | cinch reset action timeout | |
| B1B0749 | cinch motor unlock reset timeout | cinch motor unlock reset action timeout |
Step 4:Connect the sliding door hinge (door lock motor) to an external 12V power supply and observe the sliding door hinge (door lock motor) is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (door lock motor). Refer to Replacement Of Front Lock Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.9 Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1B0489 | handle light short to ground or drive failure | handle light on and voltage fault being detected | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) 3. Gate control module |
| B1B0490 | handle light short to battery or drive failure | handle light off and voltage fault being detected |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (electrically open electric suction motor) and the door control module. Step 4:Connect the sliding door hinge (electric suction motor) to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sliding door hinge (electric suction motor) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (electrically open and suction motor). Refer to Replacement Of Sliding Door Driver Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.10 Door Handle LED Light Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) and the door control module.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1B0549 | cinch timeout | cinch action timeout | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (electrically operated electric suction motor) 3. Rear lock 4. Gate control module |
Step 4:Connect the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) is lit up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light). Refer to Replacement Of Hidden External Handle Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.11 Cinch Timeout Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1B0B88 | Anti pinch strip open circuit | anti pinch strip over 4.5V | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip) 3. Gate control module |
Step 3:Check the relevant circuits of the sliding door hinge (electric opening and suction motor). Refer to Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault Step 4:Check the full lock signal harness between the rear lock and the door control module. Step 5:Replace the rear lock. Refer to Replacement Of Rear Lock Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 7:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.12 Anti Pinch Strip Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip) and the door control module.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1B0088 | Sliding door motor open circuit | Sliding door motor detected open circuit for 10 consecutive times | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door motor 3. Gate control module |
| B1B0089 | Sliding door motor positive and negative poles short circuit to ground or drive fault | Sliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times | |
| B1B0090 | Sliding door motor short to battery or drive fault | Sliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times | |
| B1B0849 | open door timeout | Sliding door open timeout | |
| B1B0949 | close door timeout | Sliding door close timeout | |
| B1B0C01 | hall power supply error | hall power supply low |
Step 4:Check if the resistance of the sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip) is 1K Ω when the anti pinch function is activated? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
6.31.4.13 Sliding Door Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door motor and the door control module.
Step 4:Connect the sliding door motor to an external 12V power supply and observe the sliding door motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door motor. Refer to Replacement Of Sliding Door Driver Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.5 Dismantling and Installation
6.31.5.1 Replacement of Hidden Outside Handle Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 7 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the hidden outside handle assembly.
8 Disengage 3 clips of the hidden outside handle assembly. 9 Disengage 2 cables of the hidden outside handle assembly. 10 Remove 4 fixing screws of the hidden outside handle assembly. 11 Remove the hidden outside handle assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the hidden outside handle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the hidden outside handle assembly. 3 Connect 2 cables of the hidden outside handle assembly.
4 Install 3 clips of the hidden outside handle assembly. 5 Connect 2 harness connectors of the hidden outside handle assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 7 Install the door protective plate assembly. 8 Install the cable cover plate. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
6.31.5.2 Replacement of Rear Lock Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 8 Remove the door inside handle assembly. 9 Remove the hidden outside handle assembly. 10 Remove the ground lock assembly. 11 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear lock assembly. 12 Disengage 5 clips of the rear lock assembly.


13 Disengage 4 cables of the rear lock assembly. 14 Disengage 6 clips of the rear lock assembly.



15 Remove 3 fixing screws of the rear lock assembly. 16 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the rear lock assembly. 17 Remove the rear lock assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the rear lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the rear lock assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 3 fixing screws of the rear lock assembly. 4 Install 6 clips of the rear lock assembly.
5 Connect 4 cables of the rear lock assembly. 6 Install 5 clips of the rear lock assembly.
7 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear lock assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
8 Install the ground lock assembly. 9 Install the hidden outside handle assembly. 10 Install the door inside handle assembly. 11 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 12 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 13 Install the door protective plate assembly. 14 Install the cable cover plate. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.
6.31.5.3 Replacement of Front Lock Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II).
5 Disengage 1 cable of the front lock assembly. 6 Remove 3 fixing screws of the front lock assembly. 7 Remove the front lock assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the front lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the front lock assembly. 3 Connect 1 cable of the front lock assembly. 4 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Install the door protective plate assembly. 6 Install the cable cover plate. 7 Close the door.
6.31.5.4 Replacement of Sliding Door Driver Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the sliding door driver assembly.

13 Disengage 2 cables of the sliding door driver assembly. 14 Remove 4 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly.



15 Remove 6 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly, and remove the sliding door driver assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the sliding door driver assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly. 3 Install 4 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly.
4 Connect 2 cables of the sliding door driver assembly. 5 Connect 1 harness connector of the sliding door driver assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly. 7 Install the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 8 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 9 Install the SSM. 10 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 11 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 12 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 13 Install the right sill molding assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

6.31.5.5 Replacement of Lock Cylinder Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Disengage 1 cable of the lock cylinder assembly.
6 Remove 1 fixing screw of the lock cylinder assembly. 7 Remove the lock cylinder assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the lock cylinder assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the lock cylinder assembly.

3 Connect 1 cable of the lock cylinder assembly. 4 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Install the door protective plate assembly. 6 Install the cable cover plate. 7 Close the door.
6.31.5.6 Replacement of Ground Lock Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II).
7 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the ground lock assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the ground lock assembly. 9 Disengage 1 cable of the ground lock assembly. 10 Remove the ground lock assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the ground lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 cable of the ground lock assembly. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the ground lock assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install 2 fixing nuts of the ground lock assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
5 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Install the door protective plate assembly. 7 Install the cable cover plate. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

6.31.5.7 Replacement of Ground Lock Catch Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 3 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the ground lock catch assembly. 4 Remove the ground lock catch assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the ground lock catch assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the ground lock catch assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts between the upper hinge assembly and the sliding door inner panel assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the middle hinge assembly and the sliding door inner panel assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower chain assembly and the sliding door inner panel assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the lower hinge assembly and the ground lock assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.32 Door Hinge Device
6.32.1 Specifications
6.32.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.32.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.32.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Hinge Assy Upr 5. Hinge Assy Lwr 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Upper Hinge Guide Pin Holder 3. Hinge Assy Mid 7. Hex Socket Set Screw 4. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy


6.32.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.32.3.1 Replacement of Upper Hinge Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the upper hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 3 Remove 3 fixing screws of the upper hinge assembly. 4 Remove the upper hinge assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the upper hinge assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the upper hinge assembly. 3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the upper hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
4 Close the door.
6.32.3.2 Replacement of Middle Hinge Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 3 Remove the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly.
4 Separate the mingle hinge assembly from the sliding door driver assembly. 5 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 6 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 7 Remove the middle hinge assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the middle hinge assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

4 Connect the mingle hinge assembly to the sliding door driver assembly. 5 Install the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly. 6 Install the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 7 Close the door.

6.32.3.3 Replacement of Lower Hinge Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing nuts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the ground lock assembly.
3 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 4 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the lower hinge assembly. 6 Remove the lower hinge assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the lower hinge assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the lower hinge assembly. 3 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs


4 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
5 Install 2 fixing nuts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the ground lock assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs















6 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left window regulator assembly and the left window regulator assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right window regulator assembly and the right window regulator assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.33 Vehicle Body Sealing Device
6.33.1 Specifications
6.33.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.33.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.33.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Seal Door Waist Upr 11. Waist Otr Assy-Lh 2. Door Opening Sealing Strip 12. Seal Fender-Lh 3. Seal Fender-Rh 13. Seal Toolbox 4. Top Sealing Strip 14. Self-Tapping Screw 5. Waist Inr Assy-Lh 15. Fixed Window Seal-Rh 6. Sealing Strip-Cabin Lh Frt 16. Waist Otr Assy-Rh 7. Engine Hood Seal-Rr 17. Seal Glass Run Assy-Rh 8. Engine Hood Seal Fr Assy 18. Waist Inr Assy-Rh 9. Seal Glass Run Assy-Lh 19. Combination of Cross Recessed Pan Head Screws and Large Washers 10. Fixed Window Seal-Lh
6.33.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.33.3.1 Replacement of Left Outer Weatherstrip Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the front USB interface. 9 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 11 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly.
19 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 20 Remove the left outer weatherstrip assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the left outer weatherstrip assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left outer weatherstrip assembly.
3 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 16 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Lift all windows. 20 Close the door.
6.33.3.2 Replacement of Right Outer Weatherstrip Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows.
3 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 4 Remove the right outer weatherstrip assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the right outer weatherstrip assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right outer weatherstrip assembly.
3 Lift all windows. 4 Close the door.

6.33.3.3 Replacement of Engine Compartment Rear Sealing Strip Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the engine compartment rear sealing strip assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Install the engine compartment rear sealing strip assembly. 2 Close the front flip cover plate. 3 Close the door.

6.33.3.4 Replacement of Right Fender Trim Strip
Removal Procedures 1 Remove the right fender trim strip. Installation Procedures
1 Install the right fender trim strip.
6.33.3.5 Replacement of Left Glass Run Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 13 Remove the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly.
14 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the left adjustable window assembly to the left window regulator assembly. 15 Move the left adjustable window assembly to the lowest position. 16 Remove the left glass run assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Install the left glass run assembly. 2 Move the left adjustable window assembly to the highest position. 3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the left adjustable window assembly to the left window regulator assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
4 Install the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 5 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 6 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the front USB interface. 13 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable.
15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.
6.33.3.6 Replacement of Left Inner Weatherstrip Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the front USB interface. 9 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 11 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly.
16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the left inner weatherstrip assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left inner weatherstrip assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left switch panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front USB interface.

11 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Lift all windows. 17 Close the door.

6.33.3.7 Replacement of Right Inner Weatherstrip Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Remove the cable cover plate. 4 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right inner weatherstrip. Installation Procedures
1 Move the right inner weatherstrip to the mounting position. 2 Install the door protective plate assembly. 3 Install the cable cover plate. 4 Lift all windows. 5 Close the door.

6.33.3.8 Replacement of Left Fender Trim Strip
Removal Procedures 1 Remove the left fender trim strip. Installation Procedures
1 Install the left fender trim strip.
6.33.3.9 Replacement of Right Glass Run Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 8 Remove the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly.
9 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the right adjustable window assembly to the right window regulator assembly. 10 Move the right adjustable window assembly to the lowest position. 11 Remove the right glass run assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Install the right glass run assembly. 2 Move the right adjustable window assembly to the highest position. 3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the right adjustable window assembly to the right window regulator assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
4 Install the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 5 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Install the door protective plate assembly. 8 Install the cable cover plate. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the driver's seat assembly and the white body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.34 Driver's Seat Device
6.34.1 Specifications
6.34.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.34.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.34.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. BACK COVER 23. BACKREST VENT 2. SEAT COVER 24. PNUEMATIC LUMBAR 3. BACK FOAM ASSY 25. BELT EXIT BEZELTOP RH 4. CUSHION FOAM 26. H&V ECU 12V 5. PNEUMATIC BACK BOLSTER 27. SEATBELT 6. ARMRESTASSEMBLY 28. TETHER BELT SUSPENSION 7. SWIVEL 29. AIR CYLINDER 8. PLINTH 30. SIDE SHIELD LH 9. FRAME KIT 31. ARMRESTASSEMBLY 10. REAR QTR SHIELD - RH 32. RECLINER HANDLE COVER PLATE 11. SIDE SHIELD – RH 33. RECLINE CTRL HANDLE - LH 12. BUCKLE 34. REAR QTR SHIELD - LH 13. DUMP VALVE OF SWIVEL 35. VALVE ASSY- SUSP HEIGHTADJUST (MEM) - RH 14. ADJ DAMPER KNOB 36. H&V SWITCH 15. CUSHION VENT 37. CUSHION 3D NET 16. FRONT SHIELD 38. VALVE ASSY- LUMBAR TRIPLE - RH 17. SUSPENSION 39. CONTROL PANEL - LH [HAM+HV3LD] 18. SUSPENSION COVER 40. VALVE ASSY- DUMP VALVE - LH
19. KNOB - CUSHION SLIDE PTD 41. T-SHAPE OPS 20. CYLINDER CAP 42. CUSHION HEATER 21. AIR CYLINDER 43. SEAT PAN ASSY 22. CUSHION VENT COVER 44. SLIDE RAIL ASSEMBLY


6.34.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.34.3.1 Replacement of Driver Seat Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release the brake system air pressure 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Move the driver seat assembly backward, and remove 4 fixing bolts at the front end of the driver seat assembly. 5 Move the driver seat assembly forward, and remove 4 fixing bolts at the rear end of the driver seat assembly. 6 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
7 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the driver seat assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the driver seat assembly. 9 Remove the driver seat assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the driver seat assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures




1 Move the driver seat assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the driver seat assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Connect 1 air pipe of the driver seat assembly. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the driver seat assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable.


5 Move the driver seat assembly forward, and install 4 fixing bolts at the rear end of the driver seat assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
6 Move the driver seat assembly backward, and install 4 fixing bolts at the front end of the driver seat assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat assembly and the right drawer assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.35 Rear Seat Device
6.35.1 Specifications
6.35.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.35.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.35.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
2. Headrest Assembly 6. Right Guard Plate 3. Backrest Assembly 7. Pull Strap Housing 4. Seat Cushion Assembly 8. Headrest Cap 5. Left Guard Plate 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt


6.35.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.35.3.1 Replacement of Rear Seat Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the rear seat assembly, and remove the rear seat assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the rear seat assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures


1 Move the rear seat assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the rear seat assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the rear seat assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the toolbox assembly to the metal | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the middle drawer assembly and the sheet metal plate | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the toolbox decorative panel assembly and the tool box assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the toolbox assembly and toolbox hinge | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right drawer assembly to the floor sheet metal | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right drawer assembly and the rear seat belt assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the middle drawer assembly and the floor sheet metal | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the toolbox decorative panel assembly and the white body assembly assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.36 Sleeping Berth Device
6.36.1 Specifications
6.36.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.36.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.36.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
2. Plug-Toolbox 9. Sleeper Mat Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Toolbox Decorative Plate Assy-lh 4. Drawer Assy-Mid 11. Rear Seat Storage Box 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Sleeping Berth Protection Net Assembly 6. Drawer Assy-Rh 13. Protection Net Lock Catch (with Spacer) 7. Toolbox Decorative Plate Assy 14. Protection Net Lock Catch 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt
6.36.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.36.3.1 Replacement of Sleeper Toolbox
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 5 Remove the rear A/C lower air duct. 6 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the 120V receptacle. 16 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 17 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). 18 Remove the toolbox trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the toolbox sill molding assembly. 20 Remove the toolbox lamp. 21 Remove the toolbox lamp bracket.
22 Remove 4 plug caps. 23 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the sleeper toolbox. 24 Remove the sleeper toolbox. Installation Procedures




1 Move the sleeper toolbox to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the sleeper toolbox.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install 4 plug caps. 4 Install the toolbox lamp bracket. 5 Install the toolbox lamp. 6 Install the toolbox sill molding assembly. 7 Install the toolbox trim panel assembly. 8 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 9 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 10 Install the 120V receptacle. 11 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly.
16 Install the left switch panel assembly. 17 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 18 Install the front USB interface. 19 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 20 Install the rear A/C lower air duct. 21 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 22 Connect the battery negative cable. 23 Close the front flip cover plate. 24 Close the door.

6.36.3.2 Replacement of Middle Drawer Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Disengage 6 clips of the middle drawer assembly.
4 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the middle drawer assembly, and remove the middle drawer assembly.




Installation Procedures 1 Move the middle drawer assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the middle drawer assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs




3 Install 6 clips of the middle drawer assembly.
4 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 5 Close the door.

6.36.3.3 Replacement of Right Drawer Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the rear seat assembly. 3 Remove the seat rear storage box. 4 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.
5 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right drawer assembly, and remove the right drawer assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the right drawer assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the right drawer assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.
Torque: (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
4 Install the seat rear storage box. 5 Install the rear seat assembly. 6 Close the door.
6.36.3.4 Replacement of Toolbox Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the fire extinguisher. 5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the front USB interface. 7 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the 120V receptacle. 15 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 16 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear).

17 Open the sleeper mat assembly. 18 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the toolbox trim panel assembly, and remove the toolbox trim panel assembly.




Installation Procedures 1 Move the toolbox trim panel assembly to the mounting position, and install the 5 fixing bolts of the toolbox trim panel assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs




2 Close the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 4 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 5 Install the 120V receptacle. 6 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 15 Install the fire extinguisher. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.
6.36.3.5 Replacement of Toolbox Left Trim Panel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 12 Open the sleeper mat assembly. 13 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures



1 Move the toolbox left trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox left trim panel assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs


3 Close the sleeper mat assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left switch panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front USB interface. 11 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.
6.36.3.6 Replacement of Sleeper Mat Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 2 Close the door.
6.36.3.7 Replacement of Seat Rear Storage Box
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Remove the seat rear storage box. Installation Procedures 1 Install the seat rear storage box. 2 Close the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Close the door.

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the sunshade assembly and the sunshade cover assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.37 Sunshade Curtain Device
6.37.1 Specifications
6.37.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.37.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.37.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Assembly of the Sunshade Curtain Body 3. Cross Recessed Pan Head Screw Assy 2. Assembly of the Sunshade Curtain Guide Rod 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.37.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.37.3.1 Replacement of Sunshade Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly, and lift up the middle ceiling assembly.
10 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the sunshade assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing screws of the sunshade assembly.



12 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the sunshade assembly. 13 Remove the sunshade assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the sunshade assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the sunshade assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install 2 fixing screws of the sunshade assembly.



4 Connect 1 harness connector of the sunshade assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly.
6 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 7 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 9 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.


6.37.3.2 Replacement of Sunshade Rail Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 1 fixing screw of the sunshade rail assembly. 3 Rotate to remove the sunshade rail assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the sunshade rail assembly. 3 Close the door.

6.38 Curtain Device
6.38.1 Decomposition Diagram
6.38.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Guide Rail Assy-Curtain 1.3. Curtain Rail End Cap 1.1. Curtain Rail Body 2. Self-Tapping Screw 1.2. Curtain Rail Slide Beads
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the front boarding armrest assembly to the body | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the rear boarding armrest assembly to the integrated frame | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.39 Boarding Handrail Device
6.39.1 Specifications
6.39.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.39.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.39.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Boarding Handrail Assy-Frt 2. Boarding Handrail Assy-Frt 1.1. Front Boarding Handrail Body 2.1. Front Boarding Handrail Body 1.2. Handrail Sealing Ring 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt


6.39.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.39.3.1 Replacement of Front Boarding Handrail Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the plug cap. 3 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the front boarding Handrail assembly. 4 Remove the front boarding Handrail assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the front boarding Handrail assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the front boarding Handrail assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install the plug cap. 4 Close the door.
6.39.3.2 Replacement of Rear Boarding Handrail Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Remove the plug cap. 3 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the rear boarding Handrail assembly. 4 Remove the rear boarding Handrail assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the rear boarding Handrail assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the rear boarding Handrail assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs





3 Install the plug cap. 4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the sunroof sunshade assembly and the top cover assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.40 Sunroof Sunshade Curtain Device
6.40.1 Specifications
6.40.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.40.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.40.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Fixed Glass Roof Sunshade Assy 1.3. Hex Socket Set Screw 1.1. Assembly of Canopy Sunshade Curtain Fabric 1.4. Mushroom Fastener 1.2. Assembly of Canopy Sunshade Curtain Motor 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.40.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.40.3.1 Replacement of Awning Sunshade Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left display bracket base inner cover. 5 Remove the CMS left display assembly. 6 Remove the left display bracket base. 7 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 9 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 10 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 11 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 12 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 13 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 14 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 15 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the awning sunshade assembly.
16 Remove 18 fixing bolts of the awning sunshade assembly, and remove the awning sunshade assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the awning sunshade to the mounting position. 2 Install 18 fixing bolts of the awning sunshade assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the awning sunshade.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 5 Install the right ceiling lamp. 6 Install the left ceiling lamp. 7 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 8 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 9 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 10 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left display bracket base. 13 Install the CMS left display assembly. 14 Install the left display bracket base inner cover. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts between the front cover lock assembly and the front cover assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the front cover latch assembly and the front cover assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.41 Front Hood Device
6.41.1 Specifications
6.41.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.41.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.41.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Bolt 11. Engine Hood Striker Assy 3. Large Washer 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 13. Bumper Engine Hood 5. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Lh 14. Cable Hood Opening Assy 6. Handle Assy-Frt Cover Opening 15. The Air Pole Is Installed With The Ball End 7. Hex Socket Set Screw 16. Front Cover Assy 8. Large Washer 17. Air Strut Engine Hood 9. Engine Hood Lock Assy 18. Plug Cover


6.41.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.41.3.1 Replacement of Engine Hood Opening Handle Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 1 fixing screw of the engine hood opening handle assembly, and detach the engine hood opening handle assembly. 3 Disengage the engine hood lock cable assembly. 4 Remove the engine hood opening handle assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the engine hood opening handle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect the engine hood lock cable assembly. 3 Install 1 fixing screw of the engine hood opening handle assembly. 4 Close the door.
6.41.3.2 Replacement of Engine Hood Lock Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the engine hood lock assembly. 5 Disengage 1 clip of the engine hood lock assembly. 6 Disengage the engine hood lock cable assembly.




7 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the engine hood lock assembly. 8 Remove the engine hood lock assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine hood lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the engine hood lock assembly.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect the engine hood lock cable assembly. 4 Install 1 clip of the engine hood lock assembly. 5 Connect 1 harness connector of the engine hood lock assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

6.41.3.3 Replacement of Engine Hood Pneumatic Strut (left)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Pry off 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (left). 4 Remove the engine hood pneumatic strut (left).
caution
One person is required to support the engine hood cover plate during removal.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine hood pneumatic strut to the mounting position. 2 Fasten 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (left). 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

6.41.3.4 Replacement of Engine Hood Pneumatic Strut (right)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Pry off 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (right). 4 Remove the engine hood pneumatic strut (right).
caution
One person is required to support the engine hood cover plate during removal.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine hood pneumatic strut (right) to the mounting position. 2 Fasten 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (right). 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the right fender cover bracket assembly and the white body assembly assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
6.42 Fender Device
6.42.1 specifications
6.42.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.42.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.42.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Fender Assy-Rh 8. Fender Cover Body 2. Filling Block-Fender-Lh 9. Upr Skeleton-Fender-Rh 3. Connect Skeleton Assy-Lh Fender 10. Brkt Assy-Rh Fender 4. Upper Bracket on the Left Fender 11. Fender Assy-Rh 5. Brkt Assy-Lh Fender 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Filling Block-Fender-Rh 13. Self-Tapping Screw Assy 7. Brkt Assy-Fender Cover Rh 14. Hexagon Flange Bolt
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the upper step bracket to the white body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the upper step pipe beam and the white body assembly | M10 | (33 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the upper step body assembly and the right front wheel housing rear body | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the upper step body assembly and the wheel cover connection bracket | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.43 Boarding Step Device
6.43.1 Specifications
6.43.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.43.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.43.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Outer Decorative Cover Plate of the Sill 2. Plug-Stepping 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.1. Boarding Step Body 7. Pipe Beams 3.2. Secondary Step Mat 8. Attachment Brkt-Lower Wheel Arch 3.3. Primary Step Mat 9. Attachment Brkt-Upper Wheel Arch 3.4. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 10. Pedal Bracket 4. Hex Socket Set Screw


6.43.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.43.3.1 Replacement of Boarding Step Body Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the plug cap. 5 Remove the 3 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.
6 Disengage 1 snap fastener of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 7 Remove the 6 fixing screws of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 8 Remove the 4 fixing screws of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.



9 Remove the 5 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 10 Separate 1 snap fastener. 11 Disconnect 2 wire harness connectors. 12 Take off the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.





Installation Procedures 1 Install the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 2 Connect 2 wire harness connectors. 3 Connect 1 snap fastener.



4 Install the 5 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
5 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
6 Install the 6 fixing screws of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.



7 Install 1 snap fastener of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 8 Install the 3 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
9 Install the plug cap.
10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the side skirt bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the side skirt bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the side skirt bracket and the frame assembly | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the side skirt bracket and the frame assembly | M6 | (.75 - 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly and the side skirt bracket | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the skirt mounting bracket to the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the side skirt bracket to the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the skirt mounting bracket to the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the installation bracket under the skirt and the side skirt assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear step assembly and the right side skirt assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
6.44 Side Skirt Panel Device
6.44.1 Specifications
6.44.1.1 Fastener Specifications

6.44.2 Decomposition Diagram
6.44.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Skirt Assy-Lh 9. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Brkt-Lh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 10. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Brkt-Skrit Lower 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Riveted Nut 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Skrit Bracket 14. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 8. Brkt-Skrit Upper 16. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy
1. Skrit Plate-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Hexagon Flange Nut 11. Skrit Bracket 3. Rear Step Assy 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 14. Brkt-Skrit Upper 6. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 15. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 7. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 16. Brkt-Skrit Lower 8. Brkt-Rh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 17 Hexagon Flange Bolt 9 Hexagon Flange Bolt 18 Riveted Nut


6.44.3 Dismantling and Installation
6.44.3.1 Replacement of Rear Step Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove the rear step mounting base. 7 Remove 8 fixing bolts of the rear step assembly. 8 Remove the rear step assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the rear step assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing bolts of the rear step assembly.
Torque:(17 +/- 2) ft lbs


















































































































































































3 Install the rear step mounting base. 4 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 5 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
7Automotive Electrical Appliances
7.1 Air Conditioning and Heating
7.1.1 Description and Operation
7.1.1.1 Refrigerant Leakage Detection
caution
1. Do not use fluorescent dyes to detect leakage in the refrigeration system, otherwise the compressor may be damaged.
2. To detect leakage in the refrigeration system, a refrigerant leak detector must be used for leak detection.
1. Measure the pressure of the A/C system pipeline to confirm if there is any residual refrigerant in the A/C system. 2. Refill the refrigerant to the A/C system.
caution
1. Vacuumize the A/C system before filling.
2. Fill refrigerant with the same model and amount as indicated on the refrigerant nameplate.
3. Conduct testing under the following conditions. 1. The vehicle is in a stationary state with the screen illuminated. 2. Ensure good ventilation in the working environment. 3. Use a refrigerant leakage detector to check for refrigerant leakage in the A/C system and repeat the test 2-3 times.
Note
The leakage detector may react to volatile gases that are not refrigerants, such as gasoline vapors, exhaust gases, etc.
7.1.1.2 Inspection of Refrigerant Air-tightness
caution
1. Do not spray soapy water on the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case.
2. If it is necessary to check if there is a leakage at the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case, visual inspection can be carried out. If there is a leakage, there will be refrigerant residue at the pins of the plastic case. If it is not a leakage from the pressure sensor/pressure switch itself, there will be no impurities or refrigerant oil stains at the pins of the plastic case.
3. If it is confirmed that the leakage is caused by damage to a component in the A/C system, please replace it and perform pressure and leakage testing. Do not use alkaline liquids such as soap water to test the leakage of the pressure sensor/pressure switch and other electrical components, otherwise internal corrosion and damage of the pressure sensor and refrigerant leakage may occur.
1. Use a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 10g to check if the system is leaking normally on a annual basis or at shorter interval. 2. If abnormal leakage is found and the system needs to be disassembled (repaired or replaced with hoses, fittings, etc.), all refrigerant in the system shall be recovered. 3. After leak detection and repair, refrigerant vacuumizing/ pressure holding/filling of the system must be carried out.
7.1.1.3 Refrigerant Recovery
caution
1. In practical operation, refrigerant maintenance equipment must be used. Please refer to the equipment manufacturer's user manual for specific instructions on how to use the equipment.
2. In the event of an accidental emission of the system, the work site must be adequately ventilated before continuing maintenance.
3. For further instructions on health and safety, please refer to the instructions provided by refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
1. As shown in the figure, connect the refrigerant recovery/ recirculation/filling equipment (A) or other equipment with the same function to the high-pressure maintenance interface (B) and low-pressure maintenance interface (C) according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.

2. After the recovery process, measure the amount of refrigerant oil discharged from the A/C system. Before filling, ensure that an equal amount of new refrigerant oil is filled back into the A/C system.

7.1.1.4 Vacuumizing Refrigerant System
caution
When the A/C system is exposed to the atmosphere (such as during installation and repair), refrigerant recovery/recirculation/filling equipment must be used for vacuumizing. However, if the system is disassembled for several days, the fluid reservoir/desiccant shall be replaced and the system shall be vacuumized for several hours.
1. As shown in the figure, connect the refrigerant recovery/ recirculation/filling equipment (A) or other equipment with the same function to the high-pressure maintenance interface (B) and low-pressure maintenance interface (C) according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer. 2. Vacuumize the system.
7.1.1.5 Refrigerant Filling
caution
1. After filling refrigerant, make sure to preheat the engine for at least 3 minutes when turning on the A/C switch for the first time to prevent damage.
2. After refrigerant filling, set the temperature to maximum cooling under idle conditions, adjust the blower to high speed, and let the compressor run in for 3 minutes or longer.
1. As shown in the figure, connect the refrigerant recovery/ recirculation/filling equipment (A) or other equipment with the same function to the high-pressure maintenance interface (B) and low-pressure maintenance interface (C) according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.
2. Vacuumize the system. 3. Fill a specified amount of refrigerant to the system.
caution
Do not overfill, otherwise the compressor will be damaged.
4. Check for refrigerant leakage.
caution
1. Do not spray soapy water on the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case.
2. Check if there is a leakage at the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case, visual inspection can be carried out. If there is a leakage, there will be refrigerant residue at the pins of the plastic case. If it is not a leakage from the pressure sensor/pressure switch itself, there will be no impurities or refrigerant oil stains at the pins of the plastic case.
3. If it is confirmed that the leakage is caused by damage to a component in the A/C system, please replace it and perform pressure and leakage testing. Do not use alkaline liquids such as soap water to test the leakage of the pressure sensor/pressure switch and other electrical components, otherwise internal corrosion and damage of the pressure sensor and refrigerant leakage may occur.
5. Check the system performance.
caution
1. Do not operate the compressor before adding refrigerant, as the compressor cannot function properly without any refrigerant and may overheat.
2. Check the amount of refrigerant through measurement rather than the observation holes.
3. It is only allowed to fill refrigerant into the A/C system when the engine is stopped.
7.1.1.6 Refrigerant Oil Balance
caution
1. To replace any of the following components such as condenser, evaporator, pipeline, hose, or compressor, it is necessary to add refrigerant oil.
2. the used refrigerant oil according to regulations.
3. Do not mix brands or types of refrigerant oils, otherwise the compressor will be damaged.
4. The refrigerant oil has strong moisture absorption, so when removing any component of the A/C system, it is necessary to immediately block the interface with a plug or plastic tape to isolate it from the air.
5. Do not splash the refrigerant oil onto the vehicle, otherwise the paint layer will be damaged; If refrigerant oil splashes onto the paint layer, it shall be immediately rinsed off.
1. Remove the compressor. 2. Drain the refrigerant oil from the suction and exhaust ports of the compressor into the same container.
caution
1. Drain the refrigeration oil into a clean, graduated container.
2. During the operation, avoid foreign objects and moisture from entering the compressor and refrigerant oil.
3. When draining oil, rotate the compressor to facilitate the discharge of refrigerant oil (traditional compressor).
4. When draining oil, change the tilt angle of the compressor to facilitate the discharge of refrigerant oil (electric compressor).
3. Record the amount of refrigerant oil released from the removed compressor.
caution
This measurement value will be used when installing the replaced/repaired compressor.
4. Discard the used refrigerant oil properly. 5. The replaced/repaired compressor comes with a certain capacity of refrigerant oil. Before installing the replaced/ repaired compressor, it is necessary to drain or add some refrigerant oil.
caution
1. Refer to the amount of refrigerant oil discharged when removing the compressor.
2. Subtract the amount of refrigerant oil discharged during removal from the amount of refrigerant oil in the replaced/repaired compressor, and the difference is the amount of refrigerant oil that needs to be discharged.
3. If the amount of refrigerant oil in the replaced/ repaired compressor is small, the difference in the previous step is the amount of refrigerant oil that needs to be added.
6. Discharge or add refrigerant oil in the replaced/repaired compressor based on the calculated value.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the air conditioning compressor assembly and the air conditioning compressor bracket | M8 | (18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the bracket of the air conditioning compressor to the frame on the subframe | M8 | (18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolt connecting the front left to the vehicle body | M8 | (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolt connecting the front left and front wall crossbeam inner panel assembly | M6 | (5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing nut connecting the front left to the vehicle body | M6 | (5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolt connecting the front right to the vehicle body | M8 | (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the front right and front crossbeam inner panel assembly | M6 | (5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing nut connecting the front right to the vehicle body | M6 | (5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the rear to the vehicle body | M8 | (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the rear and rear evaporator to the connecting pipe assembly | M8 | (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the rear to the vehicle body | M6 | (5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
7.1.2 Specifications
7.1.2.1 Fastener Specifications
| S/N | Item | Structural Parameters |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Performance parameters | Cooling capacity≥6.7kW - face blowing Blower capacity for face blowing, full cool≥600m³/h Heating capacity≥8kW |
| 2 | Refrigerant specifications | HFC-134a |
| 3 | Refrigerant capacity | 29.9 oz +/- 1.76 oz |
| 4 | Refrigerant leakage rate | < 1.41 oz/year |
| 5 | Model of refrigerant oil | POE RB68 |
| 6 | Amount of refrigerant oil | 6.76 oz |
| S/N | Item | Structural Parameters |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Model | EBJ33C-MD01 |
| 2 | Type | Electric vortex type |
| 3 | Displacement | 33CC |
| 4 | Rated voltage (high voltage) | 800V |
| 5 | Working voltage range | 480V~920V |
| 6 | Rated voltage (low voltage) | 24V |
| 7 | Input voltage range | 18~36V |
| 8 | Working temperature | 68*F - 212*F |
| 9 | Rated input power | 4 hp |
| 10 | Rated speed | 7000rpm |
| 11 | Maximum speed | 12000rpm |
| 12 | Insulation resistance | ≥50MΩ |
| S/N | Item | Structural Parameters |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Model | YJ0174, YJ0175, YJ0176 |
| 2 | Rated voltage (high voltage) | 800V |
| 3 | Working voltage range | 450V~940V |
| 4 | Rated voltage (low voltage) | 24V |
| 5 | Input voltage range | 18~32V |
| 6 | Working temperature | -40*F - -121*F |
7.1.2.2 Technical Parameters
A/C System
Compressor
Heater

7.1.3 Decomposition Diagram
7.1.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. HVAC Device Assy-Frt Lh 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Tie-Fir Tree 5. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal
2. HVAC Device Assy-Frt Rh 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Tie-Fir Tree 5. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

3. HVAC Device Assy-Rr 8. Fixed Frame After Air Conditioning 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt

10. Room Temperature Sensor 12. Aroma Generator Assembly In New Energy Vehicles 11. Self-Tapping Screw 13. Self-Tapping Screw

14. Compressor Assy 17. Compressor Bracket 15. Compressor Mounting Bolts 18. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 38. Hexagon Flange Bolt

19. Stent 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20. Hexagon Flange Bolt 22. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

23. Lh Steanm to Front S0V Line Assy 1 Cold Steam End 29. Condensor Inlet and Outlet Tube Assy 24. Left Steam to Pre-S0V Line Assy 1 Stepress End 30. Pipeline Assembly From SOV to Evaporator In New Energy Vehicles 25. Left Evaporator to SOV Line Assy 2 31. Pressure Cooling Tube Tripler 26. Right Evaporator to SOV Valve Line Assy Autoclaclve End 32. Return Air Tube-Rransfer Tube 27. Rh Evaporator to SOV Valve Line Assy Cold Steam End 33. Adapter Pipe at the Outlet of SOV In New Energy Vehicles 28. Rnght Evaporator to SOV Valve Line Assy 2 34. Rear Evaporator to Transfer Line Assy

6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 36. Pipe Clamp 16. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 37. Hexagon Flange Bolt 35. Pipe Clip φ 9- φ 12


7.1.4 System Schematic Diagram
7.1.4.1 System Working Principle
7.1.4.2 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The air conditioning blower is not producing air or the air volume is low | 1. Blockage of air conditioning filter element | Clean or replace the air conditioning filter element. |
| 2. Fault in the power supply harness of the air conditioning blower | Check the power supply harness of the air conditioning blower. Refer to Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault.Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault. Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower | |
| 3. Fault in the wiring harness of the PWM control signal for the air conditioning blower | Check the PWM control signal wiring harness between the driver's blower, passenger's blower, sleeper blower, and AC. | |
| 4. Air conditioning blower fault | Replace the driver's blower, passenger's blower, and sleeper blower. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - Front Left . Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right. Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear | |
| 5. Air conditioning controller fault | Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right | |
| Air conditioning system not cooling or insufficient cooling | 1. Blockage of air conditioning filter element | Clean or replace the air conditioning filter element. |
| 2. Too much or too little refrigerant | Check for refrigerant leakage in the air conditioning system and add it again if necessary. |
7.1.5 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.1.5.1 Diagnosis Description
Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principles of air conditioning and heating before diagnosing faults in air conditioning and heating, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of air conditioning and heating should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and
avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.1.5.2 Routine Inspection
• Check the after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the air conditioning and heating system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the air conditioning and heating system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 7.1.5.3 Fault Symptom Table
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| 3. Poor heat dissipation of condenser | Check if the condenser is blocked or covered by foreign objects. | |
| 4. Evaporator blockage or foreign object coverage | Check if the evaporator is blocked or covered by foreign objects. | |
| 5. Evaporator temperature sensor fault | Refer to Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault. Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault.Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault | |
| 6. Fault in the power supply circuit of the air conditioning compressor | Refer to Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault | |
| 7. CAN communication harness fault between air conditioning compressor and AC | Check the CAN communication harness between the air conditioning compressor and AC. | |
| 8. High voltage wiring harness fault of air conditioning compressor | Check the high-pressure wiring harness of the air conditioning compressor. | |
| 9. High pressure interlock harness fault of air conditioning compressor | Check the high-pressure interlock harness of the air conditioning compressor. | |
| The air conditioning system is not heating or heating is insufficient | 1. Blockage of air conditioning filter element | Clean or replace the air conditioning filter element. |
| 2. Fault in PTC power supply circuit | Refer to PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault | |
| 3. CAN communication harness fault between PTC and AC | Check the CAN communication harness between the driver PTC, passenger PTC, sleeper PTC, and AC. | |
| 4. Fault in PTC high-voltage wiring harness | Check the driver PTC, passenger PTC, and sleeper PTC high-voltage wiring harness. | |
| 5. PTC high-voltage interlock harness fault | Check the high-voltage interlock wiring harness of the driver PTC, passenger PTC, and sleeper PTC. |
7.1.5.4 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.1.5.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
AC
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to Air Conditioning Controller Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | |
| U115087 | Lost communication with XF-AC (0x18FF2F19x) | Refer to Communication Fault Of Air Conditioning Controller |
| U115187 | Lost communication with ACP_AC1 (0x18FF2B19x) | |
| U115287 | Lost communication with PTC1_AC (0x18FF2C19x) | |
| U115387 | Lost communication with PTC2_AC (0x18FF2D19x) | |
| U115487 | Lost communication with PTC3_AC (0x18FF2E19x) | |
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU_To_ AC_Front(0x18FF1121x) | |
| U015687 | Lost communication with CDC_VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx) | |
| U012287 | Lost communication with VDC_CCVS (0x18FEF100x) | |
| U019887 | Lost communication with TGW_TD_ Time(0x18FEE6EEx) | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 BusOff | |
| U007D89 | BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the ground | |
| U007D90 | BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the ground | |
| U115F87 | The CANFD transmission is abnormal | |
| B258113 | Front - Interior temperature sensor open circuit | Refer to Front Interior Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258111 | Short-circuited front - interior temperature sensor | |
| B258613 | Rear-interior temperature sensor open circuit | Refer to Rear Interior Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258611 | Rear-interior temperature sensor short- circuited | |
| B250117 | Actuator 1 of the front left mode damper motor is faulty | Refer to Left Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault |
| B250217 | Actuator 2 of the front left mode damper motor is faulty | |
| B250317 | Front left circulation damper actuator is faulty | Refer to Left Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B250417 | Front left heating and cooling valve actuator is faulty | Refer to Left Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault |
| B258213 | Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuit | Refer to Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258211 | Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor is short-circuited | |
| B258313 | Open the circuit for the exhaust air temperature sensor in the front left air conditioner | Refer to Left Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258311 | The exhaust air temperature sensor of the front left air conditioner is short- circuited | |
| B250517 | Actuator 1 of the front right mode damper motor is faulty | Refer to Right Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault |
| B250617 | Actuator 2 of the front right mode damper motor is faulty | |
| B250717 | Front right circulation damper actuator is faulty | Refer to Right Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault |
| B250817 | The actuator of the front right heating and cooling valve is faulty | Refer to Right Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault |
| B258413 | Front right air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor open circuit | Refer to Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258411 | Short-circuited evaporation temperature sensor of front right air conditioner | |
| B258513 | Open the air outlet temperature sensor on the front right air conditioner | Refer to Right Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258511 | The outlet air temperature sensor of the front right air conditioner is short- circuited | |
| B258713 | Rear air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuit | Refer to Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258711 | The evaporation temperature sensor of the rear left air conditioner is short- circuited | |
| B258813 | Rear air conditioner air temperature sensor open circuit | Refer to Sleeper Air Conditioning Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B258811 | The outlet air temperature sensor of the rear air conditioner is shorted |
7.1.5.6 Air Conditioning Controller Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | The power supply voltage exceeds 32.5V for more than 1 second | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Air conditioning controller |
| B111716 | Low battery voltage | The power supply voltage is lower than 17.5V for more than 1 second |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U115087 | Lost communication with XF-AC (0x18FF2F19x) | If all XF-AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified | 1.Wiring harness 2. Air conditioning controller |
| U115187 | Lost communication with ACP_AC1 (0x18FF2B19x) | If all ACP_AC1 packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified | |
| U115287 | Lost communication with PTC1_AC (0x18FF2C19x) | If all PTC1_AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified | |
| U115387 | Lost communication with PTC2_AC (0x18FF2D19x) | If all PTC2_AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified | |
| U115487 | Lost communication with PTC3_AC (0x18FF2E19x) | If all PTC3_AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified | |
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU_To_AC_ Front(0x18FF1121x) | If all BDCU_To_AC_Front packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified | |
| U015687 | Lost communication with CDC_VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx) | If all CDC_VDHR packets are lost within 5 seconds, the fault is rectified | |
| U012287 | Lost communication with VDC_CCVS (0x18FEF100x) | If all VDC_CCVS packets are lost within 10 sending intervals (1s), the fault is rectified | |
| U019887 | Lost communication with TGW_TD_Time (0x18FEE6EEx) | If all TGW_TD_Time packets are lost within 5 seconds, the fault is rectified | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 BusOff | Bus Off |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the air conditioning controller? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the air conditioning controller. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.7 Communication Fault Of Air Conditioning Controller
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007D89 | BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the ground | CAN bus exception | |
| U007D90 | BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the ground | CAN bus exception | |
| U115F87 | The CANFD transmission is abnormal | Abnormal packets sent by the CANFD module are detected for more than 300ms |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCAND2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258113 | Front - Interior temperature sensor open circuit | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Front interior temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258111 | Short-circuited front - interior temperature sensor | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 4:Check the air conditioning CAN bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of The Air Conditioning CAN Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.8 Front Interior Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front interior temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller.
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Front interior temperature sensor | 77℉ | 2.12KΩ - 2.25KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258613 | Rear-interior temperature sensor open circuit | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Rear interior temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258611 | Rear-interior temperature sensor short-circuited | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 4:Check if the resistance of the front car interior temperature sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front interior temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Indoor Temperature Sensor Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.9 Rear Interior Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear interior temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller.
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Rear interior temperature sensor | 77℉ | 2.12KΩ - 2.25KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B250117 | Actuator 1 of the front left mode damper motor is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning mode damper motor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B250217 | Actuator 2 of the front left mode damper motor is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting |
Step 4:Check if the resistance of the rear temperature sensor in the car is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the Rear interior temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Indoor Temperature Sensor Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.10 Left Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning mode damper motor and the air conditioning controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B250317 | Front left circulation damper actuator is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning internal and external circulation motor 3. Air conditioning controller |
Step 4:Connect the left air conditioning mode damper motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the left air conditioning mode damper motor is working? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left air conditioning mode damper motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.11 Left Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B250417 | Front left heating and cooling valve actuator is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning cooling and heating motor 3. Air conditioning controller |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning internal and external circulation motor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Connect the left air conditioner's internal and external circulation motor to a 12V power supply and observe if the left air conditioner's internal and external circulation motor is working? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left air conditioning internal and external circulation motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC assembly (including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.12 Left Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor and the air conditioning controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258213 | Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuit | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258211 | Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor is short-circuited | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 4:Connect the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor is working? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC assembly (including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.13 Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor | 77℉ | 1.48KΩ - 1.6KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258313 | Open the circuit for the exhaust air temperature sensor in the front left air conditioner | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258311 | The exhaust air temperature sensor of the front left air conditioner is short- circuited | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check if the resistance of the left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC assembly (including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.14 Left Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller.
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor | 77℉ | 9.9KΩ - 10.1KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B250517 | Actuator 1 of the front right mode damper motor is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning mode damper motor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B250617 | Actuator 2 of the front right mode damper motor is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting |
Step 4:Check if the resistance of the left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.15 Right Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning mode damper motor and the air conditioning controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B250717 | Front right circulation damper actuator is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioner internal and external circulation motor 3. Air conditioning controller |
Step 4:Connect the right air conditioning mode damper motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the right air conditioning mode damper motor is working? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning mode damper motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.16 Right Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B250817 | The actuator of the front right heating and cooling valve is faulty | The actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning cooling and heating motor 3. Air conditioning controller |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the inner and outer circulation motors of the right air conditioner and the air conditioner controller. Step 4:Connect the inner and outer circulation motors of the right air conditioner to a 12V power supply and observe if they are working? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the internal and external circulation motor of the right air conditioner. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.17 Right Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258413 | Front right air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor open circuit | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258411 | Short-circuited evaporation temperature sensor of front right air conditioner | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Connect the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor is working? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.18 Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| B54-10 B54-11 |

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Right air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor | 77℉ | 1.48KΩ - 1.6KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258513 | Open the air outlet temperature sensor on the front right air conditioner | The sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258511 | The outlet air temperature sensor of the front right air conditioner is short- circuited | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check if the resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor on the right side of the air conditioner is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the evaporator temperature sensor on the right side of the air conditioner. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.19 Right Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| B54-10 B54-11 |

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor | 77℉ | 9.9KΩ - 10.1KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258713 | Rear air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuit | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sleeper air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258711 | The evaporation temperature sensor of the rear left air conditioner is short- circuited | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check if the resistance of the right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.20 Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Sleeper air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor | 77℉ | 1.48KΩ - 1.6KΩ |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B258813 | Rear air conditioner air temperature sensor open circuit | Sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second | 1.Wiring harness 2. Sleeper air conditioner outlet air temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller |
| B258811 | The outlet air temperature sensor of the rear air conditioner is shorted | The sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sleeper air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check the resistance value of the evaporation temperature sensor of the sleeper air conditioner at different temperatures is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - Rear Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.21 Sleeper Air Conditioning Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| Sensor | Temperature | Resistance |
|---|---|---|
| Sleeper air conditioner air temperature sensor | 77℉ | 9.9KΩ - 10.1KΩ |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| Air conditioning CAN (H) and air conditioning CAN (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sleeper air conditioning outlet air temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check the resistance value of the sleeper air conditioner outlet air temperature sensor is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper air conditioning temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.1.5.22 Check The Integrity Of The Air Conditioning CAN Bus Network
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of the air conditioning CAN bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the voltage of the air conditioning CAN bus. No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| Air conditioning CAN (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| Air conditioning CAN (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| Air conditioning CAN (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| Air conditioning CAN (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the air conditioning CAN bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the air conditioning CAN bus. C. Measure the air conditioning CAN bus resistance between each module and the air conditioning compressor in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the air conditioning CAN bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the air conditioning CAN bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the air conditioning CAN bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the air conditioning CAN bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the air conditioning CAN bus in sequence, observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance returns to normal, and if it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
7.1.6 Dismantling and Installation
7.1.6.1 Replacement of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - front Left
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 6 Remove the wiper arm assy. 7 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 8 Remove the dab decorative cove. 9 Remove the steering wheel assy. 10 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 11 Remove the ip brim assy. 12 Remove the IVI screen. 13 Remove the CAR screen. 14 Remove the IPC screen. 15 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 16 Remove the camera monitor screen. 17 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 18 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 19 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 20 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 21 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 22 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 23 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 24 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 25 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 26 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 27 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 28 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 29 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 30 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 31 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 32 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 33 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt.
34 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 35 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 36 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 37 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 38 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 39 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 40 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 41 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 42 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 43 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 44 Remove the AR-HUD. 45 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 46 Remove the smart appliance box. 47 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 48 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 49 Remove the Tbox-gw. 50 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 51 Remove the EBS controller assy. 52 Remove the EBS bracket. 53 Remove the body domain control unit. 54 Remove the controller bracket assy. 55 Remove the cross car beam pole. 56 Remove the cross car beam assy. 57 Remove the side blowing air duct assy-lh. 58 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

59 Disengage 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 60 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.



61 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 62 Disconnect the A/C pipeline. 63 Remove 1 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 64 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. Installation Procedures


1 Move the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.
Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect the A/C pipeline. 4 Install 2 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.
Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
5 Install 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.
Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
6 Install 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 7 Connect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
8 Install the side blowing air duct assy-lh. 9 Install the cross car beam assy. 10 Install the cross car beam pole. 11 Install the controller bracket assy. 12 Install the body domain control unit. 13 Install the EBS bracket. 14 Install the EBS controller assy. 15 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 16 Install the Tbox-gw. 17 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 18 Install the cockpit domain controller. 19 Install the smart appliance box. 20 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 21 Install the AR-HUD. 22 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 23 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 24 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 25 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 26 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 27 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 28 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 29 Install the storage box assy-rh. 30 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 31 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 32 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 33 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 34 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 35 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 36 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 37 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 38 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 39 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 40 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 41 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 42 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 43 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh.
44 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 45 Install the base-rh display brkt. 46 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 47 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 48 Install the base-lh display brkt. 49 Install the camera monitor screen. 50 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 51 Install the IPC screen. 52 Install the CAR screen. 53 Install the IVI screen. 54 Install the ip brim assy. 55 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 56 Install the steering wheel assy. 57 Install the dab decorative cove. 58 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 59 Install the wiper arm assy. 60 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 61 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 62 Connect the battery negative cable. 63 Close the front flip cover plate. 64 Close the door.
7.1.6.2 Replacement of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - front Right
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 6 Remove the wiper arm assy. 7 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 8 Remove the dab decorative cove. 9 Remove the steering wheel assy. 10 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 11 Remove the ip brim assy. 12 Remove the IVI screen. 13 Remove the CAR screen. 14 Remove the IPC screen. 15 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt.
16 Remove the camera monitor screen. 17 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 18 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 19 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 20 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 21 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 22 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 23 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 24 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 25 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 26 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 27 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 28 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 29 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 30 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 31 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 32 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 33 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 34 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 35 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 36 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 37 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 38 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 39 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 40 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 41 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 42 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 43 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 44 Remove the AR-HUD. 45 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 46 Remove the smart appliance box. 47 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 48 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 49 Remove the Tbox-gw. 50 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 51 Remove the EBS controller assy.
52 Remove the EBS bracket. 53 Remove the body domain control unit. 54 Remove the controller bracket assy. 55 Remove the cross car beam pole. 56 Remove the cross car beam assy. 57 Remove the blowing air duct assy-rh. 58 Remove the storage box bracket assy. 59 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.


60 Disengage 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 61 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 62 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 63 Disconnect the A/C pipeline.



64 Remove 1 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 65 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. Installation Procedures 1 Move the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.
Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect the A/C pipeline. 4 Install 3 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.
Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
5 Install 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.
Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
6 Connect 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.
7 Connect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
8 Install the storage box bracket assy. 9 Install the blowing air duct assy-rh. 10 Install the cross car beam assy. 11 Install the cross car beam pole. 12 Install the controller bracket assy. 13 Install the body domain control unit. 14 Install the EBS bracket. 15 Install the EBS controller assy. 16 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 17 Install the Tbox-gw. 18 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 19 Install the cockpit domain controller.
20 Install the smart appliance box. 21 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 22 Install the AR-HUD. 23 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 24 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 25 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 26 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 27 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 28 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 29 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 30 Install the storage box assy-rh. 31 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 32 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 34 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 35 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 36 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 37 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 38 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 39 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 40 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 41 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 42 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 43 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 44 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 45 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 46 Install the base-rh display brkt. 47 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 48 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 49 Install the base-lh display brkt. 50 Install the camera monitor screen. 51 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 52 Install the IPC screen. 53 Install the CAR screen. 54 Install the IVI screen. 55 Install the ip brim assy. 56 Install the cover-combination switch-lor.
57 Install the steering wheel assy. 58 Install the dab decorative cove. 59 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 60 Install the wiper arm assy. 61 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 62 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 63 Connect the battery negative cable. 64 Close the front flip cover plate. 65 Close the door.
7.1.6.3 Replacement of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - Rear
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 6 Remove the rear A/C lower air duct. 7 Remove the middle drawer assembly. 8 Remove the fire extinguisher. 9 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the front USB interface. 11 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 13 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 17 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 18 Remove the 120V receptacle. 19 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 20 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). 21 Remove the toolbox trim panel assembly.
22 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 23 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 24 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.



25 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 26 Pull out the harness, and disconnect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.



27 After flipping the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear, remove 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 28 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. Installation Procedures 1 Move the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.
Torque:(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install 4 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.
Torque:(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
5 Install 2 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
6 Install 1 fixing clip of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 7 Connect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
8 Install the toolbox trim panel assembly. 9 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 10 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 11 Install the 120V receptacle. 12 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the left switch panel assembly. 18 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 19 Install the front USB interface.
20 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 21 Install the fire extinguisher. 22 Install the middle drawer assembly. 23 Install the rear A/C lower air duct. 24 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 25 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 26 Connect the battery negative cable. 27 Close the front flip cover plate. 28 Close the door.
7.1.6.4 Replacement of A/C Compressor Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the electric oil pump.
14 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the A/C compressor assembly. 15 Remove 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the A/C compressor assembly, and detach the ground harness. 16 Remove 2 fixing bolts to disconnect the A/C pipeline from the A/C compressor.



17 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the A/C compressor assembly. 18 Remove the A/C compressor assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the A/C compressor assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the A/C compressor assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the A/C compressor assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the A/C compressor assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs

3 Connect the A/C pipeline to the A/C compressor, and install 2 fixing bolts.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs
4 Connect the ground harness, and install 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the A/C compressor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect 2 harness connectors of the A/C compressor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the electric oil pump. 7 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 8 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 9 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 10 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 11 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left front wheel housing body. 13 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 14 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 15 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.
7.1.6.5 Replacement of Exterior Temperature Sensor
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 5 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly.
6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the exterior temperature sensor. 7 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the exterior temperature sensor. 8 Remove the exterior temperature sensor. Installation Procedures


1 Move the exterior temperature sensor to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing clip of the exterior temperature sensor. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the exterior temperature sensor.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 5 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door
7.1.6.6 Replacement of Interior Temperature Sensor (rear)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the interior temperature sensor (rear). 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the interior temperature sensor (rear). 6 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). Installation Procedures


1 Move the interior temperature sensor (rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the interior temperature sensor (rear). 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the interior temperature sensor (rear).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.1.6.7 Replacement of Front A/C Filter Element
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly.
5 Press 2 clips of the cover plate. 6 Remove the cover plate. 7 Pull out the front A/C filter element. Installation Procedures


1 Install the front A/C filter element. 2 Install the cover plate. 3 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 4 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.1.6.8 Replacement of Rear A/C Filter Element
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Lift up the sleeper mat assembly.
3 Press 2 clips of the cover plate. 4 Remove the cover plate. 5 Pull out the rear A/C filter element. Installation Procedures


1 Install the rear A/C filter element. 2 Install the cover plate.

3 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 4 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the power domain controller bracket to the battery pressure plate 2 | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the power domain controller bracket to the battery pressure plate 3 | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the bracket of the power domain controller to the power domain controller assembly | M6 | (11 +/- 1.5) ft lbs |
7.2 Vehicle Control Unit (VCU) Device
7.2.1 Specifications
7.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.2.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.2.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Vehicle Domain Controller 3. Vehicle Controller Assy Bracket 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt
7.2.3 System Schematic Diagram
7.2.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
Vehicle domain controller(VDC)
EVCC
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| P100000 | Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvA | Refer to VDC Power Fault |
| P100100 | Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvB | |
| P100200 | Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvA | |
| P100300 | Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvB | |
| P100402 | DCDC1 output undervoltage | |
| P100502 | DCDC1 output overvoltage | |
| P103D10 | Drive thermal management, SJB power supply failure | |
| P103E10 | Battery thermal management, SJB power supply failure | |
| U019887 | VCAN bus-off | Refer to VDC Communication Fault |
| U014087 | Lost Communication with BDCU | |
| U01A087 | Lost Communication with SJB_UP | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication with DCM | |
| U01A187 | Lost Communication with SJB_UN | |
| U015687 | missing CDCU |
7.2.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.2.4.1 Diagnosis Description
Before diagnosing the fault of the vehicle controller device, understand and be familiar with the working principle of the vehicle controller device, and then start system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs. More importantly, this Helps determine the situation described by the customer is normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the vehicle controller device should start with Routine Inspection to guide the maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of
faulty parts. 7.2.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the vehicle controller device system, and ensure that these devices cannot affect the operation of the vehicle controller device system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 7.2.4.3 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 7.2.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
VDC
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| U017487 | Lost Communication with CMU01 | |
| U017587 | Lost Communication with CMU02 | |
| U017687 | Lost Communication with CMU03 | |
| U017787 | Lost Communication with CMU04 | |
| U017887 | Lost Communication with CMU05 | |
| U017987 | Lost Communication with CMU06 | |
| U017A87 | Lost Communication with PDU1 | |
| U017B87 | Lost Communication with PDU2 | |
| U017C87 | Lost Communication with PDU3 | |
| U012A87 | Lost Communication with MCU1 | |
| U012B87 | Lost Communication with MCU2 | |
| U012C87 | Lost Communication with MCU3 | |
| U012D87 | Lost Communication with MCU4 | |
| U010187 | TCU1 Communication failure | |
| U010287 | TCU2 Communication failure | |
| U01B387 | GSM Communication failure | |
| U012187 | missing EBS | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication with ECAS | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication with EPB | |
| U008C88 | PCAN2_Busoff | |
| U008D88 | PCAN3_Busoff | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4_Busoff | |
| U008B88 | ChargrCAN_Busoff | |
| U007988 | CANFD7_Busoff | |
| U008088 | CANFD10_Busoff | |
| P101010 | HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Refer to VDC Internal Fault |
| P101110 | HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | |
| P101210 | HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101310 | HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | |
| P101410 | LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101510 | LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | |
| P101610 | LTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101710 | LTP_P Sensor 2 short circuit to ground | |
| P101810 | HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101910 | HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to ground |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| P101A10 | HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101B10 | HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | |
| P101C10 | LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101D10 | LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | |
| P101E10 | LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | |
| P101F10 | LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | |
| P102C10 | AccPed 1, short circuit the power supply | Refer to Accelerator Pedal Fault |
| P102D10 | AccPed 2, short circuit the power supply | |
| P102E10 | AccPed 1, short circuit to ground | |
| P102F10 | AccPed 2, short circuit to ground | |
| P103010 | Associated fault of two accelerator pedals | |
| P103110 | Both accelerator pedals are wrong at the same time | |
| P103910 | The motor liquid level sensor is short of liquid | Refer to Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault |
| P103A10 | The battery liquid level sensor is short of liquid | Refer to Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault |
| P103310 | Motor fan Fault | Refer to Motor Fan Fault |
| P103610 | Motor and water pump Fault | Refer to Motor And Water Pump Fault |
| P103410 | Battery fan 1 failure | Refer to Left Battery Fan Fault |
| P103510 | Battery fan 2 failure | Refer to Right Battery Fan Fault |
| P103710 | Battery Pump 1 Fault | Refer to Left Battery Water Pump Fault |
| P103810 | Battery Pump 2 Faulte | Refer to Right Battery Water Pump Fault |
| P108130 | CMU1 Thermal runaway fault | Refer to Battery Thermal Runaway Fault |
| P108230 | CMU2 Thermal runaway fault | |
| P108330 | CMU3 Thermal runaway fault | |
| P108430 | CMU4 Thermal runaway fault | |
| P108530 | CMU5 Thermal runaway fault | |
| P108630 | CMU6 Thermal runaway fault | |
| P108730 | Hard wire detection thermal runaway fault | |
| P102010 | FCT Sensor 1, Open-circuit fault | Refer to MCS Fast Charging Port Temperature Detection Signal Fault |
| P102110 | FCT Sensor 1, Short-circuit fault | |
| P102210 | FCT Sensor 2, Open-circuit fault | |
| P102310 | FCT Sensor 2, Short-circuit fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| P108830 | Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvA | |
| P108930 | Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvA | |
| P108C30 | Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvB | |
| P108D30 | Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvB | |
| P102810 | ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Refer to Left Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault |
| P102910 | ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | |
| P102A10 | ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | Refer to Right Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault |
| P102B10 | ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | |
| P10C040 | NormRdyFltChkFailr_St | Refer to VDC Reports MCU Internal Fault |
| P10E563 | MCU failure | |
| P104953 | MCU1 Communication Fault | Refer to VDC Reports MCU Communication Fault |
| P104A53 | MCU2 Communication Fault | |
| P104B53 | MCU3 Communication Fault | |
| P104C53 | MCU4 Communication Fault | |
| P10A530 | MCU1 High voltage interlock fault | Refer to VDC Reports MCU High Voltage Interlock Fault |
| P10A630 | MCU2 High voltage interlock fault | |
| P10A730 | MCU3 High voltage interlock fault | |
| P10A830 | MCU4 High voltage interlock fault | |
| P107430 | CMU1 total voltage is too high | Refer to VDC Reports Internal Fault In CMU |
| P107530 | CMU1 total voltage is too low | |
| P107630 | CMU2 total voltage is too high | |
| P107730 | CMU2 total voltage is too low | |
| P107830 | CMU3 total voltage is too high | |
| P107930 | CMU3 total voltage is too low | |
| P107A30 | CMU4 total voltage is too high | |
| P107B30 | CMU4 total voltage is too low | |
| P107C30 | CMU5 total voltage is too high | |
| P107D30 | CMU5 total voltage is too low | |
| P107E30 | CMU6 total voltage is too high | |
| P107F30 | CMU6 total voltage is too low | |
| P108030 | The voltage difference between packages is too high |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| P10E061 | Battery failure | |
| P109030 | CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvB | Refer to VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Circuit Fault |
| P109130 | CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvA | |
| P109230 | CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvB | |
| P109330 | CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvA | |
| P109430 | CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvB | |
| P109530 | CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvA | |
| P109630 | CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvB | |
| P109730 | CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvA | |
| P109830 | CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvB | |
| P109930 | CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvA | |
| P109A30 | CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvB | |
| P109B30 | CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvA | |
| P109F30 | CMU1 High Voltage Interlock Fault | Refer to VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Interlock Fault |
| P10A030 | CMU2 High Voltage Interlock Fault | |
| P10A130 | CMU3 High Voltage Interlock Fault | |
| P10A230 | CMU4 High Voltage Interlock Fault | |
| P10A330 | CMU5 High Voltage Interlock Fault | |
| P10A430 | CMU6 High Voltage Interlock Fault | |
| P105230 | CMU1 Cell overtemp | Refer to VDC Reports Abnormal CMU Temperature |
| P105330 | CMU1 Cell undertemp | |
| P105630 | CMU2 Cell overtemp | |
| P105730 | CMU2 Cell undertemp | |
| P105A30 | CMU3 Cell overtemp | |
| P105B30 | CMU3 Cell undertemp | |
| P105E30 | CMU4 Cell overtemp | |
| P105F30 | CMU4 Cell undertemp | |
| P106230 | CMU5 Cell overtemp | |
| P106330 | CMU5 Cell undertemp | |
| P106630 | CMU6 Cell overtemp | |
| P106730 | CMU6 Cell undertemp | |
| P106E30 | CMU1 Cell temp difference is large | |
| P106F30 | CMU2 Cell temp difference is large | |
| P107030 | CMU3 Cell temp difference is large | |
| P107130 | CMU4 Cell temp difference is large | |
| P107230 | CMU5 Cell temp difference is large | |
| P107330 | CMU6 Cell temp difference is large |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| P10AA30 | The temperature difference between packages is too high | |
| P105030 | CMU1 Cell overvoltage | Refer to VDC Reports Abnormal Voltage Of CMU Unit |
| P105130 | CMU1 Cell undervoltage | |
| P105430 | CMU2 Cell overvoltage | |
| P105530 | CMU2 Cell undervoltage | |
| P105830 | CMU3 Cell overvoltage | |
| P105930 | CMU3 Cell undervoltage | |
| P105C30 | CMU4 Cell overvoltage | |
| P105D30 | CMU4 Cell undervoltage | |
| P106030 | CMU5 Cell overvoltage | |
| P106130 | CMU5 Cell undervoltage | |
| P106430 | CMU6 Cell overvoltage | |
| P106530 | CMU6 Cell undervoltage | |
| P106830 | CMU1 Cell volt difference is large | |
| P106930 | CMU2 Cell volt difference is large | |
| P106A30 | CMU3 Cell volt difference is large | |
| P106B30 | CMU4 Cell volt difference is large | |
| P106C30 | CMU5 Cell volt difference is large | |
| P106D30 | CMU6 Cell volt difference is large | |
| P104051 | CMU1 CommunicationFault | Refer to VDC Reports CMU Communication Fault |
| P104151 | CMU2 Communication Fault | |
| P104251 | CMU3 Communication Fault | |
| P104351 | CMU4 Communication Fault | |
| P104451 | CMU5 Communication Fault | |
| P104551 | CMU6 Communication Fault | |
| P10AD40 | TCU1 ratio anomaly | Refer to VDC Reports TCU Internal Fault |
| P10AE40 | TCU2 ratio anomaly | |
| P10E663 | TCU failure | |
| P104D53 | TCU1 Communication failure | Refer to VDC Reports TCU Communication Fault |
| P104E53 | TCU2 Communication failure | |
| P10E162 | PDU_PDU failure | Refer to VDC Reports Internal Fault Of PDU |
| P10E262 | PDU_DCAC failure | |
| P10E362 | PDU_DCDC failure | |
| P104652 | PDU_PDU Communication failure | Refer to VDC Reports PDU Communication Fault |
| P104752 | PDU_DCAC Communication failure | |
| P104852 | PDU_DCDC Communication failure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Troubleshooting |
|---|---|---|
| P10C240 | NormRdy_Gear_ChkFailr_St | Refer to VDC Reports GSM Internal Fault |
| P10E763 | GSM failure | |
| P104F53 | GSM Communication failure | Refer to VDC Reports GSM Communication Fault |
| U120587 | LIN flt status | Refer to VDC LIN Communication Fault |
| P10AF40 | NormupBnRlyChkFailr_St | Refer to CMU Wake-up Signal Fault |
| P10BA40 | ChUpBnRlyChkFailr_St | |
| P10B640 | NormupPduadhnChkFailr_St | Refer to PDU Wake-up Signal Fault |
| P10B740 | NormupAux_Drv_RlyChkFailr_St | |
| P10B840 | NormupDC_OutVChkFailr_St | |
| P10B940 | NormupMain_Drv_RlyChkFailr_St | |
| P10BB40 | ChUpPduadhnChkFailr_St | |
| P10BC40 | ChUpPDUIsnOnChkFailr_St | |
| P10BD40 | ChUpChpRlyChkFailr_St | |
| P10BE40 | ChUpAux_Drv_RlyChkFailr_St | |
| P10BF40 | ChUpDC_OutVChkFailr_St | |
| P100602 | DCDC2 output undervoltage | Refer to DCDC2 Voltage Output Fault |
| P100702 | DCDC2 output overvoltage | |
| P103B10 | Left grid motor failure | Refer to Active Grille Shutter Fault |
| P103C10 | Right grid motor failure | |
| P100852 | WPTC1 Communication failure | Refer to Left Battery Water Heater Fault |
| P100952 | WPTC2 Communication failure | Refer to Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery |
| P100A52 | BLR1 Communication failure | Refer to Left Battery Compressor Fault |
| P100B52 | BLR2 Communication failure | Refer to Battery Right Compressor Fault |
| P109C30 | Insulation fault LvC | Refer to Insulation Fault |
| P109D30 | Insulation fault LvB | |
| P109E30 | Insulation fault LvA | |
| P10AC40 | Brake pressure rise monitoring during air pump operation | Refer to Air Compressor Fault |
| P10C140 | NormRdy_AirPChkFailr_St | |
| P10C340 | NormRdy_Escl_ChkFailr_St | Refer to ESCL Fault |
| P10E863 | IBS failure | Refer to IBS Fault |
| P10E462 | thermal management system failure | Refer to Thermal Management System Fault |
| Diagnostic Tool Display Items | Test Parts | Span Of Control | Diagnosis Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Drive water pump control | Motor water pump | Turn on/off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the motor and water pump to turn on/off |
| Drive fan control | Motor fan | Turn on/off | Control the motor fan to turn on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Battery water pump 1 control | Battery water pump 1 | Turn on/off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the battery water pump 1 to turn on/off |
| Battery water pump 2 control | Battery water pump 2 | Turn on/off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the battery water pump 2 to turn on/off |
| Battery fan 1 control | Battery fan 1 | Turn on/off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic tool, control the battery fan 1 to turn on/off |
| Battery fan 2 control | Battery fan 2 | Turn on/off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic tool, control the battery fan 2 to turn on/off |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100000 | Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvA | Power on, The low-voltage power supply is less than or equal to 18V for 10s | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.VDC |
7.2.4.5 Action Test List
By reading the "action test" on the fault diagnosis instrument, the working status of the relays and actuators controlled by VDC can be checked without disassembling any parts. Before performing relevant fault diagnosis on the control system, performing an action test is a prerequisite for troubleshooting, which can shorten the troubleshooting time.
Note
The data under normal conditions are listed in the table below for reference only. Never rely solely on these reference values to determine whether a part has failed. Usually, a normal working vehicle can be compared with the diagnosed vehicle in the same state to determine whether the diagnosed vehicle data is normal in the current state.
a.Perform vehicle power-on operation. b.Connect the diagnostic tool. c.Select "VDC"/"Action Test". d.Refer to the table below for proactive testing.
7.2.4.6 VDC Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100100 | Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvB | Power on, The low-voltage power supply is less than or equal to 10V for 2s | |
| P100200 | Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvA | Power on, The low-voltage power supply is greater than or equal to 32V for 10s | |
| P100300 | Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvB | Power on, The low-voltage power supply is greater than or equal to 35V for 2s | |
| P100402 | DCDC1 output undervoltage | HV Satus, The DCDC1 function takes effect, DCDC1 output voltage is less than or equal to 23V for 10s | |
| P100502 | DCDC1 output overvoltage | HV Satus, The DCDC1 function takes effect, DCDC1 output voltage is greater than or equal to 32V for 10s | |
| P103D10 | Drive thermal management, SJB power supply failure | Power on, The VDC is enabled, but SJB does not provide power supply for 5s | |
| P103E10 | Battery thermal management, SJB power supply failure | Power on, The VDC is enabled, but SJB does not provide power supply and the maximum temperature of the battery is greater than or equal to 97 degrees ferenhieght for 5s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-BOX | KL15 valid, 0x18FF18FBx lost, last for 2s | 1.Wiring harness 2.VDC |
| U014087 | Lost communication with BDCU | KL15 valid, 0x18FF1921x lost, last for 1s | |
| U01A087 | Lost Communication With SJB_UP | KL15 valid, 0x18FF3354x lost, last for 1s | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication With DCM | KL15 valid, 0x18FDA54Fx lost, last for 1s | |
| U01A187 | Lost Communication With SJB_UN | KL15 valid, 0x18FF2359x lost, last for 1s | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | KL15 valid, 0x18FF1241x lost, last for 2s | |
| U017487 | Lost Communication With CMU01 | KL15 valid, 0x18082768x lost, last for 1s | |
| U017587 | Lost Communication With CMU02 | KL15 valid, 0x18082769x lost, last for 1s | |
| U017687 | Lost Communication With CMU03 | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Ax lost, last for 1s | |
| U017787 | Lost Communication With CMU04 | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Ax lost, last for 1s | |
| U017887 | Lost Communication With CMU05 | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Cx lost, last for 1s | |
| U017987 | Lost Communication With CMU06 | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Dx lost, last for 1s | |
| U017A87 | Lost Communication With PDU1 | KL15 valid, 0x18012778x lost, last for 1s | |
| U017B87 | Lost Communication With PDU2 | KL15 valid, 0x1804276Ex lost, last for 1s | |
| U017C87 | Lost Communication With PDU3 | KL15 valid, 0x1801276Fx lost, last for 1s |
Step 3:Check there are other module power fault codes besides VDC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the VDC power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.7 VDC Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U012A87 | Lost Communication With MCU1 | KL15 valid, 0x18012774x lost, last for 0.5s | |
| U012B87 | Lost Communication With MCU2 | KL15 valid, 0x18012775x lost, last for 0.5s | |
| U012C87 | Lost Communication With MCU3 | KL15 valid, 0x18012776x lost, last for 0.5s | |
| U012D87 | Lost Communication With MCU4 | KL15 valid, 0x18012777x lost, last for 0.5s | |
| U010187 | TCU1 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012703x lost, last for 0.5s > | |
| U010287 | TCU2 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012703x lost, last for 0.5s | |
| U01B387 | GSM Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x0C010305x lost, last for 0.5s | |
| U012187 | Lost Communication With EBS | KL15 valid, 0x18F0010Bx lost, last for 1s | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication With ECAS | KL15 valid, 0x18FECA2Fx lost, last for 5s | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication With EPB | KL15 valid, 0x18FE1250x lost, last for 1s | |
| U008C88 | PCAN2_Busoff | Enter busoff | |
| U008D88 | PCAN3_Busoff | Enter busoff | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4_Busoff | Enter busoff | |
| U008B88 | ChargrCAN_Busoff | Enter busoff | |
| U007988 | CANFD7_Busoff | Enter busoff | |
| U008088 | CANFD10_Busoff | Enter busoff |
2.Circuit Diagram



3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN1 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P101010 | HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s | 1.VDC |
| P101110 | HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s | |
| P101210 | HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s) | |
| P101310 | HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s | |
| P101410 | LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s) | |
| P101510 | LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s | |
| P101610 | LTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s | |
| P101710 | LTP_P Sensor 2 short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s | |
| P101810 | HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s | |
| P101910 | HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s | |
| P101A10 | HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s | |
| P101B10 | HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s |
Step 4:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.8 VDC Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P101C10 | LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s | |
| P101D10 | LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s | |
| P101E10 | LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s | |
| P101F10 | LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P102C10 | AccPed 1, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 3250 for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2.Accelerator pedal 3.VDC |
| P102D10 | AccPed 2, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 1650 for 10s | |
| P102E10 | AccPed 1, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 550 for 10s | |
| P102F10 | AccPed 2, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 250 for 10s | |
| P103010 | Associated fault of two accelerator pedals | Power on, The ratio of accelerator pedal opening is not in the range of 1.5 to 2.5, Less than or equal to 1.4 or greater than or equal to 2.6 lasts for 10s | |
| P103110 | Both accelerator pedals are wrong at the same time | Power on, The AD1 value is greater than or equal to 3250 and the AD2 value is greater than or equal to 1650 for 10s, Or the AD1 value is less than or equal to 550 and the AD2 value is less than or equal to 250 for 10s |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 4:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.9 Accelerator Pedal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the accelerator pedal and VDC.
| Sensor | Accelerator Pedal Angle | Signal Output Voltage |
|---|---|---|
| Accelerator pedal sensor 1 | 0° | 0.375 ± 0.05V |
| Accelerator pedal sensor 2 | 0° | 0.375 ± 0.05V |
| Accelerator pedal sensor 1 | 13.1° | 3.84 ± 0.1V |
| Accelerator pedal sensor 2 | 13.1° | 1.92 ± 0.1V |
Step 4:Check the resistance of the accelerator pedal at different openings is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the accelerator pedal. Refer to Replacement Of Accelerator Pedal Assembly Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.10 Left High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left high pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.
Step 3:Check and replace the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly
7.2.4.11 Right High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right high pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103910 | The motor liquid level sensor is short of liquid | Power on, The hard cable fault signal lasts for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Motor cooling liquid level sensor 3.VDC |
Step 3:Replace the right thermal management unit (right high pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Right) Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly
7.2.4.12 Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the motor coolant level sensor and VDC.
| Liquid Level Status | Switch Status |
|---|---|
| Liquid level | The motor coolant level sensor has a signal |
| No liquid level | Motor coolant level sensor has no signal |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103A10 | The battery liquid level sensor is short of liquid | Power on, The hard cable fault signal lasts for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2.Battery coolant level sensor 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the motor coolant level sensor ground harness. Step 5:Check the motor coolant level sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the motor coolant level sensor. Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.13 Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the battery coolant level sensor and VDC.
| Liquid Level Status | Switch Status |
|---|---|
| Liquid level | Battery coolant level sensor has signal |
| No liquid level | Battery coolant level sensor no signal |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103310 | Motor fan failure | Power on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds | 1.Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the battery coolant level sensor grounding harness. Step 5:Check the battery coolant level sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the Battery coolant level sensor. Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.14 Motor Fan Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the motor fan power supply and grounding harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103610 | Motor pump failure | Power on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds | 1.Wiring harness 2.Motor pump failure 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the motor fan and VDC. Step 5:Enter the diagnostic instrument interface VDC-action test and perform the "motor fan, open/close" action test. Check the motor fan operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the motor fan. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.15 Motor And Water Pump Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the motor and water pump.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103410 | Battery fan 1 failure | Power on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) 3. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) 4.VDC |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the motor water pump and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "motor water pump, open/close" action test. Check the motor water pump operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic tool. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the motor water pump. Refer to Replacement Of Electronic Water Pump Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.16 Left Battery Fan Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103510 | Battery fan 2 failure | Power on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1) 3. Right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2) 4.VDC |
Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1), left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1), left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Battery fan 1, open/close" action test. Check the left battery fan operates according to the diagnostic tool's instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) and the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.17 Right Battery Fan Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103710 | Battery Pump 1 Fault | Power on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) 3.VDC |
Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1), right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1), the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Battery fan 2, open/close" action test. Check the right battery fan operates according to the diagnostic tool's instructions. – Yes: Nex step step step step step step stept step step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1) and right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.18 Left Battery Water Pump Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103810 | Battery pump 2 failure | Power on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the diagnostic instrument interface VDC-action test and perform the "battery water pump 1, open/close" action test. Check the left battery water pump operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.19 Right Battery Water Pump Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P108130 | CMU1 Thermal runaway fault | CMU1 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear | 1.Battery pack 2. Wiring harness 3.VDC |
| P108230 | CMU2 Thermal runaway fault | CMU2 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear | |
| P108330 | CMU3 Thermal runaway fault | CMU4 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear | |
| P108430 | CMU4 Thermal runaway fault | CMU4 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear | |
| P108530 | CMU5 Thermal runaway fault | CMU5 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear | |
| P108630 | CMU6 Thermal runaway fault | CMU6 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear | |
| P108730 | Hard wire detection thermal runaway fault | Hard wire thermal runaway is valid; Hard wire thermal runaway is invalid, automatically cleared |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "battery water pump 2, open/close" action test. Check the right battery water pump operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump). Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.20 Battery Thermal Runaway Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P102010 | FCT Sensor 1, Open- circuit fault | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to X for 10s X1=4300, X2=4300, X3=800 | 1. MCS fast charging port 2. Wiring harness 3.VDC |
| P102110 | FCT Sensor 1, Short- circuit fault | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 110 for 10s M1=20, M2=20, M3=40 | |
| P102210 | FCT Sensor 2, Open- circuit fault | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to X for 10s PwrOn X1=4300, X2=4300, X3=800 | |
| P102310 | FCT Sensor 2, Short- circuit fault | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 110 for 10s PwrOn M1=20, M2=20, M3=40 | |
| P108830 | Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvA | TA_NTC1≥100℃(2s),≤95℃clear(2s) | |
| P108930 | Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvA | TA_NTC2≥100℃(2s),≤95℃clear(2s) | |
| P108C30 | Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvB | TA_NTC1≥120℃(1s),Power-off clear | |
| P108D30 | Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvB | TA_NTC1≥120℃(1s),Power-off clear |
Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system fault codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the battery pack thermal runaway signal harness. Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.21 MCS Fast Charging Port Temperature Detection Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while.
Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Check the temperature control signal harness between the MCS fast charging port and VDC. Step 6:Replace the MCS fast charging port. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.22 Brake Pedal Switch Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the brake pedal switch power supply and grounding harness. Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the brake pedal switch and VDC.
| Pedal status | Switch status |
|---|---|
| Depress the brake pedal | Brake pedal switch on |
| Release the brake pedal | Brake pedal switch disconnected |
Step 4:Check the brake pedal switch is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the brake pedal switch. Refer to Replacement Of Brake Pedal Assembly Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly
7.2.4.23 Left Low Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left low pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.
Step 3:Replace the left thermal management unit (left low pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly
7.2.4.24 Right Low Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right low pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P102810 | ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 3900 for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left exhaust temperature sensor) 3.VDC |
| P102910 | ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 80 for 10s |
Step 3:Replace the right thermal management unit (right low pressure & temperature sensor). Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly
7.2.4.25 Left Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left exhaust temperature sensor) and VDC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P102A10 | ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply | Power on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 3900 for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right exhaust temperature sensor) 3.VDC |
| P102B10 | ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit to ground | Power on, The AD value is less than or equal to 80 for 10s |
Step 4:Replace the left thermal management unit (left exhaust temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.26 Right Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right exhaust temperature sensor) and VDC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10C040 | NormRdyFltChkFailr_ St | KKL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, and the driving fault is prohibited | 1.VDC 2. Electric drive module |
| P10E563 | MCU failure | The MCU reports fault level and fault code |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P104953 | MCU1 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012774x lost, last for 5s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive module 3.VDC |
| P104A53 | MCU2 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012775x lost, last for 5s | |
| P104B53 | MCU3 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012776x lost, last for 5s | |
| P104C53 | MCU4 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012777x lost, last for 5s |
Step 4:Replace the right thermal management unit (right exhaust temperature sensor). Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.27 VDC Reports MCU Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there are MCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting MCU related faults. – No: Nex step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the electric drive module. Step 5:Replace the electric drive module. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.28 VDC Reports MCU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10A530 | MCU1 High voltage interlock fault | MCU1 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Electric drive module 4.VDC |
| P10A630 | MCU2 High voltage interlock fault | MCU2 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared | |
| P10A730 | MCU3 High voltage interlock fault | MCU3 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared | |
| P10A830 | MCU4 High voltage interlock fault | MCU4 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared |
Step 3:Check there are MCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting MCU related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the electric drive module. Step 6:Replace the electric drive module. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.29 VDC Reports MCU High Voltage Interlock Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there are MCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting MCU related faults. – No: Nex step Step 4:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Check the high-voltage interlock wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the electric drive module. Step 7:Replace the electric drive module. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.30 VDC Reports Internal Fault In CMU
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P107430 | CMU1 total voltage is too high | NCM: VPack1≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack1≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP: VPack1≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s) | 1.VDC 2.Battery pack |
| P107530 | CMU1 total voltage is too low | NCM: VPack1≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack1≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05 | |
| P107630 | CMU2 total voltage is too high | NCM: VPack2≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack2≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack2≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s) | |
| P107730 | CMU2 total voltage is too low | NCM: VPack2≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack2≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05 | |
| P107830 | CMU3 total voltage is too high | NCM: VPack3≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack3≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack3≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s) |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P107930 | CMU3 total voltage is too low | NCM: VPack3≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack3≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05 | |
| P107A30 | CMU4 total voltage is too high | NCM: VPack4≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack4≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack4≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s) | |
| P107B30 | CMU4 total voltage is too low | NCM: VPack4≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack4≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05 | |
| P107C30 | CMU5 total voltage is too high | NCM: VPack5≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack5≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack5≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s) | |
| P107D30 | CMU5 total voltage is too low | NCM: VPack5≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack5≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05 |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P107E30 | CMU6 total voltage is too high | NCM: VPack6≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack6≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack6≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s) | |
| P107F30 | CMU6 total voltage is too low | NCM: VPack5≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack5≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05 | |
| P108030 | The voltage difference between packages is too high | The voltage difference value between packages is greater than or equal to 10V for 15s; Power-off clear | |
| P10E061 | Battery failure | The battery reports fault level and fault code |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 5:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.31 VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P109030 | CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvB | CMU1 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2.Battery pack 3.VDC |
| P109130 | CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvA | CMU1 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU1 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared | |
| P109230 | CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvB | CMU2 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear | |
| P109330 | CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvA | CMU2 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU2 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) | |
| P109430 | CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvB | CMU3 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear | |
| P109530 | CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvA | CMU3 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU3 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared | |
| P109630 | CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvB | CMU4 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear | |
| P109730 | CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvA | CMU4 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU4 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared | |
| P109830 | CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvB | CMU5 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear | |
| P109930 | CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvA | CMU5 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU5 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared | |
| P109A30 | CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvB | CMU6 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear | |
| P109B30 | CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvA | CMU6 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU6 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check whether there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the battery pack high-voltage wiring harness. Step 5:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the battery pack. Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P109F30 | CMU1 High voltage interlock fault | CMU1 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear | 1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3.Battery pack 4.VDC |
| P10A030 | CMU2 High voltage interlock fault | CMU2 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear | |
| P10A130 | CMU3 High voltage interlock fault | CMU3 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear | |
| P10A230 | CMU4 High voltage interlock fault | CMU4 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear | |
| P10A330 | CMU5 High voltage interlock fault | CMU5 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear | |
| P10A430 | CMU6 High voltage interlock fault | CMU6 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear |
Step 7:Replace the battery pack. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.32 VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Interlock Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check whether there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Check the high-voltage interlock wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 7:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.33 VDC Reports Abnormal CMU Temperature
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P105230 | CMU1 Cell overtemp | TMaxCell1≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s) | 1.Battery pack 2.VDC |
| P105330 | CMU1 Cell undertemp | TMinCell1≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s) | |
| P105630 | CMU2 Cell overtemp | TMaxCell2≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s) | |
| P105730 | CMU2 Cell undertemp | TMinCell2≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s) | |
| P105A30 | CMU3 Cell overtemp | TMaxCell3≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s) | |
| P105B30 | CMU3 Cell undertemp | TMinCell3≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s) | |
| P105E30 | CMU4 Cell overtemp | TMaxCell4≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s) | |
| P105F30 | CMU4 Cell undertemp | TMinCell4≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s) | |
| P106230 | CMU5 Cell overtemp | TMaxCell5≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s) | |
| P106330 | CMU5 Cell undertemp | TMinCell5≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s) | |
| P106630 | CMU6 Cell overtemp | TMaxCell6≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s) | |
| P106730 | CMU6 Cell undertemp | TMinCell6≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s) | |
| P106E30 | CMU1 Cell temp difference is large | TDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s) | |
| P106F30 | CMU2 Cell temp difference is large | TDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s) | |
| P107030 | CMU3 Cell temp difference is large | TDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s) | |
| P107130 | CMU4 Cell temp difference is large | TDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s) | |
| P107230 | CMU5 Cell temp difference is large | TDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s) | |
| P107330 | CMU6 Cell temp difference is large | TDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s) | |
| P10AA30 | The temperature difference between packages is too high | The temperature difference value between packages is greater than or equal to 59℉for 15s, less than or equal to 53.6℉for 5s,automatically cleared |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check if there are any fault codes related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 5:Check if the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P105030 | CMU1 Cell overvoltage | NCM:VMaxCell1≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell1≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s) | 1.Battery pack 2.VDC |
| P105130 | CMU1 Cell undervoltage | VMinCell1≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6 | |
| P105430 | CMU2 Cell overvoltage | NCM:VMaxCell2≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell2≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s) | |
| P105530 | CMU2 Cell undervoltage | VMinCell2≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6 | |
| P105830 | CMU3 Cell overvoltage | NCM:VMaxCell3≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell3≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s) | |
| P105930 | CMU3 Cell undervoltage | VMinCell3≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6 | |
| P105C30 | CMU4 Cell overvoltage | NCM:VMaxCell4≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell4≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s) | |
| P105D30 | CMU4 Cell undervoltage | VMinCell4≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6 | |
| P106030 | CMU5 Cell overvoltage | NCM:VMaxCell5≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell5≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s) |
Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 7:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.34 VDC Reports Abnormal Voltage Of CMU Unit
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P106130 | CMU5 Cell undervoltage | VMinCell5≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6 | |
| P106430 | CMU6 Cell overvoltage | NCM:VMaxCell6≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP: VMaxCell6≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s) | |
| P106530 | CMU6 Cell undervoltage | VMinCell6≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6 | |
| P106830 | CMU1 Cell volt difference is large | VDiffCell1≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s) | |
| P106930 | CMU2 Cell volt difference is large | VDiffCell2≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s) | |
| P106A30 | CMU3 Cell volt difference is large | VDiffCell3≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s) | |
| P106B30 | CMU4 Cell volt difference is large | VDiffCell4≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s) | |
| P106C30 | CMU5 Cell volt difference is large | VDiffCell5≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s) | |
| P106D30 | CMU6 Cell volt difference is large | VDiffCell6≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s) |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check if there any fault codes related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 5:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P104051 | CMU1 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18082768x lost, last for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2.Battery pack 3.VDC |
| P104151 | CMU2 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18082769x lost, last for 10s | |
| P104251 | CMU3 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Ax lost, last for 10s | |
| P104351 | CMU4 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Bx lost, last for 10s | |
| P104451 | CMU5 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Cx lost, last for 10s | |
| P104551 | CMU6 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1808276Dx lost, last for 10s |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10AD40 | TCU1 ratio anomaly | In gear mode, the corresponding error between TCU1 output shaft speed and MCU1 speed is greater than 1000rpm(5s) | 1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface 2.VDC |
| P10AE40 | TCU2 ratio anomaly | In gear mode, the corresponding error between TCU2 output shaft speed and MCU4 speed is greater than 1000rpm(5s) | |
| P10E663 | TCU failure | The TCU reports fault level and fault code |
7.2.4.35 VDC Reports CMU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 6:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.36 VDC Reports TCU Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P104D53 | TCU1 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012703x lost, last for 5s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface 3.VDC |
| P104E53 | TCU2 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18042703x lost, last for 5s |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there is a TCU related fault code? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to TCU. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.37 VDC Reports TCU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there is a TCU related fault code? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to TCU. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.38 VDC Reports Internal Fault Of PDU
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10E162 | PDU_PDU failure | The PDU_PDU reports fault level and fault code | 1.Power distribution unit 2.VDC |
| P10E262 | PDU_DCAC failure | The PDU_DCAC reports fault level and fault code | |
| P10E362 | PDU_DCDC failure | The PDU_DCDC reports fault level and fault code |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P104652 | PDU_PDU Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18012778x lost, last for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.VDC |
| P104752 | PDU_DCAC Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1804276Ex lost, last for 10s | |
| P104852 | PDU_DCDC Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1801276Fx lost, last for 10s |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the power distribution unit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to the power distribution unit. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.39 VDC Reports PDU Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the power distribution unit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to the power distribution unit. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi in One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10C240 | NormRdy_Gear_ ChkFailr_St | KL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, The gear is not in N gear | 1.Shift switch 2.VDC |
| P10E763 | GSM failure | The GSM reports fault level and fault code |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P104F53 | GSM Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x010305x lost, last for 10s. | 1.Wiring harness 2.Shift switch 3.VDC |
7.2.4.40 VDC Reports GSM Internal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for shift switch related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to shift switches. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.41 VDC Reports GSM Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for shift switch related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to shift switches. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U120587 | LIN flt status | Enter flt status | 1.Wiring harness 2.VDC |
7.2.4.42 VDC LIN Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10AF40 | NormupBnRlyChkFail- r_St | KL15 ON, VDC sends negative relay closed,6 CMUs have negative relay closed abnormally.(1.5s set up) | 1. Wiring harness 2.Battery pack 3.VDC |
| P10BA40 | ChUpBnRlyChkFailr_ St | A+ ON,VDC sends negative relay closed,6 CMUs have negative relay closed abnormally.(1.5s set up) |
Step 3:Check the VDC LIN communication components and give priority to troubleshooting LIN communication component failures. Step 4:Check the LIN communication harness between VDC, intelligent battery sensor IBS, and active grille shutter. Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.43 CMU Wake-up Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10B640 | NormupPduadhnChk- Failr_St | KL15 ON, The auxiliary drive relay and the main drive relay have sticking faults(1.5s set up) | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.VDC |
| P10B740 | NormupAux_Drv_ RlyChkFailr_St | KL15 ON,VDC sends auxiliary drive relay closed, the auxiliary drive relay is closed abnormally.(1.5s set up) | |
| P10B840 | NormupDC_ OutVChkFailr_St | KL15 ON,VDC sends DCDC1 and DCDC2 to be enabled, the output voltage of DCDC1 or DCDC2 is Less than(2s set up) | |
| P10B940 | NormupMain_Drv_ RlyChkFailr_St | KL15 ON,VDC sends the maindrive relay closed, and the main drive relay closes abnormally(1.5s set up) | |
| P10BB40 | ChUpPduadhnChkFai- lr_St | A+ ON, The auxiliary drive relay and the Charg relay have sticking faults(1.5s set up) | |
| P10BC40 | ChUpPDUIsnOnChkF- ailr_St | A+ ON,The charging interaction is not complete(100s set up) | |
| P10BD40 | ChUpChpRlyChkFailr_ St | A+ ON,VDC sends Charg relay closed, the Charg relay is closed abnormally.(1.5s set up) | |
| P10BE40 | ChUpAux_Drv_ RlyChkFailr_St | A+ ON,VDC sends auxiliary drive relay closed, the auxiliary drive relay is closed abnormally.(1.5s set up) | |
| P10BF40 | ChUpDC_ OutVChkFailr_St | A+ ON,VDCsends DCDC1 and DCDC2 to be enabled, the output voltage of DCDC1 or DCDC2 is Less than(2s set up) |
Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Nex step Step 4:Check the wake-up signal harness between VDC and the battery pack. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 6:Replace the battery pack. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.44 PDU Wake-up Signal Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100602 | DCDC2 output undervoltage | HV Satus, The DCDC2 function takes effect, DCDC2 output voltage is less than or equal to 23V for 10s) | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.VDC |
| P100702 | DCDC2 output overvoltage | HV Satus, The DCDC2 function takes effect, DCDC2 output voltage is greater than or equal to 32V for 10s |
Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the power distribution unit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to the power distribution unit. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the wake-up signal harness between VDC and power distribution unit. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.45 DCDC2 Voltage Output Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P103B10 | Left grid motor failure | Power on, The grille failure lasts for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2.Active grille shutter 3.VDC |
| P103C10 | Right grid motor failure | Power on, The grille failure lasts for 10s |
Step 3:Check the low-voltage power supply line of the thermal management unit of the power distribution unit (integrated DCDC). Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.46 Active Grille Shutter Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

23. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the active grille shutter.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100852 | WPTC1 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18032779x lost and the maximum temperature of the battery is greater than or equal to 97 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (battery left water heater) 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the LIN communication harness between VDC and the active grille shutter. Step 5:Replace the active grille shutter. Refer to Replacement Of Active Grille Wire Harness Module Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.47 Left Battery Water Heater Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (battery left water heater).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100952 | WPTC2 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x18032760x lost and the maximum temperature of the battery is greater than or equal to 97 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (battery right water heater) 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 BusNetwork Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the left thermal management unit (battery left water heater). Step 6:Replace the left thermal management unit (battery left water heater). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.48 Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (battery right water heater).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100A52 | BLR1 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1802277Ax lost and the minimum temperature of the battery is less than or equal to 41 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (battery left compressor) 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 BusNetwork Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the right thermal management unit (battery right water heater). Step 6:Replace the right thermal management unit (battery right water heater). Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.49 Left Battery Compressor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (battery left compressor).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P100B52 | BLR2 Communication failure | KL15 valid, 0x1802277Bx lost and the minimum temperature of the battery is less than or equal to 41 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s | 1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (battery right compressor) 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the left thermal management unit (battery left compressor). Step 6:Replace the left thermal management unit (battery left compressor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.50 Battery Right Compressor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (battery right compressor).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P109C30 | Insulation fault LvC | Insulation value≤500kΩ(22s),Power-off clear | 1.Wiring harness 2. High voltage components 3.VDC |
| P109D30 | Insulation fault LvB | Insulation value≤1000kΩ(66s),≥1200kΩ for 1s, automatically cleared | |
| P109E30 | Insulation fault LvA | Insulation value≤1000kΩ(66s),≥1200kΩ for 1s, automatically cleared |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10AC40 | Brake pressure rise monitoring during air pump operation | When the air compressor starts working, the pressure rise rate within a certain time (tentatively 30s) is less than the specified value (tentatively 2Bar). | 1.Wiring harness 2. Air compressor 3.VDC |
| P10C140 | NormRdy_ AirPChkFailr_St | KL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, Brake air pressure<0.7Mpa |
Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 BusNetwork Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the right thermal management unit (battery right compressor). Step 6:Replace the right thermal management unit (battery right compressor). Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.51 Insulation Failure
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the insulation resistance of high-voltage components. Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.52 Air Compressor Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-pressure circuit harness of the air compressor. Step 4:Replace the air compressor. Refer to Replacement Of Air Compressor Assembly Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10C340 | NormRdy_Escl_ ChkFailr_St | KL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, ESCL is unlocked | 1.Wiring harness 2.ESCL 3.VDC |
Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.53 ESCL Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ESCL power supply and grounding harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10E863 | IBS failure | The IBS reports fault level and fault code | 1.Wiring harness 2.Intelligent battery sensor IBS 3.VDC |
Step 4:ESCL rewrites the configuration code, reloads the software, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace ESCL. Refer to Replacement Of Steering Column Assembly Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.54 IBS Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IBS power supply and grounding harness of the battery.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P10E462 | thermal management system failure | The thermal management system reports fault | 1.Wiring harness 2.Cooling unit 3.VDC |
Step 4:Check the LIN communication harness between the intelligent battery sensor IBS and VDC. Step 5:Replace the intelligent battery sensor IBS. Refer to Replacement Of Smart Battery Sensors Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.55 Thermal Management System Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check if the coolant is insufficient. – Yes: Add coolant to the standard mark. – No: Next step Step 5:Check if there are any thermal runaway related fault codes on the vehicle? – Yes: Eliminate fault codes related to thermal runaway. Refer to Battery Thermal Runaway Fault – No: Next step Step 6:Check the motor coolant level sensor. Refer to Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault Step 7:Check the battery coolant level sensor. Refer to Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault Step 8:Check the motor fan. Refer to Motor Fan Fault Step 9:Check the motor water pump. Refer to Motor Water Pump Fault Step 10:Check the left battery fan. Refer to Left Battery Fan Malfunction Step 11:Check the right battery fan. Refer to Right Battery Fan Malfunction Step 12:Check left battery water pump. Refer to Left Battery Water Pump Malfunction Step 13:Check right battery water pump. Refer to Right Battery Water Pump Malfunction Step 14:Check the left water heater of the battery. Refer to Left Battery Water Heater Fault Step 15:Check the right water heater of the battery. Refer to Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery Step 16:VDC rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 17:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 18:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.2.4.56 EVCC Power Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps
Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the EVCC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the EVCC. Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 5:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
7.2.4.57 EVCC Communication Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Circuit Diagram Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the PCAN1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN1 Bus Network Integrity
Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
7.2.4.58 EVCC A+ Signal Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the A+ wake-up signal harness between the EVCC and the VDC. Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
7.2.4.59 EVCC CP Signal Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the CP signal harness between the EVCC and the VDC.
Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
7.2.4.60 PP Signal Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the A+ wake-up signal harness between the EVCC and the MCS fast charging port. Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
7.2.4.61 MCS Fast Charging Port Electronic Lock Fault
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the feedback signal harness of the electronic lock between the EVCC and the MCS fast charging port. Step 3:Check the electronic - lock - control - signal harness between the EVCC and the fast charge connector.
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN1(H) and PCAN1 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
Step 4:Check the electronic lock control signal harness between the MCS charging connection and the MCS fast charging port. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 6:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly
7.2.4.62 Inspection Of PCAN1 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the PCAN1 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN1 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN1 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN2(H) and PCAN2 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN1 bus. C. Measure the PCAN1 bus resistance between each module and the power domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN1 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
7.2.4.63 Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the PCAN2 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN2 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN2 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN2 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN2 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN2 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN2 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN2 bus. C. Measure the PCAN2 bus resistance between each module and the power domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN2 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN2 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN2 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN3(H) and PCAN3 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN3 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN3 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
7.2.4.64 Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the PCAN3 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN3 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN3 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN3 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN3 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN3 bus. C. Measure the PCAN3 bus resistance between each module and the power domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN3 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN3 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN3 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. No Yes


7.2.5 Dismantling and Installation
7.2.5.1 Replacement of VDC Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove 2 harness connectors of the VDC assembly. 5 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the VDC assembly. 6 Remove the VDC assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the VDC assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the VDC assembly.
Torque:(11 +/- 1.5) ft lbs
3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the VDC assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the low-speed alarm module (AVAS) to the white body assembly | M8 | (18 +/- 2) ft lbs |
7.3 Electrical Accessory Device
7.3.1 Specifications
7.3.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.3.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.3.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Light Rain Sensor 3. Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System 2. Brkt-Sunlight Rain Sensor 4. Reverse Buzzer
7.3.3 System Schematic Diagram
7.3.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| When the vehicle is driving at low speed, there is no sound or noise from the low-speed alarm module | 1. The external sound module is covered by foreign objects | Clean up foreign objects. |
| 2. Interference with other components | Reinstall the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low-speed Alarm Module (AVAS) | |
| 3. Low speed alarm module malfunction | Check for faults in the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Voltage High | Refer to Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault |
| B111716 | Voltage Low | |
| U019887 | TGW_TD_Time mesg lost | Refer to Low Speed Alarm Module Communication Fault |
| U014087 | TGW_TD_Time mesg lost | |
| U015687 | CDC_BDCUSET mesg Lost | |
| U012287 | VDC_CCVS LOST | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 BusOff |
7.3.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.3.4.1 Diagnosis Description
Before diagnosing faults in electrical accessory devices, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the electrical accessory device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct steps for fault diagnosis when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of electrical accessory devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten
the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.3.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the electrical accessory system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the electrical accessory system.
• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 7.3.4.3 Fault Symptom Table
7.3.4.4 DTC Confirmation
1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 7.3.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
AVAS
7.3.4.6 Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Voltage High | Voltage > 33V, t > 2s | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low speed alarm module |
| B111716 | Voltage Low | Voltage < 18V, t > 2s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection B48-38 B48-18
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U019887 | TGW_TD_Time mesg lost | 10 cycle lost | 1.Wiring harness 2. Low speed alarm module |
| U014087 | BDCU_OELight mesg lost | 10 cycle lost | |
| U015687 | CDC_BDCUSET mesg Lost | 10 cycle lost | |
| U012287 | VDC_CCVS LOST | 10 cycle lost | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 BusOff | Err cycle more 255 |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the low-speed alarm module? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the low-speed alarm module. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-speed alarm module. Step 6:Replace the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low-speed Alarm Module (AVAS) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.3.4.7 Low Speed Alarm Module Communication Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity B48-38 B48-18
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-speed alarm module. Step 5:Replace the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low-speed Alarm Module (AVAS) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.3.5 Dismantling and Installation
7.3.5.1 Replacement of RLS
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the RLS. 6 Remove the RLS. Installation Procedures 1 Move the RLS to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the RLS.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.3.5.2 Replacement of AVAS
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the lamp (upper). 5 Remove the lamp (lower). 6 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 7 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 8 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the AVAS.
10 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the AVAS. 11 Remove the AVAS. Installation Procedures 1 Move the AVAS to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the AVAS.
Torque: (18 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the AVAS.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 5 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 6 Install the boarding step body assembly. 7 Install the lamp (lower). 8 Install the lamp (upper). 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
7.3.5.3 Replacement of The Reverse Buzzer
Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 wire harness connector of the reverse buzzer. 5 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the reverse buzzer. 6 Remove the reverse buzzer. Installation procedures


1 Move the reverse buzzer to the mounting position. 2 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the reverse buzzer. 3 Connect 1 wire harness connector of the reverse buzzer.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the battery assembly bracket to the right front connecting beam | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the battery assembly bracket to the left front connecting beam | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the battery assembly bracket to the right front connecting beam | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the battery assembly bracket to the right front connecting beam | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the battery pad and the battery assembly bracket | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| Intelligent electrical box - fixing bolt connecting the vehicle body to the lower left dashboard controller bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| Intelligent electrical box - fixing bolts connecting the chassis and intelligent electrical box bracket | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the auxiliary battery and the negative terminal harness of the battery | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the battery pressure plate 3 to the power domain controller bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
7.4 Battery Device
7.4.1 Specifications
7.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.4.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Battery Bracket 6. Battery Pressing Plate 3 2. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 7. Battery Pressing Plate 2 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Battery Tie Rod 4. Battery Tray 9. Smart Battery Sensor 5. Auxiliary Battery 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt
11. Smart Junction Box-Body 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt

10 Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Smart Junction Box Bracket-Chassis 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Smart Junction Box-Chassis 17. Smart Junction Box Bracket-Chassis 2

7.4.3 Dismantling and Installation
7.4.3.1 Replacement of Battery Assembly Bracket
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
It is necessary to power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 9 Remove the auxiliary battery. 10 Remove the battery backing plate. 11 Remove Left Junction Box. 12 Remove Right Junction Box.
13 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the battery assembly bracket. 14 Remove the battery assembly bracket. Installation Procedures


1 Move the battery assembly bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the battery assembly bracket.
Torque: (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
3 Install Right Junction Box. 4 Install Left Junction Box. 5 Install the battery backing plate. 6 Install the auxiliary battery. 7 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 8 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 9 Install the battery rod. 10 Install the VDC bracket. 11 Install the VDC assembly. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

7.4.3.2 Replacement of Battery Backing Plate
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 9 Remove the auxiliary battery. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the battery backing plate. 11 Remove the battery backing plate. Installation Procedures
1 Move the battery backing plate to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the battery backing plate.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install the auxiliary battery. 4 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 5 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 6 Install the battery rod. 7 Install the VDC bracket. 8 Install the VDC assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
7.4.3.3 Replacement of Auxiliary Battery
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2.
9 Loosen 3 fixing nuts of the auxiliary battery terminal. 10 Remove the auxiliary battery. Installation Procedures 1 Move the auxiliary battery rod to the mounting position. 2 Tighten 3 fixing nuts of the auxiliary battery terminal.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 4 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 5 Install the battery rod. 6 Install the VDC bracket. 7 Install the VDC assembly. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

7.4.3.4 Replacement of Battery Pressure Plate 2
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. Installation Procedures 1 Move the battery pressure plate 2 to the mounting position. 2 Install the battery pressure plate 3.

3 Install the battery rod. 4 Install the VDC bracket. 5 Install the VDC assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

7.4.3.5 Replacement of Battery Pressure Plate 3
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. Installation Procedures
1 Move the battery pressure plate 3 to the mounting position. 2 Install the battery rod. 3 Install the VDC bracket. 4 Install the VDC assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.4.3.6 Replacement of Battery Rod
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the VDC assembly.
5 Remove the vehicle controller assy bracket. 6 Remove 3 battery rods. Installation Procedures 1 Move the battery rod to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 battery rods. 3 Install the vehicle controller assy bracket. 4 Install the VDC assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.4.3.7 Replacement of IBS
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the IBS. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the IBS. 6 Remove the IBS. Installation Procedures


1 Move the IBS to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the IBS.
Torque: (14.75) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the IBS.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.4.3.8 Replacement of SJB_UP
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly.
5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the vehicle controller assy bracket. 7 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder bracket. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left lower fixing bracket. 13 Disconnect 5 harness connectors of the SJB_UP. 14 Remove 1 screw, and remove the SJB_UP cover plate.


15 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the harness to detach the harness. 16 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the harness to detach the harness. 17 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UP. 18 Remove the SJB_UP.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the SJB_UP to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UP.
Torque:(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect the harness, and install 3 fixing nuts of the harness.
4 Connect the harness, and install 3 fixing nuts of the harness. 5 Install the SJB_UP cover plate, and install 1 screw. 6 Connect 5 harness connectors of the SJB_UP.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
7 Install the left lower fixing bracket. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder bracket. 14 Install the vehicle controller assy bracket. 15 Install the front USB interface. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

7.4.3.9 Replacement of SJB_UN
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove 4 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box, and move Left Junction Box.
5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN bracket, and move the SJB_UN bracket. 6 Remove the cover plate and remove 2 fixing bolts to detach the harness.



7 Remove 3 fixing bolts to detach the harness. 8 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of the SJB_UN. 9 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN. 10 Remove the SJB_UN.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the SJB_UN to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Connect 6 harness connectors of the SJB_UN.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the harness, and install 3 fixing bolts. 5 Connect the harness, install 2 fixing bolts, and install the cover plate. 6 Install the SJB_UN bracket, and install 2 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN bracket.
7 Install Left Junction Box, and install 4 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.
7.4.3.10 Replacement of The DC Converter
Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 wire harness connector of the DC converter. 5 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the DC converter.


6 Separate the DC converter from the DC converter bracket. 7 Remove the DC converter. Installation procedures


1 Move the DC converter to the mounting position. 2 Connect the DC converter to the DC converter bracket. 3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the DC converter.
4 Connect 1 wire harness connector of the DC converter.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.4.3.11 Replacement of The DC Converter Bracket
Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the DC converter.
5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the DC converter bracket. 6 Remove the DC converter bracket. Installation procedures 1 Move the DC converter bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the DC converter bracket. 3 Install the DC converter. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

| Measurement Result | Execution Operations |
|---|---|
| The battery is in good condition | Inspection completed |
| Need to charge | Charge the main battery |
| Need to replace | Refer to Replacement Of Auxiliary Battery |
7.4.4 Inspect
7.4.4.1 Inspection Of The Main Battery
Step 1 Check the appearance of the main battery. A. Check the appearance of the main battery for deformation or damage. B. Check if the main battery is leaking. C. Confirm if the above checks are normal. Refer to Replacement Of Auxiliary Battery Step 2 Check the positive and negative connectors of the main battery. A. Check whether the positive and negative connectors of the main battery are loose, oxidized, or corroded. B. Confirm if the above checks are normal. Repair or replace faulty components. Step 3 Use a battery tester to test the main battery. A. Set the vehicle power to OFF for multimedia. B. Disconnect the positive and negative terminals of the main battery. C. Use a battery tester to measure the main battery and perform the corresponding operations according to the table below. No Yes No Yes
7.4.5 System Schematic Diagram
7.4.5.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
Body smart electrical box
Chassis smart electrical box
12V power distribution system
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B180017 | Module overvoltage | Refer to Smart Junction Box UP Power Fault |
| U014087 | Communication with the BDCU timed out | Refer to Smart Junction Box UP Communication Fault |
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 BusOff | |
| U220600 | BCANFD1 NM Limphome | |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-Box | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | |
| B180713 | OUT07:KL15 load open circuit | Refer to Smart Junction Box UP KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180719 | OUT07:KL15 overcurrent | |
| B18074B | OUT07:KL15 over temperature | |
| B180113 | OUT01:Rear Blower load open circuit | Refer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower |
| B180119 | OUT01:Rear Blower overcurrent | |
| B18014B | OUT01:Rear Blower over temperature | |
| B180213 | OUT02:Right Front Blower load open circuit | Refer to Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180219 | OUT02:Right Front Blower overcurrent |
7.4.6 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.4.6.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing the fault of the battery device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the battery device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of battery devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid
misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.4.6.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the battery system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the battery system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.4.6.3 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.4.6.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
SJBUP
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B18024B | OUT02:Right Front Blower over temperature | |
| B180313 | OUT03:Left Front Blower load open circuit | Refer to Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180319 | OUT03:Left Front Blower overcurrent | |
| B18034B | OUT03:Left Front Blower over temperature | |
| B180513 | OUT05:SWC load open circuit | Refer to Seat Module Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180519 | OUT05:SWC overcurrent | |
| B18054B | OUT05:SWC over temperature | |
| B180613 | OUT06:Body BDCU1 load open circuit | Refer to Vehicle Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180619 | OUT06:Body BDCU1 overcurrent | |
| B18064B | OUT06:Body BDCU1 over temperature | |
| B180B13 | OUT11:Body BDCU2 load open circuit | |
| B180B19 | OUT11:Body BDCU2 overcurrent | |
| B180B4B | OUT11:Body BDCU2 over temperature | |
| B180813 | OUT08:CDCU load open circuit | Refer to Cabin Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180819 | OUT08:CDCU overcurrent | |
| B18084B | OUT08:CDCU over temperature | |
| B180913 | OUT09:ECAS load open circuit | Refer to ECAS Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B180919 | OUT09:ECAS overcurrent | |
| B18094B | OUT09:ECAS over temperature | |
| B180A13 | OUT10:DCM load open circuit | Refer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Door Control Module |
| B180A19 | OUT10:DCM overcurrent | |
| B180A4B | OUT10:DCM over temperature | |
| B180C13 | OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Sunroof Sunshade |
| B180C19 | OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel overcurrent | |
| B180C4B | OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel over temperature | |
| B180E13 | OUT14:Work load open circuit | Refer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Switch Type Power Supply |
| B180E19 | OUT14:Work overcurrent | |
| B180E4B | OUT14:Work over temperature | |
| B181113 | OUT17:IPC load open circuit | Refer to Instrument Panel Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181119 | OUT17:IPC overcurrent | |
| B18114B | OUT17:IPC over temperature | |
| B181213 | OUT18:OBD load open circuit | Refer to OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181219 | OUT18:OBD overcurrent | |
| B18124B | OUT18:OBD over temperature |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B181313 | OUT19:ACAndBatCompressor load open circuit | Refer to Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181319 | OUT19:ACAndBatCompressor overcurrent | |
| B18134B | OUT19:ACAndBatCompressor over temperature | |
| B181513 | OUT21:PTC load open circuit | Refer to PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181519 | OUT21:PTC overcurrent | |
| B18154B | OUT21:PTC over temperature | |
| B181613 | OUT22:AC load open circuit | Refer to Air Conditioning Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181619 | OUT22:AC overcurrent | |
| B18164B | OUT22:AC over temperature | |
| B181713 | OUT23:FrontUSB load open circuit | Refer to Front Row USB Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181719 | OUT23:FrontUSB overcurrent | |
| B18174B | OUT23:FrontUSB over temperature | |
| B181813 | OUT24:RearUSB load open circuit | Refer to Rear USB Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181819 | OUT24:RearUSB overcurrent | |
| B18184B | OUT24:RearUSB over temperature | |
| B181A13 | OUT26:AR_HUD load open circuit | Refer to HUD Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181A19 | OUT26:AR_HUD overcurrent | |
| B181A4B | OUT26:AR_HUD over temperature | |
| B181D13 | OUT29:PWC load open circuit | Refer to Wireless Charging Module Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B181D19 | OUT29:PWC overcurrent | |
| B181D4B | OUT29:PWC over temperature | |
| B182013 | OUT32:TV load open circuit | Refer to Vehicle Mounted TV Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182019 | OUT32:TV overcurrent | |
| B18204B | OUT32:TV over temperature | |
| B182113 | OUT33:ESCL load open circuit | Refer to ESCL Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182119 | OUT33:ESCL overcurrent | |
| B18214B | OUT33:ESCL over temperature | |
| B182213 | OUT34_Sleeper switch devices open circuit | Refer to Sleeper Switch Devices Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182219 | OUT34:SSM overcurrent | |
| B18224B | OUT34:SSM over temperature | |
| B182313 | OUT35:CAR load open circuit | Refer to CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182319 | OUT35:CAR overcurrent | |
| B18234B | OUT35:CAR over temperature | |
| B182413 | OUT36:IVI load open circuit | Refer to IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182419 | OUT36:IVI overcurrent |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B18244B | OUT36:IVI over temperature | |
| B182613 | OUT38:BatDrivPump1 load open circuit | Refer to Left Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182619 | OUT38:BatDrivPump1 overcurrent | |
| B18264B | OUT38:BatDrivPump1 over temperature | |
| B182F13 | OUT47:BatDrivPump2 load open circuit | Refer to Right Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182F19 | OUT47:BatDrivPump2 overcurrent | |
| B182F4B | OUT47:BatDrivPump2 over temperature | |
| B182A13 | OUT42:VertMotorDrivPump1 load open circuit | Refer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Motor Water Pump 1 |
| B182A19 | OUT42:VertMotorDrivPump1 overcurrent | |
| B182A4B | OUT42:VertMotorDrivPump1 over temperature | |
| B182B13 | OUT43:VertMotorDrivPump2 load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Power Supply Crcuit Of Motor Water Pump 2 |
| B182B19 | OUT43:VertMotorDrivPump2 overcurrent | |
| B182B4B | OUT43:VertMotorDrivPump2 over temperature | |
| B182713 | OUT39:BatFanGuard1 load open circuit | Refer to Left Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182719 | OUT39:BatFanGuard1 overcurrent | |
| B18274B | OUT39:BatFanGuard1 over temperature | |
| B182813 | OUT40:BatFanGuard2 load open circuit | Refer to Left Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182819 | OUT40:BatFanGuard2 overcurrent | |
| B18284B | OUT40:BatFanGuard2 over temperature | |
| B182E13 | OUT46:BatFanGuard3 load open circuit | Refer to Right Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182E19 | OUT46:BatFanGuard3 overcurrent | |
| B182E4B | OUT46:BatFanGuard3 over temperature | |
| B182D13 | OUT45:BatFanGuard4 load open circuit | Refer to Right Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182D19 | OUT45:BatFanGuard4 overcurrent | |
| B182D4B | OUT45:BatFanGuard4 over temperature | |
| B182913 | OUT41:AlterFanGuard1 load open circuit | Refer to Motor Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182919 | OUT41:AlterFanGuard1 overcurrent |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B18294B | OUT41:AlterFanGuard1 over temperature | |
| B182C13 | OUT44:AlterFanGuard2 load open circuit | Refer to Motor Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B182C19 | OUT44:AlterFanGuard2 overcurrent | |
| B182C4B | OUT44:AlterFanGuard2 over temperature | |
| B182513 | OUT37:AlterFanGuard3 load open circuit | Refer to Motor Fan 3 Power Supply Crcuit Fault |
| B182519 | OUT37:AlterFanGuard3 overcurrent | |
| B18254B | OUT37:AlterFanGuard3 over temperature |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to Smart Junction Box DOWN Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | |
| B1E0017 | Module overvoltage | |
| U014087 | Communication with the BDCU timed out | Refer to Smart Junction Box DOWN Communication Fault |
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 BusOff | |
| U220600 | BCANFD1 NM Limphome | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U01A087 | Lost Communication With SJB_UP | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-Box | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 BusOff | |
| U220700 | BCANFD2 NM Limphome | |
| B1E0113 | OUT01:Body load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Main Power Supply Circuit Of The Vehicle Body |
| B1E0119 | OUT01:Body overcurrent | |
| B1E014B | OUT01:Body over temperature | |
| B1E0313 | OUT03:EPS load open circuit | Refer to EPS Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0319 | OUT03:EPS overcurrent | |
| B1E034B | OUT03:EPS over temperature | |
| B1E1D13 | OUT29:EPSAssist load open circuit | |
| B1E1D19 | OUT29:EPSAssist overcurrent | |
| B1E1D4B | OUT29:EPSAssist over temperature | |
| B1E0413 | OUT04:KL15_1 load open circuit | Refer to Smart Junction Box DOWN KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0419 | OUT04:KL15_1 overcurrent | |
| B1E044B | OUT04:KL15_1 over temperature |
SJBUN
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B1E2213 | OUT34:KL15_3 load open circuit | |
| B1E2219 | OUT34:KL15_3 overcurrent | |
| B1E224B | OUT34:KL15_3 over temperature | |
| B1E0513 | OUT05:EBSKL30 load open circuit | Refer to EBS Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0519 | OUT05:EBSKL30 overcurrent | |
| B1E054B | OUT05:EBSKL30 over temperature | |
| B1E0A13 | OUT10:EBS_KL15 load open circuit | |
| B1E0A19 | OUT10:EBS_KL15 overcurrent | |
| B1E0A4B | OUT10:EBS_KL15 over temperature | |
| B1E1F13 | OUT31-EBS trailer open circuit | |
| B1E1F19 | OUT31:TrailerEBS overcurrent | |
| B1E1F4B | OUT31:TrailerEBS over temperature | |
| B1E2113 | OUT33:EBSBat30 load open circuit | |
| B1E2119 | OUT33:EBSBat30 overcurrent | |
| B1E214B | OUT33:EBSBat30 over temperature | |
| B1E0813 | OUT08:MediumaxleTCU load open circuit | Refer to Electric Drive Medium axle TCU Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0819 | OUT08:MediumaxleTCU overcurrent | |
| B1E084B | OUT08:MediumaxleTCU over temperature | |
| B1E0913 | OUT09:TGWBat load open circuit | Refer to Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0919 | OUT09:TGWBat overcurrent | |
| B1E094B | OUT09:TGWBat over temperature | |
| B1E2613 | OUT38:TGWAssist load open circuit | |
| B1E2619 | OUT38:TGWAssist overcurrent | |
| B1E264B | OUT38:TGWAssist over temperature | |
| B1E0B13 | OUT11:BackupLamp load open circuit | Refer to Reverse Light Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0B19 | OUT11:BackupLamp overcurrent | |
| B1E0B4B | OUT11:BackupLamp over temperature | |
| B1E0D13 | OUT13:TractorMarkerLight load open circuit | Refer to Small Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E0D19 | OUT13:TractorMarkerLight overcurrent | |
| B1E0D4B | OUT13:TractorMarkerLight over temperature | |
| B1E1113 | OUT17:LeftLowBeam load open circuit | Refer to Left Low Beam Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1119 | OUT17:LeftLowBeam overcurrent | |
| B1E114B | OUT17:LeftLowBeam over temperature | |
| B1E1213 | OUT18_ Right high beam open circuit | Refer to Right High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B1E1219 | OUT18:TractorRightHighBeam overcurrent | |
| B1E124B | OUT18:TractorRightHighBeam over temperature | |
| B1E1313 | OUT19:TractorLeftHighBeam load open circuit | Refer to Left High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1319 | OUT19:TractorLeftHighBeam overcurrent | |
| B1E134B | OUT19:TractorLeftHighBeam over temperature | |
| B1E1413 | OUT20:RightLowBeam load open circuit | Refer to Right Low Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1419 | OUT20:RightLowBeam overcurrent | |
| B1E144B | OUT20_ Right low beam overheating | |
| B1E1613 | OUT22:LeftRunning load open circuit | Refer to Left Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1619 | OUT22:LeftRunning overcurrent | |
| B1E164B | OUT22:LeftRunning over temperature | |
| B1E1813 | OUT24:RightRunning load open circuit | Refer to Right Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1819 | OUT24:RightRunning overcurrent | |
| B1E184B | OUT24:RightRunning over temperature | |
| B1E1A13 | OUT26:IBS load open circuit | Refer to IBS Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1A19 | OUT26:IBS overcurrent | |
| B1E1A4B | OUT26:IBS over temperature | |
| B1E1B13 | OUT27:WorkingLights load open circuit | Refer to Rear Work Light Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1B19 | OUT27:WorkingLights overcurrent | |
| B1E1B4B | OUT27:WorkingLights over temperature | |
| B1E1E13 | OUT35: EPB load open circuit | Refer to EPB Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E1E19 | OUT35: EPB overcurrent | |
| B1E1E4B | OUT35:EPB over temperature | |
| B1E2513 | OUT37:VDCB load open circuit | Refer to VDC Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E2519 | OUT37:VDCB overcurrent | |
| B1E254B | OUT37:VDCB over temperature | |
| B1E2713 | OUT39:MediumRearaxleTCU load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Rear Axle MCU In The Electric Drive |
| B1E2719 | OUT39:MediumRearaxleTCU overcurrent | |
| B1E274B | OUT39:MediumRearaxleTCU over temperature |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B1E2813 | OUT40:AirHandlingUnit load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Air Handling Unit |
| B1E2819 | OUT40:AirHandlingUnit overcurrent | |
| B1E284B | OUT40:AirHandlingUnit over temperature | |
| B1E2913 | OUT41:HighLowPitchElectricHorn load open circuit | Refer to Electric Horn Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E2919 | OUT41:HighLowPitchElectricHorn overcurrent | |
| B1E294B | OUT41:HighLowPitchElectricHorn over temperature | |
| B1E2F13 | OUT47:AirHorn load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Gas Horn |
| B1E2F19 | OUT47:AirHorn overcurrent | |
| B1E2F4B | OUT47:AirHorn over temperature | |
| B1E2C13 | OUT44:Battery pack load open circuit | Refer to Battery Pack Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E2C19 | OUT44:Battery pack overcurrent | |
| B1E2C4B | OUT44:Battery pack over temperature | |
| B1E2D13 | OUT45:AuxiDrivMultiOne load open circuit | Refer to Power Distribution Unit Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E2D19 | OUT45:AuxiDrivMultiOne overcurrent | |
| B1E2D4B | OUT45:AuxiDrivMultiOne over temperature | |
| B1E2E13 | OUT46:BatWaterHeatComp load open circuit | Refer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Battery Water Heater |
| B1E2E19 | OUT46:BatWaterHeatComp overcurrent | |
| B1E2E4B | OUT46:BatWaterHeatComp over temperature | |
| B1E2A13 | OUT42:AVAS load open circuit | Refer to Low Speed Pedestrian Alarm Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E2A19 | OUT42:AVAS overcurrent | |
| B1E2A4B | OUT42:AVAS over temperature | |
| B1E3013 | OUT48:TPMS load open circuit | Refer to Tire Pressure Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E3019 | OUT48:TPMS overcurrent | |
| B1E304B | OUT48:TPMS over temperature | |
| B1E3113 | OUT49:ChassisSensors load open circuit | Refer to Chassis Sensor Power Supply Circuit Fault |
| B1E3119 | OUT49:ChassisSensors overcurrent | |
| B1E314B | OUT49:ChassisSensors over temperature |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Output channel control - VBU-B+_VDC | VDC | On/Off | Control the VDC B+power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - Assisted Intelligent Driving Domain | Auxiliary intelligent driving domain controller | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the auxiliary intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Master Intelligent Driving Domain | Master intelligent driving domain controller | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the main intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - EBS Controller | EBS | On/Off | Control the EBS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - KL15-1 Main Power Supply 1 | KL15 power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the KL15 power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Steering Gear Assembly | EHPS | On/Off | Control the EHPS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - Car Power Supply | Car power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the on/off of the onboard power supply |
| Output Channel Control - Body B+ | Body B+ | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the B+power supply of the vehicle body to turn on/off |
7.4.6.5 Action Test List
By reading the "Action Test" on the fault diagnosis instrument, the working status of relays and actuators controlled by SJBUN can be checked without disassembling any components. Before conducting relevant fault diagnosis on the control system, performing action testing is a prerequisite for troubleshooting, which can shorten the time for troubleshooting.
Note
The following table lists the data under normal conditions for reference only. Do not rely solely on these reference values to determine whether a certain component has malfunctioned. Under normal circumstances, a comparison can be made between a functioning vehicle and a diagnosed vehicle in the same state to determine the data of the diagnosed vehicle is normal in its current state.
a.Perform vehicle power on operation. b.Connect the fault diagnosis device. c.Select "SJBUN"/"Action Test". d.Refer to the table below and conduct active testing.
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Output Channel Control - Right brake lamp | Right brake lamp | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right brake lamp to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Left brake lamp | Left brake lamp | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the left brake lamp power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Reversing light | Reversing light | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the reversing light to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Reverse light | Reverse light | On/Off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the power supply of the reversing lights to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - EBS power supply | EBS | On/Off | Control the EBS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - Central gateway | Central gateway | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the central gateway to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Right daytime running lamp | Right daytime running lamp | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right daytime running lamp to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Left daytime running lamp | Left daytime running lamp | On/Off | According to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the power supply of the left daytime running lamp to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Right low beam headlight | Right low beam headlight | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right low beam to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Left high beam | Left high beam | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the left high beam to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Right high beam | Right high beam | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right high beam to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Left low beam | Left low beam | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the left low beam power supply to turn on/off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Output Channel Control - Main intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supply | Main intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the main intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - EBS trailer | EBS trailer | On/Off | Control the EBS trailer power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - Electronic parking | Electronic parking | On/Off | Control the electronic parking power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - EPS steering gear assembly auxiliary power supply | EHPS | On/Off | Control the EHPS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - Emergency brake solenoid valve | Emergency brake solenoid valve | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the emergency brake solenoid valve to turn on/ off |
| Output Channel Control - Rear work light | Rear work light | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the rear work light to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Intelligent battery sensor | Intelligent battery sensor | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the intelligent battery sensor to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - HSD | HSD | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Air handling unit | Air handling unit | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the air handling unit to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Mid/Rear axle MCU | Mid/Rear axle MCU | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the middle/rear axle MCU to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Gateway auxiliary power supply | Gateway auxiliary power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the central gateway to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Middle axle TCU | Middle axle TCU | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the TCU in the middle axle to turn on/off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Output Channel Control - ADB headlights | ADB headlights | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the ADB headlight power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Auxiliary intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supply | Auxiliary intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the auxiliary intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - KL15 main power supply 3 | KL15 main power supply 3 | On/Off | Control the KL15 power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - EBS-KL30B | EBS | On/Off | Control the EBS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Output Channel Control - Tire pressure + active grille shutter | Tire pressure + active grille shutter | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the tire pressure/active grille shutter power supply on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Air horn | Air horn | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the gas horn to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Battery water heating | Battery water heating | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the battery water heating power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Power distribution unit | Power distribution unit | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the on/off of the power distribution unit power supply |
| Output Channel Control - Battery Pack | Battery Pack | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the battery pack power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - HSD | HSD | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Low speed pedestrian alarm | Low speed pedestrian alarm | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the low-speed pedestrian alarm power supply to turn on/ off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Output Channel Control - High/low frequency electric speaker | tweeter/woofer frequency electric speaker | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the high/low frequency electric speaker power supply to turn on/off |
| Output Channel Control - Chassis sensor power supply | Chassis sensor power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of chassis sensors to turn on/off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Cockpit domain controller | Cockpit domain controller | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the cabin domain controller to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - KL15 power supply | KL15 power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the KL15 power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Vehicle Domain Control-1 | Vehicle domain control | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the vehicle domain controller to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Seat control module | Seat control module | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the seat control module to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - 24V car power supply | 24V car power supply | On/Off | Control the 24V onboard power supply on/ off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Left front blower | Left front blower | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the left front blower to turn on/off |
By reading the "Action Test" on the fault diagnosis instrument, the working status of relays and actuators controlled by SJBUP can be checked without disassembling any components. Before conducting relevant fault diagnosis on the control system, performing action testing is a prerequisite for troubleshooting, which can shorten the time for troubleshooting.
Note
The following table lists the data under normal conditions for reference only. Do not rely solely on these reference values to determine whether a certain component has malfunctioned. Under normal circumstances, a comparison can be made between a functioning vehicle and a diagnosed vehicle in the same state to determine the data of the diagnosed vehicle is normal in its current state.
a.Perform vehicle power on operation. b.Connect the fault diagnosis device. c.Choice “ SJBUP ” / “ Action Test ” . d.Refer to the table below and conduct active testing.
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Right front blower | Right front blower | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right front blower to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear blower | Rear blower | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the rear blower to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Driving recorder | Driving recorder | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the driving recorder to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Reserve KL30 | KL30 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the KL30 power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Switching power supply | Switching power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the on/off of the switch type power supply power supply |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Electric steps | Electric steps | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the electric step to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Sunroof sunshade | Sunroof sunshade | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the sunroof sunshade to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Vehicle domain controller -2 | Vehicle domain controller | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the vehicle domain controller to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Gate control module | Gate control module | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the door control module to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - ECAS | ECAS | On/Off | Control the ECAS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear USB power supply | Rear USB power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the rear USB power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Front row USB power supply | Front row USB power supply | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the front row USB power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air conditioning controller | Air conditioning controller | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the air conditioning controller to turn on/off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - PTC controller | PTC controller | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the PTC controller power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - The cigarette lighter | The cigarette lighter | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the cigarette lighter to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air conditioning&compress- or | Air conditioning&compressor | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the compressor power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - OBD interface | OBD interface | On/Off | Control the OBD interface power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Instrument screen | Instrument screen | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the instrument panel to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Car TV | Car TV | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the car TV to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Car refrigerator | Car refrigerator | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the car refrigerator to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Bar water pump | Bar water pump | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the bar water pump to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Wireless charging module | Wireless charging module | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the wireless charging module to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - HSD | HSD | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - HSD | HSD | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - AR-HUD | AR-HUD | On/Off | Control the AR-HUD power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Electronic rearview mirror | Electronic rearview mirror | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the electronic rearview mirror to turn on/off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - IVI screen | IVI screen | On/Off | Control the IVI screen power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - CAR screen | CAR screen | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the CAR screen to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - Sleeper switch devices | Sleeper switch devices | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of sleep switch devices to turn on/off |
| Vehicle Output Channel Control - ESCL | ESCL | On/Off | Control the ESCL power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor fan 2 | Motor fan 2 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor fan 2 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor water pump 2 | Motor water pump 2 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor water pump 2 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor water pump 1 | Motor water pump 1 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor water pump 1 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor fan 1 | Motor fan 1 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor fan 1 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 2 | Battery fan 2 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 2 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 1 | Battery fan 1 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 1 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery water pump 1 | Battery water pump 1 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery water pump 1 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor fan 3 | Motor fan 3 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor fan 3 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery water pump 2 | Battery water pump 2 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery water pump 2 to turn on/off |
| Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display Items | Test Parts | Control Range | Diagnostic Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 3 | Battery fan 3 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 3 to turn on/off |
| Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 4 | Battery fan 4 | On/Off | According to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 4 to turn on/off |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180017 | Module overvoltage | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Smart junction box UP |
7.4.6.6 Smart Junction Box UP Power Failure
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation.Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection CAN1FD
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U014087 | Communication with the BDCU timed out | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18860021 is received within 1s | 1. Wiring harness 2.Smart junction box UP |
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 BusOff | Error frames occur in the CAN network under normal KL15 and supply voltage conditions | |
| U220600 | BCANFD1 NM Limphome | When the KL15 and power supply voltage are normal, no NM messages are received from other network nodes | |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms | |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | Voltage < 18V, t > 30s | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEC1EE is received within 10s | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-Box | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEE6EE is received within 10s | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FCC231 is received within 1s |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the smart junction box UP? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the smart junction box UP. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.7 Smart Junction Box UP Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity CAN1FD
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180713 | OUT07:KL15 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Smart junction box UP |
| B180719 | OUT07:KL15 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18074B | OUT07:KL15 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 5:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.8 Smart Junction Box UP KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the KL15 main power supply harness of the smart junction box UP.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180113 | OUT01:Rear Blower load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Bedding air conditioning blower 3.Smart junction box UP |
| B180119 | OUT01:Rear Blower overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18014B | OUT01:Rear Blower over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - KL15 Power Supply, On/Off" action test. Check if the KL15 power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.9 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the sleeper air conditioning blower.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180213 | OUT02:Right Front Blower load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning blower 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180219 | OUT02:Right Front Blower overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18024B | OUT02:Right Front Blower over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear Blower, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the sleeper air conditioning blower operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper air conditioning blower. Refer to HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear Replacement Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Intelligent Electrical Box - Vehicle Body Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.10 Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right air conditioning blower.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180313 | OUT03:Left Front Blower load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning blower 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180319 | OUT03:Left Front Blower overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18034B | OUT03:Left Front Blower over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Right Front Blower, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the right air conditioning blower operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning blower. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.11 Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left air conditioning blower.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180513 | OUT05:SWC load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Seat module 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180519 | OUT05:SWC overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18054B | OUT05:SWC over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Left Front Blower, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left air conditioning blower operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left air conditioning blower. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.12 Seat Module Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the seat module.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180613 | OUT06:Body BDCU1 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Body domain control uint 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180619 | OUT06:Body BDCU1 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18064B | OUT06:Body BDCU1 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on | |
| B180B13 | OUT11:Body BDCU2 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B180B19 | OUT11:Body BDCU2 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B180B4B | OUT11:Body BDCU2 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Seat Control Module, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the seat module operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the seat module. Refer to Replacement Of Driver's Seat Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.13 Vehicle Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the body domain controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180813 | OUT08:CDCU load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180819 | OUT08:CDCU overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18084B | OUT08:CDCU over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Body Domain Control-1, On/Off" and "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Vehicle Domain Control-2, On/Off" action tests. Check the power supply of the vehicle domain controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the body domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.14 Cabin Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the cockpit domain controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180913 | OUT09:ECAS load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.ECAS 3.Smart junction box UP |
| B180919 | OUT09:ECAS overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18094B | OUT09:ECAS over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Cabin Domain Controller, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the cabin domain controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.15 ECAS Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ECAS power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180A13 | OUT10:DCM load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Gate control module 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180A19 | OUT10:DCM overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B180A4B | OUT10:DCM over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control ECAS, On/Off" action test. Check if the ECAS power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.16 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Door Control Module
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
2. Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the door control module.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180C13 | OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Skyroof sunshade 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B180C19 | OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B180C4B | OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control Door Control Module, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the door control module operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.17 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Sunroof Sunshade
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the skyroof sunshade.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B180E13 | OUT14:Work load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Shift switch 3. Brake pedal switch 4. Smart junction box UP |
| B180E19 | OUT14:Work overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B180E4B | OUT14:Work over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Skyroof Sunshade, Open/Close" action test. Check the power supply of the sunroof sunshade operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sunroof sunshade. Refer to Replacement of the sunroof sunshade assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement of body smart electrical box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.18 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Switch Type Power Supply
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the shift switch and brake pedal switch.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181113 | OUT17:IPC load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. IPC screen 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B181119 | OUT17:IPC overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18114B | OUT17:IPC over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Switching Power Supply, On/Off" action test. Check the switching power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the faulty switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch . Replacement Of Brake Pedal Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.19 Instrument Panel Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IPC screen power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181213 | OUT18:OBD load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.OBD 3.Smart junction box UP |
| B181219 | OUT18:OBD overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18124B | OUT18:OBD over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Instrument Screen, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the IPC screen operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.20 OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the OBD power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181313 | OUT19: ACAndBatCompressor load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Compressor 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B181319 | OUT19: ACAndBatCompressor overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18134B | OUT19: ACAndBatCompressor over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control OBD Interface, On/Off" action test. Check if the OBD interface power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace OBD. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.21 Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the compressor.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181513 | OUT21:PTC load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.PTC 3.Smart junction box UP |
| B181519 | OUT21:PTC overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18154B | OUT21:PTC over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air Conditioning & battery Compressor, On/Off" action test. Check if the compressor power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the compressor. Refer to Replacement Of Air Conditioning Compressor Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.22 PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PTC power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181613 | OUT22:AC load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Air conditioning controller 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B181619 | OUT22:AC overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18164B | OUT22:AC over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control PTC Controller, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the PTC controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the PTC controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left . Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right . Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.23 Air Conditioning Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the air conditioning controller.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181713 | OUT23:FrontUSB load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front row USB 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B181719 | OUT23:FrontUSB overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18174B | OUT23:FrontUSB over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air Conditioning Controller, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the air conditioning controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Rght Replacement Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.24 Front Row USB Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the front row USB power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181813 | OUT24:RearUSB load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Rear USB 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B181819 | OUT24:RearUSB overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18184B | OUT24:RearUSB over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Front USB Power, On/Off" action test. Check if the front USB power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front row USB. Refer to Replacement Of The Front USB Interface Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.25 Rear USB Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the rear USB power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181A13 | OUT26:AR_HUD load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.HUD 3.Smart junction box UP |
| B181A19 | OUT26:AR_HUD overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B181A4B | OUT26:AR_HUD over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear USB Power, On/Off" action test. Check the rear USB power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear USB. Refer to Replacement Of Rear USB Interface Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.26 HUD Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the HUD power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B181D13 | OUT29:PWC load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Wireless charging module 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B181D19 | OUT29:PWC overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B181D4B | OUT29:PWC over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control AR-HUD, On/Off" action test. Check if the HUD power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace HUD. Refer to Replacement of AR-HUD Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.27 Wireless Charging Module Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the wireless charging module.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182013 | OUT32:TV load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Car TV 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182019 | OUT32:TV overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18204B | OUT32:TV over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Wireless Charging Module, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the wireless charging module operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the wireless charging module. Refer to Replacement Of Wireless Charging Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.28 Vehicle Mounted TV Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the car TV.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182113 | OUT33:ESCL load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. ESCL 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182119 | OUT33:ESCL overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18214B | OUT33:ESCL over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Car TV, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the car TV operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the car TV. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.29 ESCL Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ESCL power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182213 | OUT34:SSM load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.Sleeper switch devices 3.Smart junction box UP |
| B182219 | OUT34:SSM overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18224B | OUT34:SSM over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control ESCL, On/Off" action test. Check if the ESCL power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace ESCL. Refer to Replacement Of Steering Column Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.30 Sleeper Switch Devices Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the sleeper switch devices.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182313 | OUT35:CAR load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. CAR screen 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182319 | OUT35:CAR overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18234B | OUT35:CAR over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "body output channel control sleeper switch devices, on/off" action test. Check the power supply of the sleeper switch devices operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper switch devices. Refer to Replacement Of Sleep Switch Devices Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.31 CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAR screen power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182413 | OUT36:IVI load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. IVI screen 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182419 | OUT36:IVI overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18244B | OUT36:IVI over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control CAR Screen, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the CAR screen operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the CAR screen. Refer to Replacement Of CAR Screen Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.32 IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IVI screen power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182613 | OUT38:BatDrivPump1 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182619 | OUT38:BatDrivPump1 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18264B | OUT38:BatDrivPump1 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - IVI Screen, On/Off" action test. Check if the IVI screen power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the IVI screen. Refer to Replacement Of IVI Screen Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.33 Left Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182F13 | OUT47:BatDrivPump2 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182F19 | OUT47:BatDrivPump2 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B182F4B | OUT47:BatDrivPump2 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Water Pump 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.34 Right Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182A13 | OUT42: VertMotorDrivPump1 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Electric motor water pump 1 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182A19 | OUT42: VertMotorDrivPump1 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B182A4B | OUT42: VertMotorDrivPump1 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Water Pump 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.35 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Motor Water Pump 1
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor water pump 1.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182B13 | OUT43: VertMotorDrivPump2 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Electric motor water pump 2 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182B19 | OUT43: VertMotorDrivPump2 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B182B4B | OUT43: VertMotorDrivPump2 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Water Pump 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Water Pump 1 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor water pump 1. Refer to Replacement Of Electronic Water Pump Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.36 Fault In The Power Supply Crcuit Of Motor Water Pump 2
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor water pump 2.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182713 | OUT39:BatFanGuard1 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182719 | OUT39:BatFanGuard1 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18274B | OUT39:BatFanGuard1 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Water Pump 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Water Pump 2 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor water pump 2. Refer to Replacement Of Electronic Water Pump Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.37 Left Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182813 | OUT40:BatFanGuard2 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182819 | OUT40:BatFanGuard2 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18284B | OUT40:BatFanGuard2 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.38 Left Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). CAN1FD
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182E13 | OUT46:BatFanGuard3 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1) 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182E19 | OUT46:BatFanGuard3 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B182E4B | OUT46:BatFanGuard3 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.39 Right Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1). CAN1FD
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182D13 | OUT45:BatFanGuard4 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (Right battery fan 2) 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182D19 | OUT45:BatFanGuard4 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B182D4B | OUT45:BatFanGuard4 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 3, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the right thermal management unit (Right Battery Fan 1) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.40 Right Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). CAN1FD
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182913 | OUT41: AlterFanGuard1 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 1 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182919 | OUT41: AlterFanGuard1 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18294B | OUT41: AlterFanGuard1 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 4, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the right thermal management unit (Right Battery Fan 2) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.41 Motor Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor fan 1.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182C13 | OUT44: AlterFanGuard2 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 2 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182C19 | OUT44: AlterFanGuard2 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B182C4B | OUT44: AlterFanGuard2 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Fan 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Fan 1 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor fan 1. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.42 Motor Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor fan 2.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B182513 | OUT37: AlterFanGuard3 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 3 3. Smart junction box UP |
| B182519 | OUT37: AlterFanGuard3 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B18254B | OUT37: AlterFanGuard3 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Fan 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Fan 2 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor fan 2. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.43 Motor Fan 3 Power Supply Crcuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor fan 3.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | Voltage < 18V, t > 30s Voltage < 18V, t > 30s | |
| B1E0017 | Module overvoltage | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Fan 3, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Fan 3 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor fan 3. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.44 Smart Junction Box DOWN Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD2 BCANFD1
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U014087 | Communication with the BDCU timed out | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18860021 is received within 1s | 1. Wiring harness 2. Smart junction box DOWN |
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 BusOff | Error frames occur in the CAN network under normal KL15 and supply voltage conditions | |
| U220600 | BCANFD1 NM Limphome | When the KL15 and power supply voltage are normal, no NM messages are received from other network nodes | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEC1EE is received within 10s | |
| U01A087 | Lost Communication With SJB_UP | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FF1554 is received within 1s | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-Box | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEE6EE is received within 10s | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | When the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FCC231 is received within 1s | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 BusOff | Error frames occur in the CAN network under normal KL15 and supply voltage conditions | |
| U220700 | BCANFD2 NM Limphome | When the KL15 and power supply voltage are normal, no NM messages are received from other network nodes |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the smart junction box DOWN? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the smart junction box DOWN. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.45 Smart Junction Box DOWN Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD2 BCANFD1
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0113 | OUT01:Body load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Smart junction box UP 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0119 | OUT01:Body overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E014B | OUT01:Body over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Check the BCAND2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.46 Fault In The Main Power Supply Circuit Of The Vehicle Body
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the main power supply harness of the vehicle body.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0313 | OUT03:EPS load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. EHPS 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0319 | OUT03:EPS overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E034B | OUT03:EPS over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E1D13 | OUT29:EPSAssist load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E1D19 | OUT29:EPSAssist overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E1D4B | OUT29:EPSAssist over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Body B+, On/ Off" action test. Check if the body B+power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.47 EPS Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the EHPS power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0413 | OUT04:KL15_1 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0419 | OUT04:KL15_1 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E044B | OUT04:KL15_1 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E2213 | OUT34:KL15_3 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E2219 | OUT34:KL15_3 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E224B | OUT34:KL15_3 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - EPS Steering Assembly Auxiliary Power, On/Off" action test. Check if the EHPS power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.48 Smart Junction Box DOWN KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the KL15 main power supply harness of the smart junction box DOWN. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0513 | OUT05:EBSKL30 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. EBS 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0519 | OUT05:EBSKL30 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E054B | OUT05:EBSKL30 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E0A13 | OUT10:EBS_KL15 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E0A19 | OUT10:EBS_KL15 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E0A4B | OUT10:EBS_KL15 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E1F13 | OUT31-EBS trailer open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E1F19 | OUT31:TrailerEBS overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E1F4B | OUT31:TrailerEBS over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the diagnostic tool interface SJBUN action test and perform the "Output Channel Control - KL15 Main Power 3, On/Off" and "Output Channel Control - KL15-1 Main Power 1, On/Off" action tests. Check if the KL15 power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.49 EBS Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2113 | OUT33:EBSBat30 load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E2119 | OUT33:EBSBat30 overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E214B | OUT33:EBSBat30 over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the EBS power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0813 | OUT08: MediumaxleTCU load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle (electric drive medium axle TCU) 3.Chassis smart electrical box |
| B1E0819 | OUT08: MediumaxleTCU overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E084B | OUT08: MediumaxleTCU over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control EBS Controller, On/Off" action test. Check if the EBS power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.50 Electric Drive Medium axle TCU Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the low-voltage interface (TCU) of the electric drive medium axle vehicle.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0913 | OUT09:TGWBat load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0919 | OUT09:TGWBat overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E094B | OUT09:TGWBat over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E2613 | OUT38:TGWAssist load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | |
| B1E2619 | OUT38:TGWAssist overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E264B | OUT38:TGWAssist over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Middle axle TCU, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the low-voltage interface (Middle axle TCU) of the electric drive vehicle operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the low-voltage interface (TCU) of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the chassis smart electrical box. Step 6:Replace the chassis smart electrical box. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.51 Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram



3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the T-gateway power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0B13 | OUT11:BackupLamp load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Rear combination light (reverse light) 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0B19 | OUT11:BackupLamp overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E0B4B | OUT11:BackupLamp over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Central Gateway, On/Off" action test. Check if the T-gateway power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.52 Reverse Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear combination lamp (reverse light).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E0D13 | OUT13: TractorMarkerLight load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Small lamp 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E0D19 | OUT13: TractorMarkerLight overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E0D4B | OUT13: TractorMarkerLight over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Reverse Light, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the rear combination light (reverse light) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear combination light (reverse light). Refer to Replacement Of Reverse Light Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.53 Small Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
Identification light O318f Z01 Ground


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the small lamp.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1113 | OUT17:LeftLowBeam load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front left headlight (left low beam) 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1119 | OUT17:LeftLowBeam overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E114B | OUT17:LeftLowBeam over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Small Lamp, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the small lamp operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the small light. Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Clearance Lamp . Replacement Of Right Front Clearance Lamp Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.54 Left Low Beam Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front left headlight (left low beam).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1213 | OUT18_ Right high beam open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front right headlight (right high beam) 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1219 | OUT18: TractorRightHighBeam overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E124B | OUT18: TractorRightHighBeam over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Left Low Beam, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the front left headlight (left low beam) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left headlight (left low beam). Refer to Replacement Of Left Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.55 Right High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front right headlight (right high beam).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1313 | OUT19: TractorLeftHighBeam load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front left headlight (left high beam) 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1319 | OUT19: TractorLeftHighBeam overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E134B | OUT19: TractorLeftHighBeam over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Right High Beam, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front right headlight (right high beam) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right headlight (right high beam). Refer to Replacement Of Right Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.56 Left High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front left headlight (left high beam). Identification light O318f Z01 Ground
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1413 | OUT20: RightLowBeam load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front right headlight (right low beam) 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1419 | OUT20: RightLowBeam overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E144B | OUT20_ Right low beam overheating | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Left High Beam, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the front left headlight (left high beam) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left headlight (left high beam). Refer to Replacement Of Left Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.57 Right Low Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front right headlight (right low beam). Identification light O318f Z01 Ground
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1613 | OUT22:LeftRunning load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front left combination light (left daytime running light) 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1619 | OUT22:LeftRunning overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E164B | OUT22:LeftRunning over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Right Low Beam, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front right headlight (right low beam) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right headlight (right low beam). Refer to Replacement Of Right Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.58 Left Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram Refer to chassis smart electrical box 3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front left combination light (left daytime running light). Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Left Daytime Running Light, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front left combination light (left daytime running light) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left combination light (left daytime running light). Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Combination Lamp Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.59 Right Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1813 | OUT24:RightRunning load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front right combination light (right daytime running light) 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1819 | OUT24:RightRunning overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E184B | OUT24:RightRunning over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front right combination light (right daytime running light). Identification light O318f Z01 Ground
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1A13 | OUT26:IBS load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Intelligent battery sensor IBS 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1A19 | OUT26:IBS overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E1A4B | OUT26:IBS over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Right Daytime Running Light, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front right combination light (right daytime running light) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right combination light (right daytime running light). Refer to Replacement Of Right Front Combination Lamp Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.60 IBS Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IBS power supply harness of the battery.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1B13 | OUT27:WorkingLights load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Rear work light 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1B19 | OUT27:WorkingLights overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E1B4B | OUT27:WorkingLights over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Intelligent Battery Sensor, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the intelligent battery sensor operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace Intelligent battery sensor IBS. Refer to Replacement Of Smart Battery Sensors Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.61 Rear Work Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear work light.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E1E13 | OUT35:EPB load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.EPB 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E1E19 | OUT35:EPB overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E1E4B | OUT35:EPB over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Rear Work Light, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the rear work light operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the work light. Refer to Replacement of rear work light Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.62 EPB Power Supply Circuit Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation.Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the EPB power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2513 | OUT37:VDCB load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.VDC 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2519 | OUT37:VDCB overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E254B | OUT37:VDCB over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Electronic Parking, On/Off" action test. Check the electronic parking power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN.Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.63 VDC Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the VDC power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2713 | OUT39: MediumRearaxleTCU load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Rear axle MCU in electric drive 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2719 | OUT39: MediumRearaxleTCU overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E274B | OUT39: MediumRearaxleTCU over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - VBU-B+_VDC, On/Off" action test. Check if the VDC B+power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.64 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Rear Axle MCU In The Electric Drive
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear axle MCU in the electric drive.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2813 | OUT40: AirHandlingUnit load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Air handling unit 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2819 | OUT40: AirHandlingUnit overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E284B | OUT40: AirHandlingUnit over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Mid/Rear axle MCU, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the mid/rear axle MCU operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear axle MCU in the electric drive. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.65 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Air Handling Unit
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the air handling unit. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2913 | OUT41: HighLowPitchElectric- Horn load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Electric horn 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2919 | OUT41: HighLowPitchElectric- Horn overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E294B | OUT41: HighLowPitchElectric- Horn over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Air Handling Unit, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the air handling unit operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the air handling unit. Refer to Replacement Of Air Handling Unit Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.66 Electric Horn Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the electric horn. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2F13 | OUT47:AirHorn load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Air horn 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2F19 | OUT47:AirHorn overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E2F4B | OUT47:AirHorn over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - High/Low Frequency Electric Speaker, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the high/low frequency electric speaker operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the electric horn. Refer to Replacement Of Electric Horn Assembly - bass . Replacement Of Electric Horn Assembly - High Frequency Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.67 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Gas Horn
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the air horn. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2C13 | OUT44:Battery pack load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Battery pack 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2C19 | OUT44:Battery pack overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E2C4B | OUT44:Battery pack over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - air horn, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the air horn operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the air horn. Refer to Replacement Of Air Horn Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.68 Battery Pack Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the Battery pack. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2D13 | OUT45: AuxiDrivMultiOne load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2D19 | OUT45: AuxiDrivMultiOne overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E2D4B | OUT45: AuxiDrivMultiOne over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Battery pack, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the Battery pack operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the battery pack. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) . Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.69 Power Distribution Unit Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power distribution unit power supply harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2E13 | OUT46: BatWaterHeatComp load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2. Thermal management unit (battery water heater) 3. Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2E19 | OUT46: BatWaterHeatComp overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E2E4B | OUT46: BatWaterHeatComp over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Auxiliary Drive Multi in One, On/Off" action test. Check if the power distribution unit power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.70 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Battery Water Heater
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the thermal management unit (battery water heater).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E2A13 | OUT42:AVAS load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Low speed alarm module 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E2A19 | OUT42:AVAS overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E2A4B | OUT42:AVAS over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Battery Water Heater, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the thermal management unit (battery water heater) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the thermal management unit (battery water heater). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.71 Low Speed Alarm Module Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the low-speed alarm module. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E3013 | OUT48:TPMS load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Rear tire pressure module 3.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E3019 | OUT48:TPMS overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E304B | OUT48:TPMS over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Low Speed Pedestrian Alarm, On/Off" action test. Check if the low-speed pedestrian alarm power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low Speed Alarm Module (AVAS) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.72 Tire Pressure Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear tire pressure module. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B1E3113 | OUT49: ChassisSensors load open circuit | When the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle pressure sensor 3.Rear axle pressure sensor 4.Smart junction box DOWN |
| B1E3119 | OUT49: ChassisSensors overcurrent | When the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on | |
| B1E314B | OUT49: ChassisSensors over temperature | When the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on |
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Tire Pressure+Active Grille Shutter, On/Off" action test. Check if the tire pressure/active grille power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.73 Chassis Sensor Power Supply Circuit Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front axle pressure sensor and the rear axle pressure sensor.
Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Chassis Sensor Power Supply, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the front and rear axle pressure sensors operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front and rear axle pressure sensors. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.4.6.74 12V Car Power Supply Failure
1.Circuit Diagram


2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F02 of the 12V junction box. Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery
Step 4:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 5:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 6:Check the wire harness between the 12V vehicle power supply and DCDC3. Step 7:Replace the 12V car power supply. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Power Supply (12V)
7.4.6.75 Car Refrigerator Failure
1.Circuit Diagram


2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F08 of the 12V junction box. Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery
Step 4:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 5:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 6:Check the wire harness between the car refrigerator and DCDC3. Step 7:Replace the car refrigerator.
7.4.6.76 Trailer Turn Signal Failure
1.Circuit Diagram



2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F07 of the 12V junction box. Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery
Step 4:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 5:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 6:Check the wire harness between the trailer turn signal controller and DCDC3. Step 7:Check the turn signal power signal wire harness between the trailer turn signal controller and the Trailer cable socket 1/ 2. Step 8:Replace the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 9:Replace the trailer turn signal controller.
7.4.6.77 Rear Side - Marker Light Failure
1.Circuit Diagram


2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F05 of the 12V junction box.
Step 3:Remove the tail light relay and Measure there is an open circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the tail light relay. Connect an external 12V power supply to terminal 85 of the tail light relay and ground terminal 86, then Measure there is a closed circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the tail light relay. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the tail light relay. Step 4:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Step 5:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 6:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 7:Check the wire harness between the tail light relay and DCDC3. Step 8:Check the control wire harness between the tail light relay and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 9:Check the grounding wire harness of the tail light relay. Step 10:Check the rear side - marker light power wire harness between the tail - light relay and the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 11:Check the grounding wire harness of the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 12:Replace the trailer cable socket 1/2.
7.4.6.78 Side - Marker - Light Failure
1.Circuit Diagram


2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F04 of the 12V junction box.
Step 3:Remove the marker light relay and Measure there is an open - circuit between Pin 30 and Pin 87 of the marker light relay. Connect an external 12V power supply to Pin 85 of the marker light relay and ground Pin 86, then Measure there is a closed - circuit between Pin 30 and Pin 87 of the marker light relay. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the marker light relay. Step 4:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Step 5:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 6:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 7:Check the wire harness between the marker - light relay and DCDC3. Step 8:Check the control wire harness between the marker - light relay and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 9:Check the grounding wire harness of the marker - light relay. Step 10:Check the side - marker - light power wire harness between the marker - light relay and the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 11:Check the ground wire harness of the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 12:Replace the trailer cable socket 1/2.
7.4.6.79 Brake Lamp Failure
1.Circuit Diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F06 of the 12V junction box.
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD2(H) and BCANFD2(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
Step 3:Remove the brake lamp relay and Measure there is an open circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the brake lamp relay. Connect an external 12V power supply to terminal 85 of the brake lamp relay and ground terminal 86, then Measure there is a closed circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the brake lamp relay. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the brake lamp relay. Step 4:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Step 5:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 6:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 7:Check the wire harness between the brake lamp relay and DCDC3. Step 8:Check the control wire harness between the brake lamp relay and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 9:Check the grounding wire harness of the brake lamp relay. Step 10:Check the brake lamp power wire harness between the brake lamp relay and the trailer cable socket 2. Step 11:Check the ground wire harness of the trailer cable socket 2. Step 12:Replace the trailer cable socket 2.
7.4.6.80 Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAND2 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the voltage of the BCAND2 bus. No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAND2 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAND2 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAND2 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAND2 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAND2 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAND2 bus. C. Measure the BCAND2 bus resistance between each module and the smart junction box DOWN in sequence to ensure it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the BCAND2 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAND2 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAND2 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAND2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAND2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the electric horn assembly and the sealing crossbeam | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75 ) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the electric horn assembly and the sealing crossbeam | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75 ) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the air horn and the air horn bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75 ) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the horn bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the horn bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
7.5 Electric Horn Device
7.5.1 Specifications
7.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.5.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Bass Electric Horn 6. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 2. Tweeter Electric Horn 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Trumpet Type Horn 8. Hexagon Flange Nut 4. Trumpet Type Horn Bracket 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt
7.5.3 Inspect
7.5.3.1 Inspection of Horn
1. Park the vehicle, press the horn button on the steering wheel to check the electric horn is working properly. 2. Press the electric/air horn change-over switch, press the horn switch repeatedly, and check whether the air horn is working properly.

7.5.4 Dismantling and Installation
7.5.4.1 Replacement of Electric Horn Assembly - low Pitch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - low pitch.
13 Remove 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - low pitch. 14 Remove the electric horn assembly - low pitch. Installation Procedures 1 Move the electric horn assembly - low pitch to the mounting position. 2 Install and tighten 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - low pitch.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - low pitch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.
7.5.4.2 Replacement of Electric Horn Assembly - High Pitch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket.
9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - high pitch. 13 Remove 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - high pitch. 14 Remove the electric horn assembly - high pitch. Installation Procedures


1 Move the electric horn assembly - high pitch to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - high pitch.
Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - high pitch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.
7.5.4.3 Replacement of Air Horn
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the electric oil pump. 14 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the air horn.

15 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the air horn. 16 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the air horn. 17 Remove the air horn. Installation Procedures


1 Move the air horn to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the air horn.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 air pipe of the air horn. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the air horn.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the electric oil pump. 6 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 7 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 8 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 9 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 12 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 13 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 14 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the 120V power supply body to the rear enclosure panel assembly | M5 | (6.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
7.6 Vehicle-mounted Power Supply Device
7.6.1 Specifications
7.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications


7.6.2 Dismantling and Installation
7.6.2.1 Replacement of 120V Power
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the 120V power. 5 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the 120V power.
6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the 120V power. 7 Remove the 120V power. Installation Procedures 1 Move the 120V power to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the 120V power.
Torque: (6.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 1 fixing clip of the 120V power. 4 Connect 3 harness connectors of the 120V power.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.6.2.2 Replacement of Vehicle Power Supply (12V)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the vehicle power supply (12V). 5 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). Installation Procedures 1 Move the vehicle power supply (12V) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the vehicle power supply (12V).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

7.6.2.3 Replacement of 120V Receptacle
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the 120V receptacle. 5 Remove the 120V receptacle. Installation Procedures 1 Move the 120V receptacle to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the 120V receptacle.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

7.6.2.4 Replacement of Rear USB Interface
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Detach the rear USB interface. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear USB interface. 6 Remove the rear USB interface. Installation Procedures


1 Move the rear USB interface to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear USB interface.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the rear USB interface. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.6.2.5 Replacement of Front USB Interface
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the front USB interface. 5 Remove the front USB interface. Installation Procedures 1 Move the front USB interface to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connectors of the front USB interface.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.


7.7 Switch Device
7.7.1 Decomposition Diagram
7.7.1.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Sleeper Switch Devices 7. Lh Switch Group at Instrument Panel 2. Power Sliding Door 9. Switch-Locker Lighting 3. Rh Switch Group at Instrument Panel 10. Self-Tapping Screw 4. Clock-Spring 11. Hex Socket Set Screw 5. Multi-Function Switch 12. Hex Socket Set Screw 6. Multi-Function Switch Bracket
7.7.2 System Schematic Diagram
7.7.2.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
Right combination switch - gear position Sleeper switch devices
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The vehicle cannot shift gears | 1.Shift switch stuck or damaged | Check the gear shift switch and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch |
| 2. Shift switch malfunction | Refer to Shift Switch Power Failure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Battery voltage is too high | Refer to Shift Switch Power Fault |
| B111716 | Battery voltage is too low | |
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | Refer to Shift Switch Communication Fault |
| U019887 | Lost communication with TGW | |
| U015687 | Communication with CDCU is lost | |
| U012287 | Communication with VDC is lost | |
| P280096 | Shift switch sensor malfunction | Refer to Shift Switch Internal Fault |
| P280171 | Gear shift lever jamming failure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | Power supply voltage below threshold | Refer to Sleeper Switch Devices Power Fault |
| B111717 | Power supply voltage above threshold |
7.7.3 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.7.3.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing faults in the switch device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the switch device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of switch devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment
of faulty parts. 7.7.3.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket installation devices that may affect the operation of the switchgear system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the switchgear system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.7.3.3 Fault Symptom Table
7.7.3.4 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.7.3.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
GSM SSM
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U007E88 | BCANFD3 BusOff | Refer to Sleeper Switch Devices Communication Fault |
| U019887 | lost communication with T-BOX | |
| U014087 | lost communication with BDCU | |
| U016487 | lost communication with A/C | |
| U015687 | lost communication with CDCU | |
| U012287 | lost communication with VDC | |
| U220A00 | CANFD3 network management limp home |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | Battery voltage is too high | Voltage > 32V, t > 2000ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Shift switch |
| B111716 | Battery voltage is too low | Voltage < 18V, t > 2000ms |
7.7.3.6 Shift Switch Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U008E88 | PCAN4 BusOff | 1.BUSOFF lasts more than 8 times 2.The current voltage is 18~32V | 1. Wiring harness 2. Shift switch |
| U019887 | Lost communication with TGW | 1.KL15 ON; 2.The current voltage is 18~32V 3.When GSM loses communication with TGW (0x18FEE6EEx) for more than 5000ms, GSM sets the current DTC | |
| U015687 | Communication with CDCU is lost | 1.KL15 ON; 2.The current voltage is 18~32V 3.When GSM loses communication with CDCU (0x18FEC1EEx) for more than 5000 ms, GSM sets the current DTC | |
| U012287 | Communication with VDC is lost | 1.KL15 ON; 2.The current voltage is 18~32V 3.When GSM loses communication with VDC (0x18FEF100x) for more than 1000 ms, GSM sets the current DTC |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the shift switch? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the gear shift switch. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.7.3.7 Shift Switch Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| P280096 | Shift switch sensor malfunction | 1.Gear sensor failure lasts for 3S 2.The current voltage is 18~32V | 1.Shift switch |
| P280171 | Gear shift lever jamming failure | 1.The gear stays in a non-default position for 60 seconds 2.The current voltage is between 18 and 32V |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | Voltage < 18V, t > 500ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Sleeper switch devices |
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.7.3.8 Shift Switch Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 4:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.7.3.9 Sleeper Switch Devices Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007E88 | BCANFD3 BusOff | eight times in a row | 1. Wiring harness 2.Sleeper switch devices |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With T-Box | 0x18FEE6EE(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms) | |
| U014087 | lost communication with BDCU | 0x14FD1721(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms) | |
| U016487 | lost communication with A/C | 0x18FF2419(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms) | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | 0x18FEC1EE(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms) | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | 0x18FEF100(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms) | |
| U220A00 | CANFD3 network management limp home | 2 seconds in limphome state |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the sleeper switch devices? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harnesses of the sleep switch devices. Step 5:Sleep switch devices rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the sleeper switch devices. Refer to Replacement Of Sleep Switch Devices Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.7.3.10 Sleeper Switch Devices Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to BInspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN4(H) and PCAN4 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN4 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN4 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the sleep switch devices. Step 5:Replace the sleeper switch devices. Refer to Replacement Of Sleep Switch Devices Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.7.3.11 Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the PCAN4 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN4 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| PCAN4 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| PCAN4 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN4 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN4 bus. C. Measure the PCAN4 bus resistance between each module and the shift switch in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN4 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN4 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN4 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. No Yes

7.7.4 Dismantling and Installation
7.7.4.1 Replacement of Left Central Control Switch Group
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 5 Remove 3 fixing screws of the left central control switch group. 6 Remove the left central control switch group. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left central control switch group to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the left central control switch group.
3 Install the left switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.7.4.2 Replacement of Right Central Control Switch Group
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 5 Remove 3 fixing screws of the right central control switch group. 6 Remove the right central control switch group. Installation Procedures
1 Move the right central control switch group to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the right central control switch group. 3 Install the right switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.7.4.3 Replacement of SSM
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Pry off the SSM.
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the SSM. 6 Remove the SSM. Installation Procedures 1 Move the SSM to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the SSM.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the SSM. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to rewrite the configuration word.
7.7.4.4 Replacement of Electric Sliding Door Switch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Pry off the electric sliding door switch. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric sliding door switch. 6 Remove the electric sliding door switch. Installation Procedures


1 Move the electric sliding door switch to the mounting position. 2 Connect1 harness connector of the electric sliding door switch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the electric sliding door switch. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.7.4.5 Replacement of Combination Switch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly.
5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 8 Remove the clock spring. 9 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the combination switch. 10 Detach the combination switch clip. 11 Remove the combination switch. Installation Procedures


10 Move the combination switch to the mounting position. 11 Connect the combination switch clip. 3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the combination switch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the clock spring. 5 Install the steering wheel assembly. 6 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Install the combination switch lower shield. 8 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
7.7.4.6 Replacement of Clock Spring
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the clock spring. 9 Remove the clock spring. Installation Procedures 1 Move the clock spring to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 harness connector of the clock spring.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the steering wheel assembly. 4 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 5 Install the combination switch lower shield.

6 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

7.7.4.7 Replacement of Storage Compartment Lamp Switch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove 1 fixing screw of the storage compartment lamp switch.
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the storage compartment lamp switch. 6 Remove the storage compartment lamp switch. Installation Procedures 1 Move the storage compartment lamp switch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the storage compartment lamp switch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 1 fixing screw of the storage compartment lamp switch. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.8 Body Control Module (BCM) Device
7.8.1 Description and Operation
7.8.1.1 Description and Operation
1. Mobile phone wireless charging is a wireless energy transfer process in which the energy is transferred from the transmitting coil to the receiving coil based on the principle of electromagnetic induction. 2. The mobile phone wireless charging function can be achieved by placing a mobile phone that supports wireless charging on a charging surface. 3. The mobile phone wireless charging function is not applicable to all mobile phones, but only to "Qi" certified mobile phones.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the low-speed alarm module (AVAS) and the low- speed alarm bracket assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the body controller and the lower left dashboard controller fixing bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the white body assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the white body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the dashboard device | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket and the lower left bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the EBS bracket to the lower left instrument panel controller fixing bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the column lock and the steering column assembly | M8 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
7.8.2 Specifications
7.8.2.1 Fastener Specifications

7.8.3 Decomposition Diagram
7.8.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Body Domain Control Uint 7. DCM 2. NFC Antenna 8. Fixing Bracket-Lh 3. Wpc(Wireless Power Consortium) 9. Controller Bracket Assy 4. Electrical Steering Colum Lock 10. EBS Bracket 5. Bluetooth Antenna-Frt 11. NFC+Bluetooth Antenna 6. Bluetooth Antenna (Left) In New Energy Vehicles 12. NFC Key
1. Cockpit Domain Controller 13. Surround-Sound Speaker 2. Cockpit Domain Controller Bracket 14. DVR Camera(Digital Video Recorder Camera) 3. IVI Screen 15. Glass Antenna Amplifier 4. CAR Screen 16. MIC 5. IPC Screen 17. Occupancy Monitoring System Camera 6. Rear Shell Plugged Cover 18. Selfie Camera Bracket 7. AR-HUD 19. Rear-View Camera 8. Squawker 20. Rear-View Camera Bracket 9. Tweeter 21. Rear View Camera 10. Woofer 22. Driver Monitor System Camera 11. Woofer Bracket Left 23. Driver Monitor System Camera Mount 12. Woofer Bracket Right

7.8.4 System Schematic Diagram
7.8.4.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to BDCU Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | |
| U015787 | On the BCANFD4 network, the BDCU cannot receive the CAN packet ADCU_ LCMD whose ID is 0x18FE4131, and the communication between the BDCU and the ADCU node fails. Procedure | Refer to BDCU Communication Fault |
| U220200 | The BDCU on BCANFD3 limps home (send ID: 0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome). Receive ID:0x18FFF058, (SSM_NM_Limphome)). The send or receive timeout occurred. Procedure | |
| U018087 | There is no CAN message ABL_Light with the ID of 0x18FF1455 received by BDCU on the BCANFD1 network, and the communication with the ADBL node is lost | |
| U018087 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal |
7.8.5 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.8.5.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing faults in the vehicle body controller device, refer to Description And Operation Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the vehicle body controller device before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the vehicle body controller device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the
diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.8.5.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the vehicle body control system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the vehicle body control system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.8.5.3 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there are any fault codes output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.8.5.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
BDCU
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U01A187 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUN_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1659, losing communication with the SJBUN node | |
| U01A087 | The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUP_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1554, losing communication with the SJBUP node | |
| U012787 | The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network is unable to receive the CAN message TPMS_F_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF433, losing communication with the TPMS_F node | |
| U016487 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message AC_ RearStatus with the ID of 0x18FF2419, losing communication with the AC node | |
| U018187 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message ADBR_Light with the ID of 0x18FF145A, losing communication with the ADBR node | |
| U014187 | The BDCU on the BCAND2 network cannot receive the CAN message AVA_ Status with ID 0x18FF0E57 and has lost communication with the AVAS node | |
| U02A687 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SDM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F1D, losing communication with the SDM node | |
| U019987 | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message DCM_ DC2 with the ID of 0x18FDA54F, losing communication with the DCM node | |
| U018887 | The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message EPM_ Motor with the ID of 0x18F00E52, losing communication with the EPM node |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U014487 | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network is unable to receive the CAN message PWC_CS with the ID of 0x18FF0953 and loses communication with the PWC node | |
| U024A87 | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message SSM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F58 and loses communication with the SSM node | |
| U012F87 | The BDCU on the BCANFD4 network fails to receive the CAN message TPMS_Trailer_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF45D and loses communication with the TPMS_Trailer node | |
| U021287 | The BDCU on the BCAN5 network fails to receive the CAN message ESCL_ STATUS with the ID of 0x18FE054D and loses communication with the ESCL node | |
| U019887 | The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message TGW_TD_Time with the ID of 0x18FEE6EE and loses communication with the TGW node | |
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 network Busoff | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 network Busoff | |
| U007E88 | BCANFD3 network Busoff | |
| U007F88 | BCANFD4 network Busoff | |
| U008388 | BCANFD5 network Busoff | |
| U008488 | BCAN6 network Busoff | |
| U10538A | The BDCU on the BCAN6 network fails to receive the CAN message BCANFD6_RXID_NBSM_0x200 with the ID of 0x200 and loses communication with the Bluetooth node |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U015687 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FEC1EE (CDCU_VDHR), resulting in a timeout error and leading to the belief that it has lost contact with the CDCU | |
| U012287 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FCC231 (VDC_HSS1), which leads to a timeout error and makes it consider that it has lost contact with the VDCU | |
| U012187 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x08FE6E0B (EBS_HRW) and thus generates a timeout error, believing that it has lost contact with the EBS | |
| U012887 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FE1250 (EPBS1_EPB), which results in a timeout error and leads to the belief that it has lost contact with the EPB | |
| U007588 | CANFD3 BusOff | |
| U220600 | On BCANFD1, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sends ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_Limphome), and receives IDs:0x18FFF054 (SJBUP_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF055 (ADBL_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_NM_ Limphome)), and a send or receive timeout occurs | |
| U220700 | On BCANFD2, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_Limphome) and receiving IDs: 0x18FFF05A (ADBR_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_NM_ Limphome)), resulting in a send or receive timeout |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U220A00 | On BCANFD3, the BDCU enters limp- home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_Limphome) and receiving ID:0x18FFF058 (SSM_NM_ Limphome)), which results in a send or receive timeout | |
| U015788 | Communication with CAMF is lost | |
| U238084 | SQI insufficient | Refer to BDCU Internal Fault |
| U238208 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | |
| U238108 | Unexpected Ethernet connection loss | Refer to BDCU Ethernet Fault |
| U120387 | The BDCU on the LIN1 network fails to receive the slave - response message RSL1 with the ID of 0x12, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal | Refer to BDCU LIN1 Communication Fault |
| U105388 | The BDCU on the LIN1 network can't receive the slave - response message RSL2 with the ID of 0x13, and there is an abnormal communication with the RSL node | |
| U105389 | On the LIN1 network, the BDCU is unable to receive the slave - response message RSL3 with an ID of 0x14, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal | |
| B151635 | Main vehicle right front turn signal Fault | Refer to Right Front Turn Signal Fault |
| B151735 | Main vehicle left front turn signal Fault | Refer to Left Front Turn Signal Fault |
| B152532 | The high beam/overtaking switch is faulty | Refer to High Beam Overtaking Switch Fault |
| B152632 | The wiper combination switch is faulty | Refer to Wiper Switch Fault |
| B152933 | The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty | Refer to High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault |
| B152A33 | The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty | |
| B153036 | The ON power feedback of the electrical box is faulty | Refer to KL15 Power Feedback Signal Fault |
| B15353F | The power-on command output is faulty | Refer to KL15 Power On/off Command Output Signal Fault |
| B15363F | The power-off command output is faulty | |
| B153831 | The power supply to the height adjustment module of the low light is faulty | Refer to Headlight Adjustment Motor Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B153C31 | The power supply to the left center left rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faulty | Refer to Left Center Rear Turn Signal Fault |
| B153D31 | The power supply of the right, middle and right rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faulty | Refer to Right Center Rear Turn Signal Fault |
| B15403F | The wiper is faulty at low speed | Refer to Wiper Motor Low-speed Signal Fault |
| B15413F | High-speed wiper failure | Refer to High Speed Signal Fault Of Wiper Motor |
| B15423F | The wiper washing motor is faulty | Refer to Washing Motor Fault |
| B154437 | Rearview Mirror Heating Failure | Refer to Rearview Mirror Heating Fault |
| B15453F | The charging port is unlocked. Procedure | Refer to Charging Port Cover Lock Motor Fault |
| B15463F | The charging port is blocked | |
| B15493F | External toolbox motor unlocking failure | Refer to External Toolbox Motor Fault |
| B154A3F | External toolbox motor lockout failure | |
| B154B3F | The skylight visor opening function failed | Refer to Fault Of The Sunroof Sunshade |
| B154C3F | The awning curtain closing function is faulty | |
| B154D37 | The upward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails | Refer to Left Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault |
| B154E37 | The downward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails | |
| B154F37 | The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the left | |
| B155037 | The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right | |
| B155137 | The right rearview mirror fails to adjust upwards | Refer to Right Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault |
| B155237 | Right rearview mirror downward adjustment failure | |
| B155337 | The left adjustment of the right rearview mirror fails | |
| B155437 | The right rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right | |
| B15573F | The interwheel solenoid valve is faulty | Refer to Interwheel Lock Solenoid Valve Fault |
| B155D31 | Main driver reading light power supply failure | Refer to Front Left Reading Light Fault |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B155E31 | Sleeper reading lamp power supply failure | Refer to Sleeper Reading Light Fault |
| B155F31 | The ceiling light power supply is faulty | Refer to Sky Roof Light Fault |
| B156031 | The power supply of the indicator lamp is faulty | Refer to Position Lamp Fault |
| B156331 | The backlight lighting power supply is faulty | Refer to Backlight Power Fault |
| B156431 | Danger alarm indicator key light power supply failure | Refer to Hazard Alarm Switch Backlight Power Fault |
| B156B31 | Secondary car window rising power supply failure | Refer to Right window regulator Fault |
| B156C31 | Secondary car window down power supply failure | |
| B156931 | Main driving window rising power supply failure | Refer to Left window regulator Fault |
| B156A31 | Main driving window down power supply failure |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | When the supply voltage rises to the upper limit of the diagnostic voltage, the ECU immediately stops the network-related diagnostic function. When the supply voltage is in the overvoltage state for 2 seconds, the overvoltage DTC is recorded | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.BDCU |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | When the supply voltage drops below the diagnostic voltage limit, the ECU immediately stops the network- related diagnostic function. When the supply voltage is in the undervoltage state for 2 seconds, the undervoltage DTC is recorded |
7.8.5.5 BDCU Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| IP17-7 IP17-6 | ||
|---|---|---|
Total body power supply B+ L22


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U015787 | On the BCANFD4 network, the BDCU cannot receive the CAN packet ADCU_ LCMD whose ID is 0x18FE4131, and the communication between the BDCU and the ADCU node fails. Procedure | 1.The timeout period for receiving CAN ADCU_LCMD reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL30 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | 1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU |
| U220200 | The BDCU on BCANFD3 limps home (send ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome). Receive ID:0x18FFF058, (SSM_NM_ Limphome)). The send or receive timeout occurred. Procedure | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 limps home, resulting in a send or receive timeout. | |
| U018087 | There is no CAN message ABL_Light with the ID of 0x18FF1455 received by BDCU on the BCANFD1 network, and the communication with the ADBL node is lost | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets ABL_ LightJIE reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides BDCU? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the BDCU power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.6 BDCU Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U018087 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | 1.In section 1 and 4_1, add DID:2506 Debug log path information, 2507 Bluetooth primary node VIN code, 2508 Bluetooth primary node serial number, 2509 Bluetooth primary node software version, 250A Bluetooth left node software version, 250B Bluetooth right node software version, and 250C Bluetooth front node software version | |
| U01A187 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUN_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1659, losing communication with the SJBUN node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN message SJBUN_Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.network wake up; 3.Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U01A087 | The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUP_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1554, losing communication with the SJBUP node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN message SJBUP_Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U012787 | The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network is unable to receive the CAN message TPMS_ F_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF433, losing communication with the TPMS_F node | 1. The TPMS_F_TirePressure receiving timeout period reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 500 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U016487 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message AC_ RearStatus with the ID of 0x18FF2419, losing communication with the AC node | 1.The receiving timeout of the CAN message AC_ RearStatus reaches 10 * Cycle (where Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U018187 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message ADBR_ Light with the ID of 0x18FF145A, losing communication with the ADBR node | 1.The receiving timeout of the CAN message ADBR_ Light reaches 10 * Cycle (where Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U014187 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message AVAS_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0E57, losing communication with the AVAS node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packet AVAS_ Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 500 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U02A687 | The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SDM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F1D, losing communication with the SDM node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN SJBUN_Status packets reaches 5000 ms(Cycle = 1000 ms). 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U019987 | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message DCM_ DC2 with the ID of 0x18FDA54F, losing communication with the DCM node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN DCM_DC2 packets reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2. Power on the DCM. 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U018887 | The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message EPM_Motor with the ID of 0x18F00E52, losing communication with the EPM node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packet EPM_ Motor reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 200 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U014487 | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network is unable to receive the CAN message PWC_ CS with the ID of 0x18FF0953 and loses communication with the PWC node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets PWC_ CS reaches 5000(Cycle = 1000 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U024A87 | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message SSM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F58 and loses communication with the SSM node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packet SSM_ Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 200 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U012F87 | The BDCU on the BCANFD4 network fails to receive the CAN message TPMS_ Trailer_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF45D and loses communication with the TPMS_Trailer node | 1. The TPMS_Trailer_TirePressure receive timeout period reaches 5000 (Cycle = 50000 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U021287 | The BDCU on the BCAN5 network fails to receive the CAN message ESCL_ STATUS with the ID of 0x18FE054D and loses communication with the ESCL node | 1.The receiving timeout of the CAN message ESCL_ STATUS reaches 10 * Cycle (where Cycle = 50 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U019887 | The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message TGW_TD_ Time with the ID of 0x18FEE6EE and loses communication with the TGW node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN TGW_TD_ Time packets reaches 5000(Cycle = 1000 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 network Busoff | 1. The BCANFD1 network CAN controller enters the BusOff state. 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U007D88 | BCANFD2 network Busoff | 1. The BCANFD2 network CAN controller enters the BusOff state. 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U007E88 | BCANFD3 network Busoff | 1. The BCANFD3 network CAN controller enters BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U007F88 | BCANFD4 network Busoff | 1. The BCANFD4 network CAN controller enters BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U008388 | BCANFD5 network Busoff | 1. The BCANFD5 network CAN controller enters BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U008488 | BCAN6 network Busoff | 1. The BCAN6 network CAN controller enters the BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U10538A | The BDCU on the BCAN6 network fails to receive the CAN message BCANFD6_ RXID_NBSM_0x200 with the ID of 0x200 and loses communication with the Bluetooth node | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets BCANFD6_RXID_NBSM_0x200 reaches 10 x Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U015687 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FEC1EE (CDCU_ VDHR), resulting in a timeout error and leading to the belief that it has lost contact with the CDCU | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN CDCU_VDHR packets reaches 10000(Cycle = 1000ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U012287 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FCC231 (VDC_ HSS1), which leads to a timeout error and makes it consider that it has lost contact with the VDCU | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets VDC_ HSS1 reaches 1000(Cycle = 100ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U012187 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x08FE6E0B (EBS_ HRW) and thus generates a timeout error, believing that it has lost contact with the EBS | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN EBS_HRW packets reaches 20(Cycle = 200ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U012887 | The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FE1250 (EPBS1_ EPB), which results in a timeout error and leads to the belief that it has lost contact with the EPB | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets VDC_ HSS1 reaches 1000(Cycle = 100ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U007588 | CANFD3 BusOff | CANFD3 BusOff occurs for five consecutive times |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U220600 | On BCANFD1, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sends ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome), and receives IDs:0x18FFF054 (SJBUP_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF055 (ADBL_ NM_Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_ NM_Limphome)), and a send or receive timeout occurs | The BDCU on BCANFD1 limps home, resulting in sending or receiving timeout. | |
| U220700 | On BCANFD2, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome) and receiving IDs:0x18FFF05A (ADBR_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_ NM_Limphome)), resulting in a send or receive timeout | The BDCU on BCANFD2 limps home, resulting in sending or receiving timeout. | |
| U220A00 | On BCANFD3, the BDCU enters limp- home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome) and receiving ID:0x18FFF058 (SSM_NM_ Limphome)), which results in a send or receive timeout | The BDCU on the BCANFD3 limps home, resulting in a send or receive timeout. |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U015788 | Communication with CAMF is lost | 1. The timeout period for receiving CAN CAMF_Stauts reaches 10 x Cycle (Cycle =100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range; |
2.Circuit Diagram
| IP17-7 IP17-6 | ||
|---|---|---|
Total body power supply B+ L22




3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCAN6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAN6 Bus Network Integrity Ground Z01 B16-5
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U238084 | SQI insufficient | SQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s | 1.BDCU |
| U238208 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | Unable to read SWITCH chip register |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U238108 | Unexpected Ethernet connection loss | If the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported | 1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the BCANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the BCAN5 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAN5 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Check the BCAND2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity Step 9:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 10:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 11:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.7 BDCU Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 4:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.8 BDCU Ethernet Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BDCU Ethernet harness. Ground Z01 B16-5
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U120387 | The BDCU on the LIN1 network fails to receive the slave - response message RSL1 with the ID of 0x12, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal | 1. The BDCU cannot receive response packet RSL1 from the slave whose ID is 0x12. 2, KL15 on; 3, diagnostic voltage range; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Sunshine and rainfall sensor 3.BDCU |
| U105388 | The BDCU on the LIN1 network can't receive the slave - response message RSL2 with the ID of 0x13, and there is an abnormal communication with the RSL node | 1. The BDCU cannot receive response packet RSL3 from the slave machine whose ID is 0x13. 2, KL15 on; 3, diagnostic voltage range; | |
| U105389 | On the LIN1 network, the BDCU is unable to receive the slave - response message RSL3 with an ID of 0x14, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal | 1. The BDCU cannot receive response packet RSL3 from the slave whose ID is 0x14. 2, KL15 on; 3, diagnostic voltage range; |
Step 4:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.9 BDCU LIN1 Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the LIN1 network harness between the BDCU and the sunlight rain sensor.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B151635 | Main vehicle right front turn signal malfunction | 1, KL15 on; 2. After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front right combination lamp (right front turn signal) 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Replace the sunlight and rain sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Sunshine Rainfall Sensor Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.10 Right Front Turn Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the front right combination light (right front turn signal light). Ground Z01 B16-5
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B151735 | Main vehicle left front turn signal malfunction | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front left combination lamp (left front turn signal) 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the front right combination lamp (right front turn signal lamp). Step 5:Connect the front right combination lamp (right front turn signal) to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the front right combination lamp (right front turn signal) lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right combination light (right front turn signal light). Refer to Replacement Of Right Front Combination Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.11 Left Front Turn Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B152532 | The high beam/ overtaking switch is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch) 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal). Step 5:Connect the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal) to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal) lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal). Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Combination Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.12 High Beam Overtaking Switch Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| IP17-7 IP17-6 | ||
|---|---|---|

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch). Total body power supply B+ L22
| Operation | Switch Status |
|---|---|
| Turn on high beam/passing lights | Turn on the high beam/overtaking switch |
| Turn off high beam/passing lights | High beam/overtaking switch disconnected |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B152632 | The wiper combination switch is faulty | 1, KL15 on; 2. After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left combination switch (wiper switch) 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check if the left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch). Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.13 Wiper Switch Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| IP17-7 IP17-6 | ||
|---|---|---|

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left combination switch (wiper switch). Total body power supply B+ L22
| Operation | Switch Status |
|---|---|
| Turn on the wiper at low speed | Wiper switch low gear on |
| Turn off the wiper at low speed | Wiper switch low gear disconnected |
| Turn on the wiper high gear | Wiper switch on high gear |
| Turn off the windshield wipers in high gear | Wiper switch high gear disconnected |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B152933 | The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty | 1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage | 1. Wiring harness 2.Left thermal management unit (left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor)) 3.BDCU |
| B152A33 | The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty | 1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage |
Step 4:Check if the left combination switch (wiper switch) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left combination switch (wiper switch). Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.14 High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| ylppus a414B | V5 ylppus rewop b414B | ylirosnes b634B | |||

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor). 5V power
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B153036 | The ON power feedback of the electrical box is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage | 1. Wiring harness 2.Smart junction box DOWN 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check if the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.15 KL15 Power Feedback Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15353F | The power-on command output is faulty | 1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage | 1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU |
| B15363F | The power-off command output is faulty | 1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage |
Step 3:Check if there are any fault codes related to the power supply circuit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting power supply circuit related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the KL15 power feedback harness between the BDCU and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.16 KL15 Power On/off Command Output Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B153831 | The power supply to the height adjustment module of the low light is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage | 1. Wiring harness 2.Headlight adjustment motor 3.BDCU |
Step 3:Check if there are any fault codes related to the power supply circuit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting power supply circuit related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the hard wire collection harness between BDCU, smart junction box DOWN, and smart junction box UP. Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.17 Headlight Adjustment Motor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| IP17-7 IP17-6 | ||
|---|---|---|

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the BDCU and the headlight adjustment motor. Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B153C31 | The power supply to the left center left rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage | 1. Wiring harness 2.Left middle rear turn signal 3.BDCU |
Step 4:The headlight adjustment motor is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the headlight adjustment motor is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the headlight adjustment motor. Refer to Replacement of left headlight . Replacement Of Right Headlight Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.18 Left Center Rear Turn Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left middle rear turn signal. Ground Z01 B16-5
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B153D31 | The power supply of the right, middle and right rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage | 1. Wiring harness 2.Right center rear turn signal 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the left middle rear turn signal. Step 5:Connect the left middle rear turn signal to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the left middle rear turn signal lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left middle rear turn signal. Refer to Replacement Of Left-Side Combination Marker Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.19 Right Center Rear Turn Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the right center rear turn signal.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15403F | The wiper is faulty at low speed | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Wiper motor 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the right middle rear turn signal. Step 5:Connect the right center rear turn signal to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the right center rear turn signal lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right center rear turn signal. Refer to Replacement Of Right-Side Combination Marker Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.20 Wiper Motor Low-speed Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the low-speed power harness between BDCU and wiper motor. B63-11 B63-22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15413F | High-speed wiper failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Wiper motor 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the wiper motor. Step 5:The wiper motor is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the wiper motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the wiper motor. Refer to Replacement Of Wiper Motor Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.21 High Speed Signal Fault Of Wiper Motor
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-speed power harness between BDCU and wiper motor. B63-11 B63-22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15423F | The wiper washing motor is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1.Wiring harness 2.Wiper motor 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the wiper motor. Step 5:The wiper motor is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the wiper motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the wiper motor. Refer to Replacement Of Wiper Motor Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.22 Washing Motor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and washing motor. B63-11 B63-22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B154437 | Rearview Mirror Heating Failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Physical rearview mirror 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the washing motor. Step 5:Connect the washing motor to an external 12V power supply and observe the washing motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the washing motor. Refer to Replacement Of Washing Pot Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.23 Rearview Mirror Heating Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the physical rearview mirror heating wire.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15453F | The charging port is unlocked. Procedure | 1, KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Charging port cover lock motor 3.BDCU |
| B15463F | The charging port is blocked | 1, KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the physical rearview mirror heating wire. Step 5:Check if the heating wire of the physical rearview mirror is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the physical rearview mirror. Refer to Replacement Of The Left Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly . Replacement Of The Right Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.24 Charging Port Cover Lock Motor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the charging port cover lock motor. B63-11 B63-22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15493F | External toolbox motor unlocking failure | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. External toolbox motor 3.BDCU |
| B154A3F | External toolbox motor lockout failure | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; |
Step 4:Connect the charging port cover lock motor to an external 12V power supply and observe the charging port cover lock motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the charging port cover lock motor. Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.25 External Toolbox Motor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the external toolbox motor. B63-11 B63-22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B154B3F | The skylight visor opening function failed | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Skyline sunshade 3.BDCU |
| B154C3F | The awning curtain closing function is faulty | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; |
Step 4:External toolbox motor connected to 12V power supply, observe whether the external toolbox motor performs any action? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the external toolbox motor. Refer to Replacement Of Toolbox Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.26 Fault Of The Sunroof Sunshade
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the sunroof sunshade.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B154D37 | The upward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left physical rearview mirror 3.BDCU |
| B154E37 | The downward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | |
| B154F37 | The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the left | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | |
| B155037 | The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; |
Step 4:Replace the sunroof sunshade. Refer to Replacement Of The Sky Sunshade Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.27 Left Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left physical rearview mirror.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B155137 | The right rearview mirror fails to adjust upwards | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right physical rearview mirror 3.BDCU |
| B155237 | Right rearview mirror downward adjustment failure | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | |
| B155337 | The left adjustment of the right rearview mirror fails | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | |
| B155437 | The right rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; |
Step 4:Replace the left physical rearview mirror. Refer to Replacement Of The Left Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.28 Right Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the right physical rearview mirror.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B15573F | The interwheel solenoid valve is faulty | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Interlocking solenoid valve between wheels 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Replace the right physical rearview mirror. Refer to Replacement Of The Right Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.29 Interwheel Lock Solenoid Valve Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the inter wheel locking solenoid valve.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B155D31 | Main driver reading light power supply failure | 1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2. Front left reading light 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the inter wheel locking solenoid valve. Step 5:Replace the inter wheel locking solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Differential Lock Solenoid Valve Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.30 Front Left Reading Light Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the front left reading light.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B155E31 | Sleeper reading lamp power supply failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Sleeping reading light 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the left front reading light. Step 5:Connect the front left reading light to an external 12V power supply, observe if the front left reading light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left reading light. Refer to Replacement Of Front Reading Light Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.31 Sleeper Reading Light Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and sleeper reading light.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B155F31 | The ceiling light power supply is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Sky roof light 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the sleeper reading light. Step 5:Connect the sleeper reading light to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sleeper reading light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper reading light. Refer to Replacement Of Sleeper Reading Light Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.32 Sky Roof Light Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the sky roof light.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B156031 | The power supply of the indicator lamp is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Position lamp 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the sky roof light. Step 5:Connect the sky roof light to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sky roof light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sky roof light. Refer to Replacement Of Lighting Fixtures Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.33 Position Lamp Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
| IP17-7 IP17-6 | ||
|---|---|---|

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the BDCU and the position light. Total body power supply B+ L22
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B156331 | The backlight lighting power supply is faulty | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Backlight 3.BDCU |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the position light. Step 5:Connect the position light to an external 12V power supply and observe if the position light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the position light. Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Clearance Lights . Replacement of Right Front Clearance Lights Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.34 Backlight Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B156431 | Danger alarm indicator key light power supply failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change; | 1. Wiring harness 2.Right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight) 3.BDCU |
Step 3:Check the backlight power harness between BDCU and sleeper switch devices, left central control switch group, clock spring, right central control switch group, and sliding door switch. Step 4:Replace the backlight. Refer to Replacement Of Sleeper Toolbox . Replacement Of The Left Switch Panel Assembly . Replacement Of Combination Switch . Replacement Of The Right Switch Panel Assembly . Replacement Of Electric Sliding Door Switch Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.35 Hazard Alarm Switch Backlight Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the backlight power harness between BDCU and the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B156B31 | Secondary car window rising power supply failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller. | 1. Wiring harness 2.Sliding door hinge (right window regulator) 3.BDCU |
| B156C31 | Secondary car window down power supply failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller. |
Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight). Step 5:Connect the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight) to an external 12V power supply, and observe if the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight) lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight). Refer to Replacement Of The Right Central Control Switch Group Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.36 Right window regulator Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and sliding door hinge (right glass lifter).
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B156931 | Main driving window rising power supply failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller. | 1. Wiring harness 2.Left window regulator 3.BDCU |
| B156A31 | Main driving window down power supply failure | 1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller. |
Step 4:The sliding door hinge (right glass lifter) is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the sliding door hinge (right glass lifter) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (right window regulator). Refer to Replacement Of The Right Window Regulator Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.37 Left window regulator Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left window regulator.
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD3(H) and BCANFD3(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD3 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCANFD3 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
Step 4:Connect the left glass lifter to an external 12V power supply and observe if the left glass lifter is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left window regulator. Refer to Replacement Of Left Window Regulator Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.8.5.38 BInspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAND3 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the bus voltage of BCAND3. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD3 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCANFD3 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAND3 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN5(H) and BCAN5 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAND3 bus. C. Measure the BCAND3 bus resistance between each module and the vehicle domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the BCAND3 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAND3 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAND3 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAND3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAND3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
7.8.5.39 Inspection Of BCAN5 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAN5 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the BCAN5 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN5 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAN5 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN5 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAN5 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAN5 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAN5 bus. C. Measure the BCAN5 bus resistance between each module and the vehicle domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of BCAN5 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAN5 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAN5 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAN5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAN5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN6(H) and BCAN6 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN6 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAN6 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
7.8.5.40 Inspection Of BCAN6 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAN6 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the BCAN6 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN6 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAN6 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAN6 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN7(H) and BCAN7 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAN6 bus. C. Measure the BCAN6 bus resistance between each module and the sliding door hinge(door handle) in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of BCAN6 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAN6 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAN6 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAN6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAN6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
7.8.5.41 BCAN7 Bus Network Integrity Check
Step 1 Check the BCAN7 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the BCAN7 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN7(H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAN7(L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCAN7(H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAN7(L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAN7 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAN7 bus. C. Measure the ADCAN1 bus resistance between each module and the body domain control uint sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the resistance of BCAN7 bus to ground is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAN7 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAN7 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAN7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAN7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes


7.8.6 Dismantling and Installation
7.8.6.1 Replacement of BCM
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 7 harness connectors of the BCM. 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the BCM, and remove the BCM.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the BCM to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the BCM.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 7 harness connectors of the BCM.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the BCM, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing, read VIN, and write the configuration word.
7.8.6.2 Replacement of Pillar Lock
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the pillar lock. 7 Drill one hole on the anti-theft bolt using a drill bit with a diameter of (3-4) mm. 8 Remove 2 anti-theft bolts with a screw extractor. 9 Remove the pillar lock. Installation Procedures


1 Move the pillar lock to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 anti-theft bolts of the pillar lock.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the pillar lock.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the combination switch lower shield. 5 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
caution
The anti-theft bolt is a disposable part and shall not be reused.
When reinstalling the pillar lock, the anti-theft bolt needs to be replaced with a new one, and the upper part of the anti-theft bolt needs to be twisted off during installation.

7.8.6.3 Replacement of Bluetooth Antenna (front)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the Bluetooth antenna (front). 13 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). Installation Procedures
1 Move the Bluetooth antenna (front) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the Bluetooth antenna (front).
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the front bumper assembly. 4 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 5 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 7 Install the forward MMW radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar shield. 9 Install the through-type lamp. 10 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
7.8.6.4 Replacement of The Bluetooth Antenna-lh
Removal Procedures 1 Open the car door. 2 Open the front flip cover. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.
caution
power off the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the battery.
4 Remove the panel-cabin decoration. 5 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 6 Remove the left side physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the front wheel arch body-lh frt. 8 Remove the wiper arm assy.
9 Remove the front windshield cover assembly. 10 Remove the seal fender-lh. 11 Remove the fender assy-rh 12 Take off the bluetooth antenna-lh. Installation Procedures 1 Fit the bluetooth antenna-lh. 2 Install the fender assy-rh 3 Install the seal fender-lh. 4 Install the front windshield cover assembly. 5 Install the wiper arm assy. 6 Install the front wheel arch body-lh frt. 7 Install the left side physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 8 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh.

9 Install the panel-cabin decoration. 10 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 11 Close the front flip cover. 12 Close the car door.

7.8.6.5 Replacement of NFC Antenna
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the NFC antenna.
6 Remove 3 fixing screws of the NFC antenna. 7 Remove the NFC antenna. Installation Procedures 1 Move the NFC antenna to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the NFC antenna.

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the NFC antenna.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.8.6.6 Replacement of Wireless Charging Module
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly.
5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the wireless charging module. 6 Remove the wireless charging module. Installation Procedures 1 Move the wireless charging module to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the wireless charging module. 3 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.8.6.7 Replacement of DCM
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Disconnect 3 harness connector of the DCM. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the DCM. 12 Remove the DCM. Installation Procedures


1 Move the DCM to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the DCM.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 3 harness connector of the DCM.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install the SSM. 6 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 7 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 8 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 9 Install the right sill molding assembly. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the DCM, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting Left Junction Box and the floor harness | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting Right Junction Box and the floor harness | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the cab grounding harness to the frame assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the cab grounding harness and the frame assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the floor harness and the chassis intelligent box | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
7.9 Vehicle Body Harness Device
7.9.1 Specifications
7.9.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.9.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.9.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Bumper Wiring Harness
2. Top Cover Wiring Harness 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Left Junction Box 4. Floor Wire Harness 8. Right Junction Box 5 Floor Harness Fixing Support 2 9. Floor Harness Fixing Support 1 6. Left Junction Box Bracket 10. Seat Harness

6. Left Junction Box Bracket 12. Hexagon Flange Nut 8. Right Junction Box 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Instrument Harness

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Left Roof Harness

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Right Roof Harness

17. Cab Grounding Harness 20. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 18. Hexagon Flange Bolt 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. Hexagon Flange Nut

22. Bar Counter Wiring Harness In New Energy Vehicles

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the chassis harness and the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the negative terminal harness of the left battery to the frame assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the negative terminal harness of the left battery to the frame assembly | M10 | (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the L-shaped bracket and the air conditioning compressor assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the L- shaped bracket and the frame assembly | M12 | (40.5 +/- 3.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the L- shaped bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| Fixed nut connecting L-shaped bracket and air conditioning compressor assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the L-shaped bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the flange bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the flange bracket and the frame assembly | M14 | (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the wire harness bracket and the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the chassis harness and harness bracket II | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
7.10 Chassis Harness Device
7.10.1 Specifications
7.10.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.10.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.10.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Battery Pack Wiring HarnessLH 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wire Harness Bracket
1. Battery Pack Wiring Harness RH 3. Cable Ties 2 2. Wire Harness Bracket

1. DC/DC Power Cord 1 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wire Harness Bracket 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Cable Ties 1 6. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

1. DC/DC Grounding Harness 1 4. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 2. Cable Ties 1 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

1. DC/DC Grounding Harness 2 3. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut

1. Battery Connecting Cable 2. Sheet Metal Cable Ties In New Energy Vehicles

1. LH Battery Negative Wire Harness 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Cable Ties 1 5. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 3. Hexagon Flange Nut 6. Hexagon Flange Nut

1. LH Battery Positive Wire Harness 2. Smart Appliance Box Harness

1. Chassis Harness 3. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut

1. Wire Harness Bracket 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Water Pipe Fixing Bracket 1 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Flanging Bracket 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Through the Hole Sheath 2 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Mountable Head Ties 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Interactive Fixed Ties 14. Hexagon Flange Nut 7. Hexagon Flange Nut 15. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt

1. Wire Harness Bracket 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wire Harness Bracket Ⅱ 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Tie-Fir Tree 7. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

1. Wire Harness Bracket 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 2. Interactive Fixed Ties 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Mountable Head Ties 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight to the left headlight bracket | M8 | (6 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket to the front lower protective assembly | M12 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket to the A-pillar exterior decoration assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket and the side fender bracket assembly | M8 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket to the left front connecting beam | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight to the right headlight bracket | M8 | (6 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket to the front lower protective assembly | M12 | (17 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket to the A-pillar exterior decoration assembly | M8 | (17 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket and the side fender bracket assembly | M8 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket to the right front connecting beam | M8 | (17 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the through light and the bumper body skeleton assembly | M6 | (6.5+/- .75) ft lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right front combination lamp and the right front headlight bracket | M6 | (6.5+/- .75) ft lb |
7.11 Exterior Vehicle Body Lamp Device
7.11.1 Specifications
7.11.1.1 Fastener Specifications
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the left front combination lamp and the left fender bracket assembly | M6 | (6.5+/- .75) ft lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the right front combination lamp and the left fender bracket assembly | M6 | (6.5+/- .75) ft lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the left front clearance lamp to the top cover assembly | M6 | (6.5+/- .75) ft lb |
| The fixing nut connecting the right front clearance lamp to the top cover assembly | M6 | (6.5+/- .75) ft lb |
| The fixing bolt connecting the rear clearance lamp and the rear clearance lamp mounting bracket | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the rear clearance lamp and the rear clearance lamp mounting bracket | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the rear work light bracket to the integrated frame | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| Fixed bolts connecting the rear work light bracket to the integrated frame | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the side marker combination light and the lower decorative panel assembly of the side panel | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the side marker combination light and the side skirt assembly | M6 | (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| Name of Light Bulb | Quantity | Model of Light Bulb | Power |
|---|---|---|---|
| Low beam | 2 | 40W each | LED |
| High beam | 2 | 40W each | LED |
| Front turn signal lamp | 2 | 14W each | LED |
| Daytime running lamp | 2 | 14W each | LED |
| Front position lamp | 2 | 6.6W each | LED |
| End-outline marker lamp | 2 | 1.7W each | LED |
| Side turn signal lamp | 2 | 5.1W each | LED |
| Side marker lamp | 8 | 0.82W each | LED |
7.11.1.2 Technical Parameters
| Name of Light Bulb | Quantity | Model of Light Bulb | Power |
|---|---|---|---|
| Reversing lamp | 2 | 2.5W each | LED |
| Rear end-outline marker lamp | 4 | 1.3W for the rear upper, 0.63W for the rear lower | LED |
| Brake lamp | 2 | 2.9W each | LED |
| Rear working lamp | 1 | 9W | LED |
| License plate lamp | 1 | 2.5W | LED |
| Rear turn signal lamp | 2 | 2.1W | LED |

7.11.2 Dismantling and Installation
7.11.2.1 Replacement of Left Headlamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the left headlamp.
13 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the left headlamp. 14 Remove the left headlamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left headlamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the left headlamp.
Torque:(6 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the left headlamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the headlamps, it is necessary to recalibrate the position of the lights.
7.11.2.2 Replacement of Right Headlamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp.
6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the right headlamp. 13 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right headlamp. 14 Remove the right headlamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right headlamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the right headlamp.
Torque: (6 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 2 harness connector of the right headlamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate.
14 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the headlamps, it is necessary to recalibrate the position of the lights.

7.11.2.3 Replacement of Through-type Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the through-type lamp, and remove the through-type lamp.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the through-type lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the through-type lamp.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.11.2.4 Replacement of Left Front Combination Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 13 Remove the left front wheel housing body.
14 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 15 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 16 Remove the left fender trim strip. 17 Remove the left fender assembly. 18 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front combination lamp. 19 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the left front combination lamp. 20 Remove the left front combination lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the left front combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the left front combination lamp.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs



3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front combination lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the left fender assembly. 5 Install the left fender trim strip. 6 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the left front wheel housing body. 9 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 10 Install the front bumper assembly. 11 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 13 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 14 Install the forward MMW radar.
15 Install the front MMW radar shield. 16 Install the through-type lamp. 17 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 18 Connect the battery negative cable. 19 Close the front flip cover plate. 20 Close the door.
7.11.2.5 Replacement of Right Front Combination Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 14 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 15 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 16 Remove the right fender trim strip. 17 Remove the right fender assembly.
18 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front combination lamp. 19 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the right front combination lamp. 20 Remove the right front combination lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right front combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the right front combination lamp.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs




3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front combination lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the right fender assembly. 5 Install the right fender trim strip. 6 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the right front wheel housing body. 9 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front bumper assembly. 11 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 13 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 14 Install the forward MMW radar.
15 Install the front MMW radar shield. 16 Install the through-type lamp. 17 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 18 Connect the battery negative cable. 19 Close the front flip cover plate. 20 Close the door.

7.11.2.6 Replacement of Left Front End-outline Marker Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front end- outline marker lamp.
14 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the left front end-outline marker lamp. 15 Remove the left front end-outline marker lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front end-outline marker lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the left front end-outline marker lamp.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front end-outline marker lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 5 Install the curtain rail assembly. 6 Install the right ceiling lamp. 7 Install the left ceiling lamp. 8 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 10 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 11 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.
7.11.2.7 Replacement of Right Front End- outline Marker Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly.
8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front end- outline marker lamp. 14 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the right front end-outline marker lamp. 15 Remove the right front end-outline marker lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right front end-outline marker lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the right front end-outline marker lamp.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front end-outline marker lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 5 Install the curtain rail assembly. 6 Install the right ceiling lamp. 7 Install the left ceiling lamp. 8 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 10 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 11 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.


7.11.2.8 Identification marker light
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the identification marker light. 6 Remove 2 fixing screws of the identification marker light. 7 Remove the identification marker light. Installation Procedures
1 Move the identification marker light to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the identification marker light. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the identification marker light.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.11.2.9 Replacement of Left side Combination Marker Light
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left fender trim strip. 10 Remove the left fender assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the left side combination marker light. 12 Remove the left side combination marker light. Installation Procedures

1 Move the left side combination marker light to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the left side combination marker light.
Torque:(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the left fender assembly. 4 Install the left fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the left front wheel housing body. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
7.11.2.10 Replacement of Right Side Combination Marker Light
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 6 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).
8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the right fender trim strip. 10 Remove the right fender assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the right side combination marker light. 12 Remove the right side combination marker light. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right side combination marker light to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the right side combination marker light.
Torque: (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the right fender assembly. 4 Install the right fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the right front wheel housing body. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body.

10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.


7.11.2.11 Replacement of Rear Working Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear working lamp. 5 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear working lamp. 6 Remove the rear working lamp. Installation Procedures
1 Move the rear working lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear working lamp.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear working lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.11.2.12 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (right middle)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove the MMWRR. 7 Remove 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (right middle). 8 Remove the side marker combination lamp (right middle). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left middle) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (left middle). 3 Install the MMWRR. 4 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 5 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

7.11.2.13 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (right front)
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right front). 6 Remove the side marker combination lamp (right front). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (right front) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right front).
Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable.

5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.11.2.14 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (right rear)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right rear). 7 Remove the side marker combination lamp (right rear). Installation Procedures
1 Move the side marker combination lamp (right rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right rear).
Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 4 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.11.2.15 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (left middle)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove the MMWRL.
7 Remove 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (left middle). 8 Remove the side marker combination lamp (left middle). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left middle) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (left middle). 3 Install the MMWRL. 4 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 5 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

7.11.2.16 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (left front)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left front). 6 Remove the side marker combination lamp (left front). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left front) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left front).
Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.


7.11.2.17 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (left rear)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left rear). 7 Remove the side marker combination lamp (left rear). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left rear).
Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 4 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.11.2.18 Replacement of Reversing Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 6 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the reversing lamp.
7 Remove 6 fixing nuts of the reversing lamp. 8 Remove the reversing lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the reversing lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing nuts of the reversing lamp.

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the reversing lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.11.2.19 Replacement of the License Plate Light
Disassembly Procedure 1 Open the car door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4 Disconnect one wire harness connector of the license plate light.
5 Remove the two fixing screws of the license plate light. 6 Take down the license plate light. Installation Procedure 1 Install the license plate light. 2 Install the two fixing screws of the license plate light.

3 Connect one wire harness connector of the license plate light. 4 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 5 Close the front flip cover panel. 6 Close the car door.
7.11.2.20 Replacement of Left Rear Combination Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper).
6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left rear combination lamp. 7 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the left rear combination lamp. 8 Remove the left rear combination lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the left rear combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing nuts of the left rear combination lamp.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left rear combination lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.11.2.21 Replacement of Right Rear Combination Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.
4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right rear combination lamp. 7 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the right rear combination lamp. 8 Remove the right rear combination lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right rear combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing nuts of the right rear combination lamp. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right rear combination lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.11.2.22 Replacement of Rear Retro-reflector
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper).
3 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear retro-reflector. 4 Remove the rear retro-reflector. Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear retro-reflector to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear retro-reflector. 3 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper).

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the toolbox light bracket to the sleeper toolbox | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| Name of Llight Bulb | Quantity | Model of Light Bulb | Power |
|---|---|---|---|
| Brake light | 2 | LED | 1.1W |
| Turn signal | 2 | LED | 1.1W |
| Position light | 2 | LED | 0.2W |
| Reverse light | 2 | LED | 1.5W |
| License plate light | 2 | LED | 0.7W |
| High beam | 2 | LED | 32.0W |
| Low beam | 2 | LED | 40.0W |
| Daytime Running Lights | 2 | LED | 14.0W |
| Front turn signal | 2 | LED | 14.0W |
| Front position light | 2 | LED | 6.6W |
| Front side marker light | 2 | LED | 1.7W |
| Identification Light | 3 | LED | 1.7W |
| Rear work light | 1 | LED | 9.0W |
| Side marker light | 2 | LED | 1.5W |
| Ceiling light | 2 | LED | 9.5W |
| Front reading light | 2 | LED | 0.6W |
| Berth reading light | 1 | LED | 1.3W |
| Illuminating lamp | 3 | LED | 0.5W |
| Ambient light | 2 | LED | 0.4W |
7.12 Interior Vehicle Body Lamp Device
7.12.1 Specifications
7.12.1.1 Fastener Specifications
7.12.1.2 Technical Parameters

7.12.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.12.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Atmosphere Lamp -Instrument Trim Panel Lh Upr 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Atmosphere Lamp of Right Workbench 9. Tool Box Lamp Bracket 3. Self-Tapping Screw 10. Courtesy Lamp 4. Reading Lamp-Frt 11. Hexalobular Socket Pan Head Screw In New Energy Vehicles 5. Ceiling Lamp-Lh 12. Sleeper Reading Lamp 6. Ceiling lamp-rh 13. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 7. Lamp


7.12.3 Dismantling and Installation
7.12.3.1 Replacement of Lighting Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Detach the lighting lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the lighting lamp. 6 Remove the lighting lamp. Installation Procedures
1 Move the lighting lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the lighting lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the lighting lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.12.3.2 Replacement of Courtesy Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove 2 fixing screws of the courtesy lamp, and detach the courtesy lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the courtesy lamp. 6 Remove the courtesy lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the courtesy lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the courtesy lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 2 fixing screws of the courtesy lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.12.3.3 Replacement of Sleeper Reading Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove 2 fixing screws of the sleeper reading lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the sleeper reading lamp. 6 Remove the sleeper reading lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the sleeper reading lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the sleeper reading lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install 2 fixing screws of the sleeper reading lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.12.3.4 Replacement of Instrument Left Upper Trim Panel Ambient Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 6 fixing screws on the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp. 6 Remove the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws on the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp. 3 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.12.3.5 Replacement of Right Workbench Ambient Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 6 fixing screws on the right workbench ambient lamp. 6 Remove the right workbench ambient lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right workbench ambient lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws on the right workbench ambient lamp. 3 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.


7.12.3.6 Replacement of Toolbox Lamp Bracket
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the toolbox lamp. 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the toolbox lamp bracket 6 Remove the toolbox lamp bracket. Installation Procedures 1 Move the toolbox lamp bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the toolbox lamp bracket
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Install the toolbox lamp.
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.


7.12.3.7 Replacement of Left Ceiling Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Pry off the left ceiling lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left ceiling lamp. 6 Remove the left ceiling lamp. Installation Procedures
1 Move the left ceiling lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the left ceiling lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the left ceiling lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.12.3.8 Replacement of Right Ceiling Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Pry off the right ceiling lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right ceiling lamp. 6 Remove the right ceiling lamp. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right ceiling lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the right ceiling lamp.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Install the right ceiling lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
7.12.3.9 Replacement of Front Reading Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly.
5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the front reading lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Install the front reading lamp. 2 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 5 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable.

8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

7.12.3.10 Replacement of Top Cabinet Lamp
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Open the top cabinet assembly. 5 Detach the top cabinet lamp. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the top cabinet lamp. 7 Remove the top cabinet lamp. Installation Procedures
1 Move the top cabinet lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the top cabinet lamp. 3 Install the top cabinet lamp. 4 Close the top cabinet assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.13 Wiper Device
7.13.1 Description and Operation
7.13.1.1 Description and Operation
The windshield washer system employs CEM to collect and determine the gear position of the combination switch handle, and then turns on the windshield washer motor to transport the washer fluid to the front/rear nozzles through the washer fluid pipe, and the washer fluid is sprayed from the nozzle position, combined with the rotation of the wiper, to achieve the cleaning of the windshield.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the wiper motor assembly and the wiper motor mounting bracket | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the main wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose) to the wiper motor assembly | M8 | (14.75 - 17) ft lbs |
7.13.2 Specifications
7.13.2.1 Fastener Specifications

7.13.3 Decomposition Diagram
7.13.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Wiper Arm Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wiper Motor Assy
7.13.4 Inspect
7.13.4.1 Inspection of Wiper
Power on the vehicle, turn on the wiper switch, and check the wiper is working properly at each gear.

7.13.5 Dismantling and Installation
7.13.5.1 Replacement of Wiper Motor Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 5 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the wiper motor assembly.
7 Disengage 1 clip of the wiper motor assembly. 8 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the wiper motor assembly. 9 Remove the wiper motor assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the wiper motor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the wiper motor assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install 1 clip of the wiper motor assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the wiper motor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.


7.13.5.2 Replacement of Primary Wiper Arm Blade Assembly (nozzle and hose)
Removal Procedures 1 Disconnect the hose. 2 Remove 2 plug caps.
3 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). Installation Procedures 1 Move the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).
Torque: (14.5 +/- 17) ft lbs

3 Install 2 plug caps. 4 Connect the hose.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the inner panel of the right enclosure plate to the washing pot assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the front outer crossbeam assembly of the floor to the washing pot assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
7.14 Windshield Washer Device
7.14.1 specifications
7.14.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.14.2 Decomposition Diagram
7.14.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Two-Way Connector for Windshield Wiper Water Pipe In New Energy Vehicles 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wash reservoir Assy 4. Windshield Wiper Water Pipe In New Energy Vehicles


7.14.3 Dismantling and Installation
7.14.3.1 Replacement of Washer Fluid Reservoir Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the washer fluid reservoir assembly. 5 Disconnect the washer fluid reservoir water pipe, and use a container to catch the overflowing washer fluid.
caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged washer fluid.
6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the washer fluid reservoir assembly. 7 Remove the washer fluid reservoir assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the washer fluid reservoir assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the washer fluid reservoir assembly.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect the washer fluid reservoir water pipe. 4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the washer fluid reservoir assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.14.3.2 Replacement of Washer Fluid Reservoir Water Pipe
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).
4 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the washer fluid reservoir water pipe. Installation Procedures 1 Install the washer fluid reservoir water pipe. 2 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 3 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

7.15 Information and Communication Device
7.15.1 Description and Operation
7.15.1.1 Description and Operation
The relevant communication devices between the vehicle and the outside are as follows: 1. TGW and TBOX functions: It serves as the on-board terminal and the key device in the Internet of Vehicles (IOV), which integrates GPS and communication modules and interacts with vehicle information through the gateway, and collects and uploads GB/T 32960 data and Windrose enterprise standard data, realizes remote control, fault diagnosis, position query, OTA tasks, and other functions. It serves as the central gateway for the vehicle, implements the CAN signal routing function at the vehicle end, and provides an OBD diagnostic interface; 2. Combination antenna: It provides 5G communication and BD/GPS positioning signals for the TGW, and 4G communication and BD/GPS positioning signals for the VTDR; 3. VTDR: It is a regulatory part approved by the Ministry of Transport, which provides position query, vehicle and driver information; 4. ETC: Electronic Toll Collection.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the driving recorder bracket to the lower left instrument panel controller bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the T gateway and the T gateway bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the T gateway bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the combination antenna and the pipe beam assembly | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolts connecting the T gateway and the T gateway bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
7.15.2 Specifications
7.15.2.1 Fastener Specifications

7.15.3 Decomposition Diagram
7.15.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. ETC(Electronic Toll Collection) 5. Tbox-Gw 2. Composite Antenna(Gnss+5g/4g) 6. Vehicle Travelling Data Recorder Bracket 3. ECALL Mic 7. Vehicle Travelling Data Recorder 4. Tbox-Gw Bracke 8. Emergency Call for Help Loudspeakers
7.15.4 System Schematic Diagram
7.15.4.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The diagnostic tool cannot communicate with the vehicle | 1.The diagnostic tool version is too low | Update the diagnostic tool to the latest version. |
| 2.OBD power supply circuit fault | Refer to OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault | |
| 3. OBD CAN communication harness malfunction | Check the OBD CAN communication harness. | |
| 4. OBD Ethernet harness malfunction | Check the OBD Ethernet harness. |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to GW Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | |
| U018787 | Lost Communication With CMS_L | Refer to GW Communication Fault |
| U014087 | Lost Communication With BDCU communication with BDCU | |
| U01A087 | Lost Communication With SJB_UP | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication With DCM | |
| U014187 | Lost Communication With AVAS | |
| U01A187 | Lost Communication With SJB_UN | |
| U012787 | Lost Communication With TPMS_F |
7.15.5 Diagnostic Information and Steps
7.15.5.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing faults in information communication devices, refer to Description And Operation Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of information and communication devices before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a malfunction, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of information and communication devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis.
Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.15.5.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the information and communication device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the information and communication device system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.15.5.3 Fault Symptom Table
7.15.5.4 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.15.5.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
GW
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U016487 | Lost Communication With A/C | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U015787 | Lost Communication With CAMF | |
| U026487 | Lost Communication With USS | |
| U026687 | Lost Communication With MMWR_L | |
| U026887 | Lost Communication With MMWR_R | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | |
| U015A87 | Lost Communication With FCU1 | |
| U015B87 | Lost Communication With FCU2 | |
| U015C87 | Lost Communication With HCU | |
| U012187 | Lost Communication With EBS | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication With ECAS | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication With EPB | |
| U007388 | CANFD1 BusOff | |
| U007488 | CANFD2 BusOff | |
| U007588 | CANFD3 BusOff | |
| U007688 | CANFD4 BusOff | |
| U007788 | CANFD5 BusOff | |
| U007888 | CANFD6 BusOff | |
| U007988 | CANFD7 BusOff | |
| U007A88 | CAN8 BusOff | |
| U007B88 | CANFD9 BusOff | |
| U008088 | CANFD10 BusOff | |
| U220200 | CANFD3 network limp home | |
| U220300 | CANFD4 network limp home | |
| U220400 | CANFD5 network limp home | |
| U220900 | CANFD6 network limp home | |
| U220500 | CANFD7 network limp home | |
| U220800 | CANFD10 network limp home | |
| U238208 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | Refer to GW Internal Fault |
| B100000 | RTC chip error | |
| B100001 | MCU temperature is too high | |
| B100002 | CPU temperature is too high | |
| B100004 | Backup battery not connected | |
| B100005 | End of backup battery life | |
| U100001 | BDC Ethernet T1 port connection abnormality | Refer to GW Ethernet Fault |
| U100002 | CDC Ethernet link failure | |
| U100003 | ADC Ethernet link failure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U100004 | BDC Ethernet insufficient SQI | |
| U100005 | CDC Ethernet insufficient SQI | |
| U100006 | ADC Ethernet insufficient SQI | |
| U100007 | BDC Ethernet CRC error | |
| U100008 | CDC Ethernet CRC error | |
| U100009 | ADC Ethernet CRC error | |
| U10000A | Gateway certificate exception | Refer to GW Certificate Abnormality |
| U10000B | Gateway certificate application failed | |
| U10000C | Root certificate exception |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U019887 | Lost Communication With GW | Refer to TBOX Communication Fault |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| B10FF96 | Safety Chip Failure | Refer to TBOX Internal Fault |
| B10FE96 | CODEC Module Failure | |
| B10FA11 | 5G Antenna Shorted To The Ground | Refer to Combination Antenna Fault |
| B10FA13 | 5G Antenna Open Circuit | |
| B10F996 | 5G Module Failure | |
| U10000A | Gateway certificate exception | Refer to TBOX Certificate Abnormality |
| U10000B | Gateway certificate application failed | |
| U10000C | Root certificate exception | |
| B10FB00 | No SIM Card | Please reinsert the SIM card |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Voltage measured > 32V for 5000ms(Deviation not exceeding 1000ms) | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.T-Gateway |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | Voltage measured < 16V for 5000ms(Deviation not exceeding 1000ms) |
TBOX
7.15.5.6 GW Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection B76-17
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U018787 | Lost Communication With CMS_L | 1.Message 0x18FF0351 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 50 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v) | 1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway |
| U014087 | Lost Communication With BDCU communication with BDCU | 1.Message 0x0CFDCC21 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v) | |
| U01A087 | Lost Communication With SJB_UP | 1.Message 0x18FF3354 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v) | |
| U019987 | Lost Communication With DCM | 1.Message 0x18FDA54F timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v) | |
| U014187 | Lost Communication With AVAS | 1.Message 0x18FF0E57 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 500 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v) | |
| U01A187 | Lost Communication With SJB_UN | 1.Message 0x18FF2359 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 500 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v) | |
| U012787 | Lost Communication With TPMS_F | 1.Message 0x18FEF433 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 500 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U016487 | Lost Communication With A/C | 1.Message 0x18FF0B19 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | 1.Message 0x18FF0841 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 1000 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides GW? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the T-gateway power and grounding harness. Step 5:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 6:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.7 GW Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U015787 | Lost Communication With CAMF | 1.Message 0x18FF3531 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U026487 | Lost Communication With USS | 1.Message 0x18FF5C5F timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U026687 | Lost Communication With MMWR_L | 1.Message 0x18FF4361 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U026887 | Lost Communication With MMWR_R | 1.Message 0x18FF4263 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | 1.Message 0x18FEF100 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U015A87 | Lost Communication With FCU1 | 1.Message 0x18102465 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U015B87 | Lost Communication With FCU2 | 1.Message 0x181024A5 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U015C87 | Lost Communication With HCU | 1.Message 0x18f30189 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U012187 | Lost Communication With EBS | 1.Message 0x18F0010B timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U013287 | Lost Communication With ECAS | 1.Message 0x18FEEA2F timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U012887 | Lost Communication With EPB | 1.Message 0x18FE1250 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v) | |
| U007388 | CANFD1 BusOff | CANFD1 bus communication failure | |
| U007488 | CANFD2 BusOff | CANFD2 bus communication failure | |
| U007588 | CANFD3 BusOff | CANFD3 bus communication failure | |
| U007688 | CANFD4 BusOff | CANFD4 bus communication failure | |
| U007788 | CANFD5 BusOff | CANFD5 bus communication failure | |
| U007888 | CANFD6 BusOff | CANFD6 bus communication failure | |
| U007988 | CANFD7 BusOff | CANFD7 bus communication failure | |
| U007A88 | CAN8 BusOff | CANFD8 bus communication failure |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007B88 | CANFD9 BusOff | CANFD9 bus communication failure | |
| U008088 | CANFD10 BusOff | CANFD10 bus communication failure | |
| U220200 | CANFD3 network limp home | CANFD3 NM in limp home state | |
| U220300 | CANFD4 network limp home | CANFD4 NM in limp home state | |
| U220400 | CANFD5 network limp home | CANFD5 NM in limp home state | |
| U220900 | CANFD6 network limp home | CANFD6 NM in limp home state | |
| U220500 | CANFD7 network limp home | CANFD7 NM in limp home state | |
| U220800 | CANFD10 network limp home | CANFD10 NM in limp home state |
2.Circuit Diagram
B76-17



3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U238208 | The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal | Unable to read SWITCH chip register | 1. T-Gateway |
| B100000 | RTC chip error | Get RTC time error lasts 5s | |
| B100001 | MCU temperature is too high | Temperature measurement > 110℃for 5s | |
| B100002 | CPU temperature is too high | Temperature measurement > 110℃for 5s | |
| B100004 | Backup battery not connected | Backup battery not connected for more than 5s | |
| B100005 | End of backup battery life | Backup battery life less than 10% |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U100001 | BDC Ethernet T1 port connection abnormality | If the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported | 1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway |
Step 4:Check the CANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD4 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Check the CANFD5 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 Bus Network Integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 9:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity Step 10:Check the CANFD9 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD9 Bus Network Integrity Step 11:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 12:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 13:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.8 GW Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 4:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.9 GW Ethernet Fault
1.DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U100002 | CDC Ethernet link failure | If the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported | |
| U100003 | ADC Ethernet link failure | If the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported | |
| U100004 | BDC Ethernet insufficient SQI | SQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s | |
| U100005 | CDC Ethernet insufficient SQI | SQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s | |
| U100006 | ADC Ethernet insufficient SQI | SQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s | |
| U100007 | BDC Ethernet CRC error | Read the Ethernet chip CRC value and report a fault if there is a single CRC error | |
| U100008 | CDC Ethernet CRC error | Read the Ethernet chip CRC value and report a fault if there is a single CRC error | |
| U100009 | ADC Ethernet CRC error | Read the Ethernet chip CRC value and report a fault if there is a single CRC error |
2. Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation.Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the T-gateway Ethernet harness.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U10000A | Gateway certificate exception | Report a fault if the certificate is abnormal | 1. T-Gateway |
| U10000B | Gateway certificate application failed | If the certificate application fails, a fault will be reported | |
| U10000C | Root certificate exception | The root certificate does not exist or its content is empty |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U019887 | Lost Communication With GW | No GW heartbeat received, lasting for 60 seconds | 1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | No USB channel communication heartbeat received from CDCU, lasting for 60 seconds |
Step 4:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 5:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.10 GW Certificate Abnormality
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Reapply for the certificate. Step 4:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 5:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.11 TBOX Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
B76-17



3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B10FF96 | Safety Chip Failure | command timeout | 1. T-Gateway |
| B10FE96 | CODEC Module Failure | codec Module initialization failed or Codec the module cannot communicate |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B10FA11 | 5G Antenna Shorted To The Ground | KL15 OFF->ON In 60s, a short circuit is detected for 5s | 1. Wiring harness 2. Combination antenna 3. T-Gateway |
| B10FA13 | 5G Antenna Open Circuit | KL15 OFF->ON In 60s, an open circuit is detected for 5s | |
| B10F996 | 5G Module Failure | In normal mode, failure to connect to the network is detected for 10 minutes |
Step 4:Check the CANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD4 bus network integrity Step 6:Check the CANFD5 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD5 bus network integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 9:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity Step 10:Check the CANFD9 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD9 Bus Network Integrity Step 11:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 12:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 13:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.12 TBOX Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 4:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.13 Combination Antenna Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the T-gateway and the combination antenna. B76-17
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U10000A | Gateway certificate exception | Report a fault if the certificate is abnormal | 1. T-Gateway |
| U10000B | Gateway certificate application failed | If the certificate application fails, a fault will be reported | |
| U10000C | Root certificate exception | The root certificate does not exist or its content is empty |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CAN8(H) and CAN8(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
Step 4:Replace the combination antenna. Refer to Replacement of combination antenna Step 5:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 6:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.14 TBOX Certificate Abnormality
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Reapply for the certificate. Step 4:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 5:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
7.15.5.15 Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of CAN8 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CAN8 bus voltage. No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CAN8 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CAN8 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CAN8 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CAN8 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CAN8 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CAN8 bus. C. Measure the CAN8 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CAN8 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CAN8 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CAN8 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CAN8 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CAN8 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD1(H) and CANFD1(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
7.15.5.16 Inspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of CANFD1 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD1 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD1 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD3(H) and CANFD3(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD1 bus. C. Measure the CANFD1 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD1 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
7.15.5.17 Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the CANFD3 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD3 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD3 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD3 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD3 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD3 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD3 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD3 bus. C. Measure the CANFD3 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD3 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD3 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD3 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD4(H) / CANFD4 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD4 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD4 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
7.15.5.18 Inspection Of CANFD4 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the CANFD4 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD4 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD4 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD4 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD4 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD5(H) and CANFD5(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD4 bus. C. Measure the CANFD4 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD4 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD4 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD4 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
7.15.5.19 Inspection of CANFD5 bus network integrity
Step 1 Check the CANFD5 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD5 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD5 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD5 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD5 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD5 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD5 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD5 bus. C. Measure the CANFD5 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD5 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD5 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD5 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD7(H) and CANFD7(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD7 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD7 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
7.15.5.20 Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the CANFD7 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD7 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD7 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD7 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD7 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD9(H) and CANFD9(L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD7 bus. C. Measure the CANFD7 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD7 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD7 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD7 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.
7.15.5.21 Inspection Of CANFD9 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the CANFD9 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD9 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD9 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD9 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| CANFD9 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| CANFD9 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes
A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD9 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD9 bus. C. Measure the CANFD9 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD9 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD9 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD9 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD9 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD9 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

7.15.6 Dismantling and Installation
7.15.6.1 Replacement of TGW
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the VTDR. 11 Remove the VTDR bracket. 12 Remove the left lower fixing bracket. 13 Disconnect 7 harness connectors of the TGW.
14 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the TGW with bracket, and remove the TGW with bracket. 15 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the TGW. 16 Remove the TGW. Installation Procedures


1 Move the TGW to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the TGW.
Torque:(6.5 +/+.75) ft lbs
3 Install the TGW with bracket, and install 4 fixing bolts of the TGW with bracket. 4 Connect 7 harness connectors of the TGW.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the left lower fixing bracket. 6 Install the VTDR bracket. 7 Install the VTDR. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

7.15.6.2 Replacement of Speaker - emergency Call
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Pull open the seat backrest cushion, and disconnect 2 harness connectors of the speaker - emergency call.
5 Remove 3 fixing screws of the speaker - emergency call. 6 Remove the speaker - emergency call. Installation Procedures 1 Move the speaker - emergency call to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the speaker - emergency call.

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the speaker - emergency call, and pull up the seat backrest cushion.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.15.6.3 Replacement of E-CALL Mic
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Pull open the seat backrest cushion, and disconnect 1 harness connector of the E-CALL Mic. 5 Remove the E-CALL Mic. Installation Procedures
1 Move the E-CALL Mic to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the E-CALL Mic, and pull up the seat backrest cushion.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.
7.15.6.4 Replacement of Combination Antenna
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the ip brim assy. 5 Remove the IVI screen. 6 Remove the CAR screen. 7 Remove the IPC screen. 8 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 9 Remove the camera monitor screen. 10 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 11 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 14 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 15 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 16 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh.
17 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 18 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 19 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 20 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 21 Disconnect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the Tbox-gw, and disconnect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the tachograph. 22 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the combination antenna. 23 Remove the combination antenna. Installation Procedures 1 Move the combination antenna to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the combination antenna.
Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Straighten out the wire harnesses, connect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the Tbox-gw, and connect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the tachograph.
caution
The wire harness should be plugged firmly, following the principle of "first plugging, second clicking, third confirming".
4 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 5 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 6 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 7 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 8 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 9 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 11 Install the base-rh display brkt. 12 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 14 Install the base-lh display brkt. 15 Install the camera monitor screen. 16 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 17 Install the IPC screen. 18 Install the CAR screen. 19 Install the IVI screen. 20 Install the ip brim assy. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.

7.15.6.5 Replacement of VTDR
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Insert and remove the VTDR from the two end holes using the built-in tool. 5 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of the VTDR. 6 Remove the VTDR. Installation Procedures


1 Connect 6 harness connectors of the VTDR.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
2 Slowly push the VTDR into the mounting position to install it. 3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.
7.15.6.6 Replacement of ETC
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the ETC. 5 Remove the ETC. Installation Procedures 1 Move the ETC to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the ETC.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".


3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly and the white body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly and the white body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
7.16 Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Device
7.16.1 Specifications
7.16.1.1 Fastener Specifications


7.16.2 Dismantling and Installation
7.16.2.1 Replacement of Left Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.16.2.2 Replacement of Right Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
7.16.2.3 Replacement Of The Blind Spot Filling Camera
Removal Procedures 1 Open the car door. 2 Open the front flip cover. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.
caution
power off the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the battery.
4 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the lower lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 7 Remove the upper lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 8 Remove the inner mounting plate of the lens. 9 Remove the rear cover assembly of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 10 Remove the blind spot filling camera bracket. 11 Remove the blind spot filling camera. Installation Procedures 1 Fit the Blind spot filling camera. 2 Install the blind spot filling camera bracket.


3 Install the rear cover assembly of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 4 Install the inner mounting plate of the lens. 5 Install the upper lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 6 Install the lower lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 7 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 8 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 9 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 10 Close the front flip cover. 11 Close the car door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the traction seat assembly and the corrugated plate | M16 | 240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the traction seat assembly and the corrugated plate | M16 | 240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the corrugated plate and the frame assembly | M16 | 240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the corrugated plate to the frame assembly | M16 | 240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
8Chassis
8.1 Fifth Wheel Device2730· 4g
8.1.1 Specifications
8.1.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.1.2 Dismantling and Installation
8.1.2.1 Replacement of Fifth Wheel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Remove 30 fixing nuts of the fifth wheel assembly front bracket. 2 Remove the fifth wheel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the fifth wheel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 30 fixing nuts of the fifth wheel assembly.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| NCM - fixing bolts connecting the battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to the battery support | M12 | 88.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs) |
| NCM - fixing nut connecting battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to battery support | M12 | 88.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the bottom inclined beam bracket 2 to the frame assembly | M12 | 88.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the bottom inclined beam bracket 2 to the frame assembly | M12 | 88.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the lower protective installation bracket to the frame assembly | M20 | 420 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the front beam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the front beam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the middle cast crossbeam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the middle cast crossbeam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the middle cast crossbeam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the middle longitudinal beam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the internal battery support (NCM) to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
8.2 Vehicle Frame Device2800 / 2810· 4g
8.2.1 Specifications
8.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the internal battery support (NCM) to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the external battery support (NCM) to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the external battery support (NCM) to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the external battery mounting plate to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the external battery mounting plate to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the internal battery mounting plate to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the internal battery mounting plate to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the lining beam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the lining beam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the tail crossbeam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the tail crossbeam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the bThe fixing bolts connecting the first crossbeam and the front connecting beameam and the front connecting beam | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the first crossbeam 2 and the front connecting beam | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting the pipe beam and X-shaped control arm assembly | M22 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the pipe beam and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
8.2.2 Dismantling and Installation
8.2.2.1 Replacement of Frame Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 9 Drain coolant from the power system. 10 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 11 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 13 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 15 Remove the roof deflector body. 16 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 17 Remove the left deflector upper body. 18 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 19 Remove the left deflector lower body. 20 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 21 Remove the right deflector upper body. 22 Remove the right deflector lower body. 23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 25 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 27 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 28 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 29 Remove the through-type lamp. 30 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 31 Remove the forward MMW radar. 32 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket.
33 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 35 Remove the front bumper assembly. 36 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 37 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 38 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 39 Remove the left fender trim strip. 40 Remove the left fender assembly. 41 Remove the left front combination lamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp. 43 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 44 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 45 Remove the right fender trim strip. 46 Remove the right fender assembly. 47 Remove the right front combination lamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp. 49 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 50 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 51 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 53 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 54 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 55 Remove the lamp (upper). 56 Remove the lamp (lower). 57 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 58 Remove the boarding step bracket. 59 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 61 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 62 Remove the frame main truss. 63 Remove the BIW assembly. 64 Remove the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 65 Remove the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 66 Remove the sealing cross beam. 67 Remove the MMW radar bracket.



68 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 69 Remove the deflector assembly. 70 Remove the condenser. 71 Remove the front end module. 72 Remove the guide wheel (left). 73 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate. 74 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 75 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). 76 Remove the brake chamber (left). 77 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (left). 78 Remove the left front wheel end assembly. 79 Remove the ABS sensor (left). 80 Remove the guide wheel (right). 81 Remove the front spring right upper mounting plate. 82 Remove the front air spring assembly (right). 83 Remove the brake chamber (right). 84 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (right). 85 Remove the right front wheel end assembly. 86 Remove the ABS sensor (right). 87 Remove the steering fluid reservoir. 88 Remove the electric oil pump. 89 Remove the low pressure oil pipe. 90 Remove the high pressure oil pipe. 91 Remove the A/C compressor assembly. 92 Remove the integrated EHPS assembly. 93 Remove the driving rocker arm. 94 Remove the driven rocker arm. 95 Remove the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 96 Remove the brake hose assembly (left). 97 Remove the ABS solenoid valve bracket. 98 Remove the brake hose assembly (right). 99 Remove the brake pipe bundle assembly. 100 Remove the single channel module assembly. 101 Remove the electronic water pump (front). 102 Remove the electronic water pump (rear). 103 Remove the walking platform rear trim panel. 104 Remove the front walking platform. 105 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear).
106 Remove the corrugated plate. 107 Removal the fifth wheel assembly. 108 Remove the drive wheel (front left). 109 Remove the rear left wheel housing middle body assembly. 110 Removal the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 111 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front). 112 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 113 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 114 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 115 Remove the rear spring U-bolt 2. 116 Remove the balance beam (left). 117 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 118 Remove the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 119 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 120 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 121 Remove the balance beam (right). 122 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 123 Remove the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 124 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 125 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (left). 126 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 127 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 128 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 129 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (right). 130 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 131 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 132 Remove the dual channel module assembly. 133 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear).

134 Remove the integrated axle - rear axle. 135 Remove the frame assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the frame assembly. 2 Install the integrated axle - rear axle. 3 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 4 Install the dual channel module assembly. 5 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 6 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 7 Install the height adjustment device assembly (right). 8 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 9 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 10 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 11 Install the height adjustment device assembly (left).

12 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 13 Install the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 14 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 15 Install the balance beam (right). 16 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 17 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 18 Install the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 19 Install the drive wheel (right front). 20 Install the balance beam (left). 21 Install the rear spring U-bolt 2. 22 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 23 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 24 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 25 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front). 26 Install the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 27 Install the drive wheel (left front). 28 Install the fifth wheel assembly. 29 Install the corrugated plate. 30 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 31 Install the front walking platform. 32 Install the walking platform rear trim panel. 33 Install the electronic water pump (rear). 34 Install the electronic water pump (front). 35 Install the single channel module assembly. 36 Install the brake pipe bundle assembly. 37 Install the brake hose assembly (right). 38 Install the ABS solenoid valve bracket. 39 Install the brake hose assembly (left). 40 Install the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 41 Install the driven rocker arm. 42 Install the driving rocker arm. 43 Install the integrated EHPS assembly. 44 Install the A/C compressor assembly. 45 Install the high pressure oil pipe. 46 Install the low pressure oil pipe. 47 Install the electric oil pump. 48 Install the steering fluid reservoir. 49 Install the ABS sensor (right).

50 Install the right front wheel end assembly. 51 Install the front shock absorber assembly (right). 52 Install the brake chamber (right). 53 Install the front air spring assembly (right). 54 Install the front spring right upper mounting plate. 55 Install the guide wheel (right). 56 Install the ABS sensor (left). 57 Install the left front wheel end assembly. 58 Install the front shock absorber assembly (left). 59 Install the brake chamber (left). 60 Install the front air spring assembly (left). 61 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 62 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 63 Install the guide wheel (left). 64 Install the front end module. 65 Install the condenser. 66 Install the deflector assembly. 67 Install the front lower protection assembly. 68 Install the MMW radar bracket. 69 Install the sealing cross beam. 70 Install the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 71 Install the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 72 Install the BIW assembly. 73 Install the frame main truss. 74 Install the right deflector lower body. 75 Install the left deflector lower body. 76 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 77 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 78 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 79 Install the boarding step bracket. 80 Install the boarding step body assembly. 81 Install the lamp (lower). 82 Install the lamp (upper). 83 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 84 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 85 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 86 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2.
87 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 88 Install the right headlamp bracket. 89 Install the right headlamp. 90 Install the right front combination lamp. 91 Install the right fender assembly. 92 Install the right fender trim strip. 93 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 94 Install the left headlamp bracket. 95 Install the left headlamp. 96 Install the left front combination lamp. 97 Install the left fender assembly. 98 Install the left fender trim strip. 99 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 100 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 101 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 102 Install the front bumper assembly. 103 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 104 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 105 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 106 Install the forward MMW radar. 107 Install the front MMW radar shield. 108 Install the through-type lamp. 109 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 110 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 111 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 112 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 113 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 114 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 115 Install the right deflector upper body. 116 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 117 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 118 Install the left deflector upper body. 119 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 120 Install the roof deflector body.
121 Install the rear end-outline marker lamp mounting bracket. 122 Install the rear end-outline marker lamp. 123 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 124 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 125 Install the right front wheel housing body. 126 Install the left front wheel housing body. 127 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 128 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 129 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 130 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 131 Connect the battery negative cable. 132 Close the front flip cover plate. 133 Close the door.

8.2.2.2 Replacement of Head Cross Beam 2
Removal Procedures 1 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the head cross beam 2. 2 Remove the head cross beam 2. Installation Procedures

1 Move the head cross beam 2 to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the head cross beam 2.
Torque:140 - 170 (ft lbs)
8.2.2.3 Replacement of Left Front Joint Beam
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain coolant from the power system. 9 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 10 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 11 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the roof deflector body. 15 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 16 Remove the left deflector upper body. 17 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 18 Remove the left deflector lower body. 19 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 20 Remove the right deflector upper body. 21 Remove the right deflector lower body. 22 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).
23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 25 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 27 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 28 Remove the through-type lamp. 29 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 30 Remove the forward MMW radar. 31 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 32 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 33 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the front bumper assembly. 35 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 36 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 37 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 38 Remove the left fender trim strip. 39 Remove the left fender assembly. 40 Remove the left front combination lamp. 41 Remove the left headlamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 43 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Remove the right fender trim strip. 45 Remove the right fender assembly. 46 Remove the right front combination lamp. 47 Remove the right headlamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 49 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 50 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 51 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 53 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 54 Remove the lamp (upper).
55 Remove the lamp (lower). 56 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 57 Remove the boarding step bracket. 58 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 59 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 61 Remove the frame main truss. 62 Remove the BIW assembly. 63 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 64 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 65 Remove the lower protection left mounting support. 66 Remove the sealing cross beam. 67 Remove the VDC assembly. 68 Remove the VDC bracket. 69 Remove the battery rod. 70 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 71 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 72 Remove the auxiliary battery. 73 Remove the battery backing plate. 74 Remove Left Junction Box. 75 Remove Right Junction Box. 76 Remove the battery assembly bracket. 77 Removal the head cross beam. 78 Removal the head cross beam 2. 79 Remove the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (left). 80 Disconnect 4 harness connectors of the left front joint beam.

81 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the left front joint beam. 82 Remove 13 fixing bolts and nuts of the left front joint beam. 83 Remove the left front joint beam. Installation Procedures





1 Move the left front joint beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 13 fixing bolts and nuts of the left front joint beam.
Torque: 140 +/- 170 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 2 air pipes of the left front joint beam. 4 Connect 4 harness connectors of the left front joint beam.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (left). 6 Install the head cross beam 2. 7 Install the head cross beam. 8 Install the battery assembly bracket. 9 Install Right Junction Box. 10 Install Left Junction Box. 11 Install the battery backing plate. 12 Install the auxiliary battery. 13 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 14 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 15 Install the battery rod. 16 Install the VDC bracket. 17 Install the VDC assembly. 18 Install the sealing cross beam. 19 Install the lower protection left mounting support. 20 Install the front lower protection assembly. 21 Install the MMW radar bracket. 22 Install the BIW assembly. 23 Install the frame main truss. 24 Install the right deflector lower body. 25 Install the left deflector lower body. 26 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 27 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 28 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 29 Install the boarding step bracket. 30 Install the boarding step body assembly. 31 Install the lamp (lower). 32 Install the lamp (upper). 33 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 34 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 35 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 36 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 37 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 38 Install the right headlamp bracket. 39 Install the right headlamp. 40 Install the right front combination lamp. 41 Install the right fender assembly.
42 Install the right fender trim strip. 43 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Install the left headlamp bracket. 45 Install the left headlamp. 46 Install the left front combination lamp. 47 Install the left fender assembly. 48 Install the left fender trim strip. 49 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 50 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 51 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 52 Install the front bumper assembly. 53 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 54 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 55 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 56 Install the forward MMW radar. 57 Install the front MMW radar shield. 58 Install the through-type lamp. 59 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 60 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 61 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 62 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 63 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 64 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 65 Install the right deflector upper body. 66 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 67 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 68 Install the left deflector upper body. 69 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 70 Install the roof deflector body. 71 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 72 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 73 Install the right front wheel housing body. 74 Install the left front wheel housing body. 75 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.
76 Fill coolant in the power system. 77 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 78 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 79 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 80 Connect the battery negative cable. 81 Close the front flip cover plate. 82 Close the door.
8.2.2.4 Replacement of Right Front Joint Beam
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain coolant from the power system. 9 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 10 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 11 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the roof deflector body. 15 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 16 Remove the left deflector upper body. 17 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 18 Remove the left deflector lower body. 19 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 20 Remove the right deflector upper body. 21 Remove the right deflector lower body. 22 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 25 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate.
27 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 28 Remove the through-type lamp. 29 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 30 Remove the forward MMW radar. 31 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 32 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 33 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the front bumper assembly. 35 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 36 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 37 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 38 Remove the left fender trim strip. 39 Remove the left fender assembly. 40 Remove the left front combination lamp. 41 Remove the left headlamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 43 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Remove the right fender trim strip. 45 Remove the right fender assembly. 46 Remove the right front combination lamp. 47 Remove the right headlamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 49 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 50 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 51 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 53 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 54 Remove the lamp (upper). 55 Remove the lamp (lower). 56 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 57 Remove the boarding step bracket. 58 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 59 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 61 Remove the frame main truss.
62 Remove the BIW assembly. 63 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 64 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 65 Remove the lower protection right mounting support. 66 Remove the sealing cross beam. 67 Remove the VDC assembly. 68 Remove the VDC bracket. 69 Remove the battery rod. 70 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 71 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 72 Remove the auxiliary battery. 73 Remove the battery backing plate. 74 Remove Left Junction Box. 75 Remove Right Junction Box. 76 Remove the battery assembly bracket. 77 Removal the head cross beam. 78 Removal the head cross beam 2. 79 Remove the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (right). 80 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the right front joint beam.

81 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the right front joint beam. 82 Remove 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the right front joint beam. 83 Remove the right front joint beam. Installation Procedures





1 Move the right front joint beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the right front joint beam.
Torque: 140 +/- 170 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 2 air pipes of the right front joint beam. 4 Connect 3 harness connectors of the right front joint beam.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (right). 6 Install the head cross beam 2. 7 Install the head cross beam. 8 Install the battery assembly bracket. 9 Install Right Junction Box. 10 Install Left Junction Box. 11 Install the battery backing plate. 12 Install the auxiliary battery. 13 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 14 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 15 Install the battery rod. 16 Install the VDC bracket. 17 Install the VDC assembly. 18 Install the sealing cross beam. 19 Install the lower protection right mounting support. 20 Install the front lower protection assembly. 21 Install the MMW radar bracket. 22 Install the BIW assembly. 23 Install the frame main truss. 24 Install the right deflector lower body. 25 Install the left deflector lower body. 26 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 27 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 28 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 29 Install the boarding step bracket. 30 Install the boarding step body assembly. 31 Install the lamp (lower). 32 Install the lamp (upper). 33 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 34 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 35 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 36 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 37 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 38 Install the right headlamp bracket. 39 Install the right headlamp. 40 Install the right front combination lamp. 41 Install the right fender assembly.
42 Install the right fender trim strip. 43 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Install the left headlamp bracket. 45 Install the left headlamp. 46 Install the left front combination lamp. 47 Install the left fender assembly. 48 Install the left fender trim strip. 49 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 50 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 51 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 52 Install the front bumper assembly. 53 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 54 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 55 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 56 Install the forward MMW radar. 57 Install the front MMW radar shield. 58 Install the through-type lamp. 59 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 60 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 61 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 62 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 63 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 64 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 65 Install the right deflector upper body. 66 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 67 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 68 Install the left deflector upper body. 69 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 70 Install the roof deflector body. 71 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 72 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 73 Install the right front wheel housing body. 74 Install the left front wheel housing body. 75 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.
76 Fill coolant in the power system. 77 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 78 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 79 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 80 Connect the battery negative cable. 81 Close the front flip cover plate. 82 Close the door.

8.2.2.5 Replacement of Tail Cross Beam
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear). 6 Remove the license plate lamp. 7 Remove the rear license plate mounting plate assembly. 8 Remove the left rear combination lamp. 9 Remove the right rear combination lamp. 10 Remove the reversing lamp. 11 Remove the rear retro-reflector. 12 13 Remove 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the tail cross beam. Remove the tail cross beam.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the tail cross beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the tail cross beam.


3 Install the rear retro-reflector. 4 Install the reversing lamp. 5 Install the right rear combination lamp. 6 Install the left rear combination lamp. 7 Install the rear license plate mounting plate assembly. 8 Install the license plate lamp. 9 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear). 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.
8.2.2.6 Replacement of Tubular Beam
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 9 Remove the air reservoir bracket. 10 Removal the tail cross beam. 11 Remove the left tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 12 Remove the tail cross beam reinforcement plate connecting plate. 13 Remove the air spring upper bracket 1.
14 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 15 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (left). 16 Remove the limit buffer assembly. 17 Remove the limit buffer assembly bracket. 18 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 19 Remove the shock absorber bracket. 20 Remove the air spring upper bracket 3 (left rear). 21 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 22 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 23 Remove the thrust bar bracket (left). 24 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 25 Remove the balance beam (left). 26 Remove the airbag solenoid valve assembly (rear). 27 Remove the parking solenoid valve assembly. 28 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 29 Remove the right tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 30 Remove the air spring upper bracket 2. 31 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 32 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (right). 33 Remove the air spring upper bracket 4 (right rear). 34 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 35 Remove the thrust bar bracket (right). 36 Remove the balance beam (right). 37 Remove the dual channel module assembly. 38 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 39 Remove the integrated axle - rear axle.
40 Remove 8 fixing bolts and nuts of the tubular beam. 41 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the tubular beam.




42 Remove the tubular beam. Installation Procedures 1 Move the tubular beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the tubular beam.
Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)




3 Install 8 fixing bolts and nuts of the tubular beam.
Torque: 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
4 Install the integrated axle - rear axle. 5 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 6 Install the dual channel module assembly. 7 Install the balance beam (right). 8 Install the thrust bar bracket (right). 9 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 10 Install the air spring upper bracket 4 (right rear). 11 Install the height adjustment device assembly (right). 12 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 13 Install the air spring upper bracket 2. 14 Install the right tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 15 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 16 Install the parking solenoid valve assembly. 17 Install the airbag solenoid valve assembly (rear). 18 Install the balance beam (left). 19 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 20 Install the thrust bar bracket (left). 21 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 22 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 23 Install the air spring upper bracket 3 (left rear). 24 Install the shock absorber bracket. 25 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 26 Install the limit buffer assembly bracket. 27 Install the limit buffer assembly. 28 Install the height adjustment device assembly (left). 29 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 30 Install the air spring upper bracket 1. 31 Install the tail cross beam reinforcement plate connecting plate. 32 Install the left tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 33 Install the tail cross beam. 34 Install the air reservoir bracket. 35 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 36 Fill coolant in the power system. 37 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 38 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 39 Connect the battery negative cable.
40 Close the front flip cover plate. 41 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the upper skeleton of the subframe to the lower connecting bracket of the subframe | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the upper skeleton of the subframe to the lower connecting bracket of the subframe | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
8.3 Subframe Device2810· 2g
8.3.1 Specifications
8.3.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.3.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.3.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Middle Skeleton_Sub Frame 5. Sub-frame positioning bolt 14×78 in new energy vehicles 2. Brkt-Connection Subframe Lor Frt 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Brkt-Connection Subframe Lor Rr 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut
1. Middle Skeleton_Sub Frame 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Upr Mounting Bracket-Frt Damper Lh 15. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Upr Mounting Bracket-Frt Damper Rh 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Mounting Plate-Front Spring Upr Lh 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Mounting Plate-Front Spring Upr Rh

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting the integrated framework and frame assembly | M12 | 88.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed bolts connecting the fixed support to the frame | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed bolts connecting the integrated framework and fixed bracket | M12 | 88.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs) |
8.4 Rear Integrated Frame Device2811· 2g
8.4.1 Specifications
8.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.4.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Outer Overiap Casting 2 8. Intermediate Overiap Casting 2 2. Integrated Framework 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Intermediate Overiap Casting 3 10. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Outer Overiap Casting 1 5. Intermediate Overiap Casting 4 12. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Intermediate Overiap Casting 1
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the front walking platform and the frame assembly | M10 | 37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts between the rear walkway decorative panel and the frame assembly | M8 | 11 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
8.5 Walkway Plate Device2812· 3g
8.5.1 Specifications
8.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.5.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Fixed Bracket for Catwalk Plate In New Energy Vehicles 6. Rear Trim Panel of Catwalk Plate In New Energy Vehicles 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Front Walking Platform 8. Hexagon Flange Nut 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 9. No Stepping Warning Label 5. Fixed Bracket 2 For Catwalk Plate In New Energy Vehicles

8.5.3 Dismantling and Installation
8.5.3.1 Replacement of Front Walking Platform
Removal Procedures 1 Remove the walking platform rear trim panel. 2 Remove 4fixing bolts of the front walking platform. 3 Remove the front walking platform.
caution
1. Due to the heavy weight of the front walking platform, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
2. Just loosen the two fixing bolts in the middle. there is no need to remove them completely.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the front walking platform to the mounting position.
caution
1. Due to the heavy weight of the front walking platform, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2. Install the fixing brackets first before installing the front walking platform, and tighten the two fixing bolts in the middle.
2 Install 4fixing bolts of the front walking platform.
Torque:37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install the walking platform rear trim panel.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the upper swing arm assembly and the upper frame of the subframe | M20 | 420 +/- 22 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the lower arm assembly and the frame on the subframe | M20 | 420 +/- 22 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing nut connecting the front air spring assembly and the mounting plate on the front spring | M12 | 40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the front air spring assembly and the left steering knuckle bracket assembly | M18 | 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the front shock absorber assembly to the lower mounting bracket of the front shock absorber | M16 | 66 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the front shock absorber assembly and the mounting bracket on the front shock absorber | M16 | 66 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the front brake assembly and the steering knuckle | M20 | 405 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the upper end of the steering knuckle and the left steering knuckle bracket assembly | M40 | 800 +/- 37 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the lower end of the steering knuckle and the left steering knuckle bracket assembly | M40 | 89 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs |
| Wheel hub flange fixing bolt | M16 | 243 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the brake chamber to the front brake assembly | M16 | 133 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the steering arm and the steering knuckle | M22 | 627 +/- 37 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the steering arm and the tie rod | M24 | 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs) |
8.6 Front Suspension Device2901
8.6.1 Specifications
8.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the wheel hub bearing unit and the steering knuckle | M45 | 442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs) |
| Upper end cover and steering knuckle | / | 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| Lower end cover steering knuckle | / | 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| Brake system parameters | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Item | Unit Adjustment | Numerical Value | Remark |
| Brake lining - outside - new | mm | 31 | Disc |
| Minimum thickness of brake lining - outside | mm | 11 | Disc |
| Brake lining - inside - new | mm | 30 | Disc |
| Minimum thickness of brake lining - inside | mm | 10 | Disc |
| Brake caliper type | mm | Floating | Disc |
| Thickness of brake disc - new | mm | 45 | Disc |
| Scrap thickness of brake disc | mm | 37 | Disc |
8.6.1.2 Technical Parameters

8.6.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.6.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Left Front Wheel End Assy 6. Upper Swing Arm Mounting Bolt(Rear) 2. Front Shock Absorber 7. Inner Pivot Nut 3. Front Airspring 8. Nut M12x1.5 (Spiralock) In New Energy Vehicles 4. Right Front Wheel End Assy 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Upper Swing Arm Mounting Bolt(Rear) 10. Nut M20x1.5 (Spiralock)
11. Flange Bolt 12. Hub Flange Assembly

13. Brake Caliper Assy-Lh Frt 16. Brake Bolts 14. Brake Disc 56. Brake Caliper Assy-Rh Frt 15. Brake Chamber

17. Snap Ring 19. Stop Washer 18. Hub Lock Nut 20. Hub Bearing Units

21. Limit Screw And Nut 29. Kingpin 22. Steering Knuckle 30. Sealing Rings 23. ABS Sensor 31. Spherical Bearings 24. SensorAbs Sensor Bushing 32. Lower O-Ring 25. Upper End Cap 33. Lower End Cap 26. Upper O-Ring 34. Steering Arm_Left 27. Kingpin Lock Nut 35. Hexagon Flange Bolt 28. Thrust Bearings 57. Right Steering Arm

36. Stabilizer Rod Tie Rod Support Fixing Nut 43. Outer Pivot Self-Aligning Washer In New Energy Vehicles 37. Lower Mounting Bracket_Shock Absorber 44. Upper Arm_Left 38. Hexagon Flange Bolt 45. Swing Arm Assy-Lh Lor 39. Knuckle Carrier-Lh 46. Outer Bearing Assembly of Swing Arm In New Energy Vehicles 40. Outer Pivot_Lower Arm 58. Right Steering Knuckle Bracket Assembly In New Rnergy Vehicles 41. Damper Bracket Fixing Bolt 59. Swing Arm - Right 42. Kingpin Lock Nut 60. Swing Arm Assy-Lor Rh

47. Snap Ring 49. Left Upper Swing Arm Body In New Energy Vehicles 48. Ball Joint Bushing In New Energy Vehicles

47. Snap Ring 50. Left Lower Swing Arm Body In New Energy Vehicles 48. Ball Joint Bushing In New Energy Vehicles

51. Brake Chamber Fixing Nut In New Energy Vehicles 54. Friction Plate 52. Brake Chamber Gasket In New Energy Vehicles 55. Left Front Brake Caliper Body 53. Brake Chamber Body In New Energy Vehicles 61. Brake Caliper Assy-Rh Frt


8.6.3 Dismantling and Installation
8.6.3.1 Replacement of Brake Disc
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake disc (left).
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the brake disc (left), it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures

1 Install the brake disc (left).
caution
Due to the heavy weight of brake disc (left), it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install the hub flange assembly (left). 3 Install the left front brake assembly. 4 Install the brake chamber (left). 5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
8.6.3.2 Replacement of Left Front Brake Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left).
8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake assembly, and remove the left front brake assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front brake assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake assembly.
Torque: 406 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front brake assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the brake chamber (left). 5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
8.6.3.3 Replacement of Friction Plate
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left).
3 Remove 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (left) cover plate, and open the friction plate (left) cover plate. 4 Remove the friction plate (left). Installation Procedures




1 Install the friction plate (left). 2 Close the friction plate (left) cover plate, and install 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (left) cover plate. 3 Install the guide wheel (left). 4 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
8.6.3.4 Replacement of Left Front Brake Body
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle.
6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the friction plate (left). 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front brake body. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake body and remove the left front brake body.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front brake body to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake body.
Torque: 405 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front brake body.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the friction plate (left). 5 Install the left front brake assembly. 6 Install the brake chamber (left). 7 Install the guide wheel (left). 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
8.6.3.5 Replacement of Hub Bearing Unit
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door.
3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left) . 10 Remove the brake disc (left). 11 Remove the circlip. 12 Remove 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (left). 13 Remove the hub bearing unit (left). Installation Procedures




1 Move the hub bearing unit (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (left).
Torque:442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install the circlip. 4 Install the brake disc (left). 5 Install the hub flange assembly (left) . 6 Install the left front brake assembly. 7 Install the brake chamber (left). 8 Install the guide wheel (left). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
8.6.3.6 Replacement of Steering Knuckle
Removal Procedures
1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake disc (left). 11 Remove the hub bearing unit (left). 12 Remove the left steering arm. 13 Remove the ABS sensor. 14 Remove the upper end cover.

15 Remove the lower end cover. 16 Remove 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (left). 17 Remove 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (left).




18 Remove the kingpin. 19 Remove the steering knuckle (left) and sealing ring. Installation Procedures 1 Press the thrust bearing and joint bearing into the steering knuckle hole, and then install the sealing ring into the steering knuckle. 2 Install the kingpin and connect the knuckle carrier.







3 Install 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (left).
Torque: 590 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (left).
Torque: 59 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
5 Install the lower end cover.
Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)


6 Install the upper end cover.
Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
7 Install the ABS sensor. 8 Install the left steering arm. 9 Install the hub bearing unit (left). 10 Install the brake disc (left). 11 Install the hub flange assembly (left). 12 Install the left front brake assembly. 13 Install the brake chamber (left). 14 Install the guide wheel (left). 15 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.
8.6.3.7 Replacement of Left Lower Swing Arm Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate.
8 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 9 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake chamber (left). 11 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (left). 12 Remove the left front wheel end assembly. 13 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (left). 14 Remove the left lower swing arm assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left lower swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (left). 3 Install the left front wheel end assembly. 4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (left). 5 Install the brake chamber (left). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (left).

7 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 8 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 9 Install the guide wheel (left). 10 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

8.6.3.8 Replacement of Right Lower Swing Arm Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the front air spring assembly (right). 9 Remove the brake chamber (right). 10 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (right). 11 Remove the right front wheel end assembly. 12 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (right). 13 Remove the right lower swing arm assembly.

Installation Procedures 1 Install the right lower swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (right). 3 Install the right front wheel end assembly. 4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (right). 5 Install the brake chamber (right). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (right). 7 Install the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Install the guide wheel (right). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
8.6.3.9 Replacement of Brake Chamber
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the guide wheel (left).
4 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (left). 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (left). 6 Remove the brake chamber (left). Installation Procedures




1 Move the brake chamber (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (left).
Torque: 133 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (left). 4 Install the guide wheel (left). 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
8.6.3.10 Replacement of Left Upper Swing Arm Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 9 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake chamber (left). 11 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (left). 12 Remove the left front wheel end assembly. 13 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (left). 14 Remove the left upper swing arm assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left upper swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (left). 3 Install the left front wheel end assembly.

4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (left). 5 Install the brake chamber (left). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (left). 7 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 8 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 9 Install the guide wheel (left). 10 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to perform four-wheel alignment.

8.6.3.11 Replacement of Left Steering Arm
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left). 3 Remove 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm.
4 Remove 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm to separate the tie rod (left). 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the left steering arm. 6 Remove the left steering arm. Installation Procedures





1 Move the left steering arm to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the left steering arm.
Torque:627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm.
Torque:254.5 +/- 11 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm.
5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.6.3.12 Replacement of Steering Knuckle
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the right front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake disc (right). 11 Remove the hub bearing unit (right). 12 Remove the right steering arm. 13 Remove the ABS sensor. 14 Remove the upper end cover.
15 Remove the lower end cover. 16 Remove 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (right). 17 Remove 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (right).




18 Remove the spindle. 19 Remove the steering knuckle (right) and sealing ring. Installation Procedures 1 Press the thrust bearing and joint bearing into the steering knuckle hole, and then install the sealing ring into the steering knuckle. 2 Install the kingpin and connect the knuckle carrier.

3 Install 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (right).
Torque: 627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (right).
Torque: 59 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
5 Install the lower end cover.
Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
6 Install the upper end cover.
Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
7 Install the ABS sensor. 8 Install the right steering arm. 9 Install the hub bearing unit (right). 10 Install the brake disc (right). 11 Install the hub flange assembly (left). 12 Install the right front brake assembly. 13 Install the brake chamber (right). 14 Install the guide wheel (right). 15 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.
8.6.3.13 Replacement of Brake Chamber
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the guide wheel (right).
4 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (right). 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (right). 6 Remove the brake chamber (right). Installation Procedures




1 Move the brake chamber (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (right).
Torque:133 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (right). 4 Install the guide wheel (right). 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
8.6.3.14 Replacement of Right Steering Arm
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (right).
3 Remove 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm. 4 Remove 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm to separate the tie rod (right). 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the right steering arm. 6 Remove the right steering arm.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the right steering arm to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the right steering arm.
Torque:627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm.
Torque: 255 +/- 11 (ft lbs)
4 Install 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm. 5 Install the guide wheel (right). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
8.6.3.15 Replacement of Brake Disc
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the right front brake assembly.

9 Remove the hub flange assembly (right) . 10 Remove the brake disc (right).
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the brake disc (right), it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures 1 Install the brake disc (right).
caution
Due to the heavy weight of brake disc (right), it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Install the hub flange assembly (right). 3 Install the right front brake assembly. 4 Install the brake chamber (right). 5 Install the guide wheel (right). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

8.6.3.16 Replacement of Right Front Brake Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front brake assembly. 9 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake assembly, and remove the right front brake assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front brake assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake assembly.
Torque:406 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front brake assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the brake chamber (right). 5 Install the guide wheel (right). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
8.6.3.17 Replacement of Friction Plate
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (right).
3 Remove 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (right) cover plate, and open the friction plate (right) cover plate. 4 Remove the friction plate (right). Installation Procedures




1 Install the friction plate (right). 2 Close the friction plate (right) cover plate, and install 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (right) cover plate. 3 Install the guide wheel (right). 4 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
8.6.3.18 Replacement of Right Front Brake Body
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the friction plate (right). 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front brake body. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake body and remove the right front brake body.


Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front brake body to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake body.
Torque: 405.5 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front brake body.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the friction plate (right). 5 Install the brake chamber (right). 6 Install the guide wheel (right). 7 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.
8.6.3.19 Replacement of Hub Bearing Unit
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.
4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the right front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (right). 10 Remove the brake disc (right). 11 Remove the circlip. 12 Remove 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (right). 13 Remove the hub bearing unit (right). Installation Procedures




1 Move the hub bearing unit (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (right).
Torque: 442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install the circlip. 4 Install the brake disc (right). 5 Install the hub flange assembly (right). 6 Install the right front brake assembly. 7 Install the brake chamber (right). 8 Install the guide wheel (right). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
8.6.3.20 Replacement of Right Upper Swing Arm Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the front air spring assembly (right). 9 Remove the brake chamber (right). 10 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (right). 11 Remove the right front wheel end assembly. 12 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (right). 13 Remove the right upper swing arm assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Install the right upper swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (right). 3 Install the right front wheel end assembly. 4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (right). 5 Install the brake chamber (right). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (right). 7 Install the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Install the guide wheel (right). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to perform four-wheel alignment.
8.6.3.21 Replacement of Front Air Spring Assembly (left)
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 9 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the front air spring assembly (left). 10 Remove 1 fixing nut at the upper part of the front air spring assembly (left).



11 Remove 1 fixing nut at the lower part of the front air spring assembly (left). 12 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). Installation Procedures 1 Move the front air spring assembly (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut at the lower part of the front air spring assembly (left).
Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)



3 Install 1 fixing nut at the upper part of the front air spring assembly (left).
Torque:40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
4 Connect 1 air pipe of the front air spring assembly (left). 5 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 6 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 7 Install the guide wheel (left). 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
8.6.3.22 Replacement of Front Shock Absorber Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the front shock absorber assembly, and remove the front shock absorber assembly. Installation Procedures




1 Move the front shock absorber assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the front shock absorber assembly.
Torque:66 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
3 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the rear air spring assembly to the upper bracket of the air spring | M12 | 40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the rear air spring assembly and the balance beam | M18 | 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the bracket on the air spring to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed nut for balancing beam and integrated axle rear axle connection | M22 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed bolts connecting the pipe beam and thrust rod bracket | M16 | 228.5 +/- 84.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the pipe beam and the thrust rod bracket | M16 | 228.5 +/- 84.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the thrust rod bracket to the frame assembly | M16 | 228.5 +/- 84.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the X-shaped control arm assembly to the pipe beam | M22 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing nut for the X-shaped control arm assembly and the integrated axle rear axle connection | M22 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixed nut connecting the X-shaped control arm assembly and the integrated axle middle axle | M22 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the shock absorber assembly (rear) and the balance beam | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the shock absorber assembly (rear) to the shock absorber bracket | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing nut connecting the shock absorber assembly (rear) to the shock absorber bracket | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the shock absorber bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the shock absorber bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
8.7 Rear Suspension Device2911· 7g
8.7.1 Specifications
8.7.1.1 Fastener Specifications
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the limit buffer block assembly and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the limit buffer block assembly and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the thrust rod bracket | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing nut connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the thrust rod bracket | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the balance beam | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the balance beam | M20 | 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680) |

8.7.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.7.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Bush 4. Nut M22x1.5(Spiralock) 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt M22x1.5 5. Double Stud M22x2.5x1.5 3. X-Link Bracket Assy
6. Trailing Arm Assy 11. Nut M20x1.5(Spiralock) 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Trailing Arm Bravket 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

4. Nut M22x1.5(Spiralock) 19. U-Bolt1 6. Trailing Arm Assy 20. U-Bolt2 11. Nut M20x1.5(Spiralock) 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Axle Pressure Equalizer-Left 22. Equalizer Pin 16. Axle Pressure Equalizer-Right 23. Double Stud M18x2x1.5 17. Shock Absorber Lower Gasket 24. Nut M18x1.5(Spiralock) 18. Rear Shock Absorber Assy 25. Hexagon Flange Bolt

26. Air Spring-260 32. Hexagon Flange Bolt 27. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 4 33. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 2 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 34. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 1 29. Hexagon Flange Bolt 35. Buffering Stopper Assy 30. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 3 36. Shock Absorber Bracket 31. Air Spring-280 37. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

11. Nut M20x1.5(Spiralock) 24. Nut M18x1.5(Spiralock) 18. Rear Shock Absorber Assy 38. Nut M12x1.5(Spiralock) 23. Double Stud M18x2x1.5 39. Hexagon Flange Bolt



8.7.3 Dismantling and Installation
8.7.3.1 Replacement of Rear Air Spring Assembly - 260
Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 4 Disconnect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 5 Remove 1 plug of the rear air spring assembly - 260.
6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 7 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 8 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260. Installation Procedures





1 Move the rear air spring assembly - 260 to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260.
Torque: 40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260.
Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
4 Install 1 plug of the rear air spring assembly - 260.
Torque:7.5 - 12 (ft lbs)

5 Connect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 6 Install the drive wheel (right front). 7 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.2 Replacement of Rear Air Spring Assembly - 280
Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 4 Disconnect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 280.
5 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280. 7 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280. Installation Procedures





1 Move the rear air spring assembly - 280 to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280.
Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280.
Torque:40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
4 Connect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 280.
5 Install the drive wheel (right front). 6 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.


8.7.3.3 Replacement of Balance Beam (left)
Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Loosen the air spring air pipe joint and exhaust the air inside. 4 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 5 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 6 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 7 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 8 Remove 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (left). 9 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (left). 10 Remove the balance beam (left).


Installation Procedures 1 Move the balance beam (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (left).
Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (left).
Torque: 405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 5 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 6 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 7 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 8 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.
8.7.3.4 Replacement of Balance Beam (right)
Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Loosen the air spring air pipe joint and exhaust the air inside.
4 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 5 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 6 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 7 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 8 Remove 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (right). 9 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (right). 10 Remove the balance beam (right). Installation Procedures




1 Move the balance beam (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (right).
Torque:199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (right).
Torque:405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 5 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 6 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 7 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 8 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.
8.7.3.5 Replacement of X-shaped Control Arm Assembly (front)
Removal Procedures 1 Removal the fifth wheel assembly. 2 Remove the corrugated plate.
3 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 4 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 5 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). Installation Procedures




1 Move the X-shaped control arm assembly (front) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front).
Torque:516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
caution
Simply screw in the thread and tighten it after the other end is secured.
3 Install 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front).
Torque:516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install the corrugated plate. 5 Install the fifth wheel assembly.
8.7.3.6 Replacement of X-shaped Control Arm Assembly (rear)
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the dual channel module assembly.
5 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 7 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). Installation Procedures




1 Move the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear).
Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
caution
Simply screw in the thread and tighten it after the other end is secured.
3 Install 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear).
Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install the dual channel module assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
8.7.3.7 Replacement of Shock Absorber Assembly (rear)
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (front left).

3 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber assembly (rear). 4 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). Installation Procedures 1 Move the shock absorber assembly (rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber assembly (rear).
Torque:516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install the drive wheel (left front). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.8 Replacement of Shock Absorber Bracket
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (front left).
3 Remove 1 fixing bolt and nut connecting the shock absorber bracket to the shock absorber assembly (rear), and separate the shock absorber assembly (rear). 4 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber bracket. 5 Remove the shock absorber bracket. Installation Procedures




1 Move the shock absorber bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber bracket.
Torque: 155 +/- 14.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing bolt and nut connecting the shock absorber bracket to the shock absorber assembly (rear), and separate the shock absorber assembly (rear).
Torque:405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install the drive wheel (left front). 5 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.
8.7.3.9 Replacement of Limit Buffer Assembly
Removal Procedures

1 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the limit buffer assembly. 2 Remove the limit buffer assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the limit buffer assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the limit buffer assembly.
Torque:155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

8.7.3.10 Replacement of Longitudinal Thrust Rod Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (front left).

3 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 4 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the longitudinal thrust rod assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the longitudinal thrust rod assembly.
Torque:405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install the drive wheel (left front). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.11 Replacement of Thrust Bar Bracket
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (rear left).
3 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the thrust bar bracket to the thrust bar. 4 Remove 15 fixing bolts and nuts of the thrust bar bracket. 5 Remove the thrust bar bracket. Installation Procedures




1 Move the thrust bar bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 15 fixing bolts and nuts of the thrust bar bracket.
Torque:234.5 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the thrust bar bracket to the thrust bar.
Torque: 405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
4 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 5 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.
8.7.3.12 Replacement of Rear Spring U-bolt
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (rear left).

3 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the rear spring U-bolt. 4 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear spring U-bolt to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the rear spring U-bolt.
Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)













3 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the airbag solenoid valve bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the height sensor bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the airbag solenoid valve assembly to the airbag solenoid valve bracket | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the airbag solenoid va The fixing bolt connecting the height sensor assembly and the height sensor bracketlve assembly to the airbag solenoid valve bracket | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the remote control assembly and the white body assembly assembly | M6 | 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the remote control bracket to the right storage box assembly | M6 | 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the height sensor assembly and the swing rod | M6 | 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs) |
| NG8 nut seat on airbag solenoid valve tracheal interface | M16 | 7.5 - 12 (ft lbs) |
| NG8 nut seat on the air spring assembly air pipe interface | M16 | 7.5 - 12 (ft lbs) |
| Pressure sensor on the air spring assembly air pipe interface | M16 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the air suspension controller assembly to the floor sheet metal | M6 | 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs) |
| The direct head connecting the airbag solenoid valve assembly and the overflow valve assembly | M22 | 7.5 - 12 (ft lbs) |
8.8 ECU Actuator of Air Suspension2950· 2g
8.8.1 Specifications
8.8.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.8.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.8.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Remote Control Stand 14. Pendulum Bar 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Connecting Rod 3. Remote Control Assy 16. Pressure Sensor Assy 4. Direct Head 17. Nut Seat NG8 5. Hexagon Nut_Type 1 18. Snap Ring NG8 6. Airbag Solenoid Valve Assy 19. Washer Ng8 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20. Plug 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 21. Air Suspension Controller Assy 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 23. Height Sensor Assy 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Distance Sensor Bracket 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 26. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 28. Brkt-Air Bag Solenoid Valve 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt
4. Direct Head 16. Pressure Sensor Assy 5. Hexagon Nut_Type 1 17. Nut Seat NG8 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 18. Snap Ring NG8 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 19. Washer Ng8 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Distance Sensor Bracket 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 25. Pendulum Bar 12 Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 26. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 27. Airbag Solenoid Valve Assy 14. Pendulum Bar 28. Brkt-Air Bag Solenoid Valve 15. Connecting Rod

4. Direct Head 19. Washer Ng8 17. Nut Seat NG8 20. Plug 18. Snap Ring NG8 22. Solenoid Modulator Valve Assy

8.8.3 System Schematic Diagram
8.8.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U152017 | Over-voltage | Refer to ECAS Power Fault |
| U152016 | Under-voltage | |
| U15CD08 | CCVS Communication Timeout | Refer to ECAS Communication Fault |
| U15D408 | TCO1 Communication Timeout | |
| U15DB08 | ASC2 Communication Timeout | |
| U15CE08 | AIR1 Communication Timeout | |
| C12FE42 | ECU general memory failure | Refer to ECAS Internal Fault |
| C12FE49 | VFF power failure | |
| C121011 | Front height sensor short to gnd | Refer to Front Axle Height Sensor Fault |
| C121015 | Front height sensor short to battery | |
| C121014 | Front height sensor out of range | |
| C121311 | Rear left height sensor short to gnd | Refer to Rear Axle Left Height Sensor Fault |
| C121315 | Rear left height sensor short to battery | |
| C121314 | Rear left height sensor out of range | |
| C121211 | Rear right height sensor short to gnd | Refer to Rear Axle Right Height Sensor Fault |
| C121215 | Rear right height sensor short to battery | |
| C121214 | Rear right height sensor out of range |
8.8.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
8.8.4.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing the malfunction of the air suspension electronic control unit actuator, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the air suspension electronic control unit actuator before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the air suspension electronic control unit execution device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and
avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.8.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the air suspension electronic control unit execution device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the air suspension electronic control unit execution device system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.8.4.3 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.8.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
ECAS
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| C121611 | Front pressure sensor short to gnd | Refer to Front Axle Pressure Sensor Fault |
| C121612 | Front pressure sensor short to vcc | |
| C121613 | Front pressure Sensor open | |
| C121911 | Rear Left pressure sensor short to gnd | Refer to Left Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault |
| C121912 | Rear Left pressure sensor short to vcc | |
| C121913 | Rear Left pressure Sensor open | |
| C121811 | Rear Right pressure sensor short to gnd | Refer to Right Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault |
| C121812 | Rear Right pressure sensor short to vcc | |
| C121813 | Rear Right pressure sensor open | |
| C120111 | Front solenoid vavle short to gnd | Refer to Front Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault |
| C120112 | Front solenoid vavle short to vcc | |
| C120113 | Front solenoid vavle open | |
| C120411 | Rear left solenoid vavle short to gnd | Refer to Rear Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault |
| C120412 | Rear left solenoid vavle short to vcc | |
| C120413 | Rear left solenoid vavle open | |
| C120711 | Rear central solenoid vavle short to gnd | |
| C120712 | Rear central solenoid vavle short to vcc | |
| C120713 | Rear central solenoid vavle open | |
| C120311 | Rear right solenoid vavle short to gnd | |
| C120312 | Rear right solenoid vavle short to vcc | |
| C120313 | Rear right solenoid vavle open | |
| C122E94 | Pressure power failure | Refer to Pressure Sensor Power Fault |
| C122212 | solenoid valve power short to vcc | Refer to Suspension Solenoid Valve Power Fault |
| C122211 | solenoid valve power short to gnd | |
| C122F12 | RCU power short circuit | Refer to Remote Control Fault |
| C123013 | RCU control signal not issued |
8.8.4.5 ECAS Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| U152017 | Over-voltage | Over-voltage Timeout 2s | Ignition ON | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.ECAS |
| U152016 | Under-voltage | Under-voltage Timeout 2s | Ignition ON |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| U15CD08 | CCVS Communicati- on Timeout | CAN message CCVS Communication Timeout 8s | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.ECAS |
| U15D408 | TCO1 Communicati- on Timeout | CAN message TCO1 Communication Timeout 8s | Ignition ON | |
| U15DB08 | ASC2 Communicati- on Timeout | CAN message ASC2 Communication Timeout 8s | Ignition ON | |
| U15CE08 | AIR1 Communicati- on Timeout | CAN message AIR1 Communication Timeout 8s | Ignition ON |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides ECAS? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the ECAS power and grounding harness. Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.6 ECAS Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C12FE42 | ECU general memory failure | There was one write - failure of the EEPROM during the ECU inspection process | Ignition ON | 1.ECAS |
| C12FE49 | VFF power failure | VFF power failures occurred more than three times out of five detections | Ignition ON |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C121011 | Front height sensor short to gnd | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle height sensor 3.ECAS |
| C121015 | Front height sensor short to battery | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C121014 | Front height sensor out of range | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.7 ECAS Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 4:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.8 Front Axle Height Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle height sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C121311 | Rear left height sensor short to gnd | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Rear axle left height sensor 3.ECAS |
| C121315 | Rear left height sensor short to battery | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C121314 | Rear left height sensor out of range | ECU received fault signal from rear left height sensor continually after 0.5s ,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the front axle height sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Height Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.9 Rear Axle Left Height Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle left height sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C121211 | Rear right height sensor short to gnd | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Rear axle right height sensor 3.ECAS |
| C121215 | Rear right height sensor short to battery | ECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C121214 | Rear right height sensor out of range | ECU received fault signal from rear rightheight sensor continually after 0.5s ,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the left rear axle height sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Height Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.10 Rear Axle Right Height Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle right height sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C121611 | Front pressure sensor short to gnd | Pressure signal <0.14V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle pressure sensor 3.ECAS |
| C121612 | Front pressure sensor short to vcc | Pressure signal >4.65V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C121613 | Front pressure Sensor open | 0.14V<Pressure signal <0.4V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the rear axle right height sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Height Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.11 Front Axle Pressure Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle pressure sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C121911 | Rear Left pressure sensor short to gnd | Pressure signal <0.14V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2. Left rear axle pressure sensor 3.ECAS |
| C121912 | Rear Left pressure sensor short to vcc | Pressure signal >4.65V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C121913 | Rear Left pressure Sensor open | 0.14V<Pressure signal <0.4V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the front axle pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.12 Left Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left rear axle pressure sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C121811 | Rear Right pressure sensor short to gnd | Pressure signal <0.14V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2. Right rear axle pressure sensor 3.ECAS |
| C121812 | Rear Right pressure sensor short to vcc | Pressure signal >4.65V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C121813 | Rear Right pressure sensor open | 0.14V<Pressure signal <0.4V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the left rear axle pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.13 Right Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right rear axle pressure sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C120111 | Front solenoid vavle short to gnd | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle suspension solenoid valve 3.ECAS |
| C120112 | Front solenoid vavle short to vcc | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120113 | Front solenoid vavle open | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the right rear axle pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.14 Front Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle suspension solenoid valve and ECAS. C66-2 C66-1
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C120411 | Rear left solenoid vavle short to gnd | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Rear axle suspension solenoid valve 3.ECAS |
| C120412 | Rear left solenoid vavle short to vcc | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120413 | Rear left solenoid vavle open | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120711 | Rear central solenoid vavle short to gnd | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120712 | Rear central solenoid vavle short to vcc | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120713 | Rear central solenoid vavle open | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120311 | Rear right solenoid vavle short to gnd | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120312 | Rear right solenoid vavle short to vcc | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON | |
| C120313 | Rear right solenoid vavle open | solenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the front axle suspension solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.15 Rear Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle suspension solenoid valve and ECAS. C66-2 C66-1
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C122E94 | Pressure power failure | There were more than three air - pressure - sensor - power - related failures in five detections | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Pressure sensor 3.ECAS |
Step 4:Replace the rear axle suspension solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.16 Pressure Sensor Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the pressure sensor and ECAS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C122212 | solenoid valve power short to vcc | There were more than three solenoid valve short-circuit faults to the power supply in five detections | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2. Suspensio- n solenoid valve 3.ECAS |
| C122211 | solenoid valve power short to gnd | There were more than three solenoid - valve - to - ground short - circuit faults in five detections | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.17 Suspension Solenoid Valve Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the suspension solenoid valve and ECAS. C66-2 C66-1
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C122F12 | RCU power short circuit | There were more than three RCU (Remote Control Unit) remote - control - power - supply faults in five detections | Ignition ON | 1. Wiring harness 2.Remote control 3.ECAS |
| C123013 | RCU control signal not issued | ECU received fault signal from RCU continually after 3.5s,set the DTC immediately. | Ignition ON |
Step 4:Replace the suspension solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.8.4.18 Remote Control Malfunction
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the remote control and ECAS.
Step 4:Replace the remote control. Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.


8.8.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.8.5.1 Replacement of Air Suspension Controller Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right storage box assembly. 6 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the air suspension controller assembly. 7 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the air suspension controller assembly. 8 Remove the air suspension controller assembly.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the air suspension controller assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the air suspension controller assembly.
Torque: (8 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 3 harness connectors of the air suspension controller assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the right storage box assembly. 5 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the air suspension controller assembly, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the height.
8.8.5.2 Replacement of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the airbag solenoid valve assembly. 6 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the airbag solenoid valve assembly.


7 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the airbag solenoid valve assembly. 8 Remove the airbag solenoid valve assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the airbag solenoid valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the airbag solenoid valve assembly.
Torque: (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs

3 Connect 4 air pipes of the airbag solenoid valve assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the airbag solenoid valve assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
8.8.5.3 Replacement of Airbag Solenoid Valve Bracket
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.
4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the airbag solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 6 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the airbag solenoid valve bracket. 7 Remove the airbag solenoid valve bracket. Installation Procedures 1 Move the airbag solenoid valve bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the airbag solenoid valve bracket.
Torque:(18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
3 Install the airbag solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.


8.8.5.4 Replacement of Overflow Valve Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 7 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the overflow valve assembly.
8 Remove 2 straps of the overflow valve assembly. 9 Remove the overflow valve assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the overflow valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 straps of the overflow valve assembly.

3 Connect 2 air pipes of the overflow valve assembly. 4 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
8.8.5.5 Replacement of Pressure Sensor Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.


4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor assembly. 5 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the pressure sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.
8.8.5.6 Replacement of Height Sensor Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the height sensor assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the height sensor assembly. 6 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the height sensor assembly. 7 Remove the height sensor assembly.



Installation Procedures 1 Move the height sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the height sensor assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the height sensor assembly.
Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
4 Connect 1 harness connector of the height sensor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
8.9 Wheel Device3101 / 1000· 1g
8.9.1 Quality Warranty Statement
8.9.1.1 Tire Quality Warranty Statement
Windrose warrants that its vehicles are (1) designed, built and equipped with tires that conform, at the time of sale, with requirements of vehicle manufacturers whose vehicles are designed to meet applicable 2014 and later, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and National Highway Traffic and Safety Administration greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency standards, and (2) those tires are free from defects in material and workmanship which cause the vehicle to fail to conform with the vehicle manufacturer ’ s requirements for a period of 2 years or 24,000 miles, whichever occurs first.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the wheel hub and the wheel rim | M22 | (479 +/- 37) ft lbs |
| Four-wheel Alignment Parameters | ||
|---|---|---|
| Item | Unit Adjustment | Numerical Value |
| Kingpin inclination | ° | 7.9°±30′ |
| Kingpin caster | ° | 2.5°±30′ |
| Wheel camber | ° | 0.65°±30′ |
| Front wheel toe-in | mm | 0-1 (left/right) |
| Driving Tire Model | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Item | Axle | Form 1 | Form 2 | Form 3 |
| Tire specifications | Input shaft | 12R22.5 | 295/80R22.5 | 315/70R22.5 Z2 |
| Output shaft | 12R22.5 | 295/80R22.5 | 315/70R22.5 D2 | |
| 3rd shaft | 12R22.5 | 295/80R22.5 | 315/70R22.5 D2 |
| Wheel Rim Model | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Item | Form 1 | Form 2 | Form 3 |
| Rim specifications | 9.00×22.5 | 9.00×22.5 | 9.00×22.5 |
| Tire Dynamic Unbalance | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Item | Unit Adjustment | Wheel Rim Form 1 | Wheel Rim Form 2 |
| Dynamic unbalance | g | ≤50 (after balance) | ≤50 (after balance) |
| Tire Pressure (cold state) | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Wheel | Unit | Form 1 | Form 2 | Form 3 |
| Front wheels | psi | 135 +/- 3 (psi) | 135 +/- 3 (psi) | 135 +/- 3 (psi) |
| Rear wheels | psi | 135 +/- 3 (psi) | 135 +/- 3 (psi) | 135 +/- 3 (psi) |
| Name | Parameter |
|---|---|
| Wheel radial runout | ≤0.5mm |
| Wheel face flatness | ≤0.1mm |
8.9.2 Specifications
8.9.2.1 Fastener Specifications
8.9.2.2 Technical Parameters
angles shall be ≤ 0.5 °, and the toe-in of the left and right wheels shall be ensured.

8.9.3 Decomposition Diagram
8.9.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Wheel Nut (Front) In New Energy Vehicles 6. Tyre Blowout Emergency Safety Device In New Energy Vehicles 2. Wheel Nut (rear) In New Energy Vehicles 7. Tyre Blowout Emergency Identification (Indoor) In New Energy Vehicles 3. Tire Assembly - Guide Wheel 8. Tyre Blowout Emergency Identification (wheel side) In New Energy Vehicles 4. Tire Assembly - Drive Wheel 9. Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 5. Wheel Assembly In New Energy Vehicles 10. Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor
8.9.4 Inspect
8.9.4.1 Inspection of Tire
Inspection of Air Pressure
The tire pressure shall comply with the specified value in the user manual. Regularly check the tire pressure, as high or low pressure can cause abnormal tire wear. If the air pressure is too high, it will cause excessive wear in the middle of the tire; If the air pressure is too low, it will cause excessive wear on both sides of the tire. In addition, incorrect tire pressure can also cause reduced ride comfort, heavy steering, braking deviation, and other faults.
Inspection of Crack and Pattern
Regularly inspect the surface of the tire for defects such as cracks and deformations, and if any, replace the tire promptly. Regularly inspect the surface of the tire for defects such as cracks and deformations, and if any, replace the tire promptly. Tire with the pattern wear reaching the height of the TWI (the depth of the tire pattern must not be less than 1.6 mm) must be replaced.
Lifespan Inspection and Rotation
Tires that have been in use for more than 5 years must be replaced by force.
Inspection of Tire Tread
Regularly check the tire tread is punctured and whether there are any stones stuck between the two wheels. Remove the stones embedded in the tire. If small holes are found on the tread, they shall be filled with rubber to prevent sand and mud from entering the cord layer and causing voids.
Vehicle Parking
When parking the vehicle, it is also important to protect the tires and avoid parking on roads with large, sharp, or sharp obstacles. In addition, it is advisable to avoid contact between passenger cars and petroleum products, acidic substances, and other materials that may affect rubber deterioration.
Handling of Overheating
Tires are prone to overheating and increased air pressure during summer or high-speed driving. In this case, the vehicle shall be parked to dissipate heat, and deflation, pressure reduction, or water splashing to cool down are strictly prohibited.
Tire Replacement
When installing tires, tires of the same specification, size, pattern, and number of cord layers shall be installed on the same axle. When replacing tires, it is best to replace all tires at the same time, at least in pairs. For the replacement of the steerable wheel (front wheel), new tires must be used and it is never allowed to replace tires with worn old tires.
Tire Usage
1. Limiting driving speed The increased driving speed, especially frequent high-speed driving, significantly reduces the service life of tires. 2. Driving according to road conditions The type and condition of road surface have a significant impact on the service life of tires. The driver shall choose the road surface according to the road conditions and select the appropriate driving speed to increase the mileage of tires. 3. Mastering tire temperature changes a. When driving in hot weather, due to the high external temperature, the accumulated heat in the tires is difficult to dissipate, causing a sharp rise in tire temperature and an increase in tire pressure, thereby accelerating rubber aging. Therefore, when driving in hot weather, attention shall be paid to controlling the temperature of the tires. In addition to appropriately reducing the vehicle speed, if conditions permit, driving can be done in the morning and evening when the temperature is low, or after driving a certain distance, stopping and resting to prevent tire temperature from being too high. b. It is prohibited to deflate to reduce pressure. In the season of low temperature, as tires dissipate heat faster during use, they are less prone to high heat, and the tread is more wear- resistant. In seasons with low temperatures, especially in severe cold weather, it is advisable to drive at low speeds for the first few kilometers after starting in order to increase tire temperature when the vehicle is parked overnight or after a long period of time. In short, mastering tire temperature changes during driving is extremely important. 4. Adopting the correct driving method The car shall not start too aggressively, and both empty and heavy vehicles shall start smoothly at low speed. Avoid dragging the tires on the ground to reduce tread wear. When driving on a good road surface, keep moving in a straight line, and avoid swaying left and right or making sharp turns, except when meeting vehicles or avoiding obstacles, to prevent lateral cutting between the tire and the wheel rim from damaging the tire. When the vehicle goes down a long slope, the vehicle speed shall be appropriately controlled according to the slope size, length, and road conditions. In situations where the slope is long, the road is steep, and the road conditions are complex, it is advisable to shift into low gear and use light braking to
control the vehicle speed downhill. This not only avoids emergency braking and reduces tire wear, but also ensures safe driving. When the vehicle is going uphill, try to use inertia to drive, change gears at the right time, maintain appropriate residual force, and do not wait for the car to stop before restarting to reduce tire wear. When turning while driving, the vehicle speed shall be controlled according to the situation of the curve. Do not turn at high speed, otherwise the vehicle will generate a large centrifugal force, causing the loaded cargo to tilt, the center of mass to shift to one side, and the single-sided tire to be overloaded and dragged, accelerating wear, and the tire to be cut horizontally by the wheel rim, causing damage. When driving in complex situations (such as meeting, overtaking, passing through towns, intersections, and crossing railways), it is important to maintain an appropriate driving speed, reduce frequent braking, and avoid emergency braking. Otherwise, sliding friction between the tire and the ground will occur, resulting in severe wear of the tread. On bad roads, slow down and observe carefully, choose a path to pass through, and stop to check if there are stones between the twin tires. If there are, they shall be removed in a timely manner. When parking on the way or on site, it is important to develop a habit of safe sliding when parking. Before parking, choose a flat, clean, and oil-free ground. Each tire shall land smoothly, especially if the vehicle is loaded overnight, attention shall be paid to choosing a good parking place, and the rear wheel shall be lifted if necessary.

8.9.4.2 Four-wheel Alignment
1. Jack the vehicle. 2. Check the tires. 3. Check the front suspension.
caution
Check the suspension for wear, looseness, deformation, and damage. In case of any of the above defects, adjust, tighten, or replace accordingly.
4. Check the steering angle of the wheels.
caution
If the measured value is not within the specified range, the steering tie rod needs to be checked.
5. Loosen the fixing bolts of the upper and lower swing arms, and add shims between the ball joint and the subframe to change the value of the camber angle. 6. Tighten the fixing bolts of the upper and lower swing arms. 7. Loosen the adjustment bolt of the steering rod, adjust the length of the rod by rotating the ball joint, observe the direction of the toe in change, and determine the adjustment value.
caution
1. After adjustment, the difference in length between the left and right tie rods shall be ≤ 2mm;
2. After adjustment, fix the inner clamp bolt above the rod.
8. Tighten the adjustment bolt of the steering rod. 9. Lower the vehicle.

8.9.4.3 Tire Rotation
caution
If there is obvious uneven tire wear, the cause of this wear shall be ruled out.
In case of tire rotation, it is recommended to check the balance of both the tire and wheel assemblies simultaneously.
1. When performing brake checks on tires according to the prescribed maintenance schedule, it is recommended to perform tire cross rotation. 2. Jack the vehicle.
caution
Record the original position of each tire and wheel assembly relative to the vehicle.
3. Remove the wheel assembly. 4. Perform rotation to the tire and wheel assembly according to the following diagram.
caution
Perform tire cross rotation as shown below.
caution
1. The front axle tires shall not be interchanged with the intermediate and rear axle tires;
2. If there Is a rotation direction on the tire, and after tire rotation,make sure that the direction of rotation is the forward direction of the vehicle;
3. After the tire rotation is completed, recalibrate the tire pressure for all tires.

5. Install the wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure.


8.9.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.9.5.1 Replacement of Tire Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel. 3 Release the air from the tire and use a pry bar to pry off the tire. 4 Remove the tire assembly.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tire, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Installation Procedures 1 Move the tire assembly to the mounting position.
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tire, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2 Measure the tire pressure on both sides with a pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure remains consistent. 3 Perform tire dynamic balancing. 4 Install the guide wheel. 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
8.9.5.2 Replacement of TESD
Removal Procedures
1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the driven wheel. 3 Deflate the tyre and then separate the tyre from the rim, and remove the TESD.
caution
Do not damage the wheels during removal.
Installation Procedures 1 Install the TESD and inflate the tyre assembly after pre- installation.
Torque: (7.5 - ft lbs)
2 Install the driven wheel. 3 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.9.5.3 Replacement of Wheel Assembly
Removal Procedures
caution
The removal and installation procedure for all tires is the same.
To maintain wheel balance, mark the relative position of the wheels before removing the tires.
1 When removing the wheel assembly, first loosen the 10 wheel nuts that connect the wheel assembly to the outer flange connection plate assembly, and then use a jack. 2 Put the jack on the front axle assembly and tighten the control valve clockwise to fix the jack. 3 Insert the jack rocker into jack sleeve to lift the vehicle.
caution
1. The jack must be used on a hard bearing surface and must be supported on the plane position of the vehicle jacking point. It is prohibited to use the jack on an inclined plane with an inclination angle greater than 6° to avoid violent vibration or sliding of the jack.
2. Use the jack within its load limit to avoid abnormalities such as failure caused by overload. After the vehicle is lifted, support the vehicle with solid objects of equal height in the area around to avoid personal injury caused by jack failure. When unloading the jack, open the control valve slightly to allow the jack to drop slowly to avoid slipping or damage due to the jack dropping too fast. Besides, the sudden drop of the vehicle will also threaten personal safety.
4 When the wheel assembly is off the ground, unscrew the 10 wheel nuts that connect the wheel assembly to the outer flange connection plate assembly.
caution
Tighten in the order of diagonal 1 to 10.
5 Remove the wheel assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the wheel assembly to the mounting position.
caution
1. When replacing the tires, the tires on the same axle shall be replaced at the same time.
2. The inner and outer valves shall be staggered to facilitate the tire inflation.
2 Lubricate the threaded surface of the nuts with engine oil, gear oil or grease to achieve a slight degree of wetting.
caution
1. Do not use lubricants containing molybdenum disulfide, organic molybdenum, or other molybdenum additives to avoid corrosion of the tire.
2. Do not apply oil to the tire rims and axle end surfaces that contact with bolts and nuts.
3 Tighten the 10 wheel nuts that connect the wheel assembly to the outer flange connection plate assembly, release the jack and lower the vehicle, then tighten the nuts diagonally again.
Torque: (479 +/- 37) ft lbs






4 After the wheel touches the ground, turn the tire half a circle and tighten the 10 wheel nuts of the wheel assembly again.
Torque:(479 +/- 37) ft lbs
caution
After replacing the tire, conduct an initial test run, and tighten again to the specified torque after driving 30-60 miles.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing nut connecting the tire pressure relay and the tire preThe fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure relay and the tire pressure monitoring module bracket 2ssure monitoring module bracket 2 | M4 | (2 +/- .5) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the tire pressure relay and the tire pressure monitoring module bracket 2 | M4 | (2 +/- .5) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure monitoring module bracket 2 to the frame assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure CAN module and the tire pressure monitoring module bracket | M6 | (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs |
| The fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure monitoring module bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | (133 +/- 11) ft lbs |
| The fixing nut connecting the tire pressure monitoring module bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | (133 +/- 11) ft lbs |
8.10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System3818· 1g
8.10.1 Specifications
8.10.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.10.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.10.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 8. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 3. Tire Pressure Repeater 9. Tire Pressure CAN Module 4. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Bracket 2 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 6. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Bracket 2 12. Hexagon Nut_Type 1
8.10.3 System Schematic Diagram
8.10.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| Abnormal tire pressure system malfunction indicator light | 1.Low or high tire pressure | Adjust the tire pressure to the standard pressure range. |
| 2.Modified tires or wheels | Restore the vehicle and recalibrate the tire pressure system. | |
| 3.Rear tire pressure module power failure | Refer to Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Failure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111716 | Battery Voltage Tool low | Refer to Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Fault |
| B111717 | Battery Voltage Too High | |
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 BusOff | Refer to Rear Tire Pressure Module Communication Fault |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With TGW | |
| B220000 | The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position is faulty | Refer to Wheel Position Transmitter Fault |
| B220001 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.1 wheel position is running low |
8.10.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
8.10.4.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing the malfunction of the tire pressure monitoring device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the tire pressure monitoring device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of tire pressure monitoring devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the
diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.10.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the tire pressure monitoring system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the tire pressure monitoring system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.10.4.3 Fault Symptom Table
8.10.4.4 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.10.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
TMPS
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B220002 | The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position gives a high - temperature alarm | |
| B220003 | The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220004 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.2 wheel position is running low | |
| B220005 | The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220006 | The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220007 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.3 wheel position is running low | |
| B220008 | The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220009 | The transmitter of the No.4 wheel position is faulty | |
| B22000A | The battery of the transmitter at the No.4 wheel position is running low | |
| B22000B | The transmitter of the No.4 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B22000C | The transmitter of the No.5 wheel position is faulty | |
| B22000D | The battery of the transmitter at the No.5 wheel position is running low | |
| B22000E | The transmitter of the No.5 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B22000F | The transmitter of the No.6 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220010 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.6 wheel position is running low | |
| B220011 | The transmitter of the No.6 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220012 | The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220013 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.7 wheel position is running low | |
| B220014 | The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B220015 | The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220016 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.8 wheel position is running low | |
| B220017 | The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220018 | The transmitter of the No.9 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220019 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.9 wheel position is running low | |
| B22001A | The transmitter of the No.9 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B22001B | The transmitter of the No.10 wheel position is faulty | |
| B22001C | The battery of the transmitter at the No.10 wheel position is running low | |
| B22001D | The transmitter of the No.10 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B22001E | The transmitter of the No.11 wheel position is faulty | |
| B22001F | The battery of the transmitter at the No.11 wheel position is running low | |
| B220020 | The transmitter of the No.11 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220021 | The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220022 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.12 wheel position is running low | |
| B220023 | The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220024 | The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220025 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.13 wheel position is running low | |
| B220026 | The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm | |
| B220027 | The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position is faulty | |
| B220028 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.14 wheel position is running low |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B220029 | The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111716 | Battery Voltage Tool low | Voltage < 18V, t > 1000ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Rear tire pressure module |
| B111717 | Battery Voltage Too High | Voltage > 32V, t > 1000ms |
8.10.4.6 Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007C88 | BCANFD1 BusOff | Busoff occurred ten times in a row | 1. Wiring harness 2.Rear tire pressure module |
| U012287 | Lost Communication With VDC | Detected signal (ID :0x18FEF100 lost, t > 1000ms | |
| U015687 | Lost Communication With CDCU | Detected signal (ID :0x18FEC1EE) lost, t > 5000ms | |
| U019887 | Lost Communication With TGW | Detected signal (ID :0x18FEE6EE) lost, t > 5000ms |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the rear tire pressure module? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the rear tire pressure module. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the rear tire pressure module. Step 6:Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.10.4.7 Rear Tire Pressure Module Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B220000 | The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | 1. Wiring harness 2.Wheel position transmitter 3.Rear tire pressure module |
| B220001 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.1 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220002 | The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position gives a high - temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220003 | The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220004 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.2 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220005 | The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220006 | The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220007 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.3 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220008 | The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received |
Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the rear tire pressure module. Step 5:Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.10.4.8 Wheel Position Transmitter Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B220009 | The transmitter of the No.4 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B22000A | The battery of the transmitter at the No.4 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B22000B | The transmitter of the No.4 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B22000C | The transmitter of the No.5 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B22000D | The battery of the transmitter at the No.5 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B22000E | The transmitter of the No.5 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B22000F | The transmitter of the No.6 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220010 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.6 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220011 | The transmitter of the No.6 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220012 | The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220013 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.7 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B220014 | The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220015 | The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220016 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.8 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220017 | The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220018 | The transmitter of the No.9 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220019 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.9 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B22001A | The transmitter of the No.9 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B22001B | The transmitter of the No.10 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B22001C | The battery of the transmitter at the No.10 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B22001D | The transmitter of the No.10 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B22001E | The transmitter of the No.11 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B22001F | The battery of the transmitter at the No.11 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220020 | The transmitter of the No.11 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220021 | The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220022 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.12 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220023 | The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220024 | The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220025 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.13 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220026 | The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received | |
| B220027 | The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position is faulty | When the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes | |
| B220028 | The battery of the transmitter at the No.14 wheel position is running low | Two consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received | |
| B220029 | The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarm | Two consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD1 (H) and BCANFD1 (L) | Resistance:55 - 63 Ω |
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAND1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
32. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Re calibrate tire pressure. Refer to Tire Pressure Calibration Program Step 4:Replace the wheel position transmitter. Refer to Replacement Of Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor . Replacement Of Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the rear tire pressure module. Step 6:Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.10.4.9 Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity
Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCANFD1 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the bus voltage of BCANFD1. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. No Yes No Yes
| Measuring Terminals | Standard Value |
|---|---|
| BCANFD1 (H) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:2.5 - 3.5 V |
| BCAND1 (L) and vehicle grounding | Voltage:1.5 - 2.5 V |
Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAND1 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No
A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCANFD1 bus. C. Measure the BCAND1 bus resistance between each module and the rear tire pressure module in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the BCAND1 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAND1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCANFD1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAND1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAND1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. No Yes

8.10.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.10.5.1 Replacement of Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (right). 3 Remove the tire assembly. 4 Remove the front tire pressure monitoring sensor and TESD. Installation Procedures 1 Move the front tire pressure monitoring sensor and TESD to the mounting position. 2 Install the tire assembly. 3 Install the guide wheel (right).
4 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
caution
After replacing the tire pressure monitoring sensor, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the tire pressure.

8.10.5.2 Replacement of Tire Pressure Repeater
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure repeater.
5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure repeater. 6 Remove the tire pressure repeater. Installation Procedures 1 Move the tire pressure repeater to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure repeater.
Torque: (2 +/- .5) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure repeater.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

8.10.5.3 Replacement of Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 3 Remove the tire assembly. 4 Remove the rear tire pressure monitoring sensor. Installation Procedures
1 Move the rear tire pressure monitoring sensor to the mounting position. 2 Install the tire assembly. 3 Install the drive wheel (right front). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.
caution
After replacing the tire pressure monitoring sensor, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the tire pressure.
8.10.5.4 Replacement of Tire Pressure CAN Module
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 5 Remove the drive wheel (front left).
6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure CAN module. 7 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure CAN module. 8 Remove the tire pressure CAN module. Installation Procedures


1 Move the tire pressure CAN module to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure CAN module.
Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure CAN module.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the drive wheel (left front). 5 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting the driven rocker arm to the frame on the subframe | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the driven rocker arm and the frame on the subframe | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the tie rod and relay rod | M24 | 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the tie rod and relay rod | M45 | 498 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the active rocker arm and the relay rod | M24 | 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs) |
8.11 Steering Rod Device3003
8.11.1 Specifications
8.11.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.11.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.11.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Split Pin 2. Idlerarm 6. Hexagon Slotted Thin Nut 3. Pitman Arm 7. Relay Rod 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 8. Tie Rod


8.11.3 Dismantling and Installation
8.11.3.1 Replacement of Relay Rod
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left). 3 Remove the guide wheel (right). 4 Remove 4 fixing pins of the relay rod.
5 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the relay rod, and remove the relay rod. Installation Procedures





1 Move the relay rod to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the relay rod.
Torque: 243 - 266 (ft lbs)
3 Install 4 fixing pins of the relay rod.
4 Remove the guide wheel (right). 5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.11.3.2 Replacement of Driving Rocker Arm
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel. 3 Remove 1 fixing pin.

4 Remove 1 fixing nut of the tie rod. 5 Remove 1 fixing pin. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm.



7 Remove 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm. 8 Remove the driving rocker arm. Installation Procedures 1 Move the driving rocker arm to the mounting position.
caution
It is necessary to align the engraved lines during installation.



2 Install 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm.
Torque: 498 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
caution
When installing the nuts, it is necessary to fix the pitman armto prevent the excessive rotation angle from damaging the unloading valve.

3 Install 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm.
Torque: 243 - 266 (ft lbs)
4 Install 1 fixing pin. 5 Install 1 fixing nut of the tie rod.
Torque: 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)
6 Install 1 fixing pin. 7 Install the guide wheel. 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.11.3.3 Replacement of Driven Rocker Arm
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left). 3 Remove 1 fixing pin.
4 Remove 1 fixing nut of the relay rod. 5 Remove 1 fixing pin. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the driven rocker arm.




7 Remove 4 bolts and nuts of the driven rocker arm. 8 Remove the driven rocker arm. Installation Procedures 1 Move the driven rocker arm to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 bolts and nuts of the driven rocker arm.
Torque: 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)




3 Install 1 fixing nut of the driven rocker arm.
Torque:243 - 266 (ft lbs)
4 Install 1 fixing pin. 5 Install 1 fixing nut of the relay rod.
6 Install 1 fixing pin. 7 Install the guide wheel (right). 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.11.3.4 Replacement of Tie Rod
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel. 3 Remove 2 fixing pins of the tie rod.

4 Remove 2 fixing nut of the tie rod. 5 Remove the tie rod. Installation Procedures 1 Move the tie rod to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the tie rod.
Torque: 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)


3 Install 2 fixing pins of the tie rod. 4 Install the guide wheel. 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to perform four-wheel alignment.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolts connecting the steering column assembly and the steering column fixing bracket | M10 | 26 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the steering column assembly and the pipe beam assembly | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the steering column assembly and the integrated EHPS assembly | M10 | 39 +/- 5 (ft lbs) |
| Cross joint of steering column assembly - fixing bolt for steering gear | M10 | 39 +/- 5 (ft lbs) |
| Cross joint of steering column assembly - fixing nut for steering gear | M10 | 39 +/- 5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the steering column assembly and the steering wheel assembly | M14 | 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
8.12 Steering Control Device3402· 3g
8.12.1 Specifications
8.12.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.12.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.12.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Dab Decorative Cove 7. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 2. Hex Thin Nut 8. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 3. Flat Washer 9. Hexagon Bolt 4. Steering Wheel Assy 10. Fixing Bracket of Steering Column 1 5. Steering Column Assy 11. Fixing Bracket of Steering Column 2 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt


8.12.3 Dismantling and Installation
8.12.3.1 Replacement of Steering Wheel Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 5 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the steering wheel assembly. 7 Remove 1 fixing nut of the steering wheel assembly.
caution
Place the wheels in front of the vehicle and mark the connection between the steering wheel assembly and the steering column with intermediate axle assembly with a marker pen.
8 Remove the steering wheel assembly.
caution
Do not rotate the clock spring after removing the steering wheel assembly to prevent damage to the clock spring.


Installation Procedures 1 Place the front wheels in front and install the steering wheel assembly. Align the installation marks made with a marker pen before removing the steering wheel assembly. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the steering wheel assembly.
Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the steering wheel assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 5 Install the combination switch lower shield. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.
8.12.3.2 Replacement of Steering Column Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.
3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 12 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. 16 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 17 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 18 Remove the clock spring. 19 Remove the combination switch. 20 Remove the combination switch fixing bracket. 21 Remove the steering angle sensor assembly. 22 Remove the pillar lock. 23 Remove the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 24 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the steering column assembly. 25 Remove the steering column assembly.


Installation Procedures 1 Move the steering column assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the steering column assembly.
Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
3 Install the pillar lock. 4 Install the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 5 Install the steering angle sensor assembly. 6 Install the combination switch fixing bracket. 7 Install the combination switch. 8 Install the clock spring. 9 Install the steering wheel assembly. 10 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 11 Install the steering column lower shield assembly. 12 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the right switch panel assembly. 16 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 17 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 18 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 19 Install the left switch panel assembly. 20 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 21 Install the combination switch lower shield. 22 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.


8.12.3.3 Replacement of Driver Horn Cover Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Release 3 circlips of the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Disconnect one harness connector,Remove the driver horn cover assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Install the driver horn cover assembly,connect one harness connector. 2 Install the combination switch lower shield. 3 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| Fixed bolts connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the frame on the subframe | M20 | 406 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed bolts connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the steering column | M10 | 39 +/- 5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut connecting the electric oil pump and the active rocker arm | M45 | 498 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs) |
| The joint connecting the electric oil pump and the oil inlet hose | M26 | 92 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The joint connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the high-pressure oil pipe | M18 | 55 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| Fixing nut for high-pressure oil pipe | M22 | 81 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| Fixing nut for low-pressure oil pipe | M22 | 81 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump and the electric oil pump bracket | M12 | 48 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the electric oil pump bracket to the frame on the subframe | M12 | 48 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the electric oil pump to the frame on the subframe | M12 | 48 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The grounding wire fixing bolt connecting the chassis harness and the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the steering oil tank and the steering oil tank bracket | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the steering oil pot bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the frame assembly and the electric oil pump bracket | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the frame on the subframe to the electric oil pump bracket | M14 | 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs) |
8.13 Steering Gear Device3406· 1g
8.13.1 Specifications
8.13.1.1 Fastener Specifications
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the steering oil pipe fixing clamp and the steering oil pipe fixing bracket 2 | M8 | 6 +/- .75 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump to the chassis harness | M12 | 48 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump to the chassis harness bracket | M12 | 48 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| Item | Parameter |
|---|---|
| Model of steering gear | 34061X91 |
| Manufacturer of steering gear | Shashi Jiulong Automotive Power Steering Gear Co., Ltd. |
| Steering gear type | Electro-hydraulic circulation ball type |
| Model of steering wheel | 3402010X9D01 |
| Diameter of steering wheel (mm) | 380 |
| Structure type of steering column | Mechanical adjustable type |
| Manufacturer of steering column | Yuyao Wanguo Machinery Co., Ltd. |
| Side angle of steering shaft α (°) | 50 |
| Plane angle of steering shaft β (°) | 0 |
| Steering boost type | Electric hydraulic power assistance |
| Manufacturer of steering booster | Shashi Jiulong Automotive Power Steering Gear Co., Ltd. |
8.13.1.2 Technical Parameters

8.13.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.13.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Integrated EHPS Assembly 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Sealing Gasket 18. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Straight-Through Joint 19. Fixing Brkt-Steering Oil Pipe 4. High Pressure Tubing 20. Hose Hoop-Type B and Type c 5. Steering Oil Pipe Fixing Bracket 2 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Fixing Clip-Steering Oil Pipe 22. Hose Hoop-Type B and Type c 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 23. Oil Inlet Hose 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Oil Return Hose 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 25. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Electric Oil Pump 26. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Oil Can 27. Electric Oil Pump bracket 12. Oil Pump Inlet Tubing Connection 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Sealing Gasket 29. Low Pressure Tubing 14. Tie-Fir Tree 30. Hexagon Bolt 15. Oil Pot Holder 31. Heavy Spring Washer 16. Assembly of Hexagon Head Bolt, Spring Washer and Flat Washer In New Energy Vehicles 32. Steering Gear Nut
8.13.3 System Schematic Diagram
8.13.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The steering wheel has no or little power assistance | 1. The steering column is deformed or stuck | Check the appearance of the steering column. |
| 2.Low transmission hydraulic oil level | Check for leaks in the transmission system oil pipes. | |
| 3.EHPS malfunction | Refer to EHPS Power Failure |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Refer to EHPS Power Fault |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | |
| C1EE54F | Supply voltage monitoring voltage too high (warning) | |
| C1EE651 | Supply voltage monitoring voltage too low (warning) | |
| C1EF84C | The igition signal is lost | |
| U007A88 | Network CAN bus - communication failure | Refer to EHPS Communication Fault |
| U012287 | Lost communication with VDC | |
| U143873 | VDC message is invalid | |
| U143587 | Lost communication with VDC_HSS1 |
8.13.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
8.13.4.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing the malfunction of the steering gear device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the steering gear device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the steering gear device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process
can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.13.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the steering system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the steering system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.13.4.3 Fault Symptom Table
8.13.4.4 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.13.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
EHPS
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| U143253 | Lost communication with VDC_HSS1 | |
| U015687 | Lost communication with CDCU | |
| U143353 | CDCU message is invalid | |
| U019887 | Lost communication with TGW | |
| U143453 | TGW message is invalid | |
| U015788 | Lost communication with CAMF | |
| U143553 | CAMF function is invalid or incorrect | |
| C1EE75F | System entry thermal protection | Refer to EHPS Internal Fault |
| C1EE15F | ECU overtemperature failure | |
| C1EE24C | Temperature sensor failure | |
| C1EE3EC | ECU unexpected reset | |
| C1EE4EC | ECU Hardware detection failure(Error correction) | |
| C1EF24C | ECU Internal electrical Faults | |
| C1EE94C | ECU internal power supply Faults | |
| C1EE85C | ECU internal predrive faults | |
| C1EE342 | ECU internal magneto resistive chip faults | |
| C1EE86C | ECU internal current detection loop faults | |
| C1EE88C | ECU internal motor three-phase current fault | |
| C1EE362 | Invaild Torque Sensor value | |
| C1EF25F | Abnormal Power Supply to the sensor | |
| C1EF342 | Invaild Angle Sensor value | |
| U14351F | CRC check is invalid | |
| C1EE35F | Steering wheel center position not calibrated | Perform center calibration to set the steering gear to 0 position when the vehicle is driving straight |
| C1EE59F | EPS end protection is not learned | |
| C1EE45F | EPS end protection is not learned |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| B111717 | High battery voltage | Supply voltage above limit and the duration of more than 1000ms | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.EHPS |
| B111716 | Low Battery Voltage | Supply voltage below limit and the duration of more than 1000ms |
8.13.4.6 EHPS Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1EE54F | Supply voltage monitoring voltage too high (warning) | The power supply voltage is higher than the voltage threshold . Enable power degradation. | |
| C1EE651 | Supply voltage monitoring voltage too low (warning) | The power supply voltage is lower than the voltage threshold. Enable power degradatio | |
| C1EF84C | The igition signal is lost | The engine is in the state of the operator. The controller cannot detect the ignition signal, and the controller reports a failure after 20s. |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U007A88 | Network CAN bus - communication failure | 8 consecutive busoffs without successful message transmission | 1. Wiring harness 2.EHPS |
| U012287 | Lost communication with VDC | Continuous 500ms without receiving message VDC_ TCO1 (0x0CFE6CEE) | |
| U143873 | VDC message is invalid | If message VDC_TCO1 (0x0CFE6CEE) is not received for 500ms continuously, any of the following situations will occur for 10 consecutive frames:1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. The physical value exceeds the range of 0~155.999 mph | |
| U143587 | Lost communication with VDC_HSS1 | Continuous 1000ms without receiving message VDC_ HSS1 (0x18FCC231) | |
| U143253 | Lost communication with VDC_HSS1 | Any of the following situations occur in 10 consecutive frames of message VDC_HSS1 (0x18FCC231):1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2.When receiving a signal of 0x2 or 0x3 | |
| U015687 | Lost communication with CDCU | Continuous 5000ms without receiving message CDCU_ VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx) | |
| U143353 | CDCU message is invalid | The message CDCU_VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx) shows any of the following situations for 10 consecutive frames:1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. The physical value exceeds the range of 0~99999995m | |
| U019887 | Lost communication with TGW | shows any of the following situations for 10 consecutive frames:1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. The physical value exceeds the range of 0~99999995m and the message TGW_TD_Time (0x18FEE6EEx) has not been received for 5000ms continuously |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides EHPS? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the EHPS power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite configuration codes, reload software, and upgrade EHPS. Step 6:Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.13.4.7 EHPS Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| U143453 | TGW message is invalid | occur in 10 consecutive frames of message TGW-TD_ Time (0x18FEE6EEx):1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. When the physical value of TGW_Seconds signal exceeds 0- 59; 3. When the physical value of the TGW.Minute signal exceeds 0-59; 4. When the physical value of the TGW_Hours signal exceeds 0-23; 5. When the physical value of the TGWlMench signal exceeds 1-12; 6. When the physical value of the TGW-Day signal exceeds 1-31; 7. When the physical value of the TGW_Year signal exceeds 1985-2235; 8.When the physical value of the TGW_LocalMinuteOffset signal exceeds 0-59; 9.When the physical value of the TGW_LocalHourOffset signal exceeds If any of the following situations 0-59 | |
| U015788 | Lost communication with CAMF | Continuous 1000ms without receiving message EHPSI1_LKA_CAMF (0x18FF0031x) | |
| U143553 | CAMF function is invalid or incorrect | Message ADCU_SPSI1_LKA (0x18FF0031x) shows any of the following situations for 10 consecutive frames:1. CRC does not comply with the algorithm; 2. The MC signal is discontinuous; 3. DLC is not equal to 8; 4. The EPS_VibAct signal value is 0x2-0x3 |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CAN8 bus network integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1EE75F | System entry thermal protection | The internal temperature of the controller or motor exceeds the limit (standardised value) | 1.EHPS |
| C1EE15F | ECU overtemperature failure | ECU temperature exceeds normal range (T>257℉) | |
| C1EE24C | Temperature sensor failure | Abnormal voltage range of temperature sensor | |
| C1EE3EC | ECU unexpected reset | MCU initialization reset error | |
| C1EE4EC | ECU Hardware detection failure(Error correction) | MCU ECC Fault | |
| C1EF24C | ECU Internal electrical Faults | 1.MCU related faults 2.The internal electrical fault occurs in the controller | |
| C1EE94C | ECU internal power supply Faults | Internal power chip faults of the ECU | |
| C1EE85C | ECU internal predrive faults | Internal predrive chip faults of the ECU | |
| C1EE342 | ECU internal magneto resistive chip faults | The reluctance sensor faults | |
| C1EE86C | ECU internal current detection loop faults | current detection loop fault | |
| C1EE88C | ECU internal motor three-phase current fault | Motor three-phase current fault | |
| C1EE362 | Invaild Torque Sensor value | Sensor torque signal out of range or abnormal synchronization or torque signal sampling timeout | |
| C1EF25F | Abnormal Power Supply to the sensor | The power supply voltage of the sensor is beyond the normal range | |
| C1EF342 | Invaild Angle Sensor value | Angle sensor signal anomalies or angle signal sampling timeout | |
| U14351F | CRC check is invalid | Invalid SW flashed (Wrong layout Data Flash) |
Step 4:Rewrite configuration codes, reload software, and upgrade EHPS. Step 5:Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.13.4.8 EHPS Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite configuration codes, reload software, and upgrade EHPS.
Step 4:Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.13.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.13.5.1 Replacement of Integrated EHPS Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the guide wheel (right). 8 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 9 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 12 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 13 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 14 Remove the electric oil pump. 15 Remove the low pressure oil pipe. 16 Remove the high pressure oil pipe. 17 Remove the A/C compressor assembly. 18 Remove the driving rocker arm. 19 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the integrated EHPS assembly.
20 Remove 1 fixing bolt connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the steering drive shaft. 21 Remove 2 straps of the integrated EHPS assembly. 22 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the integrated EHPS assembly. 23 Remove the integrated EHPS assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the integrated EHPS assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the integrated EHPS assembly.
Torque: 442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
3 Install 2 straps of the integrated EHPS assembly.


4 Install 1 fixing bolt connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the steering drive shaft.
Torque:37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
5 Connect 2 harness connectors of the integrated EHPS assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the driving rocker arm. 7 Install the A/C compressor assembly. 8 Install the high pressure oil pipe. 9 Install the low pressure oil pipe. 10 Install the electric oil pump. 11 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 12 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 13 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 14 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 15 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left front wheel housing rear body.
17 Install the guide wheel (right). 18 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 19 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 20 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the zero position.

8.13.5.2 Replacement of Electric Oil Pump
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector of the electric oil pump.
14 Disconnect 2 pipelines of the electric oil pump.
caution
All disconnected oil pipe joints shall be sealed to prevent the entry of debris and residual oil from flowing out.
15 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the harness accessory. 16 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the electric oil pump, and remove the electric oil pump.




Installation Procedures 1 Move the electric oil pump to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the electric oil pump.
Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)




3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the harness accessory.
Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
4 Connect 2 pipelines of the electric oil pump.

5 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector of the electric oil pump.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
6 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 7 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 8 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 9 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 12 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 13 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 14 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.
8.13.5.3 Replacement of Steering Fluid Reservoir
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 5 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 6 Remove the steering fluid reservoir assembly.
7 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the steering fluid reservoir. 8 Disconnect 2 pipelines of the steering fluid reservoir.
caution
All disconnected oil pipe joints shall be sealed to prevent the entry of debris and residual oil from flowing out.
9 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the steering fluid reservoir, and remove the steering fluid reservoir with bracket.



10 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the steering fluid reservoir. 11 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the steering fluid reservoir to the steering fluid reservoir bracket. 12 Remove the steering fluid reservoir. Installation Procedures





1 Move the steering fluid reservoir to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the steering fluid reservoir to the steering fluid reservoir bracket.
Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing clip of the steering fluid reservoir. 4 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the steering fluid reservoir with bracket.
Torque: 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)


5 Connect 2 pipelines of the steering fluid reservoir. 6 Connect 1 harness connector of the steering fluid reservoir.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
7 Install the steering fluid reservoir assembly. 8 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.
8.13.5.4 Replacement of Transmission Hydraulic Oil
Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the transmission hydraulic oil filter element.
3 Disconnect the oil inlet hose. 4 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. Installation Procedures


1 Connect the oil inlet hose. 2 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 3 Turn the steering wheel several times between the extreme positions on the left and right sides until the steering fluid level in the steering fluid reservoir no longer drops and no bubbles are generated.
caution
The steering wheel shall not stay in the extreme position for more than 5 seconds to avoid damaging the steering gear.
4 Check the steering hydraulic oil level.
caution
It is normal for the oil level to exceed the upper limit scale by 1-2mm.


5 Install the transmission hydraulic oil filter element. 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.13.5.5 Replacement of Transmission Hydraulic Oil Filter Element
Removal Procedures
1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the filler cap. 3 Remove the transmission hydraulic oil filter element. Installation Procedures








1 Install the transmission hydraulic oil filter element. 2 Install the filler cap. 3 Lower the vehicle.

8.14 Brake Pedal and Transmission Device3504
8.14.1 Braking Schematic Diagram
8.14.1.1 Braking Schematic Diagram
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump to the chassis harness bracket, and the fixing bolt connecting the brake pedal assembly to the white body assembly | M8 | (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs |
8.14.2 Specifications
8.14.2.1 Fastener Specifications

8.14.3 Decomposition Diagram
8.14.3.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Brake Pedal Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Accelerator Pedal Assy 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

8.14.4 Inspect
8.14.4.1 Inspection of Brake System
1. Check the working condition of the vehicle's braking system. When fully braking, the pedal travel shall not exceed 3/4 of the full travel. 2. Check the sealing condition of the brake pipeline and joints, and confirm that there is no leakage. 3. Check the valve joints for looseness or air leakage.
8.14.4.2 Inspection of Brake Pad for Wear
1. Lift the vehicle to the appropriate position and remove the wheels. 2. Check the thickness of the inner and outer friction plates through the observation holes on the clamp body. 3. Remove the rear friction plate. 4. Check the thickness of the rear friction plate.
caution
If the thickness is less than the minimum thickness, replace the friction plates as a set.
If the thickness of the inner and outer friction plates is less than the specified minimum thickness or if there is cracking, rupture or damage to the friction plates, they need to be replaced as a set.

8.14.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.14.5.1 Replacement of Accelerator Pedal Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the accelerator pedal assembly.
10 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the accelerator pedal assembly. 11 Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the accelerator pedal assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the accelerator pedal assembly.
Torque: 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the accelerator pedal assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 5 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the right switch panel assembly. 7 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.
8.14.5.2 Replacement of Brake Pedal Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 6 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 7 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly.
12 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 13 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 16 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. 17 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 18 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 19 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 1. 20 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 2. 21 Remove the brake signal transmitter assembly. 22 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the brake pedal assembly. 23 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the brake pedal assembly.


24 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the brake pedal assembly, and remove the brake pedal assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the brake pedal assembly to the mounting position, and install the 4 fixing bolts of the brake pedal assembly.
Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
2 Connect 1 air pipe of the brake pedal assembly.
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the brake pedal assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the brake signal transmitter assembly. 5 Install the steering column fixing bracket 2. 6 Install the steering column fixing bracket 1. 7 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 8 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 9 Install the steering column lower shield assembly. 10 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 11 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the right switch panel assembly. 14 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 15 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the left switch panel assembly. 18 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 19 Install the combination switch lower shield. 20 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the ABS solenoid valve bracket to the frame assembly | M14 | 103 +/-7.52 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed bolts connecting the single channel module assembly to the single channel module bracket | M12 | 70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the dual channel module assembly and the dual channel module bracket | M12 | 70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the ABS solenoid valve assembly to the ABS solenoid valve bracket | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the trailer module assembly to the trailer connection bracket | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| Pressure sensor fixed on the three-way joint interface of the gas storage cylinder | M12 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| Low pressure alarm switch fixed on the valve tee joint interface | M12 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| Test connector fixed on T-shaped tee | M12 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut for the direct connector fixed trailer connector bracket connection | M18 | 37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| Bent joint fixed on valve interface | M22 | 22 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed on the T-shaped joint at the air chamber interface | M16 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing nut of the brake spiral pipe assembly | M18 | 37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
| Fixed nut of brake hose assembly | M18 | 37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs) |
8.15 Brake Line Device3506· 10g
8.15.1 Specifications
8.15.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.15.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.15.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Through The Hole Sheath 20. Sealing Gasket 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 21. Hex Thin Nut 3. Wire Harness Bracket 22. Bend Joint 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 23. Ebs Axle Modulator Assy 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Nut Seat NG8 6. Test Connector 25. Nut Seat Ng12 7. Sealing Gasket 26. Plug 8. Hex Thin Nut 27. Ebs Axle Modulator Bracket 9. Sealing Gasket 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. O-Ring 29. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Brake Hose Assy 30. Brake Bundle Assy 12. Nut Seat Ng12 31. Large Washer 13. Snap Ring Ng12 32. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Washer Ng12 33. Brake Signal Transmitter Assy 15. ABS Solenoid Valve Assy 34. Brake System Parameter Label 16. Solenoid Modulator Valve Brakecket 37. Hexagon Flange Bolt 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 44. Hexagon Flange Bolt
18. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. O-Ring 50. Hexagon Flange Bolt
3. Wire Harness Bracket 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 48. Ebs Axle Modulator Bracket 12. Nut Seat Ng12 49. Ebs Axle Modulator Assy 13. Snap Ring Ng12 50. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Washer Ng12 51. Bundle Fixing Bracket 24. Nut Seat NG8 52. Low Pressure Warning Switch 25. Nut Seat Ng12


8.15.3 Dismantling and Installation
8.15.3.1 Replacement of Brake Signal Transmitter Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 12 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. 16 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the brake signal transmitter assembly.
17 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the brake signal transmitter assembly. 18 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the brake signal transmitter assembly. 19 Remove the brake signal transmitter assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the brake signal transmitter assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the brake signal transmitter assembly.
Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 4 air pipes of the brake signal transmitter assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the brake signal transmitter assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the steering column lower shield assembly. 6 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 7 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the right switch panel assembly. 10 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 11 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left switch panel assembly. 14 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 15 Install the combination switch lower shield. 16 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Close the door.

8.15.3.2 Replacement of ABS Solenoid Valve Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the ABS solenoid valve assembly.
6 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 7 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 8 Remove the ABS solenoid valve assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the ABS solenoid valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the ABS solenoid valve assembly.
Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 2 air pipes of the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the ABS solenoid valve assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.


8.15.3.3 Replacement of Brake Hose Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 3 harness straps of the brake hose assembly. 3 Remove 2 joints of the brake hose assembly. 4 Remove the brake hose assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the brake hose assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 joints of the brake hose assembly. 3 Connect 3 harness straps of the brake hose assembly.
8.15.3.4 Replacement of Single Channel Module Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Remove the single channel module assembly with bracket.
6 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the single channel module assembly. 7 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the single channel module assembly.




8 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the single channel module assembly. 9 Remove the single channel module assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the single channel module assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the single channel module assembly.
Torque:18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)




3 Connect 4 air pipes of the single channel module assembly. 4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the single channel module assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the single channel module assembly with bracket. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

8.15.3.5 Replacement of Trailer Control Module Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the trailer control module assembly.
9 Disconnect 5 air pipes of the trailer control module assembly. 10 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the trailer control module assembly. 11 Remove the trailer control module assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the trailer control module assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing nuts of the trailer control module assembly.
Torque: 103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 5 air pipes of the trailer control module assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the trailer control module assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

8.15.3.6 Replacement of Brake Spiral Tube Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the brake spiral tube assembly. 3 Remove the brake spiral tube assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the brake spiral tube assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 air pipes of the brake spiral tube assembly.

8.15.3.7 Replacement of Trailer Connector Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly. 3 Remove the trailer connector assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the trailer connector assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly.

8.15.3.8 Replacement of Trailer Connector Assembly (control)
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly (control). 3 Remove the trailer connector assembly (control). Installation Procedures

1 Move the trailer connector assembly (control) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly (control).

8.15.3.9 Replacement of Dual Channel Module Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the dual channel module assembly.
6 Disconnect 7 air pipes of the dual channel module assembly. 7 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the dual channel module assembly. 8 Remove the dual channel module assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the dual channel module assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the dual channel module assembly.
Torque: 70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 7 air pipes of the dual channel module assembly.


4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the dual channel module assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
8.15.3.10 Replacement of Low Pressure Alarm Switch
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the low pressure alarm switch. 5 Remove the low pressure alarm switch. Installation Procedures 1 Move the low pressure alarm switch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the low pressure alarm switch.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

8.15.3.11 Replacement of Pressure Sensor
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor. 5 Remove the pressure sensor. Installation Procedures 1 Move the pressure sensor to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".



3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.
| Fastener Specifications | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the parking solenoid valve assembly and the frame assembly | M14 | 103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolt connecting the parking solenoid valve assembly and the parking solenoid valve bracket | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| NG8 nut seat on the interface of the parking solenoid valve assembly | M16 | 7.5 - 12 (ft lbs) |
| NG12 nut seat on the interface of the parking solenoid valve assembly | M22 | 7.5 - 12 (ft lbs) |
8.16 Parking Brake Control Device3508· 1g
8.16.1 Specifications
8.16.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.16.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.16.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Parking Solenoid Valve Assy 8. Nut Seat Ng12 2. Parking Solenoid Valve Bracket 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 3. Washer Ng8 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Snap Ring NG8 11. Plug 5. Nut seat NG8 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Washer Ng12 13. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 7. Snap Ring Ng12
8.16.3 System Schematic Diagram
8.16.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
Tractor EPB Trailer EPB
| SPN,FMI | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| 13138,3 | ON power supply voltage is too high (greater than 32V) | Refer to EPB Power Fault |
| 13138,4 | ON supply voltage is too low (less than 16V) | |
| 13138,5 | The EPB module assembly valve is powered off (normally powered) | |
| 15186,3 | The main valve voltage is higher than 32V | |
| 15186,4 | The main valve voltage is lower than 16V | |
| 15186,5 | The main valve is disconnected | |
| 13650,5 | The standby valve is disconnected | |
| 14418,3 | ON the power supply is too high | |
| 14418,4 | ON power The power supply is too low | |
| 13650,3 | The power supply to the standby valve is too high | |
| 13650,4 | The power supply to the standby valve is too low | |
| 193,9 | CAN packets are lost or delayed. Procedure | Refer to EPB Communication Fault |
| 4289,5 | The CAN cable is disconnected | |
| 22465,19 | The whole car CAN Busoff | |
| 19393,9 | The AutoDrive_ADCU message is lost | |
| 19393,19 | The AutoDrive_ADCU check error | |
| 19393,8 | AutoDrive_ADCU Counter error | |
| 19649,9 | The AutoDrive_rADCU message is lost |
8.16.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
8.16.4.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing the malfunction of the parking brake control device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the parking brake control device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a malfunction, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the parking brake control device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the
diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.16.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the parking brake control system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the parking brake control system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.16.4.3 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (SPN, FMI)
EPB
| SPN,FMI | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| 19649,19 | The AutoDrive_rADCU check error | |
| 19649,8 | AutoDrive_rADCU Counter error | |
| 19137,9 | EPBC1_ADCU is lost | |
| 19137,19 | EPBC1_ADCU check error | |
| 19137,8 | EPBC1_ADCU Counter is incorrect | |
| 20161,9 | EPBC1_rADCU is lost | |
| 20161,19 | EPBC1_rADCU check error | |
| 20161,8 | EPBC1_rADCU Counter is incorrect | |
| 15811,9 | Clutch signal is lost | |
| 20417,2 | The clutch signal is invalid | |
| 22721,19 | Redundant CANbusoff | |
| 195,9 | Packets required by EPB in the redundant can are lost Procedure | |
| 14674,11 | The EPB module assembly valve body is faulty | Refer to EPB Internal Fault |
| 13906,3 | The trailer independent brake solenoid valve shorted the power supply | |
| 13906,6 | Trailer independent brake solenoid valve short circuit to the ground | |
| 13906,5 | Trailer independent brake solenoid valve disconnected | |
| 23122,4 | The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormal | |
| 23122,3 | The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormal | |
| 135250,2 | Tilt sensor fault | |
| 16722,3 | The parking solenoid is short circuiting the power supply | |
| 16722,6 | Parking solenoid to ground short circuit | |
| 16722,5 | Parking solenoid valve disconnected | |
| 16978,3 | Release solenoid valve short circuit to power supply | |
| 16978,6 | Release solenoid valve to ground short circuit | |
| 16978,5 | Release solenoid valve disconnected | |
| 17234,3 | The trailer detects the short circuit of the solenoid valve to the power supply | |
| 17234,6 | Trailer detects short circuit of solenoid valve to ground |
| SPN,FMI | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| 17234,5 | Trailer detection solenoid valve disconnected | |
| 21330,25 | The ECU failed to read the memory | |
| 21330,24 | The ECU write memory is faulty. Procedure | |
| 12882,4 | Main valve electric relay cannot drive output | |
| 12626,4 | Backup valve electrical relay cannot drive output | |
| 12882,3 | Main valve electric relay cannot cut off output | |
| 12626,3 | The backup valve electrical relay cannot cut off the output | |
| 34898,11 | The EPB system is seriously faulty | |
| 14418,11 | The EPB switch is faulty. Procedure | Refer to Right Central Control Switch - Electronic Parking Switch Fault |
| 17794,3 | The release end of the switch is short circuited | |
| 17794,6 | The release end of the switch is short circuited to the ground | |
| 17794,5 | The switch release end is disconnected | |
| 18050,3 | Switch parking terminal electrical short circuit | |
| 18050,6 | Switch parking terminal to ground short circuit | |
| 18050,5 | The switch parking terminal is disconnected | |
| 18050,0 | The switching linearity is not proportional | |
| 18050,10 | Switch card lag | |
| 18050,2 | Switch missing | |
| 18306,5 | Switch power supply exception | |
| 18562,4 | The closing position of the parking switch is abnormal | |
| 18818,3 | Relieve abnormal switch closing position | |
| 19074,3 | Parking indicator light to electric short circuit | |
| 19330,5 | Parking indicator disconnected | |
| 9603,5 | Hard line parking light disconnected | |
| 9603,3 | Hard parking lights are short circuited |
| SPN,FMI | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| 9859,5 | The redundant hard cable of the parking switch is abnormal | |
| 10115,5 | Alleviates redundant switch hard line anomalies | |
| 12995,9 | The gear signal is lost | Refer to EPB Reports GSM Related Fault |
| 12993,2 | The gear signal is invalid | |
| 13251,9 | Throttle signal loss | Refer to EPB Reports VDC Related Fault |
| 13507,9 | Torque signal loss | |
| 13763,9 | The foot brake signal is missing | |
| 14019,9 | Barometric signal loss | |
| 15299,9 | HaltBrakeMode signal is lost | |
| 15555,9 | The XBR signal is lost | |
| 13249,2 | Invalid throttle signal | |
| 13505,2 | Torque signal invalid | |
| 13761,2 | The foot brake signal is invalid | |
| 14017,2 | Barometric failure | |
| 15297,2 | The HaltBrakeMode signal is invalid | |
| 15553,2 | The XBR signal is invalid | |
| 16323,9 | The vehicle ready signal is lost | |
| 16321,2 | The vehicle ready signal is invalid | |
| 26450,3 | The EBS system cannot respond to XBR requests | Refer to EPB Reports EBS Related Fault |
| 14162,3 | The EBS system cannot respond to temporary parking brake requests | |
| 14275,9 | Speed signal loss | |
| 14531,9 | Speed signal loss | |
| 14787,9 | ABS wheel speed report lost | |
| 14273,2 | Speed signal invalid | |
| 14529,2 | Invalid speed signal | |
| 14785,2 | The ABS wheel speed signal is invalid | |
| 8899,10 | Abnormal speed jump | |
| 8899,26 | Excessive speed error | |
| 12739,9 | Loss of seat belt signal | Refer to EPB Reports BDCU Related Fault |
| 15043,9 | Ready signal loss | |
| 14737,2 | Invalid seat belt sign | |
| 15041,2 | Invalid Ready signal | |
| 16067,9 | Gate signal loss | Refer to EPB Reports DCM Related Fault |
| 16065,2 | Gate signal invalid |
| SPN,FMI | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| 16579,9 | The rear axle running pressure signal is lost | Refer to EPB Reports CDC Related Fault |
| 16577,2 | The rear axle running pressure signal is invalid | |
| 19026,1 | When the vehicle is braking, there is no air in the brake line | Refer to Parking Pipeline Leakage Fault |
| 19282,0 | There is air in the brake line when the vehicle is not braking | |
| 19538,10 | The brake line is leaking | |
| 18770,7 | Parking system inflation time out | |
| 22866,7 | Parking system exhaust time out | |
| 19539,10 | Parking pipe leakage rate is too large | |
| 19027,1 | Parking status The parking pressure is too high | Refer to Abnormal Pressure In The Parking Pipeline |
| 19283,0 | Running status Parking pressure is too low | |
| 29009,6 | The left sensor is short-circuited to the ground | Refer to Left ABS Sensor Fault |
| 29009,3 | The sensor on the left is short-circuited | |
| 29009,5 | The left sensor is disconnected. Procedure | |
| 29009,7 | Missing tooth on left sensor | |
| 29009,1 | The sensor gap on the left is too large | |
| 33105,6 | The right sensor is short-circuited to the ground | Refer to Right ABS Sensor Fault |
| 33105,3 | The right sensor is short circuited Procedure | |
| 33105,5 | The right sensor is disconnected Procedure | |
| 33105,7 | Missing tooth on right sensor | |
| 33105,1 | The sensor gap on the right is too large |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 13138,3 | ON power supply voltage is too high (greater than 32V) | The voltage of pin 25 on the controller is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Tractor EPB |
| 13138,4 | ON supply voltage is too low (less than 16V) | The voltage of pin 25 at the controller end is lower than 16V for more than 5 seconds |
8.16.4.4 EPB Power Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 13138,5 | The EPB module assembly valve is powered off (normally powered) | Pin 25 on the controller does not detect the voltage for more than 1 second | |
| 15186,3 | The main valve voltage is higher than 32V | The input voltage of pin 25 at the controller end is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds | |
| 15186,4 | The main valve voltage is lower than 16V | The input voltage of pin 25 at the controller end is lower than 16V for more than 5 seconds | |
| 15186,5 | The main valve is disconnected | Pin 25 on the controller does not detect voltage for more than 1 second | |
| 13650,5 | The standby valve is disconnected | Pin 9 on the controller does not detect voltage for more than 1 second | |
| 14418,3 | ON the power supply is too high | The input voltage of pin 10 at the controller end is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds | |
| 14418,4 | ON power The power supply is too low | The input voltage of pin 10 at the controller end is less than 16V for more than 5 seconds | |
| 13650,3 | The power supply to the standby valve is too high | The input voltage of pin 9 at the controller end is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds | |
| 13650,4 | The power supply to the standby valve is too low | The input voltage of pin 9 at the controller end is lower than 16V for more than 5 seconds |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 193,9 | CAN packets are lost or delayed. Procedure | The CAN message is lost or the delay exceeds 3 seconds | 1. Wiring harness 2.Tractor EPB |
| 4289,5 | The CAN cable is disconnected | The CAN line is disconnected and cannot receive or send packets | |
| 22465,19 | The whole car CAN Busoff | EPB system CAN communication detects Bus off | |
| 19393,9 | The AutoDrive_ADCU message is lost | AutoDrive_ADCU message is lost, more than 500ms | |
| 19393,19 | The AutoDrive_ADCU check error | AutoDrive_ADCU validation error | |
| 19393,8 | AutoDrive_ADCU Counter error | AutoDrive_ADCU Counter error | |
| 19649,9 | The AutoDrive_rADCU message is lost | AutoDrive_rADCU message is lost, more than 500ms | |
| 19649,19 | The AutoDrive_rADCU check error | AutoDrive_rADCU validation error | |
| 19649,8 | AutoDrive_rADCU Counter error | AutoDrive_rADCU Counter error | |
| 19137,9 | EPBC1_ADCU is lost | The EPBC1_ADCU packet is lost and exceeds 500ms | |
| 19137,19 | EPBC1_ADCU check error | EPBC1_ADCU verification error | |
| 19137,8 | EPBC1_ADCU Counter is incorrect | EPBC1_ADCU Counter error | |
| 20161,9 | EPBC1_rADCU is lost | The EPBC1_rADCU packet is lost and exceeds 500ms | |
| 20161,19 | EPBC1_rADCU check error | EPBC1_rADCU verification error | |
| 20161,8 | EPBC1_rADCU Counter is incorrect | EPBC1_rADCU Counter error | |
| 15811,9 | Clutch signal is lost | Clutch signal loss, more than 500ms |
Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides Tractor EPB? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the Tractor EPB power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.5 EPB Communication Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 20417,2 | The clutch signal is invalid | The clutch signal sends an invalid value | |
| 22721,19 | Redundant CANbusoff | EPB redundant CAN communication detects Bus off | |
| 195,9 | Packets required by EPB in the redundant can are lost Procedure | Redundant CAN requires packet loss of more than 3s |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 14674,11 | The EPB module assembly valve body is faulty | There is a failure inside the EPB module assembly for more than 1 second | 1.Tractor EPB |
| 13906,3 | The trailer independent brake solenoid valve shorted the power supply | The trailer independent brake spool inside the module assembly was shorted with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second | |
| 13906,6 | Trailer independent brake solenoid valve short circuit to the ground | The trailer independent brake valve core inside the module assembly is short-connected to the ground, and the trailer independent brake valve has been working for more than 1 second | |
| 13906,5 | Trailer independent brake solenoid valve disconnected | The trailer independent brake spool inside the module assembly is not connected for more than 1 second | |
| 23122,4 | The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormal | The output voltage of the parking pressure sensor inside the EPB module is less than 0.2V, more than 10s | |
| 23122,3 | The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormal | The output voltage of the parking pressure sensor inside the EPB module is greater than 4.8V, more than 10s | |
| 135250,2 | Tilt sensor fault | EPB module internal tilt sensor Angle output or output signal is abnormal | |
| 16722,3 | The parking solenoid is short circuiting the power supply | The parking solenoid valve spool pair inside the module assembly is shorted with the source (24V) for more than 1 second | |
| 16722,6 | Parking solenoid to ground short circuit | the valve core of the parking solenoid valve inside the module assembly is short connected to the ground, and the parking solenoid valve has been working for more than 1 second | |
| 16722,5 | Parking solenoid valve disconnected | The parking solenoid valve spool inside the module assembly is not connected for more than 1 second | |
| 16978,3 | Release solenoid valve short circuit to power supply | The module assembly internal release solenoid valve spool is shorted with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second |
Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.6 EPB Internal Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 16978,6 | Release solenoid valve to ground short circuit | module assembly internal release solenoid valve spool and ground short, more than 1 second, release parking solenoid valve has been working | |
| 16978,5 | Release solenoid valve disconnected | The module assembly internal release solenoid valve spool is not connected for more than 1 second | |
| 17234,3 | The trailer detects the short circuit of the solenoid valve to the power supply | The trailer detection spool inside the module assembly is shorted with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second | |
| 17234,6 | Trailer detects short circuit of solenoid valve to ground | The trailer detection valve spool inside the module assembly is short connected to the ground, and the trailer detection solenoid valve has been working for more than 1 second | |
| 17234,5 | Trailer detection solenoid valve disconnected | The trailer detection spool inside the module assembly is not connected for more than 1 second | |
| 21330,25 | The ECU failed to read the memory | The ECU failed to read memory | |
| 21330,24 | The ECU write memory is faulty. Procedure | The ECU failed to write to memory | |
| 12882,4 | Main valve electric relay cannot drive output | The EPB system main valve electrical relay cannot drive output, the relay cannot pull, the main valve electrical disconnect, enable the standby valve power | |
| 12626,4 | Backup valve electrical relay cannot drive output | The EPB system standby valve electrical relay cannot drive output, the relay cannot pull | |
| 12882,3 | Main valve electric relay cannot cut off output | Power-on self-test EPB system main valve electrical relay can not cut off the output, the relay can not be disconnected | |
| 12626,3 | The backup valve electrical relay cannot cut off the output | Power-on self-test EPB system standby valve electric relay can not cut off the output, the relay can not be disconnected | |
| 34898,11 | The EPB system is seriously faulty | The EPB system has multiple failures, and the electronically controlled parking system cannot be used |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade.
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 14418,11 | The EPB switch is faulty. Procedure | The EPB switch or connecting harness fails for more than 3 seconds | 1. Wiring harness 2.Right central control switch - electronic parking switch 3.Tractor EPB |
| 17794,3 | The release end of the switch is short circuited | The internal switch release terminal of the EPB switch is short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 200ms | |
| 17794,6 | The release end of the switch is short circuited to the ground | The internal switch release end of the EPB switch is short-circuited with the ground for more than 200ms | |
| 17794,5 | The switch release end is disconnected | The internal switch release terminal of the EPB switch is not connected for more than 200ms | |
| 18050,3 | Switch parking terminal electrical short circuit | The internal switch parking terminal of the EPB switch is shorted with the power supply (24V), more than 200ms | |
| 18050,6 | Switch parking terminal to ground short circuit | EPB switch internal switch parking terminal and ground short, more than 200ms | |
| 18050,5 | The switch parking terminal is disconnected | The EPB switch internal switch parking terminal is not connected, more than 200ms | |
| 18050,0 | The switching linearity is not proportional | The two routing voltages inside the EPB switch are disproportionate, exceeding 200ms | |
| 18050,10 | Switch card lag | The EPB switch is stuck for more than 3s | |
| 18050,2 | Switch missing | The controller does not receive the EPB switch for more than 1s | |
| 18306,5 | Switch power supply exception | The EPB switch supply voltage is less than 16V or more than 32V, more than 1s | |
| 18562,4 | The closing position of the parking switch is abnormal | Abnormal closing position of the parking switch, more than 200ms | |
| 18818,3 | Relieve abnormal switch closing position | The closure position of the relief switch is abnormal, exceeding 200ms | |
| 19074,3 | Parking indicator light to electric short circuit | Parking indicator shorted with power supply (24V), more than 200ms | |
| 19330,5 | Parking indicator disconnected | Parking indicator disconnected for more than 200ms |
Step 4:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.7 Right Central Control Switch - Electronic Parking Switch Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 9603,5 | Hard line parking light disconnected | The hard line of the parking P light is disconnected for more than 2s | |
| 9603,3 | Hard parking lights are short circuited | A short circuit of more than 2s is detected in the hard wire pair of the parking P-light | |
| 9859,5 | The redundant hard cable of the parking switch is abnormal | Switch redundancy Hard line and switch message status are inconsistent for more than 2 seconds | |
| 10115,5 | Alleviates redundant switch hard line anomalies | Switch redundancy Hard line and switch message status are inconsistent for more than 2 seconds |
2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right central control switch - electronic parking switch and Tractor EPB.
| Parking Switch Status | Switch Status |
|---|---|
| Turn off parking brake switch | Turn off the parking brake switch and turn on the parking release switch |
| Turn on parking brake switch | The parking brake switch is turned on, and the parking release switch is turned off |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 12995,9 | The gear signal is lost | The gear signal is lost, more than 500ms | 1. Wiring harness 2. Shift switch 3.Tractor EPB |
| 12993,2 | The gear signal is invalid | The gear signal sends an invalid value |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 13251,9 | Throttle signal loss | Throttle signal is lost, more than 500ms | 1. Wiring harness 2.VDC 3.Tractor EPB |
| 13507,9 | Torque signal loss | loss of torque signal, over 500ms | |
| 13763,9 | The foot brake signal is missing | The foot brake signal is lost, more than 500ms | |
| 14019,9 | Barometric signal loss | Air pressure signal is lost for more than 5 seconds |
Step 4:Check if the right central control switch group is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right central control switch - electronic parking switch. Refer to Replacement Of The Right Central Control Switch Group Step 5:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.8 EPB Reports GSM Related Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for GSM related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting GSM related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.9 EPB Reports VDC Related Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 15299,9 | HaltBrakeMode signal is lost | HaltBrakeMode signal loss, more than 500ms | |
| 15555,9 | The XBR signal is lost | XBR signal loss, more than 500ms | |
| 13249,2 | Invalid throttle signal | The throttle signal sends an invalid value | |
| 13505,2 | Torque signal invalid | The torque signal sends an invalid value | |
| 13761,2 | The foot brake signal is invalid | The foot brake signal sends an invalid value | |
| 14017,2 | Barometric failure | The air pressure signal sends an invalid value | |
| 15297,2 | The HaltBrakeMode signal is invalid | The HaltBrakeMode signal sent an invalid value | |
| 15553,2 | The XBR signal is invalid | The XBR signal sent an invalid value | |
| 16323,9 | The vehicle ready signal is lost | Vehicle high voltage ready signal loss, more than 500ms | |
| 16321,2 | The vehicle ready signal is invalid | The high voltage ready signal of the vehicle sends an invalid value |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 26450,3 | The EBS system cannot respond to XBR requests | During emergency braking, the EPB sends a braking request, and the EBS system does not respond to the request within 1 second | 1. Wiring harness 2.EBS 3.Tractor EPB |
| 14162,3 | The EBS system cannot respond to temporary parking brake requests | Configure for EBS to do stoppage situations When performing near-stop braking, the EPB sends a braking request, and the EBS system does not respond to the request within 1 second | |
| 14275,9 | Speed signal loss | The speed signal is lost, more than 500ms |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for VDC related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting VDC related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:VDC rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace VDC.Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.10 EPB Reports EBS Related Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 14531,9 | Speed signal loss | Loss of speed signal, over 500ms | |
| 14787,9 | ABS wheel speed report lost | ABS wheel speed signal is lost, more than 500ms | |
| 14273,2 | Speed signal invalid | The speed signal sends an invalid value | |
| 14529,2 | Invalid speed signal | The speed signal sends an invalid value | |
| 14785,2 | The ABS wheel speed signal is invalid | The ABS wheel speed signal sends an invalid value | |
| 8899,10 | Abnormal speed jump | Abnormal jump in the speed signal, deviation of more than 9 mph | |
| 8899,26 | Excessive speed error | Different types of speed signals deviate by more than 9 mph for more than 20 seconds |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 12739,9 | Loss of seat belt signal | Seat belt signal lost, more than 500ms | 1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU 3.Tractor EPB |
| 15043,9 | Ready signal loss | The Ready signal is lost, more than 500ms | |
| 14737,2 | Invalid seat belt sign | The seat belt signal sent an invalid value | |
| 15041,2 | Invalid Ready signal | The Ready signal sends an invalid value |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for EBS related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting EBS related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.11 EPB Reports BDCU Related Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for BDCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting BDCU related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade.
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 16067,9 | Gate signal loss | Door signal loss, more than 500ms | 1. Wiring harness 2.DCM 3.Tractor EPB |
| 16065,2 | Gate signal invalid | The gate signal sends an invalid value |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 16579,9 | The rear axle running pressure signal is lost | The vehicle rear axle running pressure signal is lost, more than 500ms | 1. Wiring harness 2.CDC 3.Tractor EPB |
| 16577,2 | The rear axle running pressure signal is invalid | The vehicle running pressure signal sends an invalid value |
Step 5:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.12 EPB Reports DCM Related Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for DCM related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting DCM related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:DCM rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace DCM. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.13 EPB Reports CDC Related Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for CDC related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting CDC related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:CDC rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace CDC.Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 19026,1 | When the vehicle is braking, there is no air in the brake line | When the stop relay valve is working The pressure sensor detects that the pressure is less than 1bar and more than 1s | 1. Braking system 2.Tractor EPB |
| 19282,0 | There is air in the brake line when the vehicle is not braking | At speeds greater than 3 mph After stepping on the accelerator, the pressure sensor is monitored to monitor the driving air path, and the air pressure is always higher than 1bar for more than 10s | |
| 19538,10 | The brake line is leaking | Near stop relay valve operation The pressure sensor monitors the driving air route and detects frequent air leakage in the pipeline, which fails to establish the pressure set at the stop after continuous working for 3 cycles | |
| 18770,7 | Parking system inflation time out | When the parking is released, the parking pressure for 5 seconds is not more than 4.5bar, and the final pressure can be charged more than 6bar | |
| 22866,7 | Parking system exhaust time out | When parking, exhaust for 5 seconds parking pressure is not less than 1bar | |
| 19539,10 | Parking pipe leakage rate is too large | Release the parking vehicle, the speed is greater than 3 mph, and the continuous air injection is more than 3 times |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 19027,1 | Parking status The parking pressure is too high | In the parking state, the parking pressure is greater than 1bar, more than 10 seconds, or the parking pressure is more than 2bar after 5s. | 1. Wiring harness 2. Braking system 3.Tractor EPB |
Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.14 Parking Pipeline Leakage Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the braking system. Refer to Check The Braking System Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.15 Abnormal Pressure In The Parking Pipeline
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 19283,0 | Running status Parking pressure is too low | The speed is more than 3 mph, the parking pressure is less than 5bar, more than 10 seconds |
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 29009,6 | The left sensor is short-circuited to the ground | The left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was shorted with the ground wire for more than 1 second | 1. Wiring harness 2.Left ABS sensor 3.Tractor EPB |
| 29009,3 | The sensor on the left is short-circuited | The left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second | |
| 29009,5 | The left sensor is disconnected. Procedure | The left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second | |
| 29009,7 | Missing tooth on left sensor | The left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system lacks teeth | |
| 29009,1 | The sensor gap on the left is too large | Excessive clearance of the left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system |
2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the braking system. Refer to Check The Braking System Step 4:Check for brake pipeline leakage faults. Step 5:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.16 Left ABS Sensor Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection X1 C21-8
| SPN,FMI | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|
| 33105,6 | The right sensor is short-circuited to the ground | The right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system is short-circuited with the ground wire for more than 1 second | 1. Wiring harness 2.Right ABS sensor 3.Tractor EPB |
| 33105,3 | The right sensor is short circuited Procedure | The right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second | |
| 33105,5 | The right sensor is disconnected Procedure | The right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was not connected for more than 1 second | |
| 33105,7 | Missing tooth on right sensor | The right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system lacks teeth | |
| 33105,1 | The sensor gap on the right is too large | Excessive clearance of the right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system |
Step 3:Check the left ABS sensor. Refer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction . Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.
8.16.4.17 Right ABS Sensor Fault
1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection X1 C21-8
Step 3:Check the ABS sensor on the right side. Refer to Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction . Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.


8.16.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.16.5.1 Replacement of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the parking solenoid valve assembly. 6 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the parking solenoid valve assembly.
7 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the parking solenoid valve assembly. 8 Remove the parking solenoid valve assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the parking solenoid valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the parking solenoid valve assembly.
Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 4 air pipes of the parking solenoid valve assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the parking solenoid valve assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the parking solenoid valve assembly, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the zero position.

8.17 Air Reservoir Device 8.17.1 Dismantling and Installation3513· 5g
8.17.1.1 Replacement of Air Compressor Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 9 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 10 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the 4 fixing screws of the cover plate and detach the cover plate.
12 Remove the 3 fixing bolts of the harness. 13 Disconnect 4 pipelines of the air compressor assembly.



14 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 15 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the harness bracket. 16 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the air compressor assembly. 17 Remove the air compressor assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the air compressor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the air compressor assembly.
Torque: 70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the harness bracket.



4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground wire. 5 Connect 4 pipelines of the air compressor assembly.


6 Install the 3 fixing bolts of the harness. 7 Install the 4 fixing screws of the cover plate. 8 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 9 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 10 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 11 Fill coolant in the power system. 12 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 13 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.


8.17.1.2 Replacement of Air Filter Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 9 Remove 6 fixing screws of the cover plate. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the high voltage harness.
11 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the high voltage harness. 12 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the air filter assembly. 13 Disengage 1 clamp of the air filter assembly. 14 Remove the air filter assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the air filter assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 clamp of the air filter assembly. 3 Install 4 fixing bolts of the air filter assembly.
Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)



4 Install 6 fixing screws of the high voltage harness. 5 Install 6 fixing bolts of the high voltage harness.
Torque:22 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
6 Install the 6 fixing screws of the cover plate.
7 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 9 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 10 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

8.17.1.3 Replacement of Air Inlet Hose
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Detach the air inlet hose.

Installation Procedures 1 Install the air inlet hose.

2 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 3 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).
8.17.1.4 Replacement of Air Handling Unit Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly.
8 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the air handling unit assembly. 9 Disconnect 6 air pipes of the air handling unit assembly. 10 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the air handling unit assembly. 11 Remove the air handling unit assembly.





Installation Procedures 1 Move the air handling unit assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the air handling unit assembly.
Torque:70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 6 air pipes of the air handling unit assembly.

4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the air handling unit assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
5 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.
8.17.1.5 Replacement of Drain Valve (front)
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right).
4 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the drain valve (front). Installation Procedures 1 Move the drain valve (front) to the mounting position. 2 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 3 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).

8.17.1.6 Replacement of Drain Valve (rear)
Removal Procedures
1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the drain valve (rear). Installation Procedures 1 Move the drain valve (rear) to the mounting position.

8.17.1.7 Replacement of Air Reservoir Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 3 air pipes of the air reservoir assembly. 3 Remove the air reservoir assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the air reservoir assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 3 air pipes of the air reservoir assembly.

8.17.1.8 Replacement of Air Compressor Steel Pipe Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left deflector lower body.
6 Remove the left charging cover plate assembly. 7 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the air compressor steel pipe assembly.


8 Remove 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly, and remove the air compressor steel pipe assembly. Installation Procedures





1 Move the air compressor steel pipe assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly. 3 Connect 2 air pipes of the air compressor steel pipe assembly.
4 Install the left charging cover plate assembly. 5 Install the left deflector lower body. 6 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 8 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).
8.17.1.9 Replacement of Air Compressor Steel Pipe Assembly (left)
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 4 Remove the left deflector lower body. 5 Remove the left charging cover plate assembly.
6 Disconnect 2 joints of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). 7 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). 8 Remove the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). Installation Procedures




1 Move the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left).
Torque: 22 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 2 joints of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). 4 Install the left charging cover plate assembly. 5 Install the left deflector lower body. 6 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).
8.17.1.10 Replacement of Air Filter Element
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.
4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the air filter assembly. 9 Disengage 3 clips of the air filter element. 10 Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedures 1 Move the air filter element to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 clips of the air filter element.

3 Install the air filter assembly. 4 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.
8.17.1.11 Replacement of Air Filter Element (muffler)
Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the air filter assembly.






9 Disengage 3 clips of the air filter element. 10 Remove the air filter element (muffler). Installation Procedures 1 Move the air filter element (muffler) to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 clips of the air filter element. 3 Install the air filter assembly. 4 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

| Fastener name | Specifications | Range Of Torque |
|---|---|---|
| Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs) | ||
| The fixing bolt connecting the yaw sensor assembly and the frame assembly | M8 | 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs) |
| The fixing bolts connecting the EBS controller assembly to the EBS bracket | M6 | 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs) |
8.18 EBS Electronic Control Unit Execution Device3568· 3g
8.18.1 Specifications
8.18.1.1 Fastener Specifications

8.18.2 Decomposition Diagram
8.18.2.1 Decomposition Diagram
1. Angle Sensor Assy 2. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw
3. Ebs Controller Assy 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

5. Yaw Sensor Assy 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

8.18.3 System Schematic Diagram
8.18.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram
| Symptom | Suspected Faulty Project | Measures |
|---|---|---|
| The EBS function is always working or not working at any time | 1.Wheel speed sensor installation error | Reinstall the wheel speed sensor and adjust the gap between the wheel speed sensor and the signal board. Replace the wheel speed sensor or signal board if necessary. |
| 2.The gap between the wheel speed sensor and the signal panel is too large or too small, or foreign objects are blocking it | ||
| 3.Wheel speed sensor malfunction | Refer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault.Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault.Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault.Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault | |
| 4.ABS solenoid valve malfunction | Refer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault.Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault | |
| 5.EBS module malfunction | Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| C330203 | The voltage of the ECU is too high | Refer to EBS Power Fault |
| C330204 | The controller (ECU) voltage is too low |
8.18.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps
8.18.4.1 Diagnostic Description
Before diagnosing the malfunction of the EBS electronic control unit execution device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the EBS electronic control unit execution device before starting system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the EBS electronic control unit execution device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of
faulty parts. 8.18.4.2 Routine Inspection
• Check the after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the EBS electronic control unit execution device system, ensuring that these devices cannot affect the operation of the EBS electronic control unit execution device system.
• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.18.4.3 Fault Symptom Table
8.18.4.4 DTC Confirmation
1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.
– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.18.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
EBS
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| C35020D | Valve power failure | |
| C3F0205 | Vehicle CAN communication failure | Refer to EBS Communication Fault |
| B030205 | The ESC CAN communication is faulty | |
| C36020C | EEPROM fault | Refer to EBS Internal Fault |
| P210305 | The DBR is disconnected | |
| P2B0305 | ESC not detected | |
| B010205 | The EPM CAN communication of axle 1 and axle 2 is faulty | Refer to EBS Private CAN Communication Fault |
| P220305 | Foot valve failure | Refer to Brake Signal Generator Fault |
| P340305 | Trailer valve failure | Refer to Trailer Control Valve Fault |
| P390305 | The yaw rate sensor is faulty | Refer to Yaw Rate Sensor Fault |
| P3A0305 | The steering Angle sensor is faulty | Refer to Steering Angle Sensor Fault |
| P150301 | The gap between the left front sensor and the gear ring is too large | Refer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault |
| P150306 | Short-circuited left front sensor | |
| P150305 | Left front sensor disconnected | |
| P15030B | Left front ring missing teeth, deflection | |
| P160301 | The gap between the right front sensor and the gear ring is too large | Refer to Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault |
| P160306 | Right front sensor short-circuited | |
| P160305 | Right front sensor disconnected | |
| P16030B | Right front ring missing teeth, deflection | |
| P170301 | The gap between the left rear/left second sensor and the gear ring is too large | Refer to Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault |
| P170306 | The left rear/left second sensor is short- circuited | |
| P170305 | The left rear/left second sensor is disconnected | |
| P17030B | Missing teeth and deflection of left rear/ left second ring | |
| P180301 | The gap between the right rear/right second sensor and the gear ring is too large | Refer to Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault |
| P180306 | The right rear/right second sensor is short-circuited | |
| P180305 | The right rear/right second sensor is disconnected | |
| P18030B | Missing teeth and deflection of right rear/right second ring |
| Fault Code | Fault Description | Exclusion Method |
|---|---|---|
| P1D0306 | Left front solenoid valve short circuit | Refer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault |
| P1D0305 | Left front solenoid valve disconnected | |
| P1E0306 | Right front solenoid valve short circuit | Refer to Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault |
| P1E0305 | Right front solenoid valve disconnected | |
| P200306 | One axle EPM short-circuit | Refer to Vehicle Axle Modulator 1M Fault |
| P200309 | The Hitotsubashi EPM ECU is faulty | |
| P20030A | The EPM pressure sensor of Hitotsubashi is faulty | |
| P200305 | One axle EPM is disconnected | |
| P250306 | Second axle EPM short circuit | Refer to Vehicle Axle Modulator 2M Fault |
| P250309 | The EPM ECU of axle two is faulty | |
| P25030A | The EPM pressure sensor of the second axle is faulty | |
| P250305 | axle 2 EPM is disconnected |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C330203 | The voltage of the ECU is too high | The voltage of the ECU is too high | Controller power-on | 1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.EBS |
| C330204 | The controller (ECU) voltage is too low | The controller (ECU) voltage is too low | Controller power-on | |
| C35020D | Valve power failure | Valve power failure | Controller power-on |
8.18.4.6 EBS Power Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C3F0205 | Vehicle CAN communicatio- n failure | The EEC1 packet timed out. Procedure | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.EBS |
| B030205 | The ESC CAN communicatio- n is faulty | The ESC CAN communication is abnormal | Controller power-on |
Step 3 : Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides EBS? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4 : Check the EBS power supply and grounding harness. Step 5 : EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6 : Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.7 EBS Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C36020C | EEPROM fault | EEPROM fault | Controller power-on | 1.EBS |
| P210305 | The DBR is disconnected | The DBR is not connected | Controller power-on | |
| P2B0305 | ESC not detected | The SAS static check or ESC dynamic check is incomplete. | Controller power-on |
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| B010205 | The EPM CAN communicatio- n of axle 1 and axle 2 is faulty | EPM CAN communication between axle 1 and axle 2 is abnormal | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.EBS |
Step 4:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.8 EBS Internal Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 4:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.9 EBS Private CAN Communication Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram


3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the AA-CAN communication harness between EBS and the axle modulator 1M. X1 C21-8
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P220305 | Foot valve failure | Short break of foot valve | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Brake signal generator 3.EBS |
Step 4:Check the VA-CAN communication harness between EBS and the axle modulator 2M. Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.10 Brake Signal Generator Malfunction
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the brake signal generator and EBS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P340305 | Trailer valve failure | Trailer valve short break | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Trailer control valve 3.EBS |
Step 4:Replace the brake signal generator. Refer to Replacement Of Brake Signal Transmitter Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.11 Trailer Control Valve Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the trailer control valve and EBS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P390305 | The yaw rate sensor is faulty | The yaw rate sensor is faulty | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Yaw rate sensor 3.EBS |
Step 4:Replace the trailer control valve. Refer to Replacement Of Trailer Control Module Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.12 Yaw Rate Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the yaw rate sensor and EBS. X1 C21-8
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P3A0305 | The steering Angle sensor is faulty | The steering Angle sensor is faulty | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Steering angle sensor 3.EBS |
Step 4:Replace the yaw rate sensor. Refer to Replacement Of The Yaw Sensor Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.13 Steering Angle Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the steering angle sensor and EBS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P150301 | The gap between the left front sensor and the gear ring is too large | The clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too large | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state | 1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 1M 3.Front axle left wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS |
| P150306 | Short-circuited left front sensor | Sensor short circuit | Controller power-on | |
| P150305 | Left front sensor disconnected | Sensor break | Controller power-on | |
| P15030B | Left front ring missing teeth, deflection | Tooth ring missing teeth or deflection | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state |
Step 4:Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Angle Sensor Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.14 Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle left wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 1M.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P160301 | The gap between the right front sensor and the gear ring is too large | The clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too large | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state | 1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 1M 3.Front axle right wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS |
| P160306 | Right front sensor short- circuited | Sensor short circuit | Controller power-on | |
| P160305 | Right front sensor disconnected | Sensor break | Controller power-on | |
| P16030B | Right front ring missing teeth, deflection | Tooth ring missing teeth or deflection | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 1M and EBS. Step 5:Replace the front axle left wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 1M. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.15 Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle right wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 1M.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P170301 | The gap between the left rear/left second sensor and the gear ring is too large | The clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too large | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state | 1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 2M 3.Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS |
| P170306 | The left rear/ left second sensor is short-circuited | Sensor short circuit | Controller power-on | |
| P170305 | The left rear/ left second sensor is disconnected | Sensor break | Controller power-on | |
| P17030B | Missing teeth and deflection of left rear/left second ring | Tooth ring missing teeth or deflection | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 1M and EBS. Step 5:Replace the front axle right wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 1M. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.16 Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle left wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 2M X1 C21-8
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P180301 | The gap between the right rear/right second sensor and the gear ring is too large | The clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too large | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state | 1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 2M 3.Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS |
| P180306 | The right rear/ right second sensor is short-circuited | Sensor short circuit | Controller power-on | |
| P180305 | The right rear/ right second sensor is disconnected | Sensor break | Controller power-on | |
| P18030B | Missing teeth and deflection of right rear/ right second ring | Tooth ring missing teeth or deflection | The controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 2M and EBS Step 5:Replace the rear axle left wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 2M. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.17 Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle right wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 2M X1 C21-8
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P1D0306 | Left front solenoid valve short circuit | Solenoid short circuit | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve 3.EBS |
| P1D0305 | Left front solenoid valve disconnected | The solenoid valve is disconnected | Controller power-on |
Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 2M and EBS Step 5:Replace the rear axle right wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 2M. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.18 Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve and EBS
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P1E0306 | Right front solenoid valve short circuit | Solenoid short circuit | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve 3.EBS |
| P1E0305 | Right front solenoid valve disconnected | The solenoid valve is disconnected | Controller power-on |
Step 4:Replace the front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of ABS Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.19 Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve and EBS
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P200306 | One axle EPM short-circuit | One axle EPM valve is short-circuited | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 1M 3.EBS |
| P200309 | The Hitotsubashi EPM ECU is faulty | One axle EPM valve ECU is faulty | Controller power-on | |
| P20030A | The EPM pressure sensor of Hitotsubashi is faulty | One axle EPM valve pressure sensor is faulty | Controller power-on | |
| P200305 | One axle EPM is disconnected | One axle EPM valve is disconnected | Controller power-on |
Step 4:Replace the front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of ABS Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.20 Vehicle Axle Modulator 1M Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 1M and EBS.
| DTC Code | Description | DTC Trigger Conditions | DTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy) | Faulty Part |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| P250306 | Second axle EPM short circuit | Second axle EPM short circuit | Controller power-on | 1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 2M 3.EBS |
| P250309 | The EPM ECU of axle two is faulty | The EPM ECU of axle two is faulty | Controller power-on | |
| P25030A | The EPM pressure sensor of the second axle is faulty | The EPM pressure sensor of the second axle is faulty | Controller power-on | |
| P250305 | axle 2 EPM is disconnected | axle 2 EPM is disconnected | Controller power-on |
Step 4:Replace the axle modulator 1M. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.
8.18.4.21 Vehicle Axle Modulator 2M Fault
1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram
3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 2M and EBS. X1 C21-8
Step 4:Replace the axle modulator 2M. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.


8.18.5 Dismantling and Installation
8.18.5.1 Replacement of EBS ECU Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 5 harness connectors of the EBS ECU assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the EBS ECU assembly. 7 Remove the EBS ECU assembly. Installation Procedures
1 Move the EBS ECU assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the EBS ECU assembly.
Torque: 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 5 harness connectors of the EBS ECU assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.
caution
After replacing the EBS ECU assembly, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the zero position.
8.18.5.2 Replacement of Steering Angle Sensor Assembly
Removal Procedures
1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 8 Remove the clock spring. 9 Remove the combination switch. 10 Remove the combination switch fixing bracket. 11 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the steering angle sensor assembly.

12 Remove 3 fixing screws of the steering angle sensor assembly. 13 Remove the steering angle sensor assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the steering angle sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the steering angle sensor assembly.

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the steering angle sensor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Install the combination switch fixing bracket. 5 Install the combination switch. 6 Install the clock spring. 7 Install the steering wheel assembly. 8 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 9 Install the combination switch lower shield. 10 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the zero position.
8.18.5.3 Replacement of Yaw Sensor Assembly
Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.
caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the yaw sensor assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the yaw sensor assembly. 6 Remove the yaw sensor assembly. Installation Procedures


1 Move the yaw sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the yaw sensor assembly.
Torque:18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
3 Connect 1 harness connector of the yaw sensor assembly.
caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.
caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the zero position.
9Circuit
9.1 System Circuit Diagram
9.1.1 Smart Junction Box - Chassis
9.1.1.1 Smart Junction Box - Chassis

9.1.1.2 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued

KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D
9.1.1.3 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 1

9.1.1.4 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 2

Identification light O318f Z01 Ground
9.1.1.5 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 3

9.1.1.6 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 4

9.1.1.7 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 5

BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD2 BCANFD1
9.1.2 Smart Junction Box - Body
9.1.2.1 Smart Junction Box - Body

9.1.2.2 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued

9.1.2.3 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 1

9.1.2.4 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 2

9.1.2.5 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 3

9.1.2.6 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 4

CAN1FD
9.1.3 12V Junction Box 9.1.3.1 12V Junction Box

9.1.3.2 12V Junction Box Continued

9.1.4 DC Fast Charge
9.1.4.1 DC Fast Charge

9.1.4.2 DC Fast Charge Continued

9.1.5 Battery Management System
9.1.5.1 Battery Management System

9.1.5.2 Battery Management System Continued

9.1.5.3 Battery Management System Continued 1

9.1.6 Thermal Management System
9.1.6.1 Thermal Management System

Total body power supply B+ L22
9.1.6.2 Thermal Management System Continued

Total body power supply B+ L22
9.1.6.3 Thermal Management System Continued 1

Total body power supply B+ L22
9.1.6.4 Thermal Management System Continued 2

9.1.6.5 Thermal Management System Continued 3

9.1.6.6 Thermal Management System Continued 4

9.1.7 Drive Control System
9.1.7.1 Drive Control System

Total body power supply B+ L22
9.1.7.2 Drive Control System Continued

9.1.7.3 Drive Control System Continued 1

9.1.8 Charging System
9.1.8.1 Charging System

9.1.9 Intelligent Driving
9.1.9.1 Intelligent Driving

9.1.9.2 Intelligent Driving Continued

9.1.9.3 Intelligent Driving Continued 1

9.1.9.4 Intelligent Driving Continued 2

Total body power supply B+ L22 Power KL30 P116b Power supply KL15 P102a
9.1.9.5 Intelligent Driving Continued 3

9.1.9.6 Intelligent Driving Continued 4

9.1.10 VDC 9.1.10.1 VDC

9.1.10.2 VDC Continued

9.1.10.3 VDC Continued 1

9.1.10.4 VDC Continued 2

9.1.10.5 VDC Continued 3

9.1.10.6 VDC Continued 4

9.1.10.7 VDC Continued 5

9.1.10.8 VDC Continued 6

9.1.10.9 VDC Continued 7

9.1.10.10 VDC Continued 8

9.1.10.11 VDC Continued 9

9.1.10.12 VDC Continued 10

9.1.11 CDCU 9.1.11.1 CDCU

9.1.11.2 CDCU Continued

9.1.11.3 CDCU Continued 1

9.1.11.4 CDCU Continued 2

9.1.11.5 CDCU Continued 3

9.1.11.6 CDCU Continued 4

9.1.11.7 CDCU Continued 5

9.1.11.8 CDCU Continued 6

9.1.12 EBS 9.1.12.1 EBS

9.1.12.2 EBS Continued

9.1.12.3 EBS Continued 1

9.1.12.4 EBS Continued 2

9.1.12.5 EBS Continued 3

9.1.12.6 EBS Continued 4

X1 C21-8
9.1.13 EPB 9.1.13.1 EPB

9.1.13.2 EPB Continued

9.1.14 EHPS 9.1.14.1 EHPS

9.1.15 BDCU 9.1.15.1 BDCU

Total body power supply B+ L22
9.1.15.2 BDCU Continued

B63-11 B63-22
9.1.15.3 BDCU Continued 1

| ylppus a414B | V5 ylppus rewop b414B | ylirosnes b634B | |||
9.1.15.4 BDCU Continued 2

5V power
9.1.15.5 BDCU Continued 3

9.1.15.6 BDCU Continued 4

9.1.15.7 BDCU Continued 5

Ground Z01 B16-5
9.1.15.8 BDCU Continued 6

9.1.15.9 BDCU Continued 7

9.1.15.10 BDCU Continued 8

9.1.16 Headlamp
9.1.16.1 Headlamp

9.1.16.2 Headlamp Continued

9.1.16.3 Headlamp Continued 1

9.1.17 Turn Signal Lamp
9.1.17.1 Turn Signal Lamp

9.1.17.2 Turn Signal Lamp Continued

9.1.18 Reverse lamp
9.1.18.1 Reverse lamp

9.1.19 Brake lamp
9.1.19.1 Brake lamp

9.1.19.2 Brake lamp Continued

9.1.20 Daytime Running Light
9.1.20.1 Daytime Running Light

9.1.21 Fog Lamp
9.1.21.1 Fog Lamp

9.1.21.2 Fog Lamp Continued

9.1.22 Position Light
9.1.22.1 Position Light

9.1.22.2 Position Light Continued

9.1.22.3 Position Light Continued 1

9.1.22.4 Position Light Continued 2

9.1.23 Atmosphere lamp
9.1.23.1 Atmosphere lamp

9.1.23.2 Atmosphere lamp Continued

9.1.24 Welcome Lamp
9.1.24.1 Welcome Lamp

9.1.25 Indoor Lighting
9.1.25.1 Indoor Lighting

9.1.25.2 Indoor Lighting Continued

9.1.25.3 Indoor Lighting Continued 1

9.1.26 Central Lock 9.1.26.1 Central Lock

9.1.26.2 Central Lock Continued

9.1.26.3 Central Lock Continued 1

9.1.27 Wiper Cleaning
9.1.27.1 Wiper Cleaning

9.1.28 Power Window 9.1.28.1 Power Window

9.1.29 Sunroof Sunshade 9.1.29.1 Sunroof Sunshade

9.1.30 Physical Rearview Mirror
9.1.30.1 Physical Rearview Mirror

9.1.30.2 Physical Rearview Mirror Continued

9.1.31 Multimedia Entertainment System
9.1.31.1 Multimedia Entertainment System

9.1.31.2 Multimedia Entertainment System Continued

9.1.32 Bluetooth & NFC 9.1.32.1 Bluetooth & NFC

9.1.32.2 Bluetooth & NFC Continued

9.1.33 Power Seat 9.1.33.1 Power Seat

9.1.33.2 Power Seat Continued

9.1.34 Vehicle Power Supply
9.1.34.1 Vehicle Power Supply

9.1.34.2 Vehicle Power Supply Continued

B08-10 B01-1
9.1.35 Steering Wheel Switch
9.1.35.1 Steering Wheel Switch

9.1.36 Air Conditioner 9.1.36.1 Air Conditioner

9.1.36.2 Air Conditioner Continued

9.1.36.3 Air Conditioner Continued 1

9.1.36.4 Air Conditioner Continued 2

| B54-10 B54-11 |
9.1.36.5 Air Conditioner Continued 3

9.1.36.6 Air Conditioner Continued 4

9.1.36.7 Air Conditioner Continued 5

9.1.36.8 Air Conditioner Continued 6

9.1.37 Augmented Reality Heads-Up Display
9.1.37.1 Augmented Reality Heads-Up Display

9.1.38 Tire Pressure Monitoring
9.1.38.1 Tire Pressure Monitoring

9.1.39 Low Speed Alarm
9.1.39.1 Low Speed Alarm

B48-38 B48-18
9.1.40 Electronic Post Lock 9.1.40.1 Electronic Post Lock

9.1.41 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension
9.1.41.1 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension

9.1.41.2 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued

9.1.41.3 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued 1

9.1.41.4 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued 2

C66-2 C66-1
9.1.42 Car TV 9.1.42.1 Car TV

9.1.43 Megaphone
9.1.43.1 Megaphone

Air horn-KL30 O406 supply O419 supply O419
9.1.44 Car Refrigerator
9.1.44.1 Car Refrigerator

9.1.45 ETC 9.1.45.1 ETC

9.1.46 Gateway
9.1.46.1 Gateway

9.1.46.2 Gateway Continued

B76-17
9.1.46.3 Gateway Continued 1

9.1.46.4 Gateway Continued 2

9.1.47 OBD 9.1.47.1 OBD

9.1.47.2 OBD Continued

| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
| 9 | B219 | W | - | Profile light + |
| 10 | P202b | R | - | Top cabinet power + |
| 11 | R105b | W | - | Right surround- sound speaker + |
| 12 | B325 | W | - | Sleeper reading light + |
| 13 | R108b | W | - | Left surround- sound speaker- |
| 14 | R107b | W | - | Left surround- sound speaker+ |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z16 Br | - Ground |
| 20 W | 20 Br |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R106b W | Right surround- - sound speaker - |
| 2 | B104 W | Indoor overhead - light + |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B325 | W | - | Sleeper reading light + |
| 2 | Z16 | Br | - | Ground |
9.2 Information about Cable Harness Connectors
9.2.1 Top Cover Wiring Harness
9.2.1.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram For the Top Cover
G10 Take the iron point 16
I1_T_LR Connect the top harness to the left top harness 1
T01 Sleeper reading lamp
20 R 20 W 20 W 20 W
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R106b W | Right surround- - sound speaker - |
| 2 | R105b W | Right surround- - sound speaker + |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B104b | W | - | Indoor overhead light + |
| 2 | Z16 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B104a | W | - | Indoor overhead light + |
| 2 | Z16 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z16 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | P202b R | Top cabinet power - + |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | - - | - - |
T02 Right surround-sound speaker
T03 Overhead light
T04 Ceiling lamp-rh
T05 Ceiling lamp-lh
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R108b W | Left surround- - sound speaker - |
| 2 | R107b W | Left surround- - sound speaker+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z16 | Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | B219a | W | - | Profile light + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z16 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | B219b W | - Profile light + |
T06 Left surround-sound speaker
T07 End-outline marker lamp-rh frt
T08 End-outline marker lamp-lh frt
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 | B219 | W | - | Profile light + |
| 9 | P108 | R | - | Awning curtain KL30 |
| 10 | B207 | W | - | Adjust the left rearview mirror to the right |
| 11 | B329 | W | - | Front visor raised |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | B104 | W | - | Indoor overhead light + |
| 15 | R105b | W | - | Right surround- sound speaker + |
| 16 | R106b | W | - | Right surround- sound speaker - |
| 17 | B325 | W | - | Sleeper reading light + |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | B221 | R | - | Rearview mirror heating + |
| 20 21 | - - | - - | - - | - - Awning curtain |
| 22 23 | B214 B202 | W W | - - | closing signal Awning curtain open signal |
| 24 | B308a | W | - | Reading light + |
| 25 | R108b | W | - | Left surround- sound speaker - |
| 26 | R107b | W | - | Left surround- sound speaker + |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | B210 | W | - | Adjust left rearview mirror upward |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z30 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B208 W | Left rearview mirror - left/down adjust the common end |
| 2 | B330 W | Front sunshade - open |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | P202b R | Top cabinet power - + |
9.2.2 Left Ceiling Harness
9.2.2.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram of the Left Ceiling
G11 Take the iron point 6
I_LR_B The left ceiling wiring harness connects to the floor wiring harness
| R106b B104 | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B207 W | - | Adjust the left rearview mirror to the right |
| 2 | B210 W | - | Adjust left rearview mirror upward |
| 3 | B208 W | - | Left rearview mirror left/down adjust the common end |
| 4 | B221 W | - | Rearview mirror heating + |
| 5 | Z30a Br | - | Rearview mirror heating - |
| 6 | - - | - | - |
| Wir Stitch num er | e Line b- color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 R10 | 6b W | - | Right surround- sound speaker - |
| 2 B10 | 4 W | - | Indoor overhead light + |
| 3 - | - | - | - |
| 4 - | - | - | - |
| 5 - | - | - | - |
| 6 - | - | - | - |
| 7 - | - | - | - |
| 8 - | - | - | - |
| 9 B21 | 9 W | - | Profile light + |
| 10 P20 | 2b R | - | Top cabinet power + |
| 11 R10 | 5b W | - | Right surround- sound speaker + |
| 12 B32 | 5 W | - | Sleeper reading light + |
| 13 R10 | 8b W | - | Left surround- sound speaker - |
| 14 R10 | 7b W | - | Left surround- sound speaker + |
| 15 - | - | - | - |
| 16 - | - | - | - |
| 17 - | - | - | - |
| 18 - | - | - | - |
| 19 - | - | - | - |
| 20 - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B329 W | - | rise |
| 2 | B330 W | - | Front sunshade open |
I1_LR_T Connect the left ceiling harness to the top cover harness 1
LR01 Left physical rearview mirror
LR03 Front visor motor
20 W 20 W 20 W
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z30d Br | - Ground |
| 2 | B308a W | - Reading light + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P108 R | - KL30 |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | Z30e Br | - Ground |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | B214 W | - Off signal input |
| 9 | B202 W | - Open signal input |
| 10 | Z30 Br | - Ground |
LR04 Front left reading light
LR05 Awning and sunshade
20 W 20 W
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | B308b | W | - | Reading light + |
| 5 | B307 | W | - | Identification lamp 3+ |
| 6 | B306 | W | - | Identification lamp 2+ |
| 7 | B305 | W | - | Identification lamp 1+ |
| 8 | B317d | R | 12V | 12V power output |
| 9 | B203 | W | - | Adjust right rearview mirror to the right |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | R216 | W | - | MIC1+ |
| 16 17 | R232 R215 | W W | - - | MIC1- MIC2+ |
| 18 | R231 | W | - | MIC2- |
| 19 | B309 | W | - | Sunlight rainfall LIN |
| 20 | B206 | W | - | Adjust right rearview mirror upward |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 27 28 | AH01 AL01 G2E | Y G R | - - - | HMI Private CAN- H HMI private CAN-L Fusioncube B+ |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 Z39 Br | - Ground |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 Z38 Br | - Ground |
9.2.3 Right Ceiling Harness
9.2.3.1 Right Ceiling Wiring Harness Terminal Diagram
G12 Take the iron point 20
G13 Take the iron point 18
I_RR_B The right ceiling harness is connected to the floor harness
22 G 22 G
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 29 | B217 | W | - | Right rearview mirror left/down adjust the public end |
| 30 | - | - | - | - |
| 31 | - | - | - | - |
| 32 | - | - | - | - |
| 33 | - | - | - | - |
| 34 | TL06d | G | - | Intelligent driving CAN-L |
| 35 | TH06d | Y | - | Intelligent driving CAN-H |
| 36 | - | - | - | - |
| 37 | - | - | - | - |
| 38 | G01 | R | - | Front camera KL15 |
| 39 | B221 | R | - | Rearview mirror heating + |
| 40 | - | - | - | - |
| 41 | - | - | - | - |
| 42 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B203 W | Adjust right - rearview mirror to the right |
| 2 | B206 W | Adjust right - rearview mirror upward |
| 3 | B217 W | Right rearview mirror left/down - adjust the public end |
| 4 | B221 R | Rearview mirror - heating + |
| 5 | Z39d Br | Rearview mirror - heating - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z38 | Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | B308b | W | - | Reading light + |
RR02 Front right reading light
RR03 Right physical rear view mirror
RR07 Identification lamp 1
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z38 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | B305 W | Identification lamp - 1+ |
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Voltag- olor e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z38 | Br - | Ground |
| 2 | B306 | W - | Identification lamp 2+ |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B317d R | 12V 12V power output |
| 2 | Z38 Br | - Ground |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | B309 W | Sunlight rainfall - LIN |
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Voltag- olor e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z38 | Br - | Ground |
| 2 | B307 | W - | Identification lamp 3+ |
| 1 | R216 W | - MIC1+ |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | R232 W | - MIC1- |
| 3 | R215 W | - MIC2+ |
| 4 | R231 W | - MIC2- |
RR08 Light rain sensor
RR09 Microphone
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
RR10 Identification lamp 2
RR11 Identification lamp 3
RR12 Front View Intelligent Camera
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | G2E | R | - | B+ |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | TL06d | G | - | Intelligent driving CAN-L |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | G01 | R | - | KL15+ |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | AL01 | G | - | HMI private CAN-L |
| 9 | AH01 | Y | - | HMI Private CAN- H |
| 10 | TH06d | Y | - | Intelligent driving CAN-H |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | Z38 | Br | - | Ground |
| Wire Line Voltag- Stitch numb- Stitch definition color e er | ||
|---|---|---|
| 1 | N107a R | - Power + |
| 2 | N109 W | - signal |
| 3 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B616 W | Front mask switch - signal |
| 2 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | E251c W | - AGS-LIN |
| 2 | O407a R | - AGS-KL30 |
| 3 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| 1 | N107a R | - Power + |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | N102 W | - signal |
| 3 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
9.2.4 Bumper Harness
9.2.4.1 Bumper Harness Terminal Diagram
BU02 Front mask switch
BU05 Active Grille Shutter
BU06 Left Sub Uss
BU07 Left Side Sub Uss
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
BU08 Left Middle Sub Uss
20 R 20 R 20 R 20 W
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | N107a R | - Power + |
| 2 | N103 W | - signal |
| 3 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Lin numb- col er | e Voltag- or e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | TH02a Y | - | ADSCAN1-H |
| 2 | TL02a G | - | ADSCAN1-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | N107a R | - Power + |
| 2 | N104 W | - signal |
| 3 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| 20 W 20 W 20 W |
| 20 W 20 W | 20 W | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Stitch | Wire Lin numb- col er | e Voltag- or e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | TH02b Y | - | ADSCAN1-H |
| 2 | N102 W | - | Left radar signal |
| 3 | N103 W | - | Left center radar signal |
| 4 | N104 W | - | Right center radar signal |
| 5 | - - | - | - |
| 6 | - - | - | - |
| 7 | N107 R | - | Probe power supply |
| 8 | TL02b G | - | ADSCAN1-L |
| 9 | N109 W | - | Left radar signal |
| 10 | N110 W | - | Right radar signal |
| 11 | - - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | N107a R | - Power + |
| 2 | N110 W | - signal |
| 3 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
BU09 Right Middle Sub Uss
BU10 Right Sub Uss
BU11 CAN resistance -120 Ω
BU12 Main Uss
20 Br 20 W
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| 14 | B317f R | 12V Power supply 12V+ |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | B616 W | Front mask switch - signal |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | B317f R | 12V power supply 12V + |
| 6 | Z36 Br | - Ground |
| 7 | O407a R | - AGS-KL30 |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | - - | - - |
| 10 | TH02c Y | - ADSCAN1-H |
| 11 | E251c W | - AGS-LIN |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | - - | - - |
| 14 | TL02c G | - ADSCAN1-L |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | - - | - - |
I_BU_B The bumper harness connects to the floor harness
20 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | L20 | R | - | DC/DC2 power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | L22 | R | - | Total body power supply B+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4H | R | - | Motor fan 1 Power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | L21 | R | - | DC/DC2 power supply |
9.2.5 Floor Wiring Harness
9.2.5.1 Floor Cable Harness Terminal Diagram
B01 Body smart box T1
B02 Body smart box T2
B03 Body smart box T3
B04 Body smart box T4
B05 Body smart box T5
| Stitch | Wire Lin numb- colo er | e Voltag- r e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4S R | - | Motor Fan 2 Power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6 | P106 | R | - | BDCU Power supply B+ |
| 7 | P107 | R | - | Seat power B+ |
| 8 | P108 | R | - | Skylight shade power KL30 |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | Z03 | Br | - | Ground |
| 11 | P111 | R | - | Main drive blower power supply |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | P115 | R | - | Copilot blower power supply |
| 16 | P116 | R | - | Switch class power supply KL30 shift switch/parking switch |
| 17 | P117 | R | - | Rear blower power supply |
| Stitch | Wire Lin numb- colo er | e Voltag- r e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4B R | - | Motor Fan 3 Power supply |
| 14 R | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 18 | R | |
| Wire Line Voltag- Stitch numb- Stitch definition color e er | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P101 R | - | DCM Power supply KL30 |
| 2 | P102 R | - | KL15 Power supply |
| 3 | P103 R | - | ECAS Power supply KL30 |
| 4 | P104 R | - | CDC power B+ |
| 5 | P105 R | - | BDCU Power supply B+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P201 | R | - | Front USB power KL30 |
| 2 | P202 | R | - | Rear USB power KL30 |
B06 Body smart box T6
B07 Body electrical box C1
18 - - - -
B08 Body electrical box C2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 3 | P203 | R - | PTC controller KL30 |
| 4 | P204 | R - | Air conditioning controller KL30 |
| 5 | P205 | R - | Compressor power supply KL30 |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| 7 | P207 | R - | Car TV power supply KL30 |
| 8 | - | - - | - |
| 9 | P209 | R - | Bar pump power KL30 |
| 10 | P210 | R - | Wireless charging power KL30 |
| 11 | - | - - | - |
| 12 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | P308 R | HUD Power KL30- - Delay 15s power off |
| 9 | B201 W | KL30 Power-on - and power-off request |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| 11 | - - | - - |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | P313 R | IVI screen power - supply KL30 |
| 14 | P314 R | CAR screen power - supply KL30 |
| 15 | P315 R | Sleeper switch - group power B+ |
| 16 | P316 R | ESCL Power - supply B+ |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4K R | Right battery water - pump |
| 2 | P4N R | - Right battery fan 1 |
| 3 | P4A R | Left battery water - pump |
| 4 | P4E R | - Left battery fan 1 |
| 1 | B216 | W - | KL15 Power-on and power-off request |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | BL01b | G - | BCANFD1-L |
| 3 | BH01b | Y - | BCANFD1-H |
| 4 | P304 | R - | OBD Interface Power B+ |
| 5 | P305 | R - | IPC panel power B + |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
B09 Body electrical box C3
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
B10 Body electrical box C4
20 R 20 R 20 R 12 R 12 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4P R | Motor water pump - 2 |
| 2 | P4M R | - Right battery fan 2 |
| 3 | P4F R | Motor water pump - 1 |
| 4 | P4D R | - Left battery fan 2 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Q02A R | - Power source |
| 1 | Q02B R | - Power source |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O419b R | - Horn power supply |
| 2 | Z01 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L22 R | Total body power - supply B+ |
B11 Body electrical box C5
B12 Chassis smart box T4
B13 Chassis smart box T5
B14 Woofer horn
B15 Left-low-beam adjustment motor
12 R 14 R
M8
L22
R 4
M8 Q02A R 6 Q02B R 6
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B220a W | - Power source |
| 2 | B302a W | Low light height - gear signal |
| 3 | B416 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z01 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | O303 R | - Left high beam |
| 4 | Z01 Br | - Ground |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | O301 R | - Near left light |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O318a R | - Position light |
| 2 | O317a R | - ADS lamp |
| 3 | O304 R | - Left DRL |
| 4 | B212 W | Left front turn - signal |
| 5 | Z01 Br | - Ground |
| 6 | B422 W | Left front turn - signal fault feedback |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O4152 R | - Battery pack -B+ |
| 2 | O4151 R | - Battery pack -B+ |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Q02A R | - Power source |
| 2 | Z21 Br | - Ground |
B16 Front left combination light
B19 Front left light
B20 Emergency high voltage plug-in 1
B21 Vehicle inverter 1-2
20 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | G5Db R | - KL15 is enabled |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B105 | W | - | Power source |
| 2 | Z11 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z11 | Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | B315a | W | - | Step light + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U504 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | U501 R | - Power source |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | U503 W | Switch signal - 1SW1 |
| 5 | U502 W | Travel signal - 1PWM1 |
| 6 | U506 W | Switch signal - 1SW1 |
| 7 | U505 W | Travel signal - 2PWM2 |
B22 Vehicle inverter X1-1
4 - - - -
B23 Brake signal generator
B24 Washing pot motor
B28 Step light 1
B29 Step light 2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z11 | Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B117 | W | - Right window up + |
| 2 | D304 | W | Unlock motor - positive |
| 3 | D221 | W | - Outer handle LED+ |
| 4 | B316 | W | - Welcome light + |
| 5 | D210 | W | Switch motor reset - signal |
| 6 | D110 | W | Electric suction/ - electric switch motor + |
| 7 | D305 | W | Unlock motor - negative |
| 8 | D207 | W | - Lock condition |
| 9 | B403 | W | External handle - door switch signal |
| 10 | D205a | W | - Full lock signal |
| 11 | B115 | W | Right window down - + |
| 12 | D212 | W | Induction motor - reset signal |
| 13 | D204 | W | - Half-lock signal |
| 14 | D206 | W | Track lock in place - signal |
| 15 | D211 | W | - Anti-clamp signal |
| 16 | D101 | W | Electric suction/ - electric switch motor - |
| 17 | - | - | - - |
| 18 | - | - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z26 | Br | - Ground |
| 2 | B311 | W | External toolbox - light + |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - - |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | BL02b | G | - BCANFD2-L |
| 4 | BH02b | Y | - BCANFD2-H |
| 5 | Z11 | Br | - Ground |
| 6 | O416 | R | - Power KL30 |
2 B315b W - Step light +
B30 Toolbox light
B31 Low speed alarm module
B32 Sliding door hinge
20 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 19 | - | - | - - |
| 20 | B810 | R | Bluetooth +NFC - power supply |
| 21 | - | - | - - |
| 22 | D220 | Br | - DCM signal ground |
| 23 | B809 | W | - Bluetooth ID |
| 24 | BH06b | Y | - BCAN6-H |
| 25 | BL06b | G | - BCAN6-L |
| 26 | Z11 | Br | - Common ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- c er | Line Voltag olor e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B525 | W - | Washing liquid level switch |
| 2 | Z07 | Br - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O318b | R | - Position light |
| 2 | O317b | R | - ADS lamp |
| 3 | O306 | R | - Right DRL |
| 4 | B211 | W | Right front turn - signal |
| 5 | Z07 | Br | - Ground |
| 6 | B402 | W | Right front turn - signal fault feedback |
| Stitch | Wire numb- c er | Line Voltag olor e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z07 | Br - | Ground |
| 2 | O419a | R - | Horn power supply |
B33 Front right combination light
B34 Washing pot level sensor
B35 Tweeter horn
B36 Front right light
20 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z07 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | O309 R | - Right high beam |
| 4 | Z07 Br | - Ground |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | O302 R | - Right low light |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B436f | Br | - sensorily |
| 2 | B411 | W | Outdoor - temperature signal |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B511 | W | - Wiper return signal |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | - | - | - - |
| 4 | Z11 | Br | - Ground |
| 5 | B108 | W | - Wiper low speed + |
| 6 | B112 | W | - Wiper speed + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B220b W | Low light height - power supply |
| 2 | B302b W | - Gear signal |
| 3 | B416 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | E125 | R | - Power Supply 2 |
| 2 | E124 | R | - Power Supply 1 |
| 3 | E275 | Br | - Ground 1 |
B37 Right low-beam adjustment motor
B38 Ambient temp sensor
B39 Wiper motor
B40 Accelerator pedal
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 4 E237 W | - Signal 1 |
| 5 E236 Br | - Ground 2 |
| 6 E239 W | - Signal 2 |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | K102 | W | - | Former SOV- |
| 3 | K103 | W | - | After SOV- |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | K105 | W | - | Main blast PWM |
| 6 | K106 | W | - | Main blast feedback |
| 7 | K107 | W | 12V | Main internal and external circulation + |
| 8 | K108 | W | - | Main internal and external circulation - |
| 9 | K109 | W | 12V | Main heating and cooling motor + |
| 10 | K110 | W | - | Main heating and cooling motor - |
| 11 | K111 | W | 12V | Master defrost + |
| 12 | K112 | W | - | Master defrost - |
| 13 | K113 | W | 12V | Main blow foot + |
| 14 | K114 | W | - | Master blow foot - |
| 15 | K115 | W | - | Main defrosting feedback |
| 16 | K116 | W | - | Main blow foot feedback |
| 17 | K117 | W | - | Actuator carbon film 5V+ |
| 18 | K118 | W | - | Main evaporation sensor 5V+ |
| 19 | K119 | W | - | Main outlet air temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 20 | Z02 | Br | - | Ground |
| 21 | BH02a | Y | - | BCANFD2-H |
| 22 | BL02a | G | - | BCANFD2-L |
| 23 | K123 | W | 12V | Auxiliary internal and external cycle motor + |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 E154 W | Parking switch - normally on - highly effective |
| 2 P116a R | Switching power - supply |
| 3 Z10 Br | - Ground |
| 4 E157 W | Brake open - normally closed - low effective |
B41 Brake pedal switch
B42 Air conditioning controller A
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 24 | K124 | W | - | Auxiliary internal and external cycle motor - |
| 25 | K125 | W | 12V | Auxiliary heating and cooling motor + |
| 26 | K126 | W | - | Auxiliary heating and cooling motor - |
| 27 | K127 | W | - | Sub-defrosting + |
| 28 | K128 | W | - | Secondary defrosting - |
| 29 | K129 | W | 12V | Secondary blow foot + |
| 30 | K130 | W | - | Deputy blow foot - |
| 31 | K131 | W | - | Secondary defrosting feedback |
| 32 | K132 | W | - | Secondary foot feedback |
| 33 | K133 | W | - | Secondary evaporation temperature sensor |
| 34 | K134 | W | - | Secondary outlet air temperature sensor |
| 35 | K135 | W | - | sensorily |
| 36 | K136 | W | - | Secondary blast PWM |
| 37 | K137 | W | - | Secondary blast feedback |
| 38 | K138 | R | 12V | Temperature sensor 12+ |
| 39 | - | - | - | - |
| 40 | P204a | R | - | Power KL30 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P204e R | - Power KL30 |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | K203 W | - Rear blast PWM |
| 4 | K204 W | Rear blast - feedback |
| 5 | K205 W | After cooling motor 12V + |
| 6 | K206 W | After cooling the - motor - |
| 7 | K207 W | Post evaporation - temperature sensor |
| 8 | K208 W | Rear outlet - temperature sensor |
| 9 | K209 W | Interior - temperature sensor - Front |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| 11 | - - | - - |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | Z02 Br | - Ground |
| 14 | K214 W | Temperature - sensor signal inside the car |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
B43 Air conditioner Controller B
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 18 | K218 | W | - | Front left air conditioning inner and outer loop feedback signal |
| 19 | K219 | W | - | Front right air conditioning inside and outside loop feedback signal |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | K222 | Y | - | Air conditioning CAN-H |
| 23 | K223 | G | - | Air conditioning CAN-L |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B201 | W | - | KL30 Power-on and power-off request |
| 2 | B202 | W | - | Awning curtain open switch signal |
| 3 | B203 | W | - | Adjust right rearview mirror to the right |
| 4 | B204 | W | - | Bar locker lighting + |
| 5 | B205 | W | - | Right charging port motor - lock |
| 6 | B206 | W | - | Adjust right rearview mirror upward |
| 7 | B207 | W | - | Adjust the left rearview mirror to the right |
| 8 | B208 | W | - | Left rearview mirror left/down adjust the common end |
| 9 | B209 | W | - | Right charging port motor - Unlock |
| 10 | B210 | W | - | Adjust left rearview mirror upward |
| 11 | B211 | W | - | Right front turn signal |
| 12 | B212 | W | - | Left front turn signal |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O75 | R | - | Car refrigerator power KL30 |
| 2 | Z25 | Br | - | Ground |
B45 Car refrigerator
B46 Body controller BDCU-2
18 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color | ag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 13 | - | - | - - |
| 14 | B214 | W | Awning curtain - close switch signal |
| 15 | B215 | W | - DCDC3 Enable + |
| 16 | B216 | W | KL15 Power-on - and power-off request |
| 17 | B217 | W | Right rearview mirror left/down - adjust the public end |
| 18 | B218 | W | - Backlight + |
| 19 | B219 | W | - Top profile light + |
| 20 | B220 | W | low-beam - adjustment motor + |
| 21 | B221 | W | Rearview mirror - heating + |
| 22 | - | - | - - |
| 23 | B223 | W | Left center rear - turn signal |
| 24 | B224 | W | Right center rear - turn signal |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | G01n | R | - | KL15 power signal feedback |
| 5 | B305 | W | - | Identification lamp 1+ |
| 6 | B306 | W | - | Identification lamp 2+ |
| 7 | B307 | W | - | Identification lamp 3+ |
| 8 | B308 | W | - | Reading light + |
| 9 | B309 | W | - | Sunlight rainfall LIN |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | B311 | W | - | External toolbox light + |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | B314 | W | - | Block key work indicator + |
| 15 | B315 | W | - | Step light + |
| 16 | B316 | W | - | Welcome light + |
| 17 | B317 | R | 12V | 12V power output |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | B325 | W | - | Sleeper reading light + |
| 26 | B326 | W | - | Hazard warning switch indicator light |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | - | - | - | - |
| 29 | B329 | W | - | Front sunshade closed |
| 30 | B330 | W | - | Front sunshade open |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color | ag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - - |
| 2 | B302 | W | Low light height - gear signal output |
| 3 | - | - | - - |
B47 BDCU-3
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Voltag- color e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 31 | B331 | W - | Left charging port motor - lock |
| 32 | B332 | W - | Left charging port motor - Unlock |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 13 | B413 | W | - | Low pressure PT sensor - pressure signal |
| 14 | B414 | W | - | Sensor Power supply 5V+ high/ Low pressure/ temperature sensor |
| 15 | B415 | W | - | Left/right turn signal switch |
| 16 | B416 | Br | - | Analog switch (light/wiper) public area |
| 17 | BL01 | G | - | BCANFD1-L |
| 18 | BL02 | G | - | BCANFD2-L |
| 19 | BL03 | G | - | BCANFD3-L |
| 20 | TL03 | G | - | GWCANFD3-L |
| 21 | B421 | W | - | Brake pad wear alarm signal |
| 22 | B422 | W | - | Left front turn signal fault feedback |
| 23 | B423 | W | - | Illegal off-seat switch 1 |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | B425 | W | - | Seat belt switch |
| 26 | H01 | W | - | Differential lock status feedback |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | - | - | - | - |
| 29 | - | - | - | - |
| 30 | B430 | W | - | Exhaust temperature cgq signal |
| 31 | B431 | W | - | Inlet temperature signal |
| 32 | B432 | W | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Voltag- color e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B401 | W - | Wash switch |
| 2 | B402 | W - | Right front turn signal fault feedback |
| 3 | B403 | W - | The door handle flicks the switch |
| 4 | B404 | W - | Main drive shade lowering switch |
| 5 | B405 | W - | Toolbox switch |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| 7 | - | - - | - |
| 8 | - | - - | - |
| 9 | - | - - | - |
| 10 | B410 | W - | Effluent temperature signal |
| 11 | B411 | W - | Outdoor temperature signal |
| 12 | B412 | W - | Low pressure/ temperature sensor |
B48 BDCU-4
| Wire Stitch numb- er | Line Voltag- color e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|
| 33 B433 | W - | High pressure PT sensor - pressure signal |
| 34 B434 | W - | Wiper switch signal |
| 35 B435 | H W - | igh beam/passing light switch |
| 36 B436 | Br - | sensorily |
| 37 BH01 | Y - | BCANFD1-H |
| 38 BH02 | Y - | BCANFD2-H |
| 39 BH03 | Y - | BCANFD3-H |
| 40 TH03 | Y - | GWCANFD3-H |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 | K222a | Y | - | Air conditioning CAN-H |
| 9 | Z02 | Br | - | PTC grounding |
| 10 | K218 | W | - | Air conditioning inside and outside circulation feedback signal |
| 11 | K135a | W | - | sensorily |
| 12 | P111 | R | - | Blast power supply + |
| 13 | K113 | W | 12V | Blower motor 12V+ |
| 14 | K106 | W | - | Blower feedback |
| 15 | K105 | W | - | Blower speed regulation PWM |
| 16 | H03 | W | - | High voltage interlock in- air conditioning from sleeper |
| 17 | H02 | W | - | High voltage interlock out- to passenger air conditioning |
| 18 | K111 | W | 12V | Defrosting motor 12V+ |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | K114 | W | - | Blower foot motor 12V- |
| 21 | K108 | W | - | Internal and external cycle motor 12V- |
| 22 | K107 | W | 12V | Internal and external cycle motor 12V+ |
| 23 | K110 | W | - | Heating and cooling motor 12V- |
| 24 | K109 | W | 12V | Heating and cooling motor 12V+ |
| Wire Stitch numb- er | Line Voltag- color e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|
| 1 K119 | W - | Outlet air temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 2 K118 | E W - | vaporation sensor 5V+ |
| 3 K116 | W - | Blowfoot actuator feedback |
| 4 K115 | D W - | efrosting actuator feedback |
| 5 P203a | R - | PTC controller KL30 |
| 6 K117a | W - | Actuator carbon film 5V+ |
| 7 K223a | G - | Air conditioning CAN-L |
B52 Left side air conditioner
20 R
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 25 K112 W | Defrosting motor - 12V- |
| 26 Z02 Br | Blast power supply - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3 | K132 | W | - | Blowfoot actuator feedback |
| 4 | K131 | W | - | Defrosting actuator feedback |
| 5 | P203b | R | - | PTC controller KL30 |
| 6 | K117b | W | - | Actuator carbon film 5V+ |
| 7 | K223b | G | - | Air conditioning CAN-L |
| 8 | K222b | Y | - | Air conditioning CAN-H |
| 9 | Z10 | Br | - | PTC grounding |
| 10 | K219 | W | - | Air conditioning inside and outside circulation feedback signal |
| 11 | K135b | W | - | sensorily |
| 12 | P115 | R | - | Blast power supply + |
| 13 | K129 | W | 12V | Blower motor 12V+ |
| 14 | K137 | W | - | Blower feedback |
| 15 | K136 | W | - | Blower speed regulation PWM |
| 16 | H02 | W | - | High voltage interlock in- air conditioning from the main driver |
| 17 | E208 | W | - | High voltage interlock out- to VDC |
| 18 | K127 | W | - | Defrosting motor 12V+ |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | K130 | W | - | Blower foot motor 12V- |
| 21 | K124 | W | - | Internal and external cycle motor 12V- |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 R104b W | - Left woofer - |
| 2 - - | - - |
| 3 - - | - - |
| 4 R103b W | - Left woofer+ |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 K134 W | Outlet air - temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 2 K133 W | Evaporation sensor - 5V+ |
B53 Left woofer
B54 Right side air conditioner
20 R 14 Br 20 W
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 22 | K123 | W 12 | Internal and V external cycle motor 12V+ |
| 23 | K126 | W - | Heating and cooling motor 12V- |
| 24 | K125 | W 12 | Heating and V cooling motor 12V+ |
| 25 | K128 | W - | Defrosting motor 12V- |
| 26 | Z10 | Br - | Blast power supply - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R102b W | - Right woofer - |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | R101b W | - Right woofer + |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z11 | Br - | Ground |
| 2 | K223c | G - | Air conditioning CAN-L |
| 3 | K222c | Y - | Air conditioning CAN-H |
| 4 | K138c | R 12 | 12V power supply V + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U901 R | ECAS Air pressure - sensor public power supply |
| 2 | U902 W | Right rear axle - pressure signal |
| 3 | U903 W | Front axle pressure - signal |
| 4 | U904 W | Suspension solenoid valve - public power supply |
B55 Fragrance
B56 Right woofer
B57 ECAS X2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 5 | U905 | W | - | Left rear axle height signal |
| 6 | U906 | W | - | Left rear axle pressure signal |
| 7 | U907 | Br | - | sensorily |
| 8 | U908 | W | - | Right rear axle height signal |
| 9 | U909 | W | - | Front axle height signal |
| 10 | U910 | W | - | Left rear solenoid valve |
| 11 | U911 | W | - | Central solenoid valve |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | U913 | W | - | Right rear solenoid valve |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | U915 | W | - | Front axle solenoid valve |
| Stitch | Wire numb- c er | Line V olor | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 7 | P103 | R | - | ECAS Power supply KL30 |
| 8 | U808 | W | - | Remote control CLOCK |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | P102m | R | - | ECAS Power supply KL15 |
| 11 | U811 | W | - | Remote control DATA |
| 12 | Z10 | Br | - | ECAS grounding |
| 13 | U813 | W | - | Remote control power supply |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | U815 | Br | - | Remote control grounding |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- c er | Line V olor | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
| 1 | U813 | W | - | Remote control power supply |
| 2 | U815 | Br | - | Remote control grounding |
| 3 | U808 | W | - | Remote control CLOCK |
| 4 | U811 | W | - | Remote control DATA |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | TL08b | G | - | Chassis CAN8-L |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | TH08b | Y | - | Chassis CAN8-H |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
B58 ECAS X1
B59 Remote control unit
| Wire Line Stitch numb- colo er | Voltag- Stitch definition r e |
|---|---|
| 5 - - | - - |
| 6 - - | - - |
| 7 - - | - - |
| 8 - - | - - |
| 9 - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B501 | W | - | DCDC3 fault alarm |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | D205b | W | - | Door full lock signal |
| 6 | B506 | W | - | Right window drop switch |
| 7 | B507 | W | - | Left window drop switch |
| 8 | B508 | W | - | Bar locker switch |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | B510 | W | - | Horn switch |
| 11 | B511 | W | - | Wiper return switch |
| 12 | BL06 | G | - | BCAN6-L |
| 13 | BL05 | G | - | ESCL-BCAN5-L |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | TBP | W | - | BDCU-TGW 100 Mbit Ethernet |
| 17 | TBN | G | - | BDCU-TGW 100 Mbit Ethernet |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | B519 | W | - | Central control lock switch |
| 20 | B520 | W | - | Main drive visor lift switch |
| 21 | B521 | W | - | Right window lift switch |
| 22 | B522 | W | - | Left window lift switch |
| 23 | B523 | W | - | Toolbox reset |
| 24 | B524 | W | - | signal Hazard warning switch |
| 25 | B525 | W | - | Washing liquid level switch |
| 26 | BH06 | Y | - | BCAN6-H |
| 27 | BH05 | Y | - | ESCL-BCAN5-H |
| 28 | - | - | - | - |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- colo er | Voltag- Stitch definition r e |
|---|---|
| 1 P210a R | - Power KL30 |
| 2 - - | - - |
| 3 - - | - - |
| 4 Z11 Br | - Ground |
| 5 - - | - - |
| 6 - - | - - |
| 7 - - | - - |
| 8 - - | - - |
B60 Wireless charging
B61 BDCU-5
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 11 | B711 | W | - | External toolbox motor unlock |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | B722 | W | - | External toolbox motor lock |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vol color | tag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | R116b | R 1 | Ambient light 12V 2V power supply |
| 2 | R201a | W | - Ambient Light LIN |
| 3 | Z05 | Br | - Ground |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | B606 | W | - | Turn to oil level detection switch |
| 7 | BL07 | G | - | BCAN7-L |
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vol color | tag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - - |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | - | - | - - |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| 5 | - | - | - - |
| 6 | - | - | - - |
| 7 | - | - | - - |
| 8 | - | - | - - |
| 9 | - | - | - - |
| 10 | - | - | - - |
B62 Ambient light 1
B63 BDCU-6B
B64 BDCU-6A
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | B614 | W | - | Trailer ABS indicator light |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | B616 | W | - | Front cover unlocked signal |
| 17 | B424 | W | - | Sliding door switch |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | BH07 | Y | - | BCAN7-H |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 7 | Z05 | Br - | Ground |
| 8 | B108 | W - | Wiper low speed power + |
| 9 | P106 | R - | BDCU-B+2 |
| 10 | - | - - | - |
| 11 | - | - - | - |
| 12 | B112 | W - | Wiper high speed power + |
| 13 | B113 | W - | Left window down + |
| 14 | B114 | W - | Left window up + |
| 15 | B115 | W - | Right window down + |
| 16 | Z05 | Br - | Ground |
| 17 | B117 | W - | Right window up + |
| 18 | - | - - | - |
| r | |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | P105 | R | - | BDCU-B+1 |
| 4 | B104 | W | - | Ceiling light power + |
| 5 | B105 | W | - | Washing motor power + |
| 6 | B106 | W | - | Interwheel lock solenoid valve + |
| 1 | Z05 | Br - | Ground |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | - | - - | - |
| 3 | P201a | R - | Front USB power KL30 |
B65 BDCU-1
B67 Charging usb interface
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 11 | - | - | - - |
| 12 | Z05 | Br | - Ground |
| 13 | - | - | - - |
| 14 | - | - | - - |
| 15 16 | - - | - - | - - - - |
| 17 | - | - | - - |
| 18 | - | - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | K138b R | 12V 12V+ power supply |
| 2 | Z26 Br | - Ground |
| 3 | K214 W | - Temperature signal |
| 4 | K135e W | - Temperature signal |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U201 | G | 2M modulator - CAN-L |
| 2 | U202 | G | - ESC-CAN-L |
| 3 | U203 | R | - 2M modulator + |
| 4 | U204 | Y | 2M modulator - CAN-H |
| 5 | U205 | Y | - ESC-CAN-H |
| 6 | U206 | R | ESC Power Supply - + |
| 7 | U207 | Br | - 2M modulator - |
| 8 | U208 | Br | ESC Power Supply - - |
| 9 | - | - | - - |
| 10 | U210 | W | Front left ABS - solenoid valve -AV valve |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | TL08a G | - Chassis CAN8-L |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | TH08a Y | - Chassis CAN8-H |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | G5Da R | - EBS-KL15 |
| 7 | G2A R | - EBS-KL15 |
| 8 | U108 R | - EBS KL30-2 |
| 9 | U109 R | Power supply - KL30-A |
| 10 | - - | - - |
B68 Rear interior temperature sensor
B69 EBS X1
B70 EBS X2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 11 | U211 | W | - | Front left ABS solenoid valve -EV valve |
| 12 | U212 | W | - | Front left ABS solenoid valve ground |
| 13 | U213 | W | - | Front right ABS solenoid valve -AV valve |
| 14 | U214 | W | - | Front right ABS solenoid valve -EV valve |
| 15 | U215 | W | - | Front right ABS solenoid valve ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 7 | U307 W | Trailer valve - - pressure sensor power supply |
| 8 | U308 W | Trailer valve - - Pressure sensor signal |
| 9 | U309 Br | Trailer valve - - Pressure sensor grounded |
| 1 | U401 G | 1M modulator - CAN-L |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | U402 G | Steering Angle - internal CAN-L |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | U404 Y | 1M modulator - CAN-H |
| 5 | U405 Y | Steering Angle - internal CAN-H |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | U407 R | - 1M modulator + |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | U409 Br | Steering Angle - ground |
| 10 | U410 Br | - 1M modulator - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U301 | W | - | Trailer valve AV valve |
| 2 | U302 | W | - | Trailer valve EV valve |
| 3 | U303 | R | - | Trailer valve power supply |
| 4 | U304 | Br | - | Trailer valve grounding |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
B71 EBS X3
B72 EBS X4
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 11 | - | - | - - |
| 12 | U412 | R | Steering Angle - power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | R101 | W | - | Right high woofer + |
| 2 | R102 | W | - | Right high woofer - |
| 3 | R103 | W | - | Left high woofer + |
| 4 | R104 | W | - | Left high woofer - |
| 5 | R105 | W | - | Right squawker/ surround-sound speaker + |
| 6 | R106 | W | - | Right squawker/ surround-sound speaker - |
| 7 | R107 | W | - | Left squawker/ surround-sound speaker + |
| 8 | R108 | W | - | Left squawker/ surround-sound speaker - |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | R116 | R | 12V | Ambient light 12V power supply |
| 17 | P102d | R | - | KL15 Power supply |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | Z04 | Br | - | CDC grounding |
| 20 | P104 | R | - | CDC power B+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U501 | R | - Power source |
| 2 | U502 | W | Travel signal - 1PWM1 |
| 3 | U503 | W | Switch signal - 2SW2 |
| 4 | U504 | Br | - Ground |
| 5 | U505 | W | Travel signal - 2PWM2 |
| 6 | U506 | W | Switch signal - 2SW2 |
B73 EBS X5
B74 Cockpit domain controller 1
| Wire Lin Stitch numb- col er | e Voltag- Stitch definition or e |
|---|---|
| 24 R224 W | TV left channel - input - |
| 25 R225 W | TV right channel - input signal |
| 26 R226 W | TV right channel - input - |
| 27 - - | - - |
| 28 - - | - - |
| 29 R229 R | The CAR screen 12V wakes up the 12V power supply |
| 30 R230 R | IPC wakes up 12V power supply 12V |
| 31 R231 W | - MIC2- |
| 32 R232 W | - MIC1- |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | R201 | W | - Ambient Light LIN |
| 2 | IL01a | G | - INTCANFD1-L |
| 3 | TL05 | G | - GWCANFD5-L |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| 5 | - | - | - - |
| 6 | - | - | - - |
| 7 | - | - | - - |
| 8 | R208 | W | Front axle pressure - signal |
| 9 | R209 | W | Rear axle pressure - signal |
| 10 | - | - | - - |
| 11 | R211 | Br | - Barosensorily |
| 12 | - | - | - - |
| 13 | R213 | R | The IVI screen 12V wakes up the 12V power supply |
| 14 | - | - | - - |
| 15 | R215 | W | - MIC2+ |
| 16 | R216 | W | - MIC1+ |
| 17 | - | - | - - |
| 18 | IH01a | Y | - INTCANFD1-H |
| 19 | TH05 | Y | - GWCANFD5-H |
| 20 | - | - | - - |
| 21 | - | - | - - |
| 22 | - | - | - - |
| 23 | R223 | W | TV left channel - input signal |
| Wire Lin Stitch numb- col er | e Voltag- Stitch definition or e |
|---|---|
| 1 - - | - - |
| 2 TH01 Y | - GWCANFD1-H |
| 3 TH02 Y | - ADSCAN1-H |
| 4 TH03 Y | - GWCANFD3-H |
| 5 TH04 Y | - GWCANFD4-H |
| 6 TH05 Y | - GWCANFD5-H |
| 7 TH06 Y | Intelligent driving - CAN-H |
| 8 TH07 Y | - GWCANFD7-H |
| 9 TH08 Y | - Chassis CAN8-H |
| 10 TH09 Y | - GWCANFD9-H |
B75 Cockpit domain controller 2
B76 T-gateway A
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | Z04 | Br | - | Ground |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | TL01 | G | - | GWCANFD1-L |
| 17 | TL02 | G | - | ADSCAN1-L |
| 18 | TL03 | G | - | GWCANFD3-L |
| 19 | TL04 | G | - | GWCANFD4-L |
| 20 | TL05 | G | - | GWCANFD5-L |
| 21 | TL06 | G | - | Intelligent driving CAN-L |
| 22 | TL07 | G | - | GWCANFD7-L |
| 23 | TL08 | G | - | Chassis CAN8-L |
| 24 | TL09 | G | - | GWCANFD9-L |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | Z04 | Br | - | Ground |
| 28 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | Z04 Br | - Ground |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| 11 | - - | - - |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | Z04 Br | - Ground |
| 14 | Z04 Br | - Ground |
| 15 | G5Dd R | - KL15+2 |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| 21 | Z04 Br | - Ground |
| 22 | - - | - - |
| 23 | - - | - - |
| 24 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | G2H | R | - | B1+ |
| 2 | O420 | R | - | B2+ |
| 3 | G01m | R | - | KL15+1 |
| 4 | Z04 | Br | - | Ground |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 1 | TCN G | - CDC Ethernet |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | TCP W | - CDC Ethernet |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | TBP W | - BDCU Ethernet |
| 6 | TBN G | - BDCU Ethernet |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | - - | - - |
B77 T-gateway B
B78 T-GW Ethernet
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
| 14 R | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | ||||
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | TRP W | - | Ethernet received signal + |
| 2 | TRN G | - | Ethernet received signal - |
| 3 | TTP W | - | Ethernet sends signal + |
| 4 | TTN G | - | Ethernet sends signals - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - - |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | - | - | - - |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| 5 | P203c | R | PTC controller - KL30 |
| 6 | - | - | - - |
| 7 | K223c | G | Air conditioning - CAN-L |
| 8 | K222c | Y | Air conditioning - CAN-H |
| 9 | Z25 | Br | - PTC grounding |
| 10 | - | - | - - |
| 11 | K135c | W | - sensorily |
| 12 | P117 | R | Blast power supply - + |
| 13 | - | - | - - |
| 14 | K204 | W | - Blower feedback |
| 15 | K203 | W | Blower speed - regulation PWM |
| 16 | H04 | W | High voltage interlock in- - compressor from chassis |
| 17 | H03 | W | High voltage - interlock out- to left air conditioning |
| 18 | - | - | - - |
| 19 | - | - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z25 Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | O62 R | - | 12V car power supply |
B79 T-GW-OBD Ethernet
B80 12V car power supply
B81 Sleeper air conditioner
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Voltag color e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 20 | - | - - | - |
| 21 | K208 | W - | Outlet air temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 22 | K207 | W - | Evaporator temperature 5V+ |
| 23 | K206 | W - | Hybrid actuator drives motor 12V- |
| 24 | K205 | W 12V | Hybrid actuator drives motor 12V+ |
| 25 | - | - - | - |
| 26 | Z25 | Br - | Blast power supply - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | P101b | R | - | DCM Power supply KL30 |
| 26 | P101a | R | - | DCM Power supply KL30 |
| 6 R |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Voltag color e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - - | - |
| 2 | - | - - | - |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | BH03b | Y - | BCANFD3-H |
| 5 | BL03b | G - | BCANFD3-L |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| 7 | - | - - | - |
| 8 | - | - - | - |
| 9 | - | - - | - |
| 10 | - | - - | - |
| 11 | - | - - | - |
| 12 | Z15 | Br - | Ground |
| 13 | Z15 | Br - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z11 | Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | P202a | R | - | Rear USB power KL30 |
B82 Gated module DCM-A
B83 Multi-media usb interface
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | D220 Br | - DCM signal ground |
| 21 | D304 W | - Door lock motor + |
| 22 | D305 W | - Door lock motor - |
| 1 | - - | - | - |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | D205 W | - | Door full lock signal |
| 3 | D204 W | - | Door half-lock signal |
| 4 | - - | - | - |
| 5 | - - | - | - |
| 6 | - - | - | - |
| 7 | D212 W | - | Induction motor reset signal |
| 8 | D210 W | - | Switch motor reset signal |
| 9 | - - | - | - |
| 10 | D110 W | - | Electric suction/ electric switch motor + |
| 11 | D101 W | - | Electric suction/ electric switch motor - |
| 12 | - - | - | - |
| 13 | D221 W | - | Door handle indicator + |
| 14 | - - | - | - |
| 15 | - - | - | - |
| 16 | D207 W | - | Central control door lock status signal |
| 17 | D206 W | - | Track lock in place signal |
| 18 | D211 W | - | Anti-clamp signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P315 R | - Power B+ |
| 2 | P102f R | - KL15 Power supply |
| 3 | Z10 Br | - Ground |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | BH03d Y | - BCANFD3-H |
| 6 | BL03d G | - BCANFD3-L |
| 7 | B218b W | Backlight power - supply PWM+ |
| 8 | - - | - - |
B84 Gated module DCM-B
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
B85 Sleeper switch devices
B86 Emergency high voltage plug-in 2
20 R 20 Br 20 R 2 O4152 18 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O4152 | R - | Battery pack -B+ |
| 2 | O4153 | R - | Battery pack -B+ |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | TCN G | - CDC Ethernet |
| 2 | TCP W | - CDC Ethernet |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B722 | W - | External toolbox motor lock |
| 2 | B711 | W - | External toolbox motor unlock |
| 3 | B523 | W - | External toolbox reset signal |
| 4 | Z26 | Br - | Ground |
| 5 | - | - - | - |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B113 W | Left window down - + |
| 2 | B114 W | - Left window up + |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B405 | W - | Toolbox switch |
| 2 | Z26 | Br - | Ground |
B87 External toolbox
B88 Toolbox switch
B89 CDC Ethernet
B90 Left glass regulator
B91 Vehicle inverter 2-2
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Q02B R | - Power source |
| 2 | Z06 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | R225 | W | - | TV right channel input signal |
| 2 | R226 | W | - | TV right channel input - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | G5Dc R | - KL15 is enabled |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | R223 | W | - | TV left channel input signal |
| 2 | R224 | W | - | TV left channel input - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P207 R | Car TV power - supply KL30 |
| 2 | Z26 Br | - Ground |
B92 Vehicle inverter 2-1
B93 TV power interface
B94 TV right speaker
B95 TV left speaker
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | O74 | R | - | 12V power supply + |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | O71 | Y | - | Left turn signal output + |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | O70 | G | - | Right turn signal output + |
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | Z10 | Br | - | Ground |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | BH07 | Y | - | BCAN7-H |
| 22 | BL07 | G | - | BCAN7-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z01 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | O318 R | - Sign light + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z07 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | O318 R | - Sign light + |
B96 Trailer turn signal controller
B97 Left front sign light
B98 Right front sign light
G22 Take the iron point 1
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z01 | Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z03 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z07 | Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z04 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z02 | Br | - Ground |
G23 Take the iron point 7
G24 Take the iron point 2
G25 Take the iron point 3
G26 Take the iron point 4
G27 Take the iron point 5
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z05 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z15 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z11 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z06 Br | - Ground |
| 1 | Z26 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z10 | Br | - | Ground |
| Z21 Z25 | ||
|---|---|---|
G28 Take the iron point 11
G29 Take the iron point 10
G31 Take the iron point 15
G32 Take the iron point 22
G33 Take the iron. 21
8 Br
12 Br
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z21 | Br - | Ground |
| 1 | Z25 | Br - | Ground |
| 1 | B208 W | Left rearview mirror - left/down adjust the common end |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | B330 W | Front sunshade - open |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | P202b R | Top cabinet power - + |
| 8 | B219 W | - Profile light + |
| 9 | P108 R | Awning curtain - KL30+ |
| 10 | B207 W | Left rear-view - adjustment to right |
| 11 | B329 W | Front sunshade - closed |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | H18 R | 12V Camera heating + |
| 14 | B104 W | - Ceiling light + |
| 15 | R105b W | Right surround- - sound speaker + |
| 16 | R106b W | Right surround- - sound speaker - |
| 17 | B325 W | Sleeper reading - light + |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - - | - |
| 2 | B616 | W - | Front mask switch signal |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | - | - - | - |
| 5 | B317f | R 12 | 12V power supply V + |
| 6 | Z01 | Br - | Ground |
| 7 | O407a | R - | AGS-KL30 |
| 8 | - | - - | - |
| 9 | - | - - | - |
| 10 | TH02 | Y - | ADSCAN1-H |
| 11 | E251c | W - | AGS-LIN |
| 12 | - | - - | - |
| 13 | - | - - | - |
| 14 | TL02 | G - | ADSCAN1-L |
| 15 | - | - - | - |
| 16 | - | - - | - |
| 17 | - | - - | - |
| 18 | - | - - | - |
| 19 | - | - - | - |
| 20 | - | - - | - |
I_B_BU The floor harness is connected to the front harness
I_B_LR Connect the floor harness to the left ceiling harness
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition 20 R 22 Y 20 R 20 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 19 | B221 R | Rearview mirror - heating + |
| 20 | O501 R | 12V Left screen 12V+ |
| 21 | - - | - - |
| 22 | B214 W | Awning curtain - close switch |
| 23 | B202 W | The awning curtain - opens the switch |
| 24 | B308a W | - Reading light + |
| 25 | R108b W | Left surround- - sound speaker - |
| 26 | R107b W | Left surround- - sound speaker + |
| 27 | O502 R | 12V Left screen 12V+ |
| 28 | B210 W | Adjust left rearview - mirror upward |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6 | B306 | W | - | Identification lamp 2+ |
| 7 | B305 | W | - | Identification lamp 1+ |
| 8 | B317d | R | 12V | 12V power output |
| 9 | B203 | W | - | Adjust right rearview mirror to the right |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | R216 | W | - | MIC1+ |
| 16 | R232 | W | - | MIC1- |
| 17 | R215 | W | - | MIC2+ |
| 18 | R231 | W | - | MIC2- |
| 19 | B309 | W | - | Sunlight rainfall LIN |
| 20 21 22 | B206 - - | W - - | - - - | Adjust right rearview mirror upward - - |
| 23 24 25 26 | O502 TL01 TH01 AH01 | R G Y Y | 12V - - - | Left screen 12V+ GWCANFD1-L GWCANFD1-H HMI Private CAN- H |
| 27 | AL01 | G | - | HMI private CAN-L |
| 28 | G2E | R | - | Fusioncube B+ |
| 29 | B217 | W | - | Right rearview mirror left/down adjust the public end |
| 30 | - | - | - | - |
| 31 | - | - | - | - |
| 32 | - | - | - | - |
| 33 | O501 | R | 12V | Left screen 12V+ |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | P102i R | Right electronic - rear view mirror KL15+ |
| 4 | B308b W | - Reading light + |
| 5 | B307 W | Identification lamp - 3+ |
I_B_RR Connect the floor harness to the right ceiling harness
20 R 20 R 20 R 22 Y 22 Y
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 34 | TL06d G | Intelligent driving - CAN-L |
| 35 | TH06d Y | Intelligent driving - CAN-H |
| 36 | - - | - - |
| 37 | H18 R | 12V Camera heating + |
| 38 | G01 R | - Front camera KL15 |
| 39 | B221 R | Rearview mirror - heating + |
| 40 | - - | - - |
| 41 | - - | - - |
| 42 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 13 | - - | - - |
| 14 | - - | - - |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| 21 | - - | - - |
| 22 | - - | - - |
| 23 | - - | - - |
| 24 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P107 R | - Seat power B+ |
| 2 | B423 W | Off seat switch - signal |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | G5D R | The ECU is - enabled |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 8 9 | - - Z03 Br - - | - - - Ground - - |
| 10 11 | B425 W - - | - Seat belt signal - - |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L20 R | DC/DC2 power - supply |
I_B_S Floor wiring harness to seat wiring harness
I1_B_BE Floor harness connected to DCDC positive harness 1
I1_B_C Floor wiring harness to chassis wiring harness 1
16 Br 16 R 14 R 14 R
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 P4K R | Right battery pump - + |
| 2 P4A R | - Left battery pump + |
| 3 P4P R | Motor water pump - 2 |
| 4 P4F R | Motor water pump - 1 |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 15 | B524 | W | - | Hazard warning switch |
| 16 | B314 | W | - | Block the key work indicator |
| 17 | B519 | W | - | Unlock the lock switch |
| 18 | U011 | G | - | EPB1 linear 2 |
| 19 | U012 | Y | - | EPB1 linear 1 |
| 20 | U508 | Br | - | Hanging the EPB switch - |
| 21 22 | R229 P314b | R R | 12V - | CDC sends 12V power to wake up the CAR screen CAR screen power |
| 23 | B810 | R | - | supply KL30 Bluetooth power for doorknob |
| 24 | B809 | W | - | Doorknob Bluetooth ID |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | R201a | W | - | Ambient Light LIN |
| 27 | R116b | R | 12V | Ambient light 12V power supply |
| 28 | B424 | W | - | Sliding door switch |
| 29 | U523 | W | - | Hang EPB switch+ |
| 30 | P102 | R | - | KL15 Power supply + |
| 31 | R230 | R | 12V | IPC wakes up power supply 12V+ |
| 32 | BL06a | G | - | BCAN6-L |
| 33 | BH06a | Y | - | BCAN6-H |
| 34 | - | - | - | - |
| 35 | - | - | - | - |
| 36 | - | - | - | - |
| 37 | P304b | R | - | Bluetooth 、NFC Module B+ |
| 38 | U003 | W | - | Main EPB indicator light |
| 39 | R102a | W | - | Right tweeter - |
| 20 W 20 R 20 W |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 - - | - - |
| 2 PH04d Y | - PCAN4-H |
| 3 R104a W | - Left tweeter - |
| 4 R103a W | - Left tweeter + |
| 5 U008 Br | - EPB switch - |
| 6 U023 W | EPB Switching - power supply |
| 7 U015 W | - EPB release switch |
| 8 U014 W | - EPB parking switch |
| 9 U603 W | Hang the EPB - indicator |
| 10 R107a W | - Left alto speaker + |
| 11 R108a W | - Left alto speaker - |
| 12 P116b R | Combination - switch - Shift -KL30 |
| 13 PL04d G | - PCAN4-L |
| 14 B326 W | Hazard alarm - switch light |
I1_B_IP Floor harness to instrument harness 1
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 40 | R101a W | - Right tweeter + |
| 41 | R106a W | Right squawker/ - surround-sound speaker - |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 3 P4D R | - Left battery fan 2+ |
| 4 P4M R | Right battery fan 2 - + |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 - - | - - |
| 2 TTN G | Ethernet sends - signals - |
| 3 TTP W | Ethernet sends - signal + |
| 4 - - | - - |
| 5 TH09a Y | - GWCANFD9-H |
| 6 TRP W - - | Ethernet received - signal + - - |
| 7 8 - - | - - - |
| 9 TH04 Y 10 TL04 G 11 - - 12 P305b R | GWCANFD4-H - GWCANFD4-L - - - IPC screen B+ |
| 13 IH01 Y 14 IL01 G | - INTCANFD1-H - INTCANFD1-L |
| 15 - - | - - |
| 16 TL09a G | - GWCANFD9-L |
| 17 TRN G | Ethernet received - signal - |
| 18 B522 W | Left window lift - switch |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | L21 R | DC/DC2 power - supply |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4E R | - Left battery fan 1+ |
| 2 | P4N R | Right battery fan 1 - + |
42 R105a W - Right squawker/ surround-sound speaker +
I2_B_BE Floor harness connected to DCDC positive harness 2
I2_B_C Floor harness to chassis harness 2
I2_B_IP Floor harness to instrument harness 2
12 R 12 R 20 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 19 | B507 W | Left window drop - switch |
| 20 | B521 W | Right window lift - switch |
| 21 | B506 W | Right window drop - switch |
| 22 | B520 W | Main drive visor lift - switch |
| 23 | B404 W | Main drive shade - lowering switch |
| 24 | K209 W | Temperature - sensor signal in front car |
| 25 | K135d W | Front car - temperature sensor |
| 26 | K138a R | Temperature sensor inside the 12V front car 12V power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | B430 | W | - | Exhaust temperature signal |
| 7 | B410 | W | - | Effluent temperature signal |
| 8 | B431 | W | - | Inlet temperature signal |
| 9 | B436e | Br | - | sensorily |
| 10 | B209 | W | - | Right charging port motor - Unlock |
| 11 | B205 | W | - | Right charging port motor - lock |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | B412 | W | - | Low pressure/ temperature sensor |
| 15 | B413 | W | - | Low pressure PT sensor - pressure signal |
| 16 17 | B432 B433 | W W | - - | High pressure/ temperature sensor High pressure PT sensor - pressure signal |
| 18 19 | B414c P204 | W R | - - | Sensor power supply 5V SOV+ |
| 20 | K102 | W | - | Former SOV- |
| 21 | K103 | W | - | After SOV- |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | PL02 | G | - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| 24 | PH02 | Y | - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | U109 | R | - | EBS KL30-1 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B332c W | Charging port - motor - Unlock |
| 2 | B331c W | Charging port - motor - lock |
| 3 | O325 W | Traction seat slip - switch |
I3_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 3
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 29 | U108 R | - EBS KL30-2 |
| 30 | - - | - - |
| 31 | - - | - - |
| 32 | - - | - - |
| 33 | H04 W | High pressure - interlock in from compressor |
| 34 | E208 W | High voltage - interlock to VDC |
| 35 | P205c R | Compressor power - supply |
| 36 | O75 R | Car refrigerator - KL30 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 9 | B317e R | Clock spring 12V 12V power |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| 11 | U402 G | Steering Angle - internal CAN-L |
| 12 | U405 Y | Steering Angle - internal CAN-H |
| 13 | U412 R | Steering Angle - power supply |
| 14 | U409 Br | Steering Angle - ground |
| 15 | U514 W | Hang EPB parking - switch |
| 16 | BL05 G | - ESCL-BCAN5-L |
| 17 | P308 R | - HUD-KL30+ |
| 18 19 | P313 R B401 W | - IVI screen -KL30 - Wash switch |
| 20 21 | B434 W B416 Br | - Wiper switch Left combination - switch analog |
| 22 | B415 W | - Turn switch signal |
| 23 | B435 W | - Passing switch |
| 24 | O325 W | Traction seat slip - switch |
| 25 | U515 W | Hanging EPB - release switch |
| 26 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | B510 W | Clock spring - horn - switch |
| 3 4 5 | U511 W U512 W BH05 Y | Example Hang - EPB Hall 2 - Hang EPB hall 1 - ESCL-BCAN5-H ESCL Power |
| 6 7 | P316 R R213 R | - supply B+ CDC sends 12V 12V power to wake up IVI screen |
| 8 | B218 W | - Backlight + |
I3_B_IP Floor harness to instrument harness 3
I4_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 4
20 R 20 W
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U008 | Br | - | EPB switch - |
| 2 | U023 | W | - | Switch + |
| 3 | U012 | W | - | EPB1 is linear 1 |
| 4 | U011 | W | - | EPB private CAN-L |
| 5 | U014 | W | - | Parking switch |
| 6 | U015 | W | - | Release switch |
| 7 | U603 | W | - | Hang the EPB indicator |
| 8 | U511 | W | - | Example Hang EPB Hall 2 |
| 9 | B106 | W | - | Interwheel lock solenoid valve electrical |
| 10 | U905 | W | - | Left rear axle height signal |
| 11 | U908 | W | - | Right rear axle height signal |
| 12 | U909 | W | - | Front axle height signal |
| 13 | U003 | W | - | Primary EPB indicator |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | U508 | Br | - | Hanging the EPB switch - |
| 17 18 | U512 B606 | W W | - - | Example Hang EPB Hall 1 Turn to oil tank level sensor signal |
| 19 20 | U901 U902 | R W | - - | ECAS sensor power supply Right rear axle pressure signal |
| 21 | U903 | W | - | Front axle pressure signal |
| 22 | U906 | W | - | Left rear axle pressure signal |
| 23 | U907 | Br | - | ECAS sensor ground |
| Stitch n | Wire Line Vo umb- color er | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 24 | - - | - - |
| 25 | U523 W | Hang up EPB - switch + |
| 26 | U514 W | Hang the EPB - parking switch |
| 27 | B421 W | Brake pad wear - alarm signal |
| 28 | - - | - - |
| 29 | U910 W | Left rear solenoid - valve |
| 30 | U911 W | Central solenoid - valve |
| 31 | U913 W | Right rear solenoid - valve |
| 32 | U915 W | Front axle solenoid - valve |
| 33 | U904 W | Suspension - solenoid valve power supply |
| 34 | - - | - - |
| 35 | U515 W | Suspending EPB - release switch |
| 36 | - - | - - |
I5_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 5
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U301 | W | - | Trailer valve AV valve |
| 2 | U302 | W | - | Trailer valve EV valve |
| 3 | U303 | R | - | Trailer valve grounding |
| 4 | U304 | Br | - | Trailer valve power supply |
| 5 | U307 | W | - | Trailer valve - pressure sensor power supply |
| 6 | U308 | W | - | Trailer valve - Pressure sensor signal |
| 7 | U309 | Br | - | Trailer valve - Pressure sensor grounded |
| 8 | B614 | W | - | Trailer failure light |
| 9 | R211 | Br | - | Low pressure sensor - |
| 10 | U210 | W | - | Front left ABS solenoid valve -AV valve |
| 11 | U211 | W | - | Front left ABS solenoid valve -EV valve |
| 12 | U212 | W | - | Front left ABS solenoid valve ground |
| 13 14 | U213 U214 | W W | - - | Front right ABS solenoid valve -AV valve Front right ABS solenoid valve -EV |
| 15 | U215 | W | - | valve Front right ABS solenoid valve ground |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | R209 W | Rear axle pressure - signal |
| 19 | U202 G | - ESC-CAN-L |
| 20 | U205 Y | - ESC-CAN-H |
| 21 | U206 R | - ESC+ |
| 22 | U208 Br | - ESC- |
| 23 | - - | - - |
| 24 | - - | - - |
| 25 | - - | - - |
| 26 | - - | - - |
| 27 | R208 W | Front axle pressure - signal |
| 28 | U401 G | 1M modulator - CAN-L |
| 29 | U404 Y | 1M modulator - CAN-H |
| 30 | U407 R | - 1M modulator + |
| 31 | U410 Br | - 1M modulator - |
| 32 | U201 G | 2M modulator - CAN-L |
| 33 | U204 Y | 2M modulator - CAN-H |
| 34 | U203 R | - 2M modulator + |
| 35 | U207 Br | - 2M modulator - |
| 36 | - - | - - |
I6_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 6
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4S R | Motor Fan 2 Power - supply |
| 2 | P4H R | Motor fan 1 Power - supply |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | P4B R | Motor Fan 3 Power - supply |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 19 | E251 W | Active Grille - Shutter LIN |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| 21 | - - | - - |
| 22 | - - | - - |
| 23 | - - | - - |
| 24 | - - | - - |
| 25 | - - | - - |
| 26 | - - | - - |
| 27 | - - | - - |
| 28 | E124 R | Acceleration power - 1 |
| 29 | E237 W | Acceleration signal - 1 |
| 30 | E275 Br | - acceleratedly |
| 31 | E125 R | Acceleration power - 2 |
| 32 | E239 W | Acceleration signal - 2 |
| 33 | E236 Br | - quickly2 |
| 34 | E157 W | - Parking switch 1 |
| 35 | E154 W | - Parking switch 2 |
| 36 | H01a W | Differential lock - signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | G01a R | - KL15-1 |
| 2 | G5Da R | - KL15-3 |
| 3 | G2H R | - T-GW B+1 |
| 4 | O420 R | - T-GW B+2 |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | G2A R | - EBS-KL15A |
| 8 9 | G2E R O407 R | - Main ADCU-B+ - AGS-KL30 |
| 10 | O4153 R | - Battery pack -B+ |
| 11 | O4151 R | - Battery pack -B+ |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | - - | - - |
| 14 | - - | - - |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | - - | - - |
I7_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 7
I8_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 8
20 R 22 Y
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | AH01 | Y | - | HMI Private CAN- H |
| 3 | AL01 | G | - | HMI private CAN-L |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | PH03 | Y | - | PCAN3-H |
| 9 | PL03 | G | - | PCAN3-L |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | BH01 | Y | - | BCANFD1-H |
| 21 | PH04 | Y | - | Electric drive CAN4-H |
| 22 | BH02 | Y | - | BCANFD2-H |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | K222a | Y | - | Air conditioning CAN-H |
| 25 | TH07 | Y | - | GWCANFD7-H |
| 26 | TH08 | Y | - | Chassis CAN8-H |
| 27 | TH06b | Y | - | Intelligent driving CAN-H |
| 28 | - | - | - | - |
| 29 | BL01 | G | - | BCANFD1-L |
| 30 | PL04 | G | - | Electric drive CAN4-L |
| 31 | BL02 | G | - | BCANFD2-L |
| 32 | - | - | - | - |
| 33 | K223a | G | - | Air conditioning CAN-L |
| 34 | TL07 | G | - | GWCANFD7-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 35 | TL08 G | - | Chassis CAN8-L |
| 36 | TL06b G | - | Intelligent driving CAN-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O71 Y | - | Trailer left turn signal |
| 2 | O70 G | - | Trailer right turn signal |
| 3 | O74 R | - | Turn signal controller power + |
| 4 | B215 W | - | DCDC3 Enable + |
| 5 | B501 W | - | DCDC3 fault alarm |
| 6 | - - | - | - |
| 7 | - - | - | - |
| 8 | B216 W | - | KL15 Power-on and power-off request |
| 9 | B201 W | - | KL30 Power-on and power-off request |
| 10 | - - | - | - |
| 11 | - - | - | - |
| 12 | - - | - | - |
| 13 | - - | - | - |
| 14 | - - | - | - |
| 15 | - - | - | - |
| 16 | - - | - | - |
I9_B_C Floor harness to chassis harness 9
20 R 20 R 20 R 20 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | O62 | R | - | 12V car power supply |
| 19 | O318 | R | - | Position light |
| 20 | B224 | W | - | Right turn signal |
| 21 | B223 | W | - | Left turn signal |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | O419 | R | - | Horn power supply |
| 25 | O416 | R | - | AVAS power supply |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | O301 | R | - | Near left light |
| 29 | O302 | R | - | Right low light |
| 30 | O303 | R | - | Left high beam |
| 31 | O309 | R | - | Right high beam |
| 32 | - | - | - | - |
| 33 | O306 | R | - | Right DRL |
| 34 | - | - | - | - |
| 35 | O304 | R | - | Left DRL |
| 36 | O317 | R | - | ADS lamp |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| G | G2G | R - | TCU-KL30 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | G01 R | KL15 Power supply - 1 |
| 2 | G62b R | EHPS Power - supply -KL30A |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O301 | R - | Near left light |
| 2 | O302 | R - | Right low beam |
| 3 | O303 | R - | Left beam |
| 4 | O304 | R - | Left DRL |
| 5 | - | - - | - |
| 6 | O306 | R - | Right DRL |
| 7 | - | - - | - |
| 8 | O308 | R - | IBS-B+ |
| 9 | O309 | R - | Right beam |
| 10 | B216 | W - | KL15 Power-on and power-off request |
| 11 | B201 | W - | KL30 Power-on and power-off request |
| 12 | - | - - | - |
| 13 | - | - - | - |
| 14 | - | - - | - |
| 15 | - | - - | - |
| 16 | O316 | R - | Reverse lamp |
| 17 | O317 | R - | ADS lamp |
| 18 | O318 | R - | lamplet |
| 19 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| A | G2A R | - EBS-KL15A |
| B | - - | - - |
| C | Z50 Br | - Ground |
| D | U109 R | - EBS-KL30 |
| E | G2E R | - Main ADCU-B+ |
| F | G2F R | Auxiliary ADCU-B - +/EVCC/ Trailer EPB-B+ |
9.2.6 Chassis Wiring Harness
9.2.6.1 Chassis Wiring Harness Terminal Diagram
C1 Chassis electrical box C1
C2 Chassis electrical box C2(black)
H G2H R - T-GW-B+
C3 Chassis electrical box C3
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 20 | O320 | R - | Right brake lamp |
| 21 | - | - - | - |
| 22 | O322 | R - | Rear working light |
| 23 | O323 | R - | Brake emergency solenoid valve KL30+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | O4151 | R | - | Battery pack -B+ |
| 16 | O416 | R | - | AVAS-KL30 |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | O418 | R | - | Dryer heating -KL30 |
| 19 | O419 | R | - | Horn power supply |
| 20 | O420 | R | - | T-gateway -B+ |
| 21 | O421 | R | - | Middle and rear axle MCU-KL30 |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 O423 R - VDC-B+ |
| 1 | BL02c | G - | BCANFD2-L |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | BH02c | Y - | BCANFD2-H |
| 3 | BL02c | G - | BCANFD2-L |
| 4 | O404 | R - | Front axle pressure sensor/Rear axle pressure sensor/ Emergency pressure sensor power supply KL30 + |
| 5 | O405 | R - | Tire pressure |
| 6 | O406 | R - | Air horn |
| 7 | O407 | R - | Battery WPTC- KL30+AGS |
| 8 | O408 | R - | PDU-KL30 |
| 9 | - | - - | - |
| 10 | - | - - | - |
| 11 | BL01c | G - | BCANFD1-L |
| 12 | BH01c | Y - | BCANFD1-H |
| 13 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A | U108 | R | - | EBS KL30-2 |
| B | - | - | - | - |
| C | - | - | - | - |
| D | G5D | R | - | KL15 Power supply 3 |
| E | G5E | R | - | EPB-B+ |
| F | - | - | - | - |
| G | - | - | - | - |
| H | - | - | - | - |
C4 Chassis electrical box C4
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
C5 Chassis Electrical box C5(Blue)
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - - | - |
| 2 | G62a | R - | EHPS-KL30B |
| Stitch n | Wire umb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z67 | Br | - Ground signal |
| 2 | H09 | W | From the middle - right to the back right |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volta color e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B106 | W - | Solenoid power supply |
| 2 | Z65 | Br - | Ground |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch n | Wire umb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | H09 | W | From the middle - right to the back right |
| 2 | H10 | W | From back right to - back left |
C6 Chassis electrical box C6
C07 Interwheel lock solenoid valve
C08 Right center axle brake pads
C09 Right rear axle brake pads
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U608 W | Rear axle right - wheel speed sensor ground |
| 2 | U607 W | Rear axle right - wheel ABS sensor signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U908 W | Right rear axle - height signal |
| 2 | U907e Br | - sensorily |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U901b R | - Power source |
| 2 | U907b Br | - sensorily |
| 3 | U902 W | Right rear axle - pressure signal |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - to |
| 2 | O318 R | Position light - positive |
| 3 | B224 W | Steering/braking - positive |
C10 Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor
C11 Combination lamp-rh rr
C12 Rear axle right height sensor
C13 Right rear axle pressure sensor
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R210 W | Parking low voltage - alarm signal |
| 2 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U905 W | Left rear altitude - signal |
| 2 | U907d Br | - sensorily |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U901a R | - Power source |
| 2 | U907a Br | - sensorily |
| 3 | U906 W | Left rear pressure - signal |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - to |
| 2 | O318 R | Position light - positive |
| 3 | B223 W | Steering/braking - positive |
C14 Low pressure warning switch
C15 Left rear axle pressure sensor
C16 Rear axle left height sensor
C17 Combination lamp-lh rr
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 | U008 | Br | - | EPB switch - |
| 9 | G01c | R | - | KL15 |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | U011 | Br | - | EPB switch - |
| 12 | U012 | Y | - | EPB private CAN- H |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | U014 | W | - | Parking switch |
| 15 | U015 | W | - | Release switch |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | TH08c | Y | - | Chassis CAN8-H |
| 20 | TL08c | G | - | Chassis CAN8-L |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | U023 | W | - | Parking switch power supply |
| 24 | Z67 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U911a W | Central solenoid - valve |
| 2 | U913 W | Right rear solenoid - valve |
| 3 | U910 W | Left rear solenoid - valve |
| 4 | U904a W | Solenoid power - supply |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | U003 W | Primary EPB - indicator |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | TH08f | Y | - | Chassis CAN8-H |
| 2 | TL08f | G | - | Chassis CAN8-L |
C18 Rear axle suspension solenoid valve
C19 EPB
25 G5Eb R - Power B+
C20 CAN resistance -120 Ω
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U601 | W | - | Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor signal |
| 2 | U602 | W | - | Rear axle left wheel speed sensor |
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | U607 | W | - | Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor signal |
| 8 | U608 | W | - | Rear axle right wheel speed sensor ground |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U207 | Br | - | GND |
| 2 | U203 | R | - | Solenoid power supply |
| 3 | U204 | Y | - | 2M modulator CAN-H |
| 4 | U201 | G | - | 2M modulator CAN-L |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | H10 | W | - | From back right to back left |
| 2 | H11 | W | - | From back left to center left |
C21 Axle modulator 2M-X1
C22 Axle modulator 2M-X2
C23 Left rear axle brake pads
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 9 | M05 | W | The rear - displacement signal |
| 10 | M06 | W | Displacement - sensor power supply |
| 11 | M07 | W | - sensorily |
| 12 | M08 | W | The rear - displacement signal |
| 13 | H01b | W | Differential lock - feedback signal |
| 14 | - | - | - - |
| 15 | - | - | - - |
| 16 | - | - | - - |
| 17 | O421b | R | MCU power supply - KL30 |
| 18 | M01 | R | - Motor drive 2+ |
| 19 | - | - | - - |
| 20 | Z66 | Br | MCU Power - Supply - |
| 21 | M02 - | Br - | - Motor drive 2- - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U602 W | Rear axle left - wheel speed sensor |
| 2 | U601 W | Rear axle left - wheel ABS sensor signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | E146b R | - Wake-up call |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | PH04f Y | - MCU3-CAN-H |
| 4 | PL04f G | - MCU3-CAN-L |
| 5 | PH04e Y | - MCU4-CAN-H |
| 6 | PL04e G | - MCU4-CAN-L |
| 7 | M03 W | Speed input signal - 2 |
| 8 | M04 W | Speed sensor - power supply |
C24 Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor
C25 E-axle rear axle vehicle low voltage port
C26 Left center axle brake pads
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | H11 W | From back left to - center left |
| 2 | H32 W | From left center to - right front |
| W Stitch nu | ire Line mb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 13 H | 01a W | - | Differential lock feedback signal |
| 14 PH | 04b Y | - | TCU-CAN-H |
| 15 PL | 04b G | - | TCU-CAN-L |
| 16 | - - | - | - |
| 17 O4 | 21a R | - | MCU power supply KL30 |
| 18 M | 01 R | - | Motor drive 2+ |
| 19 G | 2G R | - | TCU Power supply KL30 MCU Power |
| 20 Z 21 M | 66 Br 02 Br | - - | Supply - Motor drive 2- |
| 22 Z | 65 Br | - | TCU Power supply - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | E146a R | - Wake-up call |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | PH04c Y | - MCU1-CAN-H |
| 4 | PL04c G | - MCU1-CAN-L |
| 5 | PH04d Y | - MCU2-CAN-H |
| 6 | PL04d G | - MCU2-CAN-L |
| 7 | M03 W | Speed input signal - 2 |
| 8 | M04 W | Speed sensor - power supply 2 |
| 9 | M05 W | The rear - displacement signal |
| 10 | M06 W | Displacement - sensor power supply 2 |
| 11 | M07 W | Displacement - sensor ground 2 |
| 12 | M08 W | The rear - displacement signal |
| W Stitch nu | ire Line mb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 BL | 01a G | - | BCANFD1-L |
| 2 BH | 01a Y | - | BCANFD1-H |
| 3 | - - | - | - |
| 4 | - - | - | - |
| 5 O4 | 05b G | - | Power KL30 |
| 6 Z | 66 Br | - | Ground |
C27 E-axle mid axle vehicle low voltage port
C28 Rear tire pressure module
| Wire h numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| U208 | Br | - | Ground connection |
| U206 | R | - | Power source |
| U205 | Y | - | ESC-CAN-H |
| U202 | G | - | ESC-CAN-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U303 R | Trailer valve power - supply |
| 2 | U301 W | - Trailer AV valve |
| 3 | U302 W | - Trailer EV valve |
| 4 | U304 Br | Trailer valve - grounding |
| 5 | U307 W | Pressure sensor - power supply |
| 6 | U308 W | Pressure sensor - signal |
| 7 | U309 Br | Pressure sensor - grounding |
| Wire h numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| Z68 | Br | - | Ground |
| O318c | R | - | Identification light |
| O317c | R | - | ADS lamp |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | E149 W | - Exhaust valve |
| 2 | Z60 Br | - Ground |
| 3 | E148 W | - Regenerative valve |
| 4 | - - | - - |
C29 Yaw rate sensor
C30 Left rear marker combination light
C31 Trailer control valve
C32 Dryer - exhaust - regenerative valve
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C2 | - | - | - | - |
| C3 | - | - | - | - |
| C4 | - | - | - | - |
| D1 | - | - | - | - |
| D2 | - | - | - | - |
| D3 | - | - | - | - |
| D4 | - | - | - | - |
| E1 | E146 | R | - | Wake up power |
| E2 | - | - | - | - |
| E3 | PL03g | G | - | PCAN3-L |
| E4 | PH03g | Y | - | PCAN3-H |
| F1 | - | - | - | - |
| F2 | - | - | - | - |
| F3 | - | - | - | - |
| F4 | - | - | - | - |
| G1 | - | - | - | - |
| G2 | - | - | - | - |
| G3 | - | - | - | - |
| G4 | - | - | - | - |
| H1 | - | - | - | - |
| H2 | - | - | - | - |
| H3 | - | - | - | - |
| H4 | - | - | - | - |
| J1 | - | - | - | - |
| J2 | - | - | - | - |
| J3 | - | - | - | - |
| J4 | - | - | - | - |
| K1 | - | - | - | - |
| K2 | - | - | - | - |
| K3 | - | - | - | - |
| K4 | - | - | - | - |
| L1 | O408a | R | - | Power KL30 |
| L2 | O408b | R | - | Power KL30 |
| L3 | - | - | - | - |
| L4 | - | - | - | - |
| M1 | Z60 | Br | - | Ground |
| M2 | Z60 | Br | - | Ground |
| M3 | - | - | - | - |
| M4 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O418 R | - Power KL30 |
| 2 | Z60 Br | - Ground |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| A1 | H06 W | High voltage - interlock in from left unit |
| A2 | - - | - - |
| A3 | - - | - - |
| A4 | - - | - - |
| B1 | H052 W | High voltage - interlock output |
| B2 | - - | - - |
| B3 | - - | - - |
| B4 | - - | - - |
| C1 | - - | - - |
C33 Heater
C34 Power distribution unit
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O322 | R | - Power source |
| 2 | Z68 | Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | E143 W | - signal |
| 2 | Z56 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | H32 | W | From left center to - right front |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | E126 W | - signal |
| 2 | Z56 Br | - Ground connection |
C36 Work lamp-rr
C37 Trailer brake pads
2 H12 W - From left center to right front
C40 Motor cooling level sensor
C41 Battery cooled level sensor
C42 Front axle pressure sensor
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R211a Br | - Ground connection |
| 2 | R208 W | - signal |
| 3 | O404b R | Power supply KL30 - + |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 3 | TH06b Y | Intelligent driving - CAN-H |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | G2E R | - Smart Drive B+ |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 9 | - - | - - |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R211b Br | - Ground connection |
| 2 | R209 W | - signal |
| 3 | O404c R | Power supply KL30 - + |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | O318e R | - Identification light |
| 3 | O317e R | - ADS lamp |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | TL06b G | Intelligent driving - CAN-L |
C43 Rear axle pressure sensor
C45 Left millimeter wave radar
C46 Left center sign combination light
C47 Left charging port cover locks motor
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Volta olor e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B332a | W - | Unlock + |
| 2 | B331a | W - | Blocked + |
| Stitch | Wire Line Vo numb- color er | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O405c R | - Power KL30 |
| 2 | Z56 Br | - Ground connection |
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Volta olor e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 | Br - | Ground |
| 2 | O318c | R - | Identification light |
| 3 | O317c | R - | ADS lamp |
| Stitch | Wire Line Vo numb- color er | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U701 W | Front axle left - wheel speed sensor signal |
| 2 | U702 W | Front axle left - wheel speed sensor |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | U707 W | Front axle right - wheel speed sensor signal |
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Volta olor e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B606 | W - | signal |
| 2 | Z56 | Br - | Ground |
C48 Left front sign combination light
C49 Turn to tank level sensor
C50 Tire pressure repeater
C51 Axle modulator 1M-X1
| Stitch | Wire Li numb- co er | ne Voltag lor e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 8 | U708 | W - | Front axle right wheel speed sensor ground |
| 9 | - | - - | - |
| 10 | - | - - | - |
| 11 | - | - - | - |
| 12 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z58 | Br | - Ground |
| 2 | E155b | W | Fault feedback - signal |
| 3 | E228a | W | - PWM signal |
| 4 | P4P | R | - Power supply KL15 |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z58 | Br | - Ground |
| 2 | E155a | W | Fault feedback - signal |
| 3 | E228a | W | - PWM signal |
| 4 | P4F | R | - Power supply KL15 |
| Stitch | Wire Li numb- co er | ne Voltag lor e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | U410 | Br - | GND |
| 2 | U407 | R - | Solenoid power supply |
| 3 | U404 | Y - | 1M modulator CAN-H |
| 4 | U401 | G - | 1M modulator CAN-L |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z58 | Br | - Ground |
| 2 | O406 | R | - Power source |
C52 Axle modulator 1M-X2
C53 Motor water pump 2
C54 Motor water pump 1
C55 Air horn
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | H12 W | From left center to - right front |
| 2 | H13 W | Front right to front - left |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U215 W | - Ground connection |
| 2 | U214 W | - EV valve |
| 3 | U213 W | - AV valve |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U708 W | Front axle right - wheel speed sensor ground |
| 2 | U707 W | Front axle right - wheel speed sensor signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | O318f R | - Identification light |
| 3 | O317f R | - ADS lamp |
C56 Right front axle brake pads
C57 Front axle right wheel ABS sensor
C58 Front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve
C59 Right center mark combination light A
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B209 W | - Unlock + |
| 2 | B205 W | - Blocked + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | O318d R | - | Identification light |
| 3 | O317d R | - | ADS lamp |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | TL06c G | Intelligent driving - CAN-L |
| 3 | TH06c Y | Intelligent driving - CAN-H |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | G2E R | - Smart Drive B+ |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | - - | - - |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - | Ground |
| 2 | O318f R | - | Identification light |
| 3 | O317f R | - | ADS lamp |
C60 Right charging port cover locks motor
C62 Right millimeter wave radar
C63 Right center mark combination light B
C64 Right rear sign combination light
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U909 W | Front axle height - signal |
| 2 | U907f Br | - sensorily |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 - - - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | K103 W | - Controls - |
| 2 | P204b R | - Power source |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P205c R | - Power KL30 |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | Z57 Br | - Ground |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | K222a Y | Air conditioning - CAN-H |
| 6 | K223a G | Air conditioning - CAN-L |
| 7 | H04 W | Interlock out to the - body |
| 8 | H051 W | Interlocking in - slave PDU |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U915 W | Front axle solenoid - valve |
| 2 | U904b W | Solenoid power - supply |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | U904b W | Solenoid power - supply |
C65 Front axle height sensor
C66 Front axle suspension solenoid valve
C67 Rear air conditioning SOV
C68 Air conditioning compressor
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B436b Br | - sensorily |
| 2 | B413 W | - Pressure signal |
| 3 | B412 W | - Temperature signal |
| 4 | B414b W | - 5V power supply |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | G01d R | - Power supply KL15 |
| 2 | TL08d G | - Chassis CAN8-L |
| 3 | TH08d Y | - Chassis CAN8-H |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B430 W | - Sensor signal |
| 2 | B436e Br | - sensorily |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z59 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | G62 Br | - Power KL30 |
C69 Low pressure/temperature sensor
C70 Compressor exhaust temperature sensor
C71 EHPS
8 - - - -
C72 EHPS
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | K102 W | - Controls - |
| 2 | P204a R | - Power source |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U702 W | Front axle left - wheel speed sensor |
| 2 | U701 W | Front axle left - wheel speed sensor signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U901c R | - Power source |
| 2 | U907c Br | - sensorily |
| 3 | U903 W | Front axle pressure - signal |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | H13 W | Front right to front - left |
| 2 | B421 W | - Enter BDCU |
C73 Front air conditioner SOV
C74 Front axle pressure sensor
C75 Front axle left wheel ABS sensor
C76 Left front axle brake pads
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U212 W | - Ground connection |
| 2 | U211 W | - EV valve |
| 3 | U210 W | - AV valve |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B436d Br | - sensorily |
| 2 | B431 W | Inlet temperature - signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4B R | Motor Fan 3 Power - supply |
| 2 | Z53 Br | - Motor grounding |
| 3 | E158c W | - Fault detection |
| 4 | E250c W | PWM speed - regulation |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B436c Br | - sensorily |
| 2 | B410 W | Effluent - temperature signal |
C77 Front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve
C80 Outlet water temperature sensor
C81 Inlet water temperature sensor
C82 Motor fan 3
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4S | R | - | Motor power supply KL15 |
| 2 | Z52 | Br | - | Motor grounding |
| 3 | E158b | W | - | Fault detection |
| 4 | E250b | W | - | PWM speed regulation |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Voltag color e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B436a | Br - | sensorily |
| 2 | B433 | W - | Pressure signal |
| 3 | B432 | W - | Temperature signal |
| 4 | B414a | W - | 5V power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Voltag color e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4E | R - | Left battery fan 1 Power supply |
| 2 | Z61 | Br - | Left battery fan 1 Ground |
| 3 | P4D | R - | Left battery fan 2 Power supply |
| 4 | Z62 | Br - | Left battery fan 2 Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4H | R | - | Motor power supply KL15 |
| 2 | Z51 | Br | - | Motor grounding |
| 3 | E158a | W | - | Fault detection |
| 4 | E250a | W | - | PWM speed regulation |
C83 Motor fan 2
C84 Motor fan 1
C85 High pressure/temperature sensor
C86 Left thermal management unit 2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6 | Z60 | Br | - | Compressor /WPTC controller |
| 7 | PH03h | Y | - | PCAN3-H |
| 8 | PL03h | G | - | PCAN3-L |
| 9 | H07 | W | - | High pressure interlock in from right unit |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | H06 | W | - | High voltage interlock out to the PDU |
| 12 | E150 | W | - | Pump feedback signal |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | E252 | W | - | Left pump PWM signal |
| 15 | E113 | W | - | Fan feedback signal |
| 16 | E293 | W | - | Fan PWM signal |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | E255 | W | - | Compressor exhaust temperature signal |
| 19 | E211 | W | - | H_P feedback |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | E235 | W | - | Left low pressure PT sensor pressure signal |
| 23 | E123 | R | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 24 | E258 | Br | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor ground |
| 25 | E218a | Br | - | Compressor exhaust temperature sensor |
| Stitch | Wire Line V numb- color er | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4N R | Right battery fan 1 - Power supply |
| 2 | Z63 Br | Right battery fan 1 - Ground |
| 3 | P4M R | Right battery fan 2 - Power supply |
| 4 | Z64 Br | Left battery fan 2 - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line V numb- color er | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | Z60 Br | - Left pump ground |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | P205a R | Compressor power - supply KL30 |
| 5 | O407a R | WPTC Power - supply KL30 |
C87 Right thermal management unit 2
C88 Left thermal management unit 1
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 26 | P205 R | Three-way valve - power supply KL30 |
| 27 | - - | - - |
| 28 | Z60 Br | - Ground |
| 29 | E207 W | Three-way valve - PWM signal |
| 30 | E213 W | Left three-way - valve fault feedback signal |
| 31 | E323 R | Low pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 32 | E358 Br | Low pressure/ - temperature sensor ground |
| 33 | - - | - - |
| 34 | - - | - - |
| 35 | P4A R | Left pump power - supply |
| 36 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 5 | O407b | R | - | WPTC Power supply KL30 |
| 6 | Z60 | Br | - | Compressor /WPTC controller |
| 7 | PH03i | Y | - | PCAN3-H |
| 8 | PL03i | G | - | PCAN3-L |
| 9 | E286 | W | - | High voltage interlock in from VDC |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | H07 | W | - | High voltage interlock out to left unit |
| 12 | E136 | W | - | Pump feedback signal |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | E274 | W | - | Right pump PWM signal |
| 15 | E140 | W | - | Fan feedback signal |
| 16 | E272 | W | - | Fan PWM signal |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | E276 | W | - | Compressor exhaust temperature signal |
| 19 | E264 | W | - | H_P feedback |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | E111 | W | - | L_P feedback |
| 23 | E122 | R | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 24 | E238 | Br | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor ground |
| 25 | E218b | Br | - | Compressor exhaust temperature sensor |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | Z60 Br | - Right pump ground |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | P205b R | Compressor power - supply KL30 |
C89 Right thermal management unit 1
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 26 | P205 | R | - | Three-way valve power supply KL30 |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | Z60 | Br | - | Ground |
| 29 | E207 | W | - | Three-way valve PWM signal |
| 30 | E284 | W | - | Right three-way valve fault feedback signal |
| 31 | E322 | R | - | Low pressure/ temperature sensor 5V+ |
| 32 | E338 | Br | - | Low pressure/ temperature sensor ground |
| 33 | - | - | - | - |
| 34 | - | - | - | - |
| 35 | P4K | R | - | Right pump power supply |
| 36 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O07 | R | 12V | 12V+ |
| 2 | E251d | W | - | LIN |
| 3 | O308b | R | - | 24V+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O07 | R | 12V | 12V+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z55 | Br | - | Ground - |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | AL01 | G | - | HMI private CAN-L |
| 4 | AH01 | Y | - | HMI Private CAN- H |
| 5 | G01i | R | - | KL15+ |
C90 Front millimeter wave radar
C91 Intelligent Battery Sensor
C92 IBS12V power supply
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 94 | E252 | W | - | Left battery pump PWM speed regulation |
| 95 | - | - | - | - |
| 96 97 | - E146 | - R | - - | - The PDU, TCU, middrive, and rear drive wake up the power supply |
| 98 | - | - | - | - |
| 99 | - | - | - | - |
| 100 | - | - | - | - |
| 101 | E274 | W | - | Right battery pump PWM speed regulation |
| 102 | - | - | - | - |
| 103 | - | - | - | - |
| 104 | E293 | W | - | The left battery fan provides PWM speed adjustment |
| 105 | E272 | W | - | Right battery fan PWM speed regulation |
| 106 | - | - | - | - |
| 107 | - | - | - | - |
| 108 | - | - | - | - |
| 109 | - | - | - | - |
| 110 | - | - | - | - |
| 111 | - | - | - | - |
| 112 | - | - | - | - |
| 113 | - | - | - | - |
| 114 | E119 | W | - | Left 1/2/3CMU Wake power supply |
| 115 | E147 | W | - | Right 1/2/3CMU+ Wake power supply |
| 116 | O423c | R | - | Power B+ |
| 117 | Z54 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 82 | E123 R | High pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V |
| 83 | E124 R | - Throttle electric |
| 84 | E323 R | Low pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V |
| 85 | E122 R | High pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V |
| 86 | E125 R | - Throttle 2 charge |
| 87 | E322 R | Low pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V |
| 88 | E228 W | Motor pump PWM - speed regulation |
| 89 | E250 W | Motor fan PWM - speed regulation |
| 90 | E286 W | High pressure - interlock out to right unit |
| 91 | - - | - - |
| 92 | E207 W | Thermal management unit - three-way valve PWM signal |
| 93 | - - | - - |
C93 VDC-1
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 118 O423b R | - Power B+ |
| 119 Z54 Br | - Ground |
| 120 Z54 Br | - Ground |
| 121 O423a R | - Power B+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | E143 | W | - | Motor liquid level alarm signal |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | E158 | W | - | Motor fan fault detection |
| 21 | E155 | W | - | Motor pump fault feedback |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | E111 | W | - | Right low pressure PT sensor |
| 24 | E264 | W | - | pressure signal Right high pressure PT sensor pressure signal |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | PH03 | Y | - | PCAN3-H |
| 28 | PL03 | G | - | PCAN3-L |
| 29 | PH01 | Y | - | PCAN1-H |
| 30 | PL01 | G | - | PCAN1-L |
| 31 | TH07 | Y | - | GWCANFD7-H |
| 32 | TL07 | G | - | GWCANFD7-L |
| 33 | - | - | - | - |
| 34 | E278 | W | - | Right fast charging port temperature check signal 1 |
| 35 | - | - | - | - |
| 36 | E279 | W | - | Temperature check signal 4 |
| 37 | - | - | - | - |
| 38 | E140 | W | - | Right battery fan fault feedback |
| 39 | R209 | W | - | Rear axle pressure signal |
| 40 | E215 | W | - | Temperature detection 2+ |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 O423d R | - Power B+ |
| 2 Z54 Br | - Ground |
| 3 O423e R | - Power B+ |
| 4 Z54 Br | - Ground |
| 5 Z54 Br | - Ground |
| 6 - - | - - |
| 7 E251 W | - IBS/AGSLIN cable |
| 8 - - | - - |
| 9 PH02 Y | - Battery PCAN2-H |
| 10 PL02 G | - Battery PCAN2-L |
| 11 - - | - - |
| 12 - - | - - |
| 13 PH04a Y | - PCAN4-H |
| 14 PL04a G | - PCAN4-L |
| 15 E150 W | Left battery water - pump fault feedback |
| 16 E213 W | Left thermal management unit - three-way valve fault feedback signal |
C94 VDC-2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 41 | E255 | W | - | Left compressor exhaust temperature sensor signal |
| 42 | E237 | W | - | Throttle 1 signal |
| 43 | E239 | W | - | Throttle 2 signal |
| 44 | E139 | W | - | Thermal runaway signal |
| 45 | E275 | Br | - | Throttle 1- |
| 46 | - | - | - | - |
| 47 | - | - | - | - |
| 48 | E236 | Br | - | Throttle 2- |
| 49 | - | - | - | - |
| 50 | E258 | Br | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor |
| 51 | E358 | Br | - | Low pressure/ temperature sensor |
| 52 | - | - | - | - |
| 53 | - | - | - | - |
| 54 | E276 | W | - | Right compressor exhaust temperature sensor signal |
| 55 | R208 | W | - | Front axle pressure signal |
| 56 | - | - | - | - |
| 57 | E157 | W | - | Parking switch normally closed - low effectiveness |
| 58 | E154 | W | - | Parking switch normally on - highly effective |
| 59 | G01a | R | - | The KL15+ function is enabled for the VDC |
| 60 | E211 | W | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 61 | - | - | - | - |
| 62 | E114 | W | - | Left fast charge temperature check 1 signal |
| 63 | E238 | Br | - | High pressure/ temperature sensor ground |
| 64 | E338 | Br | - | Low pressure/ temperature sensor ground |
| 65 | E218 | Br | - | Compressor exhaust temperature sensor/right fast charge temperature check |
| 66 | - | - | - | - |
| 67 | E156 | Br | - | Left fast charge 1/2 temperature detection ground |
| 68 | - | - | - | - |
| 69 | - | - | - | - |
| 70 | Z54 | Br | - | signally |
| 71 | Z54 | Br | - | signally |
| 72 | E136 | W | - | Right battery water pump fault feedback |
| 73 | E208 | W | - | High voltage interlock in |
| 74 | E284 | W | - | Right thermal management unit three-way valve fault feedback signal |
| 75 | E126 | W | - | Battery liquid level alarm signal |
| 76 | E138 | W | - | A+ |
| 77 | E113 | W | - | Left battery fan fault feedback |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 78 | E151 | W | - | PP- Connection confirmation signal |
| 79 | E235 | W | - | Left low pressure PT sensor pressure signal |
| 80 | - | - | - | - |
| 81 | E128 | W | - | PP1 |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | G2F | R | - B+ |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | PL01 | G | - PCAN1-L |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| 5 | M53 | W | - Electronic lock + |
| 6 | M54 | W | - Electronic lock - |
| 7 | E138a | W | - A+ |
| 8 | - | - | - - |
| 9 | - | - | - - |
| 10 | M52 | W | CP-PLC - communication signal |
| 11 | Z50 | Br | - Ground |
| 12 | - | - | - - |
| 13 | PH01 | Y | - PCAN1-H |
| 14 | - | - | - - |
| 15 | M56 | W | Electronic lock - feedback OUT |
| 16 | M55 | W | Electronic lock - feedback IN |
| 17 | - | - | - - |
| 18 | - | - | - - |
| 19 | - | - | - - |
| 20 | Z50 | Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O323 | R | - | KL30+ |
| 2 | Z600 | W | - | Ground |
| 3 | B614 | W | - | Trailer ABS fault signal output |
| 4 | O64 | L | - | 12V fault signal input |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
C95 PLC controller
C96 EVCC controller
20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 R 20 Br 20 Br
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 24 | Z610 Br | - ECU- |
| 25 | G2F R | - Power B+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag e | - Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | - | - | - | - |
| 3 | U603 | W | - | Hang the EPB indicator |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | U508 | Br | - | Hanging the EPB switch - |
| 9 | G5D | R | - | KL15 |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | U511 | W | - | Example Hang EPB Hall 2 |
| 12 | U512 | W | - | Example Hang EPB Hall 1 |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | U514 | W | - | Hang the EPB parking switch |
| 15 | U515 | W | - | Suspending EPB release switch |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | TH08 | Y | - | Chassis CAN8-H |
| 20 | TL08 | G | - | Chassis CAN8-L |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | U523 | W | - | Hang up EPB switch + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| A | B501 W | - Clap alarm |
| B | - - | - - |
| C | - - | - - |
| D | - - | - - |
| E | - - | - - |
| F | - - | - - |
| G | - - | - - |
| H | B215 W | The KL30 is - enabled |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O60 R | - 12V power output |
C97 Trailer EPB
C98 DCDC3 electrical interface
C99 Dcdc3-12 V power output
TL08 TH08
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 21 22 | M531 W M541 W | - Electronic lock + - Electronic lock - |
| 23 | M55 W | Electronic lock - feedback IN |
| 24 | M56 W | Electronic lock - feedback OUT |
| 25 | - - | - - |
| 26 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | M52 W | CP-PLC - communication signal |
| 3 | E151 W | PP- Connection - confirmation signal |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | E114 W | Temperature - detection 1+ |
| 9 | E156 Br | Temperature - detection 1- |
| 10 | E215 W | Temperature - detection 2+ |
| 11 | E156 Br | Temperature - detection 2- |
| 12 | H051 W | High voltage - interlock input |
| 13 | - - | - - |
| 14 | H052 W | High voltage - interlock output |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O418 R | - Power KL30 |
| 2 | O325 W | Traction seat slip - switch |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
C100 MCS fast charging port
C101 Traction seat slip switch
C102 Trailer cable socket 1
20W 20W 20W 20 W 20 W 20W 20 W 20R 20W
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O64 L | - ABS power supply |
| 2 | Z600 W | - Ground |
| Wire Line Voltag- Stitch numb- Stitch definition color e er | ||
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | O316 R | - Astern positive |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O73 R | - Brake lamp |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | O70 G | - Right turn lamp |
| 4 | O68 Br | - Tail light |
| 5 | O66 B | - Side marker light |
| 6 | O71 Y | - Left turn signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O316 R | - Astern positive |
| 2 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | O316 R | - Astern positive |
C103 Trailer cable socket 2
C104 Left reverse light
C105 Right reverse lights
C106 The reverse buzzer
20 R 20 R 20 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Volta e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | M52 | W | - | CP1 |
| 2 | E218c | Br | - | T34 Temperature detection signal - |
| 3 | E278 | W | - | Temperature check signal 3 |
| 4 | E279 | W | - | Temperature check signal 4 |
| 5 | E128 | W | - | PP1 |
| 6 | M532 | W | - | Electronic lock 1+ |
| 7 | M542 | W | - | Electronic lock 1- |
| 8 | M55 | W | - | Electronic lock 1 feedback IN |
| 9 | M56 | W | - | Electronic lock 1 feedback OUT |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O318 W | License plate light - + |
| 2 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Volta e | g- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | M531 | W | - | Electronic lock + |
| 2 | M541 | W | - | Electronic lock - |
| 1 | O318 W | License plate light - + |
|---|---|---|
| 2 | Z68 Br | - Ground |
C107 Left license plate lamp
C108 Right license plate lamp
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
C109 CCS1 Fast charging port
10 - - - -
C110 MCS charging connection
20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z68 | Br | - | Light with iron/low pressure alarm sensor |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | M532 W | - Electronic lock + |
| 2 | M542 W | - Electronic lock - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z65 | Br | - | TCU/ tire pressure/ Middle axle/Rear axle module |
| 1 | Z66 | Br | - | TCU/ tire pressure/ Middle axle/Rear axle module |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | M53 W | - Electronic lock + |
| 2 | M54 W | - Electronic lock - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z67 | Br | - | EPB/ wear alarm |
C111 CCS1 charging connection
C112 Fast charge connector
G01 Light and iron
G02 E-axle iron
G03 EPB takes iron
20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z60 Br | Dryer/dryer regeneration/ power distribution - unit/thermal management unit/ trailer power supply |
| 1 | Z600 W | The trailer rides the - iron |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z56 | Br | - | Sensor bonding |
| 1 | Z57 | Br | - | BMS/ Fast charge/ Air conditioning compressor ground |
| 1 | Z610 | Br | - | Trailer EPB takes iron |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z58 | Br | - | Pump/air horn with iron |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z61 Br | - Ground |
| 1 | Z62 Br | - Ground |
| 1 | Z63 Br | - Ground |
| 1 | Z64 Br | - Ground |
G04 Thermal management - Auxiliary drive iron
G05 Battery fan with iron
G06 BMS- Fast charge iron - Sensor iron
G07 Motor water pump -EHPS iron
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z59 | Br | - | EHPS takes iron |
| 1 | Z51 | Br | - | Motor fan 1 Take iron |
| 1 | Z52 | Br | - | Motor fan 2 Take iron |
| 1 | Z53 | Br | - | Motor fan 3 Take iron |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O4153 R | BMS Power Supply - B+ |
| 2 | PH02 Y | - Battery PCAN2-H |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | PL02 G | - Battery PCAN2-L |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | - - | - - |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| 11 | - - | - - |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | - - | - - |
| 14 | PH021 Y | - Battery PCAN2-H |
| 15 | Z57 Br | - BMS ground |
| 16 | E119 W | - Wake up power |
| 17 | E139d W | Thermal runaway - signal |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | PL021 G | - Battery PCAN2-L |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z50 | Br | - | Chassis electrical box with iron |
| 2 | Z54 | Br | - | VDC bonding |
| 3 | Z55 | Br | - | 3D millimeter wave radar with iron |
G08 Motor fan with iron
G09 VDC bonding
I_C_LP The chassis harness connects to the left battery pack harness
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O4153 R | BMS Power Supply - B+ |
| 2 | PH021 Y | - Battery PCAN2-H |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | PL021 G | - Battery PCAN2-L |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 10 | - - - - | - - - - |
| 11 | - - | - - |
| 12 13 14 | - - - - - - | - - - - - - |
| 15 16 | Z57 Br E147a W | - BMS ground - Wake up power |
| 17 | E139d W | Thermal runaway - signal |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4K R | Right battery pump - + |
| 2 | P4A R | - Left battery pump + |
| 3 | P4P R | Motor water pump - 2 |
| 4 | P4F R | Motor water pump - 1 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4E R | - Left battery fan 1+ |
| 2 | P4N R | Right battery fan 1 - + |
| 3 | P4D R | - Left battery fan 2+ |
| 4 | P4M R | Right battery fan 2 - + |
I_C_RP The chassis harness connects to the right battery pack harness
I1_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 1
I2_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 16 | B432 | W | - | High pressure/ temperature |
| 17 | B433 | W | - | sensor High pressure PT sensor - pressure signal |
| 18 | B414c | W | - | Sensor power supply 5V |
| 19 | P204 | R | - | SOV+ |
| 20 | K102 | W | - | Former SOV- |
| 21 | K103 | W | - | After SOV- |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | PL02 | G | - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| 24 | PH02 | Y | - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | U109 | R | - | EBS KL30-1 |
| 29 | U108 | R | - | EBS KL30-2 |
| 30 | - | - | - | - |
| 31 | - | - | - | - |
| 32 | - | - | - | - |
| 33 | H04 | W | - | High pressure interlock in from compressor |
| 34 | E208 | W | - | High voltage interlock to VDC |
| 35 | P205c | W | - | Compressor power supply |
| 36 | O75 | R | - | Car refrigerator KL30 |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | B332c W | Charging port - motor - Unlock |
| 2 | B331c W | Charging port - motor - lock |
| 3 | O325 W | Traction seat slip - switch |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | B430 W | Exhaust - temperature signal |
| 7 | B410 W | Effluent - temperature signal |
| 8 | B431 W | Inlet temperature - signal |
| 9 | B436e Br | - sensorily |
| 10 | B209 W | Right charging port - motor - Unlock |
| 11 | B205 W | Right charging port - motor - lock |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | - - | - - |
| 14 | B412 W | Low pressure/ - temperature sensor |
| 15 | B413 W | Low pressure PT - sensor - pressure signal |
I3_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 3
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 19 | U901 | R | - | ECAS sensor power supply |
| 20 | U902 | W | - | Right rear axle pressure signal |
| 21 | U903 | W | - | Front axle pressure signal Left rear axle |
| 22 | U906 | W | - | pressure signal |
| 23 | U907 | Br | - | ECAS sensor ground |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | U523 | W | - | Hang up EPB switch + |
| 26 | U514 | W | - | Hang the EPB parking switch |
| 27 | B421 | W | - | Brake pad wear alarm signal |
| 28 | - | - | - | - |
| 29 | U910 | W | - | Left rear solenoid valve |
| 30 | U911 | W | - | Central solenoid valve |
| 31 | U913 | W | - | Right rear solenoid valve |
| 32 | U915 | W | - | Front axle solenoid valve |
| 33 | U904 | W | - | Suspension solenoid valve power supply |
| 34 | - | - | - | - |
| 35 | U515 | W | - | Suspending EPB release switch |
| 36 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U008 Br | - EPB switch - |
| 2 | U023 W | - EPB switch + |
| 3 | U012 Y | - EPB1 is linear 1 |
| 4 | U011 G | - EPB1 is linear 2 |
| 5 | U014 W | - EPB parking switch |
| 6 | U015 W | - EPB release switch |
| 7 | U603 W | Hang the EPB - indicator |
| 8 | U511 W | Example Hang - EPB Hall 2 |
| 9 | B106 W | Interwheel lock - solenoid valve electrical |
| 10 | U905 W | Left rear axle - height signal |
| 11 | U908 W | Right rear axle - height signal |
| 12 | U909 W | Front axle height - signal |
| 13 | U003 W | Primary EPB - indicator |
| 14 | - - | - - |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | U508 Br | Hanging the EPB - switch - |
| 17 | U512 W | Example Hang - EPB Hall 1 |
| 18 | B606 W | Turn to oil tank - level sensor signal |
I4_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 4
29 U910
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 13 | U213 | W | - | Front right ABS solenoid valve -AV |
| 14 | U214 | W | - | valve Front right ABS solenoid valve -EV valve |
| 15 | U215 | W | - | Front right ABS solenoid valve ground |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | R209 | W | - | Rear axle pressure signal |
| 19 | U202 | G | - | ESC-CAN-L |
| 20 | U205 | Y | - | ESC-CAN-H |
| 21 | U206 | R | - | ESC+ |
| 22 | U208 | Br | - | ESC- |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | R208 | W | - | Front axle pressure signal |
| 28 | U401 | G | - | 1M modulator CAN-L |
| 29 | U404 | Y | - | 1M modulator CAN-H |
| 30 | U407 | R | - | 1M modulator + |
| 31 | U410 | Br | - | 1M modulator - |
| 32 | U201 | G | - | 2M modulator CAN-L |
| 33 | U204 | Y | - | 2M modulator CAN-H |
| 34 | U203 | R | - | 2M modulator + |
| 35 | U207 | Br | - | 2M modulator - |
| 36 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U301 W | Trailer valve AV - valve |
| 2 | U302 W | Trailer valve EV - valve |
| 3 | U303 R | Trailer valve - grounding |
| 4 | U304 Br | Trailer valve power - supply |
| 5 | U307 W | Trailer valve - - pressure sensor power supply |
| 6 | U308 W | Trailer valve - - Pressure sensor signal |
| 7 | U309 Br | Trailer valve - - Pressure sensor grounded |
| 8 | B614 W | - Trailer failure light |
| 9 | R211 Br | Low pressure - sensor - |
| 10 | U210 W | Front left ABS - solenoid valve -AV valve |
| 11 | U211 W | Front left ABS - solenoid valve -EV valve |
| 12 | U212 W | Front left ABS - solenoid valve ground |
I5_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 5
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 9 | G2E O407 | R R | - - | Main ADCU-B+ AGS-KL30 |
| 10 | O4153 | R | - | Battery pack -B+ |
| 11 12 13 | O4151 - - | R - - | - - - | Battery pack -B+ - - |
| 14 15 | - - | - - | - - | - - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | E251 | W | - | Active Grille Shutter LIN |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 25 | - | - | - | - |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | E124 | R | - | Acceleration power 1 |
| 29 30 | E237 E275 | W Br | - - | Acceleration signal 1 acceleratedly |
| 31 | E125 | R | - | Acceleration power 2 |
| 32 | E239 | W | - | Acceleration signal 2 |
| 33 | E236 | Br | - | quickly2 |
| 34 | E157 | W | - | Parking switch 1 |
| 35 | E154 | W | - | Parking switch 2 |
| 36 | H01a | W | - | Differential lock signal |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | P4S R | Motor Fan 2 Power - supply |
| 2 | P4H R | Motor fan 1 Power - supply |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | P4B R | Motor Fan 3 Power - supply |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | G01a R | - KL15-1 |
| 2 | G5Da R | - KL15-3 |
| 3 | G2H R | - T-GW B+1 |
| 4 | O420 R | - T-GW B+2 |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | G2A R | - EBS-KL15A |
I6_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 6
I7_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 7
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 27 28 | TH06b Y - - | Intelligent driving - CAN-H - - |
| 29 | BL01 G | - BCANFD1-L |
| 30 | PL04 G | Electric drive - |
| 31 | BL02 G | CAN4-L - BCANFD2-L |
| 32 | - - | - - |
| 33 | K223a G | Air conditioning - CAN-L |
| 34 | TL07 G | - GWCANFD7-L |
| 35 | TL08 G | - Chassis CAN8-L |
| 36 | TL06b G | Intelligent driving - CAN-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | AH01 Y | HMI Private CAN- - H |
| 3 | AL01 G | - HMI private CAN-L |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | - - | - - |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 9 | PH03 Y PL03 G | - PCAN3-H - PCAN3-L |
| 10 11 | - - - - | - - - - |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 14 | - - - - | - - - - |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | - - | - - |
| 19 | - - | - - |
| 20 | BH01 Y | - BCANFD1-H |
| 21 | PH04 Y | Electric drive - CAN4-H |
| 22 | BH02 Y | - BCANFD2-H |
| 23 | - - | - - |
| 24 | K222a Y | Air conditioning - CAN-H |
| 25 | TH07 Y | - GWCANFD7-H |
| 26 | TH08 Y | - Chassis CAN8-H |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | O71 Y | Trailer left turn - signal |
| 2 | O70 G | Trailer right turn - signal |
| 3 | O74 R | Turn signal - controller power + |
| 4 | B215 W | - DCDC3 Enable + |
| 5 | B501 W | - DCDC3 fault alarm |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
I8_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 8
I9_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 9
TL06b TH06b
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 8 | B216 | W | - | KL15 Power-on and power-off request |
| 9 | B201 | W | - | KL30 Power-on and power-off request |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | O62 | R | - | 12V car power supply |
| 19 | O318 | R | - | Position light |
| 20 | B224 | W | - | Right turn signal |
| 21 | B223 | W | - | Left turn signal |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | O419 | R | - | Horn power supply |
| 25 | O416 | R | - | AVAS power supply |
| 26 | - | - | - | - |
| 27 | - | - | - | - |
| 28 | O301 | R | - | Near left light |
| 29 | O302 | R | - | Right low light |
| 30 | O303 | R | - | Left high beam |
| 31 | O309 | R | - | Right high beam |
| 32 | - | - | - | - |
| 33 | O306 | R | - | Right DRL |
| 34 | - | - | - | - |
| 35 | O304 | R | - | Left DRL |
| 36 | O317 | R | - | ADS lamp |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- colo er | Voltag- Stitch definition r e |
|---|---|
| 1 Z14 Br | - Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z12 | Br | - | Ground |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- colo er | Voltag- Stitch definition r e |
|---|---|
| 1 - - | - - |
| 2 PH04d Y | - PCAN4-H |
| 3 R104a W | - Left tweeter - |
| 4 R103a W | - Left tweeter + |
| 5 U008 Br | - EPB switch - |
| 6 U023 W | EPB Switching - power supply |
| 7 U015 W | - EPB release switch |
| 8 U014 W | - EPB parking switch |
| 9 U603 W | Hang the EPB - indicator |
| 10 R107a W | - Left alto speaker + |
| 11 R108a W | - Left alto speaker - |
| 12 P116b R | Combination - switch - Shift -KL30 |
| 13 PL04d G | - PCAN4-L |
| 14 B326 W | Hazard alarm - switch light |
| 15 B524 W | Hazard warning - switch |
| 16 B314 W | Block the key work - indicator |
| 17 B519 W | Unlock the lock - switch |
| 18 U011 G | - EPB1 is linear 2 |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z13 | Br | - | Ground |
9.2.7 Instrument Harness
9.2.7.1 Instrument Harness Terminal Diagram
G14 Take the iron point 12
G15 Take the iron point 13
G16 Take the iron point 14
I1_IP_B Instrument harness to floor harness 1
20 R 20 R 20 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 19 | U012 | Y | - | EPB1 is linear 1 |
| 20 | U508 | Br | - | Hanging the EPB switch - |
| 21 | R229 | R | 12V | CDC sends 12V power to wake up the CAR screen |
| 22 | P314b | R | - | CAR screen power supply KL30 |
| 23 24 | B810 B809 | R W | - - | Bluetooth power for doorknob Doorknob |
| 25 | - | - | - | Bluetooth ID - |
| 26 | R201a | W | - | Ambient Light LIN |
| 27 | R116b | R | 12V | Ambient light 12V power supply |
| 28 | B424 | W | - | Sliding door switch |
| 29 | U523 | W | - | Hang up EPB switch + |
| 30 | P102 | R | - | KL15 Power supply + |
| 31 | R230 | R | 12V | IPC wakes up power supply 12V+ |
| 32 | BL06a | G | - | BCAN6-L |
| 33 | BH06a | Y | - | BCAN6-H |
| 34 | - | - | - | - |
| 35 | - | - | - | - |
| 36 | - | - | - | - |
| 37 | P304b | R | - | Bluetooth 、NFC Module B+ |
| 38 | U003 | W | - | Primary EPB indicator |
| 39 | R102a | W | - | Right tweeter - |
| 40 | R101a | W | - | Right tweeter + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 41 | R106a W | Right squawker/ - surround-sound speaker - |
| 42 | R105a W | Right squawker/ - surround-sound speaker + |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - - |
| 2 | TTN G | Ethernet sends - signals - |
| 3 | TTP Y | Ethernet sends - signal + |
| 4 | - - | - - |
| 5 | TH09a Y | - GWCANFD9-H |
| 6 | TRP Y | Ethernet received - signal + |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | TH04 Y | - GWCANFD4-H |
| 10 | TL04 G | - GWCANFD4-L |
| 11 | - - | - - |
| 12 | P305b R | - IPC screen B+ |
| 13 | IH01 Y | - INTCANFD1-H |
| 14 | IL01 G | - INTCANFD1-L |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | TL09a G | - GWCANFD9-L |
I2_IP_B Instrument harness to floor harness 2
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 17 TRN G | Ethernet received - signal - |
| 18 B522 W | Left window lift - switch |
| 19 B507 W | Left window drop - switch |
| 20 B521 W | Right window lift - switch |
| 21 B506 W | Right window drop - switch |
| 22 B520 W | Main drive visor lift - switch |
| 23 B404 W | Main drive shade - lowering switch |
| 24 K209 W | Temperature - sensor signal in front car |
| 25 K135d W | Front car - temperature sensor |
| 26 K138a R | Temperature sensor inside the 12V front car 12V power supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - | - | - | - |
| 2 | B510 | W | - | Clock spring - horn switch |
| 3 | U511 | W | - | Example Hang EPB Hall 2 |
| 4 | U512 | W | - | Example Hang EPB Hall 1 |
| 5 | BH05 | Y | - | ESCL-BCAN5-H |
| 6 | P316 | R | - | ESCL Power supply B+ |
| 7 | R213 | R | 12V | CDC sends 12V power to wake up IVI screen |
| 8 | B218 | W | - | Backlight + |
| 9 | B317e | R | 12V | Clock spring 12V power |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | U402 | G | - | Steering Angle internal CAN-L |
| 12 | U405 | Y | - | Steering Angle internal CAN-H |
| 13 | U412 | R | - | Steering Angle power supply |
| 14 | U409 | Br | - | Steering Angle ground |
| 15 | U514 | W | - | Suspending EPB release switch |
| 16 | BL05 | G | - | ESCL-BCAN5-L |
| 17 18 | P308 P313 | R R | - - | HUD-KL30+ IVI screen -KL30 |
| 19 20 | B401 B434 | W W | - - | Wash switch Wiper switch |
| 21 | B416 | Br | - | Left combination switch analog |
| 22 | B415 | W | - | Turn switch signal |
| 23 | B435 | W | - | Passing switch |
| 24 | O325 | W | - | Traction seat slip switch |
I3_IP_B Instrument harness to floor harness 3
22 G 20 R 22 Y 20 R
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Volt olor e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 25 | U515 | W - | Hanging EPB release switch |
| 26 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P314a | R - | Power KL30 |
| 2 | - | - - | - |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | Z13a | Br - | Ground |
| 5 | - | - - | - |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| 7 | - | - - | - |
| Stitch | Wire L numb- c er | ine Volt olor e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P313a | R - | IVI screen -KL30 |
| 2 | - | - - | - |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | Z13f | Br - | Ground |
| 5 | - | - - | - |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| 7 | - | - - | - |
| 8 | R213 | R 12 | CDC sends 12V V power to wake up IVI screen |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P305a | R - | IPC panel power B + |
| 2 | - | - - | - |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | Z13 | Br - | Ground |
| 5 | TH04 | Y - | GWCANFD4-H |
| 6 | TL04 | G - | GWCANFD4-L |
| 7 | - | - - | - |
| 8 | R230 | R 12 | CDC- Wake up V 12V power supply |
IP01 IVI screen
IP02 CAR screen
8 R229 R 12V CDC sends 12V power to wake up the CAR screen
IP03 IPC screen
20 R 20 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- colo er | Voltag- r e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | R107a W | - | Left alto speaker + |
| 2 | R108a W | - | Left alto speaker - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R103a W | - Left tweeter + |
| 2 | R104a W | - Left tweeter - |
| 22 R 22 Br 22 R |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | TH09 Y | - GWCANFD9-H |
| 2 | TL09 G | - GWCANFD9-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- colo er | Voltag- r e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P102k R | - | KL15 Power supply |
| 2 | Z14c Br | - | Ground |
| 3 | - - | - | - |
| 4 | - - | - | - |
| 5 | Z14d Br | - | Ground |
| 6 | P102j R | - | KL15 Power supply |
IP04 Left alto speaker
IP05 Etc ( electronic toll collection )
IP06 Left tweeter
IP07 CAN resistance A-120 Ω
IP08 OBD interface
| Stitch | Wire Li numb- co er | ne Voltag- lor e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - | - |
| 2 | - - | - | - |
| 3 | TRP Y | - | Ethernet received signal + |
| 4 | Z13g B | r - | Ground |
| 5 | Z13h B | r - | Ground |
| 6 | TH09a Y | - | GWCANFD9-H |
| 7 | - - | - | - |
| 8 | - - | - | - |
| 9 | - - | - | - |
| 10 | - - | - | - |
| 11 | TRN G | - | Ethernet received signal - |
| 12 | TTP Y | - | Ethernet sends signal + |
| 13 | TTN G | - | Ethernet sends signals - |
| 14 | TL09a G | - | GWCANFD9-L |
| 15 | - - | - | - |
| 16 | P304a R | - | B+ |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | B522 | W | - | Left window lift switch |
| 2 | B507 | W | - | Left window drop switch |
| 3 | B218c | W | - | Backlight PWM |
| 4 | Z12g | Br | - | Ground |
| 5 | B521 | W | - | Right window lift switch |
| 6 | B506 | W | - | Right window drop switch |
| 7 | O325 | W | - | Traction seat slip switch |
| 8 | B404 | W | - | Main drive shade lowering switch |
| 9 | B520 | W | - | Main drive visor lift switch |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 13 | - - | - - | - - | - - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | Z12g | Br | - | Ground |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire Li numb- co er | ne Voltag- lor e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z12a B | r - | Ground |
| 2 | B424 W | - | Sliding door switch |
| 3 | Z12b B | r - | Ground |
| 4 | B218e W | - | Backlight + |
IP09 Sliding door switch
IP10 Left center control switch
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | IH01d Y | - INTCANFD1-H |
| 2 | IL01d G | - INTCANFD1-L |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | IL01b G | - INTCANFD1-L |
| 2 | P102c R | - KL15 Power supply |
| 3 | P308 R | - HUD power KL30 |
| 4 | Z13d Br | - Ground |
| 5 | IH01b Y | - INTCANFD1-H |
| 6 | - - | - - |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | K138a R | 12V power supply 12V + |
| 2 | Z14b Br | - Ground |
| 3 | K209 W | - Temperature signal |
| 4 | K135d W | - sensorily |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U402 G | Steering Angle - internal CAN-L |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | - - | - - |
| 4 | U405 Y | Steering Angle - internal CAN-H |
IP11 CAN resistance B-120 Ω
IP12 Temperature sensor in front car
IP13 HUD
IP14 Steering Angle sensor
20 R
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 5 | U412 | R | Steering Angle - power supply |
| 6 | U409 | Br | Steering Angle - ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | er - - | - - |
| 2 | - - | - - |
| 3 | B317e R | 12V 12V+ |
| 4 | B218a W | - backlight |
| 5 | R201d W | - Ambient Light LIN |
| 6 | Z12e Br | - Ground |
| 7 | - - | - - |
| 8 | - - | - - |
| 9 | - - | - - |
| 10 | - - | - - |
| 11 | B510 W | - Horn switch |
| 12 | - - | - - |
| 13 | Z12f Br | - Ground |
| 14 | - - | - - |
| 15 | - - | - - |
| 16 | - - | - - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P304b | R | - Power B+ |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | - | - | - - |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| 5 | BH06a | Y | - BCAN6-H |
| 6 | BL06a | G | - BCAN6-L |
| 7 | Z14f | Br | - Ground |
| 8 | - | - | - - |
| 9 | B809 | W | - Door handle ID |
| 10 | B810 | R | Doorknob power - supply |
| 11 | - | - | - - |
| 12 | - | - | - - |
IP15 Bluetooth 、 NFC module
IP16 Clock-spring
IP17 Left combination switch
20 R 20 Br 20 Br
| Stitch | Wire Li numb- col er | ne Voltag- or e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | - - | - | - |
| 2 | - - | - | - |
| 3 | - - | - | - |
| 4 | - - | - | - |
| 5 | B435 W | - | Passing light/high beam switch |
| 6 | B401 W | - | Wash switch |
| 7 | B434 W | - | Wiper switch signal |
| 8 | - - | - | - |
| 9 | B416 B | r - | simulatively |
| 10 | B415 W | - | Left/right turn switch |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | BH05 | Y | - ESCL-BCAN5-H |
| 2 | - | - | - - |
| 3 | P316 | R | - Power B+ |
| 4 | BL05 | G | - ESCL-BCAN5-L |
| 5 | - | - | - - |
| 6 | Z14e | Br | - Ground |
| 20 R | |||
| Stitch | Wire Li numb- col er | ne Voltag- or e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | PH04d Y | - | PCAN4-H |
| 2 | PL04d G | - | PCAN4-L |
| 3 | P116b R | - | Power KL30 |
| 4 | - - | - | - |
| 5 | - - | - | - |
| 6 | - - | - | - |
| 7 | - - | - | - |
| 8 | Z12d B | r - | Ground |
| 9 | P102a R | - | Power supply KL15 |
| 10 | - - | - | - |
| 11 | - - | - | - |
| 12 | - - | - | - |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | BH05 | Y | - ESCL-BCAN5-H |
| 2 | BL05 | G | - ESCL-BCAN5-L |
IP18 Shift switch
IP19 ESCL
IP20 CAN resistance C-120 Ω
20 Br 22 Y
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 19 | U514 W | Main EPB parking - is always open |
| 20 | - - | - - |
| 21 | U014 W | Main EPB parking - |
| 22 | - - | is always open - - |
| 23 | - - | - - |
| 24 | U015 W | The primary EPB is - released normally |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | U023 W | Example Suspend - the EPB switch + |
| 2 | U523 W | Primary EPB - switch + |
| 3 | B218d W | - Key backlight + |
| 4 | U603 W | Hang the EPB - indicator |
| 5 | Z12c Br | - Key backlight - |
| 6 | U008 Br | - Ground |
| 7 | U011 W | - Master EPB Hall 2 |
| 8 | U012 W | - Main EPB Hall 1 |
| 9 | U511 W | Example Hang - EPB Hall 2 |
| 10 | U003 W | Primary EPB - indicator |
| 11 | U512 W | Example Hang - EPB Hall 1 |
| 12 | U508 Br | - Ground |
| 13 | B314 W | - Lockout light |
| 14 | B524 W | Hazard warning - lamps switch message |
| 15 | B519 W | Door lock switch - letter |
| 16 | B326 W | Hazard warning - lamps |
| 17 | - - | - - |
| 18 | U515 W | Main EPB brake is - normally closed |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R116b R | Ambient light 12V 12V power supply |
| 2 | R201a W | - Ambient Light LIN |
| 3 | Z14a Br | - Ground |
| 4 | - - | - - |
IP21 Right center control switch
IP22 Ambient light 1
IP23 Right tweeter
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R101a W | - Right tweeter + |
| 2 | R102a W | - Right tweeter - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | R105a W | - Right squawker + |
| 2 | R106a W | - Right squawker - |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | BH06 Y | - BCAN6-H |
| 2 | BL06 G | - BCAN6-L |
IP24 Right squawker
IP25 CAN resistance D-120 Ω
22 Y 22 G
| 1 | PH02g | Y | - | Battery PCAN2-H |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | PL02g | G | - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line V color | oltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O415d | R | BMS Power Supply - B+ |
| 2 | PH02 | Y | - Battery PCAN2-H |
| 3 | - | - | - - |
| 4 | - | - | - - |
| 5 | - | - | - - |
| 6 | - | - | - - |
| 7 | PL02 | G | - Battery PCAN2-L |
| 8 | - | - | - - |
| 9 | - | - | - - |
| 10 | - | - | - - |
| 11 | - | - | - - |
| 12 | - | - | - - |
| 13 | - | - | - - |
| 14 | - | - | - - |
| 15 | Z57 | Br | - BMS ground |
| 16 | E147a | W | - Wake up power |
| 17 | E139d | W | Thermal runaway - signal |
| 18 | - | - | - - |
| 19 | - | - | - - |
| 20 | - | - | - - |
9.2.8 Right Battery Pack Cable Harness
9.2.8.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram of the Right Battery Pack
I1_RP_C Right battery pack wiring harness chassis wiring harness 1
RP06 CAN resistance -120 Ω
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
| 1 O415a R | - Power B+ |
|---|---|
| 2 E119a W | - Wake up power |
| 3 - - | - - |
| 4 - - | - - |
| 5 E139a W | Thermal runaway - signal |
| 6 PH02a Y | - Battery PCAN2-H |
| 7 Z57 Br | - Ground |
| 8 - - | - - |
| 9 - - | - - |
| 10 - - | - - |
| 11 - - | - - |
| 12 PL02a G | - Battery PCAN2-L |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Volt color e | ag- Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O415 | R - | BMS Power Supply B+ |
| 2 | PH02 | Y - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 3 | - | - - | - |
| 4 | - | - - | - |
| 5 | - | - - | - |
| 6 | - | - - | - |
| 7 | PL02 | G - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| 8 | - | - - | - |
| 9 | - | - - | - |
| 10 | - | - - | - |
| 11 | - | - - | - |
| 12 13 | - - | - - - - | - - |
| 14 | PH021 | Y - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 15 | Z57 | Br - | BMS ground |
| 16 | E119 | W - | Wake up power |
| 17 | E139d | W - | Thermal runaway signal |
| 18 | - | - - | - |
| 19 | PL021 | G - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| 20 | - | - - | - |
| Wire Line Stitch numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|
| 1 O415b R | - Power B+ |
| 2 E119b W | - Wake up power |
9.2.9 Cable Harness for the Left Battery Pack
9.2.9.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram of the Left Battery Pack
I1_LP_C Connect the left battery pack wiring harness to chassis wiring harness 1
LP01 Upper left battery pack 1
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition
LP02 Lower left battery pack 2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | E139b | W | - | Thermal runaway signal |
| 6 | PH02b | Y | - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 7 | Z57 | Br | - | Ground |
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | - | - | - | - |
| 11 | Z57 | Br | - | Identification ground |
| 12 | PL02b | G | - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | PH02c | Y | - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 2 | PH021 | Y | - | Battery PCAN2-H |
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | - | - | - | - |
| 5 | PL02c | G | - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| 6 | PL021 | G | - | Battery PCAN2-L |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | - | - | - | - |
LP07 CAN short-circuiter A
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | P107 | R | - | Seat power B+ |
| 2 | B423 | W | - | Off seat switch signal |
| 3 | - | - | - | - |
| 4 | G5D | R | - | The ECU is enabled |
| 5 | - | - | - | - |
| 6 | - | - | - | - |
| 7 | - | - | - | - |
| 8 | Z35 | Br | - | Ground |
| 9 | - | - | - | - |
| 10 | B425 | W | - | Seat belt signal |
| 11 | - | - | - | - |
| 12 | - | - | - | - |
| 13 | - | - | - | - |
| 14 | - | - | - | - |
| 15 | - | - | - | - |
| 16 | - | - | - | - |
| 17 | - | - | - | - |
| 18 | - | - | - | - |
| 19 | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | - | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | - | - | - |
| 22 | - | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | - | - | - |
| 24 | - | - | - | - |
| 1 | B423 | W | - Off seat switch + |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | Z35 | Br | - Off seat switch - |
| 3 | P107 | R | - Seat ECU+ |
| 4 | Z35 | Br | - Seat ECU- |
| 5 | G5D | R | - ECU-KL15 |
| 6 | B425 | W | - Seat belt signal + |
| 7 | Z35 | Br | - Seat belt signal - |
| 8 | - | - | - - |
| 9 | - | - | - - |
9.2.10 Seat Wiring Harness
9.2.10.1 Seat Harness Terminal Diagram
I_S_B Seat harness connects to floor harness
S01 Seat
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition 16 R 16 Br 16 R 16Br 20 Br 20Br 20 R
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 001 R | - Power source |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 001 R | - Power source |
9.2.11 Left Battery Positive Cable Harness
9.2.11.1 Left Battery Positive Harness Terminal Diagram
BE01 Electrical box T1
BE12 Battery positive electrode
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z20 | Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z20 | Br | - | Ground |
9.2.12 Cable Harness of the Left Battery Negative Terminal
9.2.12.1 Left Battery Negative Harness Terminal Diagram
BE02 Battery negative electrode
G17 Undercarriage
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Q04B | R | - | Power source |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Q04B | R | - | Power source |
9.2.13 Smart Electrical Box Wiring Harness
9.2.13.1 Wiring Harness Terminal Diagram of the Smart Electrical Box
BE10 Electrical Box T3
BE11 Electrical box T1
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | O04 | R | DCDC1 power - supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | L20b | R | DC/DC2 power - supply |
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line Vo color | ltag- Stitch definition e |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | L20 | R | DC/DC2 power - supply |
9.2.14 DC-DC Positive Cable Bundle 1
9.2.14.1 DC-DC Positive Harness 1 Terminal Diagram
BE07 Electrical box T2
Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition 1 O04 R - DCDC1 power supply
BE08 DCDC2+
BE09 DCDC1+
I1_BE_B DCDC positive wire harness connects to floor wire harness 1
I2_BE_B DCDC positive wire harness connects to floor wire harness 2
| Stitch | Wire numb- er | Line color | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | L20a | R | - | DC/DC2 power supply |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z22 Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z22 Br | - | Ground |
9.2.15 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 1
9.2.15.1 DC-DC Negative Harness 1 Terminal Diagram
BE04 DCDC1 negative electrode
G21 Undercarriage
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z22 Br | - | Ground |
| Stitch | Wire Line numb- color er | Voltag- e | Stitch definition |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Z22 Br | - | Ground |
9.2.16 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 2
9.2.16.1 DC-DC Negative Harness 2 Terminal Diagram
BE03 DCDC2 negative electrode
G20 Undercarriage
9.3 Position of Cable Harness and Connector
9.3.1 Top Cover Wiring Harness
9.3.1.1 Cable Harness Layout For the Top Cover
20 W 20 Br
9.3.2 Left Ceiling Harness
9.3.2.1 Cable Harness Layout For the Left Ceiling
16 R 20 R 20 R 20 R 16 R 20 Br
9.3.3 Right Ceiling Harness
9.3.3.1 Right Ceiling Cable Harness Layout Diagram
9.3.4 Bumper Harness
9.3.4.1 Bumper Harness Layout
20 W 20 Br 20 R 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 R
9.3.5 Floor Wiring Harness
9.3.5.1 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram
10 Br 14 R 14 Br 16 R 16 Br 16 R
9.3.5.2 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued
14 Br
9.3.5.3 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 1
20 R 12 R 14 R 12 R 12 R
9.3.5.4 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 2
M8 L22 R 4 M8 Q02A R 6 Q02B R 6 B201 16 20 R 2385337-1(black)-TE Left view 270- Floor 20 R 2326910-4(purple)-TE Oms-floor adapter Z03 12 Br
9.3.5.5 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 3
10 Br 12 Br 20 R 20 Br 20 R 20 R 20 R
9.3.5.6 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 4
12 R 12 R 14 R 14 R 20 R 20 R 20 Br 14 Br
9.3.5.7 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 5
20 W 20 R
9.3.5.8 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 6
20 Br 16 R 16 R 14 R 14 R 2 O4152
9.3.5.9 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 7
20 R 20 R
9.3.6 Chassis Wiring Harness
9.3.6.1 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout
9.3.6.2 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued
B331a B332a Z600 10W Z56 16Br Z61014Br 20W 20W 20W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W
9.3.6.3 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 1
9.3.6.4 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 2
20 W
9.3.6.5 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 3
9.3.6.6 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 4
29 U910 TL06b TH06b 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 R 20 Br 20 Br 20 W
9.3.7 Instrument Harness 9.3.7.1 Instrument Wiring Harness Layout
20 R 20 R 20 R 20 R 20 R
9.3.7.2 Instrument Wiring Harness Layout Continued
20 R 20 Br 20 R
9.3.8 Right Battery Pack Cable Harness
9.3.8.1 Cable Harness Layout For the Right Battery Pack
9.3.9 Cable Harness for the Left Battery Pack
9.3.9.1 Cable Harness Layout of the Left Battery Pack
9.3.10 Seat Wiring Harness
9.3.10.1 Seat Cable Harness Layout
16 R 16 Br